12 Plex O&m (Definitive Edition)

12 Plex Housing
Phase I
Operation &
Maintenance
Manuals
Eterna S.A de C.V
Soto Cano Air Base
Honduras, Central America
May 2021
12 Plex Housing Phase I
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Introduction
The purpose of the procedures outlined in this manual is to provide an adequate and effective
maintenance and operations management practices and standards for 12 Plex Phase I Housing. The
procedures outlined in this manual will provide a clear guideline to be able to practice the correct
management of 12 Plex Phase I. It is intended that thru this manual we can provide maintenance
and operation structures capable of dealing with challenges that could be found in the renovations
of the facilities and equipment.
Project Description
12 Plex Housing is a tow-floor levels building with an area of approximately 800 square meters.
Consist of 12 single occupancy rooms, a toilet and shower room for each room.
Each Floor is distributed in six separate rooms with a closet room and private bathroom, a
mechanical room and an electric room. The construction consists of a slab on grade, reinforced
concrete masonry unit (CMU) exterior and interior walls, and insulated standing seam roofing
system over steel structural deck and supports. The building includes a fire alarm system.
Table of Content
Cover Page ...................................................................................................................................... 1

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 3
Project Scope .................................................................................................................................. 3
Table of Content .............................................................................................................................4
2. Division 08- Section 08 71 00- Door Hardware ..................................................................... 9

Door Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 10
Window Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Door Location 12 Plex Housing Phase I ................................................................ 12
2.2 Hardware Schedule, SPEC 1.3 ................................................................................15
2.3 Hinges, SPEC 2.2.1 ................................................................................................... 17
Stanley 5 Knuckle Full Mortise Hinge FBB199 (32D)
Stanley 5 Knuckle Full Mortise Hinge FBB179
2.4 Locks and Latches, SPEC 2.2.4 ............................................................................... 20
Kaba Simplex 8100
CL500 Mechanical CL550
Best 9K Series Cylindrical Lock
2.5 Door Closer, SPEC 2.2.6 ........................................................................................... 26
Stanley QDC 100 Doors Closer
2.6 Door Protection Plates, SPEC 2.2.7 ........................................................................ 29
Rockwood K1050- Metal Kick Plate US32D/630
2.7 Thresholds, SPEC 2.2.9............................................................................................. 31
National Guard Products ADA Compliant Bumper Seal
2.8 Rain Drip, SPEC 2.2.11 ........................................................................................... 33
National Guard Products Rain Drip Guard 17
2.9 Weather-stripping, SPEC 2.2.10 ............................................................................ 35
National Guard Products Silicone Dense Bulb Seal 160 S
2.10 Floor and Wall Stop, SPEC 2.2.8.......................................................................... 37
Rockwood 442- High Dome Stop US26D/626
3. Division 09- Finishes ................................................................................................................ 41
Gypsum Board and Cementitious Board Maintenance.............................................. 42

Porcelain and Ceramic Tile Maintenance .................................................................... 43
Paints and Coating Maintenance .................................................................................. 44
3.1 General Purpose Gypsum Board, SPEC 2.1.1 ....................................................... 45
Continental Building Products, General Purpose Drywall
Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board, SPEC 2.1.2
Continental Building Products, Moisture- Mold- And
Mildew Resistant interior Drywall
3.2 Ceramic Floor Tile SPEC 2.1 .................................................................................. 48
Castle-Gate Floor Tile Beige CG15
3.3 Ceramic Wall Tile SPEC 2.1.1 ................................................................................ 51
Castle-Gate Wall Tile Biscuit 0091 (1)
3.4 USG Acoustical Ceiling Panel, SPEC 2.2 ............................................................. 54
USG Ceiling Solutions, USG Radar Basic Acoustical
Panels 2110 ME2110
3.5 USG Acoustical Suspension System SPEC 2.3 ....................................................... 57
USG Ceiling Solutions, USG Donn Brand DX/DXL
Acoustical Suspension System
3.6 Paint and Base Paint ................................................................................................. 63
Sherwin Williams Paints and Base Paints
4. Division 10 28 13 – Toilet Accessories .................................................................................. 73
4.1 Paper Towel Dispenser, SPEC 2.2.10 .................................................................... 74

-ASI American Specialties, INC. Surface Mounted
Roll Paper Towel Dispenser
4.2 Double Robe Hook, SPEC 2.2 ................................................................................ 76
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Double Robe Hook
4.3 Surface Mounted Shelf, SPEC 2.2 ......................................................................... 78
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Surface Mounted
Shelf
4.4 Channel Frame Mirror, SPEC 2.2.2 ..................................................................... 80
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Channel Frame Mirror
4.5 Vinyl Shower Curtain, SPEC 2.2.4 ...................................................................... 82
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Vinyl Shower Curtain
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Shower Curtain Rod
With Concealed, SPEC 2.2.5
4.6 Shower Mounted Towel Shelf, SPEC 2.2.8.......................................................... 84
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Surface Mounted ……………………….
Towel Shelf with Drying Rod and Support Brackets
4.7 Soap Dish With Drain Holes, SPEC 2.2.7 ............................................................. 86
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Soap Dish with
Drain Holes
5. Division 21 – Fire Suppression System ................................................................................ 90
Operation and Maintenance Manual: Fire Suppression System .............................91
6. Division 22 – Plumbing.......................................................................................................... 100

6.1 Siphonic Dual Flush Elongated Toilet, SPEC 2.4.3............................................. 102
-American Standard H2Option Siphonic Dual Flush Elongated Toilet
6.2 Toilet Seat, SPEC 2.4 .............................................................................................. 104
-American Standard Commercial Toilet Seat 5901
6.3 Single Control Lavatory Faucet, SPEC 2.4.1 ....................................................... 106
-American Standard Reliant 3, Single Control Lavatory Faucet
6.4 Wall Hung Lavatory, SPEC 2.4.1 ......................................................................... 109
-American Standard Lucerne Wall Hung Lavatory 0.355.012
6.5 Semi Cast Grid Patent, SPEC 2.4.1 ...................................................................... 112
-DB Dearborn Semi-cast Grid Patent Overflow Plugs Technical Specification
760-1
6.6 Wall Mount Concealed, SPEC 2.4.1..................................................................... 114
-JOSAM Company Wall Mount Concealed Series 17120
6.7 Single Bowl Top Mount Sink, SPEC 2.4.4........................................................... 116
-Omni Pro, Stainless Steel 25” x 22” x 8- 1/16” Single Bowl Top Mount Sink
Model OM2522-8-3
6.8 Sink Strainer, SPEC2.4.4 ....................................................................................... 118
- MATCO-NORCA Sink Strainer SS-111
6.9 Single Handle Kitchen Faucet, SPEC2.4.4 ........................................................... 120
-Omni Pro OPB-100C 8” single Handle Kitchen Faucet
6.10 Floor Drains, 2.6.1 ................................................................................................ 123
- JOSAM Company Floor Drain 30002 Series
- JOSAM Company Floor Drain S Series Type 55
- JOSAM Company Floor Drain “A” Series Type 5A
6.11 Shower Faucet 2.6.2 .............................................................................................. 127
-Delta, Tub and Shower Faucet Shower Only T13220 Series
6.12 Wall Cleanout ....................................................................................................... 129
- JOSAM Company, Cleanouts 58600-COT Series
6.13 Floor Cleanout ...................................................................................................... 131
- JOSAM Company, Cleanouts 55002 Series
6.13 Water Heater, SPEC 2.8 ...................................................................................... 133
-Rheem Commercial Electric Water Heater
7. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning ................................................. 158
7.1 Service Labeling....................................................................................................... 159

7.2 Ceiling Exhaust Fans SPEC 2.9.1.1 ....................................................................... 163
- GreenHeck Centrifugal Ceiling Exhaust Model SP-B90
and Inline Cabinet Fans
7.3 Single Zone Inverter Mini Split Cooling SPEC 2.9.2 ..........................................172
-Lennox Single Zone Inverter Mini Split Cooling Only / LI012CO-160P432-1 -
LI012CI-160P432
8. Division 26 – Electrical ........................................................................................................... 219
8. A Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Package for

General Electrical System .......................................................................................................... 222
8. B Division 26 12 19.10- Three Phase Pad Mounted Transformer ................................... 226

Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformer
-General Electric Prolec Three Phase Pad-Mounted
Transformer
8. C Division 26 20 00- Interior Distribution System .............................................................229
8.1 Conductor Material Spec 2.5 ................................................................................. 229
- SIMpull THHN Copper THHN Wire & cable
8.2 Disconnect Switch 30 AMP Spec 2.8.2 .................................................................. 232
- General Electric Safety Switches Heavy Duty,
Type TH (30 Amp)
- General Electric Safety Switches Heavy Duty,
Type TH (60 Amp)
8.3 Metering, Spec 2.18 ................................................................................................ 241
-Circutor Power Analyzers for panel CVM-C10
8.4 GFCI Receptacle, SPEC 2.9.2 (20 Amps) ............................................................. 339
- Leviton GFNT 2-RI GFCI Receptacle
8.5 Receptacles, SPEC 2.9 ............................................................................................. 347
- Leviton 16362-I Receptacle (20 Amp)
8.6 Toggle Switches, SPEC 2.8.1 .................................................................................. 350
- Leviton 1221-21 Single- Pole Toggle Switch (20 Amp)
8.7 Weatherproof Metallic Cover SPEC 2.9.1 .......................................................... 353
- Red Dot CKMUV Single Gang Cover
8. D Division 26 51 00- Interior Lighting ................................................................................. 356
8.8 Ceiling Fan Fixtures Type F Spec. 2.1 Luminaires ............................................ 356
Hunter Dempsey Ceiling Fan Assembly Parts
Hunter Dempsey Ceiling Fan Installation Manual
Hunter Dempsey Ceiling Fan Safety Data Sheet
8.9 Lighting Type A Spec 2.2 Luminaires ................................................................. 381
Lumination LED Luminaires RX series Specifications
Lumination LED Luminaires RX series Installation Manual
Lumination LED Luminaires RLX series
8.10 Lighting Type B and C, Spec. 2.2 Luminaires ..................................................397
Lithonia Lighting BLWP 2ánd 4´
8.11 Lighting Type WL, Spec. 2.2 Luminaires ......................................................... 411
WDGE1 LED Architectural Wall Sconce Installation Manual
8.12 Light Fixture Set Installation under Cabinet ................................................... 416
Commercial Electric TM. Light Fixture Set Installation under cabinet.
8.13 Photocell Switch, Spec 3.1.6 ................................................................................. 426
Photo Control Model #K4121 C Specifications
Photo Control Model #K4121 C Specifications
8.14 Lighting Contactor ............................................................................................... 433
General Electric CR360L Electrically Held Contactors
9. Division 27 – Communications .............................................................................................. 436
9.1 Jack Connector, SPEC 2.5.1 ................................................................................. 437

-Belden, AX101326 Modular Connectors-CAT6+
Modular Jack- Key Connect
9.2 Patch Panel, SPEC 2.4.4 ........................................................................................ 441
- NEWLINK NEW-27777XX Patch Panel
9.3 UTP Cable, SPEC 2.3.1.1 ........................................................................................ 444
-NEWLINK NEW-980634X CAT-6 CMR 23 AWG 4-pair UTP Cable
9.4 Wall Plate, SPEC 2.5.2 ............................................................................................448
- Leviton Single-Gang QuickPort Wall-plates 41080-xxP
9.5 Coaxial Module Connector, SPEC 2.1.2 ............................................................... 451
-ICC Module, F-Type, Nickel Plated IC107B5FXX
9.6 Coaxial Cable, SPEC 2.1.1 ..................................................................................... 454
- MoCSY Broadband Coaxial Drop Cable A6QS-BVV-BOX
9.7 Coaxial Type F Connector, SPEC 2.1.2 ................................................................ 456
- MULTICOM Coaxial Type F Connector PPC EX6 Plus
10. Division 28 31 76 – Fire Alarm Control and Mass Notification Panel .......................... 458
10.1 Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Control

Unit SPEC 2.11 ..................................................................................................... 460
- Silent Knight Fire Alarm Control and Mass
Notification Panel 6820 EVS
10.2 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panel SPEC 2.18.1 ...................................... 646
- Monaco Radio Transmitter and Interface Panel BT-XF
- Federal Signal Radio Transmitter and Interface UVRIH
10.3 Batteries SPEC 2.10.1 ........................................................................................... 716
- Batteries Power Sonic PS-12350
10.4 Smoke Sensor .........................................................................................................719
- Silent Knight Smoke Detectors SK-Photo
- Silent Knight Low Frequency Sounder Base BS200- LF
10.5 Addressable Interface Device SPEC 2.6 ............................................................. 724
- Silent Knight Monitor Module SK-MONITOR
10.6 Local Operating Console (LOC) SPEC 2.11 ...................................................... 727
- Silent Knight Local Operator Console Panel EVS-LOC
10.7 Amplifier, Pre-Amplifier, Tone Generators SPEC 2.12 ................................. 731
- Silent Knight Amplifier EVS-INT50W
10.8 Fire Alarm/ Mass Notification Speakers SPEC 2.15.1 ..................................... 736
-System Sensor Ceiling Mounts Speaker Amber Strobe S
PSCWL-CLR-ALERT
- System Sensor Wall Mount Speaker SPRK
10.9 Visual Notification Appliances SPEC 2.15.2 ...................................................... 745
- Silent Knight Mount Back-box SB-I/O SURFACE
-System Sensor Ceiling Mount Clear Strobe SCRL
10.10 Manual Station SPEC 2.14 ................................................................................ 748
- Silent Knight Manual Station SK-PULL-DA
10.11 Surge Protector SPEC 2.5 .................................................................................. 751
- Ditek Surge Protector DTK-120HW
- Ditek Surge Protector DTK-TSS3
-Ditek Voice, Data and Signaling Circuit Modular Surge
Protection DTK-2MHLP
10.12 Wiring SPEC 2.19 ............................................................................................... 757
-Wiring 2x14 AWG Unshielded FPLR for NAC CON
666596
-Wiring 2x16 AWG Unshielded FPLR for Speaker and
SLC CON 666581
10.13 Boxes and Cover Plates SPEC 3.6 ………………………………………….760-
Garvin Red Boxes and Cover Plates 52181-RED, 52171-RED,
52C1-RED
11. Division 41 22 13.14 Material Processing and Handling Equipment…………….…...765
11.1 CF Hand Chain Hoist…………………………………………………………..745
-Harrington CF Hand Chain Hoist (5 Ton)
12. Appendixes ……………………………………………………………………………..769

Appendix A: Roof Warranty ……………………………………………………..770
Appendix B: Catalog Number of Installed Equipment …………………………...772
Appendix C: Maintenance Schedule Log ………………………………………...774
Appendix D: Warranties ………………………………………………………….776
Appendix E: Points of Contact for Warranty Calls ……….……………………...787
2. Division 08- Section 08 71 00-Door Hardware
Content
2.1 Door Location 12 Plex Housing Phase I
2.2 Hardware Schedule, SPEC 1.3
2.3 Hinges, SPEC 2.2.1
- Stanley 5 Knuckle Full Mortise Hinge FBB199(32D)
- Stanley 5 Knuckle Full Mortise Hinge FBB179
2.4 Locks and Latches, SPEC 2.2.4
- Kaba Simplex 8100
- CL500 Mechanical CL550
- Best 9K Series Cylindrical Lock
2.5 Door Closer, SPEC 2.2.6
- Stanley QDC 100 Door Closer
2.6 Door Protection Plates, SPEC 2.2.7
- Rockwood K1050- Metal Kick Plate US32D/630
2.7 Thresholds, SPEC 2.2.9
- National Guard Products ADA Compliant Bumper Seal Threshold
2.8 Rain Drip, SPEC 2.2.11
- National Guard Products Rain Drip Guard 17
2.9 Weather-stripping, SPEC 2.2.10
- National Guard Products Silicone Dense Bulb Seal 160 S
2.10 Floor and Wall Stop , SPEC 2.2.8
- Rockwood 442- High Dome Stop US26D/626
Door Maintenance
The following items should be periodically checked. The frequency with which these checks are
performed must be established at the discretion of the building owner. Since doors in different
areas of a building access service different traffic, the frequency of periodic inspections would
occur respectively.
1. Hinges: Check all hinges for loose attaching screws, hinge pin wear or other notable
defects. Service the hinges or remove defective parts and replace per the manufacturer’s
recommendations. The door should always swing freely and smoothly without
obstruction from the opened to latched (when latching device is used) position.
2. Locksets and Panic Devices: Check all locksets for loose attaching screws, latch wear or
other notable defects. Service the lockset or remove defective parts and replace per the
manufacturer’s recommendations. The door should always latch freely and smoothly
without obstruction. Self-latching devices should always function freely and smoothly
as the door swings into the closed position. Additional force should not be needed to
achieve latching. Silencers (mutes) should be replaced when latch operation is
compromised by wear.
3. Door and Frame Finish: A general visual inspection of the door and frame finish should
be periodically conducted. Any excessive finish defects should be repaired and
repainted. Adequate protection is needed to help prevent the product from rusting
prematurely and shortening its service life.
4. Gasketing/weather-stripping: A visual and operational inspection is periodically
necessary for gasket or weather-stripped areas such as perimeter seals, threshold seals,
door bottoms, etc. Inspect for signs of deterioration such as splitting, cracking, or
deforming of flexible components. Install replacement components as needed.
Window Maintenance
Regular supervision of the elements is of major importance. Any possible irregularities in the
operation (slowness, unusual sounds) which might occur during maintenance must be reported
immediately to the concerned specialist. Windows should undergo regular maintenance to
prolong their service life and to ensure their functionality and the conservation of value.
1. Remove the dust, grease and graphite annually from the following areas. Clean
hardware exclusively with a soft cloth and mild, pH-neutral cleaning materials in
diluted form.
2. Avoid silicon lubricants, rather use a dry cloth and fitting oil to protect the surface and
prevent dust collection on the hardware parts.
3. Never use aggressive acidifiers cleaning materials or scouring agents. These can cause
damage to the hardware.
2.1
Door Location
Name of Product Brand Code Item

N/A N/A N/A
1 1
1 2 2 2 2 1
4 4
4 4
1 2 2 2 2 1
1 1
1st PLAN- DOOR LOCATION

ESC: 1:125
1 1
1 2 2 2 2 1
4 4
4 4
1 2 2 2 2 1
1 1
2nd PLAN- DOOR LOCATION

ESC: 1:125
2.2 Hardware Schedule, SPEC 1.3

N/A N/A N/A
Item #1, Spec, 1.3
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
12 Plex Housing Phase I
W91278‐19‐F‐0312
Set Door # Hardware Item Quantity Size Reference Finish Mfr Name BHMA Finish
Hinges 36 4.5" x 4.5" FBB199 NRP Satin SS STANLEY US32D

Mortise Pushbutton Lockset 12 3‐ 1/8" x 7 ‐3/8" 8146 Satin chrome plated KABA 26D
Door Closer 12 ‐‐‐‐‐‐ QDC111 Aluminum Painted STANLEY US65
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Kick Plate 12 8" x 34" K1050 Satin SS ROCKWOOD US32D
1 21, 22, 23, 24, Aluminum Bumper Seal Threshold 12 5"x 1/2" x 36" 896N Satin aluminum, MILL NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCT US28
25, 26 Rain Drip 12 35" 17 Satin aluminum, MILL NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCT US28
Weatherstrip 12 17' 160SA Aluminum, clear coated NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCT US92
Floor Stop 12 1 7/8" x 1/4"h 440 Satin nickel plated ROCKWOOD US15
Door Silencers 36 1/2" x 5/8" 608A Gray ROCKWOOD ‐‐‐‐‐‐‐

Mortise Pushbutton Lockset 2 1‐7/8" x 6‐ 3/16" CL550 Satin SS CODELOCKS US32D
Kick Plate 2 8" x 34" K1050 Satin SS ROCKWOOD US32D
2 19, 39
Aluminum Bumper Seal Threshold 2 5"x 1/2" x 36" 896N Satin aluminum, MILL NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCT US28
Wall Stop 2 2 1/2" 409 Satin chrome plated ROCKWOOD US26D

Mortise Pushbutton Lockset 2 1‐7/8" x 6‐ 3/16" CL550 Satin SS CODELOCKS US32D
Kick Plate 2 8" x 34" K1050 Satin SS ROCKWOOD US32D
3 20, 40 Aluminum Bumper Seal Threshold 2 5"x 1/2" x 72" 896N Satin aluminum, MILL NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCT US28
Manual Flush Bolt 4 1" x 6 3/4" 555 Satin chrome plated ROCKWOOD US26D
Floor Stop 4 1 7/8" x 1/4"h 440 Satin chrome plated ROCKWOOD US26D
Hinges 18 4.5" x 4.5" FBB179 Satin chrome plated STANLEY US26D

8, 10, 12, 14, Cylindrical Lockset 6 3 1/2" 9K3‐0L15DS3 Satin chrome plated BEST US26D
4 16, 18, 28, 30, Mop Plate 6 4" x 31" K1050 Satin SS ROCKWOOD US32D
32, 34, 36, 38 Floor Stop 6 1 7/8" x 1/2"h 442 Satin chrome plated ROCKWOOD US26D
Hinges 18 4.5" x 4.5" FBB179 Satin chrome plated STANLEY US26D

7, 9, 11, 13,
Cylindrical Lockset 6 3 1/2" 9K3‐0N15DS3 Satin chrome plated BEST US26D
5 15, 17, 27, 29,
Wall Stop 6 2 1/2" 409 Satin chrome plated ROCKWOOD US26D
31, 33, 35, 37
2.3 Hinges, SPEC 2.2.1

Hinge, SPEC 2.2 1 Stanley FBB199(32D)
Hinge, SPEC 2.2.1 Stanley FBB179
Item # 2, Spec 2.2.1
5 KNUCKLE FULL MORTISE HINGES
STANLEY ARCHITECTURAL HIARDWARE

Heavy Weight Ball Bearing
FBB168 – (ANSI A8111) Steel – polished and plated or phosphated and prime coated for painting
FBB199 – (ANSI A2111) Brass or bronze – polished and plated or painted
FBB199 (32) – (ANSI A5111) Stainless steel – highly polished
FBB199 (32D) – (ANSI A5111) Stainless steel – satin finish For exterior doors
• For use on heavy doors or doors where high frequency is expected such as entrance doors to office buildings,
stores, public buildings and corridor entrance doors to offices
• All hinges have template screw hole location for use on either wood or hollow metal doors and frames
• Equipped with four Stanley permanently lubricated non-detachable ball bearings
• Pins in non-ferrous hinges are stainless steel
• Hole in bottom tip for easy pin removal
• Reversible flush tips and pins
• Hinges can be furnished as follows:
with raised barrel (RB)
with electric wires and/or switches (CE and/or CS)
with hospital tips (HT)
with decorative tips
with security studs
with non-removable pins (NRP)
Size Open Gauge Flat Head Screws Quantity Quantity Case Weight
of Metal Per Piece Per Box Per Case Bronze Steel
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Machine Wood Lbs. (Kg) Lbs. (Kg)
41/2 X 41/2 (114 X 114) .180 (4.6) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 8 -12 X 11/4 3 EA. 30 EA. 45 (21) 42 (19)
5 X 41/2 (127 X 114) .190 (4.8) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 8 -12 X 11/2 3 EA. 24 EA. 46 (21) 40 (18)
5X5 (127 X 127) .190 (4.8) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 8 -12 X 11/2 3 EA. 24 EA. 50 (23) 46 (21)
6 X 41/2 (152 X 114) .203 (5.2) 10 - 1/4 -20 X 1/2 10 -14 X 11/2 3 EA. 24 EA. 63 (29) 53 (24)
6X5 (152 X 127) .203 (5.2) 10 - 1/4 -20 X 1/2 10 -14 X 11/2 3 EA. 24 EA. 65 (30) 55 (25)
6X6 (152 X 152) .203 (5.2) 10 - 1/4 -20 X 1/2 10 -14 X 11/2 3 EA. 24 EA. 76 (35) 61 (28)
8 X 6* (203 X 152) .203 (5.2) 16 - 1/4 -20 X 1/2 16 -14 X 11/2 3 EA. 12 EA. 57 (26) 51 (23)
8 X 8* (203 X 203) .203 (5.2) 16 - 1/4 -20 X 1/2 16 -14 X 11/2 3 EA. 12 EA. 68 (31) 61 (28)
*Available in Steel only
Consult factory for other sizes not listed
E H I N G E S 5
5 KNUCKLE FULL MORTISE HINGES
STANLEY ARCHITECTURAL HIARDWARE
Standard Weight Ball Bearing
FBB179 – (ANSI A8112) Steel – polished and plated or phosphated and prime coated for painting
FBB191 – (ANSI A2112) Brass or bronze – polished and plated or painted
FBB191 (32) – (ANSI A5112) Stainless steel – highly polished For interior doors
FBB191 (32D) – (ANSI A5112) Stainless steel – satin finish
• For medium weight doors of average frequency

• All hinges have template screw hole location for use on either wood or hollow metal doors and frames
• Equipped with two Stanley permanently lubricated non-detachable ball bearings
• Pins in non-ferrous hinges are stainless steel
• Hole in bottom tip for easy pin removal
• Reversible flush tips and pins
• Hinges can be furnished as follows:
with raised barrel (RB)
with electric wires and/or switches (CE and/or CS)
with hospital tips (HT)
with decorative tips
with security studs
with non-removable pins (NRP)
Size Open Gauge Flat Head Screws Quantity Quantity Case Weight
of Metal Per Piece Per Box Per Case Bronze Steel
Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Machine Wood Lbs. (Kg) Lbs. (Kg)
31/2 X 3 (89 X 76) .123 (3.1) 6 - 10-24 X 1/2 6 -10 X 1 3 EA. 90 EA. 58 (26) 54 (24)
31/2 X 31/2 (89 X 89) .123 (3.1) 6 - 10-24 X 1/2 6 -10 X 1 3 EA. 90 EA. 65 (29) 59 (27)
4 X 31/2 (102 X 89) .130 (3.3) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 8 -12 X 11/4 3 EA. 48 EA. 43 (19) 39 (18)
4X4 (102 X 102) .130 (3.3) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 8 -12 X 11/4 3 EA. 48 EA. 45 (20) 42 (19)
41/2 X 4 (114 X 102) .134 (3.4) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 8 -12 X 11/4 3 EA. 48 EA. 55 (25) 52 (24)
41/2 X 41/2 (114 X 114) .134 (3.4) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 8 -12 X 11/4 3 EA. 48 EA. 59 (27) 55 (25)
5 X4 (127 X 102) .146 (3.7) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 4 -12 X 11/4 3 EA. 30 EA. 41 (19) 39 (18)
5 X 41/2 (127 X 114) .146 (3.7) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 4 -12 X 11/4 3 EA. 30 EA. 45 (20) 43 (19)
5X5 (127 X 127) .146 (3.7) 8 - 12-24 X 1/2 4 -12 X 11/4 3 EA. 30 EA. 50 (23) 46 (21)
*6 X 41/2 (152 X 114) .160 (4.1) 10 - 1/4 -20 X 1/2 5 -14 X 11/2 3 EA. 24 EA. 43 (19) 36 (16)
*6 X 5 (152 X 127) .160 (4.1) 10 - 1/4 -20 X 1/2 5 -14 X 11/2 3 EA. 24 EA. 47 (21) 40 (18)
*6 X 6 (152 X 152) .160 (4.1) 10 - 1/4 -20 X 1/2 5 -14 X 11/2 3 EA. 24 EA. 67 (30) 61 (28)
* Available in Steel only
Consult factory for other sizes not listed
4 5 K N U C K L
2.4 Locks and Latches, SPEC 2.2.4

Locks and Latches SPEC 2.2.4 KABA Simplex 8100
Locks and Latches SPEC 2.2.4 CL500 Mechanical CL550
Locks and Latches SPEC 2.2.4 BEST 9K Series
Item #3, Spec 2.2.4
Simplex ®
8100 For doors of rooms

(Door # 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26)
Features
Access Control
Mechanical pushbutton lock—eliminates problems and costs associated
with issuing, controlling, and collecting keys and cards. Provides exterior
access by combination, while allowing free egress.
No Battery
Fully mechanical lock eliminates the material and labor expense of battery
replacements
Number of Codes
Single access code—one easy-to-manage code for all users
Programming
Lock is easily programmed via keypad without removing lock from the door
Handing
Factory-handed; not field reversible
Operation Modes
• Pushbutton Access
• Passage (select models)—allows access without using the lock entry
code. Feature activated from the inside with a thumbturn or key
(included with all passage feature models).
• Deadbolt (select models)—added security of 1" deadbolt. Access
Model 8146 Model 8148 permitted by combination or key override.
• Lockout (all models)—disables the lock from the inside so that the
entry codes cannot be used to gain access. Access is permitted using
key override.
Economical
• Combination Entry • Combination Entry A cost effective access control solution
• Key Override • Key Override
(not supplied) (not supplied)
• Passage • Passage
• Lockout • Lockout
• Deadbolt
Mechanical Features
Construction Cast front housing; unified trim plate; fixed ADA—compliant levers
Locking Device Options Mortise with 1" (25 mm) deadbolt, ¾" (19 mm) two-piece anti-friction latch
Mortise with ¾" (19 mm) two-piece anti-friction latch
Numeric Keypad Vandal resistant, solid metal pushbuttons
Handing Factory-handed; not field reversible
Standard Finishes Antique Brass 05 (609), Satin Chrome 26D (626)
Optional Finishes Bright Chrome 026 (625), Bright Brass 03 (605)
Backset 2¾" (70 mm)
Latch ¾" (19 mm) two-piece anti-friction latch; 1" (25 mm) optional deadbolt
Minimum Stile Recommended 5" (127 mm)
Weight 9.8 lbs. (3.7 kg)
Strike 4⅞" (124 mm) L x 1¼" (32 mm) W x ¼" (6 mm) D Deadbolt/Latch mortise strike plate
Key Override
Interchangeable Cores Small format—Best and equivalents (6 or 7-pin length); core not included
Removable Cores Large format—Medeco/ASSA/Yale/Abloy (5 or 6-pin length), Corbin Russwin (6-pin length),
Schlage, and Sargent; core not included
Installation
Door Preparation Easily installs on wood or metal doors. Standard (86) mortise preparation
Door Thickness 1¾" (44 mm) to 2¼" (57 mm)
Items Supplied Include Lock assembly, installation manual, full-scale template, combination change tool, and required
installation hardware
Certification and Testing

Accessibility Standard Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA); fixed ADA-compliant levers
Durability Weather resistant
Fire Rating 3-hour UL/ULC fire rating for “A” labeled doors
Warranty
Warranty 3-year warranty
2⅜"
(60 mm) C
L P
1
2
3 9"
4 (229 mm)
5
7 ⅜" 8" 5⅞"
(187 mm) (203 mm) (149 mm)
3⅛" 313⁄16" 3¼"

1¼" 4⅛"
(79 mm) (97 mm) (83 mm)
(32 mm) (105 mm)
Exterior Exterior Side Interior Mortise Mortise Side
Kaba Access & Data Systems Americas

Winston-Salem NC 27105
1-800-849-8324
www.kaba-adsamericas.com KAA1349 0116
For door of COMM/Electrical
rooms (Door # 19, 20, 39, 40)
HEAVY DUTY
MECHANICAL
ACCESS
Heavy duty mechanical locks with large
full size lever handles, allowing use as the
primary lock on doors.
The CL500 range of mechanical locks offer a variety of options.
Allows the user flexibility on how to manage entry - by key, code or
passage function entry.
2,047
35mm LIMITED
GUARANTEE
60mm LI
FE TI M E
Easy to Suitable for Limited lifetime Total code

install wooden/metal doors warranty* combinations
FEATURES
• Large full size lever handles with return to door
• Passage function access options
• Suitable for interior and exterior use
• Tubular latch and mortise lock models available
• Tumbler alignment for easy code change
• Large three coil lever return spring suitable for high traffic use
• Selected models available in stainless steel or polished brass finish
• Neoprene seals included
9K Series: Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks
9K Series Cylindrical Lock
The premium lock for quality, performance, and security.

Building on BEST’s legacy of innovation, the 9K series cylindrical lock combines top-quality
materials and exceptional craftsmanship into a tough, dependable, long-lasting security
solution. We designed the 9K series to be low maintenance, easy to install, durable, and
secure. And our range of available styles and finishes ensures that the 9K delivers design
aesthetics to match a wide variety of applications. For doors of Bathrooms and
closets (Door # 7,8,9,10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18,
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38 )
BEST: Setting the Standard for Security

9K Series: Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks
Superior materials, design, and strength.
We designed the 9K series to deliver exceptional results in more applications. With
durability that exceeds ANSI Grade 1 requirements and options to accommodate a
host of potential requirements, the BEST 9K series ensures premium performance.
9K Series Cylindrical Lock Specifications Features

ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series—Grade 1
ANSI A117.1 Accessibility Code (ADA compliant)
UL/cUL listed (3 hour) for single or double swinging doors
BEST 9K
Florida Building Code and Miami Dade County (WS option) compliant for hurricane resistance • Proven reliability. We tested BEST 9K
California State Fire Marshal (California Title 24) compliant locks to over 5 million cycles, proving
Certifications
California State Fire Marshal compliant for fire door
that the series exceeds ANSI Grade 1
This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section
13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code requirements by over five times. Design
BAA & TAA compliant features like a seamless, one piece
Illinois Accessibility Standard compliant hardened steel alloy outside sleeve protect
Latch: solid stainless steel 9/16” throw; front 2 1/4” and 1 1/8” beveled functionality and ensure more reliable
Lever handles: plated zinc alloy performance throughout the product’s
Trim: brass or bronze
Product Strike: ANSI 2 3/4” standard; ANSI S3 4 7/8”, ANSI S3 7/8” flat, and 7/8” flat strike (STK) available lifespan.
Specifications Chassis: zinc alloy and corrosion-treated steel; 2 1/16” diameter • Long-term durability. Our low
Door thickness: available for 1 3/4” or 2 1/4” doors; spacers available for 1 3/8” door maintenance design with solid zinc hubs
Door prep: 2 1/8” diameter cross bore
Backset: 2 3/4” standard; 3 2/4” and 5” available protect critical components from daily
wear and tear for longer product life and
6-pin non-IC brass cylinder
6- or 7-pin SFIC option available lower overall cost of ownership.
Keying
Keyway options: LFIC: SCHRC-Schlage, Non-IC: COR-Corbin-Russwin, MED-Medeco, • Easy retrofit. The 9K is easy to retrofit
SAR-Sargent, SCH-Schlage, YAL-Yale to other door preps and competitor key
Single Keyed: systems.
Entrance – AB (F109) • Quick and easy installation. The
Storeroom – D (F86)
Service Station – E (F92)
9K’s pre-assembled design and simple
Classroom – R (F84) instructions make installing the lock
Dormitory – T (F90) intuitive. Rose locking pin allows for quick
Special – A, B, DZ, EA, RZ, XD, XR, YD, YR
door thickness adjustment.
UA
Hotel (SPN-standard) – H, HJ (F93) • Simple to rekey. With easy core
Double Keyed: interchangeability, BEST 9K locks make
Corridor – C (F88)
rekeying simple.
Lock Functions Storeroom – G (F91)
Intruder – IN with interior indicator rose standard (F110) • Superior security. Manufactured with
Communicating – S (F80) top-quality materials and designed for
Institutional – W ease of use and attack resistance, the 9K
Special – DR, RD
Keyless: series delivers security you can trust. The
Passage – N (F75), NX (F89) 9K’s vandal resistant lever includes a lost
Exit – Y motion design allowing the lever to move
Privacy – L (F76)
Special – LL, M, Q, Z 45°-60° without engaging the retractor
Single dummy trim – 1DT assembly.
Double dummy trim – 2DT • Premium aesthetics. A low profile
605: Bright Brass 613: Oil-rubbed Bronze 625: Bright Chrome rose design and wide variety of trims
606: Satin Brass 618: Bright Nickel 626: Satin Chrome and finishes give the BEST 9K a
All Finishes 611: Bright Bronze 619: Satin Nickel 690: Dark Bronze Coated
612: Satin Bronze 622: Flat Black UltraShield™ antimicrobial coating available
streamlined look compatible with modern
architectural trends and appropriate for
Ten-year mechanical any design aesthetic.
Warranties
Three-year finish (613 carries no finish warranty)
Featured Finishes
BEST 9K sets the standard for
premium-quality, heavy-duty
605: Bright Brass 606: Satin Brass 612: Satin Bronze 613: Oil-rubbed 619: Satin Nickel 625: Bright Chrome
Bronze lock solutions.
626: Satin Chrome 690: Dark Bronze

Coated
bestaccess.com
BA-0250
BEST is a trademark of dormakaba Holding. All rights reserved. © 2017 dormakaba Holding
2.5 Door Closer, SPEC 2.2.6

Door Closer, SPEC 2.2.6 CL500 Mechanical CL550
QDC100: Extra Heavy Duty Grade 1 Door Closers
Item #4, Spec 2.2.6
QDC100 Door Closers
Versatility and durability for a wide variety of

high-traffic applications.
We designed and engineered the QDC100 series with ultimate durability and versatility
in mind. With cast iron construction, retrofit-compatible features, and a wide array of
options, STANLEY Commercial Hardware QDC100 closers offer peak performance in
the toughest applications over the long term. When you need a closer that delivers
premium performance and flexibility and can withstand heavy use, trust the QDC100.
Trusted experts. Proven reliability. Simply STANLEY Commercial Hardware.

QDC100: Extra Heavy Duty Grade 1 Door Closers
Reliable strength and performance in an

easy-to-install design.
STANLEY Commercial Hardware’s QDC100 series provides the strength and
versatility institutional and industrial markets demand. Built with rugged materials
and designed for easy customization and retrofit, the QDC100 delivers lasting
security for even the most rigorous applications.
QDC100 Extra Heavy Duty Exit Device Specifications Features

ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Series—Grade 1
ANSI A117.1 Accessibility Code (ADA Compliant)
Certifications UL/cUL listed (3 hour) for self-closing
STANLEY Commercial Hardware
UL10c positive pressure rated QDC100
UL10b pressure rated • Ultimate durability. With cast iron body
Body: Cast iron construction, cold-forged pinion shaft, and
Covers: Metal and plastic available forged steel arms, the QDC100 stands up to
Arms & brackets: Tri-pack standard; additional heavy-duty arms optional
heavy use over the long term.
Arms: Heat-treated carbon steel
Materials Springs: High-impact hand-drawn steel wire • Easy to retrofit. There’s no need to re-prep
Pinions: Heat-treated chrome molybdenum steel your door. The QDC100 has the same footprint,
Cylinders: Heat-treated free-cutting carbon steel bolt pattern, and rounded cover as the
Fasteners: Wood and machine screws standard; sex nuts and self-reaming,
self-tapping screws standard LCN4040 so it’s a simple off-and-on exchange.
• Industry-leading warranty. Each QDC100
BF option required to meet ADA compliance for standard arm and top
jamb applications. closer comes with a lifetime mechanical
1: 33-55 lbs (15-30 kg) weight; 32” (0.81 m)-28” (0.71 m) width warranty and a three-year warranty on finish.
2: 56-99 lbs (30-45 kg) weight; 36” (0.91 m)-32” (0.81 m) width • Exceeds certification standards. The
Door Weights
3: 99-143 lbs (45-65 kg) weight; 42” (1.07 m)-36” (0.91 m) width
and Sizes QDC100 is BHMA/ANSI Grade 1 certified, and
4: 143-187 lbs (65-85 kg) weight; 48” (1.22 m)-42” (1.07 m) width
5: 187-264 lbs (85-120 kg) weight; 54” (1.37 m)-48” (1.22 m) width significantly exceeds performance requirements.
6: 264-330 lbs (120-150 kg) weight; 58” (1.47 m)-54” (1.32 m) width These closers are fully adjustable, with a barrier-
50% spring power adjustment over size 6
free option to meet ADA requirements.
QDC111: Tri-pack arm (non-handed) • Outstanding versatility. We engineered the
QDC112: Tri-pack arm with hold-open (non-handed)
QDC113: Extra heavy-duty arm with compression stop (non-handed)
QDC100 series with all-weather fluid, a variety
QDC114: Extra heavy-duty arm with hold-open and compression stop (non-handed) of arm types and stop options, and non-handed
Door Closer QDC115: Extra heavy-duty arm (non-handed) and universal mount design, to make it easy to
Functions QDC116: Extra heavy-duty arm with hold-open (handed)
stock and use in a wide variety of applications.
QDC117: Extra heavy-duty arm with stop (non-handed)
QDC118: Extra heavy-duty arm with hold-open and stop (non-handed) • Premium performance standard. Get
QDC119: Extra heavy-duty arm with spring stop (non-handed) premium performance options like delayed
QDC120: Extra heavy-duty arm with hold-open and spring stop (non-handed)
action and a back check valve standard with
689: Painted Aluminum the QDC100 series.
Finishes 690: Painted Duranodic Bronze
• Proactive solutions. Innovative construction
696: Painted Satin Brass
features like stacked valves prevent oil leaks
Lifetime mechanical
Warranties from screws being accidentally backed out
Three-year finish
too far.
• Short lead time. QDC100 closers are available
for immediate shipment.
689: Painted 690: Painted 696: Painted Satin

Aluminum Duranodic Bronze Brass
For your heaviest use applications,
where strength and durability
are paramount, choose STANLEY
Commercial Hardware’s versatile,
reliable QDC100 Series—backed by
the name more Americans trust.
stanleyhardwarefordoors.com
© 2017 Stanley Black & Decker, Inc. STANLEY® and the STANLEY® Notched Rectangle logo are ST-CH-0233
registered trademarks of Stanley Black & Decker Inc. or one of its affiliates, and are used under license. © 2017 dormakaba Holding
2.6 Door Protection Plates, SPEC 2.2.7

Door Protection Plates, Spec Rockwood K1050-Metal kick Plate
2.2.7 US23D/630
Architectural
Door Accessories
Item #5, Spec 2.2.7
Rockwood K1050 - Metal Kick Plate - .050" Thick

Available
Finishes:
• US3/605
• US4/606
• US9/611
• US10/612
• US10B/613
• US10BE/613E
• US26/625
• US26D/626
• US28/628
• US32/629
• US32316
Specifications: • US32D/630
• US32D316
MATERIAL: • US32DMS
.050" Aluminum, Brass, Bronze, Stainless Steel • Powder Coat
FASTENERS:
#
6 x 5/8" Oval Head Sheet Metal Screws
8" x 34" for Kick Plate WEIGHT:

FEATURES:
8" x 34" = 4.0 lbs.
• Push Side Plate Width - 2" less than door width 4" x 31" for Mop Plate
• Pull Side Plate Width - 1 1/2" less than door width
ANSI:
ORDERING: J101 - metal armor
Specify height x width x finish code. Add any options plate
J102 - metal kick plate
OPTIONS:
J103 - metal stretcher
• SA - self-adhesive mounting
& mop plate
• TEK - self-drilling screws
•A ll sides are beveled
• Heavy bevel available, specify HVBEV
• CSK - countersunk holes
• Cutouts for locks, louvers, or windows
• TORX - security torx screws
NFPA 80 STANDARDS - 2-4.5 Protection Plates: Factory-installed protection plates shall be installed in accordance with the listing of the door. Field-installed protection plates
shall be labeled and installed in accordance with their listing.
Exception: Labeling is not required where the top of the protection plate is not more than 16 in. (406 mm) above the bottom of the door.
NOTE: Finishes US26/625 and US26D/626 are only available up to 24"H.
ASSA ABLOY Opening Solutions

Architectural Accessories Group
Rockwood, PA
Phone: (800) 458-2424 • Fax: (800) 922-9212
www.assaabloydooraccessories.us
Copyright © 2020, ASSA ABLOY Accessories and Door Controls Group, Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in whole
or in part without the express written permission of ASSA ABLOY Accessories and Door Controls Group, Inc. is prohibited. CS-K1050 2/20
2.7 Thresholds, SPEC 2.2.9

Thresholds SPEC 2.2.9 National Guard Products ADA Compliant Bumper Seal
Threshold
Item #6, Spec 2.2.9
Project:
Submitted by:
Date:
ADA Compliant Bumper Seal Threshold Notes:
896
10C
Materials & Finishes
Aluminum alloy 6063, T5 temper
Mill finish
DKB - dark bronze finish
Vinyl is gray
NGP-TPV and silicone are black
• 5" wide x 1/2" tall

• Fluted top
• BHMA certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.21
1,000 lb. load test
• Typical Wall Thickness: .105"
• Weight: .64 lbs./ft.
• #10 x 1-1/2" FH zinc plated wood
screws included. Dark bronze supplied
with DKB thresholds
Typical Wall .105
(V) Vinyl Bumper Seal Standard
1/2"
Optional:
( N) NGP-TPV
1/4"
(S) Silicone
5"
Optional Slip Resistant
SIA Finish
896_cutsheet.pdf 4985 East Raines Road, Memphis, TN 38118 • 800-647-7874 © NGP, Inc. 2017
2.8 Rain Drip, SPEC 2.2.10

Rain Drip, SPEC 2.2.10 National Guard Products Silicone Dense Bulb Seal 160
S
Item #7, Spec 2.2.11
Project:
Submitted by:
Date:
Rain Drip Guard Notes:
17
Material
Finishes
17 Mill Aluminum
17B Gold
17DKB Dark Bronze
• #6 x 3/4" stainless steel SMS furnished
Options
FATT - Fast Attach Tape
1 1/2"
3/4"
17_cutsheet.pdf 4985 East Raines Road, Memphis, TN 38118 • 800-647-7874 © NGP, Inc. 2017
2.9 Weather- Stripping, SPEC 2.2.10

Weather stripping, Spec National Guard Products Silicone Dense Bulb Seal 160
2.2.10 S
Project:
Submitted by:
Date:
Silicone Dense Bulb Seal Notes:
160S
10C
Material
Synthetic rubber polymer: Siloxane
Dense silicone is black
• Excellent flexibility and memory

• Flame resistant
• Moisture resistant
• Temperature range -100°F to 500°F, remains
flexible at extreme temperatures
• Excellent resistance to ozone, UV and aging
• Recommended for areas using FM200 or
Halon Fire Suppression Systems
• BHMA Certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.22 per-
formance tests for heat, cold, air infiltration
and smoke infiltration
• #6 x 3/4" stainless steel sheet metal screws
furnished 5/16"
• Screw holes slotted for adjustment 7/8"
5/16"
1/4"
Finishes
160S Mill Aluminum
160SA Anodized Aluminum
160SB Gold
160SDKB Dark Bronze
Options
FATT - Fast Attach Tape
160S_cutsheet.pdf 4985 East Raines Road, Memphis, TN 38118 • 800-647-7874 © NGP, Inc. 2017
2.10 Floor and Wall Stop, Spec 2.2.8

Floor and Wall Stop Rockwood 442-High Dome Stop
US26D/626
Architectural
Door Accessories
Item #9, Spec 2.2.8
Rockwood 440 - Low Dome Stop

Available
Finishes:
• US3/605
• US4/606
• US10/612
• US10B/613
• US10BE/613E
• US15/619
• US26/625
• US26D/626
SIZE:
Base: Ø 1 7/8" x 1/4"h
Height: 1 1/8"
WEIGHT:
1.5 lbs./10
ANSI A156.16:
L02141
Specifications:
MATERIAL:
Solid Cast Brass with Rubber Bumper
FASTENER:
#
12 x 1 1/4" Flat Head Wood Screw, Plastic Anchor
FEATURES:
For doors without thresholds (not undercut)
OPTIONS:
Exterior Pack screw packs; stainless steel plated to
match - use EXP suffix (440 x EXP) when ordering

Rockwood, PA
Phone: (800) 458-2424 • Fax: (800) 922-9212
or in part without the express written permission of ASSA ABLOY Accessories and Door Controls Group, Inc. is prohibited. CS-440 7/19
Architectural
Door Accessories
Rockwood 442 - High Dome Stop

Available
Finishes:
• US3/605
• US4/606
• US10/612
• US10B/613
• US10BE/613E
• US15/619
• US26/625
• US26D/626
SIZE:
Base: Ø 1 7/8" x 1/2"h
Height: 1 1/2"
WEIGHT:
2.8 lbs./10
ANSI A156.16:
L02161
Specifications:
MATERIAL:
Solid Cast Brass with Rubber Bumper
FASTENER:
#
12 x 1 1/2" Flat Head Wood Screw, Plastic Anchor
FEATURES:
For doors with thresholds or undercut doors
OPTIONS:
Exterior Pack screw packs; stainless steel plated to
match - use EXP suffix (442 x EXP) when ordering

Rockwood, PA
Phone: (800) 458-2424 • Fax: (800) 922-9212
Architectural
Door Accessories
Rockwood 409 - Concave Wrought Wall Stop

Available
Finishes:
• US3/605
• US4/606
• US10/612
• US10BE/613E
• US26/625
• US26D/626
• US32D/630
SIZE:
Ø 2 1/2"
Projection: 1"
WEIGHT:
1.25 lbs./10
ANSI A156.16:
L02251
Specifications:
MATERIAL:
Wrought Brass, Bronze, and Stainless Steel with Rubber Bumper
FASTENERS:
#
8 x 1 1/4" Truss Head Sheet Metal Screw, Plastic Toggle
FEATURES:
Concealed mounting, concave bumper. Back plate prevents damage to wall.
BUMPER:
Concave

Rockwood, PA
Phone: (800) 458-2424 • Fax: (800) 922-9212
3. Division 09- Finishes
Content
3.1 General Purpose Gypsum Board, SPEC 2.1.1
- Continental Building Products, General Purpose Drywall
3.2 Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board, SPEC 2.1.2
- Georgia-Pacific DensArmor Plus Inteiror Panels
Moisture Resistant Gypsum Boards
3.3 Ceramic Floor Tile SPEC 2.1
- Castle-Gate Floor Tile Beige CG15
3.4 Ceramic Wall Tile SPEC 2.1.1
- Castle-Gate Wall Tile Biscuit 0091 (1)
3.5 USG Acoustical Ceiling Panel , SPEC 2.2
- USG Ceiling Solutions, USG Radar Basic Acoustical Panels 2110 ME2110
3.6 USG Acoustical Suspension System SPEC 2.3
- USG Ceiling Solutions, USG Donn Brand DX/DXL Acoustical Suspension System
3.7 Paints and Coatings
Gypsum Board and Cementitious Board Maintenance
A yearly revision of drywall and cementitious boards should be performed. The following
should be checked during this time:
1. Damp Ceiling: Damp/ moisture damaged ceilings can result from something as benign
as a little too much rainfall or as serious as a burst piece of plumbing. To adequately
address this common drywall repair issue, a professional will typically use a sander on
the wet area, and then paint a layer of stain-resistant primer on to head off any potential
water damage in the future, following up with a concealing drywall compound.
2. Popped Nails: The ceiling joists and wall studs that are used in drywall can occasionally
pop out of the wall. If they do, a drywall repair professional usually first removes the
popped nails entirely, replacing them with two brand-new screws each, before applying
several layers of joint and drywall compound.
3. Small Holes: Small holes are usually an easy drywall issue to repair. The quickest
solution is to adhere a drywall maintenance plate, which sticks to drywall via
antiadhesive backing. A drywall professional will then conceal the plate with a layer of
paint.
4. Large Holes: A little more difficult to repair than small holes, large drywall holes must
be completely excised from a wall by cutting out the surrounding section of drywall
entirely. After removing the damaged section, a new piece of drywall will be attached
with screws that are then covered in a layer of joint compound and drywall tape and
finished with painting and sanding to make the area match the rest of the wall.
Porcelain and Ceramic Tile Maintenance
Following is a simple procedure to clean unpolished/unglazed porcelain tile flooring with a

moderate soil load.
1. Sweep or vacuum the dirt from the floor.

2. Saturate the floor with cleaning solutions and hot water, stir and allow it to stand on the
floor for 5 – 10 minutes. Do not allow cleaning solutions to dry. Also, for this
procedure, do it on small areas at a time.
3. For more difficult stains, scrub the cleaning solution with a floor machine equipped
with an abrasive pad or stiff nylon-bristle brush. For residential applications and small
areas, use a scrub brush.
4. Wipe away the dirty cleaning solution and rinse the surface of the porcelain tile with
clean, clear water with a mop or a wet vacuum.
5. Allow time for drying.
6. You might have to use a more aggressive cleaning method if the unpolished porcelain
tile is heavily stained.
7. Do not clean porcelain tile flooring with ammonia or with cleaners that contain any
bleach and/or acid for cleaning. Acid and ammonia-based cleaners may alter grout
color.
8. Do not use any oil-based detergents, wax cleaners, or sealants.
9. Do not use agents that contain any dyes or colors on unglazed porcelain tile.
10. Use rugs at outdoor entrances to prevent grit from being tracked onto the tile flooring.
11. Do not use steel wool pads, because the loose steel particles may cause rust stains in the
grout.
Paints and Coatings Maintenance
1. Moisture can warp or ruin paint and underlying drywall. It can also attract dangerous
mold. Ventilate properly and avoid getting paint wet beyond a quick wipe with a damp
rag for cleaning.
2. Check for cracks and peeling. Touch ups might be needed the initial 12 months in a
newly constructed facility. Settling often occurs and creates small cracks, but it should
no longer be an issue after the first year. Cracks from settling are most likely to appear
around door and window frames. The cracks are likely in the drywall, and they need to
be mudded and fixed before repainting. Otherwise the cracks will return.
3. On the other hand, small cracks and peeling in the middle of the wall may be caused by
a poor paint job. You may need to strip away the paint and replace both the primer and
paint.
4. To match the color, store leftover paint properly and keep it for a couple of years. Latex
paint typically expires after two to five years. After that, recycle the paint at designated
facilities. First, write down the paint name or code and the brand, if possible, in case
you need to return to the store and buy more of the same paint.
5. Prevent Future Maintenance:
- Primer is usually a good idea, even if painting a darker latex paint over light-
colored latex. Primer helps the paint adhere better and last longer; plus, it protects
the wall.
3.1 General Purpose Gypsum Board, SPEC 2.1.1

General Purpose Gypsum Continental Building Products General Purpose Drywall
Board, SPEC 2.1.1
Item #1 Spec 2.1.1
Drawing A101
Applications LIGHTWEIGHT,
Drywall is designed to be easy to use
and decorate for both residential and
GENERAL PURPOSE DRYWALL
LIFTLITE DRYWALL
commercial construction applications.
®
• Interior walls
• Interior ceilings
Continental Building Products LiftLite is a gypsum board formulated to be up to

Advantages
25% lighter than standard 1/2” drywall making it easier to lift, carry and install. LiftLite
• 25% lighter than standard 1/2” can be used on both walls and ceilings, eliminating the need for two different types
drywall
of drywall and reducing jobsite waste. Like all Continental interior gypsum boards,
• Easier lifting and handling for fast LiftLite is GREENGUARD Certified, which can assist in the attainment of credits for
installation
LEED certification.
• Sag resistance
• Fire resistance LiftLite can be used in building applications that require direct mechanical
• Can be cost-effectively decorated attachment to wood or metal wall and ceiling frames, or attachment to existing
numerous times surfaces using fasteners or adhesives. It has excellent sag resistance and may be used
• 99% recycled content by weight on ceilings with framing up to 24” o.c. with a water-based texture application when
• Less jobsite waste installed perpendicularly to the framing, meeting the requirements of Gypsum Ceiling
• Reduced transportation energy Board. It can also be used on walls with framing up to 24” o.c.
• Low VOC-emitting materials
While LiftLite has some inherent fire-resistant characteristics, this product should not
• Easy score and snap
be used to provide the levels of fire resistance required by various building codes and
• Reduced dust
standards. For fire resistance, use Firecheck® products. When properly sealed and
used in a certified sound rated assembly, LiftLite will contribute to required sound
transmission classification (STC) values.
Note: LiftLite is suitable for interior applications only, and should not be used where
temperatures exceed 125º F for extended periods or in areas of extreme humidity.
Likewise, the board should be protected from exposure to adverse conditions during
storage and construction.
JOB NAME:
CONTRACTOR:
DATE:
Sustainability Physical Characteristics
Can contribute to the U.S. Green Core: Non-combustible, dimensionally Available Sizes:
Building Council’s LEED Credit stable, inert gypsum
Qualification in several credit categories Nominal thickness 1/2 in.
to assist in obtaining LEED certification. Paper: 100% recycled; Front and Nominal width 4 ft.
edges = ivory, back = gray
Standard length † 8 ft., 10 ft., 12 ft.
Long Edges: Tapered Nominal width 54 in.
Asbestos free and Standard length † 12 ft. and 14 ft.
GREENGUARD certified
Nominal weight 1.3 lbs./ft.2 – 1.4 lbs./ft.2
LEED and Recycled Content: 99% †Other lengths available by special order
recycled content, 94% pre-consumer and

5% post-consumer
Standards and Codes
Formulated to perform in accordance with ASTM C1396/C1396M, Sections 5 & 12

and C36; Federal Specification SS-L-30D*, Type III, Grade R; and CAN/CSA-A82.27-M.
*The federal specification for gypsum board, Technical Specifications

SS-L-30D, was withdrawn in 1984. It is provided
here for information only and should not be
referenced for new construction.
UL classified for surface burning (File No. R16102) (per ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC-S102)
Flame spread = 0; Smoke developed = 0; Meeting IBC, Section 803.1, Class A
Core combustibility (tested in conformance with ASTM E136) Non-combustible
Installation
Install according to Gypsum Association GA-201, GA-216, or ASTM C840.

Refer to GA-214 for finishing recommendations.
Painting and Decorating
For best results, a good gypsum board primer should be applied in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions before painting or before any textured material is applied.
Handling Recommendations
Stack flat, keep dry and lift (do not drag) to avoid scuffing. Avoid damage to edges.
For detailed recommendations, refer to GA-216 and GA-801.
Safety Precautions
Wear safety glasses and NIOSH-approved respirators during cutting, breaking,

rasping or other dust-producing activities.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available for all Continental products
upon request.
CONTINENTAL BUILDING PRODUCTS

USA (800) 237-5505
Canada (866) 649-7786
www.continental-bp.com
7/15
3.2 Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board, SPEC 2.1.2

Moisture Resistant Gypsum Georgia- Pacific DensArmor Plus Interior
Board SPEC 2.1.2 Panels
Item #2, Spec 2.1.2
Technical Service Hotline 1.800.225.6119 or

www.gpgypsum.com
Manufacturer Limitations
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum Georgia-Pacific Canada DensArmor Plus Interior Panels are a non-structural product and should not be
133 Peachtree Street 2180 Meadowvale Boulevard, Suite 200 used as a nailing base to support heavy wall-mounted objects.
Atlanta, GA 30303 Mississauga, ON L5N 5S3 Intended for interior applications and soffits in protected areas, DensArmor Plus
Technical Service Hotline: 1-800-225-6119 Panels must be kept dry during storage and handling.
Description Do not use DensArmor Plus® Fireguard® (per ASTM C1658) Panels where there is
DensArmor Plus® Interior Panels are noncombustible (as defined and tested in prolonged exposure to temperatures exceeding 125˚ F (52˚C), e.g. adjacent to
accordance with ASTM E136 or CAN/ULC S114) interior panels that consist of a wood burning stoves, heating appliances, saunas or steam rooms.
moisture-resistant gypsum core with coated fiberglass mats. The fiberglass mats Technical Data
provide superior protection from incidental moisture. DensArmor Plus Panels are Flame spread and smoke developed rating of 0/0 when tested in accordance with
highly resistant to the growth of mold, and have scored a 10, the highest level of ASTM E84 or CAN/ULC S102.
performance for mold resistance under ASTM D3273 test method.
Noncombustible as described and tested in accordance with ASTM E136 or
The core of DensArmor Plus panels is reinforced with fiberglass, increasing the CAN/ULC S114.
product’s strength. The treated core and the coated facings made with fiberglass
offer greater moisture resistance and improved dimensional stability than regular 5/89 DensArmor Plus Fireguard panels are UL and ULC Classified Type DAP.
gypsum board. The product resists warping, rippling and buckling. 1/29 and 5/89 DensArmor Plus® Fireguard C® panels are UL and ULC Classified
Type DAPC.
They have a tapered edge to receive joint treatment. The field of the board can be
finished in the same manner as regular gypsum board. Decoration
DensArmor Plus Interior Panels are designed to accept most types of paints,
DensArmor Plus Interior Panels are GREENGUARD and GREENGUARD Gold
textures and wall covering materials. Because of the enhanced moisture- and
Certified for low emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) by a leading
mold-resistant properties of DensArmor Plus Panels, drying times for both joint
third-party organization, UL Environment. In addition, DensArmor Plus Interior
compound and wall coverings may vary. Always follow paint or wall covering
Panels are listed as GREENGUARD microbial resistant. This listing means
manufacturer’s installation instructions when applying either of these finishes.
DensArmor Plus Panels, which feature fiberglass mats instead of paper facings
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum strongly recommends priming the surface of DensArmor
used on the surface of traditional gypsum board products, resist mold growth.
Plus Panels with a quality, high solids primer/sealer before applying a final
The microbial resistant test is based on ASTM D6329, a testing standard set
decorative material. Priming will equalize the suction variations between the joint
by ASTM International, which develops testing guidelines and procedures for
compounds and the fiberglass surfaces. If glossy paints are used in such areas
building materials, products, systems, and services.
as kitchens or bathrooms, skim coat joint compound over the entire surface of
DensArmor Plus Panels also are listed in the Collaborative for High Performance DensArmor Plus Panels to reduce highlighting or joint photographing. This method
Schools® (CHPS®) High Performance Products Database for low emissions of VOCs. is also recommended in areas with severe natural or artificial side lighting.
CHPS is a national non-profit organization that works with school districts and
their design teams to improve the quality of education by using products that Handling and Use–CAUTION
have met requirements to receive CHPS credits. This product contains fiberglass facings which may cause skin irritation. Dust and
fibers produced during the handling and installation of the product may cause
Primary Uses skin, eye and respiratory tract irritation. Avoid breathing dust and minimize con-
DensArmor Plus Interior Panels are an interior wall or ceiling covering material for tact with skin and eyes. Wear long sleeve shirts, long pants and eye protection.
use in new construction or renovation work. They are designed for direct attachment Always maintain adequate ventilation. Use a dust mask or NIOSH/MSHA
with screws or nails to wood and metal framing or existing surfaces. They may approved respirator as appropriate in dusty or poorly ventilated areas.
be used as a covering material for flat or curved structures. DensArmor Plus Panels
are manufactured with fiberglass mat surfaces. They have a tapered edge to receive Stack DensArmor Plus Interior Panels flat on a level surface. As individual sheets
joint treatment. are removed for installation, they should be raised up on edge carefully and carried
in a vertical position. Appropriate handling for gypsum board is also outlined in
• Use on interiors of exterior walls, where moisture intrusion is most likely. Gypsum Association Publications GA-216 and GA 801.
• Use in pre-rock areas, where the windows, doors or roof have not been Take care to avoid impact, undue flexing and subsequent damage to board edges,
installed making moisture intrusion inevitable. DensArmor Plus Panels ends and corners.
come with a limited warranty against delamination and deterioration for
up to 12 months of exposure to normal weather conditions.* Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) is available at www.buildgp.com/safetyinfo
or call 1-404-652-5119.
• Use in wet areas behind tile, such as tub and shower areas, where
ASTM C1396, Section 7 is allowed by code. Applicable Standards
Manufactured to meet ASTM C1658, ASTM C1396 Section 7 and ASTM C1177.
* For complete warranty details, visit www.gpgypsum.com. continued
Submittal Job Name

Approvals
Contractor
Date
Stamps /Signatures
Technical Service Hotline 1.800.225.6119 or
www.gpgypsum.com
Sizes and Edges Installation
DensArmor Plus Thickness: 1/29 (12.7 mm); Width: 48 (1219 mm); DensArmor Plus® Interior Panels should be installed according to the most current
Lengths: 88-128 (2438 mm-3658 mm); Edges: Tapered versions of Gypsum Association Publication GA-216 “Application and Finishing of
DensArmor Plus Fireguard C Thickness: 1/29 (12.7 mm); Width: 48 (1219 mm); Gypsum Board for Non-Fire-Rated Construction.”
Lengths: 88-128 (2438 mm-3658 mm); Edges: Tapered For fire-rated installations, the installation and details shall be in conformity with
DensArmor Plus Fireguard Thickness: 5/89 (15.9 mm); Width: 48 (1219 mm); those assemblies published in the Gypsum Association Fire Resistance Design
Lengths: 88-128 (2438 mm-3658 mm); Edges: Tapered Manual GA-600, UL and ULC Fire Resistance Directories.
DensArmor Plus Fireguard C Thickness: 5/8 9 (15.9 mm); Width: 48 (1219 mm);
Lengths: 88-128 (2438 mm-3658 mm); Edges: Tapered
Physical Properties
DensArmor Plus® DensArmor Plus® DensArmor Plus®
Properties DensArmor Plus® Fireguard C® Fireguard® Fireguard C®
Thickness, nominal4 1/29 (12.7 mm) 1/29 (12.7 mm) 5/89 (15.9 mm) 5/89 (15.9 mm)
± 1/649 (0.4 mm) ± 1/649 (0.4 mm) ± 1/649 (0.4 mm) ± 1/649 (0.4 mm)
Width, standard4 48 (1219 mm) 48 (1219 mm) 48 (1219 mm) 48 (1219 mm)
± 3/329 (2.4 mm) ± 3/329 (2.4 mm) ± 3/329 (2.4 mm) ± 3/329 (2.4 mm)
Length, standard4 88 (2438 mm) to 88 (2438 mm) to 88 (2438 mm) to 88 (2438 mm) to
128 (3658 mm) 128 (3658 mm) 128 (3658 mm) 128 (3658 mm)
± 1/49 (6.4 mm) ± 1/49 (6.4 mm) ± 1/49 (6.4 mm) ± 1/49 (6.4 mm)
Weight1, nominal, lbs./sq. ft., (Kg/ m 2) 2.0 (9.8) 2.0 (9.8) 2.5 (12.2) 2.4 (12.1)
Edges Tapered Tapered Tapered Tapered
Permeance 7, Perms (ng/Pa • s • m2) >10 (570) >10 (570) >10 (570) >10 (570)
Linear expansion with moisture change,
in/in %RH (mm/mm %RH) 6.25 x 10-6 6.25 x 10-6 6.25 x 10-6 6.25 x 10-6
C oefficient of thermal expansion,
in/in/°F (mm/mm/°C) 8.5 x 10-6 (15.3 x 10-6) 8.5 x 10-6 (15.3 x 10-6) 8.5 x 10-6 (15.3 x 10-6) 8.5 x 10-6 (15.3 x 10-6)
Flexural strength, parallel, lbf.3, 4 (N) ≥ 80 (356) ≥ 80 (356) ≥ 100 (444) ≥ 100 (444)
Flexural strength, perpendicular, lbf.3, 4 (N) ≥ 100 (444) ≥ 100 (444) ≥ 140 (622) ≥ 140 (622)
R Value 2, ft 2• °F • hr/BTU (m2• K/ W) .56 (0.099) .56 (0.099) .67 (0.118) .67 (0.118)
Combustibility 6 Noncombustible Noncombustible Noncombustible Noncombustible
Nail pull resistance, lbf.3, 4 (N) ≥ 80 (356) ≥ 80 (356) ≥ 90 (400) ≥ 90 (400)
Hardness core, edges and ends, lbf. (N) ≥15 (67) ≥15 (67) ≥15 (67) ≥15 (67)
Water absorption (% of weight) 3, 4 < 5 <5 <5 <5
Surface water absorption 3, 4 < 1.6 grams < 1.6 grams < 1.6 grams < 1.6 grams
S urface burning characteristics
(per ASTM E84 or CAN/ULC S102):
flame spread/smoke developed 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0
Humidified deflection 3, 4 ≤ 2/89 (6.4 mm) ≤ 2/89 (6.4 mm) ≤ 1/89 (3 mm) ≤ 1/89 (3 mm)
Bending radius 5 68 (1829 mm) 68 (1829 mm) 88 (2438 mm) 88 (2438 mm)
1
Represents approximate weight for design and shipping purposes 5
Double fasteners on ends as needed
2
Tested in accordance with ASTM C518 6
As defined and tested in accordance with ASTM E136 or CAN/ULC S114.
3
Tested in accordance with ASTM C473 7
Tested in accordance with ASTM E96 (dry cup method)
4
Specified values per ASTM C1658 and ASTM C1177
TRADEMARKS Unless otherwise noted, all trademarks are owned by or licensed to Georgia-Pacific
Gypsum LLC. Collaborative for High Performance Schools and CHPS are trademarks owned by
Collaborative for High Performance Schools Inc.
WARRANTIES, REMEDIES AND TERMS OF SALE For current warranty information for this
product, please go to www.gpgypsum.com and select the product for warranty information. All sales
U.S.A. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC of this product by Georgia-Pacific are subject to our Terms of Sale available at www.gpgypsum.com.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum II LLC
Canada Georgia-Pacific Canada LP UPDATES AND CURRENT INFORMATION The information in this document may change without
notice. Visit our website at www.gpgypsum.com for updates and current information.
Sales Information and Order Placement
U.S.A. West: 1-800-824-7503 CAUTION For product fire, safety and use information, go to www.buildgp.com/safetyinfo
Midwest: 1-800-876-4746 or call 1-800-225-6119.
South Central: 1-800-231-6060 FIRE SAFETY CAUTION Passing a fire test in a controlled laboratory setting and/or certifying or
Southeast: 1-800-327-2344 labeling a product as having a one-hour, two-hour, or any other fire resistance or protection rating
Northeast: 1-800-947-4497
and, therefore, as acceptable for use in certain fire rated assemblies/systems, does not mean that
CANADA Canada Toll Free: 1-800-387-6823 either a particular assembly/system incorporating the product, or any given piece of the product
Quebec Toll Free: 1-800-361-0486 itself, will necessarily provide one-hour fire resistance, two-hour fire resistance, or any other
TECHNICAL INFORMATION specified fire resistance or protection in an actual fire. In the event of an actual fire, you should
U.S.A. and Canada: 1-800-225-6119, www.gpgypsum.com immediately take any and all actions necessary for your safety and the safety of others without
regard for any fire rating of any product or assembly/system.
©2014 Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. All rights reserved. 1/14. GP-TM Lit. Item #532248.
3.3 Ceramic Floor Tile SPEC 2.1

Ceramic Floor Tile, SPEC 2.1 Castle-Gate BEIGE CG15
ITEM # 1
C A S T L E G AT E ™ Floor tile PARAGRAPH 2.1
G L A Z E D P O R C E L A I N F L O O R A N D G L A Z E D C E R A M I C WA L L & M O S A I C
Floor tile and base board color

GLAZED PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE
BEIGE CG15 GRAY CG16 BROWN CG17
GL AZED CERAMIC WALL TILE
BEIGE CG15 GRAY CG16 BROWN CG17
GLAZED CERAMIC MOSAIC
Shower floor mosaic color scheme
UNIVERSAL CG18 (available in blend only)

C A S T L E G AT E ™
G L A Z E D P O R C E L A I N F L O O R A N D G L A Z E D C E R A M I C WA L L & M O S A I C
SIZES Floor tile USAGE

SQ. FT./ PIECES/
THICKNESS FLOORS WALLS COUNTERTOPS
CARTON CARTON
18 x 18 17-3/4" x 17-3/4"
F W C
5/16" 18.00 8
Floor Tile (45.20 cm x 45.20 cm)
APPLICATIONS
TARGET
SUITABLE
DCOF WET
12 x 12 11-13/16" x 11-13/16"
5/16" 15.00 15
Floor Tile (30.00 cm x 30.00 cm) *
Dry & Level – Interior Floor N/A
*
Wet & Level – Interior Floor ≥ 0.42
9 x 12 9" x 12"
5/16" 11.25 15
Wall Tile p (22.91 cm x 30.54 cm) **
Shower Floors (Residential or Light Commercial) ≥ 0.42
Exterior Floor Applications

2x2 12" x 24" Sheet (including pool decking & other wet areas with ≥ 0.60
1/4" 24.00 12 minimal footwear)
Mosaic p n (30.48 cm x 60.96 cm Sheet)
Ramps & Inclines ≥ 0.65

Shower floor mosaic
Walls/Backsplashes N/A
TRIM
Base board piece PIECES/ Countertops N/A
*
NUMBER
CARTON
**
Pool Linings N/A
Floor Bullnose 3 x 12 P-43C9 30
A DCOF value of ≥ 0.42 is the standard for tiles specified for level interior spaces
Wall Bullnose (9" side) p 3x9 S-4309 54 expected to be walked upon when wet, as stated in ANSI A137.1-2012, Section 9.6.
For more information about DCOF and the DCOF AcuTest™, visit
Wall Bullnose Corner p 3x3 SN-4309 32 americanolean.com/DCOF.
APPLICATION NOTES:
Mosaic Bullnose p 2x2 S-886 108 Floor tile suitable for exterior applications in freezing and non-freezing climates, when
proper installation methods are followed.
p Ceramic body ■ Dot-mounted Wall and mosaic tile suitable for exterior applications in non-freezing climates, when
proper installation methods are followed.
* Wall tile not suitable for this application
** Mosaic tile only
INSTALL ATION & PRICING
RECOMMENDED GROUT JOINT: SHADE VARIATION
Floor: 3/16" (Overlap should not exceed 33% when installing tile with a length of NOTES
15" or greater in a staggered brick-joint pattern.)
Since there are variations in all fired ceramic and natural products, tile and trim
Wall: 1/16" supplied for your particular installation may not match samples. Final confirmation should
Mosaic: 1/8" HIGH be made from actual tiles and trim prior to installation. Manufactured in accordance with
(V3) ANSI A137.1 standards.
RELATIVE PRICING: Low
Not for use on ramps. Water, oil, grease, improper drainage and certain footwear can
create slippery conditions. Floor applications expected to be exposed to these conditions
require extra caution in product selection.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at: americanolean.com/Factors.
Special consideration needs to be given when installing tiles greater than 15 inches. Please
FLOOR WALL MOSAIC
ASTM# refer to americanolean.com/LargeTiles for more information.
RESULT RESULT RESULT
Use of a latex modified thin-set is recommended for installation. For more information,
Water Absorption C373 < 0.5% < 20.0% < 3.0% visit americanolean.com.
Breaking Strength C648 > 275 lbs. 120 - 230 lbs. > 250 lbs.
Scratch Hardness MOHS 8.0 4.0 - 6.0 8.0

POST-CONSUMER
MADE IN THE U.S.A.
RECYCLED MATERIALS
Chemical Resistance C650 Resistant Resistant Resistant
Abrasion Resistance C1027 4 N/A 4 PRE-CONSUMER

RECYCLED MATERIALS
For additional information on test results, visit us at: americanolean.com/information/TestResults.
All or select items within this series meet the requirements for these qualifications.
For more information visit americanolean.com.
125kg
Naturally, many of our

products can help you earn
LEED™ credits.
888.AOT.TILE
©2017 AMERICAN OLEAN (12/17)
3.4 Ceramic Wall Tile, SPEC 2.1.1

Ceramic Wall Tile, SPEC 2.1.1 Castle-Gate Biscuit 0091 (1)
B R I G H T & M AT T E ™ Wall tile ITEM # 2
G L A Z E D C E R A M I C WA L L PARAGRAPH 2.1.1
Wall tile color
BRIGHT
ICE WHITE WHITE BISCUIT SALT & PEPPER GLOSS ALMOND CAPPUCCINO MUSHROOM NUTMEG
0025 (1) u 0090 (1) 0091 (1) u 0045 (1) 0012 (1) 0078 (1) 0038 (2) 0037 (2)
SAND DOLL AR MARSHMALLOW LEMON CHILI PEPPER ANTIQUE ROSE POMEGRANATE ARTICHOKE DILL PICKLE
0050 (1) 0065 (1) CHIFFON Q074 (4) v Q073 (4) v Q072 (4) v 0063 (1) l 0083 (2) l
0044 (1)
SUMMER RAIN SAPPHIRE SKY LIGHT SMOKE STORM GRAY SMOKEY QUARTZ GLOSS BL ACK
0081 (1) 0070 (3) S 0042 (1) 0040 (2) 0047 (2) l 0049 (2) u
LEMON ZEST MANDARIN WATERMELON GREEN APPLE SHAMROCK PEACOCK BLUE RUBY RED GRAPE SODA
Q075 (4) v ORANGE SORBET Q076 (4) v GREEN Q084 (4) v 0121 (5) S Q079 (4) v S
Q077 (4) v Q070 (4) v Q078 (4) v
M AT T E
MATTE MATTE SNOW MATTE BISCUIT MATTE ALMOND MATTE MATTE MATTE MATTE SAND
DESIGNER MIST 0092 (1) u 0087 (1) CAPPUCCINO MUSHROOM NUTMEG DOLL AR
WHITE 0061 (1) u 0095 (1) 0009 (1) 0041 (2) 0039 (2) 0067 (1)
MATTE MATTE DILL MATTE GL ACIER MATTE BIMINI MATTE LIGHT MATTE SMOKEY MATTE BL ACK
ARTICHOKE PICKLE 0062 (1) BLUE SMOKE 0004 (1) QUARTZ 0064 (2) u
0069 (1) l 0066 (2) l 0085 (2) l 0028 (2) l
(1), (2), (3), (4) & (5) notations indicate price group, (1) being the least expensive.
u Available in chair rail v These colors are special order and require 1-2 weeks for delivery from date of order.
S Subject to crazing, do not use black grout. l These colors are made to order and require 6-8 weeks for delivery from date of order.
B R I G H T & M AT T E ™
G L A Z E D C E R A M I C WA L L
SIZES INSTALL ATION & PRICING

SQ. FT./ PIECES/ RECOMMENDED GROUT JOINT: SHADE VARIATION
THICKNESS Wall: 1/16"
CARTON CARTON
RELATIVE PRICING: Low to Medium
LOW
6x6 6" x 6" (V1)
5/16" 12.50 50
Wall Tile (15.20 cm x 15.20 cm)
Wall tile size PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

WALL
ASTM#
RESULT
4-1/4 x 4-1/4 4-1/4" x 4-1/4"
5/16" 12.50 100 Water Absorption C373 < 20.0%
Wall Tile (10.80 cm x 10.80 cm)
Breaking Strength C648 120 - 230 lbs.
Scratch Hardness MOHS 4.0 - 6.0
TRIM Chemical Resistance C650 Resistant
PIECES/
NUMBER GROUP Abrasion Resistance C1027 N/A
CARTON
Wall Bullnose (6" side) 2x6 S-4269 100 1 n , 2 s , 3, 4, 5 For additional information on test results, visit us at:
55kg-105kg
americanolean.com/information/TestResults.
Wall Bullnose Corner 2x2 SN-4269 250 1 n , 2 s , 3, 4, 5
USAGE
Wall Bullnose 4-1/4 x 4-1/4 S-4449 100 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
FLOORS WALLS COUNTERTOPS
Wall Bullnose Corner 4-1/4 x 4-1/4 SCRL-4449 100 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Wall Bullnose 6x6 S-4669 50 1, 2, 4

F W C
Wall Bullnose Corner 6x6 SCRL-4669 50 1, 2, 4
Radius Bullnose 4-1/4 x 4-1/4 A-4402 84 1n, 4

APPLICATIONS
TARGET
SUITABLE
Radius Bullnose Corner 4-1/4 x 4-1/4 ACRL-4402 30 1n, 4 DCOF WET
Radius Bullnose 6x6 A-3602 44 1n Dry & Level – Interior Floor N/A
Radius Bullnose Corner 6x6 ACRL-3602 20 1n

Wet & Level – Interior Floor ≥ 0.42
Radius Bullnose (6" side) 2x6 A-4200 100 1 n , 2 s , 3, 4, 5
Shower Floors (Residential or Light Commercial) ≥ 0.42
Radius Bullnose Outcorner 2x2 AN-4200 200 1 n , 2 s , 3, 4, 5
Exterior Floor Applications
Cove Base 4-1/4 x 4-1/4 A-3401 84 1, 2, 4 (including pool decking & other wet areas with ≥ 0.60
Cove Base Corner minimal footwear)
4-1/4 x 4-1/4 ACR/L-3401 30 1n, 4
Left or Right
Cove Base Corner Ramps & Inclines ≥ 0.65
4-1/4 x 4-1/4 SCR/L-3401 30 1, 2, 4
Left or Right
Cove Base 6x6 A-3601 44 1 n , 2s , 4 Walls/Backsplashes N/A
Cove Base Corner *

6x6 SCR/L-3601 20 1 n , 2s , 4 Countertops N/A
Left or Right
Sanitary Cove Base
4-1/4 x 6 S-3419T 60 1 n , 2s , 4
(6" side) Pool Linings N/A
Sanitary Cove Base Corner
4-1/4 x 6 SCR/L-3419T 20 1 n , 2s , 4
Left or Right
A DCOF value of ≥ 0.42 is the standard for tiles specified for level interior
Sanitary Cove Base 6x6 S-3619T 40 1n, 4 spaces expected to be walked upon when wet, as stated in ANSI A137.1-2012,
Section 9.6. For more information about DCOF and the DCOF AcuTest™, visit
Sanitary Cove Base Corner
6x6 SCR/L-3619T 20 1 6n , 4 americanolean.com/DCOF.
Left or Right
V-Cap 2x6 WA-8262 66 1 6n , 2H APPLICATION NOTES:
Suitable for exterior applications in non-freezing climates, when proper installation
V-Cap Outcorner 2x2 WAC-8262 40 1 6n , 2H methods are followed.
* Matte finish only. Darker colors may show scratches.
V-Cap In-Corner : 2x2 WAM-8262 200 1 6n
NOTES
Quarter Round 3/4 x 6 A-106 152 1 n , 2s , 4
Since there are variations in all fired ceramic and natural products, tile and trim supplied
Quarter Round Outcorner 3/4 x 6 AC-106 120 1 n , 2s , 4 for your particular installation may not match samples. Final confirmation should be made
from actual tiles and trim prior to installation. Manufactured in accordance with ANSI
Quarter Round Corner v 3/4 x 3/4 AU-106 200 1 6n A137.1 standards.
For additional information refer to “Factors to Consider” at: americanolean.com/Factors.
: These items are special order (excluding colors 0025, 0090, & 0091), extended lead time may be required.
v These colors are special order and require 1-2 weeks lead time. POST-CONSUMER
RECYCLED MATERIALS
MADE IN THE U.S.A.
n Not available in 0009, 0044, 0050, 0062, 0065, 0067, 0078, 0081, & 0095.
s Not available in 0037, 0038, 0039, 0040, 0041, 0064, & 0071. PRE-CONSUMER
RECYCLED MATERIALS
6 Not available in 0045.
H Only available in 0049. All or select items within this series meet the requirements for these qualifications.
For more information visit americanolean.com.
Naturally, many of our

products can help you earn
LEED™ credits.
888.AOT.TILE
©2017 AMERICAN OLEAN (12/17)
3.5 USG Acoustical Ceiling Panel, SPEC 2.2

USG Acoustical Ceiling Panel USG Ceiling Solutions USG Radar Basic Acoustical
Panel 2110 ME2110
USG
Ceiling
Solutions USG RADAR™ BASIC ACOUSTICAL PANELS
Item #1, Spec 2.2
USG Radar™ Basic Acoustical

Panels/USG Donn® Brand
DX®/DXL™ Acoustical
Suspension System
TO ORDER SAMPLES, GO TO USG.COM OR CGCINC.COM
Flat White
050
FEATURES AND BENEFITS

• Nondirectional pattern with a fresh, clean appearance offers fast,
efficient installation.
• Economical, all-purpose ceiling pattern offered in many sizes.
• Optional Firecode® product designed to meet life-safety codes.
Lightly Textured Panel
• USDA Certified Biobased Product.8
APPLICATIONS SUBSTRATE
• Schools • Wet-formed mineral fiber
• Corridors
• Offices
• Retail stores
USG RADAR™ BASIC ACOUSTICAL PANELS ORDER SAMPLES/LITERATURE
USG: samplit@usg.com
fax: 888 874-2348 | usg.com
FOR MOST UP-TO-DATE
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
AND LEED REPORT TOOL
CGC: contact Sales Representative usgdesignstudio.com
cgcdesignstudio.com
TECHNICAL SERVICES
800 USG.4YOU (874-4968)
PRODUCT CERTIFIED YEAR HIGH RECYCLED
FOR LOW CHEMICAL AVAILABILITY CONTENT
EMISSIONS: 2110, 2120, 2310, 2742
UL.COM/GG
UL 2818
UL Classified
Edge Panel Size Imperial Fire Item No. Imperial NRC CAC LR3 Color6 Grid VOC Recycled Panel
Metric (mm) Rating2 Metric (mm) Min. Options Emissions Content1 Cost
USG RADAR™ SQ 2'x2'x5/8" Class A 2110 0.55 33 0.83 White A,B Low 25% $
BASIC PANEL 600x600x15 ME2110
2'x2'x5/8" 2115 0.55 35 0.83 White A Low 48-51% $
2'x4'x5/8" Class A 2310 0.55 35 0.83 White A,B Low 25% $

600x1200x15 ME2310
2'x4'x5/8" 2315 0.55 35 0.83 White A Low 48-51% $
2'x5'x5/8" Class A 2619 0.55 35 0.83 White A,B Low 25% $
20"x60"x5/8" Class A 2617 0.55 35 0.83 White A,B Low 25% $

500x1500x15 ME2617
30"x60"x3/4" Class A 2618 0.60 35 0.83 White A,B Low 25% $
SLT 2'x2'x5/8" Class A 2120 0.55 33 0.83 White C Low 25% $

600x600x15 ME2120
2'x2'x5/8" 2125 0.55 35 0.83 White C Low 51-59%7 $
2'x4'x5/8" Class A 2320 0.55 35 0.83 White C Low 25% $
20"x60"x5/8" Class A 2627 0.55 35 0.83 White C Low 25% $
FLB 2'x2'x5/8" Class A 2130 0.55 33 0.83 White D,E,F,G Low 25% $
USG RADAR™ BASIC TILE4, 5 BESK 12"x12"x5/8" Class A 2990 0.505 405 0.83 White H Low 44% $$$
USG RADAR™ ILLUSION SLT 2'x4'x3/4" Class A 2742 0.55 35 0.83 White C Low 25-26% $$
BASIC TWO/24 PANEL
PATTERNS Illusion™ Two/24
The look of 2'x2' panels
Low Emissions (VOC) High Recycled Content Firecode®

Third party (GREENGUARD Gold) certified for low-emitting Classified as containing greater than 50% total
performance, meets California Department of Public Health’s recycled content. Total recycled content is based on
(CDPH) Standard Method v1.1 - 2010 (CA Section 01350). product composition of postconsumer and preconsumer
‘Certificates of Compliance’ for Low VOC Emissions are available (postindustrial) recycled content per FTC guidelines.
on usg.com and at productguide.ulenvironment.com.
GRID PROFILE OPTIONS A B C D E F G H

USG USG DXW™ USG USG Centricitee™ USG Fineline® USG Fineline® USG Identitee® USG DX®/DXL™
DX®/DXL™ DX®/DXL™ DXT™ DXF™ 1/8 DXFF™ DXI™ Concealed
PHYSICAL DATA/ Product literature Online tools Notes

Data sheet: SC2288 usgdesignstudio.com or cgcdesignstudio.com 1. For details, see LEED report tool at usgdesignstudio.com or cgcdesignstudio.com.
FOOTNOTES
ASTM E1264 classification Thermal resistance 2. Fire-rated items: see UL design details.
Type III, Form 2, Pattern C, E R-1.4 (Class A, 5/8" panels and tile)
and C, E, K R-1.7 (Class A, 3/4" panels) 3. LR values are shown as averages.
R-1.4 (Class A, 15 mm panels) 4. Contact USG for adhesive recommendation for 12"x12" glue-up applications.
ASTM E84 and CAN/ULC S102 R-1.6 (Firecode®, 5/8" panels)
surface-burning characteristics 5. Not UL Classified for acoustics.
Class A Maximum backloading
Flame spread: 25 or less See USG 30-Year Limited System Warranty Commercial 6. No Flat Black or 'Deeptones' are available on any reveal edge or USG Radar™
Notice Firecode® panel.
Smoke developed: 50 or less Applications (SC2102).
The information in this document
is subject to change without notice. UL Type Maintenance 7. Recycled content not available at all plants.
CGC Inc. or USG Corp. assumes FR-83 Can be cleaned easily with a soft brush or vacuum.
no responsibility for any errors that 8. This product has achieved both BioPreferred initiatives: Federal Procurement
may inadvertently appear in this Weight Metric sizes available Preference and Certified Product Labeling. See the complete listing of all USG ceiling
document. 0.61–1.15 lb./sq. ft. Contact sales for minimum quantities and lead times. panels on biopreferred.gov website.
SC2288/rev. 8-18 Manufactured by The trademarks USG, CGC, CENTRICITEE, DONN, DX, DXF, DXFF, DXI, DXL, Safety First! Follow good safety/industrial hygiene
© 2018 USG Corporation and/or USG Interiors, LLC DXT, DXW, FINELINE, FIRECODE, IDENTITEE, RADAR, IT’S YOUR WORLD. practices during installation. Wear appropriate personal
its affiliates. All rights reserved. 550 West Adams Street BUILD IT., the USG/CGC logo, the design elements and colors, and related protective equipment. Read SDS and literature before
Printed in USA Chicago, IL 60661 marks are trademarks of USG Corporation or its affiliates. specification and installation.
3.5 USG Acoustical Suspension System, SPEC 2.2

USG Acoustical Suspension USG Ceiling Solutions USG Donn Brand DX/DXL
system
USG DONN® BRAND DX®/DXL™ ORDER SAMPLES/LITERATURE
USG: samplit@usg.com
fax: 888 874-2348 | usg.com
FOR MOST UP-TO-DATE
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
AND LEED REPORT TOOL
ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM CGC: contact Sales Representative usgdesignstudio.com
cgcdesignstudio.com
TECHNICAL SERVICES
800 USG.4YOU (874-4968)
YEAR LIMITED SYSTEM HIGH RECYCLED
WARRANTY CONTENT
• No Visible Sag
• Mold/Mildew Protection
Seismic Design Category1 Rated Load2

ASTM Class Length Height Item No. Fire Color4, 9 IBC ICC-ES Evaluated 4' Hanger 5' 6' Hanger
Rating3 Installation Spacing Hanger Spacing8
Spacing
15/16" TEE SYSTEM10 Intermediate 12' USG DX/DXL24 Flat White A-C 7/8" Molding 12 lb./LF 6.1 lb./ 3.6 lb./LF
Duty 3600 mm 1.64" (42 mm) Standard ACM7 Clip LF
Main Tee
Advantage
CGC DX/DXL24HRC
1.5" (38 mm)
Heavy Duty 12' USG DX/DXL267 Flat White A-F 7/8" Molding 16 lb./LF 7.3 lb./LF 4.9 lb./LF
3600 mm 1.64" (42 mm) Standard ACM7 Clip
DX/DXL26HRC
Advantage
CGC
1.5" (38 mm)
Cross Tee 1" 2' 1" DX/DXL216 Flat White

600 mm 25 mm Standard and Advantage
DX/DXL216HRC
Cross Tee 1-1/2" 20" 1" (25 mm) DX2016 Class A Flat White
30" 1" (25 mm) DX3016 Class A Flat White
3' 1-1/2" (38 mm) DX324 Class A Flat White
4' 1-1/2" DX/DXL424 Flat White
1200 mm 38 mm Standard and Advantage
DX/DXL424HRC
DX4225, 7, 9 Class A Flat White

Standard and Advantage
DX422HRC5
4' (1200 mm) 1" (25 mm) DX416 Class A Flat White
4' (1200 mm) 1-1/2" (38 mm) DX426 HD Class A Flat White
5' (1500 mm) 1-1/2" (38 mm) DX/DXL524 Flat White
Standard
Wall Angle Length Item No. Color
MOLDING 6, 7, 8, 10 10' M20SM-2 Flat White

2" 3000 mm
2"
12' M7 Flat White

7/8" 3600 mm Standard and Advantage
7/8"
M7HRC
Shadowline10 10' MS2745 Flat White

7/8"
3000 mm Custom
9/32"
11/4" 3/4"
10' M205 Flat White

1" 3000 mm Custom
M20HD/Heavy Duty
2"
M20SM/Seismic
High Recycled Content Firecode®

Classified as containing greater than 50% total recycled content. Total recycled content is based on product
composition of postconsumer and preconsumer (postindustrial) recycled content per FTC guidelines.
PHYSICAL DATA/ Product literature and samples Online tools Notes
Data sheet: AC3167 usgdesignstudio.com or cgcdesignstudio.com 1. All USG DX®/DXL™ main-tee and cross-tee connections meet IBC
FOOTNOTES USG Logix™ system guide: IS268 requirements for tension and compression strength.
USG Logix™ architectural design guide: IS287 ICC Evaluation Service, LLC Report Compliance 2. Load test data shows uniform load in lb./LF based on simple span tests in
For areas under ICC jurisdiction, see ICC-ES accordance with ASTM C635 deflection limit of L/360.
USG Logix™ critical system dimensions: IS609
Evaluation Report ESR-1222 for allowable values 3. UL fire-rated listing, labeling and follow-up applies only to fire-rated
Sample flat white—seismic: 271370, Sample flat white: 215673, components.
Sample main tee: 206563, Sample flat black: 205100 and conditions of use. Reports are subject to
4. Color program for imperial only. Consult Customer Service for custom color
reexamination, revision and possible cancellation.
and metric-tee colors. Upcharges apply to Standard and Advantage colors.
Material Refer to usg.com for most current version. 5. Non-fire-rated only.
Notice Min. G30 hot-dipped galvanized steel body and cap. 6. Non-fire-rated applications may mix USG DX® and DXL™ parts.
Baked-on polyester paint. LA Research Report - RR 25764
The information in this document 7. Panels must be specified to be field-cut and field-revealed and to provide
Refer to usg.com for most current version. widest possible lay-on edge.
is subject to change without notice.
Installation 8. For USG DXL™, channel moldings are also acceptable in some designs. Check
CGC Inc. or USG Corp. assumes ASTM Load Compliance
no responsibility for any errors that
Install according to ASTM C636, ASTM E580, CISCA and USG UL Fire Resistance Directory for molding options.
requirements. Alternate installation methods may be used Classified as Light, Intermediate or Heavy Duty
may inadvertently appear in this 9. Brass and chrome available on limited items.
when approved by the authority having jurisdiction. when tested in accordance with ASTM C635. 10. Metric sizes listed are available with standard lead times. Other metric
document.
sizes available by RTQ.
AC3167/rev. 4-19 Manufactured by The trademarks USG, CGC, DONN, DX, DXL, ECLIPSE, FIRECODE, Safety First! Follow good safety/industrial hygiene
© 2019 USG Corporation and/or USG Interiors, LLC LOGIX, QUICK-RELEASE, IT’S YOUR WORLD. BUILD IT., the USG/CGC practices during installation. Wear appropriate personal
its affiliates. All rights reserved. 550 West Adams Street logo, the design elements and colors, and related marks are trademarks protective equipment. Read SDS and literature before
Printed in U.S.A. Chicago, IL 60661 of USG Corporation or its affiliates. specification and installation.
USG
Ceiling
Solutions USG DONN® BRAND DX®/DXL™
ACOUSTICAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Item #2, Spec 2.3
USG Donn® Brand DX®/DXL™

Acoustical Suspension System/
USG Eclipse™ Acoustical Panels
TO ORDER SAMPLES, GO TO USG.COM OR CGCINC.COM
STANDARD COLORS 4
Flat White Flat Black Parchment Manila Beige Straw Sandstone Taupe
050 205 103 246 142 143 090 107
Charcoal Silver Satin Brass9 Chrome9 Mist

534 002 065 066 053
ADVANTAGE COLORS 4
FEATURES AND BENEFITS
• 15/16" exposed tee system. Components for use in general and
fire-rated applications. Breeze Blue Grey Azure Slate Spruce Tuscany Sorbet Squash
2659 564 2660 568 567 2663 2658 2661
• Maximum economy and design simplicity.
• Compatible with USG Logix™ Integrated Ceiling System.
• USG DXL™ system features more than 80 UL designs (up to three hours).
Safari Halo Sienna Redwood Nectar Silvertone Quartz Bronze
• Cross-tee override-ends resist twisting and give a professionally 2662 206 565 566 546 052 082 033
finished look.
PROFILE EDGE DETAIL
• Meets or exceeds all national code requirements, including seismic.
• Proprietary Quick-Release™ cross tees.
• High recycled content (HRC) available.
• Custom colors available. Square Edge Shadowline Tapered Shadowline
• ICC-ES evaluated for seismic installations (ESR-1222). 15/16"
APPLICATIONS Shadowline Beveled Pedestals
• Fire-rated interior general-use areas

• USG Logix™ Integrated System
Nambe of Product Brand Code Item
Paints and Base Paints Sherwin Williams Differents Codes
Air Base José Enrique Soto Cano
Project: 12PLEX
Air Base located in Palmerola
Comayagua, Honduras
Summary of Areas
Area Substrate Application Colour
Exterior and Interior Concrete, Durock White

and 1 Coat
Product: B45WSA3 – Line
Gypsum Board
Multifunctional Sealer 6000, White
Outside Concrete, Durock

and 2 Coats SW 7723
Product: B36WSA351 – Excello Colony Buff
Gypsum Board
Weather Perfect Flat/Matte, EW
Inside Concrete, Durock

and 2 Coats SW 7552
Bauhaus Buff
Product: B36WSA351 – Excello Gypsum Board
Weather Perfect Flat/Matte, EW
Inside Bathrooms Concrete and

2 Coats SW 7552
Product: B36WSA151 – Excello Gypsum Board Bauhaus Buff
Weather Perfect Satin, EW
False Ceiling, Bathrooms

Gypsum Board 2 Coats White
Product: B36WSA151 – Excello Base E.W.
Weather Perfect Satin, EW
Project: 12PLEX
Comayagua, Honduras
Summary of Areas
Area Substrate Application Colour

Exterior / Interior / Metals in General
Metal Gray
2 Coats
Product: B50ASA1 – KEM Kromik Anticorrosive Line
Universal Metal Primer
Metal Doors and Frames, Outside

Product: B53TSA4054 – Kem Enamel B4NSA8
Industrial System 4000 High Gloss, UD Metal 2 Coats
Mixing Range: 16:1 Tabacco Cafe
Catalyzed with B65VSA2-1/16
Polyurethane Reducer R8KSA3-1
Metal Doors and Frames, Inside

Product: B53WSA4051 – Kem Enamel B4NSA1
Industrial System 4000 High Gloss, EW Metal 2 Coats
Mix Ratio: 16:1 Soft Beige
Catalyzed with B65VSA2-1/16
Polyurethane Reducer R8KSA3-1
Outside Handrail
SW 7723
Product: F80WSA51 – Kem Enamel Metal 2 Coats
Industrial Fast Dry System 4000 High Gloss Colony Buff
Base E.W. / Industrial Reducer R2K4-1
Project: 12PLEX
Comayagua, Honduras
Detail of Areas
Area: Outside
Substrate: Concrete, Durock and Gypsum Board
Application: 2 Coats
Color: SW 7723 / COLONY BUFF
Product: B36WSA351 – Excello Weather Perfect

Flat/Matte, EW
This product is available in this All stores nationwide

Sherwin Williams location: Nearest store, location:
Store #8, Boulevard Roberto Romero Larios in front of
Industrial Zúniga, bricks manufacture.
Telephone: 2771 9699
Comments Painting on bases to prepare color

Additional: Formula 100% acrylic; resistance to alkalinity
Reference Images:
Project: 12PLEX
Comayagua, Honduras
Detail of Areas
Area: Inside
Substrate: Concrete, Durock and Gypsum Board
Color: SW 7552 / BAUHAUS BUFF
Product: B36WSA351 – Excello Weather Perfect

Flat/Matte, EW

Comments Additional: Painting on bases to prepare color

Formula 100% acrylic; resistance to alkalinity
Reference Images:
Project: 12PLEX
Comayagua, Honduras
Detail of Areas
Area: Inside Bathrooms
Substrate: Concrete and Gypsum Board
Color: SW 7552 / BAUHAUS BUFF
Product: B36WSA151 – Excello Weather Perfect Satin, EW
This product is available in this All our store nationwide

Sherwin Williams location: Nearest tent, location:
Tend #8, Boulevard Roberto Romero Larios in front of
Industrial Zúniga Bricks Manufacture.

Reference Images:
Project: 12PLEX
Comayagua, Honduras
Detail of Areas
Area: False Ceiling, Bathrooms
Substrate: Gypsum Board
Color: White / Base
Product: B36WSA151 – Excello Weather Perfect Satin, EW


Reference Images:
Project: 12PLEX
Comayagua, Honduras
Detail of Areas
Area: Metal Doors and Frames, Outside
Substrate: Metal
Color: B4NSA8 / TABACCO CAFE
Product: B53TSA4054 – Kem Enamel Industrial System

4000 High Gloss, UD / Catalyzed with B65VSA2

Comments Additional: Industrial enamel painting, catalyzed

Polyurethane Reducer R8KSA3
Reference Images:
Project: 12PLEX
Comayagua, Honduras
Detail of Areas
Area: Metal Doors and Frames, Inside
Substrate: Metal
Color: B4NSA1 / SOFT BEIGE
Product: B53WSA4051 – Kem Enamel Industrial System

4000 High Gloss, EW / Catalyzer with B65VSA2

Comments Additional: Industrial enamel painting, catalyzed

Polyurethane Reducer R8KSA3
Reference Images:
Project: 12PLEX
Comayagua, Honduras
Detail of Areas
Area: Outside Handrail
Substrate: Metal
Color: SW 7723 / COLONY BUFF
Product: B53WSA4051 – Kem Enamel Industrial System

4000 High Gloss, EW
This product is available in this All our store nationwide

Sherwin Williams location: Nearest tent, location:
Tend #8, Boulevard Roberto Romero Larios in front of
Industrial Zúniga Bricks Manufacture.
Comments Additional: Industrial enamel painting,

Industrial Reducer R2K4
Reference Images:
4. Division 10 28 13 – Toilet Accessories
Content
4.1 Paper Towel Dispenser, SPEC 2.2.10
-ASI American Specialties, INC. Surface Mounted Roll Paper Towel Dispenser
4.2 Double Robe Hook, SPEC 2.2
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Double Robe Hook
4.3 Surface Mounted Shelf, SPEC 2.2
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Surface Mounted Shelf
4.4 Channel Frame Mirror , SPEC 2.2.2
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Channel Frame Mirror
4.5 Vinyl Shower Curtain, SPEC 2.2.4
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Vinyl Shower Curtain
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Shower Curtain Rod with Concealed, SPEC 2.2.5
4.6 Shower Mounted Towel Shelf, SPEC 2.2.8
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Surface Mounted Towel Shelf with Drying Rod and
Support Brackets
4.7 Soap Dish With Drain Holes, SPEC 2.2.7
- ASI American Specialties, INC. Soap Dish with Drain Holes
4.1 Paper Towel Dispenser, SPEC 2.2.10

Paper Towel Dispenser, SPEC ASI American Specialties Inc. 8165
2.2.10
MODEL No: 8165

ISSUED: 1-87
441 Saw Mill River Road, Yonkers, NY 10701 (914) 476-9000 REVISED: 9-96
SURFACE MOUNTED ROLL PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER
SPECIFICATION
Surface Mounted Roll Paper Towel Holder with controlled delivery spindle shall hold and dispense all standard core roll paper towels up to 6"
(152mm) in dia. and shall be fabricated of die cast aluminum with a satin matte silver-gray finish. The “no waste” rocking action spindle shall be
fabricated of impact resistant, ABS thermoplastic and be theft resistant with a concealed release mechanism. Spindle shall rotate 1/2 revolution for
each operation and return to its original position. Roll core shall not be removable until paper is exhausted.
Surface Mounted Roll Paper Towel Holder (controlled delivery) shall be Model No 8165 as fabricated by American Specialties, Inc. 441
Saw Mill River Road Yonkers, New York 10701-4913
INSTALLATION
Unit is surface mounted on wall using N o10 self tapping screws (supplied). For compliance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines, unit should be
installed so that roll centerline is 54" (1372mm) maximum above finished floor (AFF) if clear floor side reach access is provided or 48" (1219mm)
max. AFF if clear floor forward reach access is provided or 46" (1168mm) max. AFF if side reach over an obstruction is only provided (i.e. vanity).
OPERATION
Spindle revolves 1/2 revolution for each operation and then returns to its original position. Paper towel roll core prevents access to release pin and
cannot be removed from spindle until exhausted. Unit is replenished by releasing a concealed pin which in turn releases a spring lock mechanism
on spindle.
THIS MANUFACTURER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE CHANGES IN DESIGN OR DIMENSIONS WITHOUT FORMAL NOTICE
4.2 Double Robe Hook, SPEC 2.2

Double Robe Hook, SPEC 2.2 ASI American Specialties INC. 7345
Item #2, Spec 2.2
AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC.

MODEL No: 7345
441 Saw Mill River Road, Yonkers, NY 10701 (914) 476-9000 ISSUED: 1-87
www.americanspecialties.com REVISED: 1-06
DOUBLE ROBE HOOK
SPECIFICATION
Double Robe Hook shall be fabricated of stainless steel alloy 18-8, type 304. Post shall be 1/2" x 1" (13mm x 25mm)
rectangular tubing with formed mounting flange and bracket welded on end. Bow plate shall be 14 gauge, 4" x 1" (102mm x
25mm) with radiused corners and internally welded to outer end. Mounting plate shall be included and shall be 18 gauge. A
stainless steel setscrew shall be provided on bottom perimeter of flange to lock unit to mounting plate. Surface finish shall be
bright or satin as chosen by option and indicated by code suffix.
Double Robe Hook shall be Model No 7345-B or No 7345-S of American Specialties, Inc., 441 Saw Mill River Road,
Yonkers, New York 10701-4913
INSTALLATION
Surface mount unit on door back or wall using No 10 self tapping screws (by others) through holes provided in mounting plate
into suitable prepared mountings (by others) or other suitable mounting hardware (by others) to suit door or wall conditions.
Hang post and flange assembly on mounting plate and tighten setscrew to lock unit to plate. For compliance with ICC/ANSI
A-117.1-2003 and ADA Accessibility Guidelines install unit with top of hook 48" (1219mm) maximum above finished floor
(MAX AFF) if clear floor forward reach or if clear floor side reach access only is provided or 46" (1168mm) MAX AFF if side
reach access over an obstruction (e.g. vanity) with reach depth greater than 10" (254mm) and less than 25" (635mm) is only
provided or 44" (1118mm) MAX AFF if forward reach over an obstruction with reach depth greater than 20" (508mm) and
less than 25" (635mm) is only provided. For general utility install hook with centerline of mounting plate 68" (1727mm) AFF.
OPERATION
Hook is suitable for robes or clothing and small carry bags.
Accessory Specialties AMERICAN DISPENSER Desert Ray Products ,INC.
4.3 Surface Mounted Shelf, SPEC 2.2

Surface Mounted Shelf, SPEC ASI American Specialties INC. 0692
2.2
Item #3, Spec 2.2
MODEL No: 0692 SERIES

SURFACE MOUNTED SHELF
SPECIFICATION
Surface Mounted Shelf shall be fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, type 304. Brackets shall be 16 gauge and shelf shall be 18
gauge, with a 1/2" (13) lip on all four (4) sides. Front lip shall be hemmed under for safety. All exposed surfaces shall be No 4 satin
finish and shall be protected during shipment with PVC film easily removable after installation. Structural assembly of shelf
and bracket supports shall be of welded construction. Shelf shall be sized and brackets located as per standard schedule or shall be
custom fabricated to customer supplied drawing. Scheduled shelves equal to or less than 8" (203) deep shall have standard 4" (102)
high brackets and shelves in the depth range greater than 8" (203) to 12" (305) shall have 6" (152) high brackets. Consult factory for
shelves deeper than 12" (305).
Surface Mounted Shelf shall be Model No 0692-xxx as manufactured by American Specialties, Inc., 441 Saw Mill River Road,
SCHEDULE OF AVAILABILITY
SHELF DEPTH & MODEL SUFFIX ADDER SHELF LENGTH DIMENSIONS/BRACKET SPACING
5" 6" 8" specify

A = length B = spacing Number of brackets
depth/length depth/length depth/length depth/length
-512 -612 -812 -XX12 12" 6" 2

-516 -616 -816 -XX16 16" 10" 2
-518 -618 -818 -XX18 18" 12" 2
-524 -624 -824 -XX24 24" 18" 2
-530 -630 -830 -XX30 30" 12" 3
-536 -636 -836 -XX36 36" 15" 3
-548 -648 -848 -XX48 48" 14" 4
-560 -660 -860 -XX60 60" 18" 4
-572 -672 -872 -XX72 72" 16-1/2" 5
-5XX -6XX -8XX -XXXX AA" BB" NN
INSTALLATION
Unit is surface mounted on wall or partition using No 10 (M5) self-tapping screws or other appropriate fasteners (by others) through
holes provided in support brackets. Ensure that adequate in wall blocking or other reinforcement is provided (by others) to support
shelf and intended loading weight. For compliance with ADA Accessibility Guidelines unit should be installed so that shelf top is
between 48" (1219) maximum above finished floor (AFF) and 32" (813) minimum AFF. Typical for general utility is 42" (1067)
AFF or 18" (457) above washbasin.
OPERATION
Shelf is stable and stationary after proper and secure mounting to adequate wall reinforcement or stud structure. Shelf is suitable for
wet (self-contained) or dry materials storage.
4.4 Channel Frame Mirror, SPEC 2.2.2

Channel Frame Mirror, SPEC ASI American Specialties INC. 0620
2.2.2
Item #4, Spec 2.2.2
MODEL №: 0620
441 Saw Mill River Road, Yonkers, NY 10701
(914) 476.9000 • (914) 476.0688 ISSUED: 01-87
www.americanspecialties.com
REVISED: 18 JUL 2019
CHANNEL FRAME MIRROR
5/8"
WIDTH 1" [25] [16]
TYP CHANNEL
1-3/4" [44] FRAME
TYP
1/2" [13]
TOP WALL
BRACKET
TOP MIRROR
BRACKET
'H' WALL MIRROR

BRACKET BACKPLATE
HEIGHT
BOTTOM WALL
3/4" [19] BRACKET
TYP
THEFT-RESISTANT
1/2" [13]
PICTORIAL VIEW NOTE
LOCKING SCREW
OUTLINE
Dimensions ALL DIM’S INCH [MM] OF MIRROR
VERTICAL SECTION
18" W x 24" H ILLUSTRATION FOR REF ONLY AND NTS
FOR CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS SEE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS

IN PRODUCT CARE & MAINTENANCE BULLETIN (PCM) ON ASI WEBSITE
SPECIFICATION
Channel Frame Mirror shall have frame of 20 gauge type 304 stainless steel alloy 18-8, with mitered corners. Mirror glazing shall be _____
(insert glazing option) and shall be warranted for 15 years against silver spoilage. All edges of mirror shall be protected by friction and chafe
absorbing fillers. Back of mirror shall be protected by full size shock-absorbing water-resistant filler and full size one piece 20 gauge corrosion
protected steel. Top and bottom wall mounting brackets shall be 20 gauge corrosion protected steel and shall be spot welded into “H” hanger.
Mirror shall be secured to lower bracket with a Phillips Pan Head locking screw.
Channel Frame Mirror shall be Model № 0620-_____(insert glazing option)________________ (note size, W x H) as manufactured by
American Specialties, Inc., 441 Saw Mill River Road, Yonkers, New York 10701-4913
MATERIALS
Frame: 20 gauge type 304, 18-8, stainless steel. Roll-formed one piece construction. Exposed surfaces shall be satin finish. Edges and
corners are burr free.
Glass: Standard glazing is № 1 quality, 1/4" [6,4] thick plate/float, silver coated and hermetically sealed with a uniform copper plating,
and warranted against silver spoilage for 15 years. Mirrors meet Federal Spec DD-M-411C, ASTM C- 1503, and ASTM C-1036-
91.
Filler: Expanded polyethylene microcell foam sheet material, abrasion resistant and shock absorbing, water resistant, 1/8" [3,2] total layer
thickness.
FABRICATION NOTE FOR SPECIFICATION

Mirrors larger than 32sq. Ft. [2.97m2 ] are fabricated in two (2) or more sections to provide installation and handling ease.
INSTALLATION
Install “H” wall brackets level and plumb per diagram location using ONLY № 8 or № 10 Pan Head screws (by others). Hang mirror on
brackets and tighten locking screw (№ 6-32F x 3/4" Philips Pan Head, supplied separately taped to mirror back) at bottom (note: this screw
should be started prior to hanging mirror on wall bracket). For compliance with 2010 ADA Accessibility Standards and ABA Standards 2015,
bottom edge of reflecting surface should be no higher than 40" [1016] AFF (Above Finished Floor).
GLAZING OPTIONS
Units are supplied with 1/4" [6] thick plate glass. Other glazing options are available. For a complete description of any other available
glazing, see the MIRROR GLAZING OPTIONS char t.
4.5 Vinyl Shower Curtain, SPEC 2.2.4

Vinyl Shower Curtain, SPEC ASI American Specialties INC. 1200-V
2.2.4
Item #5, Spec 2.2.4
MODEL №: 1200-V
441 Saw Mill River Road, NY 10701 ISSUED: 01/87
(914) 476.9000 • (914) 476.0688
www.americanspecialties.com
REVISED: 21 SEP 2015
VINYL SHOWER CURTAIN
SPECIFICATION
Shower Curtain shall be fabricated of .008" [0,203] thick vinyl treated with Macrobiotic KV-33 anti-bacterial, anti-fungal and anti-
mildew agent, and flame retardant agents. Protection agents shall remain in effect after repeated low-temperature mild soap washing and
air-drying cycles. Top hem shall be 1-1/2" [38] wide, backing reinforced and heat-sealed above and below grommet row. Bottom hem
and vertical edges shall be plain edge. Clear anodized aluminum grommets with 3/8" inside diameter [Ø9.5] shall be machined into top
hem at 6-1/2" ± 1/2" [165 ± 13] intervals on centers starting at 1-1/4" ± 1/4" [32 ± 6] from edges. Color shall be white. Pattern is San
Suede Pebble Emboss № SS9700. Vinyl curtain shall conform to Federal Specification L-C-780-A, L-C-780-A amendment 2, ASTM G-
21-96 for fungal and mildew resistance and CID A-A-2398B.
Vinyl Shower Curtain shall be Model № 1200-Vxx (specify size per chart) of American Specialties, Inc., Yonkers, NY 10701-4913
INSTALLATION
For openings up to 42" [1067] wide curtains should be specified an additional 6" [152] wider than opening and 12" [305] wider for open-
ings exceeding 42" [1067]. Shower curtain should be attached with hooks (not provided, order separately) to rod (not provided, order
separately). Curtain hooks Model № 1200-SHU are recommended.
SIZE SPECIFICATION
OPENING XX OPENING XX OPENING XX
30" [762] 36" [914] 42" [1067] 48" [1219] 60" [1524] 72" [1829]
36" [914] 42" [1067] 48" [1219] 60" [1524] 72" [1829] 84" [2134]
HOOKS COUNT (1200-SHU SUGGESTED) REQUIRED
CURTAIN WIDTH HOOK COUNT CURTAIN WIDTH HOOK COUNT CURTAIN WIDTH HOOK COUNT
36" [914] 6 48" [1219] 8 72" [1829] 12

42" [1067] 7 60" [1524] 10 84" [2134] 14
4.6 Shower Curtain Rod with Concealed

Shower Curtain Rod With ASI American Specialties INC. 1224
Concealed SPEC 2.2.4
Item #6, Spec 2.2.8
MODEL No: 1224

AMERICAN SPECIALTIES, INC. ISSUED: 1-87
441 Saw Mill River Road, Yonkers, NY 10701 (914) 476-9000 REVISED: 3-99
SHOWER CURTAIN ROD WITH CONCEALED MOUNTING FLANGES
SPECIFICATION
Shower Curtain Rod with Concealed Mounting Flanges shall have rod fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, type 304, No20 gauge 1" dia. tubing.
Exposed finish shall be satin and shall be protected during shipment with a plastic bag. Length shall be as specified. Concealed Mounting Flanges
shall be chrome plated brass with a satin finish. Pair of flanges shall each consist of a wall mounting lug and a locking sleeve. One sleeve shall have
locking screw to prevent rod rotation. Mounting lugs shall be provided with (2) mounting holes to accept #10 round or pan head screws (furnished
by others).
Shower Curtain Rod with Concealed Mounting Flanges shall be Model No 1224-XXX as fabricated by American Specialties, Inc., 441 Saw
Mill River Road, Yonkers, New York 10701-4913
ORDERING NOTE 72" Long

Select length in inches (i.e. 48, 60, 120) to create Part Spec Order Number (i.e. 1224-60).
INSTALLATION
Rod is installed in straight section between two (2) mounting flanges. Rods longer than 72" (1829mm) require ceiling hanger Model No1224-C18.
For use with standard shower curtain model No’s 1200 or 1200-V having 72" (1829mm) length and standard hooks Model No1200-SHU unit should
be installed with rod centerline 74-1/2" (1892mm) AFF or 67" (1702mm) above tub rim to obtain 6" (152mm) bottom overlap.
Accessory Specialties AMERICAN DISPENSER Desert Ray Products

4.7 Shower Mounted Towel Shelf, SPEC 2.2.8

Shower Mounted Towel ASI American Specialties INC. 7310
Shelf, SPEC 2.2.8
Item #7, Spec 2.2.8

MODEL No: 7310
SURFACE MOUNTED TOWEL SHELF WITH DRYING ROD AND SUPPORT BRACKETS
SPECIFICATION
Surface Mounted Towel Shelf with Drying Rod and Support Brackets shall be fabricated of stainless steel alloy 18-8, type 304.
Shelf posts shall be 1/2" x 1" (13mm x 25mm) rectangular tubing with formed mounting flange and bracket welded on end.
Cross tubes shall be 3/8" diameter (Ø10mm) and shall be held in receiver holes in support posts. A solid stainless steel 1/4"
diameter (Ø 6.4mm) drying rod shall be attached at midpoint of support posts and support brackets shall be provided. Mounting
plates shall be included and shall be 18 gauge. Stainless steel setscrews shall be provided on bottom perimeter of flanges to
lock unit to mounting plates. Surface finish shall be bright or satin as chosen by option and indicated by code suffix. Length
shall be as chosen from schedule and indicated by code suffix.
Surface Mounted Towel Shelf with Drying Rod and Support Brackets shall be Model No 7310-B __or No 7310-S __ of
American Specialties, Inc., 441 Saw Mill River Road, Yonkers, New York 10701-4913
INSTALLATION
Surface mount unit on wall using No 10 self tapping screws (by others) through holes provided in mounting plates into suitable
prepared mountings (by others) or other suitable mounting hardware (by others) to suit wall conditions. Hang post and flange
assembly on mounting plates and tighten setscrews to lock unit to plates. For compliance with ICC/ANSI A-117.1-2003 and
ADA Accessibility Guidelines install unit with top of shelf 48" (1219mm) maximum above finished floor (MAX AFF) if clear
floor forward reach or if clear floor side reach access only is provided or 46" (1168mm) MAX AFF if side reach access over
an obstruction (e.g. vanity) with reach depth greater than 10" (254mm) and less than 25" (635mm) is only provided or 44"
(1118mm) MAX AFF if forward reach over an obstruction (e.g. commode) with reach depth greater than 20" (508mm) and
less than 25" (635mm) is only provided. For general utility install 68" (1727mm) MAX AFF.
LENGTHS AND FINISHES x MODEL N o

MODEL No
LENGTH
Bright Satin
18′′ (457mm) 7310-B18 7310-S18
24′′ (610mm) 7310-B24 7310-S24
4.8 Soap Dish with Drain Holes, SPEC 2.2.7

Soap Dish with Drain Holes, ASI American Specialties INC. 7320
SPEC 2.2.7
Item #8, Spec 2.2.7

MODEL No: 7320
SOAP DISH WITH DRAIN HOLES
SPECIFICATION
Soap Dish With Drain Holes shall be fabricated of stainless steel alloy 18-8, type 304. Soap dish shall be of drawn seamless
construction and shall be fabricated with integral ribs. Support post shall be 1" x 1/2" (25mm x 13mm) rectangular tubing with
formed mounting flange and bracket welded on end. A stainless steel setscrew shall be provided on bottom perimeter of
flange to lock unit to mounting plate. Mounting plate shall be provided and shall be 18 gauge. Surface finish shall be bright
or satin as chosen by option and indicated by code suffix.
Soap Dish With Drain Holes shall be Model No 7320-B or No 7320-S of American Specialties, Inc., 441 Saw Mill River Road,
INSTALLATION
Surface mount unit on wall using No10 self tapping screws (by others) through holes provided in mounting plate into suitable
prepared mountings (by others) or other suitable mounting hardware (by others) to suit wall conditions. Hang post and flange
assembly on mounting plate and tighten setscrew to lock unit to plate. For compliance with ICC/ANSI A-117.1-2003 and
ADA Accessibility Guidelines install unit with top of soap dish 48" (1219mm) maximum above finished floor (MAX AFF) if
clear floor forward reach or if clear floor side reach access only is provided or 46" (1168mm) MAX AFF if side reach access
over an obstruction (e.g. vanity) with reach depth greater than 10" (254mm) and less than 25" (635mm) is only provided or 44"
(1118mm) MAX AFF if forward reach over an obstruction with reach depth greater than 20" (508mm) and less than 25"
(635mm) is only provided. For general utility mount unit with top of soap dish 8" to 12" (203mm to 305mm) above vanity
basin.
OPERATION
Soap dish has raised ribs to elevate soap slightly above dish surface to promote drying. Drain holes in bottom of dish allow
excess water to drain away from soap.
5. Division 21- Fire Suppression
presupuestos@suprefuego.com
AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................... 2
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTION .................................................................................................... 2
3. EMERGENCY OPERATIONS .................................................................................................... 5
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PLAN, SCHEDULE, AND PROCEDURES..................................... 5
5. REPAIR ................................................................................................................................... 6
6. POINT OF CONTACT FOR FUTURE PURCHASES ..................................................................... 8
1
1. DESCRIPTION
FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM IN BUILDINGS 12PLEX PHASE I

This fire system is fed from the main underground pipe
through a PIV valve, this PIV valve cuts off the supply to
the building 12 plex phase I, has a riser located on the
outside, which feeds the sprinkler system inside each of
the levels.
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTION
2.1 START-UP OPERATION OF THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
To verify that the system is in service condition, the

manager must first notify the fire station before
performing the following steps:
2.1.1. Verify that the Main Drain Valve, auxiliary drain

valves, Test and Drain Valve (inspector test) “H”
is closed, "OFF" mode.
TEST and DRAIN

VALVE
A- Waterflow sensor
B- Check Valve w/ trim
C- Control Riser Valve
D- Test Header Control Valve
E- 2.5” Hose Valve
F- Fire Department Connection (FDC)
G- Main Drain Valve
H- Test and Drain Valve
I- Double check valve
RISER
2.1.2. The riser control valve is fully closed "C".
2
2.1.3. All PIV valves must be in the "open" position as

well as the double check valve that must be found
with the stems in the up position.
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY DOWN POSITION
PIV DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY UP POSITION
2.1.4. Slowly open the Riser control valve “C”, when the
water begins to flow, the flow sensor activates the
alarm and detection system.
2.1.5. Once the system is full

of water, place the
Test and Drain “H”
valve in “DRAIN” mode
to allow air purge in
the pipe, then make
sure it is fully closed
in “OFF” mode.
2.1.6. Notify the fire station that the system is ready for
operation.
2.2 DRAINING THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FOR REPLACEMENT OF

ACCESSORIES OR REPAIRS
The Sprinkler system shall be drained to make repairs or
replacements of sprinklers and / or accessories.
Before tampering with any valve or activating any alarm,
notify the fire department so that it does not signal a
false alarm.
3
2.2.1. First close the control valve “C” located on the

riser.
2.2.2. Place the test and drain valve “H” in the "DRAIN"
position, which is located at the outer end of the
building.
Drain
TESTan DRAIN VALVE
2.2.3. The certified technician must use the appropriate

tools to change the accessory that has a fault or
leak, or the sprinklers that must be replaced.
2.2.4. Once the accessory replacement operation is

completed, all the steps described in section No.1
(START-UP OPERATION OF THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM) of
this document must be followed.
2.3 TESTING THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

The objective of this test is to verify the time it takes
for the flow sensor to notify by notifying the horn lamp
(by activating the fire alarm and MNS Systems).
Before tampering with any valve or activating any alarm,
notify the fire department so that it does not signal a
false alarm.
2.3.1. Verify that the control valves are fully open and
the drain valves are closed.
4
2.3.2. The certified technician

must have a tool to take the
time and position himself
where the Test and Drain
valve is located, for this
the valve must be in the
"Test" position.
2.3.3. The technician must verify the test results are in

compliance to NFPA 25 and design parameters, if
not adjust the flow switch accordingly.
2.3.4. When finished, the test

and drain valve should
be returned to the
"OFF" position.
2.3.5. Notify the fire station that the system is ready

for operation.
3. EMERGENCY OPERATIONS
3.1. Make sure the fire is out! Make a complete
inspection of all areas covered by the system,
including areas not involved in the fire area.
3.2. Follow the steps described in section No.2

(DRAINING THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FOR REPLACEMENT OF
ACCESSORIES) of this document.
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PLAN, SCHEDULE, AND

PROCEDURES
4.1. View the latest edition of NFPA 25 for the
inspection, testing, and maintenance of water-
based fire protection systems.
5
4.2. Preventive maintenance.
Table 5.1.1.2 Summery of Sprinkler System Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance

Item Activity Frequency Reference
Control Valves Weekly/Monthly Chapter 13
Fire department connections Weekly/Monthly Chapter 13
Gauges (wet and deluge systems) Quarterly Chapter 13
Hanger/braces/supports Annually 5.2.3
Hydraulic design information sign Annually 5.2.5
5.2.7, 5.2.8,
Information sign Annually
5.2.9
Internal piping condition Chapter 14
Inspection
Pipe and Fittings Annually 5.2.2
Sprinklers Annually 5.2.1
Sprinklers Spare Annually 5.2.1.4
Supervisory signal devices (except valve Supervisory
Quarterly 5.2.4
switches)
System valves Chapter 13
Valve supervisory signal devices Quarterly 5.2.4
Waterflow alarm devices Quarterly 5.2.4
Control valves Chapter 13
Gauges 5 years Chapter 13
Main Drain Chapter 13
At 50 years and every
Sprinklers 5.3.1.1.1.6
10 years thereafter
At 20 years and every
Sprinklers (fast-response) 5.3.1.1.1.3
Test 10 years thereafter
Supervisory signal devices (except valve supervisory
5 years 5.3.1.1.2
switches)
System valves Chapter 13
Valve supervisory signal devices Chapter 13
Waterflow alarm devices (Mechanical) Quarterly 5.3.2.1
Waterflow alarm devices (vane and pressure switch type) Semiannually 5.3.2.2
Valves (all types) Maintenance Annually Chapter 13
Obstruction Investigation Chapter 14
See NFPA 25 -2017 to reference section numbers
5. REPAIR
5.1. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS: The spare sprinkler head box
will contain the recommended quantity of spare,
sprinklers per NFPA 13, along with a sprinkler head
and an NFPA 25-2017
List Of Spares Provided
# Description Unit Qty
Spare Head Box ( 6 Head ) with 1/2” NPT Standard Wrench

1 ea 1
1/2“ K4.9 155F Pendent White Residential Sprinkler model GL4910 -Globe
2 GL-4910+155-03 ea 3
1/2” K5.6 155F 3MM Upright Brass Quick Response Sprinkler model GL5615 Globe
3 ea 3
6
5.2. Supply Lists is made with the accessories who could

have any problem during the operation time. View the
data sheets.
5.3. The Repair Work - Hour is based taken when the fire
system is drained to start-up operation.
RECORD OF DESIGNATED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS DATA
Repair
Specification Manufacturer and Catalog, Model,
Description Composition Where Used Work-
Section and Serial Number
and Size Hours
FIRELOCK - 751
Grooved End Swing 4”
21 13 13.00 10 vertical alarm ck valve pre- Riser 6
Check Valve (751)
trimmer Grooved End
Retard Chamber For
Variable Pressure
FIRELOCK – SERIE 752
Wet Pipe Sprinkler 20 13 13.00 10 Riser 6
Systems 300 psi (20,7
bar)
Water Motor Alarm
Hydraulically
Operated 21 13 13.00 10 Series 760 FireLock Riser 6
Mechanical
Sprinkler Alarm
VICTAULIC - 10.92,SERIES 771H Riser and
Gate Valves 21 13 13.00 10 4" 6
OS&Y GROOVE x GROOVE Head Test
Gate Valves
Outside Screw and Riser in Riser
System Sensor
Yoke Valve 21 13 13.00 10 1”-12” and 6
Model OSY2
Supervisory Switch Underground
Pipe
Vane-type System Sensor
22 13 13.00 10 2" Riser 6
Waterflow Detector Model WFD20
CONNECTIONS
POTTER ROEMER-5710-
(FDC) Two-way with 4" x 2-1/2"
23 13 13.00 10 5734,Model 5721 Riser 6
Double clapper, 175 x 2-1/2"
Cap model 5941
PSI rated
Drain Line of
Test and Drain Valve AGF Manufacturing Inc.-
24 13 13.00 10 1" system 6
Threated CS2511A, Model 2511A
Sprinkler
Body Gate Valves NIBCO-2018,Model M-609-RWS - Underground
26 13 13.00 10 4" 24
(NRS) MJXMJ Pipe
Underground
Post Indicator for 4"
NIBCO-2018, NIP-1AU-RWGV, Pipe Body
NRS Gate Valve MJ 28 13 13.00 10 4" 24
Upright Indicator Posts Gate Valves
x MJ
(NRS)
Double Check Underground
29 13 13.00 10 ZURN, MODEL 350 4" 24
Detector Assemblies Pipe
1/2”x48“ Stainless
Steel Braided 30 13 13.00 10 SprinkFlex -SFB 1/2” Room 6
Sprinkler Hose UL/FM
1/2“ K4.9 155F

Pendent White Globe
30 13 13.00 10 1/2" Room 6
Residential Sprinkler GL-4910+155-03
Mechanical
1/2” K5.6 155F 3MM
Globe room and
Upright Brass Quick 31 13 13.00 10 1/2" 6
GL5615 electric
Response Sprinkler
room
Manufacturing time 6-8 Weeks
7
Import time and customs formalities 4 weeks
6. POINT OF CONTACT FOR FUTURE PURCHASES
21 13 13.00 10 - Fire Sprinkler System

Items: POTTER ROEMER
DISTRIBUTOR: POTTER ROEMER
8306 NW 14th Street
Miami, FL 33126
Phone: +1-833-744-3473
Items: TYCO
DISTRIBUTOR: TYCO
400 Pennbrook Parkway
Lansdale, PA 19446
Phone:+1- 215-362-0700
Items: VICTAULIC
DISTRIBUTOR: Louis P. Canuso Inc.
7522 Morris Court
Suite 101
Allentown, PA 18106
Phone: +1-610-366-7914
Items: System Sensor

DISTRIBUTOR: Guardian Fire Equipment Inc
3430 NW 38th St
Miami, FL 33142
Phone: +1- 305-633-0361
Items: NIBCO
DISTRIBUTOR: NIBCO INC.
1516 Middlebury Street
Elkhart, IN 46515-1167
Phone: +1- 312-859-380
Email: kellys@nibco.com
Items: AGF Manufacturing Inc.

DISTRIBUTOR: Viking Group, Inc.
5150 Beltway Dr. SE
Caledonia, Michigan 49316
Phone: +1-269-945-9501
Items: WATTS
DISTRIBUTOR: HAYWARD PIPE & SUPPLY CO.
3218 DIABLO AVE
8
HAYWARD, California 94545

Phone: +1-510-887-2700
9
6. Division 22- Plumbing
Content
6.1 Siphonic Dual Flush Elongated Toilet, SPEC 2.4.3
-American Standard H2Option Siphonic Dual Flush Elongated Toilet
6.2 Toilet Seat, SPEC 2.4
-American Standard Commercial Toilet Seat 5901
6.3 Single Control Lavatory Faucet, SPEC 2.4.1
-American Standard Reliant 3, Single Control Lavatory Faucet
6.4 Wall Hung Lavatory, SPEC 2.4.1
-American Standard Lucerne Wall Hung Lavatory 0.355.012
6.5 Semi Cast Grid Patent, SPEC 2.4.1
-DB Dearborn Semi-cast Grid Patent Overflow Plugs Technical Specification 760-1
6.6 Wall Mount Concealed, SPEC 2.4.1
-JOSAM Company Wall Mount Concealed Series 17120
6.7 Single Bowl Top Mount Sink, SPEC 2.4.4
-Omni Pro, Stainless Steel 25” x 22” x 8- 1/16” Single Bowl Top Mount Sink Model
OM2522-8-3
6.8 Sink Strainer, SPEC2.4.4
- MATCO-NORCA Sink Strainer SS-111
6.9 Single Handle Kitchen Faucet, SPEC2.4.4
-Omni Pro OPB-100C 8” single Handle Kitchen Faucet

Content
6.10 Floor Drains, 2.6.1
- JOSAM Company Floor Drain 30002 Series
- JOSAM Company Floor Drain S Series Type 55
- JOSAM Company Floor Drain “A” Series Type 5A
6.11 Shower Faucet 2.6.2
-Delta, Tub and Shower Faucet Shower Only T13220 Series
6.12 Wall Cleanout
- JOSAM Company, Cleanouts 58600-COT Series
6.13 Floor Cleanout
- JOSAM Company, Cleanouts 55002 Series

6.1 Siphonic Dual Flush Elongated Toilet, SPEC 2.4.3

Siphonic Dual Flush American Standard H2 Option Siphonic Dual
Elongated Toilet, SPEC 2.4.3 Flush Elongated Toilet
Item #7, Spec 2.4.3
H2OPTION SIPHONIC DUAL FLUSH
ELONGATED TOILET
VITREOUS CHINA
H2OPTION SIPHONIC DUAL FLUSH

ELONGATED TOILET
❑ 2887.216
• Vitreous china
• High efficiency, low consumption
- Full Flush (6.0 Lpf/1.6 gpf)
- Partial Flush (3.8 Lpf/1.0 gpf)
• Elongated siphon action bowl with direct-fed jet
• Meets EPA WaterSenseSM criteria
• Qualifies in LEEDS Program
• 305mm (12") rough-in
• Fully glazed 2" Trapway
• Generous 9" x 8" water surface area
• Chrome plated top mounted push button actuator
• Sanitary bar on bowl
• 2 color matched bolt caps
• 100% factory flush tested
• 5 Year Limited Warranty on Total Toilet
❑ 2887.516 Same as above, except with Tank with

AquaGuard Liner FINISHED WALL
29-3/4"
(756 mm)
1" ± 1/4"
Separate Component Parts:

(25mm ± 6mm)
8-1/2" 15"
(380 mm)
❑ 3706.216 Bowl (213 mm)
❑ 4339.216 Tank
❑ 4339.516 Tank with AquaGuard Liner
14"
C/L OF SEAT POST HOLES (356 mm)
5-1/2" (140 mm) CENTERS
Nominal Dimensions: 18-1/2"
(470 mm)
756 x 380 x 749mm SUPPLY
AS
(29-3/4" x 15" x 29-1/2") REQ'D
(92mm)
3-5/8 "
Fixture only, seat and supply by others 15"

(381 mm) *10"
(254 mm)
29-1/2"
(749 mm)
3/4"
(19 mm)
Compliance Certifications -
*6"
Meets or Exceeds the Following Specifications: 7"
(180 mm)
13-1/4"
(335 mm) FINISHED FLOOR
(152 mm)
9-1/2"
• ASME A112.19.2-2008/CSA B45.1-08 12"
(308 mm) C/L OF OUTLET
(238 mm)
• Los Angeles Department of Water and Power

Supplementary Purchase Specification for
Non-Adjustability
NOTES:
• US EPA WaterSenseSM criteria for HET's THIS COMBINATION IS DESIGNED TO ROUGH-IN AT A MINIMUM
DIMENSION OF 305MM (12") FROM FINISHED WALL TO C/L OF OUTLET.
* DIMENSION SHOWN FOR LOCATION OF SUPPLY IS SUGGESTED.
SUPPLY NOT INCLUDED WITH FIXTURE AND MUST BE ORDERED
To Be Specified: SEPARATELY.
❏ Color: ❏ White ❏ Bone ❏ Linen
❏ Seat: American Standard #5324.019 “Rise and IMPORTANT: Dimensions of fixtures are nominal and may vary within the
range of tolerance established by ANSI Standard A112.19.2
Shine" solid plastic closed front seat with cover. These measurements are subject to change or cancellation. No responsibility
is assumed for use of superseded or voided pages.
❏ Seat: American Standard #5311.012 “Laurel"
molded closed front seat with cover.
❏ Seat: American Standard #5321.110 EverClean™
Elongated Seat with Cover and Slow Close
Snap-Off hinges
❏ Alternate Seat:
❏ Supply with stop: Certified by
IAPMO R&T
13
© 2009 AS America Inc. Revised 7/09
6.2 Toilet Seat, SPEC 2.4

Toilet Seat, SPEC 2.4 American Standard 5901
Item #8, Spec 2.4.3
COMMERCIAL TOILET SEATS
COMMERCIAL TOILET SEATS
❑ 5901.100 Elongated Heavy Duty bowl open front seat

less cover
❑ 5901.100SS Same as 5901.100 with self-sustaining hinge
and EverClean® Surface
❑ 5901.110T Same as 5901.100 and EverClean® Surface
• Open front toilet seat less cover

• Injection molded solid polypropylene
• Fits elongated bowl
• Features large molded-in bumpers
• External check hinge with 304 Series stainless steel hinge
posts stops seat 11° beyond vertical
• EverClean® silver-based surface permanently inhibits the growth
5901
of stain and odor causing bacteria, mold and mildew on the
surface. EverClean® surface does not protect against disease
causing bacteria.
To Be Specified:
❏ Color: ❏
White
Model # 5901
A 18-9/16" (471mm)
B 14-3/8" (365mm)
C 7-7/8" (200mm)
A
D 3-1/2" (89mm) C
E 5-1/2" (140mm)
Ring Thickness 7/8" (22mm)
Ring Thickness
1" (25mm) D
with Bumper
© 2018 AS America Inc.

M169
spec_5901_seats_12/18 -Rev. D
6.3 Single Control Lavatory Faucet, SPEC 2.4.1

Single Control Lavatory American Standard Single Control Lavatory
Faucet, SPEC 2.4.1
Item #9, Spec 2.4.1
RELIANT® 3
SINGLE CONTROL LAVATORY FAUCET
0.5 GPM
MODEL NUMBER:
❏ 7385.058 Reliant 3 Single Control Centerset
Indexed metal lever handle. Metal Speed Connect ® drain.
0.5 gpm pressure compensating vandal resistant spray.
Metal lever handle. Grid drain LESS pop-up hole.
Indexed metal lever handle. LESS drain. LESS pop-up hole.
142 mm
(5-5/8") 154 mm
(6-1/16")
EXTRA LONG HANDLE
117 mm
(4-5/8")
STANDARD HANDLE 102 mm

143 mm (4")
(5-5/8")
98 mm
(3-7/8")
32 mm
30mm (1-1/4")DIA. 498 mm
66 mm (1-1/4") MOUNTING (19-5/8")
123 mm (2-5/8")
(4-7/8") HOLE
63 mm
(2-1/2")
BRAIDED
(32 mm) O.D.
FLEXIBLE
(1-1/4" O.D.) PRODUCT FEATURES:
SUPPLY HOSES
WITH 3/8" Pressure Compensating Spray: Provides a constant water
COMPRESSION flow of 0.5 gpm throughout the pressure range.
CONNECTORS
Cast Brass Waterway with Flexible Supply Hoses:
GENERAL DESCRIPTION: Strong and durable. Less potential for leaks.
All metal body with indexed metal lever handle or optional Ceramic Disc Valve Cartridge: Assures smooth, precise valve
extra long lever handle. Washerless 47 mm ceramic disc control and a lifetime of drip-free, maintenance-free performance.
valve cartridge with integral hot limit safety stop. Durable Adjustable Hot Limit Safety Stop: Limits the amount of hot
cast brass waterway. 20" (500 mm) long flexible stainless water allowed to mix with cold. Reduces the risk of accidental
steel drain cable is pre-assembled to faucet body scalding.
(on 7385.058). Metal Speed Connect ® drain body (on
Lead Free: Faucet contains ≤ 0.25% total lead content by
7385.058) with 1-1/4" (32 mm) tail piece. Braided flexible
weighted average.
supply hoses with 3/8" compression connections.
Pressure compensating vandal resistant spray with Simple One-Person Installation: Faucet drops in from top.
0.5 gpm/1.9 L/min. maximum flow rate. Quick spin nuts secure faucet in place.
SUGGESTED SPECIFICATION
Single control lavatory fitting shall feature an all metal body with metal lever handle. Shall feature a cast brass waterway with
flexible hose connections. Shall also feature a washerless ceramic disc valve cartridge with integral hot limit safety stop. Shall
feature water conserving vandal resistant 0.5 gpm/1.9 L/min. pressure compensating spray. Shall also feature a metal drain
body with stainless steel cable actuation. Fitting shall be American Standard Model # 7385.05__.___.
© 2015 AS America, Inc. Revised 12/15

RELIANT® 3
SINGLE CONTROL LAVATORY FAUCET
0.5 GPM
FLOW RATE*
CODES AND STANDARDS
These products meet or exceed the following 0.5
GALLONS PER MINUTE

codes and standards: 0.4
ANSI A117.1 0.3

ASME A112.18.1 0.2
NSF 61/Section 9 and Annex G
CSA B125.1 0.1
0.0
20 40 60 80
INLET PRESSURE (PSI)
*Flow rates shown are for mixed hot and cold.
Finish
Option
Polished
Chrome
Product
Number Description 002
Reliant 3 Single Control Centerset. Indexed (Red/Blue) metal lever handle.

7385.058
Metal Speed Connect ® drain. Pressure compensating vandal resistant 0.5 gpm spray.
Reliant 3 Single Control Centerset. Indexed (Red/Blue) metal lever handle. with grid drain,
7385.053
LESS pop-up hole. Pressure compensating vandal resistant 0.5 gpm spray.
Reliant 3 Single Control Centerset. Indexed (Red/Blue) metal lever handle. Less drain, LESS
7385.050 pop-up hole. Pressure compensating vandal resistant 0.5 gpm spray.
Meets the American Disabilities Act Guidelines and ANSI A117.1

Requirements for the physically challenged.
Parts
AVAILABLE MODIFICATIONS***
Suffix**
Extra Long Handle ___LH
**To modify a product, add suffix after the 4th digit (ex. 2064F05101.002)
***Modified product models are NOT WaterSense certified.
© 2015 AS America, Inc. Revised 12/15

6.4 Wall Hung Lavatory, SPEC 2.4.1

Wall Hung Lavatory, SPEC American Standard 0.355.012
2.4.1
LUCERNE™
WALL-HUNG LAVATORY
VITREOUS CHINA
BARRIER FREE
LUCERNE™ WALL-HUNG LAVATORY

• Wall-hung sink
• Vitreous china
• Front overflow
• D-shaped bowl
• Self-draining deck area with contoured
back and side splash shields
• Faucet ledge
• Compliant with Texas accessibility standard
(TAS) for children age group 13 and up
Faucet holes on 203mm (8") centers (Illus.):

❏ 0356.028 For exposed bracket support
Shown with 4801.862 Amarilis Heritage
faucet with Triune Cross handles (not included)
❏ 0356.015 For wall hanger (included) or
concealed arms support
❏ 0356.915 For wall hanger (included) or 0356.028
• Less overflow
Faucet holes on 102mm (4") centers:

• Less overflow
Single center faucet hole (Illus.):

Shown with 1340.000 metering faucet
(not included)
• Less overflow 0356.041
concealed arms support SEE FOLLOWING PAGES FOR ROUGHING-IN DIMENSIONS
• Single faucet hole on right
• Single faucet hole on right To Be Specified:
❏ Color: ❏ White
Nominal Dimensions: ❏ Faucet*:
521 x 464mm ❏ Faucet Finish:
(20-1/2" x 18-1/4") ❏ Supplies:
Bowl sizes: ❏ 1-1/4" Trap:
381mm (15") wide ❏ Nipple:
254mm (10") front to back ❏ Bracket Support (by others):
165mm (6-1/2") deep ❏ Concealed Arms Support (by others):
Compliance Certifications -
Meets or Exceeds the Following Specifications: * See faucet section for additional models available
• ASME A112.19.2 / CSA B45.1 for Vitreous
China Fixtures MEETS THE AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT GUIDE-
LINES AND ANSI A117.1 ACCESSIBLE AND USABLE
BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES - CHECK LOCAL CODES.
Top of front rim mounted 864mm (34") from finished floor.
M37
spec_0355-0356 Lucerne WallHung Lavs Rev. A 8/16
LUCERNE™
WALL-HUNG LAVATORY
VITREOUS CHINA
BARRIER FREE
0356.028 8" CTRS FOR EXPOSED BRACKET SUPPORT 0355.027 4" CTRS FOR EXPOSED BRACKET SUPPORT
0356.015 8" CTRS FOR WALL HANGER 0355.012 4" CTRS FOR WALL HANGER OR
OR CONCEALED ARMS CONCEALED ARMS
0356.915 LESS OVERFLOW 0355.912 LESS OVERFLOW
102mm 86mm 86mm

102mm
(4") (3-3/8") (3-3/8")
FINISHED FINISHED (4") FINISHED
WALL WALL WALL
203mm 203mm
(8") (8")
152mm 152mm
(6") (6")
464mm 102mm 464mm

(18-1/4") (4") (18-1/4")
152 mm 203mm 152mm
(6") (8") (6")
8mm 8mm
(5/16") (5/16")
(6) 25mm
(6) 25mm
(1") DIA.
(1") DIA.
ACCESS
ACCESS 13mm 13mm
HOLES
HOLES FOR (1/2") (1/2")
521mm FOR 521mm
CONC. ARMS
(20-1/2") CONC. (20-1/2")
ARMS
425mm 425mm
(16-3/4") (16-3/4")
267mm 267mm
(10-1/2") 54mm (2-1/8") DIA. (10-1/2")
114mm HOLES FOR 114mm
(4-1/2") CONCEALED ARMS (4-1/2") 54mm (2-1/8") DIA.
44mm HOLES FOR
102mm 44mm 25mm 102mm (1-3/4") CONCEALED ARMS
(4") (1-3/4") (1") (4") 25mm
(1")
79mm 79mm
*(11-3/8")
(3-1/8")
298mm
(3-1/8")
*(11-3/8")
298mm
(8-1/8")
206mm
206mm
(8-1/8")
38mm
38mm 10mm (3/8") (1-1/2") 10mm
*(11-1/4")
*(10-1/4")
286mm
260mm
(1-1/2") DIA. ANCHOR (3/8")
DIA. ANCHOR
SCREW HOLES
*(13-7/8")
352mm
*(13-7/8")
SCREW HOLES
352mm
203mm 203mm
S-9 HANGER S-9 HANGER
(8") (8")
27mm X 14mm 27mm x 14mm
(1-1/16 x 5/16")
787mm (31)
864mm (34)
(1-1/16" x 5/16") SLOTS
SLOTS
SUPPLIES SUPPLIES
AS REQUIRED 787mm (31") AS REQUIRED
1-1/4" O.D. WASTE 1-1/4" O.D. WASTE 864mm (34") 1-1/4" O.D. WASTE 1-1/4" O.D. WASTE
OUTLET FOR OUTLET FOR FINISHED OUTLET FOR OUTLET FOR FINISHED
DRAIN PLUG POP-UP DRAIN FLOOR DRAIN PLUG POP-UP DRAIN FLOOR
18-1/4" 18-1/4" FINISHED

FINISHED (464mm)
(464mm) WALL WALL
8" MIN. 8" MIN.

34" (203mm) 34" (203mm)
(864mm) (864mm)
27" MIN. 27" MIN.

(686mm) (686mm)
6" MAX. 6" MAX.
(152mm) (152mm)
9" MIN. 9" MIN.

BARRIER FREE (229mm) BARRIER FREE (229mm)
CLEARANCE CLEARANCE
11" 11"
(279mm) (279mm)
NOTES:
*PROVIDE
DIMENSIONS SHOWN FOR LOCATION OF SUPPLIES AND “P” TRAP ARE SUGGESTED.
SUITABLE REINFORCEMENT FOR ALL WALL SUPPORTS.
FITTINGS NOT INCLUDED AND MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY.
CONCEALED ARM SUPPORT AS REQUIRED TO BE FURNISHED BY OTHERS.
IMPORTANT: Dimensions of fixtures are nominal and may vary within the range of tolerances established
by ANSI Standard A112.19.2. These measurements are subject to change or cancellation. No responsibility
is assumed for use of superseded or voided pages.
LAVATORY DESIGNED TO MEET ADA HANDICAPPED GUIDELINES WITH MOUNTING HEIGHT

SET AT 864MM (34") ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR.

M38
spec_0355-0356 Lucerne WallHung Lavs Rev. A 8/16
6.5 Semi Cast Grid Patent, SPEC 2.4.1

Semi Cast Grid Patent, SPEC DB Dearborn 760-1
2.4.1
Job Name Item #

SEMI-CAST GRID PATENT Location
Engineer Contractor
OVERFLOW PLUGS PO # Tag
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION Representative
SPECIFICATIONS
Dearborn Brass Two Piece Patent Overflow Plug is designed for use in
tubular drain applications with lavatory sinks. Two piece design allows
overflow to flow to sink drain. Available in 5", 6" 8" or 12" lengths.
DESCRIPTION
• Chrome Finish
• 20 Gauge Brass
• Two Piece Assembly
APPROVALS AND LISTINGS
PRODUCT SELECTOR
SEMI-CAST GRID PATENT OVERFLOW PLUGS
Product Carton
P Number
Size Description
Quantity
Semi-Cast Grid Patent
1-1/4"
760-1 Overflow Plug w/ 1-1/4" x 25
x 6"
6" - 17 Ga. Tailpiece
Semi-Cast Grid Patent
1-1/2"
761-1 Overflow Plug w/ 1-1/2" x 25
x 6"
6" - 17 Ga. Tailpiece
Data is subject to manufacturing tolerances.
DIMENSIONS
[A]: Diameter A 2.2" [C]: Height C 2.8"
See
[B]: Diameter B Chart [D]: Height D 6"
A.1
A.1 - LENGTHS
1-1/4" x 6 Tailpiece 1-1/2" x 6 Tailpiece
Diameter B: 1-1/4" 1-1/2"
Access BIM/Revit content through www.oatey.com
Oatey Co. | 20600 Emerald Parkway, Cleveland, OH 44135 | P: 1.800.321.9532 | oatey.com LCS1172 5/20
6.6 Wall Mount Concealed, SPEC 2.4.1

Wall Mount Concealed 2.4.1 JOSAM Company 17120
SPECIFICATION: LAVATORY CARRIER
JOSAM 17120 SERIES WALL-MOUNTED, SINGLE LAVATORY
CARRIER WITH CONCEALED ARMS, LEVELING AND WALL-MOUNT
SECURING SCREWS, AND ADJUSTABLE WALL PLATE. CONCEALED ARM
SERIES 17120
2"
1 1/2"
2 3/4" F
C (13" MIN-22.5" MAX)
5"
FINISHED
WALL
1 1/2"
FINISHED WALL
DENOTES VARIABLE. DIMENSION
FINISHED FLOOR DEPENDS ON FIXTURE. STANDARD
ADJUSTABLE SLEEVE IS 4" LONG
MANUFACTURER
_______________
2" NUMBER
_______________
2 3/4" -BP* WITH BACK PLATES
-MMB* WITH MOVABLE MOUNTING BRACKETS SIZE
2" _______________
EXTENSION SLEEVES LONGER THAN
-10* STANDARD (SPECIFY WALL THICKNESS)
NAME
-75 2" CHROME PLATED ESCUTCHEONS _______________
-76 4" CHROME PLATED ESCUTCHEONS
5" DIMENSIONS
-77 6" CHROME PLATED ESCUTCHEONS
A _____________
* SEPARATE SUBMITTAL FOR THIS OPTION AVAILABLE C _____________
-75 OPTION F _____________

CHROME PLATED
ESCUTCHEON RIM HEIGHT ________
BASED ON "A" DIM SHOWN
-26$0&203$1<
DATE OF LAST CHANGE: 02/21/14 NOTES
DIMENSIONS ARE SUBJECT TO MANUFACTURERS
TOLERANCES AND CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.
WE CAN ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR
USE OF SUPERSEDED OR VOID DATA.
0,&+,*$1&,7<,1',$1$
6.7 Single Bowl Top Mount Sink, SPEC 2.4.4

Single Bowl Top Mount Sink, OMNI- PRO OM2522-8-3
SPEC 2.4.4
Stainless Steel 25" x 22" x 8-1 /16"
OmniPro.
SPECIFICATIONS
Single Bowl Top Mount Sink
Model(s) OM2522-8
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Stainless Steel 25" x 22" x 8-1 /16" , Single Bowl Top Mount Sin k.
Sink is manufactured from 20 gauge 300 series Stainless Steel with
a Elite Satin finish, Center drain placement, and Bottom only pads.
lnstallation Tvpe: Top Mount

Material: 300 series Stainless Steel
Finish: Elite Satin
Gauge: 20
Sound Deadening: Bottom only pads
Number of Bowls: 1
Sink Dimensions: 25" X 22" X 8-1/16"
Bowl 1 Dimensions: 21" X 15-3/4" X 8"
Drain Size: 3-1/2" (89mm)
Drain Location: Center
Mínimum Cabinet Size: 30"
Cutout Dimensions for Top Mount lnstallation:
24-3/8" x 21-3/8" (619mm x 543mm) with 1-1/2" (38mm) corner
radius
lnstallation Profile:
1-1/2" (38mm) Diameter Faucet Holes on 4" (102mm) Centers Sinks are listed by IAPMQ®as meeting the applicable
requirements of the Unifonm Plumbing Code®, lnternational
e ® Plumbing Code®, and National Plumbing Code of Canada .
Product Compliance: ASME A 112.19.3/CSA 845.4
BUY AMERICAN ACT
OM2522-8-3 OM2522-84
l 1
hl 22"
e
(559mm)
15-3/4"
(400mm)
4" R
IV(102mm)
!
21 "
(533mm)
25"
(635mm)
8-1116''
3-1/4" R 205mm)
/ (83mm) [ ]
PART: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _QTY: _ _ _ __
---- - .....,,;..,-- -----
PROJECT :_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
CONTACT: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
DATE :_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
NOTES :._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
APPROVAL :_ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
In keeping with our policy of continuing product improvement, we reserve the right to change product specifications without notice.
REV 06162017 © 201 7 OM2522-8_ spec.pdf Page 1 of 1

6.8 Sink Strainer, SPEC 2.4.4

Sink Strainer, SPEC 2.4.4 MATCO-NORCA SS-111
SS-111 Sink Strainer • Spec Sheet
FEATURES & BENEFITS
• Stainless Steel Sink Strainer

• Fits 3-1/2" to 4" Openings
• Double Cup Economy
• 1 Piece Construction
• Fixed Stick Post
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
No. Part Material
1 Post C.P ABS
2 Basket SS430
3 Gasket Rubber
4 Body SS430
5 Washer Rubber
6 Washer Paper
7 Cup Galvanized
8 Lock Nut Zinc
9 Washer PE
10 Slip Nut Zinc – Yellow
Chromate Dip
6.9 Single Handle Kitchen Faucet, SPEC 2.4.4

Single Handle Kitchen Faucet OMNI-PRO OPB-100C
OPB-100C OPB-100SS
OPB-140C OPB-140SS
8" Single Handle Kitchen Faucet

Product Spec Sheet
FEATURES & BENEFITS OPB-140C

Chrome Finish
• This Product Contains Less Than 0.25%
Weighted Average Lead Content On
OPB-140SS
Wetted Surfaces
Stainless Steel Finish
• Metal Lever Handle
• Ceramic Cartridge
• With Side Spray
OPB-100C
• Optional Deck Plate Included
Less Side Spray
• Max Flow Rate 1.5 gpm (5.7 L/min) at 60 psi Chrome Finish
(ASME A112.18.1M/A112.18.1)
OPB-100SS
Approvals:
Less Side Spray
Meets or Exceeds The Following: Stainless Steel Finish
* ANSI/ASME A112.18.1M/A112.18.1
* NSF/ANSI 61 - Sec. 9
* NSF/ANSI 372
* IAPMO/cUPC
* CA AB1953
NSF/ANSI 372
NSF/ANSI 61-9
Water Efficiency
TEL: 800-217-4603
Visit Our Web Site : www.omniprofaucets.com
OPB-100C OPB-100SS
OPB-140C OPB-140SS
8" Single Handle Kitchen Faucet
Product Spec Sheet

No. Name Part No.
1 Index Button-Cold/Hot A66D569 2.
2 Metal Handle A069200 1.

5.
3.
3 Trim Cap A103016
10.
4.
4 Locking Nut A104002 6.
5 Sleeve A041026
6 Ceramic Disc Cartridge A507348N-32
7.
7 Spout Assembly A666928W
8 O-ring Set 14.
11.
(Φ1-1/4" ID * Φ1-1/2" OD) A608220 8.
9.
9 Diverter A501374N
18.
10 Spray Head A503002N
17.
11 Spray Holder Assembly A664283
12.
12 Spray Hose A512139N
13 Cover Plate & Putty plate A667003
14 Aerator A500872N
15 Mounting Hardware Assembly A603222
15.
16 Wrench 13.
(H 2.5 * 19 mm L * 53 mm L) A031000NI
17 O-Ring Set
16.
(Φ1/4" ID * Φ3/8" OD) A668178N
18 Mounting Hardware A66G424-T
10 11/16"
(271mm)
4"
(102mm) 9"
(229mm)
15º
(169mm)
6 5/8"
5º
(121mm)
(168mm)
Ø 1 3/4"
4 3/4"
(147mm)
5 13/16"
6 5/8"
(109mm)
(120mm)
4 5/16"
(Ø 44mm)
4 3/4"
Ø 1 15/16" Ø 1 1/8"
(Ø 50mm) (Ø 28.5mm)
Ø 1 15/16"
1/16" ~ 2 5/16"
(1mm ~ 58mm)
(139mm)
(177mm)
6 15/16"
(Ø 50mm)
(118mm)
5 1/2"
4 5/8"
1"-20UNEF
1 11/32"-20UNS
1/2"-14NPSM
2 7/16"
(11mm)
7/16"
10 1/4" (62mm)
(260.5mm)
TEL: 800-217-4603
Visit Our Web Site : www.omniprofaucets.com
6.10 Floor Drains, 2.6.1

Floor Drains, SPEC 2.6.1 JOSAM Company 30002 Series
JOSAM Company S Series Type 55
JOSAM Company A Series Type 5A
Floor Drains_08.qxd 5/1/08 1:48 PM Page 117

FLOOR DRAINS • Bodies Only
30000 SERIES BODY ASSEMBLY
APPLICATION THIS DRAIN BODY CAN BE USED WITH
For use with all adjustable strainers. Wide flange anchors drain body in concrete and ALL STRAINERS AND ACCESSORIES
works in conjunction with the clamp collar to redirect waste through the collar’s IN THE STRAINER SECTION.
weepholes if seepage occurs around the strainer. The WEJLOC® clamp provides a
non-puncturing positive bond of the waterproofing membrane to the drain body for
applications where floors with standing water are to be sealed off from areas below.
The collar is also invertible for extra vertical strainer adjustment to meet finished
floor level.
SPECIFICATION
JOSAM 30000 Series coated cast iron Floor Drain, two-piece body with double
drainage flange and 1/2” primer tap with plug, bottom outlet, WEJLOC® invertible
non-puncturing flashing collar with weepholes, threaded to receive a JOSAM
adjustable strainer.
Available Options
▼ -PD Prison Drain -91 Rough Bronze Body
▼ -ST Shallow Trap -92 Galvanized Cast Iron Parts
▼ -TSO Threaded Side Outlet OUTLETS:
-ARE Acid-Resisting Epoxy -T Threaded Outlet
-49 3/4" Primer Tap -X Inside Caulk Outlet
1/2" Primer Tap (Std.) -Y Hub Outlet with Gasket
-Z No-Hub Outlet
CONFORMS WITH ASTM-C564.
FOR OUTLET TYPE SPECIFY -T, -X, -Y or -Z

TYPE NO. PIPE SIZE LBS.
30002 2 11
30003 3 13
FLOOR DRAINS
30004 4 13
30000-PD SERIES SECURITY BODY ASSEMBLY FOR PRISONS

APPLICATION THIS DRAIN BODY CAN BE USED WITH
For use with all adjustable strainers with security screws. The integral trap wall is ALL STRAINERS AND ACCESSORIES
designed to restrict concealment of contraband. The side outlet allows for installation IN THE STRAINER SECTION.
of drain line within pre-cast prison cells.
SPECIFICATION
JOSAM 30000-PD Series galvanized steel security Floor Drain with flashing flange,
threaded side outlet, integral trap wall. Threaded to receive any JOSAM adjustable
strainer furnished with security screws.
Available Options
-50 1/2" Primer Tap
-92 Galvanized Cast Iron Parts
-C Bolted Flashing Clamp Device
OUTLET:
-T Threaded Outlet
FOR OUTLET TYPE SPECIFY -T

TYPE NO. PIPE SIZE LBS.
30002-PD 2 15
30003-PD 3 15
WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm - www.p65warnings.ca.gov ▼ Product Illustration follows. 117
Floor Drains_08.qxd 5/1/08 1:44 PM Page 115
FLOOR DRAINS • Strainers

P SERIES ANGLE NIKALOY STRAINER
APPLICATION
For use in shower rooms or similar areas where the drain can be set at the junction
of the floor and the wall. Vertical grate openings prevent drain stoppage should hori-
zontal surface become blocked.
Available Options
-2 Satin Finish Bronze
-80 Perforated Stainless Steel Basket
-VP Secured Grate, Vandal-Proof Screws
TYPE NO. A B B1 C FREE AREA LBS.

4P 2-1/4 3-1/4 4-1/4 1 8.9 4
6P 3-1/8 6-1/8 6-1/4 1-1/2 18.7 11
R SERIES RECTANGULAR NIKALOY STRAINER

APPLICATION
For use in shower rooms, gutters and similar areas where a large grate free area is
required and limited width is available. Suitable for pedestrian traffic.
Available Options
FLOOR DRAINS
-J Backwater Valve
TYPE NO. A A1 B C D D1 FREE AREA LBS.

5R 9 5 3-1/4 1-1/8 8-3/8 4-3/8 14.9 6
6R 13 5 3-1/4 1-3/8 12 4 20.0 10
7R 17 5 3-1/8 1-3/8 16-1/4 4-3/8 22.4 11
8R 21 5 3-1/8 1-1/4 20-3/8 4-3/8 47.0 13
S SERIES SUPER-FLO® SQUARE NIKALOY STRAINER

APPLICATION
For use in pedestrian traffic areas where square complements construction or floor
finish, such as ceramic tile showers or kitchen floors.
Available Options
-SS Stainless Steel, 5S, 6S, 8S
-CP Chrome Plated, 5S, 6S
-J Backwater Valve
TYPE NO. A B C D FREE AREA LBS.

5S 5 1-3/4 7/8 4-1/2 9.1 3
6S 6 2-1/8 1 5-5/8 13.8 4
8S 8 2-3/8 1 7-1/2 24.5 9
•Not SUPER-FLO® Design
9S• 9 2-3/8 1 8-5/8 28.0 10
WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm - www.p65warnings.ca.gov 115

Floor Drains_08.qxd 3/27/08 9:32 AM Page 110
FLOOR DRAINS • Strainers

A SERIES ROUND NIKALOY SUPER-FLO® STRAINER
APPLICATION
For use in finished areas with pedestrian traffic such as toilet and shower rooms.
Available Options
-SS Stainless Steel, 5A, 6A, 7A, 8A
-CP Chrome Plated, 5A, 6A
-J Backwater Valve
TYPE NO. A B C D FREE AREA LBS.
5A 5 1-15/16 1-1/8 4-5/8 7.8 2
6A 6 2-1/4 15/16 5-1/4 11.0 3
7A 7 2-11/16 1-1/2 6-7/16 13.2 4
8A 8 2-1/2 7/8 7-1/8 16.2 5
9A• 9 2-1/4 1 8-1/8 21.1 7
•Not SUPER-FLO® Design
10A• 10 2-1/4 1-1/8 9 28.0 9
AD SERIES ROUND NIKALOY STRAINER with Clamp Device

APPLICATION
For use in finished areas with pedestrian traffic such as supermarkets or kitchens.
Available Options
-2 Satin Bronze Top
FLOOR DRAINS
TYPE NO. FREE AREA LBS.

6AD 10.4 4
AF SERIES ROUND NIKALOY STRAINER with Tile Flange

APPLICATION
For use in areas where a vinyl tile, liquid or trowel applied floor covering is to be
adhered to the strainer flange and pedestrian traffic is expected.
Available Options
-J Backwater Valve
TYPE NO. FREE AREA LBS.

6AF 10.4 5
110 WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm - www.p65warnings.ca.gov

6.11 Shower Faucet 2.6.2

Shower Faucet DELTA T13220 Series
T13020▲
T13020-▲DPE
TUB AND SHOWER
FAUCET TRIM
■ Classic Bath Collection
T13220-▲SHC T13420-▲SHC ■ Valve Only (T13020 Series)
T13120 T13220- T13420-▲ ■ Tub Only (T13120 Series)
T13120-LTS T13220▲ ▲SHCCER T13220-H2O T13220-▲H2OT SHCCER
■ Shower Only (T13220 Series)
Submitted Model No.:________________________________________________
■ Tub and Shower (T13420 Series)
Specific Features:___________________________________________________ FEATURES:
• 13 Series pressure balanced bath mixing valve trim
• "-H2O" models include H2Okinetic® Technology shower head
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS:
• Maintains a balanced pressure of hot and cold water even
RP21633▲ when a valve is turned on or off elsewhere in the system.
Deep Escutcheon
(Use if valve • For use with MultiChoice® Universal rough valve body.
is underflush.) (R10000 Series)
• Back-to-back installation capability.
RP19809▲
Escutcheon • Solid brass forged body.
• Temperature only controlled with metal lever handle.
7" • Field adjustable to limit handle rotation into hot water zone.
(178 mm) Supply • 120° maximum handle rotation.
Dia.
• All parts replaceable from the front of the valve.
• Models with "LTS" suffix supplied with 7" long non-diverter
slip-on spout (RP36498).
• T13220-H2O uses RP46384.
Face of plasterguard • T13220-H2OT uses RP54752.
should be flush with
finish wall line • DPE = 1" deeper escutcheon (RP21633).
• Models with "CER" use ceramic cartridge RP74236.
• Stem extension kit RP77991 can be ordered to allow for an
8" (203 mm) additional 1 3/4" wall thickness. RP77991 ships with
2 3/4"
min. (70 mm) chrome escutcheon screws. For special finishes also order
18" (457 mm)
max. RP12630 escutcheon screws in desired finish.
• Shower head max flow rate 1.5 gpm @ 80 psi,
RP5833 RP48717 RP43381s 1.75 GPM 5.7 L/min @ 550 kPa
Touch-Clean® Raincan Shower Head
• Shower head max flow rate 1.75 gpm @ 80 psi,
2 3/4" 6.6 L/min @ 550 kPa
(70 mm)
4 3/4" • Tub port max flow rate 8.6 gpm @ 60 psi
(121 mm) with R10000-UNBX
4 3/4" 3 3/16" Full Body
(81 mm) • Note: Product will be marked with flow rate of specific
(121 mm) Spray shower head.
RP36498▲ (Slip-On Metallic) WARRANTY
• Parts and Finish - Lifetime limited warranty; or for
2 1/2" Massaging commercial purchasers, 10 years for multi-family
Spray
(64 mm) residential (apartments and condominiums) and
4 7/8" 5 years for all other commercial uses, in each case
(124 mm)
from the date of purchase.
7"
(177.8 mm) Soft Drench • Electronic Parts and Batteries (if applicable) - 5
Spray years from the date of purchase; or for commercial
purchasers, 1 year from the date of purchase. No
RP46384▲ 4 3/4" RP38357 2 3/4" warranty is provided on batteries.
1.5 GPM (121 mm) 1.75 GPM (70 mm)
H2O Shower Head Touch-Clean® Shower Head
Full Body 2 5/8"

3 1/4"
SHOWER HEAD(S)
(66 mm)
POMME(S) DE DOUCHE
Full Body Spray

CABEZA(S) DE REGADERA
Spray (83 mm)

COMPLIES WITH:
RP54752s 4 1/2"
1.5 GPM (114 mm)
• ASME A112.18.1 / CSA B125.1
H2O Shower Head • ASSE 1016
Indicates compliance to
RP77991 Available Extension Kit ICC/ANSI A117.1 - Valve control only
• EPA WaterSense - applies to T13220, T13220-
®
SHC, T13220-SHCCER, T13220-H2O, T13220-H2OT,
Full Body 3 7/8"
(98 mm) T13420-SHC, T13420-SHCCER, RP46384, RP43381,
Spray
RP38357, and RP54752 only
Delta Faucet Company
▲ Designate proper finish suffix 55 E. 111th Street, Indianapolis, IN 46280
Delta reserves the right (1) to make changes in specifications and materials, and (2) to change or discontinue 350 South Edgeware Road, St. Thomas, ON N5P 4L1
models, both without notice or obligation. Dimensions are for reference only. See current full-line price book or
www.deltafaucet.com for finish options and product availability. © 2019 Delta Faucet Company
DSP-B-T13020 Rev. R
6.12 Wall Cleanout

Wall Cleanout JOSAM COMPANY 58600-COT Series
Item #18, Drawing P004
CLEANOUTS
58600-COT SERIES 58610-CO SERIES
CLEANOUTS
TYPE NO. PIPE SIZE B C D E F LBS. TYPE NO. PIPE SIZE B C E F LBS.
58604-COT2 2 4-1/4 1-3/4 6-3/8 2 5-3/8 11 58614-CO2 2 1-1/2 4-5/8 6 5-1/2 6
58604-COT3 3 5-1/4 2-1/2 7-3/4 3 5-3/8 14 58614-CO3 3 2-1/2 4-5/8 6 5-1/2 7
58604-COT4 4 6 3-1/2 8-7/8 4 5-3/8 20 58614-CO4 4 3-1/2 4-5/8 6 5-1/2 9
58608-COT6 6 7 4-1/2 12-1/2 6 10-5/8 34 58616-CO6 6 5-1/2 6-3/4 8-1/4 7-3/4 15
58610-COT SERIES 58630-CO SERIES
TYPE NO. PIPE SIZE B C D E F LBS. TYPE NO. PIPE SIZE B CXC LBS.
58614-COT2 2 4-1/4 1-3/4 6-3/8 2 6 13 58631-CO2 2 1-1/2 8x8 9
58614-COT3 3 5-1/4 3-1/2 7-3/4 3 6 16 58631-CO3 3 2-1/2 8x8 9
58614-COT4 4 6 3-1/2 8-7/8 4 6 22 58631-CO4 4 3-1/2 8x8 11
58616-COT6 6 7 4-1/2 12-1/2 6 8-1/4 37 58632-CO6 6 5-1/2 12 x 12 20
202 WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm - www.p65warnings.ca.gov

6.13 Floor Cleanout

Floor Cleanout JOSAM Company 55002 Series
Cleanouts_08.qxd 5/1/08 3:02 PM Page 188
Item #19, Drawing P005

CLEANOUTS
55000 SERIES LEVELEZE® KLEENATRON® II SPECIAL-DUTY
APPLICATION A
For use in finished or unfinished floors subject to heavy wheel traffic such as ware-
houses, loading docks and warehouse stores. Top design allows for unimpaired
adjustment even as the floor is being poured.
CLEANOUTS
SPECIFICATION ADJUSTABLE
X - MIN CAST IRON
JOSAM 55000 Series coated cast iron LEVELEZE® KLEENATRON® II Floor Cleanout, OPTIONAL (-41)
Y - MAX BUSHING CLAMP RING
internal ABS cleanout plug, adjustable cast iron housing with special-duty scoriated THREADED
ABS PLUG
secured round cast iron cover. OPTIONAL (-F)
FLANGE
Available Options
▼ -1 Satin Finish Nikaloy Top -SS-SQ Square Top, Stainless Steel
▼ -1-SD Special-Duty Satin Finish ▼ -5 Ductile Iron Top B
Nikaloy Top -14 Carpet Cleanout Marker
D
▼ -1-SQ Square Top, -VP Secured Cover,
Satin Finish Nikaloy Vandal-Proof Screws
▼ -1-12 Cover Recessed for Tile, -22 Taper Thread Bronze Plug
Satin Finish Nikaloy PIPE SIZE
-31 Galvanized Cast Iron Parts
▼ -1-13 Terrazzo Tile Cover, C
-41 Clamp Ring and Flange
Satin Finish Nikaloy
-F Flange Only
-2 Satin Finish Bronze Top FLANGE STANDARD ON 4” -X AND 6” SIZES.
-WF Wide Flange *
-2-SD Special-Duty Satin Finish (not available on Cl)
Bronze Top FOR OUTLET TYPE SPECIFY -X, -Y or -Z
-CFC Carpet Cleanout Flange
-2-SQ Square Top, TYPE NO. PIPE SIZE A B C* D X Y LBS.
Cover
Satin Finish Bronze 55002 2 6 3-3/4 7-1/2 5-9/16 2-3/4 4-1/4 15
OUTLETS:
-2-12 Cover Recessed for Tile, 55003 3 6 3-3/4 7-1/2 5-9/16 2-3/4 4-1/4 15
Satin Finish Bronze -X Inside Caulk Outlet
55004 4 6 3-3/4 7-1/2 5-9/16 2-3/4 4-1/4 16
-2-13 Terrazzo Tile Cover, -Y Hub Outlet w/Gasket, 2”-4”
55004-X 4 7-1/2 4-1/4 9-3/16 7 2-5/8 4-5/16 18
Satin Finish Bronze -Z No-Hub Outlet
55005-Z 5 6 3-3/4 7-1/2 5-9/16 2-3/4 4-1/4 16
-SS Stainless Steel Top 55006-Z 6 7-1/2 4-1/4 9-3/16 7 2-5/8 4-5/16 18
55000-1 SERIES with -1 Nikaloy Top

APPLICATION
A
For use in finished floors subject to pedestrian and light wheel traffic such as schools,
hospitals and shopping malls. Top design allows for unimpaired adjustment even as
the floor is being poured.
ADJUSTABLE
SPECIFICATION CAST IRON OPTIONAL (-41)
X - MIN BUSHING CLAMP RING
JOSAM 55000-1 Series coated cast iron LEVELEZE® KLEENATRON® II Floor Cleanout, Y - MAX THREADED
ABS PLUG
internal ABS cleanout plug, adjustable cast iron housing with medium-duty scoriated OPTIONAL (-F)
FLANGE
secured round satin Nikaloy cover.
PIPE SIZE
* FLANGE STANDARD ON 4” -X AND 6” SIZES.
FOR OUTLET TYPE SPECIFY -X, -Y or -Z

TYPE NO. PIPE SIZE A B C* D X Y LBS.
55002-1 2 5-1/8 3-3/4 7-1/2 5-9/16 2-1/8 3-5/8 12
55003-1 3 5-1/8 3-3/4 7-1/2 5-9/16 2-1/8 3-5/8 12
55004-1 4 5-1/8 3-3/4 7-1/2 5-9/16 2-1/8 3-5/8 13
55004-1-X 4 6-5/8 4-1/4 9-3/16 7 2 3-11/16 14
55005-1-Z 5 5-1/8 3-3/4 7-1/2 5-9/16 2-1/8 3-5/8 12
55006-1-Z 6 6-5/8 4-1/4 9-3/16 7 2 3-11/16 14
188
WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm - www.p65warnings.ca.gov ▼ Product Illustration follows.
2.8 Water Heater

Commercial Electric Water Rheem -
Heater
Commercial Electric Water Heater
USE & CARE MANUAL LISTED

COMMERCIAL STORAGE
TANK WATER HEATER
18G0
WITH INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CONTRACTOR

The purpose of this manual is twofold: one, for the installing
contractor, to provide requirements and recommendations for
the proper installation and adjustment of the water heater;
and two, for the owner-operator, to explain the features, oper-
ation, safety precautions, maintenance and trouble shooting
of the water heater. This manual also includes replacement
parts information.
It is imperative that all persons who are expected to install,
operate or adjust this water heater read the instructions care-
fully so that they may understand how to do so.
Tank Type Models Booster Models

Surface Mounted or Immersion Thermostats Immersion Thermostats Only
Recognize this symbol as an Indication of

! Do Not Destroy this Manual. Please read carefully
and keep in a safe place for Future Reference. ! Important Safety Information!
NOTICE: This water heater is designed for use in a commercial application and the installation and maintenance
! of it should be performed by qualified, licensed service personnel. If the foregoing assumption is not appropri-
ate, then we recommend that you obtain and retain our Residential Use & Care Manual.
! CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING: This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Printed in USA AP11146-10 (05/13)

! General Safety Precautions
Be sure to read and understand the entire Use & Care Manual before attempting to install or operate this water heater.
Pay particular attention to the following General Safety Precautions. Failure to follow these warnings could result in
serious bodily injury or death. Should you have any problems understanding the instructions in this manual, STOP, and
get help from a qualified installer or service technician or the local utility.
To meet commercial water use needs, all Immersion thermo- Maximum water temperatures occur just after the thermostat
stat model water heaters are adjustable to deliver water up to has shut off the elements. To find the hot water temperature
190°F. (88°C) Surface mounted thermostat model waterheaters being delivered, turn on a hot water faucet and place a ther-
are adjustable to deliver 160°F (71°C) for the 50 gallon models mometer in the hot water stream and read the thermometer.
and 180°F (82°C) for the 85 and 120 gallon models. However,
water temperatures over 125°F (52°C) can cause severe burns The following chart details the relationship of water tempera-
instantly or death from scalds. This is the preferred starting ture and time with regard to scald injury and may be used as
point for setting the control for supplying general purpose hot a guide in determining the safest water temperature for your
water. applications.
TIME / TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIPS IN SCALDS
Temperature Time to Produce Serious Burn

! DANGER

120° F. (49°C)
125° F. (52°C)
More than 5 minutes
1 1/ 2 to 2 minutes
130° F. (54°C) About 30 seconds
135° F. (57°C) About 10 seconds
140° F. (60°C) Less than 5 seconds
145° F. (63°C) Less than 3 seconds
150° F. (66°C) About 11/ 2 seconds
155° F. (68°C) About 1 second
Table courtesy of Shriners Burn Institute
HOT The temperature of the water in the heater can be regulated by

adjusting the thermostat. To comply with safety regulations the
thermostat was set at the factory to a setting corresponding
to 120°F. (49°C)The illustration below pictures the thermostats
used on the water heaters covered in this manual and how to
adjust the water temperature.
To adjust the water temperature on Surface Mounted

BURN Thermostat models, insert a small straight screw-
driver into slotted screw of indicator and move indi- T
R
ESE
ESE
cator to desired setting.See Operation Section of this
R
T
Manual for details.
Water temperature over 125° (52°C) °F 19

0°
HO
T WA
R
can cause severe burns instantly or
M
°
1 10
HI LOW
VERY
170°
death from scalds.

120°
MED
0°
13 TURN OFF
POWER
15 0
140° °
BEFORE
Children, disabled and elderly are SERVICING
E-10 Model Only

at highest risk of being scalded.
See instruction manual before Immersion Thermostat
setting temperature at water To adjust the water temperature on Immersion Surface Mounted
heater. Thermostat models,turn thermostat dial to align Thermostat
desired mark with index line above thermostat.
See Operation Section of this Manual for details.
Feel water before bathing or
showering. CAUTION!! — Hotter water increases the risk of
SCALDING!
Temperature limiting valves are
available, see manual. ! DANGER
There is a Hot Water SCALD Potential if the thermostat is set
too high.
Safety and energy conservation are factors to be considered NOTE: When this water heater is supplying general purpose
when setting the water temperature on the thermostat. The hot water requirements for use by individuals, a
most energy efficient operation will result when the thermostatically controlled mixing valve for reducing point of
temperature setting is the lowest that satisfies the needs use water temperature is recommended to reduce the risk of
consistent with the application. scald injury. Contact a licensed plumber or the local plumbing
authority for further information.
2
Introduction
! WARNING FOR THE BOOSTER MODELS
Read and Review this entire Manual with special em- A minimum clearance of 18 inches (457mm) on the right
phasis on the Installation Section (Pages 3 - 6) and side of the Booster model is required for removal of the
Operation Section (Pages 7 - 8) prior to any installa- heating element(s) when required for service or inspec-
tion work.
tion.
LOCAL INSTALLATION REGULATIONS—This water heater
must be installed in accordance with these instruc- Four eparate 5/16-18 threaded openings are provided on
tions, local codes, utility company requirements, and/ the top, rear and bottom panels, so the heater may be
or in the absence of local codes, the latest edition of the bolted to a horizontal or vertical surface. If installed on
American National Standard / National Electrical Code. a counter top, or stacked vertically in multiples, insert
A copy of which can be purchased from the National Fire bolts and/or washers in bottom threaded openings to
Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
02269 as booklet NFPA 70. provide a minimum 1/4” (6mm) clearance so door hinges
will not bind.
LOCATION
A. The water heater should be installed in a clean, dry Factory designed accessories available for the Booster
location as close as practical to the area of greatest hot square model are: six inch adjustable stainless steel legs
water demand. Long hot water lines should be insulated and a bracket kit for slide in “under counter” mounting or
to conserve water and energy. The water heater and wall mounting of the water heater.
water lines should be protected from exposure to freez-
ing temperatures. DO NOT install the water heater in an
outdoor, unprotected area. D. RESTAURANT INSTALLATION:
If the water heater is to be installed in a restaurant, or
B. The water heater should not be located in an area other location where NSF International listing is required,
where leakage of the tank or connections will result in it must be weather sealed to the floor, a raised base, or
damage to the area adjacent to it or to lower floors of shelf so that seepage cannot accumulate under it; or ele-
the structure. When such areas cannot be avoided, it vated to provide at least (6) inches (152mm) of clearance
is recommended that a suitable catch pan, adequately from the floor.
drained, be installed under the water heater.
NOTE: Auxiliary catch pan installation MUST conform the The standard legs supplied with the Booster models
applicable local codes. provide the six (6) inches (152mm) of clearance in accor-
dance with NSF International requirements.
C. FOR THE TANK TYPE MODELS, the minimum dis-
tance to provide adequate clearance for protection of For the Tank Type models, a factory designed sealing kit
combustible material is 0 inches (0 mm) from jacket and is available from the distributor or store where the water
18 inches (457mm) from access door. However, additional
clearance for accessibility to permit inspection and ser- heater was purchased. When installed according to the
vicing such as removing heating elements or checking instructions supplied with the kit, these heaters will meet
controls must be provided. All models are approved for the NSF International requirements.
installation on combustible flooring.
Installation
! WARNING 2. THERMAL EXPANSION — Determine if a check valve
The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover any exists in the inlet water line. It may have been installed
damage or defect caused by installation, or attach- in the cold water line as a separate back flow preventer,
ment or use of any special attachment such as ener- or it may be part of a pressure reducing valve, water
gy saving devices (other than those authorized by the meter or water softener. A check valve located in the
manufacturer) into, onto, or in conjunction with the cold water inlet line can cause what is referred to as a
water heater. The use of such unauthorized devices ”closed water system”. A cold water inlet line with no
may shorten the life of the water heater and may en- check valve or back flow prevention device is referred to
danger life and property. The manufacturer disclaims as an ”open” water system.
any responsibility for such loss or injury resulting
from the use of such unauthorized devices. As water is heated, it expands in volume and creates
an increase in the pressure within the water system.
1. INSPECT SHIPMENT—for possible damage. The man- This action is referred to as ”thermal expansion”. In an
ufacturer’s responsibility ceases upon delivery of goods ”open” water system, expanding water which exceeds
to the carrier in good condition. Any claims for dam- the capacity of the water heater flows back into the city
age, shortage in shipments, or nondelivery must be filed main where the pressure is easily dissipated.
immediately against carrier by consignee. A ”closed water system”, however, prevents the
Refer to Fig. 1 for installation with commercial dish- expanding water from flowing back into the main supply
washer to provide hot water for sanitizing rinse. Note: line, and the result of ”thermal expansion” can create
Adjust the pressure reducing valve to the dishwasher a rapid, and dangerous pressure increase in the water
manufacturer’s recommended pressure (usually between heater and system piping. This rapid pressure increase
15 and 25 psi) (103-172kPa), with water flowing to the can quickly reach the safety setting of the relief valve,
dishwasher. causing it to operate during each heating cycle. Thermal
3
Installation
Temperature / Water Shock Pressure Reducing SYSTEM SENTINEL Thermostat(s)

Pressure Gauge Arrestor Valve with By-pass Indicators Dial(s)
Vacuum Relief Valve High Temp
(If required by local codes) Limit Control
Dishwasher Shut-off
Valve
Water Inlet
Legs
Check Valve Relief Valve
Circulation Return Line 6” Air Gap (152mm) Discharge Line
Open Drain
Figure 1. — Recommended installation for dishwashing sanitizing rinse application
expansion, and the resulting rapid, and repeated expan- If a recirculation line is installed, the return connection
sion and contraction of components in the water heater should be made to a tee close to the inlet connection
and piping system can cause premature failure of the on the water heater. A check valve should always be
relief valve, and possibly the heater itself. Replacing the installed in the recirculation line to prevent cold water
relief valve will not correct the problem! from entering.
The suggested method of controlling thermal expan- Factory designed Equa-Flow Manifolds, and jacketed,
sion is to install an expansion tank in the cold water insulated storage tanks are available.
line between the water heater and the check valve. The 3. WATER CONNECTIONS—This heater may be con-
expansion tank is designed with an air cushion built nected individually in multiples with others, or with an
in that compresses as the system pressure increases, external hot water storage tank. It may also be used to
thereby relieving the over pressure condition and elimi- boost the temperature of preheated water.
nating the repeated operation of the relief valve. Other
methods of controlling thermal expansion are also avail- Inlet and outlet water connections are clearly marked
able. Contact your installing contractor, water supplier, next to the connections on the heater. Use only clean,
or plumbing inspector for additional information regard- new galvanized steel, copper or approved plastic for
ing this subject. pipe for water connections. Local codes shall govern
Hot Outlet Storage Tank Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve
Storage Tank Refer to Local Codes
Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve
(Not visible in this view) Discharge Pipe to suitable open drain
Refer to Local Codes
Return Outlet
2”
Optional Return Outlet
(51mm)
Thermal
Expansion Tank
(If Required)
Recirculation Loop
Branch Circuit from Cold Water Inlet
Electrical Distribution Panel Check Valve
Shut-off Valve
NOTES:
Vacuum Relief Valve 1.) Heater’s Outlet Piping must have
(If required by local codes) upward slope, otherwise use
Circulator.
Air Gap 6” (152mm)
Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve(s) 2.) If vertical tank is used, follow same
Discharge Pipe(s) to suitable open drain layout.
Figure 2. — Typical Gravity Circulating System

4
Installation
Storage Tank Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve Hot Outlet
Refer to Local Codes
Cold Water Inlet
Recirculation Loop
Storage Tanks
Shut-off Valve
Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve
(Not visible in this view)
Refer to Local Codes Recirculator
Manifolds
Circulator
Control
(Optional*)
Branch Circuit from Check Valve

Electrical Distribution Panel
Air Gap
6” (152mm)
Circulator*
* Circulator may be wired to run con-
tinuously without the control
Vacuum Relief Valve
(Not visible in this view) Temperature & Pressure Relief Valve(s)
If required by local codes Discharge Pipe(s) to suitable open drain
Figure 3. — Typical Forced Circulation Tank System with factory supplied jacketed and insulated storage tanks.
the exact type of material to be used. The installation of

unions on the inlet and outlet water lines and a shut-off The pressure rating of the relief valve must not exceed
valve in at least the cold water line is recommended so 150 psi (1034kPa)(160 psi (1103kPa) for ASME models)),
the water heater may be easily disconnected for servic- the maximum working pressure of the water heater as
ing. Dielectric unions are not required for protection of marked on the rating plate. The Btu/h rating of the relief
the water heater. valve must not be less than the input rating of the water
heater as indicated on the rating plate located on the
When this water heater is supplying general purpose hot front of the heater. (1 watt = 3.412 Btu/h).
water requirements for use by individuals, a thermostati-
cally controlled mixing valve is recommended to reduce Connect the outlet of the relief valve to a suitable open
the risk of scald injury. Contact a licensed plumber or drain so that the discharge water cannot contact live
the local plumbing authority for further information. electrical parts. The discharge line must pitch downward
from the valve to allow complete draining (by gravity) of
Thermometer(s) should be installed so that they indicate the relief valve and discharge line and be no smaller than
the temperature of the water at or near the outlet of the the outlet of the valve. The end of the discharge line
water heater and storage tank(s) if provided. See Fig. 2 should not be threaded or
or 3. concealed and should be protected from freezing. No
valve of any type, restriction or reducer coupling should
4. RELIEF VALVE — A new combination pressure and be installed in the discharge line. Local codes shall govern
temperature relief valve, complying with the Standard the installation of relief valves.
for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices
for Hot Water Supply Systems, ANSI Z21.22, is factory 5. TO FILL WATER HEATER — Make certain drain valve is
installed on this water heater at the time of manufacture. completely closed. Open shut-off valve in cold water sup-
No valve is to be placed between the relief valve and the ply line. Open each hot water faucet slowly to allow air to
water heater. For a circulating tank installation, the sepa- vent from the water heater and piping. A steady flow of
rate storage tank(s) must have similar protection. Local water from the hot water faucet(s) indicates a full water
codes shall govern the installation of relief valves. heater.
5
Recommended Over Current Protection
208 240 277 480
Rating
P
h Voltage Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum Copper Aluminum
kW a
s
e Wire EMT Wire EMT Wire EMT Wire EMT Wire EMT Wire EMT Wire EMT Wire EMT
208 240 277 480
Gauge Conduit** Gauge Conduit** Gauge Conduit** Gauge Conduit** Gauge Conduit** Gauge Conduit** Gauge Conduit** Gauge Conduit**
3 1 20 20 15 10 14 1/2 12 1/2 14 1/2 12 1/2 14 1/2 12 1/2 14 1/2 12 1/2

1 40 35 30 20 8 3/4 8 3/4 10 1/2 8 3/4 10 1/2 10 1/2 14 1/2 12 1/2
6
3 25 20 NA 10 12 1/2 10 1/2 14 1/2 12 1/2 NA NA NA NA 14 1/2 12 1/2
1 55 50 45 25 6 3/4 4 1 8 3/4 6 3/4 8 3/4 6 3/4 12 1/2 10 1/2
9
3 35 30 NA 15 10 1/2 8 3/4 10 1/2 10 1/2 NA NA NA NA 14 1/2 12 1/2
1 75 65 55 35 4 1 3 1 6 3/4 4 1 6 3/4 4 1 10 1/2 8 3/4
12
3 45 40 NA 20 8 3/4 6 1 8 3/4 8 3/4 NA NA NA NA 14 1/2 12 1/2
1 95 80 70 40 3 1 1 1 1/4 4 1 2 1 1/4 4 1 3 1 8 3/4 8 3/4
15
3 55 50 NA 25 6 1 4 1 1/4 8 3/4 6 1 NA NA NA NA 12 1/2 10 1/2
1 110 95 85 50 2 1 1/4 1/0 1 1/2 3 1 1 1 1/4 4 1 2 1 1/4 8 3/4 6 3/4
18
3 65 55 NA 30 6 1 4 1 1/4 6 1 4 1 1/4 NA NA NA NA 10 1/2 10 1/2
1 145 125 110 65 1/0 1 1/2 3/0 2 1 1 1/4 2/0 1 1/2 2 1/4 1/0 1 1/2 6 3/4 4 1
24
3 85 75 NA 40 4 1 1/4 2 1 1/4 4 1 1/4 3 1 1/4 NA NA NA NA 8 3/4 8 3/4
1 165 145 125 75 2/0 1 1/2 4/0 2 1/0 1 1/2 3/0 2 1 1 1/4 2/0 1 1/2 4 1 3 1
27
3 95 85 NA 45 3 1 1/4 1 1 1/2 4 1 1/4 2 1 1/4 NA NA NA NA 8 3/4 6 1
1 185 160 140 80 3/0 2 250MCM 2 2/0 1 1/2 4/0 2 1/0 1 1/2 3/0 2 4 1 2 1 1/4
30
3 105 95 NA 50 2 1 1/4 1/0 2 3 1 1/4 1 1 1/2 NA NA NA NA 8 3/4 6 1
6
1 220 190 165 95 4/0 2 300MCM 2 1/2 3/0 2 250MCM 2 2/0 1 1/2 4/0 2 3 1 1 1 1/4
36
3 125 110 NA 55 1 1 1/2 2/0 2 2 1 1/4 1/0 2 NA NA NA NA 6 1 4 1 1/4
1 275 235 205 120 300MCM 2 1/2 500MCM 2 1/2 250MCM 2 350MCM 2 1/2 4/0 2 250MCM 2 1 1 1/4 1/0 1 1/2
45
3 160 140 NA 70 2/0 2 4/0 2 1/2 1/0 2 3/0 2 NA NA NA NA 4 1 1/4 3 1 1/4
Installation
1 325 285 245 145 400MCM 2 1/2 600MCM 3 300MCM 2 1/2 500MCM 2 1/2 250MCM 2 350MCM 2 1/2 1/0 1 1/2 3/0 2
54
3 190 165 NA 85 3/0 2 250MCM 2 1/2 2/0 2 4/0 2 1/2 NA NA NA NA 4 1 1/4 2 1 1/4
1 360 315 275 160 500MCM 2.5 700MCM 3 400MCM 2.5 500MCM 2.5 300MCM 2 1/2 500MCM 2 1/2 2/0 1 1/2 4/0 2
60
3 210 180 NA 90 4/0 2.5 300MCM 2.5 3/0 2 4/0 2.5 NA NA NA NA 4 1.25 3 1.25
1 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 300MCM 2.5 600MCM 3 3/0 2 250MCM 2
72
3 250 220 NA 110 250MCM 2.5 350MCM 2.5 4/0 2.5 300MCM 2.5 NA NA NA NA 2 1.25 1/0 2
81 3 NA NA NA 125 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 2/0 2 4/0 2 1/2
1 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA
108
3 NA NA NA 170 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 2/0 2 NA NA
* Table 1 - Minimum Branch Circuit and Wire Sizing Guide. Based on N.E.C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - 2002; Article 422.10(A); Article 240.6(A); Annex C Table C1 (EMT); Table 310.16
(Based on 75 C Type THW wire).
** Conduit size based on NEC Code, Annex C Table C1 Maximum Number of Conductors or Fixture Wires in Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 3 wires for single phase; 4 wires
for 3 phase.
Installation
WARNING 7. GROUNDING—
Tank MUST be full of water before power is turned ! CAUTION
on. Heating elements WILL BE DAMAGED if ener-
The presence of water in the piping and water
gized for even a short time while tank is dry. The
water heater’s warranty does not cover damage or heater does not provide sufficient conduction for a
failure resulting from operation with an empty or ground. Nonmetallic piping, dielectric unions, flex-
partially empty tank. (Reference is made to the lim- ible connections, Etc.., can cause the water heater
ited warranty for complete terms and conditions.) to be electrically isolated.
6. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS & WIRING —

The branch circuit should include either:
Check rating plate of water heater against supply
for correct voltage. The water heater is completely
internally wired from the factory to the field connec- A. Metallic conduit or metallic sheathed cable ap-
tion terminal block for a three phase connection. proved for use as a grounding conductor and in-
For single phase connections refer to the wiring stalled with fittings approved for the purpose.
diagrams in this manual and:
B. Nonmetallic sheathed cable, or metallic conduc-
A. D
isconnect the red and black wires from the tor or metallic sheathed cable not approved for use
field terminal block legs 1, 2, and 3. as a grounding conductor, shall include a separate
B. R
econnect all black wires to leg 1 of the field conductor for grounding. It shall be connected
terminal block. to the grounding means of the water heater (1/4”
C. R
econnect all red wires to leg 2 of the field ter- green screw) and that of the electrical distribution
minal block. box. Terminate stranded grounding conductors with
D. C
onnect incoming power to field terminal block
suitable pressure connectors .
legs 1 and 2. Nothing will be connected to leg
3.
ALUMINUM WIRE CONNECTIONS
Provide a separate branch circuit with overcur-
rent protective de-vice and suitable disconnect- When aluminum wire is used for electrical supply
ing means for each water heater. Refer to Table 1
leads, it is advisable to check the field terminal
above for minimum branch circuit sizing.
connections of a new installation twenty-four hours
Water heater internal wiring diagrams are located in after the heater has been placed in service for pos-
the back of this manual. sible need to retighten. Torque specs are marked
on the terminal block.
Model No. Serial No. Date of Installation Installed By:

7
Operation
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. Do turn off power to water heater if it has been
subjected to over heating, fire, flood or physical dam- ! CAUTION
age. used for a long period of time (generally two weeks
or more).
B. DO NOT turn on water heater unless it is filled with
water. HYDROGEN GAS IS EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE!! To-
C. DO NOT turn on water heater if cold water supply dissipate such gas and to reduce risk of injury, it
shut-off valve is closed. isrecommended that the hot water faucet be opened
for several minutes at the kitchen sink before using
D.If there is any difficulty in understanding or follow- any electrical appliance connected to the hot water-
ing the OPERATION or MAINTENANCE instructions, system. If hydrogen is present, there will probably
it is recommended that a qualified person or service- be an unusual sound such as air escaping through
man perform the work.
the pipe as the water begins to flow. Do not smoke
Hydrogen gas can be produced in a hot water sys- or use an open flame near the faucet at the time it is
tem served by this water heater that has not been open.
TO PLACE WATER HEATER IN OPERATION:

! WARNING
Water temperatures over 125°F (52°C) can cause severe
! CAUTION
burns instantly or death from scalds.
Make certain tank is completely filled with water before
S afety and energy conservation are factors to be
placing the water heater in operation. (Refer to Installation considered when setting the water temperature on the
Section of this manual) thermostat. The most energy efficient operation will
result when the temperature setting is the lowest that
1. WATER TEMPERATURE SETTING — To comply with satisfies the needs consistent with the application.
safety regulations and reduce the risk of scald injury,
the thermostat(s) of the water heater has been set at ! DANGER
the factory to a setting corresponding to 120° F. (49°C)
There is a hot water SCALD POTENTIAL if the thermostat
This is the preferred starting point for setting the con-
is set too high.
trol for general purpose hot water. To meet commer-
cial water needs, the Booster model’s thermostat is NOTE: When this water heater is supplying general pur-
adjustable to 190° F (88°C) to insure the 180° (82°C) F pose hot water requirements for use by individuals, a
minimum for dishwasher rinse applications and other thermostatically controlled mixing valve for reducing
commercial purposes. point of use water temperature is recommended to re-
duce the risk of scald injury. Contact a licensed plumber
or the local plumbing authority for further information.
To adjust the water temperature on Surface Mounted
Thermostat models, insert a small straight screw- T O utlet water temperatures will vary during normaloper-
R
ESE
ating cycles. Reliable temperature readings should be

ESE
driver into slotted screw of indicator and move indi-

R
cator to desired setting.See Operation Section of this taken shortly after the thermostat(s) cycle off during a
Manual for details. period of little or no use.
I f water temperature other than 120° F (49°C) is need-

HI LOW ed, the following instructions will apply depending on
°F 19
WA
MED
model.
0° T
HO R TURN OFF
POWER
M
BEFORE
SURFACE MOUNTED THERMOSTAT MODELS:

°
1 10
VERY
SERVICING
170°
120°
0°
13 15 0
! DANGER
140° °
E-10 Model Only

Surface Mounted Be certain power to the water heater is turned OFF be-
Immersion Thermostat Thermostat fore adjusting temperature setting of thermostat.
To adjust the water temperature on Im-
mersion Thermostat models,turn thermo-
stat dial to align desired mark with index
line above thermostat. See Operation
Section of this Manual for details.
CAUTION!! — Hotter water increases the risk of

SCALDING!
Figure 4. — Thermostat Adjustment
8
Operation
TO RESET HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL:
There is one thermostat that controls all heating ele-
ments. It is located behind the removable pad of glass
fiber insulation in the control compartment. ! WARNING
1 60°F (71°C) MODELS: Be certain the power supply to the water heater is turned
A djust thermostat dial pointer, with a small screwdriver, “OFF” before attempting to reset the Limit Control.
to the desired water temperature setting (refer to Fig.
4). THERMOSTAT PROTECTIVE COVER SHOULD NOT N OTE: Allow the water in the tank to cool before reset-
BE REMOVED. The thermostat is adjustable from a ting the High Temperature Limit Control.
“LOW” to “HI” setting. An approximate water tem-
perature of 130° F (54°C) is accomplished when the O n Surface Mounted Thermostat models, press the red
temperature dial pointer is in the “MED” position. Each “RESET” button located above the thermostat (refer to
mark above and below the “MED” position indicates an Fig. 4). The thermostat protective cover SHOULD NOT
approximate 10° F (6°C) change in water temperature. be removed.
R eplace insulation, close access door and turn power O n Immersion Thermostat models, the reset button is
”ON”, and the water heater is operational. located on the outside of the control enclosure near
N OTE: A thermometer(s) installed at or near the outlet the thermostat(s) dial(s).
of the water heater and/or storage tank(s) will result in
the most accurate outlet water temperature measure- 3. EMERGENCY INSTRUCTIONS —
ment.
! WARNING
180°F (82°C) GALLON MODELS:
A djust thermostat dial pointer, with a small screwdriver, If the water heater has been subjected to flood, fire, or
to the desired water temperature setting (refer to Fig. physical damage, turn off power and water to water heat-
4). THERMOSTAT PROTECTIVE COVER SHOULD NOT er. Do not operate the water heater again until it has been
BE REMOVED. The thermostat is adjustable from a thoroughly checked by qualified service personnel.
“LOW” to “HI” setting. An approximate water tem-
perature of 150° F (66°C) is accomplished when the 4. LONG TIME SHUT-DOWN — If the water heater is to
temperature dial pointer is in the “MED” position. Each remain idle for an extended period of time (60 days or
mark above and below the “MED” position indicates an more), the power and water to the water heater should
approximate 10° F (6°C) change in water temperature. be turned off to conserve energy. The water heater and
Replace insulation, close access door and turn power piping should be drained if they might be subjected
”ON”, and the water heater is operational. to freezing temperatures. It is recommended that
N OTE: A thermometer(s) installed at or near the outlet the water heater’s operation and controls should be
of the water heater and/or storage tank(s) will result in checked by qualified service personnel, before putting
the most accurate outlet water temperature settings. it in service again.
IMMERSION THERMOSTAT MODELS:

! WARNING
N OTE: On Immersion Thermostat models, it is notnec-
essary to turn power OFF before adjusting thetempera- Make certain the water heater is completely filled before
ture setting of the thermostat(s). again placing it in operation.
T he adjustable thermostat dial(s) on these models is-
located on the exterior of the cabinet. A 140° F (60°C)
setting is at the diamond mark between “WARM” and N OTE: Refer to “Hydrogen Gas Caution” in Safety Pre-
“HOT” on the dial (refer to Fig. 4). The range of set- cautions Section on page 8.
tings are from an ”OFF” position, indicated by the bar
on dial, to 190° F (88°C) at the “VERY” position. This 5. DRAINING HEATER —
higher setting isprovided to insure the required 180° F
(82°C) minimum for dishwasher rinse applications and ! CAUTION
other commercial purposes. The ”OFF” position can be
used as a convenient means of conserving energy dur- Be sure that the power to water heater is shut off before
ing periods of non-use. draining water.
2. HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL — Both
Surface and Immersion Thermostat models are ! CAUTION
equipped with a manual reset high temperature limit-
ing control(s). If for any reason the water temperature The water drained from the tank may be hot enough to
becomes excessively high, The High Temperature Limit present a SCALD HAZARD and should be directed to a
Control breaks the power to the heating elements. suitable drain to prevent injury or damage.
Once this control opens, it must be manually reset.
I n order to drain water heater, turn off cold water sup-
! CAUTION ply, then it is necessary to open a hot water faucet or
lift the handle on the relief valve to admit air to the
The cause of the high temperature condition must be in- tank. Attach a garden hose to the drain valve on the
vestigated by qualified service personnel and corrective water heater and direct the stream of water to a drain
action taken before placing the water heater in service where it will do no damage.
again.
9
Maintenance
Properly maintained, this water heater will provide years
of dependable, trouble free service. It is strongly sug- ! DANGER
gested that a regular routine maintenance program be Before manually operating the relief valve, make certain
established and followed by the owner. It is further rec- no one will be exposed to the danger of coming in con-
ommended that a periodic inspection of the relief valve tact with the hot water released by this valve. The water
and electrical controls be made by service personnel may be hot enough to create a SCALD hazard. The water
qualified in electric appliance repair. released should be directed to a suitable drain to prevent
injury or damage.
! CAUTION
NOTE: If the temperature and pressure relief valve on
Make certain all power to the water heater is turned the water heater discharges periodically, this may be
“OFF” before performing any maintenance or inspection due to thermal expansion in a “closed” water system.
work on this water heater. Contact the water supplier or local plumbing inspec-
tor on how to correct this. DO NOT plug the relief valve
1. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS — Periodic inspection outlet.
of all electrical connections at the service terminal
block, fuse holders, contactors, thermostats and ele- 5. TANK — Good maintenance requires that the tank
ments should be performed to make certain all con- be cleaned of deposits. Unless the water supply is very
nections are tight. If the electrical supply leads used soft (0 to 5 grains hardness), scale or lime deposits will
are aluminum, particular attention should be given to accumulate in the tank. Hard water scale is deposited
the branch circuit connections at the heater’s termi- at an increasingly high rate in proportion to increased
nal block. It is advisable to retighten the field terminal water temperature, and accumulation of these deposits
connections of aluminum conductors may reduce efficiency and shorten the life of the water
twenty-four hours after the water heater was first heater.
placed in service. Torque specs are marked on the ter-
minal block. CLEANING THE TANK:
N OTE: On surface mounted thermostat models, make The water heater is not supplied with a clean-out pro-
certain insulation is carefully replaced and tucked in vision on the tank. To remove accumulated deposits
before placing heater in operation. Also check the from the tank, it is suggested that a few gallons of
thermostat to be certain that it is located in its bracket water be drained from the water heater’s tank through
and making good contact with the surface of the tank. the drain valve every month to remove those deposits.
2. FUSES — Any replacement fuses should be of the If chemical lime dissolving cleaners are preferred, cau-
same UL Class and type as the originals. The amp rat- tiously follow the instructions supplied with the clean-
ing of the element circuit fuses may be reduced on er. DO NOT use a muriatic or hydrochloric acid (HCl)
those models not having high amperage elements. based cleaner.
3. HEATING ELEMENTS — The life of elements can be 6. ANODE ROD INSPECTION — This water heater is
extended in hard water areas by removing the scale equipped with an anode rod designed to prolong the
build up. Cleaning can be accomplished by scraping or life of the glass lined tank. The anode is slowly con-
soaking in a de-scaling solution. Care should be taken sumed cathodically, thereby eliminating or minimizing
so the protective plating is not damaged by scraping corrosion of the glass lined tank.
or dissolved by excessive soaking.
Water sometimes contains a high sulfate and/or min-
eral content and together with the cathodic protection
! CAUTION process can produce a hydrogen sulfide or rotten egg
odor in the heated water. Chlorination of the water
supply should minimize the problem.
Be certain all power to the water heater is turned “OFF”
and tank has been completely drained before removing T he anode rod(s) should be removed from the water
elements for cleaning. heater’s tank for periodic inspection. Replace the
W henever an element is removed from the tank for anode(s) when more than 6” (152mm) of core wire is
cleaning or replacement, a new gasket should be in- exposed at either end of the rod.
stalled to prevent a possible water leak. Refer to parts
information in this manual for replacement gasket in- I f overhead clearance is not sufficient to allow installa-
formation. The elements are easily unscrewed with a tion of a rigid rod of original length, segmented rods in
1-1/2” socket wrench. both standard and resistor versions are available.
4. RELIEF VALVE — The Temperature and Pressure Re- N OTE: Do not remove the anode rod from the water
lief Valve must be free to operate properly. Check op- heater’s tank, except for inspection and/or replace-
eration (at least once a year) by lifting the handle fully ment, as operation with the anode rode removed will
and allowing several gallons of water to flush through shorten the life of the glass lined tank and exclude
the discharge line. Make certain the discharged water warranty coverage.
is directed to a suitable drain.
10
Maintenance
7. SEASONAL OPERATION — If the water heater is to NOTE: Refer to “Hydrogen Gas Caution” in Safety Pre-
remain idle for an extended period of time (60 days cautions Section on page 8.
or more) the power to the heater should be turned
off. The water heater and piping should be drained if 8. GENERAL— Periodic cleaning of the equipment
they might be subjected to freezing temperatures. It is recommended. Turn off power to heater. Remove
is recommended that the water heater’s operation is any lint or dust that may block the free passage of air
thoroughly checked (by qualified personnel) before it is through the control compartment. DO NOT allow com-
placed back in service. bustible materials such as newspapers, rags or mops
to accumulate near the water heater.
System Sentinel® System

This water heater is supplied with the System Sentinel® System. The system consists of an element diagnostic panel
utilizing light emitting diodes (L.E.D.). The L.E.D.’s are lit only when the thermostat(s) is calling for element operation.
This diagnostis system has L.E.D.’s corresponding to the number and location of heating elements and are energized
when the elements are operating. An unlit L.E.D pinpoints the exact location of a non-functioning element, making
element operation diagnosis simple and positive.
Replacement Parts
The following Parts are required for Normal Maintenance 2. Quantity of each part required.
for all Models:
3. Complete model number and name of the water
SP21949 1 1/2” Socket Wrench for Element Head heater.
SP6708 Element Gasket
4. Serial Number of water heater
All other Parts can be ordered by providing the following
information: 5. Specify the voltage and KW rating.
1. Description of Part(s), such as: 6. Address Parts orders to your distributor or dealer.
Thermostat(s)*
Thermostat / High Temp Limit Assembly*
High Temperature Limit* ! CAUTION
Control Transformer* * For your safety, DO NOT attempt repair of Thermostats,
Heating Element (Include wattage and voltage) High Limit Controls or any other control component.
Anode Rod(s) Refer repairs to qualified service personnel.
Or other parts as required*
How to Obtain Service Assistance

1. Should you have any questions about your new When contacting the manufacturer, the following infor-
water heater, or if it requires adjustment, repair, or mation should be made available:
routine maintenance, it is suggested that you first con-
tact your installer, plumbing contractor or previously a. Model and serial numbers of the water heater as
agreed upon service agency. In the event that the firm shown on the rating plate attached to the jacket of the
has moved, or is unavailable, refer to the telephone heater.
directory commercial listings or local utility for quali- b. Address where water heater is located and can be
fied service assistance. seen.
c. ame and address of installer and any service agency
2. Should your problem not be solved to your com- who performed service on the water heater.
plete satisfaction, you should then contact the d. Date of original installation and dates any service
Manufacturer’s National Service Department at the fol- work was performed.
lowing address: e. Details of the problem as you can best describe
2600 Gunter Park Drive them.
Montgomery, Alabama 36109-1413 f. List of people, with dates, who have been contacted
Phone: 1-800-432-8373. regarding your problem.
11
Wiring Diagram:
Surface Mounted Thermostat Models
-G Models
SINGLE PHASE CONNECTIONS 3 & 6 Element Models Only
THREE PHASE CONNECTIONS

18 CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
3
15
6 CONNECTED TO
3
! D TERMINAL 1 ON
FIELD THERMOSTAT
480
277
240
208
120
120
WIRING
ALL RED
C
BLOCK 17
2
14
5
2 3 AMP
B
R CLASS G FUSES
ALL BLACK
16
1
13 BLK
4 C
GRD 1
A
BLK
BL BL BL
L H K G
BL
N I M J
W W W W
13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 CONNECTED TO
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
RATED VOLTAGE
R
CONTACTORS ON TRANSFORMER
R R R R
COPPER
CONDUCTORS ! D
R
F !
R
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24
30 AMP
CLASS G FUSE BLOCKS
FUSES
19 24 THERMOSTAT
20 22
ELEMENTS 21 23
8 10
9 11 ! THERMOSTAT AND HIGH LIMIT CONTROLS
OPERATE AT INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE.
7 12
No. of Elements Follow Wire Routes NOTE:

To insure proper thermostat response,
3 1 thru 12, A thru J be sure to replace insulation pad tightly
6 1 thru 24, A thru N over elements after servicing.
NOTE:
THIS WATER HEATER MAY BE SUPPLIED BY A BRANCH CIRCUIT HAVING OVER 300 VOLTS BETWEEN
CONDUCTORS, PROVIDED THE SYSTEM HAS A GROUND NEUTRAL AND NO CONDUCTOR IS OVER
3 0 0 V O LT S TO G R O U N D .
12
Wiring Diagram:
Surface Mounted Thermostat Models
-G Models
9 Element Configuration Only
30
CONTROL
SINGLE PHASE CONNECTIONS

27

18
TRANSFORMER
3
15
6
3
CONNECTED TO
FIELD ! D TERMINAL 1 ON
480
277
240
208
120
120
29
C
WIRING ALL RED 26 THERMOSTAT
BLOCK 17
2
14
5
2 3 AMP
B
R CLASS G FUSES
ALL BLACK
28
25
16
1
13 BLK
4 C
GRD 1
A
BLK
BL BL BL BL BL
Q L H K P G
BL
S N R I M R J
W W W W W W
25 26 27 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 28 29 30 ! D
R
CONTACTORS CONNECTED TO
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
RATED VOLTAGE
R R R R R R ON TRANSFORMER
37 38 39 43 44 45 49 50 51 40 41 42 46 47 48 52 53 54
F !
35 AMP 37 38 39 43 44 45 49 50 51 40 41 42 46 47 48 52 53 54
R
CLASS G
FUSES
FUSE BLOCKS
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
31 32 33 19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24 34 35 36 THERMOSTAT
!
33 35
THERMOSTAT AND HIGH LIMIT CONTROLS
ELEMENTS 31 36 OPERATE AT INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE.
32 34
19 24
20 22
21 23
8 10
NOTE:
9 11 To insure proper thermostat response,
7 12 be sure to replace insulation pad tightly
over elements after servicing.
NOTE:
13
Wiring Diagram:
Immersion Thermostat Models
-G Models
1 Element Configuration
CONTROL
TRANSFORMER
CONNECTED TO
480
277
240
208
120
120
! F RATED VOLTAGE ON
C
FIELD TRANSFORMER
ALL RED
WIRING
BLOCK 2 3 AMP
B
R CLASS G FUSES
!
ALL BLACK
D
GRD R
C
1 BLK
A
BLK
G
BL
H
W
D !
1 2 R
BLK
CONTACTORS
R
COPPER
CONDUCTORS
30 AMP
CLASS G ! F
R
FUSES
FUSE BLOCKS
LIMIT
BLK
7 8 E !
R
THERMOSTAT
ELEMENTS 7 8
! THERMOSTAT AND HIGH LIMIT CONTROLS

NOTE:
14
Wiring Diagram:
-G Models
3 & 6 Element Configurations Only
Up to 30 Amp Fuses
CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

18
480
277
240
208
120
120
CONNECTED TO
3
15
!
C
F
6
RATED VOLTAGE ON
3
FIELD TRANSFORMER
WIRING
ALL RED
BLOCK 17
2
14
5
2 3 AMP
CLASS G FUSES
ALL BLACK
B
16 R
D
1
13 R
4 A C
BLK BLK
GRD 1
BL BL BL
L H K G BL
N I M J
W W W W
! D R
13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18
CONTACTORS
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
R R R R
COPPER
CONDUCTORS
30 AMP
CLASS G LIMIT
FUSES
! F R
FUSE BLOCKS
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24
! E R
19 24 THERMOSTAT
20 22
ELEMENTS 21 23
8 10
9 11
7 12
No. of Elements Follow Wire Routes

3 1 thru 12, A thru J
6 1 thru 24, A thru N
NOTE:
15
Wiring Diagram:
-G Models
3 & 6 Element Configurations Only
35 Amp Fuse
CONTROL
TRANSFORMER

18
480
277
240
208
120
120
CONNECTED TO
3
15
!
C
F
6
RATED VOLTAGE ON
3
FIELD TRANSFORMER
WIRING
ALL RED
BLOCK 17
2
14
5
2 3 AMP
CLASS G FUSES
ALL BLACK
B
16 R
D
1
13 R
4 A C
BLK BLK
GRD 1
BL BL BL
L H K G BL
N I M J
W W W W
! D R
13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18
CONTACTORS
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
R R R R
LIMIT
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
35 AMP 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
! F R
CLASS G
FUSES FUSE BLOCKS
! E R
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24
THERMOSTAT
19 24
20 22
ELEMENTS 21 23
8 10
9 11
7 12
No. of Elements Follow Wire Routes

3 1 thru 12, 28 - 33, A - J
6 1 thru 36, A - N
NOTE:
16
Wiring Diagram:
-G Models
9 Element Configuration Only
30
CONTROL
27

18 TRANSFORMER
3
15
6
3
CONNECTED TO
480
277
240
208
120
120
D
FIELD 29
!
C
WIRING HIGH LIMIT
ALL RED
26
BLOCK 2
17
14
5
2 3 AMP
CLASS G FUSES
ALL BLACK
28
25 B
16 R
1
13
GRD 4 A
BLK
C
BLK
1
CONNECTED TO
RATED VOLTAGE ON
TRANSFORMER
BL BL BL BL BL
Q L H K P G
BL
S N I M R J
W W W W W W
D !
25 26 27 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 28 29 30 R
CONTACTORS
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
R R R R R R
LIMIT
37 38 39 43 44 45 49 50 51 40 41 42 46 47 48 52 53 54
37 38 39 43 44 45 49 50 51 40 41 42 46 47 48 52 53 54 F ! R
R E !
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
31 32 33 19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24 34 35 36
FUSE BLOCKS
35 AMP THERMOSTAT
CLASS G 33 35
FUSES 31 36
32 34
19 24 ! THERMOSTAT AND HIGH LIMIT CONTROLS
20 22
21 23 ELEMENTS
8 10
9 11
7 12
NOTE:
T H I S WAT E R H E AT E R M AY B E S U P P L I E D B Y A B R A N C H C I R C U I T H AV I N G O V E R 3 0 0 V O LT S B E T W E E N
3 0 0 V O LT S T O G R O U N D .
17
Wiring Diagram:
with Staging
3 Stage
-GS Models
30
SINGLE PHASE CONNECTIONS 27

18
CONTROL
3
15
6 TRANSFORMER
FIELD 29
3
! D CONNECTED TO
WIRING HIGH LIMIT
ALL RED
480
277
240
208
120
120
26
C
BLOCK 17
2
14
5
2 3 AMP
CLASS G FUSES
ALL BLACK
28
25 B
16 R
1
13
4 A C
BLK BLK
GRD 1
G
BL
Y
BL
V
BL
BL
H
S N I M R J
W W W W W W
25 26 27 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 28 29 30 CONTACTORS D !
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
R
R
R R R R R R LIMIT
X
BL
37 38 39 43 44 45 49 50 51 40 41 42 46 47 48 52 53 54 U
! BL
37 38 39 43 44 45 49 50 51 40 41 42 46 47 48 52 53 54
F 3 R
R E !
2 W
BL
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
31 32 33 19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24 34 35 36 1
FUSE BLOCKS
35 AMP
CLASS G THERMOSTATS
FUSES 33 35 CONNECTED TO
31 36 RATED VOLTAGE ON
TRANSFORMER
32 34
19 24
ELEMENTS 20 22
21 23
8 10
9 11
7 12

NOTE:
18
Wiring Diagram:
with Staging
2 Stage
-GS Models
CONTROL
18

15
TRANSFORMER
3
6
3
! D CONNECTED TO
480
277
240
208
120
120
HIGH LIMIT
C
ALL RED
17
FIELD 14
WIRING
2
5
BLOCK 2
3 AMP
CLASS G FUSES
ALL BLACK
16 B
13 R
1
4
1 A C
BLK BLK
GRD
BL V
BL
H G
BL
N I M J
W W W W
D !
R
13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18
CONTACTORS
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
K
R
R R R R BL
! F
R
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
U
BL
LIMIT
19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24
43 44 45 49 50 51 40 41 42 46 47 48
CLASS G E !
FUSES R
2
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
BLK
20 21 8 9 11 12 23 24
THERMOSTATS
19 7 10 22
1
FUSE BLOCKS
CONNECTED TO
19 24 RATED VOLTAGE ON
TRANSFORMER
20 22
21 23
8 10
ELEMENTS
9 11
7 12

NOTE:
19
Wiring Diagram:
-G Models
42
39
30
FIELD 27
WIRING 18
3
BLOCK 15
6 CONTROL
3 CONNECTED TO TRANSFORMER
RATED VOLTAGE
41 ON TRANSFORMER
38
29
GROUND 26
480
277
240
208
120
120
ALL RED
C
17
2
14
5
2
D CONNECTED TO
40 HIGH LIMIT
37
28
ALL BLACK
25 3 AMP
16 CLASS G
1
FUSES
13
4
B R D R
1
A BK C BK
U Q L H K P T G
W W W W W W W BL
W S N I M R V J
BL BL BL BL BL BL BL W
D
37 38 39 25 26 27 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 28 29 30 40 41 42 R
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
R
R
R
R
R R R R R R R R
F
R
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
LIMIT
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
R
R
43 44 45 31 32 33 19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24 34 35 36 46 47 48
44 46 FUSE 35 AMP
BLOCKS CLASS G THERMOSTAT E
FUSES R
45 47
43 48
33 35
31 36
32 34
ELEMENTS 19 24
20 22
21 23
8 10 THERMOSTAT AND HIGH LIMIT CONTROLS
9 11 OPERATE AT INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE
7 12
NOTE:
20
Wiring Diagram:
4 Stage
-GS Models
42
39
30
FIELD 27 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
3
WIRING 18
BLOCK 15
6
3
41
38 CONNECTED TO
29 RATED VOLTAGE
ALL RED
480
277
240
208
120
120
26 ON TRANSFORMER
C
2
17
14
GROUND 5
2
40
37 CONNECTED TO
D
ALL BLACK
28 HIGH LIMIT
25
1
16 3 AMP
13 CLASS G
4 FUSES
1
B R DR
A BK C
BK
DD BL
Y BL
V BL
H
BL
G
BL
D
AA S N I M R BB J R
W W W W W W W W
37 38 39 25 26 27 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 28 29 30 40 41 42 K
BL
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
R
R
R
R
F
CC
BL
R R R R R R R R
X LIMIT
BL
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
U
52 54 67 68 69 70 71 72 BL 4
49 50 51 53 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
Z
3 BL
W
2 BL
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
R
R
43 44 45 31 32 33 19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24 34 35 36 46 47 48
35 AMP
44 46 FUSE
CLASS G E
BLOCKS R
FUSES 45 47
43 48 1
33 35
31 36
THERMOSTATS
32 34
19 24
ELEMENTS
20 22
21 23
8 10
9 11
OPERATE AT INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE
7 12
NOTE:
21
Wiring Diagram:
-G Models
42
39
30
FIELD 27
WIRING 18
BLOCK 3 15
6 CONTROL
3 CONNECTED TO TRANSFORMER
RATED VOLTAGE
41 ON TRANSFORMER
38
29
GROUND 26
480
277
240
208
120
120
ALL RED
C
17
2
14
5
2
D CONNECTED TO
40 HIGH LIMIT
37
28
ALL BLACK
25 3 AMP
16 CLASS G
1
FUSES
13
4
B R D R
1
A BK C BK
U Q L H K P T G
W W W W W W W BL
W S N I M R V J
BL BL BL BL BL BL BL W
D
37 38 39 25 26 27 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 28 29 30 40 41 42 R
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
R
R
R
R
R R R R R R R R
F
R
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
LIMIT
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
R
R
43 44 45 31 32 33 19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24 34 35 36 46 47 48
44 46 FUSE 35 AMP
BLOCKS CLASS G THERMOSTAT E
FUSES R
45 47
43 48
33 35
31 36
32 34
ELEMENTS 19 24
20 22
21 23
8 10 THERMOSTAT AND HIGH LIMIT CONTROLS
9 11 OPERATE AT INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE
7 12
NOTE:
22
Wiring Diagram:
4 Stage
-GS Models
42
39
30
FIELD 27 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
3
WIRING 18
BLOCK 15
6
3
41
38 CONNECTED TO
29 RATED VOLTAGE
ALL RED
480
277
240
208
120
120
26 ON TRANSFORMER
C
2
17
14
GROUND 5
2
40
37 CONNECTED TO
D
ALL BLACK
28 HIGH LIMIT
25
1
16 3 AMP
13 CLASS G
4 FUSES
1
B R DR
A BK C
BK
DD BL
Y BL
V BL
H
BL
G
BL
D
AA S N I M R BB J R
W W W W W W W W
37 38 39 25 26 27 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 28 29 30 40 41 42 K
BL
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
R
R
R
R
F
CC
BL
R R R R R R R R
X LIMIT
BL
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
U
52 54 67 68 69 70 71 72 BL 4
49 50 51 53 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
Z
3 BL
W
2 BL
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
R
R
43 44 45 31 32 33 19 20 21 7 8 9 10 11 12 22 23 24 34 35 36 46 47 48
35 AMP
44 46 FUSE
CLASS G E
BLOCKS R
FUSES 45 47
43 48 1
33 35
31 36
THERMOSTATS
32 34
19 24
ELEMENTS
20 22
21 23
8 10
9 11
OPERATE AT INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE
7 12
NOTE:
23
24
7. Division 23- Heating, ventilating and Air Conditioning
(HVAC)
Content
7.1 Ceiling Exhaust Fans SPEC 2.9.1.1
- GreenHeck Centrifugal Ceiling Exhaust Model SP-B90 and Inline Cabinet

Fans
7.2 Single Zone Inverter Mini Split Cooling SPEC 2.9.2
-Lennox Single Zone Inverter Mini Split Cooling Only / LI012CO-160P432-1 -

LI012CI-160P432
7.1 Service Labeling

N/A N/A N/A
Service Labeling 12 PLEX
HVAC UNITS 1st Floor
HVAC OU CONDITION UNIT SAFETY SWITCH HVAC IU CONDITION UNIT SAFETY SWITCH
Out Door Air OU-101 OU-101 In Door Air IU-101 OU-101
HVAC UNITS 2nd Floor
HVAC OU CONDITION UNIT SAFETY SWITCH HVAC IU CONDITION UNIT SAFETY SWITCH
Out Door Air
Condition Unit 0U-106
Safety Switch OU-106 In Door Air
Condition Unit IU-102 On Door Air In Door Air
Safety Switch OU-102 Condition Unit 0U-104 Condition Unit 0U-106
Out Door Air Safety Switch OU-104 Safety Switch OU-106
Safety Switch OU-104
Out Door Air

REF.
REF.
REF.
REF.
REF.
REF.
Out Door Air

Out Door Air

In Door Air In Door Air In Door Air
Condition Unit IU-101 Condition Unit IU-103 Condition Unit IU-105
Out Door Air Safety Switch OU-101 Safety Switch OU-103 Safety Switch OU-105
1st PLAN-LABELING SCHEDULE

ESC:1:75
Out Door Air
In Door Air
In Door Air In Door Air
Condition Unit IU-202
Condition Unit IU-204 Condition Unit IU-206
Out Door Air Safety Switch OU-204 Safety Switch OU-206
Out Door Air

REF.
REF.
REF.
REF.
REF.
REF.
Out Door Air
Out Door Air

In Door Air In Door Air In Door Air
Condition Unit IU-201 Condition Unit IU-203 Condition Unit IU-205
Safety Switch OU-201 Safety Switch OU-203 Safety Switch OU-205
Out Door Air
2nd PLAN-LABELING SCHEDULE

ESC:1:75
7.2 Ceiling Exhaust Fans SPEC 2.9.1.1

Ceiling Exhaust Fans SPEC GreenHeck Model SP-B90
2.9.1.1
Document 474680
Model SP
® Model CSP
Ceiling Exhaust and Inline Fans
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

Please read and save these instructions for future reference. Read carefully before attempting to assemble, install,
operate or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by observing all safety information. Failure
to comply with instructions could result in personal injury and/or property damage!
Model SP Model CSP

Model SP is a direct drive ceiling Model CSP is a direct drive inline
exhaust fan designed for clean exhaust fan designed for clean
air applications where low sound air applications where low sound
levels are required. Many options levels are required. Capacities
and accessories are available such range from 70 to 3,800 cfm (119 to
as lights, motion detectors, ceiling radiation dampers 6,456 m3/hr) and 1 in. wg (248 Pa).
and speed controls. Capacities range from 25 to 1,600 AMCA Licensed for Air Performance.
cfm (42 to 2,718 m3/hr) and 1 in. wg (248 Pa). AMCA
Licensed for Sound and Air Performance. AVERTISSEMENT!
ENERGY STAR® Certified models include: Pour réduire le risque d’incendie, de choc électrique ou de
blessure corporelle, respecter cd qui suit:
SP-A, 50, 70, 90, 200, 250, 290 and 410;
• Appareil pouvant être utilisé avec un régulateur de vitesse à semi-
SP-B, 50, 70, 80 and 90. conducteurs.
WARNING! • Utiliser cet appareil exclusivement comme prévu par le fabricant. En
cas de questions, communiquer avec le fabricant à l’adresse ou au
To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons,
numéro de téléphone figurant dans la garantie.
observe the following:
• Avant tout entretien ou nettoyage de l’appareil, couper l’alimentation
• Suitable for use with solid state speed controls.
sur le tableau électrique et verrouiller le dispositif de sectionnement
• Use this unit only in the manner intended by the manufacturer. If pour empêcher toute mise sous tension accidentelle. Si le dispositif
you have questions, contact the manufacturer. de sectionnement ne peut pas être verrouillé, attacher un moyen
• Before servicing or cleaning unit, switch power off at service panel de mise en garde bien visible, tel qu’un panonceau, au tableau
and lock service disconnecting means to prevent power from being électrique.
switched on accidentally. When the service disconnecting means • La pose et le câblage électrique doivent être effectués par des
cannot be locked, securely fasten a prominent warning device, personnes qualifiées en conformité avec les codes et normes en
such as a tag, to the service panel. vigueur, y compris pour la résistance au feu du bâtiment.
• Installation work and electrical wiring must be done by qualified • Une quantité d’air suffisante est nécessaire pour la bonne combustion
person(s) in accordance with all applicable codes and standards, et l’extraction des gaz brûlés par le conduit d’évacuation (cheminée)
including fire-rated construction. d’appareils à combustible afin d’éviter le refoulement. Veiller à suivre
• Sufficient air is needed for proper combustion and exhausting les indications du fabricant du matériel de chauffe, les normes de
of gases through the flue (chimney) of fuel burning equipment sécurité telles que celles publiées par la National Fire Protection
to prevent back drafting. Follow the heating equipment Association (NFPA) et l’American Society for Heating, Refrigeration
manufacturer’s guideline and safety standards such as those and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) et la réglementation en
published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), vigueur.
and the American Society for Heating, Refrigeration and Air • Lors de la découpe ou du perçage de murs ou plafonds, ne pas
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) and the local code authorities. endommager les câbles électriques et autres conduites masquées.
• When cutting or drilling into wall or ceiling, do not damage • Pose admissible au-dessus d’une baignoire ou d’une douche sous
electrical wiring or other hidden utilities. réserve de raccordement à un circuit de dérivation à protection GFCI
• Acceptable for use over a bathtub or shower when installed (disjoncteur différentiel). (Jusqu’à la taille SP-A390 incluse)
in a GFCI protected branch circuit. (Up through size SP-A390) • Ne jamais placer d’interrupteur à un emplacement à portée d’une
• Never place a switch where it can be reached from a tub or baignoire ou d’une douche.
shower. • Les caissons d’extraction à gaine doivent toujours être évacués vers
• Ducted fans must always be vented to the outdoors. l’extérieur.
• These fans are not recommended for cooking exhaust • Ces caissons ne sont pas conseillés pour les applications
applications. They are designed primarily for low temperature, d’aspiration de vapeurs de cuisson. Ils sont conçus essentiellement
clean air applications only. The diagram shows the minimum pour l’aspiration d’air propre à basse température. Le schéma
distance these fans should be placed in relation to cooking indique la distance minimale de placement de ces caissons par
equipment. rapport à l’équipement de cuisson.
• Fan/Light combination not to be installed in a ceiling thermally • Le combiné ventilateur/luminaire ne devra pas être installé dans un
insulated to a value greater than R40. plafond ayant une isolation thermique d’une valeur supérieure à R40.
CAUTION! ATTENTION!
• For general ventilating use only. Do not use to exhaust hazardous • À utiliser pour la ventilation générale uniquement. Ne pas utiliser
or explosive materials and vapors. pour l’aspiration de matières et vapeurs dangereuses ou explosives.
®
Ceiling Exhaust and Inline Fans 1
Prepare the fan
Power Assembly Remove Wiring Knockout

If power assembly (motor, wheel, and scroll) is not Remove either top or side wiring knockout,
installed in housing, insert the electrical plug into fan depending on wiring
socket, then slide scroll end of power assembly into direction, by
Electrical
fan housing. Attach by using two sheet metal screws bending it back Access
Panel
provided. and forth to
break tabs.
B Model A Model
Knockouts
Ductwork
Check ductwork to see if the fan’s discharge requires
rotation from horizontal to vertical discharge.
Airflow
Airflow
Fan Rotation
To rotate from horizontal to vertical discharge
A-Models Only
A-50-500, 710, 780 Models

Remove the two screws holding the power assembly
in and pull power assembly out. Rotate power
assembly 180 degrees and put back into fan. Use
the same screws to reattach power assembly to fan
housing. Flip fan over and remove the four screws
holding the discharge duct and damper assembly.
Exchange the assembly with plate mounted on top of
fan, as shown in these illustrations.
A-700, 900-1500 Models

Remove the eight screws
holding the access panel or
collar as shown in picture.
Rotate the fan housing so
the discharge is facing up.
Access
Replace access panel or Access
Panel
Panel
collar and screws.
2 Ceiling Exhaust and Inline Fans ®

Ceiling Radiation Damper (CRD) To mount the ceiling radiation damper to fan, make sure
grille attachment tabs are facing down. Then place the inlet
If fan is to be used in a fire resistive membrane
part of the fan into the ceiling radiation damper collar, and
ceiling, a ceiling radiation damper must be used.
use self-tapping sheet metal screws (by others) to screw
If the ceiling radiation damper is already mounted to through the damper collar and into the fan housing. If the
the fan from the factory, proceed to Install the Fan. fan/light combination is being used, make sure ceiling
radiation damper has
an electrical plug in it.
The electrical plug must
be inserted into the fan.
Make sure the electrical
wire will not interfere with
damper operation as
shown in figure below.
Wires to ceiling fan
Attachment Tabs Do not allow

interference
in this area
A-50-510, 710, 780 Models B-Models A-700, 900-1550 Models Wires from lighted grille
Discharge Installation SP-A 50-90 Models
1 2
Insert plastic duct tab into SP-A box slots. Rotate plastic SP-A duct adapter (PN 473388)
until the screw tabs meets SP-A box.
Sheet Metal Screw #10x3/8

Phillips Head (PN 415838)
SP-A Box Phillips Head (PN 415838)
SP-A Box
SP-A Box Slot
Screw Tabs
Plastic SP-A Plastic SP-A Plastic SP-A
Duct Adapter Tabs Duct Adapter (PN 473388) Duct Adapter (PN 473388)
3
Install screws provided to secure discharge.
Screw holes
Phillips Head (PN 415838)
®
Discharge Installation SP/CSP-B 50-200 Models
1 2
Insert SP-B box scroll tab into SP-B box Rotate plastic SP-B duct adapter (PN 474433)
scroll slots. until the two SP-B mounting tabs fully engage
into the two SP-B box mounting slots.
SP-B
Box Scroll Tabs
SP-B
Box Mounting Slots
SP-B
Box Scroll Slots
SP-B
Box Mounting Tabs
3
OPTIONAL
Align the pins on the TR 6x4 adaptor to the
duct pin hole on the SP-B 6-inch duct. Push
until the adaptor snaps into place.
TR 6x4 Pin
SP-B
Plastic Duct Pin Hole
SP-B
6-inch
TR 6x4 Plastic Duct
(PN 473324) (PN 474433)

Install the Fan For Frame Construction:
Position unit between
1. For best joists. Position brackets
Slots in the
brackets
allow fine
performance, Do not install such that bottom adjustment
for flush
choose a location fan in this area
edge of housing will fit with
wall/ceiling
with the shortest 45° 45°
be flush with finished opening
possible duct run ceiling, and tighten the

and minimum Fig. 1 adjustable mounting
number of elbows. Fig. 3
brackets, shown in
Do not mount near Fig. 3.
Brackets can be
cooking equipment, as used in either
position to adapt to
shown in Fig. 1. most mounting For Hanging
situations
Bottom Mount Installations:
2. Attach adjustable Use Greenheck’s
mounting brackets optional vibration
to fan, but leave the isolator kit Part Number
Bottom Mount
screws loose until VI Kit. Using the fan’s
proper height is standard adjustable
determined, shown Fig. 4
mounting brackets and
in Fig. 2. Cut hole to Top Mount 10 by 32 threaded rod
dimensions shown (by others), hang unit as
Fig. 2
in table below: shown in Fig. 4.
3. Installation of ductwork Fig. 5
Ceiling Openings
is critical to the performance
Sizes Fan or Fan/Light Fan/CRD of the fan, shown in Fig. 5.
1
(GOOD)
SP-A50, A70, A90 Straight ductwork (1) or

107⁄8 x 133⁄8 111⁄8 x 137⁄16 3
SP-A110, A125, A190 2 (POOR)
ductwork that turns in (GOOD)
SP-A200, A250, A290, A390 121⁄8 x 141⁄4 121⁄4 x 143⁄8 the same direction as the
AIRFLOW
SP-A700 233⁄4 x 113⁄4 241⁄8 x 121⁄4 wheel (2) is recommended.
SP-A410, A510, A710, A780 14 ⁄4 x 18 ⁄8
3 3
147⁄8 x 187⁄16 Ductwork turning opposite
SP-A900, A1050, A1410, the wheel direction (3) will
143⁄4 x 24 147⁄8 x 241⁄8
A1550 cause turbulence and back
SP-B 50 - 200 141⁄8 x 113⁄4 143⁄8 x 121⁄4 pressure resulting in poor
performance.
NOTE
4. Slide ductwork over the fan’s discharge collar and
Model SP-A 50-90 are standard with a round duct. securely attach it with sheet metal screws.
Should Model SP-A 110-190 require a round duct,
Model RDC (Round Duct Connector) may be ordered Make sure the screws do not interfere with damper
from Greenheck for field installation. operation. Check damper to make sure it opens freely.
Wire the Fan

1. If installed, remove
wiring cover. If fan/light
combination is being
used, make sure the
fan plug is connected Fan
to the fan receptacle Light
and the light plug is Fan Outlet (top)

Fig. 7a Fig. 7b
connected to the light Light Outlet (bottom)
Fig. 6
receptacle, shown in
Fig. 6. Using proper 115 & 277 Volt 220 - 240 Volt
wire connectors, wire the fan as shown in Fig. 7a. Black wire is “Hot” Black wire is “Hot”
For wiring of light proceed to Fig. 7b. White wire is “Neutral” White wire is “Hot”
Green wire is “Ground” Green wire is “Neutral/Ground”
2. Push all wiring into the unit’s cover and replace
wiring cover.
®
Attach the Grille Fig. 8
1. If lighted grille is being used, plug wire into fan

socket.
If lighted grille and ceiling radiation damper are
being used, plug wire from lighted grille into ceiling
radiation damper socket. Do not plug wire directly Fig. 9
into the fan socket. Make sure the wire does not
interfere with the ceiling radiation damper operation.
2. Attach grille with two screws provided. Make sure
not to over tighten; over tightening will damage
grille.
3. Slide attachment screw covers over the attachment
screws, shown in Figure 8 and 9.
4. If lighted grille is being used, install light bulb(s) into
light socket(s). For incandescent lights, use maximum
100 watt bulb (by others). For fluorescent lights, use
27W GU24 bulbs. Greenheck has replacement 27W
Squeeze
GU24 bulbs call 1-800-355-5354 to order. tabs to
insert/remove lens
5. If lighted grille is being used, snap lens into place, by
pushing on the outside edges of lens, shown in Fig. 9.
To remove lens, use small screw driver and pry on
one side of lens.
6. Turn on power and check fan and light operation.
Converting from ceiling to cabinet design for Model SP fans

All SP convertible sizes will be shipped with grille and duct collar cover.
Conversion Kit Parts List
B
• Qty. of 1 Blower Box Cover
Tools Required A
• Phillips Head Screwdriver
Step 1: Remove grille (A) by removing the two

grille screws (B).
Step 2: Remove duct collar cover (C) by
removing the four duct collar screws (D).
Step 3: Discard grille (A), two grille screws (B),
and duct collar cover (C). C
D
Step 4: Remove the six (6) tinnerman clips (E)
by twisting them to one side and pulling
straight out. Discard two of the six F
E
tinnerman clips. D
Step 5: Insert the remaining four tinnerman clips
(E) on grille opening side.
Step 6: Place blower box cover (F) over
tinnerman clips (E), which were inserted
in step 5.
Step 7: Screw the blower box cover (F) into place
with four blower box cover screws (D).
SP/CSP models shown are

UL and cUL listed E 33599

Other Installation Considerations Flex Duct
Connections
Ductwork and Noise

Fiberglass ductboard is a better choice than metal
ductwork for reducing fan noise and is highly
recommended for low sound applications. Where metal
duct is used, sound transmission can be reduced with
flexible duct connections between the fan and the duct.
Sound and Location
The location of these fans must be taken into
consideration before installation. In critical sound
installations, insulated ductwork, flexible duct
connections or placing the fan in a remote section of Remote
ductwork are solutions to meeting the required fan sound Mounted
levels. CSP and SP-C

Converted
Filters to Inline
The addition of an intake filter is highly recommended

for these fans, even in clean air environments excess Fiberglass
Ductboard
dirt can accumulate on wheels and motors causing
SP and SP-C
reduced performance and imbalance. Mounted Directly
Overhead
Filters, once installed, should be checked and cleaned
periodically to maintain performance.
Greenheck offers washable aluminum mesh filters
specifically designed for these fans. Please consult our Correct Low
SP/CSP catalog for more information. Sound Installation
Incorrect
SP/CSP models shown are
UL and cUL listed E 33599
General Maintenance Suggestions

Model SP/CSP ceiling exhaust fans require very little maintenance. But since small problems over time left
unchecked could lead to loss of performance or early motor failure, we do recommend that the unit be inspected
periodically (once or twice a year).
The fan motor and wheel should be checked for dust and dirt accumulations. Dirt buildup can lead to loss of
performance and motor overheating. Cleaning can be accomplished by brushing off any dust that may have
accumulated. Even filtered units can accumulate build-up and should be checked when cleaning filters.
The motor should be checked for lubrication at this time. Lubricate only those motors which have an oil hole
provided. A few drops of all purpose oil (SAE 20) will be sufficient.
®
Typical Installation
INSULATION*
(Place around and over Fan Housing.) ROOF CAP*
(with built-in damper)
FAN HOUSING
POWER CABLE* Keep duct runs short.
Seal gaps around

Housing. OR
ROUND
DUCT*
Seal duct joints
with tape. ROUND WALL CAP*
ELBOWS* (with built-in damper)
*Purchase separately.
Our Commitment
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.
Specific Greenheck product warranties are located on greenheck.com within the product area tabs and in the
Library under Warranties.
Greenheck’s Centrifugal Ceiling and Cabinet Exhaust Fans AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for Users and
catalog provides additional information describing the Installers of Industrial and Commercial Fans, provides
equipment, fan performance, available accessories, and additional safety information. This publication can be
specification data. obtained from AMCA International, Inc. at www.amca.org.
Phone: 715.359.6171 • Fax: 715.355.2399 • Parts: 800.355.5354 • E-mail: gfcinfo@greenheck.com • Website: www.greenheck.com
8 474680 • SP/CSP, Rev. 3, February 2015 Copyright 2015 © Greenheck Fan Corporation
7.3 Single Zone Inverter Mini Split Cooling SPEC 2.9.2

Single Zone Inverter Mini Lennox LI012CO-160P432-1- LI012CI-
Split Cooling SPEC, 2.9.2 160P432
Split Air Conditioner
OWNER'S MANUAL
LENNOX A I R CO ND I T I O NE RS
MO D E L:
LI012CI-180V432 LI012CO-180V432
LI012CI-180P432 LI012CO-180P432
LI018CI-180P432 LI018CO-180P432
LI024CI-180P432 LI024CO-180P432
LI012HI-180V432 LI012HO-180V432
LI012HI-180P432 LI012HO-180P432
LI018HI-180P432 LI018HO-180P432
LI024HI-180P432 LI024HO-180P432
Thank you for selecting LENNOX air conditioners.Please read this manual
carefully before operation and keep it for further reference.
Content
Operation Notices
Precautions............................................................................................................ 1
Parts name ............................................................................................................ 9
Screen Operation Guide
Buttons on remote controller ............................................................................... 11
Introduction for icons on display screen .............................................................. 11
Introduction for buttons on remote controller .......................................................12
Function introduction for combination buttons ..................................................... 15
Operation guide ................................................................................................... 17
Replacement of batteries in remote controller ..................................................... 17
Emergency operation .......................................................................................... 18
Maintenance
Clean and maintenance....................................................................................... 18
Malfunction
Malfunction analysis ............................................................................................ 21
Installation Notice
Installation dimension diagram ............................................................................ 25
Safety precautions for installing and relocating the unit ...................................... 26
Tools for installation ............................................................................................. 27
Selection of installation location .......................................................................... 27
Requirements for electric connection .................................................................. 28
Installation
Installation of indoor unit...................................................................................... 29
Installation of outdoor unit.................................................................................... 35
Vacuum pumping................................................................................................. 38
Leakage detection................................................................................................38
Check after installation ........................................................................................ 39
Test and operation
Test operation ...................................................................................................... 39
Attachment
......................................................................... 40
Pipe expanding method ................................................................................... 42
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced physical, sensory
or mental capabilities or lack of experience and knowledge, unless they have been given supervision
or instruction concerning use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety.
Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
If it needs to install, move or maintain the air conditioner, please contact dealer or local service center
to conduct it at first. Air conditioner must be installed, moved or maintained by appointed unit. Otherw-
ise, it may cause serious damage or personal injury or death.
Explanation of Symbols
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will

DANGER result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could

WARNING result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may

CAUTION result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates important but not hazard-related information,
NOTICE used to indicate risk of property damage.
Indicates a hazard that would be assigned a signal word

WARNING or CAUTION.
Precautions
WARNING
Operation and Maintenance

This appliance can be used by children aged from 8
years and above and persons with reduced physical,
sensory or mental capabilities or lack of experience
and knowledge if they have been given supervision or
instruction concerning use of the appliance in a safe
way and understand the hazards involved.
Children shall not play with the appliance.
Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be made by
children without supervision.
Do not connect air conditioner to multi-purpose socket.
Otherwise, it may cause fire hazard.
Do disconnect power supply when cleaning air
conditioner. Otherwise, it may cause electric shock. .
If the supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced by
the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified
persons in order to avoid a hazard.
Do not wash the air conditioner with water to avoid
electric shock.
Do not spray water on indoor unit. It may cause electric
shock or malfunction.
After removing the filter, do not touch fins to avoid injury.
Do not use fire or hair dryer to dry the filter to avoid
deformation or fire hazard.
1
Precautions
WARNING
Maintenance must be performed by qualified

professionals. Otherwise, it may cause personal injury
or damage.
Do not repair air conditioner by yourself. It may cause
electric shock or damage. Please contact dealer when
you need to repair air conditioner.
Do not extend fingers or objects into air inlet or air
outlet. It may cause personal injury or damage.
Do not block air outlet or air inlet. It may cause
malfunction.
Do not spill water on the remote controller, otherwise the
remote controller may be broken.
When below phenomenon occurs, please turn off air
conditioner and disconnect power immediately, and then
contact the dealer or qualified professionals for service.
● Power cord is overheating or damaged.
● There’s abnormal sound during operation.
● Circuit break trips off frequently.
● Air conditioner gives off burning smell.
● Indoor unit is leaking.
If the air conditioner operates under abnormal conditions,

it may cause malfunction, electric shock or fire hazard.
When turning on or turning off the unit by emergency
operation switch, please press this switch with an insulating
object other than metal.
Do not step on top panel of outdoor unit, or put heavy
objects. It may cause damage or personal injury.
2
Precautions
WARNING
Attachment
Installation must be performed by qualified professionals.
Otherwise, it may cause personal injury or damage.
Must follow the electric safety regulations when installing
the unit.
According to the local safety regulations, use qualified
power supply circuit and circuit break.
Do install the circuit break. If not, it may cause malfunction.
An all-pole disconnection switch having a contact separation
of at least 3mm in all poles should be connected in fixed
wiring.
Including an circuit break with suitable capacity, please
note the following table.Air switch should be included
magnet buckle and heating buckle function, it can protect
the circuit-short and overload.
Air Conditioner should be properly grounded. Incorrect
grounding may cause electric shock.
Don't use unqualified power cord.
Make sure the power supply matches with the
requirement of air conditioner.Unstable power supply or
incorrect wiring or malfunction. Please install proper power
supply cables before using the air conditioner.
Properly connect the live wire, neutral wire and
grounding wire of power socket.
Be sure to cut off the power supply before proceeding
any work related to electricity and safety.
3
Precautions
WARNING
Do not put through the power before finishing installation.

If the supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced by
the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified
persons in order to avoid a hazard.
The temperature of refrigerant circuit will be high, please
keep the interconnection cable away from the copper
tube.
The appliance shall be installed in accordance with
national wiring regulations.
Installation must be performed in accordance with the
requirement of NEC and CEC by authorized personnel
only.
The air conditioner is the first class electric appliance. It
must be properly grounding with specialized grounding
device by a professional. Please make sure it is always
grounded effectively, otherwise it may cause electric shock.
The yellow-green wire in air conditioner is grounding
wire, which can't be used for other purposes.
The grounding resistance should comply with national
electric safety regulations.
The appliance must be positioned so that the plug is
accessible.
All wires of indoor unit and outdoor unit should be
connected by a professional.
If the length of power connection wire is insufficient, please
contact the supplier for a new one. Avoid extending the
wire by yourself.
4
Precautions
WARNING
For the air conditioner with plug, the plug should be

reachable after finishing installation.
For the air conditioner without plug, an circuit break
must be installed in the line.
If you need to relocate the air conditioner to another
place, only the qualified person can perform the work.
Otherwise, it may cause personal injury or damage.
Select a location which is out of reach for children and
far away from animals or plants.If it is unavoidable,
please add the fence for safety purpose.
The indoor unit should be installed close to the wall.
Instructions for installation and use of this product are
provided by the manufacturer.
FCC WARNING
WARNING: Changes or modifications to this unit not

expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
FCC STATEMENT
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
5
Precautions
FCC STATEMENT
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference
received,including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions,may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
● Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
● Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
6
Precautions
IC STATEMENT
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
This equipment complies with FCC’s and IC’s RF
radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter
must be installed and operated to provide a separation
distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must
not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter. Installers must ensure that
20cm separation distance will be maintained between
the device (excluding its handset) and users.
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d’exposition au
rayonnement RF stipulées par la FCC et l’IC pour une
utilisation dans un environnement non contrôlé. Les
7
Precautions
IC STATEMENT
antennes utilisées pour cet émetteur doivent être

installées et doivent fonctionner à au moins 20 cm de
distance des utilisateurs et ne doivent pas être placées
près d’autres antennes ou émetteurs ou fonctionner
avec ceux-ci. Les installateurs doivent s’assurer qu’une
distance de 20 cm sépare l’appareil (à l’exception du
combiné) des utilisateurs.
Working temperature range

Indoor side DB/WB(°C/°F) Outdoor side DB/WB(°C/°F)
Maximum cooling 26.7/19.4(80/66.9) 46.1/23.9(115/75)
Maximum heating 26.7/-(80/-) 23.9/18.3(75/64.9)
NOTICE:
● The operating temperature range (outdoor temperature) for cooling only unit is
-18 (-0.4°F)~46.1 (115°F); for heat pump unit is-20 (-4°F)~46.1 (115°F).
8
Parts Name
Indoor Unit
air inlet
panel
aux.button
horizontal louver
air outlet
F
C
H OH OHU HORU ORU UR R
ONOFF
H HOONOFF
HOONOFF
UHOUONOFF
RHOUROURURR
ONOFF
ONOFF
ONOFF
ONOFFONOFF
remote control
(Display content or position may be different from above

graphics, please refer to actual products)
Outdoor Unit
air inlet
Connection wire
air outlet
NOTICE:
Actual product may be different from above graphics, please refer to actual
products.
9
Parts Name
Display
For some model: For some model:

temp.
cooling power receiver indicator
indicator indicator window heating
indicator
display
cooling
indicator
power receiver
heating temp. drying indicator window
display
indicator indicator indicator
drying
indicator
For some model:
display
temp.
indicator Power LED color indicator:
receiver Green-status-ON.
window Red -status-OFF.
Mode LED color indicator:

W R G White-W-Cool Mode-
W
Red-R-Heat Mode- R
(only for heating model)
Green-G-Dry Mode- G
For some model:

display
temp.
indicator
Power LED color indicator:
receiver Green-status-ON.
window Red -status-OFF.
Mode LED color indicator:
W R O
White-W-Cool Mode-
W
Red-R-Heat Mode- R
(only for heating model)
Orange-O-Dry Mode- O
Display content or position may be different from above graphics, please refer to actual
products.
10
Buttons on remote controller
1 ON/OFF button
2 - button
F 3 + button
C
HOUR 4 MODE button
ONOFF
5 FAN button
1 /
6 SWING button
2 3
7 I FEEL button
8 / button
4 5 9 SLEEP button
6 7 10 TEMP button
8 9 11 TIMER-ON button
10 11 12 CLOCK button
12 13 13 TIMER-OFF button
14 16 14 TURBO button
15 15 LIGHT button
16 X-FAN button
Introduction for icons on display screen

X-fan set fan speed
I feel send signal
8℃ heating function turbo mode
Operation mode ventilation operation
health mode
Auto mode set temperature
Cool mode This is a general remote controller. Some
Dry mode models have this function while some do
Fan mode not. Please refer to the actual models.
set time
Heat mode
TIMER ON/TIMER OFF
Clock
Sleep mode Child lock
light Up & down swing
Temp. display type
:Set temp. :Indoor ambient temp.
:Outdoor ambient temp.
11
Introduction for buttons on remote controller
Note:
● This is a general use remote controller, it could be used for the air conditioners
with multifunction; For some function, which the model doesn't have, if press
the corresponding button on the remote controller that the unit will keep the
original running status.
● After putting through power, air conditioner will give out a sound and operation
indicator " " is ON (red indicator). You can operate the air conditioner through
the remote controller.
● At ON status, after each pressing button on remote controller, the signal icon " "
indicates the signal has been sent to air conditioner.
1 ON/OFF button
Press this button to turn on the unit. Press this button again to turn off the unit.
2 - button
Press this button to decrease set temperature. Holding it down above 2 seconds
rapidly decreases set temperature. In AUTO mode, set temperature is not
adjustable.
3 + button
Press this button to increase set temperature. Holding it down above 2 seconds
rapidly increases set temperature. In AUTO mode, set temperature is not
adjustable.
4 MODE button
Each time you press this button, a mode is selected in a sequence that goes from
AUTO, COOL, DRY, FAN, and HEAT*, as the following:
AUTO COOL DRY FAN HEAT*
*Note: Only for models with heating function.
After energization, AUTO mode is defaulted. In AUTO mode, the set temperature
will not be displayed on the LCD, and the unit will automatically select the suitable
operation mode in accordance with the room temperature to make indoor room
comfortable. (As for cooling only unit, it won’t have any action when it receives the
signal of heating operation.)
12
5 FAN button
This button is used for setting Fan Speed in the sequence that goes from AUTO,
, , to , then back to Auto.
Auto
Low speed Medium speed High speed
6 SWING button
Press this button to set up &down swing angle, which circularly changes as below:
OFF
This remote controller is universal. If any command , or is sent out, the unit
will carry out the command as
indicates the guide louver swings as:
7 I FEEL button
Press this button to turn on I FEEL function. The unit automatically adjust tempera-
ture according to the sensed temperature. Press this button again to cancel I FEEL
function.
8 / button
Press this button to achieve the on and off of healthy and scavenging functions in
operation status. Press this button for the first time to start scavenging function;
LCD displays " ". Press the button for the second time to start healthy and
scavenging functions simultaneously; LCD displays " " and " ". Press this
button for the third time to quit healthy and scavenging functions simultaneously.
Press the button for the fourth time to start healthy function; LCD display " ".
Press this button again to repeat the operation above. (This function is applicable
to partial of models)
9 SLEEP button
Press this button to go into the SLEEP operation mode. Press it again to cancel
this function. This function is available in COOL, HEAT (Only for models with
heating function) mode to maintain the most comfortable temperature for you.
13
10 TEMP button
Press this button can see indoor set temperature, indoor ambient temperature or
outdoor ambient temperature on indoor unit’s display. Temperature is set circularly
by remote controller as below:
no display
● When selecting " " by remote controller or no display, temperature indicator on

indoor unit displays set temperature.
● When selecting " " by remote controller, temperature indicator on indoor unit
displays indoor ambient temperature.
● When selecting " " by remote controller, temperature indicator on indoor unit
displays outdoor ambient temperature.
Note:
● Outdoor ambient temperature display may can’t be selected for some models.
When indoor unit receives " " signal, it displays indoor set temperature.
● Only for the model whose indoor unit has dual-8 display.
11 TIMER-ON button
Press this button to initiate the auto-ON timer. To cancel the auto-timer program,
simply press this button again.
After press of this button, disappears and "ON" blinks. 00:00 is displayed for
ON time setting. Within 5 seconds, press + or - button to adjust the time value.
Every press of either button changes the time setting by 1 minute. Holding down
either button rapidly changes the time setting by 1 minute and then 10 minutes.
Within 5 Seconds after setting, press TIMER ON button to confirm.
12 CLOCK button
Press CLOCK button, blinking. Within 5 seconds, pressing + or - button adjusts
the present time. Holding down either button above 2 seconds increases or
decreases the time by 1 minute every 0.5 second and then by 10 minutes every
0.5 second. During blinking after setting, press CLOCK button again to confirm the
setting, and then will be constantly displayed.
13 TIMER-OFF button
Press this button to initiate the auto-off timer. To cancel the auto-timer program,
simply press the button again. TIMER OFF setting is the same as TIMER ON.
14
14 TURBO button
Press this button to activate / deactivate the Turbo function which enables the
unitto reach the preset temperature in the shortest time. In COOL mode, the unit
will blow strong cooling air at super high fan speed. In HEAT mode, the unit will
blow strong heating air at super high fan speed.
15 LIGHT button
Press LIGHT button to turn on the display's light and press this button again to turn
off the display's light. If the light is turned on, is displayed. If the light is turned
off, disappears.
16 X-FAN button
Pressing X-FAN button in COOL or DRY mode, the icon is displayed and the
indoor fan will continue operation for 2 minutes in order to dry the indoor unit even
though you have turned off the unit.
After energization, X-FAN OFF is defaulted. X-FAN is not available in AUTO, FAN
or HEAT mode.
Function introduction for combination buttons

Combination of "+" and "-" buttons: About lock
Press "+" and "-" buttons simultaneously to lock or unlock the keypad. If the remote
controller is locked, is displayed. In this case, pressing any button, blinks
three times.
Combination of "MODE" and "-" buttons:

About switch between Fahrenheit and centigrade
At unit OFF, press "MODE" and "-" buttons simultaneously to switch between °C
and °F.
15
Function introduction for combination buttons
Combination of "TEMP" and "CLOCK" buttons:
About Energy-saving Function
Press "TEMP" and "CLOCK" simultaneously in COOL mode to start energy-saving
function. Nixie tube on the remote controller displays "SE". Repeat the operation to
quit the function.
Combination of "TEMP" and "CLOCK" buttons:

About 8°C Heating Function
Press "TEMP" and "CLOCK" simultaneously in HEAT mode to start 8°C Heating
Function Nixie tube on the remote controller displays " " and a selected
temperature of "8°C" (46°F if Fahrenheit is adopted). Repeat the operation to quit
the function.
About Back-lighting Function
★ About HEALTH function (COLD PLASMA)

Turn on the unit, start up the fan (Breezing and X-FAN are excluded) and press
HEATLTH button on remote controller to start health function (If there is not
HEALTH button on remote controller, the unit defaults health function ON. )
WIFI Function
Press "MODE" and "TURBO" button simultaneously to turn on or turn off WIFI
function. When WIFI function is turned on, the " " icon will be displayed on
remote controller; Long press "MODE" and "TURBO" buttons simultaneously for
10s, remote controller will send WIFI reset code and then the WIFI function will be
turned on. WIFI function is defaulted ON after energization of the remote controller.
● This function is only available for some models.
16
Operation guide
1. After putting through the power, press "ON/OFF" button on remote controller to
turn on the air conditioner.
2. Press "MODE" button to select your required mode: AUTO, COOL, DRY, FAN,
HEAT.
3. Press "+" or "-" button to set your required temperature. (Temperature can’t be
adjusted under auto mode).
4. Press "FAN" button to set your required fan speed: auto, low, medium and high
speed.
5. Press "SWING" button to select fan blowing angle.
Replacement of batteries in remote controller
1. Press the back side of remote controller marked battery
the cover of battery box along the arrow direction. reinstall

2. Replace two 7# (AAA 1.5V) dry batteries, and
remove
make sure the position of "+" polar and "-" polar
are correct.
3. Reinstall the cover of battery box.
Cover of battery box
NOTICE
● During operation, point the remote control signal sender at the receiving
window on indoor unit.
● The distance between signal sender and receiving window should be no
more than 8m, and there should be no obstacles between them.
or wireless telephone; remote controller should be close to indoor unit during

operation.
● Replace new batteries of the same model when replacement is required.
● When you don’t use remote controller for a long time, please take out the
batteries.
● If the display on remote controller is fuzzy or there’s no display, please
replace batteries.
17
Emergency operation
If remote controller is lost or damaged, please use auxiliary button to turn

on or turn off the air conditioner. The operation in details are as below:
air conditioner. When the air conditioner is turned on, it will operate under
auto mode.
panel
aux. button
WARNING:
Use insulated object to press the auto button
Clean and maintenance

WARNING
■ Turn off the air conditioner and disconnect the power before cleaning the air
conditioner to avoid electric shock.
■ Do not wash the air conditioner with water to avoid electric shock.
■ Do not use volatile liquid to clean the air conditioner.
Clean surface of indoor unit

When the surface of indoor unit is dirty, it is recommended to use a soft dry cloth
or wet cloth to wipe it.
NOTICE:
● Do not remove the panel when cleaning it.
18
Open panel
1 Pull out the panel to a certain
3 ● Use dust catcher or water to
the water (below 45℃ ) to clean

it, and then put it in a shady
and cool place to dry.
4
panel cover tightly.
WARNING
■ The filter should be cleaned every three months. If there is much dust in the
operation environment, clean frequency can be increased.
■ After removing the filter, do not touch fins to avoid injury.
■ Do not use fire or hair dryer to dry the filter to avoid deformation or fire hazard.

NOTICE: Checking before use-season

1. Check whether air inlets and air outlets are blocked.
2. Check whether circuit break, plug and socket are in good condition.
4. Check whether drainage pipe is damaged.
NOTICE: Checking after use-season

1. Disconnect power supply.
Notice for recovery

1. Many packing materials are recyclable materials.
Please dispose them in appropriate recycling unit.
2. If you want to dispose the air conditioner, please contact local dealer or
consultant service center for the correct disposal method.

Malfunction analysis
General phenomenon analysis
Please check below items before asking for maintenance. If the malfunction still
can’t be eliminated, please contact local dealer or qualified professionals.
Phenomenon Check items Solution
● Whether it's interfered severely ● Pull out the plug. Reinsert

(such as static electricity,stable the plug after about 3min, and
voltage)? then turn on the unit again.
● Whether remote controller is
within the signal receiving ● Signal receiving range is 8m.
range?
Indoor unit ● Whether there are obstacles? ● Remove obstacles.
can’t receive ● Whether remote controller is ● Select proper angle and point
remote pointing at the receiving the remote controller at the re-
controller’s window? ceiving window on indoor unit.
signal or
● Is sensitivity of remote contro- ● Check the batteries. If the
remote
ller low; fuzzy display and no power of batteries is too low,
controller
display? please replace them.
has no
action. ● Check whether remote cont-
● No display when operating
roller appears to be damaged.
remote controller?
If yes, replace it.
● Take the remote controller
● Fluorescent lamp in room? close to indoor unit.
● Turn off the fluoresent lamp
and then try it again.
● Air inlet or air outlet of indoor ● Eliminate obstacles.

unit is blocked?
● Under heating mode, indoor ● After reaching to set temper-
No air temperature is reached to set ature, indoor unit will stop bl-
emitted temperature? owing out air.
from
indoor ● Heating mode is turned on just ● In order to prevent blowing
unit now? out cold air, indoor unit will be
started after delaying for sev-
eral minutes, which is a nor-
mal phenomenon.

● Power failure? ● Wait until power recovery.

● Is plug loose? ● Reinsert the plug.
● Circuit break trips off or ● Ask professional to replace
fuse is burnt out? circuit break or fuse.
Air condit- ● Wiring has malfunction? ● Ask professional to replace it.
ioner can’t
operate ● Unit has restarted immediately
● Wait for 3min, and then turn
after stopping operation?
on the unit again.
● Whether the function setting

for remote controller is ● Reset the function.
correct?
● Because indoor air is cooled

Mist is em-
rapidly. After a while, indoor
itted from ● Indoor temperature and hum-
temperature and humidity will
indoor unit’s idity is high?
be decrease and mist will
air outlet
disappear.
● Temperature can’t be adju-

sted under auto mode.
● Unit is operating under auto
Please switch the operation
Set temper- mode?
mode if you need to adjust
ature can’t temperature.
be adjusted
● Your required temperature
● Set temperature range:
exceeds the set temperature
16℃ ~30℃(61~86°F).
range?
● Wait until the voltage

● Voltage is too low?
resumes normal.
Cooling ● Filter is dirty? ● Clean the filter.
(heating)
effect is ● Set temperature is in proper ● Adjust temperature to proper
not good. range? range.
● Door and window are open? ● Close door and window.

● Whether there’s odour source, ● Eliminate the odour source.

Odours are
such as furniture and cigarette,
emitted ● Clean the filter.
etc.
Air conditioner ● Whether there’s interference, ● Disconnect power, put back

operates nor- such as thunder, wireless power, and then turn on the
mally suddenly devices, etc. unit again.
● The noise is the sound of

“Water
● Air conditioner is turned on or refrigerant flowing inside
flowing”
turned off just now? the unit, which is a normal
noise
phenomenon.
● This is the sound of friction

● Air conditioner is turned on or caused by expansion and/or
Cracking
turned off just now? contraction of panel or other
noise
parts due to the change of
temperature.

Error Code
● When air conditioner status is abnormal, temperature indictor on indoor unit will
ation of error code.

Error code Troubleshooting
It can be eliminated after restarting the unit. If not, please
E5

E6

E8

H6
C5
F0
F1
F2
Note:
service.
WARNING
■ When below phenomenon occurs, please turn off air conditioner and discon-
for service.
● Power cord is overheating or damaged.
● There’s abnormal sound during operation.
● Air switch trips off frequently.
● Air conditioner gives off burning smell.
● Indoor unit is leaking.
■ If the air conditioner operates under abnormal conditions, it may cause

Installation dimension diagram
Space to the ceiling
At least 15cm
Space to the wall
At least 15cm
At least 15cm
Space to the wall
cm
00
st3 n
At least 250cm
lea uc
tio
At str
b
heo
ot
c et
S pa
Space to the obstruction

50cm Above
30cm Above Air inlet side

e
ov
Ab
cm
Space to the wall

ve
30
o
Ab
50cm Above
00
m
0c
Air outlet side

20
Space to the wall
Drainage pipe
25
Safety precautions for installing and relocating the unit
To ensure safety, please be mindful of the following precautions.
Warning
When installing or relocating the unit, be sure to keep the refrigerant
circuit free from air or substances other than the specified refrigerant.
Any presence of air or other foreign substance in the refrigerant circuit will cause
system pressure rise or compressor rupture, resulting in injury.
When installing or moving this unit, do not charge the refrigerant which
is not comply with that on the nameplate or unqualified refrigerant.
Otherwise, it may cause abnormal operation, wrong action, mechanical
malfunction or even series safety accident.
When refrigerant needs to be recovered during relocating or repairing the
unit, be sure that the unit is running in cooling mode.Then, fully close the
valve at high pressure side (liquid valve).About 30-40 seconds later, fully
close the valve at low pressure side (gas valve), immediately stop the unit
and disconnect power. Please note that the time for refrigerant recovery
should not exceed 1 minute.
If refrigerant recovery takes too much time, air may be sucked in and cause
pressure rise or compressor rupture, resulting in injury.
During refrigerant recovery, make sure that liquid valve and gas valve are
fully closed and power is disconnected before detaching the connection pipe.
If compressor starts running when stop valve is open and connection pipe is not
yet connected, air will be sucked in and cause pressure rise or compressor
rupture, resulting in injury.
When installing the unit, make sure that connection pipe is securely
connected before the compressor starts running.
If compressor starts running when stop valve is open and connection pipe is not
yet connected, air will be sucked in and cause pressure rise or compressor
rupture, resulting in injury.
Prohibit installing the unit at the place where there may be leaked corrosive
gas or flammable gas.
If there leaked gas around the unit, it may cause explosion and other accidents.
Do not use extension cords for electrical connections. If the electric wire
is not long enough, please contact a local service center authorized
and ask for a proper electric wire.
Poor connections may lead to electric shock or fire.
Use the specified types of wires for electrical connections between the
indoor and outdoor units. Firmly clamp the wires so that their terminals
receive no external stresses.
Electric wires with insufficient capacity, wrong wire connections and insecure
wire terminals may cause electric shock or fire.

Tools for installation
1 Level meter 2 Screw driver 3 Impact drill
4 Drill head 5 Pipe expander 6 Torque wrench
7 Open-end wrench 8 Pipe cutter 9 Leakage detector
10 Vacuum pump 11 Pressure meter 12 Universal meter
13 Inner hexagon spanner 14 Measuring tape
Note:
● Please contact the local agent for installation.
● Don't use unqualified power cord.
Selection of installation location

Basic requirement Indoor unit
1. There should be no obstruction near air
Installing the unit in the following places inlet and air outlet.
maycause malfunction. If it is unavoidable, 2. Select a location where the condensation
please consult the local dealer: water can be dispersed easily and
won't affect other people.
1. The place with strong heat sources, 3. Select a location which is convenient to
vapors, flammable or explosive gas connect the outdoor unit and near the
, or volatile objects spread in the air. power socket.
2. The place with high-frequency devices 4. Select a location which is out of reach
(such as welding machine, medical for children.
equipment). 5. The location should be able to withstand
3. The place near coast area. the weight of indoor unit and won't
increase noise and vibration.
4. The place with oil or fumes in the air.
6. The appliance must be installed 2.5m
5. The place with sulfureted gas. above floor.
6. Other places with special circumstances 7. Don't install the indoor unit right above
shower or a swimming pool. the electric appliance.
7. Do not use the unit in the immediate 8. Please try your best to keep way from
surroundings of a laundry a bath a fluorescent lamp.
Outdoor unit
will not affect neighborhood.

2. The location should be well ventilated and dry, in which the outdoor unit
won't be exposed directly to sunlight or strong wind.
3. The location should be able to withstand the weight of outdoor unit.
4. Make sure that the installation follows the requirement of installation
dimension diagram.
5. Select a location which is out of reach for children and far away from animals
or plants.If it is unavoidable, please add the fence for safety purpose.

Requirements for electric connection
Safety precaution
1. Must follow the electric safety regulations when installing the unit.
2. According to the local safety regulations, use qualified power supply circuit and
circuit break.
3. Make sure the power supply matches with the requirement of air conditioner.
Unstable power supply or incorrect wiring or malfunction. Please install proper
power supply cables before using the air conditioner.
4. Properly connect the live wire, neutral wire and grounding wire of power socket.
5. Be sure to cut off the power supply before proceeding any work related to
electricity and safety.
6. Do not put through the power before finishing installation.
7. If the supply cord is damaged, it must be replaced by the manufacturer, its
service agent or similarly qualified persons in order to avoid a hazard.
8. The temperature of refrigerant circuit will be high, please keep the interconnec-
tion cable away from the copper tube.
9. The appliance shall be installed in accordance with national wiring regulations.
10.Installation must be performed in accordance with the requirement of NEC
and CEC by authorized personnel only
Grounding requirement
1. The air conditioner is the first class electric appliance. It must be properly
grounding with specialized grounding device by a professional. Please make
sure it is always grounded effectively, otherwise it may cause electric shock.
2. The yellow-green wire in air conditioner is grounding wire, which can't be used
for other purposes.
3. The grounding resistance should comply with national electric safety regulations.
4. The appliance must be positioned so that the plug is accessible.
5. An all-pole disconnection switch having a contact separation of at least 3mm in
all poles should be connected in fixed wiring. For models with a power plug,
make sure the plug is within reach after installation.

Installation of indoor unit
Step one: choosing installation location
rm it with the client.
Step two: install wall-mounting frame

1. Hang the wall-mounting frame on the wall; adjust it in horizontal position with the
plastic expansion particles in the holes.

3. Fix the wall-mounting frame on the wall with tapping screws (ST4.2X25TA) and
Step three: open piping hole

1. Choose the position of piping hole according to the direction of outlet pipe. The
position of piping hole should be a little lower than the wall-mounted frame,
shown as below.
QC: QD:
Wall Wall Wall Wall
Mark in the middle of it Level meter Mark in the middle of it Level meter
Space Space Space Space
to the to the to the to the
wall wall wall wall
above above above above
150mm 150mm 150mm 150mm
Left Right Left Right

Φ55mm Φ55mm Φ55/Φ70mm Φ55/Φ70mm
Rear piping hole Rear piping hole Rear piping hole Rear piping hole
QE:
Wall Wall
Mark in the middle of it Level meter
Space Space
to the to the
wall wall
above above
150mm 150mm
Left Right
Φ70mm Φ70mm
Rear piping hole Rear piping hole
2. Open a piping hole with the diameter of Φ55 or Φ70 on the selected outlet pipe
position.In order to drain smoothly, slant the piping hole on the wall slightly
downward to the outdoor side with the gradient of 5-10°.

Indoor outdoor
Note:
● Pay attention to dust prevention and
take relevant safety measures when
opening the hole.
● The plastic expansion particles are
5-10° Φ70/Φ55
not provided and should be bought
locally.
Step four: outlet pipe

1. The pipe can be led out in the 2. When select leading out the pipe
direction of right, rear right, left or from left or right, please cut off the
rear left. corresponding hole on the bottom
case.
left right
left rear left cut off

rear right the hole
right
1. Aim the pipe joint at the corresponding

bellmouth.
pipe joint union nut pipe
2. Pretightening the union nut with hand.
3. Adjust the torque force by referring to the following sheet. Place the open-end
wrench on the pipe joint and place the torque wrench on the union nut. Tighten
the union nut with torque wrench.

open-end Hex nut diameter Tightening torque (N.m)
wrench Φ6 15~20
union nut Φ 9.52 30~40
Φ 12 45~55
torque wrench pipe Φ 16 60~65
Φ 19 70~75
indoor pipe
4. Wrap the indoor pipe and joint of con-
nection pipe with insulating pipe, and
then wrap it with tape. insulating pipe
Step six: install drain hose

1. Connect the drain hose to the outlet pipe of
indoor unit.
drain hose
outlet pipe
2. Bind the joint with tape.
outlet drain hose
pipe
tape
Note: drain hose

● Add insulating pipe in the indoor
drain hose in order to prevent
condensation.
● The plastic expansion particles are
insulating pipe
not provided.
Step seven: connect wire of indoor unit

panel screw
1. Open the panel, remove the screw

on the wiring cover and then take
down the cover.
wiring cover

2. Make the power connection wire go cable-cross

through the cable-cross hole at the back hole
of indoor unit and then pull it out from
the front side.
power connection
wire
3. Remove the wire clip; connect the power connection wire to the wiring terminal
with wire clip.
09K 12K (for some model): 18K 24K (for some model):
N(1) 2 3 N(1) 2 3
L1 L2
N(1) 2 3 N(1) 2 3 L1 L2 G
Outdoor unit connection
09K 12K 18K 24K (for some model):
N(1) 2 3
white black red green

(blue) (brown) (yellow-
green)
4.Put wiring cover back and then tighten the screw.

5.Close the panel.
Note:
● All wires of indoor unit and outdoor unit should be connected by a professional.
for a new one. Avoid extending the wire by yourself.
installation.
● For the air conditioner without plug, an circuit break must be installed in the line.
The circuit break should be all-pole parting and the contact parting distance
should be more than 3mm.

Step eight: bind up pipe
1. Bind up the connection pipe, power connection pipe drain hose
band
cord and drain hose with the band.
indoor and
outdoor power cord
indoor unit gas
pipe
indoor power cord

liquid pipe
band 3. Bind them evenly.
drain hose
4. The liquid pipe and gas pipe should
be bound separately at the end.
2. Reserve a certain length of drain
hose and power cord for installation Note:
when binding them. When binding to ● The power cord and control wire
a certain degree, separate the indoor can't be crossed or winding.
power and then separate the drain ● The drain hose should be bound
hose. at the bottom.
Step nine: hang the indoor unit

1. Put the bound pipes in the wall pipe and then make them pass through the wall
hole.
2. Hang the indoor unit on the wall-mounting frame.
3. Stuff the gap between pipes and wall hole with sealing gum.
4. Fix the wall pipe.
5. Check if the indoor unit is installed firmly and closed to the wall.
indoor outdoor upper hook
wall pipe
sealing gum
lower hook of
wall-mounting frame
Note:
● Do not bend the drain hose too excessively in order to prevent blocking.

Installation of outdoor unit
(select it according to the actual installation situation)

1. Select installation location according to the house structure.
2. Fix the support of outdoor unit on the selected location with expansion screws.
Note:
installing the outdoor unit.

● Make sure the support can withstand at least
four times of the unit weight.
● The outdoor unit should be installed at least
joint.
● For the unit with cooling capacity of 2300W
~5000W, 6 expansion screws are needed;
for the unit with cooling capacity of 6000W
~8000W, 8 expansion screws are needed;
for the unit with cooling capacity of 10000W
at least 3cm above the floor
~16000W, 10 expansion screws are needed.
Step two: install drain joint

(Only for cooling and heating 1. Place the outdoor unit on the
unit) support.
1. Connect the outdoor drain joint into 2. Fix the foot holes of outdoor unit
the hole on the chassis, as shown in with bolts.
the picture below. foot holes
2. Connect the drain hose into the drain
vent.
drain vent chassis foot holes

outdoor drain joint
Drain hose

Step four: connect indoor and outdoor pipes
1. Remove the screw cap of valve and 3. Tighten the union nut with torque
aim the pipe joint at the bellmouth of wrench by referring to the sheet
pipe. below.
liquid pipe Hex nut diameter Tightening torque

(N.m)
liquid gas pipe Φ6 15~20
valve Φ 9.52 30~40
Φ 12 45~55
Φ 16 60~65
gas valve
Φ 19 70~75
2. Pretightening the union nut with

hand.
pipe joint
union nut
1. Remove the wire clip; connect the power connection wire and signal control
wire (only for cooling and heating unit) to the wiring terminal according to the
color; fix them with screws.
09、12K: 09、12K(for some model):
N(1) 2 3 N(1) 2 3 L N
L1 L2
N
L2 L
L1 POWER
POWER
N(1) 2 3
N(1) 2 3
Indoor unit connection Indoor unit connection
18、24K: 18、24K(for some model):

lock nut
N(1) 2 3 L1 L2 G N(1) 2 3 L1 L2 G
L2
green white red black white green L1
(yellow- (blue) black (brown) (brown) (blue) (yellow-
green) green) POWER
Finish
conduit
L1 L2 N(1) 2 3
Indoor unit connection POWER Indoor unit connection

2. Fix the power connection wire and signal control wire with wire clip (only for
cooling and heating unit).
Note:
● Never cut the power connection wire to prolong or shorten the distance.
Step six: neaten the pipes

1. The pipes should be placed along the wall,
bent reasonably and hidden possibly. Min.
semidiameter of bending the pipe is 10cm.
wall
2. If the outdoor unit is higher than the wall
hole, you must set a U-shaped curve in the
pipe before pipe goes into the room, in
order to prevent rain from getting into the
U-shaped curve
room.
drain hose
Outdoor Condensate Drainage (only for Heat pump unit)

During heating operation, the condensate and
defrosting water should be drained out reliably 18K UNIT:
through the drain hose. Install the outdoor dr-
ain connector in a Φ25 hole or Φ42 hole on the
base plate and attach the drain hose to the co-
nnector so that the waste water formed in the
outdoor unit can be drained out. The hole dia-
meter 25 or 42 must be plugged. drain hole Drain-water hole
Whether to plug other holes will be determined Bottom frame
by the dealers to actual conditions.
09、12K UNIT: 24K UNIT:
Drain-water hole drain hole Drain-water hole

Bottom frame Bottom frame

The 18K、24K UNIT drainage hole consists of two Φ25 and two kidney
holes (see the fig.1). The drain plug consists of one Φ25 and two kidney plugs.
(The figures in this manual may be different with the material objects, please refer
to the material objects for reference)
Drain plug drain holes
Drain connecter
Hose (available drain holes
commercially, drain holes
inner dia. 16mm)
Fig.1

Vacuum pumping
Use vacuum pump
1. Remove the valve caps on

the liquid valve and gas liquid valve piezometer Lo Hi
valve and the nut of refri-
gerant charging vent. gas valve
2. Connect the charging hose refrigerant charging valve cap
of piezometer to the refri- vent
gerant charging vent of gas nut of refrigerant
valve and then connect the charging vent
other charging hose to the
vacuum pump. vacuum pump
3. Open the piezometer com-
pletely and operate for inner hexagon
spanner
10-15min to check if the
pressure of piezometer re-
mains in -0.1MPa. close
4. Close the vacuum pump
open
and maintain this status for
1-2min to check if the pres-
sure of piezometer remains
in -0.1MPa. If the pressure decreases, there may be leakage.
5. Remove the piezometer, open the valve core of liquid valve and gas valve
completely with inner hexagon spanner.
6. Tighten the screw caps of valves and refrigerant charging vent.
7. Reinstall the handle.
Leakage detection
1. With leakage detector:
Check if there is leakage with leakage detector.
2. With soap water:
If leakage detector is not available, please use soap water for leakage detection.
Apply soap water at the suspected position and keep the soap water for more
than 3min. If there are air bubbles coming out of this position, there's a leakage.

Check after installation
Items to be checked Possible malfunction

The unit may drop, shake or emit noise.
Have you done the refrigerant leakage
test? (heating) capacity.
It may cause condensation and water
dripping.
It may cause condensation and water
Is water drained well?
dripping.
Is the voltage of power supply accord-
ing to the voltage marked on the It may cause malfunction or damaging
nameplate? the parts.
Is electric wiring and pipeline installed It may cause malfunction or damaging

correctly? the parts.
Is the unit grounded securely? It may cause electric leakage.
Does the power cord follow the speci- It may cause malfunction or damaging
the parts.
Is there any obstruction in the air inlet
and outlet? (heating) capacity.
The dust and sundries caused during It may cause malfunction or damaging
installation are removed? the parts.
The gas valve and liquid valve of
connection pipe are open completely? (heating) capacity.
Is the inlet and outlet of piping hole It may cause insufficient cooling
been covered? (heating) capacity or waster eletricity.
Test operation
1. Preparation of test operation
● The client approves the air conditioner.
● Specify the important notes for air conditioner to the client.
2. Method of test operation
● Put through the power, press ON/OFF button on the remote controller to start
operation.
● Press MODE button to select AUTO, COOL, DRY, FAN and HEAT to check
whether the operation is normal or not.
● If the ambient temperature is lower than 16℃ , the air conditioner can’t
start cooling.

Configuration of connection pipe
1. Standard length of connection pipe
● 5m, 7.5m, 8m.
2.Min. length of connection pipe is 3m.
3.Max. length of connection pipe.
Max length Max length

Cooling Cooling
of connec- of connec-
capacity capacity
tion pipe tion pipe
5000Btu/h 24000Btu/h
15 25
(1465W) (7032W)
15 30
(2051W) (8204W)
15 30
(2637W) (10548W)
12000Btu/h 42000Btu/h
20 30
(3516W) (12306W)
18000Btu/h 48000Btu/h
25 30
(5274W) (14064W)
4. The additional refrigerant oil and refrigerant charging required after prolonging
connection pipe
● After the length of connection pipe is prolonged for 10m at the basis of
standard length, you should add 5ml of refrigerant oil for each additional 5m
of connection pipe.
● The calculation method of additional refrigerant charging amount (on the basis
of liquid pipe):
Additional refrigerant charging amount = prolonged length of liquid pipe ×
additional refrigerant charging amount per meter
● Basing on the length of standard pipe, add refrigerant according to the
requirement as shown in the table. The additional refrigerant charging amount
per meter is different according to the diameter of liquid pipe. See the
following sheet.

Configuration of connection pipe
Additional refrigerant charging amount for R22, R407C, R410A and R134a
Diameter of connection pipe Outdoor unit throttle
Liquid pipe(mm) Gas pipe(mm) Cooling only(g/m) Cooling and heating(g/m)
Φ6 Φ9.52 or Φ12 15 20
Φ6 or Φ9.52 Φ16 or Φ19 15 50
Φ12 Φ19 or Φ22.2 30 120
Φ16 Φ25.4 or Φ31.8 60 120
Φ19 _ 250 250
Φ22.2 _ 350 350

Pipe expanding method
Note:
Improper pipe expanding is the main cause of refrigerant leakage. Please expand
the pipe according to the following steps:
A: Cut the pipe E: Expand the port
● Expand the port with expander.
the distance of indoor unit and
outdoor unit. hard
mold
● Cut the required pipe with pipe cutter. expander
pipe
pipe
pipe cutter
leaning uneven burr

Note:
● "A" is different according to the
diameter, please refer to the sheet
below:
Outer diameter A(mm)

B: Remove the burrs (mm) Max Min
● Remove the burrs with shaper and
prevent the burrs from getting into Φ6 - 6.35(1/4") 1.3 0.7
the pipe. Φ9.52(3/8") 1.6 1.0
pipe
shaper Φ12-12.7(1/2") 1.8 1.0
Φ15.8-16(5/8") 2.4 2.2
downwards
F: Inspection
● Check the quality of expanding port.
If there is any blemish, expand the
C: Put on suitable insulating pipe port again according to the steps
D: Put on the union nut above.
● Remove the union nut on the indoor
smooth surface
connection pipe and outdoor valve;
install the union nut on the pipe.
improper expanding
union pipe
leaning damaged crack uneven

surface thickness
pipe the length is equal

Split Air Conditioner
OWNER'S MANUAL
GREE AIR CONDITIONERS
Model A:
GWHD09ABNK3A1B
GWHD12ABNK3A1B
Model B:
GWHD09ABNK3A1C
GWHD12ABNK3A1C
Thank you for choosing GREE air conditioner for correct operation, please
read this owner's manual carefully before operating the unit and keeps
66129924019 it carefully for consultation.
8. Division 26- Electrical
Content
Division 26 12 19.10- Three Phase Pad Mounted

Transformer
8.1 Three-Phase Pad-Mounted Transformer
-General Electric Prolec Three Phase Pad-Mounted Transformer
Division 26 20 00 – Interior Distribution System

8.1 Conductor Material Spec 2.5
- SIMpull THHN Copper THHN Wire & cable
8.2 Disconnect Switch 30 AMP Spec 2.8.2
- General Electric Safety Switches Heavy Duty, Type TH (30 Amp)
- General Electric Safety Switches Heavy Duty, Type TH (60 Amp)
8.3 Metering, Spec 2.18
-Circutor Power Analyzers for panel CVM-C10
8.4 GFCI Receptacle, SPEC 2.9.2 (20 Amps)
- Leviton GFNT 2-RI GFCI Receptacle
8.5 Receptacles, SPEC 2.9
- Leviton 16362-I Receptacle (20 Amp)
8.6 Toggle Switches, SPEC 2.8.1
- Leviton 1221-21 Single- Pole Toggle Switch (20 Amp)
8.7 Weatherproof Metallic Cover SPEC 2.9.1
- Red Dot CKMUV Single Gang Cover

Content
Division 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting

8.8 Ceiling Fan Fixtures Type F Spec. 2.1 Luminaires:
- Hunter Dempsey Ceiling Fan Assembly Parts
- Hunter Dempsey Ceiling Fan Installation Manual
- Hunter Dempsey Ceiling Fan Safety Data Sheet
- Hunter Dempsey Ceiling Fan Warranty
8.9 Lighting Type A Spec 2.2 Luminaires

- Lumination LED Luminaires RX series Specifications
- Lumination LED Luminaires RX series Installation Manual
- Lumination LED Luminaires RLX series
8.10 Lighting Type B and C, Spec. 2.2 Luminaires

- Lithonia Lighting BLWP 2ánd 4´
8.11 Lighting Type WL, Spec. 2.2 Luminaires

- WDGE1 LED Architectural Wall Sconce Installation Manual
8.12 Photocell Switch, Spec 3.1.6

- Photo Control Model #K4121 C Specifications
- Photo Control Model #K4121 C Specifications
8.13 Lighting Contactor
- General Electric CR360L Electrically Held Contactors

Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Package
for General Electrical System
Content
Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Package for General Electrical System
1.1. Safety requirements for the safe use of this equipment
1.2. Additional Reference Materials
1.3 Prestart and Start Up:
1.4 Shutdown and Post-Shutdown:
1.5 Qualified Personnel
1.6 Storage
1.7 Operation
1.8 Material Handling Precautions
1.9 Action in the Event of a System or Component Malfunction
1.10 Maintenance and Repair
1.11 Installation Unpacking
1.12 Troubleshooting
Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Package for General
Electrical System
Note: The following instructions are provide for proper and safe maintenance of the 12 Plex
Phase I electrical system. Read theses instructions before start any operation or maintenance.
Make sure you have the proper personal protective equipment before you start any operation or
maintenance. Only qualified persons can make operation and maintenance in the electrical
system.
1.1. Safety requirements for the safe use of this equipment
1.1.1 Read installation instructions in their entirety before starting installation.

1.1.2 Respect all safety regulation. To avoid injuries, always disconnect power before
making any wiring connections and touching any parts of equipment.
1.1.3 Read and carefully follow the instructions throughout this manual for performing
specific tasks and working with specific equipment.
1.1.4 This manual must be available to personnel installing, operating, maintaining or
repairing this equipment.
1.1.5 Follow all applicable safety procedures required by your company, industry
standards and government or other regulatory agencies.
1.1.6 Install all electrical connections to local code.
1.1.7 Use only electrical wire of sufficient gauge and insulation to handle the rated current
demand. All wiring must meet local codes.
1.1.8 Route electrical wiring along a protected path. Make sure they will not be damaged
by moving equipment.
1.1.9 Protect component for damage, wear, and harsh environment conditions.
1.1.10 Allow ample room for maintenance, panel accessibility, and cover removal.
1.1.11 Protect equipment with safety device as specified by applicable safety regulations.
1.1.12 Protect equipment with safety devices as specified by applicable safety regulations.
1.1.13 If safety devices must be removed for installation, install them immediately after the
work is completed and check them for proper functioning prior to returning power to
the circuit.
1.2. Additional Reference Materials
1.1.1 NFPA 70B, Electrical Equipment Maintenance

1.1.2 NFPA 70E, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces
1.1.3 ANSI/NFPA 79, Electrical Standards for Metalworking Machine Tools
1.1.4 OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1910, Occupational Health and Safety Standards
1.1.5 National and local electrical codes and standards
1.2 Prestart and Start Up:
Prestart, startup operation only applies at any time on daylight, but make sure:
1.2.1 Close the load break cutout with its respective tool.
1.2.2 The ON/OFF switch main panels “S” has to be on the OFF Position.
1.2.3 “Insulation resistance test” (600 Volts wiring test) has to be done on the Power
Center. Both parts AC Circuit.
1.2.4 Confirm the transformer open circuit voltage is between 208-120 Vac.
1.2.5 Close doors the transformer and panels.
1.3 Shutdown and Post-Shutdown:
This procedure can be done at any time, to shut down the panels:
1.3.1 Turn the ON/OFF main switch on the OFF position

1.3.2 Turn the AC disconnect to the power OFF position
1.3.3 Verify that Voltage is zero
1.4 Qualified Personnel
The term qualified personnel is defined hare as individual who thoroughly understand the
equipment and its safe operation, maintenance and repair.
Qualified personnel are physically capable of performing the required tasks, familiar with all
relevant safety rules and regulations and have been trained to safely install, operate, maintain
and repair the equipment. It is the responsibility of the company operating this equipment to
ensure that its personnel meet these requirements. Always use required personal protective
equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices.
1.6 Storage
If equipment is to be stored prior to installation, it must be protected from the weather and kept
free of condensation and dust. Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment
damage.
1.7 Operation
Read the follow instructions carefully before start any operation procedure:
1.7.1 Only qualified personnel, physically capable of operating the equipment and with no
impairments in their judgment or reaction time, should operate this equipment.
1.7.2 Read all system component manuals before operating this equipment. A thorough
understanding of system components and their operation will help you operate the
system safely and efficiently.
1.7.3 Before starting this equipment, check all safety interlocks, fire- detection systems, and
protective device such as panels and covers. Make sure all devices are fully functional.
Do not deactivate or bypass automatic safety interlocks or locked-out electrical
disconnects or pneumatic valves.
1.7.4 Protect equipment with safety device with safety devices as specified by applicable
safety regulations.
1.7.5 If safety devices must be removed for installation, install them immediately after the
work is completed and check them for proper functioning.
1.7.6 Route electrical wiring along a protected path. Make sure they will not be damaged by
moving equipment.
1.7.7 Never operate equipment with a known malfunction.
1.7.8 Do not attempt to operate or service electrical equipment if standing water is present.
1.7.9 Use this equipment only in the environments for which is rated. Do not operate this
equipment in humid, flammable, or explosive environments.
1.7.10 Never touch exposed electrical connections on equipment while the power is ON.
1.8 Material Handling Precautions
1.8.1 This equipment may contain electrostatic sensitive device.

1.8.2 Protect from electrostatic discharge.
1.8.3 Electronic modules and components should be touched only when this is unavoidable e.
g. soldering, replacement.
1.8.4 Before touching any component of the cabinet by touching a conductive earthed part of
the cabinet.
1.8.5 Electronic modules or components must not be brought in contact with highly
insulating materials such as plastic sheets, synthetic fiber clothing. They must be laid
down on conductive surface.
1.8.6 The tip of the soldering iron must be grounded.
1.8.7 Electronic modules and components must be stored and transported in conductive
packing.
1.9 Action in the Event of a System or Component Malfunction
1.9.1 Do not operate a system that contains malfunctioning components. If a component

malfunction, turn the system OFF immediately.
1.9.2 Disconnect and lock out electrical power.
1.9.3 Allow only qualified personnel to make repairs or replace the malfunctioning
component according to instructions provided in its manual.
1.10 Maintenance and Repair
1.10.1 Allow only qualified personnel to perform maintenance troubleshooting, and repair
tasks.
1.10.2 Only persons who are properly trained and familiar with airfield solutions equipment
are permitted to service this equipment.
1.10.3 Disconnect and lock out electrical power.
1.10.4 Always use safety devices when working on this equipment.
1.10.5 Follow the recommended maintenance procedures in the product manuals.
1.10.6 Do not service or adjust any equipment unless another person trained in first aid and
CPR is present.
1.10.7 Connect all disconnected equipment ground cables and wires after servicing equipment.
1.10.8 Ground all conductive equipment
1.10.9 Use only approved replacement parts.
1.10.10 Using unapproved parts or making unapproved modifications to equipment may avoid
agency approvals and create safety hazards.
1.10.11 Check interlocks system periodically to ensure their effectiveness.
1.10.12 Use tools with insulated handles when working with electrical equipment.
1.11 Installation Unpacking
1.11.1 The electrical equipment is shipped ready to install in Project JLSA.

1.11.2 Read Installation instruction in their entirety before starting installation.
1.11.3 Do not install a damaged device in electrical system.
1.11.4 Do not disconnect a device in electrical system.
1.11.5 Do not disconnect a device from an electrical system.
1.11.6 Voltage will result along with a possibility of an electric shock.
1.11.7 Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage.
1.12.1 To inspect an equipment for possible damage

1.12.2 Tag out/Lockout the circuit using local procedure.
1.12.3 Inspect the entire assembly if a device fault is suspected.
1.12.4 To test an electrical circuit, device or equipment in DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
OF 12 PLEX Phase I
1.12.5 Tag out/ Lockout the circuit using local procedures.
1.12.6 Disconnect the circuit and note the current and voltage.
1.12.7 Inspect fire alarm or electrical equipment.
1.12.8 Connecting equipment.
End of this Section

8.1 Division 26 12 19.10 Three Phase Pad Mounted
Transformer

Three Phase Pad Mounted General Electric 34500GrdY/19920
Transformer
12PLEX
26 12 19. 10 THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
Three-Phase
Pad-Mounted Transformers
Optional features & accessories

• Broad selection of design efficiencies to meet specific
customer applications and the new DOE efficiency
requirements 2.2.3
• 50 Hz
• Type II insulating mineral oil b)
• High-fire point fluid, such as silicone, hydrocarbon or
vegetable fluids
• 55° and 55°/65° C average winding rise
2.2 THREE-PHASE PAD- • Copper and aluminum windings available
MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS • Dual high-voltage ratings
2.2.1.1 c)
• Internal expulsion fuses
• Current limiting fuses
• Internal oil-immersed partial range current-limiting
fuses 2.2.1.1 b)
• Bayonet fuse holders with and without flapper
Prolec GE offers a complete line of liquid-filled Three- • Non-loadbreak and loadbreak dry-well fuseholders
Phase Pad-Mounted distribution transformers that meet • Internal oil switch (radial or loop)
applicable ANSI™/IEEE™ standards. • Under oil internal arresters
• Low-voltage molded-case circuit breaker
With high voltages up to 34.5 kV and ratings up to 5,000 • Seismic Zone III and IV
kVA (ONAN), Prolec GE compartmental-type Three • Stainless steel tank and cabinet construction
Phase Pad-Mounted Commercial Transformers are • Special colors
designed for outdoor installation on a concrete pad and • RUS accepted
provide underground power distribution to commercial, • Compliance with Canadian Standards (CSA)
industrial and institutional loads.
Tests
High-grade materials, combined with sophisticated Each transformer receives all standard commercial tests
engineering design systems, are key elements of a in accordance with ANSI C57.12.90 (latest revision), with
transformer that will deliver years of highly reliable service. test reports available by serial number of the transformer.
2.2.2 a)
Standard features • Resistance tests of all windings
• 60 Hz operation • Ratio tests on the rated voltage
2.2.1.1 a) and all tap connections
• 65° C average winding rise
• Radial & loop feed arrangements • Polarity and phase relation tests
• Dead and live front type of HV terminals at rated voltage
• HV BIL 45 – 150 kV (Dead Front) 200 kV (Live Front) • No load loss at rated voltage
• LV BIL 30 – 60 kV • Exciting current at rated voltage
• Three-point latching of low-voltage door • Impedance and load losses
• High-voltage door, which can be opened only after • Applied voltage test
the low-voltage door is opened • Induced voltage test
• Rigid steel partition • Full-wave impulse test
• Transformer tank welded from cover to base • Mechanical leak test
• Permanent nameplate
• One-inch NPT pipe cap filling provision 2.2.1
• ANSI tank ground pads
• One-inch drain valve and sampler Compartments
• Automatic pressure-relief valve (35 SCFM)
• Tap changer with (2) 2.5% full capacity taps above
and below nominal
• One 10”x18” (or 14”x25”) hand hole in transformer
tank cover ANSI is a registered trademark of American National
Standards Institute, Incorporated.
• Painted olive-green color (Munsell 7GY 3.29/1.5)
• Designed, manufactured and tested in accordance IEEE is a registered trademark of the Institute of Electrical
with the latest ANSI standards Electronics Engineers, Inc.
Standard voltages Standard ratings
Standard Primary Standard kVA Ratings
45 225 1000 2.2.2 b)
Voltage Ratings Minimum BIL (kV)
75 300 1500
Delta or Wye 112.5 500 2000
2400 45 150 750 2500
4160 60
4800 60
7200 75 2.2.2 b)
7620 75
12000 95 Overall typical dimensions for reference
12470 95 kVA Height Width Depth Typ Weight Typ Gal
13200 95 (Lb) Oil
13800 95
75 64 46 65 2,512 136
16340 95
112.5 64 46 65 2,729 145
150 64 47 65 2,895 145
Grounded Wye 225 66 50 67 3,499 164
4160GrdY/2400 65 300 67 53 68 3,866 171
12470GrdY/7200 95 500 68 62 70 4,958 203
13200GrdY/7620 95 750 75 72 72 6,590 272
13800GrdY/7970 95 1000 78 75 75 7,647 312
22860GrdY/13200 125 1500 82 82 83 9,888 368
23900GrdY/13800 125 2000 86 85 89 11,891 433
24940GrdY/14400 125 2500 87 88 96 13,794 487
34500GrdY/19920 150
For kVAs not listed, contact factory.
Dimensions and weights are approximate and subject to change
without notice and should not be used for construction purposes.
Standards and certifications available
STANDAR
For more information contact your local GE Sales Representative or visit our website at www.prolecge.com
Phone: Toll free 1 800-437-7653 (US & Canada) / +52 (81) 8030-2341 (Mexico) / Fax: +52 (81) 8030-2323 or 2325
3PPMTR-1011-02
8.2.1 South Wire Conductor

Wire Conductor SIMpull THHN Copper THHN Wire & Cable
Item #17 Spec 2.5
SIMpull THHN®
Copper THHN Wire & Cable
600 Volts. Copper Conductor. Thermoplastic Insulation/Nylon Sheath, Heat, Moisture, Gasoline and Oil
Resistant II. All Sizes Rated Both THHN and either THWN (sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG) or THWN-2 (sizes 8
AWG and larger). Also Rated MTW and AWM (See Below). SIMpull® Technology for Easier Pulling.
APPLICATIONS
Southwire® SIMpull THHN® copper conductors are primarily used in conduit and cable trays for services,
feeders and branch circuits in commercial or industrial applications as specified in the National Electrical
Code. Voltage for all applications is 600 volts. SIMpull THHN® copper conductors are designed to be
installed without application of a pulling lubricant.
These conductors have multiple ratings. Depending upon the product application, allowable temperatures
are as follows:
• THHN or T90 Nylon- Dry locations not to exceed 90° C
• THWN-2- Wet or dry locations not to exceed 90° C or locations not to exceed 75°C when exposed
to oil
• THWN- Wet locations not to exceed 75° C or dry locations not to exceed 90° C or locations not
to exceed 75° C when exposed to oil
• TWN75- Wet locations not to exceed 75° C
• MTW- Wet locations or when exposed to oil at temperatures not to exceed 60° C or dry locations
not to exceed 90° C (with ampacity limited to that for 75° C conductor temperature per NFPA 79)
• AWM- Dry locations not to exceed 105° C only when rated and used as appliance wiring material
STANDARDS & REFERENCES

Southwire® SIMpull THHN® copper conductors comply with the following:
• ASTM - B3, B8, and B787 (19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded)
• UL Standards 83, 758, 1063, and 1581
• CSA C22.2 No. 75, T90 Nylon/TWN75 Sizes through 1000 kcmil
• NOM-ANCE 90° C
• Federal Specification A-A-59544
• NEMA WC-70 (ICEA S-95-658) Construction Requirements
• National Electrical Code, NFPA 70
• CT Rated in Sizes 1/0 AWG and larger
• VW-1 - Sizes 14 through 1 AWG
• FT1 - All Sizes
• Sunlight Resistant – Sizes 2 AWG and larger
• AWM - Sizes 14 through 6 AWG
• MTW - Stranded Constructions Only
• RoHS/REACH Compliant
CONSTRUCTION
Southwire® SIMpull THHN® copper conductors are made with soft drawn copper. Sizes 14 through 4/0 AWG use a
combination-unilay stranding while 250 kcmil and larger sizes use a compressed copper stranding. The wire is
covered with a tough heat and moisture resistant PVC insulation with an overall nylon jacket utilizing SIMpull®
Technology. Available in black, white, red, blue, purple, green, yellow, orange, brown, and gray. Also available in
striped configurations. Some colors are subject to economic order quantity. Marked as THHN in all sizes. Also
marked as THWN-2 in sizes 8 AWG and larger or marked as THWN in sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG. Marked sunlight
resistant in sizes 2 AWG and larger. Sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG are available with SIMpull® Technology only in
SIMpull BARREL™ cable drum or SIMpull® CoilPAK™ configurations.
Conductor Approx. Allowable Ampacities+
Insulation Jacket Nominal Net Wt.
Standard
Size (AWG Thickness Thickness O.D. Per
No. of strands (mils) 60°C 75°C 90°C Package
or kcmil) (mils) (mils) 1000'
(lbs.)
14* 1 15 4 102 15 15 15 15 AC
12* 1 15 4 119 23 20 20 20 AC
10* 1 20 4 150 36 30 30 30 AC
14* 19 15 4 109 16 15 15 15 AC
12* 19 15 4 128 24 20 20 20 AC
10* 19 20 4 161 38 30 30 30 AC
8 19 30 5 213 63 40 50 55 ABCD
6 19 30 5 249 95 55 65 75 ABCD
4 19 40 6 318 152 70 85 100 ABCD
3 19 40 6 346 189 85 100 115 ABCD
2 19 40 6 378 234 95 115 130 ABCD
1 19 50 7 435 299 110 130 145 ABCD
1/0 19 50 7 474 372 125 150 170 ABCD
2/0 19 50 7 518 462 145 175 195 ABCD
3/0 19 50 7 568 575 165 200 225 ABCD
4/0 19 50 7 624 718 195 230 260 ABCD
250 37 60 8 694 851 215 255 290 ABCD
300 37 60 8 747 1012 240 285 320 ABC
350 37 60 8 797 1174 260 310 350 ABC
400 37 60 8 842 1334 280 335 380 ABC
500 37 60 8 926 1655 320 380 430 ABCD
600 61 70 9 1024 1987 350 420 475 ABC
750 61 70 9 1126 2464 400 475 535 BC
1000 61 70 9 1275 3257 455 545 615 C
* Sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG are available with SIMpull® Technology only in SIMpull® Barrel or CoilPAK® configurations. Standard put ups
vary from the ones shown on this chart for standard 14-10 AWG THHN. Package
+Allowable ampacities shown are for general use as specified by the 2014 Edition of the National Electrical Code Sections 310.15 and Codes:
240.4(D). A - 2500' Reel
Unless the equipment is marked for use at higher temperatures the conductor shall be limited to the following per NEC 110.14(C): B - 1000' Reel
60° C - When terminated to equipment for circuits rated 100 amperes or less or marked for 14 - 1 AWG conductors.
C - 500' Spool
75° C - When terminated to equipment for circuits rated over 100 amperes or marked for conductors larger than 1 AWG.
D - 5000' Reel
90° C - THHN dry locations and THWN-2 wet or dry locations for ampacity adjustment purposes using NEC section 310.15.
8.2 Division 26 20 00- Interior Distribution System
Disconnect Switch 30 AMP, SPEC 2.8.2

Safety Switches Heavy Duty General Electric Type TH (30 Amp)
Safety Switches Heavy Duty General Electric Type TH (60 Amp)

Spec Setter Safety Switches
Product Number Structure
T H N 3 2 2 2 DC
GE Identification
Duty Level Other Features

H= Heavy Duty B= Bottom Feed (240V, TH, Type 1, 200-600A)
G= General Duty CL= Copper Lug
C= Non-Fusible Double Throw1 DC= Max DC Voltage–600V
D= Fusible Double Throw F= Farm Switch
Ampere Rating W= Viewing Window Option
Fusing 1= 30A
N= Non-Fusible 2= 60A
T= Fusible Double Throw 3= 100A Enclosure Type
Blank= Fused 4= 200A Blank= NEMA 1
5= 400A R= NEMA 3R
Number of Wires 6= 600A SS= NEMA 4/4X Stainless Steel Type 304
2, 3, 4, 6 7= 800A SS316= NEMA 4/4X Stainless Steel Type 316
8= 1200A SSW= Stainless Steel with Viewing Window
Number of Poles J= NEMA 5/12
2, 3, 6 Maximum Voltage
M= Mill Duty NEMA 12
2= 240V, 6= 600V
800A and 1200A non-double throw safety switches also use the C nomenclature
1
Note: This information is provided for interpreting numbers. It should not be used to build product numbers.
Applications of Enclosures for Non-Hazardous Locations

Type of Enclosure
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the Following Environmental Conditions
1 2
3R 2
4 4X 5 12
Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment X X X X X X
Falling dirt X – X X X X
Falling liquids and light splashing – – X X X X
Windblown/circulating dust, lint, fibers and flyings3 – – X X – X
Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers and flyings3 – – X X X X
Rain, snow and sleet4 – X X X – –
Hosedown and splashing water – – X X – –
Oil and coolant seepage – – – – – X
Corrosive agents – – – X – –
2
These enclosures may be ventilated.
3
These fibers and flyings are nonhazardous materials and are not considered Class III type ignitable fibers or combustible flyings.
For Class III type ignitable fibers or combustible flyings see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
4
External operating mechanisms are not required to be operable when the enclosure is ice covered.
3
Heavy Duty Safety Switches
GE’s Type TH heavy duty safety switches are designed for commercial and industrial applications where safety, high performance
and continuity of service are essential. Heavy duty switches are available in 30-1200 amps, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc maximum, fusible
and non-fusible units, and in NEMA Type 1 (indoor), Type 3R (outdoor), Type 4/4X (water and dust-tight, corrosion resistant), and
Type 5/12 (drip and dust-tight) enclosures. When used with Class R or J fuses, 30-600 amp switches have a UL Listed short-circuit
rating of 200,000 rms symmetrical amps. Switches rated 800-1200 amps use Class L fuses and have a UL Listed short circuit
rating of 100,000 rms symmetrical amps. GE’s heavy duty safety switches are UL Listed as service entrance equipment when
installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
All GE Heavy Duty safety switches carry the following certifications:

• UL Listed and cUL Listed (UL98 Enclosed Switches/CSA-C22.2 No. 4-04)
• Federal Specification WS-865C
• NEMA Enclosed Safety Switch Standard KS1-2013
• Seismic Certified
Features
1 Highly visible ON/OFF label
5
2 Donut handle ideal for hook stick operation
and accepts 3 padlocks in the OFF position
3 Direct-drive, quick-make, quick-break

mechanism "snaps" contacts open and closed
2 providing positive ON/OFF indication
7 4 Wide, unobstructed gutter
1 3 5 Self-leveling, three-point mounting system
6 Coin-proof, defeatable interlock

7 Visible confirmation of plated blade
contact positions
4 8
8 Spring reinforced fuse clips assure reliable
contact for cool operation. Suitable for
6
Class H, K, J or R fuses, where applicable
Safety Ease of Installation

and Maintenance
200A/Fusible/3 Pole/600V/N3R
TH3364R
6
Heavy Duty Safety Switches (continued)
Non-Fusible
Product Number Horsepower Rating DC Hp
Amperage NEMA NEMA Single- Three- Single- Three- Single- Three-
NEMA 250 Vdc
N
Rating Type 1 Type 3R Phase Phase Phase Phase Phase Phase
Type 5, 12
Indoor Outdoor 240 Vac Standard 480 Vac Standard 600 Vac Standard Standard
Non-Fusible / 3 Pole / 3 Wire / 240V / 50/60 Hz
N
30 THN3321 3 10 5
N THN33612 THN3222R THN3361J2, 3
30 TH3361RF4 3 10 7.5 20 10 30 5
TH3361RF24
THN32222 THN3362R THN3362J2, 3
N
60 10 20 20 50 25 60 10
THN3362RF4
100 THN33632 THN3363R THN3363J 2,3
20 40 30 75 40 100 20
200 THN33641,2 THN3364R THN3364J3 30 60 50 125 50 150 40
400 THN33651 THN3365R THN3365J 125 250 350 50
600 THN33661 THN3366R THN3366J 200 400 500 50
800 TC36367
1200 TC36368
30 THN6661 3 7.5 15 10 20 5
60 THN6662 10 20 30 25 50 10
100 THN6663 15 30 60 40 75 20
200 THN6664 15 50 125 50 150 40
Type 1 Enclosure: 200-600 Amp devices available factory reversed for
1 3
Available with Viewing Window. Add "W" suffix.
bottom feed. Add "B" suffix. 4
Farm switch with oversize Type 3R enclosure and vertical hinge. See page 27
2
Available with Copper Lug. Add "CL" suffix for dimensions.
DC Rated Heavy Duty Safety Switches

Product Number DC Horsepower Ratings
Amperage NEMA NEMA 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 600 Vdc
Rating NEMA
Type 1 Type 3R
Type 5, 12 Standard Fuse Time Delay Standard Fuse Standard Fuse Time Delay
Indoor Outdoor
Fusible / 2 Pole / 2 Wire / 600Vdc / 50/60 Hz
30 TH2261DC TH2261RDC TH2261JDC 2 3 5 10 15
60 TH2262DC TH2262RDC TH2262JDC 5 10 25
100 TH2263DC TH2263RDC TH2263JDC 20 25
Non-Fusible / 2 Pole / 2 Wire / 600Vdc / 50/60 Hz
30 THN2261DC THN2261RDC THN2261JDC 3 5 15
100 THN2263DC THN2263RDC THN2263JDC 20 25
Heavy Duty Safety Switch Short Circuit Ratings

UL Listed Fusing
Maximum Ampere Switch Enclosure
System Voltage Rating Type Withstand Rating Type
Class
(rms Sym Amps)
H 10,000
R 200,000 7
Fusible N1
J 200,000 7
N3R
600Vac L6 100,000
30-1200 N4/4X
600Vdc H 10,000
N5, N12
R 10,000 Mill Duty
Non-fusible5
J 10,000
L6 10,000
Non-fusible switch withstand ratings apply when protected by corresponding listed fuse type.
5
6
Class L fuses are only applicable when used with 800 and 1200A Type TC safety switches.
7
Unless otherwise noted.
Lug Wire Sizes Line and Load Terminals

Ampere Wire Range Wire Range
Rating AWG/kcmil Copper AWG/kcmil Aluminum
30A (250V) 14-8 12-8
30A (600V) 12-2 12-2
60A 12-2 12-2
100A 10-1/0 10-1/0
200A 2-250 2-250
400A (1) 2-600 or (2) 1/0-250 (1) 2-600 or (2) 1/0-250
600A (2) 4-500 (2) 4-500
800A (3) 2-600 or (6) 1/0-250 (3) 2-600 or (6) 1/0-250
1200A (4) 3/0-800 (4) 3/0-800
9
GE
Industrial Solutions
*Indicates a trademark of the General Electric Company and/or its affiliates.
41 Woodford Avenue Information provided is subject to change without notice. Please verify all details with GE. All values
Plainville, CT 06062 are design or typical values when measured under laboratory conditions, and GE makes no warranty
or guarantee, express or implied, that such performance will be obtained under end-use conditions.
1-800-431-7867 ©2015, General Electric Company and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
www.geindustrial.com 10.15 DET-845
Spec Setter Safety Switches
Product Number Structure
T H N 3 2 2 2 DC
GE Identification
Duty Level Other Features

H= Heavy Duty B= Bottom Feed (240V, TH, Type 1, 200-600A)
G= General Duty CL= Copper Lug
C= Non-Fusible Double Throw1 DC= Max DC Voltage–600V
D= Fusible Double Throw F= Farm Switch
Ampere Rating W= Viewing Window Option
Fusing 1= 30A
N= Non-Fusible 2= 60A
T= Fusible Double Throw 3= 100A Enclosure Type
Blank= Fused 4= 200A Blank= NEMA 1
5= 400A R= NEMA 3R
Number of Wires 6= 600A SS= NEMA 4/4X Stainless Steel Type 304
2, 3, 4, 6 7= 800A SS316= NEMA 4/4X Stainless Steel Type 316
8= 1200A SSW= Stainless Steel with Viewing Window
Number of Poles J= NEMA 5/12
2, 3, 6 Maximum Voltage
M= Mill Duty NEMA 12
2= 240V, 6= 600V
800A and 1200A non-double throw safety switches also use the C nomenclature
1
Note: This information is provided for interpreting numbers. It should not be used to build product numbers.
Applications of Enclosures for Non-Hazardous Locations

Type of Enclosure
Provides a Degree of Protection Against the Following Environmental Conditions
1 2
3R 2
4 4X 5 12
Incidental contact with the enclosed equipment X X X X X X
Falling dirt X – X X X X
Falling liquids and light splashing – – X X X X
Windblown/circulating dust, lint, fibers and flyings3 – – X X – X
Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers and flyings3 – – X X X X
Rain, snow and sleet4 – X X X – –
Hosedown and splashing water – – X X – –
Oil and coolant seepage – – – – – X
Corrosive agents – – – X – –
2
These enclosures may be ventilated.
3
These fibers and flyings are nonhazardous materials and are not considered Class III type ignitable fibers or combustible flyings.
For Class III type ignitable fibers or combustible flyings see the National Electrical Code, Article 500.
4
External operating mechanisms are not required to be operable when the enclosure is ice covered.
3
Heavy Duty Safety Switches
GE’s Type TH heavy duty safety switches are designed for commercial and industrial applications where safety, high performance
and continuity of service are essential. Heavy duty switches are available in 30-1200 amps, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc maximum, fusible
and non-fusible units, and in NEMA Type 1 (indoor), Type 3R (outdoor), Type 4/4X (water and dust-tight, corrosion resistant), and
Type 5/12 (drip and dust-tight) enclosures. When used with Class R or J fuses, 30-600 amp switches have a UL Listed short-circuit
rating of 200,000 rms symmetrical amps. Switches rated 800-1200 amps use Class L fuses and have a UL Listed short circuit
rating of 100,000 rms symmetrical amps. GE’s heavy duty safety switches are UL Listed as service entrance equipment when
installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
All GE Heavy Duty safety switches carry the following certifications:

• UL Listed and cUL Listed (UL98 Enclosed Switches/CSA-C22.2 No. 4-04)
• Federal Specification WS-865C
• NEMA Enclosed Safety Switch Standard KS1-2013
• Seismic Certified
Features
1 Highly visible ON/OFF label
5
2 Donut handle ideal for hook stick operation
and accepts 3 padlocks in the OFF position
3 Direct-drive, quick-make, quick-break

mechanism "snaps" contacts open and closed
2 providing positive ON/OFF indication
7 4 Wide, unobstructed gutter
1 3 5 Self-leveling, three-point mounting system
6 Coin-proof, defeatable interlock

7 Visible confirmation of plated blade
contact positions
4 8
8 Spring reinforced fuse clips assure reliable
contact for cool operation. Suitable for
6
Class H, K, J or R fuses, where applicable
Safety Ease of Installation

and Maintenance
200A/Fusible/3 Pole/600V/N3R
TH3364R
6
Heavy Duty Safety Switches (continued)
Non-Fusible
Product Number Horsepower Rating DC Hp
Amperage NEMA NEMA Single- Three- Single- Three- Single- Three-
NEMA 250 Vdc
N
Rating Type 1 Type 3R Phase Phase Phase Phase Phase Phase
Type 5, 12
Indoor Outdoor 240 Vac Standard 480 Vac Standard 600 Vac Standard Standard
N
30 THN3321 3 10 5
N THN33612 THN3222R THN3361J2, 3
30 TH3361RF4 3 10 7.5 20 10 30 5
TH3361RF24
THN32222 THN3362R THN3362J2, 3
N
60 10 20 20 50 25 60 10
THN3362RF4
100 THN33632 THN3363R THN3363J 2,3
20 40 30 75 40 100 20
200 THN33641,2 THN3364R THN3364J3 30 60 50 125 50 150 40
400 THN33651 THN3365R THN3365J 125 250 350 50
600 THN33661 THN3366R THN3366J 200 400 500 50
800 TC36367
1200 TC36368
30 THN6661 3 7.5 15 10 20 5
60 THN6662 10 20 30 25 50 10
100 THN6663 15 30 60 40 75 20
200 THN6664 15 50 125 50 150 40
Type 1 Enclosure: 200-600 Amp devices available factory reversed for
1 3
Available with Viewing Window. Add "W" suffix.
bottom feed. Add "B" suffix. 4
Farm switch with oversize Type 3R enclosure and vertical hinge. See page 27
2
Available with Copper Lug. Add "CL" suffix for dimensions.
DC Rated Heavy Duty Safety Switches

Product Number DC Horsepower Ratings
Amperage NEMA NEMA 125 Vdc 250 Vdc 600 Vdc
Rating NEMA
Type 1 Type 3R
Type 5, 12 Standard Fuse Time Delay Standard Fuse Standard Fuse Time Delay
Indoor Outdoor
Fusible / 2 Pole / 2 Wire / 600Vdc / 50/60 Hz
30 TH2261DC TH2261RDC TH2261JDC 2 3 5 10 15
60 TH2262DC TH2262RDC TH2262JDC 5 10 25
100 TH2263DC TH2263RDC TH2263JDC 20 25
Non-Fusible / 2 Pole / 2 Wire / 600Vdc / 50/60 Hz
100 THN2263DC THN2263RDC THN2263JDC 20 25
Heavy Duty Safety Switch Short Circuit Ratings

UL Listed Fusing
Maximum Ampere Switch Enclosure
System Voltage Rating Type Withstand Rating Type
Class
(rms Sym Amps)
H 10,000
R 200,000 7
Fusible N1
J 200,000 7
N3R
600Vac L6 100,000
30-1200 N4/4X
600Vdc H 10,000
N5, N12
R 10,000 Mill Duty
Non-fusible5
J 10,000
L6 10,000
Non-fusible switch withstand ratings apply when protected by corresponding listed fuse type.
5
6
Class L fuses are only applicable when used with 800 and 1200A Type TC safety switches.
7
Unless otherwise noted.
Lug Wire Sizes Line and Load Terminals

Ampere Wire Range Wire Range
Rating AWG/kcmil Copper AWG/kcmil Aluminum
30A (250V) 14-8 12-8
30A (600V) 12-2 12-2
60A 12-2 12-2
100A 10-1/0 10-1/0
200A 2-250 2-250
400A (1) 2-600 or (2) 1/0-250 (1) 2-600 or (2) 1/0-250
600A (2) 4-500 (2) 4-500
800A (3) 2-600 or (6) 1/0-250 (3) 2-600 or (6) 1/0-250
1200A (4) 3/0-800 (4) 3/0-800
9
GE
Industrial Solutions
*Indicates a trademark of the General Electric Company and/or its affiliates.
41 Woodford Avenue Information provided is subject to change without notice. Please verify all details with GE. All values
Plainville, CT 06062 are design or typical values when measured under laboratory conditions, and GE makes no warranty
or guarantee, express or implied, that such performance will be obtained under end-use conditions.
1-800-431-7867 ©2015, General Electric Company and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
www.geindustrial.com 10.15 DET-845
8.3 Metering, SPEC 2.18

Metering, SPEC 2.18 Circutor CVM-C10
Power analyzer
CVM-C10
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
(M001B01-03-20A)
CVM-C10
2 Instruction Manual
CVM-C10
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Follow the warnings described in this manual with the symbols shown below.
DANGER
Warns of a risk, which could result in personal injury or material damage.
ATTENTION
Indicates that special attention should be paid to a specific point.
If you must handle the unit for its installation, start-up or maintenance, the following
should be taken into consideration:
Incorrect handling or installation of the unit may result in injury to personnel as well as damage
to the unit. In particular, handling with voltages applied may result in electric shock, which may
cause death or serious injury to personnel. Defective installation or maintenance may also
lead to the risk of fire.
Read the manual carefully prior to connecting the unit. Follow all installation and maintenance
instructions throughout the unit’s working life. Pay special attention to the installation stan-
dards of the National Electrical Code.
Refer to the instruction manual before using the unit
In this manual, if the instructions marked with this symbol are not respected or carried out correctly, it can
result in injury or damage to the unit and /or installations.
CIRCUTOR, SA reserves the right to modify features or the product manual without prior notification.
DISCLAIMER
CIRCUTOR, SA reserves the right to make modifications to the device or the unit specifica-
tions set out in this instruction manual without prior notice.
CIRCUTOR, SA on its web site, supplies its customers with the latest versions of the device
specifications and the most updated manuals.
www.circutor.com
Instruction Manual 3
CVM-C10
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS�� 3
DISCLAIMER��3
CONTENTS��4
REVISION LOG��6
1.- VERIFICATION UPON RECEPTION�� 7
2.- PRODUCT DESCRIPTION�� 7
3.- DEVICE INSTALLATION�� 9
3.1.- PRIOR RECOMMENDATIONS�� 9
3.2.- INSTALLATION�� 10
3.3.- CVM-C10-FLEX: ROGOWSKI SENSORS�� 10
3.4.- DEVICE TERMINALS�� 12
3.4.1.- LIST OF TERMINALS, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC AND CVM-C10-mV MODELS�� 12
3.4.2.- LIST OF TERMINALS, CVM-C10-ITF-IN AND CVM-C10-MC-IN MODELS.�� 13
3.4.3.- LIST OF TERMINALS, CVM-C10-FLEX MODEL�� 14
3.5.- CONNECTION DIAGRAM�� 15
3.5.1.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF
AND CVM-C10-mV MODEL.�� 15
3.5.2.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF-IN
MODEL.�� 16
3.5.3.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION CVM-C10-MC
MODEL.�� 17
3.5.4.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION CVM-C10-MC-IN
MODEL.�� 18
3.5.5.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-FLEX
MODEL�� 19
3.5.6.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF AND
CVM-C10-mV MODEL. �� 20
3.5.7.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-MC
MODEL. �� 21
3.5.8.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-FLEX
MODEL�� 22
3.5.9.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION AND TRANSFOR
MERS WITH AN ARON CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF AND CVM-C10-MC MODELS. �� 23
3.5.10.- MEASURING TWO-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF,
CVM-C10-MC AND CVM-C10-mV MODELS.�� 24
3.5.11.- MEASURING TWO-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF-IN
AND CVM-C10-MC-IN MODELS.�� 25
3.5.12.- MEASURING TWO-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-C10-FLEX
MODEL.�� 26
3.5.13.- MEASURING SINGLE-PHASE NETWORKS, PHASE TO PHASE, WITH A 2-WIRE CONNEC-
TION, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC AND CVM-C10-mV MODELS.�� 27
3.5.14.- MEASURING SINGLE-PHASE NETWORKS, PHASE TO PHASE, WITH A 2-WIRE CONNEC-
TION, CVM-C10-FLEX MODEL.�� 28
3.5.15.- MEASURING SINGLE-PHASE NETWORKS, PHASE TO NEUTRAL, WITH A 2-WIRE CON-
NECTION, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC AND CVM-C10-mV MODELS.�� 29
3.5.16.- MEASURING SINGLE-PHASE NETWORKS, PHASE TO NEUTRAL, WITH A 2-WIRE CON-
NECTION, CVM-C10-FLEX MODEL.�� 30
4.- OPERATION��31
4.1.- MEASURING PARAMETERS�� 32
4.2.- KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS�� 33
4.3.- DISPLAY�� 35
4.3.1. cos φ - PF (POWER FACTOR) BAR�� 35
4.3.2. ANALOGUE BAR�� 36
4.3.3. OTHER SYMBOLS ON THE DISPLAY�� 36
4.4.- LED INDICATORS�� 37
4.5.- OPERATION PROFILES�� 37
4.5.1. ANALYZER PROFILE�� 37
4.5.2. e3 PROFILE�� 41
4.5.3. USER�� 44
CVM-C10
4.6.- HARMONICS�� 44
4.7.- INPUTS�� 45
4.8.- OUTPUTS�� 45
4.9.- PROGRAMMING�� 46
4.9.1. PRIMARY VOLTAGE�� 47
4.9.2. SECONDARY VOLTAGE�� 48
4.9.3. PRIMARY CURRENT�� 48
4.9.4. SECONDARY CURRENT ( MODEL CVM-C10-ITF)�� 49
4.9.5. PRIMARY NEUTRAL CURRENT ( MODELS: CVM-C10-ITF-IN AND CVM-C10-MC-IN)�� 49
4.9.6. SECUNDARY NEUTRAL CURRENT (MODEL CVM-C10-ITF-IN)�� 50
4.9.7. NUMBER OF QUADRANTS�� 50
4.9.8. MEASUREMENT CONVENTION�� 50
4.9.9. TYPE OF INSTALLATION�� 51
4.9.10. MAXIMUM DEMAND INTEGRATION PERIOD�� 51
4.9.11. DELETING MAXIMUM DEMAND�� 52
4.9.12. SELECTING THE OPERATION PROFILE�� 52
4.9.13. BACKLIGHT, TURNING ON THE BACKLIT DISPLAY�� 54
4.9.14. SELECTING THE Cos φ - PF BAR ON THE DISPLAY�� 54
4.9.15. DELETING MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM VALUES�� 55
4.9.16. DELETING ENERGY VALUES�� 55
4.9.17. SELECTING THE RANGE OF ENERGIES�� 55
4.9.18. ACTIVATING THE HARMONICS DISPLAY SCREEN.�� 56
4.9.19. kgC02 CARBON EMISSION RATIO OF GENERATED ENERGY�� 56
4.9.20. kgC02 CARBON EMISSION RATIO OF CONSUMED ENERGY�� 57
4.9.21. COST RATIO OF GENERATED ENERGY�� 57
4.9.22. COST RATIO OF CONSUMED ENERGY�� 58
4.9.23. PROGRAMMING ALARM 1 (RELAY 1)�� 59
4.9.24. PROGRAMMING ALARM 2 (RELAY 2)�� 64
4.9.25. PROGRAMMING ALARM 3 (DIGITAL OUTPUT T1)�� 64
4.9.26. PROGRAMMING ALARM 4 (DIGITAL OUTPUT T2)�� 66
4.9.27. OPERATING MODE OF DIGITAL INPUT 1�� 67
4.9.28. OPERATING MODE OF DIGITAL INPUT 2�� 67
4.9.29. RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS: PROTOCOL�� 67
4.9.30. LOCKING THE PROGRAMMING�� 71
4.10.- COMMUNICATIONS�� 73
4.10.1. CONNECTIONS�� 73
4.10.2. PROTOCOL�� 74
4.10.3. MODBUS COMMANDS�� 75
4.10.4. BACnet PROTOCOL�� 85
4.10.5. MAPA PICS�� 86
5.- TECHNICAL FEATURES�� 89
6.- MAINTENANCE AND TECHNICAL SERVICE�� 93
7.- GUARANTEE��93
8.- CE CERTIFICATE��94
CVM-C10
REVISION LOG
Table 1: Revision log.
Date Revision Description
04/14 M001B01-03-14A Initial Version
Changes in the following sections:
06/14 M001B01-03-14B
3.4 - 4.9 - 4.10 - 5
06/14 M001B01-03-14C
4.9.5 - 4.9.6 - 4.10.2.1
11/14 M001B01-03-14D
4.9.21 - 4.9.23 - 4.10.2 - 4.10.3 - 5
11/14 M001B01-03-14E
3.3.2 - 3.4.2 - 3.4.8 - 4.5 - 4.9 - 4.10.3.1
01/15 M001B01-03-15A
2 - 3.3.- 3.4- 4.1- 4.9.4 -4.9.28 - 4.10 - 4.10.3.2 - 5
10/15 M001B01-03-15B 4.2 - 4.5.1 - 4.5.3 - 4.6 - 4.7 - 4.9 - 4.9.1 - 4.9.9 - 4.9.12 -
4.9.22.- 4.9.24 - 4.10.5
12/15 M001B01-03-15C
3.2.- 4.- 4.3.1.- 4.9.- 4.10.3.6. - 4.10.4.- 4.10.5.- 5.
07/16 M001B01-03-16A
4.9.23
02/17 M001B01-03-17A
2.- 3.3. - 3.4. - 3.5. - 4.7. - 4.8. - 4.9.- 4.10.3.6. - 4.10.3.7 - 5
07/17 M001B01-03-17B
5. - 8.
10/17 M001B01-03-17C
3.3 - 5.
06/18 M001B01-03-18A 2. - 3.4.2. - 3.5. - 4.1. - 4.5.1. - 4.5.3. - 4.8. - 4.9.5. - 4.9.23. -
4.10.3.1. - 4.10.3.7.2. - 4.9.25. - 4.9.26.- 4.10.3.7.13. - 5.
01/19 M001B01-03-19A
3.3.
02/19 M001B01-03-19B
5.
05/19 M001B01-03-19C
4.5.1. - 4.10.3.7.
10/19 M001B01-03-19D
2. - 4.3. - 4.4.
04/20 M001B01-03-20A
4.10.3.3. - 5.
Note: Devices images are for illustrative purposes only and may differ from the actual device.
CVM-C10
1.- VERIFICATION UPON RECEPTION
Check the following points when you receive the device:
a) The device meets the specifications described in your order.

b) The device has not suffered any damage during transport.
c) Perform an external visual inspection of the device prior to switching it on.
d) Check that it has been delivered with the following:
- An installation guide,
- 2 Retainers used to attach the device,
- 5 connectors.
If any problem is noticed upon reception, immediately contact the transport

company and/or CIRCUTOR's after-sales service.
2.- PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The CVM-C10 device measures, calculates and displays the main electrical parameters of the
following networks: single-phase, two-phase, with and without neutral, balanced three-phase,
with ARON measurements or unbalanced. The measurement will be taken in RMS with the
three AC voltage inputs and three current inputs.
There are 6 versions of the device, depending on the type of current input:
 CVM-C10-ITF, indirect current measurement with /5A or /1A transformers.

 CVM-C10-ITF-IN, indirect current measurement with /5A or /1A transformers and an
input to measure the neutral current.
 CVM-C10-MC, indirect current measurement with efficient transformers of the MC1
and MC3 series.
 CVM-C10-MC-IN, indirect current measurement with efficient transformers of the MC1
and MC3 series and an input to measure the neutral current.
 CVM-C10-mV indirect current measurement with /0.333V transformers.
 CVM-C10-FLEX current measurement through Rogowski sensors.
The device features:
- 3 keys that allow you to browse between the various screens and program the device.
- 3 indicator LEDs: CPU, ALARM and KEY.
- LCD display, displays all parameters,
CVM-C10
- 2 digital inputs, used to select the tariff or detect the logic state of external signals.
- 2 digital outputs, fully programmable.
(Not available in the CVM-C10-ITF-IN, CVM-C10-MC-IN and CVM-C10-FLEX models)
- 2 alarm relays, fully programmable (Not available in the CVM-C10-FLEX model)
- RS-485 Communications, with two serial protocols: MODBUS RTU© and BACnet.
CVM-C10
3.- DEVICE INSTALLATION
3.1.- PRIOR RECOMMENDATIONS
In order to use the device safely, it is critical that individuals who handle it follow
the safety measures set out in the standards of the country where it is being used,
use the necessary personal protective equipment, and pay attention to the vari-
ous warnings indicated in this instruction manual.
The CVM-C10 device must be installed by authorised and qualified staff.
The power supply plug must be disconnected and measuring systems switched off before
handling, altering the connections or replacing the device. It is dangerous to handle the device
while it is powered.
Also, it is critical to keep the cables in perfect condition in order to avoid accidents, personal
injury and damage to installations.
The manufacturer of the device is not responsible for any damage resulting from failure by the
user or installer to heed the warnings and/or recommendations set out in this manual, nor for
damage resulting from the use of non-original products or accessories or those made by other
manufacturers.
If an anomaly or malfunction is detected in the device, do not use it to take any measure-
ments.
Inspect the work area before taking any measurements. Do not take measurements in danger-
ous areas or where there is a risk of explosion.
Disconnect the device from the power supply (device and measuring system
power supply) before maintaining, repairing or handling the device's connections.
Please contact the after-sales service if you suspect that there is an operational
fault in the device.
CVM-C10
3.2.- INSTALLATION
The device will be installed on a panel (92+0.8 x 92+0.8 mm panel drill hole, in compliance with DIN
43700). All connections are located inside the electric panel.
Terminals, opening covers or removing elements can expose parts that are haz-
ardous to the touch while the device is powered. Do not use the device until it is
fully installed.
The device must be connected to a power circuit that is protected with gl (IEC 269) or M type
fuses with a rating of 0.5 to 2 A. It must be fitted with a circuit breaker or equivalent device, in
order to be able to disconnect the device from the power supply network.
The power and voltage measuring circuit must be connected with cables that have a minimum
cross-section of 1mm2.
The secondary line of the current transformer will have a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm2.
The temperature rating of insulation of wires connected to the device will be at minimum 62ºC.
3.3.- CVM-C10-FLEX: ROGOWSKI SENSORS
The CVM-C10-FLEX model measures currents using flexible sensors, based on the Rogowski
coil principle.
The flexibility of the sensor allows it to measure an alternating current irrespective of the posi-
tion of the conductor.
CIRCUTOR has a Rogowski sensor model that can be used with the CVM-C10-FLEX: FLEX-
MAG.
Table 3 shows the connection of the sensors and Table 2 the maximum position error.
Note: For more information, consult the corresponding sensor guide.
Table 2: Position error.

Position Error
A ± 1%
B
B A ± 3%
CVM-C10
Table 3: Probe cable terminal connections

Probe cable terminal connections
FLEX-MAG
Shield
Común / Common
Canal de medida / Measuring channel
Black : Shield (SHLD)

Blue: Common (C)
Green: Measuring channel (L1, L2, L3, N)
CVM-C10
3.4.- DEVICE TERMINALS
3.4.1.- LIST OF TERMINALS, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC AND CVM-C10-mV MODELS
Table 4: List of terminals of the CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC and CVM-C10-mV.

Device terminals
1 : A1 Auxiliary power supply. 13: I2, digital input 2 / tariff selection
2: A2 Auxiliary power supply. 14: VL1, Voltage input L1
3: Rc, Common relay output 15: VL2, Voltage input L2
4: R2, Relay output 2 16: VL3,Voltage input L3
5: R1, Relay output 1 17: N, Neutral
6: CT, Common digital output. 18: S1 , Current input L1
7: T2, Digital output 2 19: S2, Current input L1
8: T1, Digital output 1 20: S1, Current input L2
9: A(+), RS485 21: S2, Current input L2
10: B(-), RS485 22: S1, Current input L3
11: GND, for RS485 and digital inputs
23: S2, Current input L3
12: I1, digital input 1 / tariff selection
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 13
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
POWER SUPPLY A(+) B(-) I1 I2
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 VL2 VL3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Figure 1: Terminals of the CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC and CVM-C10-mV.
CVM-C10
3.4.2.- LIST OF TERMINALS, CVM-C10-ITF-IN AND CVM-C10-MC-IN MODELS.
Table 5: List of terminals of the CVM-C10-ITF-IN and CVM-C10-MC-IN.

Device terminals
1 : A1 Auxiliary power supply. 12: I2, digital input 2 / tariff selection
2: A2 Auxiliary power supply. 13: VL1, Voltage input L1
3: Rc, Common relay output 14: VL2, Voltage input L2
4: R2, Relay output 2 15: VL3,Voltage input L3
5: R1, Relay output 1 16: N, Neutral
6: S2, Neutral current input 17: S1 , Current input L1
7: S1, Neutral current input 18: S2, Current input L1
8: A(+), RS485 19: S1, Current input L2
9: B(-), RS485 20: S2, Current input L2
10: GND, for RS485 and digital inputs 21: S1, Current input L3
11: I1, digital input 1 / tariff selection 22: S2, Current input L3
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 12
OUTPUTS
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 S2 S1
LN
GND
P2 P1
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Figure 2: Terminals of the CVM-C10-ITF-IN and CVM-C10-MC-IN.
CVM-C10
3.4.3.- LIST OF TERMINALS, CVM-C10-FLEX MODEL
Table 6: List of terminals of the CVM-C10-FLEX.

Device terminals
1 : A1 Auxiliary power supply. 10: VL3, Voltage input L3
2: A2 Auxiliary power supply. 11: N, Neutral
3: A(+), RS485 12: L1, Current input L1
4: B(-), RS485 13: L2, Current input L2
5: GND, for RS485 and digital inputs. 14: L3, Current input L3
6: I1, digital input 1 / selection rate. 15: LN, Current input LN
7: I2, digital input 2 / selection rate. 16: C, Common for current inputs
8: VL1, Voltage input L1
17: SHLD, GND for current inputs
9: VL2, Voltage input L2
2 3 4 5 6
1 7
RS485 INPUTS
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ FLEX-MAG (100mV~ )
VL1 VL2 VL3 N L1 L2 L3 LN C SHLD
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Figure 3:Terminals of the CVM-C10-FLEX.
CVM-C10
3.5.- CONNECTION DIAGRAM
3.5.1.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-

C10-ITF AND CVM-C10-mV MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 VL2 VL3

VL1 VL2 VL3 N
b a
a b
A B A B
S1 S2
L1
P1 P2
S1 S2
L2
P1 P2
S1 S2
L3 P1 P2
LOAD
N
Figure 4: Three-Phase measuring with a 4-wire connection, CVM-C10-ITF and CVM-C10-mV model.
CVM-C10
3.5.2.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION,

CVM-C10-ITF-IN MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
RS485 INPUTS
POWER SUPPLY A(+) B(-)
A I1 I2
Rc R2 R1 S2 S1
LN
GND
P2 P1
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 VL2 VL3

VL1 VL2 VL3 N
b a
a b
A B A B
S1 S2
L1
P1 P2 S1 S2
L2
P1 P2 S2
S1
L3
P1 P2
S1 S2
LOAD
N
P1 P2
Figure 5: Three-Phase Measuring with a 4-wire connection, CVM-C10-ITF-IN model.
CVM-C10
3.5.3.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION CVM-

C10-MC MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
Grey/Pink
Green/White
Red/Blue
Brown/Green
VL1 VL2 VL3
VL1 VL2 VL3 N
b a
a b
A B A B
L1
1P1
1P2
L2
2P1
2P2
L3
3P1
3P2
LOAD
N
Figure 6: Three-Phase measuring with a 4-wire connection, CVM-C10-MC model.
Note: Do not connect MC current transformers to ground.
The MC transformer secondary value is set to 0.250 A (fixed value)
CVM-C10
3.5.4.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 4-WIRE CONNECTION CVM-

C10-MC-IN MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 S2 S1
LN
GND
P2 P1
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
Grey/Pink
Green/White
Red/Blue
Brown/Green
VL1 VL2 VL3
VL1 VL2 VL3 N
b a
a b
A B A B
L1
1P1
1P2
L2
2P1
2P2
L3
3P1
3P2
S1 S2
LOAD
N P1 P2
Figure 7: Three-Phase measuring with a 4-wire connection, CVM-C10-MC-IN model.
CVM-C10

CVM-C10-FLEX MODEL
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
RS485 INPUTS
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
300V ~ FLEX-MAG (100mV~ )
520V ~
VL1 VL2 VL3

VL1 VL2 VL3 N
L3 LN
b a L1 L2
a b C
SHLD
A B A B
L1
L2
L3
LOAD
N
Figure 8: Three-Phase measuring with a 4-wire connection, CVM-C10-FLEX model.
It is mandatory connect the SHLD terminal of the probe.
CVM-C10

CVM-C10-ITF AND CVM-C10-mV MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 VL2 VL3

VL1 VL2 VL3
b a b
a
A B A B
S1 S2
L1
P1 P2 S1 S2
L2 P1 P2 S1 S2
LOAD
L3
P1 P2
Figure 9: Three-Phase measuring with a 3-wire connection, CVM-C10-ITF and CVM-C10-mV model.
CVM-C10

CVM-C10-MC MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
Grey/Pink
Green/White
Red/Blue
Brown/Green
VL1 VL2 VL3
VL1 VL2 VL3 N
b a
a b
A B A B
L1
1P1
1P2
L2
2P1
2P2
LOAD
L3
3P1
3P2
Figure 10: Three-Phase measuring with a 3-wire connection, CVM-C10-MC model.
CVM-C10
3.5.8.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-

C10-FLEX MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
RS485 INPUTS
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ FLEX-MAG (100mV~ )
VL1 VL2 VL3

VL1 VL2 VL3
L3
b a L1 L2
a b C
SHLD
A B A B
L1
L2
LOAD
L3
Figure 11: Three-Phase measuring with a 3-wire connection, CVM-C10-FLEX model.
CVM-C10
3.5.9.- MEASURING THREE-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION AND

TRANSFORMERS WITH AN ARON CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF AND CVM-C10-MC MO-
DELS.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 VL2 VL3

VL1 VL2 VL3
b a
(1)
a b
A B A B
S1 S2
L1
P1 P2
L2
S1 S2
LOAD
L3 P1 P2
Figure 12: Three-Phase measuring with a 3-wire connection and transformers with an ARON connection, CVM-C10-
ITF and CVM-C10-MC and models.
(1)
CVM-C10-ITF model:
The transformer secondary value must be 5A or 1A
CVM-C10-MC model:
CVM-C10
3.5.10.- MEASURING TWO-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION,

CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC AND CVM-C10-mV MODELS.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 N VL2
VL1 VL2 N
b a b (1)
a
A B A B
S1 S2
L1
P1 P2 S1 S2
L2 P2
P1
LOAD
N
Figure 13: Measuring Two-Phase Networks with a 3-wire connection, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC and CVM-C10-mV
models.
(1)
CVM-C10-ITF model:
CVM-C10-MC model:
CVM-C10-mV model:
The transformer secondary value must be 0.333 V
CVM-C10
3.5.11.- MEASURING TWO-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION,

CVM-C10-ITF-IN AND CVM-C10-MC-IN MODELS.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
RS485 INPUTS
POWER SUPPLY A(+) B(-)
A I1 I2
Rc R2 R1 S2 S1
LN
GND
P2 P1
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 N VL2
VL1 VL2 N
(1)
b a
a b
A B A B
S1 S2
L1 P1 P2
S1 S2
L2 P1 P2
LOAD S1 S2
N P1 P2
Figure 14: Measuring Two-Phase Networks with a 3-wire connection, CVM-C10-ITF-IN and CVM-C10-MC-IN models.
(1)
CVM-C10-ITF-IN model:
CVM-C10-MC-IN model:
CVM-C10
3.5.12.- MEASURING TWO-PHASE NETWORKS WITH A 3-WIRE CONNECTION, CVM-

C10-FLEX MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
RS485 INPUTS
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ FLEX-MAG (100mV~ )
VL1 N VL2
VL1 VL2 N
b a L1 L2 LN
a b C
SHLD
A B A B
L1
L2
LOAD
N
Figure 15: Measuring Two-Phase Networks with a 3-wire connection, CVM-C10-FLEX model.
CVM-C10
3.5.13.- MEASURING SINGLE-PHASE NETWORKS, PHASE TO PHASE, WITH A 2-WIRE

CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC AND CVM-C10-mV MODELS.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 VL2
VL1 VL2
(1)
a b
A B
S1 S2
L1 P1 P2
LOAD
L2
Figure 16: Measuring Single-Phase Networks, phase to phase, with a 2-wire connection, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC
and CVM-C10-mV models.
(1)
CVM-C10-ITF model:
CVM-C10-MC model:
CVM-C10-mV model:
CVM-C10
3.5.14.- MEASURING SINGLE-PHASE NETWORKS, PHASE TO PHASE, WITH A 2-WIRE

CONNECTION, CVM-C10-FLEX MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
RS485 INPUTS
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ FLEX-MAG (100mV~ )
VL1 VL2
VL1 VL2
L1
a b C
SHLD
A B
L1
LOAD
L2
Figure 17: Measuring Single-Phase Networks, phase to phase, with a 2-wire connection, CVM-C10-FLEX model.
CVM-C10
3.5.15.- MEASURING SINGLE-PHASE NETWORKS, PHASE TO NEUTRAL, WITH A 2-WIRE

CONNECTION, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC AND CVM-C10-mV MODELS.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3
VL1 N
VL1 N
(1)
a b
A B
S1 S2
L1
P1 P2
LOAD
N
Figure 18: Measuring Single-Phase Networks, phase to neutral, with a 2-wire connection, CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-MC
and CVM-C10-mV models.
(1)
CVM-C10-ITF model:
CVM-C10-MC model:
CVM-C10-mV model:
CVM-C10
3.5.16.- MEASURING SINGLE-PHASE NETWORKS, PHASE TO NEUTRAL, WITH A 2-WIRE

CONNECTION, CVM-C10-FLEX MODEL.
Measurement system:
Power
Supply
RS485 INPUTS
GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N
520V ~ 300V ~ FLEX-MAG (100mV~ )
VL1 N
VL1 N
a b L1 C
SHLD
A B
L1
LOAD
N
Figure 19: Measuring Single-Phase Networks, phase to neutral, with a 2-wire connection, CVM-C10-FLEX model.
CVM-C10
4.- OPERATION
The CVM-C10 is a four-quadrant power analyzer (consumption and generation).

The device can operate according to three different measurement conventions:
 CIRCUTOR measurement convention.

 IEC measurement convention.
 IEEE measurement convention.
The measurement convention is configured in the setup menu, see “4.9.8. Measurement con-
vention”.
 CIRCUTOR. measurement convention
Single-phase Three-phase 90º Single-phase Three-phase

k k k k
k k k k
k k
Capacitive Inductive
180º 0º
Inductive Capacitive
Single-phase Three-phase Single-phase Three-phase
k k k k
k k k k
k k
-90º
Generation Consumption
Power Power
Figure 20: CIRCUTOR measurement convention.
 IEC measurement convention
Operation in the 4 quadrants (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4) cos φ values in the receiver operating mode (Q1,Q4)
Q
0+ Q1
Q2 Q1
cos φ > 0
P<0 Q>0 PF < 0 P>0 Q>0 PF > 0
+1
+1
Capacitive P
Inductive
cos φ > 0
P<0 Q<0 PF < 0 P>0 Q<0 PF > 0
Q4 0+ Q4
Q3
Figure 21: Convenio de medida IEC.
CVM-C10
 IEEE measurement convention
Operation in the 4 quadrants (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4) cos φ values in the receiver operating mode (Q1,Q4)
Q
0- Q1
Q2 Q1
cos φ < 0
P<0 Q>0 PF > 0 P>0 Q>0 PF < 0
-1
+1
Capacitive P
Inductive
cos φ > 0
P<0 Q<0 PF < 0 P>0 Q<0 PF > 0
Q4 0+ Q4
Q3
Figure 22: Convenio de medida IEEE.
4.1.- MEASURING PARAMETERS
The device displays the electrical parameters shown in Table 7.
Table 7: Measuring parameters of the CVM-C10.

Phases Total
Parameter Units N
L1-L2-L3 III
Phase-neutral voltage Vph-N 
Phase-phase voltage Vph-ph  
Current A   
Frequency Hz  
Active power M/kW  
Apparent power M/kVA  
Total Reactive Power M/kvar  
Total Reactive Power - Consumption M/kvar  
Total Reactive Power - Generation M/kvar  
Total Inductive Reactive Power M/kvarL  
Inductive Reactive Power - Consumption M/kvarL  
Inductive Reactive Power - Generation M/kvarL  
Total Capacitive Reactive Power M/kvarC  
Capacitive Reactive Power - Consumption M/kvarC  
Capacitive Reactive Power - Generation M/kvarC  
Power factor PF  
Cos φ φ  
THD % Voltage % THD V 
THD % Current % THD A 
Harmonic Breakdown - Voltage
harm V 
(up to the 31st order harmonic)
CVM-C10
Table 7 (Continuation): Measuring parameters of the CVM-C10.

Phases Total
Parameter Units N
L1-L2-L3 III
Harmonic Breakdown - Current
harm V 
(up to the 31st order harmonic)
Total Active Energy M/kWh 
Total Inductive Reactive Energy M/kvarLh 
Total Capacitive Reactive Energy M/kvarCh 
Total Apparent Energy M/kVAh 
Active Energy Tariff 1 M/kWh 
Inductive Reactive Energy Tariff 1 M/kvarLh 
Capacitive Reactive Energy Tariff 1 M/kvarCh 
Apparent Energy Tariff 1 M/kVAh 
Maximum Current Demand A  
Maximum Demand of Active power M/kW 
Maximum Demand of Apparent Power M/kVA 
Maximum Demand of inductive Reactive Power M/kvarLh 
Maximum Demand of capacitive Reactive Power M/kvarCh 
Parameter Units Tariff: T1-T2-T3 Total
No. of hours hours  
Cost COST  
CO2 Emissions kgCO2  
4.2.- KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS
The CVM-C10 has 3 keys that allow you to browse between the various screens and program
the device.
Key functions on measuring screens (Table 8):
Table 8: Key functions on measuring screens.

Long keystroke
Key Short keystroke
(2 s)
Previous screen Display of minimum value
Next screen Display of maximum value
CVM-C10
Table 8 (Continuation): Key functions on measuring screens.

Long keystroke
Key Short keystroke
(2 s)
Browsing the different profiles Accessing the programming
(analyzer, user, e3) menu
Display of the Maximum Demand
Active alarm information
Unlocks the active alarm
Key functions on harmonics screens (Table 9):
Table 9: Key functions on harmonics screens.

Long keystroke
Key Short keystroke
(2 s)
Output of the harmonics screens
Next screen
Browsing the different types of harmonics Accessing the programming menu
Key functions on the programming menu, query mode (Table 10):
Table 10: Key functions on the programming menu, query mode.

Long keystroke
Key Short keystroke
(2 s)
Previous screen Programming output
Next screen Programming output
Opening the programming menu in the edit mode
Key functions on the programming menu, edit mode (Table 11):
Table 11: Key functions on the programming menu, edit mode.

Key Keystroke
Line jump.
Increases the digits (0-9) or rotates between the different options.
Moves an editable digit (flashing)
CVM-C10
4.3.- DISPLAY
The device has a backlit LCD display showing all the parameters listed in Table 3.
The display is divided into four areas (Figure 23):
Figure 23: CVM-C10 Display areas
 The area with data per phase displays the instantaneous, maximum and minimum
values of each phase being measured or calculated by the device.
The total data area displays the totals of the values being measured or calculated by
the device.
Analogue bar, displays the % of the current power of the installation.
Cos φ - PF Bar, displays the value of the system's Cos φ or power factor in real time.
4.3.1. cos φ - PF (POWER FACTOR) BAR
Figure 24: Cos φ - PF Bar
This bar displays the value of the installation's cos φ or power factor in real time.
The parameter that will be displayed is selected on the programming menu. (“4.9.14. Selecting
the Cos φ - PF bar on the display”)
Note: This bar will not be displayed in the IEC and IEEE measurement conventions.
CVM-C10
4.3.2. ANALOGUE BAR
Figure 25: Analogue Bar
The analogue bar displays two parameters:
 Current power of the installation in %

This parameter is displayed in 12 divisions, each one represents 10%, into which the
analogue bar is divided.
The device calculates the current power of the installation using the formula:
P = V*I*cos(φ)
Where the voltage and the cos(φ) are the installation’s current values.
The current is referenced in its full scale. (100% is the full scale of the device and a value
above 100% indicates that it is out of range).
 The maximum system demand reached, i.e., the maximum power value
reached since the device was started, expressed as a percentage.
This value is displayed with the icon .
The value and the maximum and minimum values are reset. (“4.9.15. Deleting maximum
and minimum values”)
Example: Figure 25 shows that the installation performance is 50% and that the maximum de-
mand of the system is 80%.
4.3.3. OTHER SYMBOLS ON THE DISPLAY
The following are also shown on the display:
 Type of installation
The type of installation to which the device is connected can be selected on the program-
ming menu, (“4.9.9. Type of installation”). The selected type is shown on the top left of
the display.
 State of digital inputs

If the digital inputs have been activated, the top left of the display will show
the icons that indicate that the digital input is active.
CVM-C10
4.4.- LED INDICATORS
The CVM-C10 device has 3 LEDs:
- CPU, indicates that the device is on, flashing each second.

- ALARM, indicates that an alarm has been activated if it is on
- KEY, LED that is lit when any key is pressed.
Figure 26: LED Indicators of the CVM-C10.
4.5.- OPERATION PROFILES
The CVM-C10 has 3 operation profiles. The display screens will be opened for the correspond-
ing profile:
 Analyzer profile, analyzer,

 Electrical energy efficiency profile, e3,
 User profile, user,
4.5.1. ANALYZER PROFILE

This profile is identified with the analyzer symbol on the bottom of the screen (Figure 27)
Figure 27: CVM-C10 screen with the analyzer profile.
CVM-C10
The device displays 11 different screens for the analyzer profile (Table 12) and the voltage and
current harmonics, up to the 31st order harmonic, for each one of the lines, L1, L2 and L3.
(“4.6.- HARMONICS”)
Use keys and to browse the different screens.
The inst symbol on the bottom of the screen indicates that the values being displayed are of
the instantaneous type.
Table 12: Analyzer profile screens.
Screen Parameters (units)
phase-phase Voltage L1-L2 (Vph-ph)

Frequency (Hz)
phase-neutral Voltage L1 (Vph-N)

Frequency (Hz)
Current L1 (A)
Current L2 (A)
Current L3 (A)
Neutral Current (A)(2)
(2)
Not available for the and
installation types.
Active Power L1 (M/K W)

Active Power III (M/K W)
The generation values are not measured

when the 2 quadrant option is selected.
CVM-C10
Table 12 (Continuation): Analyzer profile screens.

Apparent Power L1 (M/KVA)

Apparent Power III (M/KVA)
The generation values are not measured

when the 2 quadrant option is selected.
Inductive Reactive Power L1 (M/KvarL)

Inductive Reactive Power III (M/KvarL)
Capacitive Reactive Power L1

(M/KvarC)
(M/KvarC)
(M/KvarC)
Capacitive Reactive Power III
(M/KvarC)
THD % Voltage L1 (V THD %)

THD % Current L1 (A THD %)

CVM-C10
Table 12 (Continuation): Analyzer profile screens.

Power factor L1 (PF)

Power factor III (PF)
Cos φ L1 (cos φ)
Cos φ L2 (cos φ)
Cos φ L3 (cos φ)
Cos φ III (cos φ)

Also displayed on these screens are:
 Maximum values
To see the maximum values of the screen being displayed, press the key for 2 seconds.
These are displayed for 30 seconds. The max symbol is shown on the display (Figure 28)
The maximum and minimum values are reset on the programming menu. (“4.9.15. Deleting
maximum and minimum values”)
Figure 28: Analyzer profile screen displaying the maximum values.
 Minimum values
To see the minimum values of the screen being displayed, press the key for 2 seconds.
These are displayed for 30 seconds. The min symbol will be displayed (Figure 29)
The maximum and minimum values are reset on the programming menu. (“4.9.15. Deleting
maximum and minimum values”)
CVM-C10
Figure 29: Analyzer profile screen displaying the minimum values.
 Maximum Demand
The device calculates the maximum demand of the following:
• Current
• Three-Phase Active Power.
• Three-Phase Apparent Power.
• Three-Phase Inductive Reactive Power
• Three-Phase Capacitive Reactive Power
This value can be displayed on the display screen of the parameter by pressing the and
keys at the same time. The dem symbol appears on the display (Figure 30)
Figure 30: Analyzer profile screen displaying the maximum demand values.

Press keys or to stop displaying the maximum demand values.
The maximum demand values are reset on the programming menu: “4.9.11. Deleting maximum
demand”
4.5.1.1. Detection of incorrect direction of rotation (Version 4.05 or higher)
The device has a system for detecting the incorrect direction of rotation of the voltages. In other
words, if each of the voltages has been correctly connected to the appropriate terminal, L1 to
terminal VL1, L2 to terminal VL2 and L3 to terminal VL3.
If there is an error in the direction of rotation, the icons L1, L2 and L3 flash on the display.
The device has a RS-485 communications parameter, which indicates whether an incorrect di-
rection of rotation has been detected(“4.10.3.7. Detection of incorrect direction of rotation.”)
Note: The detection of the direction of rotation is only enabled for measurement systems:
Three-phase network measurement (4-3Ph, 3-3Ph y 3-ArOn) and two-phase network measure-
ment with 3-wire connection (3-2Ph).
CVM-C10
4.5.2. e3 PROFILE
This profile is identified with the e3 symbol on the bottom of the screen (Figure 31).
Figure 31: CVM-C10 screen with the e3 profile.

The installation's consumed and generated energy are displayed on the e3 profile of the device.
The installation status is also displayed:

Installation is consuming energy.
Installation is generating energy.
A long keystroke (3 sec) of key will display the generation values.

The generation values are identified with the negative sign on the screen, which appears in
front of each parameter.
A long keystroke (3 sec) of key will display the consumption values.
Use keys and to browse the different screens (short keystroke).
Table 13: Screens of the e3 profile.

Active Energy Tariff 1 , T1 (M/KWh)

Total Active Energy (M/KWh)
Consumption and generation values
Only available for the 4 quadrant option.
Apparent Energy Tariff 1, T1 (M/KVAh)

Total Apparent Energy (M/KVAh)
CVM-C10
Table 13 (Continuation): Screens of the e3 profile.

Inductive Reactive Energy Tariff 1, T1 (M/KvarLh)

Total Inductive Reactive Energy (M/KvarLh)
Capacitive Reactive Energy Tariff 1, T1 (M/KvarCh)

Total Capacitive Reactive Energy (M/KvarCh)
Cost Tariff 1, T1 (cost)

Total Cost (cost)
CO2 Emissions Tariff 1, T1 (kgCO2)

Total CO2 Emissions (kgCO2)
No. of hours Tariff 1, T1(hours)

Total No. of hours (hours)
Symbols T1, T2 and T3 on the display indicate the three tariffs available on the device.
The corresponding symbol flashes to indicate the selected tariff.
CVM-C10
4.5.3. USER
This profile is identified with the user symbol on the bottom of the screen (Figure 32).
Figure 32: Screen of the CVM-C10 with the user profile.
This profile displays the screens selected in the programming menu (“4.9.12. Selecting the op-
eration profile”).
Note: If you have not selected the display of any screen, the device will restart and display the
Phase-Neutral Voltage screen by default.
The voltage and current harmonics are also displayed, up to the 31st order harmonic, for each
of the lines, L1, L2 and L3 (“4.6.- HARMONICS.”)
4.6.- HARMONICS
The device can display the voltage and current harmonics, up to the 31st order harmonic, for
each one of the lines, L1, L2 and L3.
The display of these can be deactivated using the programming menu (“4.9.18. Activating the
harmonics display screen.”).
Press the key on the last profile screen to show all operation profiles on the harmonics
display screens.
Harmonics are displayed as shown on Figure 33.
Figure 33: CVM-C10 Current harmonics screen.
Press key to open the next harmonics screen.
CVM-C10
Press key to display the different types of harmonics:
• Voltage harmonics L1- L2 - L3

• Current harmonics L1- L2 -L3
4.7.- INPUTS
The CVM-C10 has two digital inputs (terminals 12 and 13 on Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3)
that can be programmed to operate as a logic or tariff selection input.
If configured as a logic input, the device displays the status of that input.
See “4.9.27. Operating mode of digital input 1” and “4.9.28. Operating mode of digital input 2”
The selected tariff can be determined in accordance with the status of the inputs, as shown in
Table 14.
Table 14: Selecting the tariff in accordance with the input status.
IN1, Input 1 IN2, Input 2
Tariff
Logic input Tariff selection Logic input Tariff selection
x x T1
x 0 T1
x 1 T3
0 x T1
1 x T2
0 0 T1
0 1 T3
1 0 T2
1 1 T1
4.8.- OUTPUTS
The device features:
 Two alarm relays (terminals 3, 4 and 5, as shown in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3),
fully programmable, see “4.9.23. Programming alarm 1 (Relay 1)” and “4.9.24. Program-
ming alarm 2 (Relay 2)”
 Two digital outputs, optoisolated NPN transistors (terminals 6, 7 and 8 on Figure 1

and Figure 3), fully programmable, see “4.9.25. Programming alarm 3 (Digital output T1)”
and “4.9.26. Programming alarm 4 (Digital output T2)”.

Note: The digital outputs are not available on models CVM-C10-ITF-IN, CVM-C10-MC-IN and
CVM-C10-FLEX
CVM-C10
4.9.- PROGRAMMING
From the programming menu you can:

 Lock the status of the menu.
 Define the transformation ratios.
 Select the number of quadrants and type of installation.
 Select the operation profile of the device.
 Program the carbon emission ratio, kgCO2,.
 Program the cost ratio.
 Program the maximum demand parameters.
 Delete the energy meters and the maximum and minimum values.
 Modify the display's backlight.
 Activate the harmonic display option.
 Program alarms.
 Program Modbus communications
The programming parameters are validated as follows:
 When on reaching the last point on the programming menu (“4.9.30. Locking the pro-
gramming”) the key is pressed
 At any point in the programming, by pressing the key or pressing for 3 sec-
onds.
If the device is RESET before validation or no key is pressed for 30 seconds, the configuration
will not be stored in the memory.
To enter the programming menu press the key for 3 seconds.
The home screen of the menu indicates whether the menu is locked or not:
UnLOC
When you enter the programming menu you can view and modify
the programming. Icon on the display indicates that the unit
is not locked.
LOC
When you enter the programming you can view the programming
but not modify it. Icon indicates the locking status.
Press key to access the first programming step.
The following screen will be displayed if the programming menu is locked, LOC:
CVM-C10
Enter the password in this screen to modify the programming

parameters.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the password. The prog icon
will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
To enter or modify the value, press the key repeatedly,
increasing the value of the flashing digit.
When the desired value is shown on the screen, move onto the next digit by pressing the key
to modify the other values.
If you press the key after changing the last digit, it will jump back to the first digit so you
can modify the previously programmed values again.
To validate the data, press for 3 seconds and the prog icon will disappear from the display.
If the password is correct, the icon will change its status to not locked .
If you do not enter the password or it is incorrect, you can open the programming menu but it
cannot be modified.
The programming menu is unlocked for a short period of time and it will be locked again when
you exit the device's menu.
To permanently unlock the device, select the programming parameter “4.9.30. Locking the
programming”
Press key to access the next programming step.
Default password: 1234.
4.9.1. PRIMARY VOLTAGE
On this screen the voltage transformer primary is programmed.

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the transformer primary
value. The prog icon will be displayed on the bottom of the
screen.
The programmed value will be deleted if the entered value is higher than the maximum
programming value.
Maximum programming value: 599999.
CVM-C10
Minimum programming value: 1.

Voltage ratio x Primary Current < 600000
Note: The ratio is the relation between the primary and the secondary.
4.9.2. SECONDARY VOLTAGE
On this screen the voltage transformer secondary is programmed.

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the transformer secondary
screen.
programming value.

4.9.3. PRIMARY CURRENT
The current transformer primary is programmed on this screen.

screen.
to modify the remaining values.
CVM-C10
programming value.

Voltage ratio x Current ratio < 600000
Note: The ratio is the relation between the primary and the secondary.
Press key to access the next programming step
4.9.4. SECONDARY CURRENT ( MODEL CVM-C10-ITF)
On this screen the current transformer secondary is selected.

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the transformer secondary
screen.
Press key to browse the two possible options for the current
transformer secondary (1A or 5A).
4.9.5. PRIMARY NEUTRAL CURRENT ( MODELS: CVM-C10-ITF-IN AND CVM-C10-MC-IN)
The neutral current transformer primary is programmed on this

screen.
screen.
to modify the remaining values.
programming value.
CVM-C10

4.9.6. SECUNDARY NEUTRAL CURRENT (MODEL CVM-C10-ITF-IN)
The neutral current transformer secundary is programmed on this

screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the transformer secundary
screen.
Press key to browse the two possible options for the current
transformer secondary (1A or 5A).
4.9.7. NUMBER OF QUADRANTS
The quadrant number on which the unit takes the measurement

is selected on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the number of quadrants. The

prog icon will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
Press key to browse the two options:

2 or 4 quadrants.
4.9.8. MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
You can select the measurement convention of the device from

this screen.
To edit the measurement convention press key for 3

seconds. The prog icon will be displayed on the bottom of the
screen.
The key is used to browse the different options:
Cir Circutor measurement convention.

IEC IEC measurement convention.
CVM-C10
IEEE IEEE measurement convention.
4.9.9. TYPE OF INSTALLATION
The type of installation is selected on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the type of installation. The

The key is used to browse the different options
Three-phase network measurement with a 4-wire connection.

Three-phase network measurement with a 3-wire connection.
Three-phase network measurement with a 3-wire connection and
transformers with an ARON connection .
Two-phase network measurement with a 3-wire connection.
Single-phase network measurement, phase to phase, with a 2-wire connection.
Single-phase network measurement, phase to neutral, with a 2-wire connection.
4.9.10. MAXIMUM DEMAND INTEGRATION PERIOD
The maximum demand integration period is programmed in

minutes on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the integration period value.
The prog icon will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
CVM-C10
programming value.

Note: Programming the value 0 disables the calculation of the maximum demand.
4.9.11. DELETING MAXIMUM DEMAND
On this screen you select whether or not to delete the maximum

demand.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the deletion selection. The
Press key to browse the two deletion options: Yes or No.
4.9.12. SELECTING THE OPERATION PROFILE
The unit's operation profile is selected on this screen.

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the operation profile
selection. The prog icon will be displayed on the bottom of the
screen.
Press key to browse the three profile options:
Analyzer profile, analyzer,

Electrical energy efficiency profile, e3,
User profile, user,
CVM-C10
 Selecting the screens that will be displayed (User profile)
The following screen is displayed if you have selected the user profile:
This screen is used to select whether the unit's display screens

are defined by the user or not.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the selection. The prog icon
Press key to browse the two profile options:
the display screens are those that were stored in previous programming
settings of the device. (In the case of new devices, these will be the same as those of
the analyzer profile)
, the display screens are selected.
 Selecting the screens
The following screen will be displayed if you have selected :
This screen displays the first screen of the analyzer profile,

Phase-phase Voltage and the user profile viewing option can be
selected.
, to display the screen in the user menu.

, to stop displaying the screen.
This programming step is repeated for each one of the 18 screens of the device.
CVM-C10
4.9.13. BACKLIGHT, TURNING ON THE BACKLIT DISPLAY
The time that the Backlight will stay lit (in seconds) is
programmed on this screen after the last keystroke on the unit .
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the backlight value. The prog
icon will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
To enter or modify the value, press the key repeatedly, increasing the value of the flashing
digit.
Maximum programming value: 99 seconds.

Minimum programming value: 0 seconds.
Note: The value 00 indicates that the backlight will stay permanently lit.
4.9.14. SELECTING THE Cos φ - PF BAR ON THE DISPLAY
This screen is used to select the Cos φ - PF bar viewing option.

Press key to browse the two viewing options.
Displaying the Cos φ.

Displaying the Power Factor
CVM-C10
4.9.15. DELETING MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM VALUES
On this screen you select whether or not to delete the maximum

and minimum values
Press key to browse the two options (Yes and No).
4.9.16. DELETING ENERGY VALUES
On this screen you select whether or not to delete the energy

values
4.9.17. SELECTING THE RANGE OF ENERGIES
The operation of the range of energy is selected on this screen.

Press the key to browse different options:
AUTO The device displays the kWh and MWh. When the energy value reaches 999999kWh,
the device automatically selects the MWh range.
SHORT The device only displays the KWh. When the energy value reaches 999999kWh, the
device resets the measurement to 0kWh.
To validate the modification of the range of energies, delete the energy values first.
To do so, press the validation key for 3 seconds; the energy value deletion screen will be
displayed. Select YES to delete the energy values; the device will go back to the energy range
selection screen.
CVM-C10
To complete the validation, press the key for 3 seconds; the prog icon will disappear from
the display.
4.9.18. ACTIVATING THE HARMONICS DISPLAY SCREEN.
This screen is used to select whether harmonics are displayed

or not.
4.9.19. kgC02 CARBON EMISSION RATIO OF GENERATED ENERGY
The carbon emissions ratio is the amount of emissions released

into the atmosphere to produce a unit of electricity (1 kWh).
The ratio for the European mix is approximately 0.65 kgCO2 per
kWh.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the emission ratio selection.

The emission ratio of the 3 tariffs of the device, T1, T2 and T3, is programmed on this screen.
digit.
Press key to browse the different tariffs.
programming value.
Maximum programming value: 1.9999.

CVM-C10
4.9.20. kgC02 CARBON EMISSION RATIO OF CONSUMED ENERGY
The carbon emissions ratio is the amount of emissions released

into the atmosphere to produce a unit of electricity (1 kWh).
The ratio for the European mix is approximately 0.65 kgCO2 per
kWh.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the emission ratio selection.

The emission ratio of the 3 tariffs of the device, T1, T2 and T3, is programmed on this screen.
digit.
programming value.

4.9.21. COST RATIO OF GENERATED ENERGY
The cost per kWh of electricity of the three tariffs of the unit is
calculated on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the cost ratio selection. The
CVM-C10
programming value.

4.9.22. COST RATIO OF CONSUMED ENERGY
The cost per kWh of electricity of the three tariffs of the unit is
calculated on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the cost ratio selection. The
programming value.

CVM-C10
4.9.23. PROGRAMMING ALARM 1 (RELAY 1)
Note: Configuration parameters not available for the CVM-C10-FLEX model.
The variable code is selected on this screen, depending on Table

15, which will control alarm relay 1.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the code selection. The prog
digit.
When you enter the code of a variable on the display, the symbols for that variable will be
activated.
Set the value to 00 if you do not wish to program a variable.
Table 15: Parameter codes used to program the outputs.

Parameter Phase Code Phase Code Phase Code Phase Code
Phase-Neutral Voltage L1 01 L2 09 L3 17 - -
Current L1 02 L2 10 L3 18 - -
Active power L1 03 L2 11 L3 19 III 25
Inductive Reactive Power L1 04 L2 12 L3 20 III 26
Capacitive Reactive Power L1 05 L2 13 L3 21 III 27
Apparent power L1 06 L2 14 L3 22 III 28
Power factor L1 07 L2 15 L3 23 III 29
Cosine φ L1 08 L2 16 L3 24 III 30
% THD V L1 36 L2 37 L3 38 - -
% THD A L1 39 L2 40 L3 41 - -
Phase-Phase Voltage L1/2 32 L2/3 33 L3/1 34 - -
Frequency - 31 - - - - - -
Neutral current - 35 - - - - - -
Maximum current demand L1 45 L2 46 L3 47 III 44
Active Power Maximum
- - - - - - III 42
Demand
Apparent Power Maximum
- - - - - - III 43
Demand
CVM-C10
Table 15 (Continuation): Parameter codes used to program the outputs.

Parameter Phase Code Phase Code Phase Code Phase Code
Inductive Reactive Power
- - - - - - III 132
Maximum Demand
Capacitive Reactive Power
- - - - - - III 133
Maximum Demand
In addition, there are some parameters (Table 16) that refer to the three phases at the same
time (OR function). If you have selected one of these variables, the alarm will be activated when
any of the three phases meets the programmed conditions.
Table 16: Multiple parameter codes for alarm programming.

Types of parameters Code
Phase-Neutral Voltage 200
Current 201
Active power 202
Inductive Reactive Power 203
Capacitive Reactive Power 204
Power factor 205
Phase-Phase Voltage 206
% THD V 207
% THD A 208
Apparent Power 209
 Programming the maximum value
The maximum value: the alarm is activated when this value is

exceeded.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the maximum value selection.
In the case of some parameters (Table 17), you can modify the position of the decimal point.
To do so, press key after modifying the last digit and the decimal point will start flashing.
Press key repeatedly to modify the position of the decimal point.
When the decimal point is in the desired position, press the key to end the programming,
pressing now the key we can set a positive or negative value.
Note: Pay special attention when programming the Generation Power (displayed with negative
values).
CVM-C10
Example: If you wish to enter a generation power alarm with limits between 2 kW and 1 kW,
program the following as the maximum value : - 1 kW and the following as the minimum
value : - 2 kW.
Table 17: Decimal point and units of the alarm parameters.

Types of parameters Units Decimal point
2000 V
200.0 V
Voltage Programmable
20.00 kV
2.000 kV
Current A Programmable
Frequency Hz Fixed
Power kW Programmable
Power factor PF Fixed
Cosine φ φ Fixed
Maximum current demand A Programmable
Maximum power demand kW Programmable
THD % Fixed
 Programming the minimum value
The minimum value: the alarm is activated below this value.

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the minimum value selection.
In the case of some parameters (Table 17) you can modify the position of the decimal point.
To do so, press key after modifying the last digit and the decimal point will start flashing.
Press key repeatedly to modify the position of the decimal point.
When the decimal point is in the desired position, press the key to end the programming,
pressing now the key we can set a positive or negative value.
Note: Pay special attention when programming the Generation Power (displayed with negative
values).
Example: If you wish to enter a generation power alarm with limits between 2 kW and 1 kW,
program the following as the maximum value : - 1 kW and the following as the minimum
value : - 2 kW.
CVM-C10
 Programming the connection time delay
The alarm connection delay is programmed on this screen in

seconds.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the delay selection. The prog
 Programming the hysteresis value
The hysteresis value, i.e., difference between the alarm

connection and disconnection value, in %, is programmed on
this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the hysteresis value
screen.
CVM-C10
 Programming the latch
The interlocking is selected on this screen, i.e., if the alarm is

interlocked after it has been tripped, even when the condition that
triggered it has disappeared.
Note: If the device is reset, the status of alarms is deleted and all alarms will return to the
programmed standby status, provided that the condition that triggered them has been resolved.
 Programming the time delay 2
The alarm disconnection delay is programmed on this screen in

seconds.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the maximum value selection.
 Programming the contact status
The status of relay contacts is selected on this screen.

Normally open contact.

Normally closed contact.
CVM-C10
4.9.24. PROGRAMMING ALARM 2 (RELAY 2)
The values for alarm relay 2 are programmed on this screen.
They are programmed as in the case of alarm relay 1, see

“4.9.23. Programming alarm 1 (Relay 1)”
4.9.25. PROGRAMMING ALARM 3 (DIGITAL OUTPUT T1)
Note: Configuration parameters not available for the CVM-C10-FLEX, CVM-C10-ITF-IN and
CVM-C10-MC-IN models.
All values for digital output T1 are programmed on this screen.
The variable code is selected on this screen, depending on Table

15 and Table 18, which will control digital output T1.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the code selection. The prog
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the code selection. The prog icon will be displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
digit.
When you enter the code of a variable on the display, the symbols for that variable will be
activated.
Set the value to 00 if you do not wish to program a variable.
CVM-C10
Table 18: Parameter codes used to program digital outputs.

Parameter Tariff Code Tariff Code Tariff Code Tariff Code
Consumed Active Energy T1 49 T2 70 T3 91 total 112
Generated Active Energy T1 59 T2 80 T3 101 total 122
Consumed Inductive Reactive
T1 51 T2 72 T3 93 total 114
Energy
Generated Inductive Reactive
T1 61 T2 82 T3 103 total 124
Energy
Consumed Capacitive Reac-
T1 53 T2 74 T3 95 total 116
tive Energy
Generated Capacitive Reac-
T1 63 T2 84 T3 105 total 126
tive Energy
Consumed Apparent Energy T1 55 T2 76 T3 97 total 118
Generated Apparent Energy T1 65 T2 86 T3 107 total 128
Consumed CO2 Emissions T1 56 T2 77 T3 98 total 119
Generated CO2 Emissions T1 66 T2 87 T3 108 total 129
Consumption Cost T1 57 T2 78 T3 99 total 120
Generation Cost T1 67 T2 88 T3 109 total 130
No. of hours T1 68 T2 T3 110 total 131
If you have selected a parameter from Table 12 the subsequent programming steps are the
same as for alarm relay 1, see (“4.9.23. Programming alarm 1 (Relay 1)”)
If you have selected a parameter from Table 18, the subsequent programming steps are:
 Programming kilowatts per pulse
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the kilowatts per pulse

screen.

programming value.
Maximum programming value: 999.999 KWh

Minimum programming value: 000.001 KWh
CVM-C10
Example: To program 500 Wh per pulse: 000.500

To program 1.5 kWh per pulse: 001.500
 Programming the pulse width
The width of the pulse is selected on this screen in ms.

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the pulse width selection. The


programming value.
Maximum programming value: 500 ms.

Minimum programming value: 30 ms.
4.9.26. PROGRAMMING ALARM 4 (DIGITAL OUTPUT T2)
Note: Configuration parameters not available for the CVM-C10-FLEX, CVM-C10-ITF-IN and
All values for digital output T2 are programmed on this screen.
They are programmed as in the case of digital output T1, see

“4.9.25. Programming alarm 3 (Digital output T1)”
CVM-C10
4.9.27. OPERATING MODE OF DIGITAL INPUT 1
The function of digital input 1 is selected on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the function selection. The

Logic input
Tariff selection.
4.9.28. OPERATING MODE OF DIGITAL INPUT 2
The function of digital input 2 is selected on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the function selection. The

Logic input
Tariff selection.
4.9.29. RS-485 COMMUNICATIONS: PROTOCOL
The RS-485 communications protocol is selected on this screen.

Press the key for 3 seconds to edit the function selection.
Modbus
BACnet
Note: The device will restart after exiting the setup menu if the RS-485 communications
parameters have been modified.
CVM-C10
4.9.29.1 Modbus protocol
 Transmission speed
The transmission speed of modbus communications is

programmed on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the transmission speed

screen.
Press key to browse the two options: 9600 or 19200.
 Peripheral number
The peripheral number is programmed on this screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the peripheral number

screen.
The peripheral number ranges from 0 to 255.
 Parity
The type of parity of Modbus communications is selected on this

screen.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the parity type selection. The
Press key to browse the options:
no parity
CVM-C10
even parity.
odd parity.
 Number of data bits
The number of data bits of Modbus communications are

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the bit number selection. The
Press key to browse the two options: 7 or 8 bits.
 Number of Stop bits
The number of Stop bits of Modbus communications are

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the Stop bits number

screen.
Press key to browse the options: 1 or 2 bits.
CVM-C10
4.9.29.2 BACnet protocol
Note: Protocol available in devices with version 3.00 or higher.
 Transmission speed
The transmission speed of BACnet communications is

Press key for 3 seconds to edit the transmission speed

screen.
Press key to browse the two options: 9600 or 19200.
 Device ID
The device ID is programmed on this screen.
Press the key for 3 seconds to edit the value. The prog icon
When the desired value is shown on the screen, press the key to go to the next digit and
modify the other values.

CVM-C10
 MAC
The MAC address is programmed on this screen.
Press the key for 3 seconds to edit the value. The prog icon
When the desired value is shown on the screen, press the key to go to the next digit and
modify the other values.

4.9.30. LOCKING THE PROGRAMMING
This screen is for protecting the data configured in the

programming menu.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the locking/unlocking

screen.
When you enter the programming menu you can view and modify the programming. Icon
on the display indicates the permanently locked status.
When you enter the programming you can view the programming but not modify it. Icon
indicates the locking status. Enter the password to modify the programming values.
Press the key to enter the password for locking and unlocking the programming:
CVM-C10
On this screen you enter the password for locking and unlocking
the programming.
Press key for 3 seconds to edit the password selection. The

Default password: 1234.
This value may only be modified through communications. See “4.10.3.8.17. Password
configuration.”
Press the key to exit the setup menu.
Note: The device will restart after exiting the setup menu if the RS-485 communications
parameters have been modified.
CVM-C10
4.10.- COMMUNICATIONS
The CVM-C10 devices have one RS-485 communications port.

The device has as standard two communications protocols: MODBUS RTU ® and BACnet.
The protocol and configuration parameters are selected in the setup menu. (“4.9.29. RS-485
communications: Protocol”)
Note: BACnet protocol available in devices with version 3.00 or higher.
4.10.1. CONNECTIONS
The RS -485 cable must be wired with twisted pair cable with mesh shield (minimum 3 wires),
with a maximum distance between the CVM-C10 and the master device of 1200 metres.
A maximum of 32 CVM-C10 devices can be connected to this bus.
Use an intelligent RS-232 to RS-485 network protocol converter to establish the

communications with the master device.
PC
RS-232 / USB / Ethernet / Profibus ...
RS-232
USB
Ethernet
Profibus
...
RS-485
RS-485
A (+)
B (-)
S
OUTPUTS OUTPUTS
S0- S0+ S0+ S0- S0+ S0+
RS485 INPUTS RS485 INPUTS
POWER SUPPLY A(+) B(-) I1 I2 POWER SUPPLY A(+) B(-) I1 I2
Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1 Rc R2 R1 Tc T2 T1
GND GND
Ph-Ph Ph-N Ph-Ph Ph-N

520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 520V ~ 300V ~ P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
VL1 VL2 VL3 N VL1 VL2 VL3 N S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
Figure 34: RS-485 Connection diagram.
CVM-C10
4.10.2. PROTOCOL
In the Modbus protocol, the CVM-C10 device uses the RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode.
The Modbus functions implemented in the device are as follows:
Function 0x03 and 0x04: Reading integer logs.

Function 0x05: Writing a relay.
Function 0x10: Writing multiple logs.
4.10.2.1 Reading example : Function 0x04.
Question: Instantaneous value of the phase voltage of L1
Initial No. of
Address Function CRC
Register Registers
0A 04 0000 0002 70B0
Address: 0A, Peripheral number: 10 in decimals.

Function: 04, Read function.
Initial Register: 0000, on which the reading will start.
No. of Registers: 0002, number of registers read.
CRC: 70B0, CRC Character.
Response:
No. of Register Register

Address Function CRC
Bytes No. 1 No. 2
0A 04 04 0000 084D 8621
Address: 0A, Responding peripheral number: 10 in decimals.

No. of bytes: 04, No. of bytes received.
Registers: 0000084D, value of the phase voltage of L1: VL1 x 10 : 212.5V
CRC: 8621, CRC Character.
Note: Every Modbus frame has a maximum limit of 20 variables (40 logs).
4.10.2.2. Writing example: 0x05 function.
Question: Deleting maximum and minimum values.
Initial
Address Function Value CRC
Register
0A 05 0834 FF00 CEEF
Address: 0A, Peripheral number: 10 in decimal.

Initial Register: 0834, Register of the parameter for deleting maximum and minimum
values.
Value: FF00, we indicate that we want to delete the maximum and minimum values.
CVM-C10
CRC: CEEF, CRC character.

Response:
Initial
Address Function Value CRC
Register
0A 05 0834 FF00 CEEF
4.10.3. MODBUS COMMANDS
4.10.3.1. Measurement variables.
All the adresses of Modbus memory are in Hexadecimal.

For these variables is implemented the Function 0x03 and 0x04.
Table 19: Modbus memory map (Table 1)

Parameter Symbol Instantaneous Maximum Minimum Units
L1 Phase voltage V1 00-01 106-107 164-165 V x 10
L1 Current A1 02-03 108-109 166-167 mA
L1 Active Power kW 1 04-05 10A-10B 168-169 W
L1 Inductive Power kvarL 1 06-07 10C-10D 16A-16B var
L1 Capacitive Power kvarC 1 08-09 10E-10F 16C-16D var
L1 Apparent Power kVA 1 0A-0B 110-111 16E-16F VA
L1 Power Factor PF 1 0C-0D 112-113 170-171 x 100
Cos φ L1 Cos φ 1 0E-0F 114-115 172-173 x 100
L2 Current A2 12-13 118-119 176-177 mA
Cos φ L2 Cos φ 2 1E-1F 124-125 182-183 x 100
L3 Current A3 22-23 128-129 186-187 mA
Cos φ L3 Cos φ 3 2E-2F 134-135 192-193 x 100
Active Three-phase Power kW III 30-31 136-137 194-195 W
Inductive Three-phase power kvarL III 32-33 138-139 196-197 var
Capacitive Three-phase Power kvarC III 34-35 13A-13B 198-199 var
Apparent three-phase power kVA III 36-37 13C-13D 19A-19B VA
Three-phase Power Factor PF III 38-39 13E-13F 19C-19D x100
Three-phase Cos φ Cos φ III 3A-3B 140-141 19E-19F x100
L1 Frequency Hz 3C-3D 142-143 1A0-1A1 Hz x100
L1-L2 Voltage V12 3E-3F 144-145 1A2-1A3 V x 10
L2-L3 Voltage V23 40-41 146-147 1A4-1A5 V x 10
L3-L1 Voltage V31 42-43 148-149 1A6-1A7 V x 10
CVM-C10
Table 19 (Continuation): Modbus memory map (Table 1)

Parameter Symbol Instantaneous Maximum Minimum Units
Neutral Current N AN 44-45 14A-14B 1A8-1A9 mA
L1 voltage % THD %THDV1 46-47 14C-14D 1AA-1AB % x 10
L2 voltage % THD %THDV2 48-49 14E-14F 1AC-1AD % x 10
L3 voltage % THD %THDV3 4A-4B 150-151 1AE-1AF % x 10
L1 current % THD %THDI1 4C-4D 152-153 1B0-1B1 % x 10
L2 current % THD %THDI2 4E-4F 154-155 1B2-1B3 % x 10
L3 current % THD %THDI3 50-51 156-157 1B4-1B5 % x 10
Maximum demand kW III Md (Pd) 52-53 158-159 - W
Maximum demand kVA III Md (Pd) 54-55 15A-15B - VA
Maximum demand I AVG Md (Pd) 56-57 15C-15D - mA
Maximum demand I L1 Md (Pd) 58-59 15E-15F - mA
Maximum demand I L2 Md (Pd) 5A-5B 160-161 - mA
Maximum demand I L3 Md (Pd) 5C-5D 162-163 - mA
Maximum demand kvarL III kvarL 200-201 204-205 - kvarL
Maximum demand kvarC III kvarC 202-203 206-207 - kvarC
4.10.3.2. Energy variables

Table 20: Modbus memory map (Table 2)

Parameter Symbol Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 3 Total Units
Consumed active energy kW) kWh III 5E-5F 88-89 B2-B3 DC-DD kWh
Consumed active energy (W) kWh III 60-61 8A-8B B4-B5 DE-DF Wh
Consumed inductive reactive energy kvarhL III 62-63 8C-8D B6-B7
E0-E1 kvarh
(kvarhL)
Consumed inductive reactive energy kvarhL III 64-65 8E-8F B8-B9
E2-E3 varh
(varhL)
Consumed capacitive reactive ener- kvarhC III 66-67 90-91 BA-BB
E4-E5 kvarh
gy (kvarhC)
Consumed capacitive reactive ener- kvarhC III 68-69 92-93 BC-BD
E6-E7 varh
gy (varhC)
Consumed apparent energy (kVAh) kVAh III 6A-6B 94-95 BE-BF E8-E9 kVAh
Consumed apparent energy (VAh) kVAh III 6C-6D 96-97 C0-C1 EA-EB VAh
Consumed CO2 emissions KgCO2 6E-6F 98-99 C2-C3 EC-ED x10
Consumption cost $ 70-71 9A-9B C4-C5 EE-EF x10
Generated active energy (kW) kWh III 72-73 9C-9D C6-C7 F0-F1 kWh
Generated active energy (W) kWh III 74-75 9E-9F C8-C9 F2-F3 Wh
Generated inductive reactive energy kvarhL III 76-77 A0-A1 CA-CB
F4-F5 kvarh
(kvarhL)
Generated inductive reactive energy kvarhL III 78-79 A2-A3 CC-CD
F6-F7 varh
(varhL)
Generated capacitive reactive ener- kvarhC III 7A-7B A4-A5 CE-CF
F8-F9 kvarh
gy (kvarhC)
Generated capacitive reactive ener- kvarhC III 7C-7D A6-A7 D0-D1
FA-FB varh
gy (varhC)
Generated apparent energy (kVAh) kVAh III 7E-7F A8-A9 D2-D3 FC-FD kVAh
CVM-C10
Table 20 (Continuation): Modbus memory map (Table 2)

Parameter Symbol Tariff 1 Tariff 2 Tariff 3 Total Units
Generated apparent energy (VAh) kVAh III 80-81 AA-AB D4-D5 FE-EF VAh
Generated CO2 emissions KgCO2 82-83 AC-AD D6-D7 100-101 x10
Generation Cost $ 84-85 AE-AF D8-D9 102-103 x10
Hours per tariff Hours 86-87 B0-B1 DA-DB 104-105 sec
4.10.3.3. Voltage and current harmonics.

Table 21: Modbus memory map (Table 3).

Parameter L1 Voltage L2 Voltage L3 Voltage Units
Fundamental Harm. A28-A29 A48-A49 A68-A69 V x 10
2nd Order harmonic A2A A4A A6A % x 10
3rd Order harmonic A2B A4B A6B % x 10
4th Order harmonic A2C A4C A6C % x 10
5th Order harmonic A2D A4D A6D % x 10
6th Order harmonic A2E A4E A6E % x 10
7th Order harmonic A2F A4F A6F % x 10
8th Order harmonic A30 A50 A70 % x 10
18th Order harmonic A3A A5A A7A % x 10
19th Order harmonic A3B A5B A7B % x 10
20th Order harmonic A3C A5C A7C % x 10
21st Order harmonic A3D A5D A7D % x 10
22nd Order harmonic A3E A5E A7E % x 10
23rd Order harmonic A3F A5F A7F % x 10
31st Order harmonic A47 A67 A87 % x 10
CVM-C10
Table 22: Modbus memory map (Table 4).

Parameter L1 Current L2 Current L3 Current Units
Fundamental Harm. A88-A89 AA8-AA9 AC8-AC9 mA
2nd Order harmonic A8A AAA AAC % x 10
3rd Order harmonic A8B AAB ACB % x 10
4th Order harmonic A8C AAC ADC % x 10
5th Order harmonic A8D AAD ACD % x 10
6th Order harmonic A8E AAE ACE % x 10
7th Order harmonic A8F AAF ACF % x 10
8th Order harmonic A90 AB0 AD0 % x 10
18th Order harmonic A9A ABA ADA % x 10
19th Order harmonic A9B ABB ADB % x 10
20th Order harmonic A9C ABC ADC % x 10
21st Order harmonic A9D ABD ADD % x 10
22nd Order harmonic A9E ABE ADE % x 10
23rd Order harmonic A9F ABF ADF % x 10
24th Order harmonic AA0 AC0 AE0 % x 10
31st Order harmonic AA7 AC7 AE7 % x 10
4.10.3.4. Deleting parameters.
All the Modbus map addresses are hexadecimal.

The 0x05 function is implemented for these variables.
Table 23: Modbus memory map: Deleting parameters.

Parameters Address Valid data margin
Deleting energies 834 FF00
Deleting maximum and minimum values 838 FF00
Starting maximum demand 839 FF00
Deleting the hour counters (All tariffs) 83D FF00
Deleting the maximum value of the maximum demand 83F FF00
Deleting energies, maximum demand and maximum and
848 FF00
minimum values
CVM-C10
4.10.3.5. Power status.

The 0x04 function is implemented for this variable.
This variable indicates the quadrant in which the device is operating.
Table 24: Modbus memory map: Power status

Power status
Variable Address Default value
Power status 7D1 -
The variable format is shown in Table 25:

Table 25: Variable format: Power status.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 1: Capacitive 1: Inductive 1: Generated 1: Consumed
4.10.3.6. The unit’s serial number.

Table 26: Modbus memory map: Serial number.

The unit’s serial number
Serial number 578 - 579 -
4.10.3.7. Detection of incorrect direction of rotation (Version 4.05 or higher)

This variable indicates whether an incorrect direction of rotation has been detected in the
voltages.
Table 27: Modbus memory map : Detection of incorrect direction of rotation.
Detection of incorrect direction of rotation
Variable Address Value
0: No fault has been detected
Detection of incorrect direction of rotation 7D5
1: Fault detected
4.10.3.8. Device configuration variables.

The 0x04 and 0x10 functions are implemented for this variable.
The device’s Modbus function does not check whether the variables recorded are within the
correct margins, they are only checked when they are read from the EEPROM. So if any
parameter is recorded with an incorrect value the device will be configured with its default
value.
The Modbus configuration will not take effect until the device is reset.
CVM-C10
4.10.3.8.1. Transformation ratios.

Table 28: Modbus memory map: Transformation ratios.
Transformation ratios
Default
Configuration variable (3) (4) Address Valid data margin
value
Voltage primary 2710 - 2711 1 - 599999 1
Voltage secondary 2712 1 - 999 1
Current primary 2713 1 - 10000 5
1: .../1A
Current secondary 2714 5
5: ../5 A
(3)
All variables must be programmed at the same time.
(4)
Voltage ratio x Current ratio < 600000.
Note: The ratio is between the primary and the secondary.
4.10.3.8.2. Neutral current transformation ratios (CVM-C10-ITF-IN and CVM-C10-MC-IN).

Table 29: Modbus memory map: Neutral current transformation ratios.
Transformation ratios
Default
Configuration variable (5) Address Valid data margin
value
Neutral current primary 271A 1 - 10000 5
1: .../1A
Neutral current secondary (6) 271B 5
5: ../5 A
(5)
(6)
This variable is only programmed for the CVM-C10-ITF-IN model.
4.10.3.8.3. Number of quadrants

Table 30: Modbus memory map: Number of quadrants
Maximum demand
Default
Configuration variable Address Valid data margin
value
0: 4 quadrants
Number of quadrants 2B64 0
1: 2 quadrants
4.10.3.8.4.Measurement convention
Table 31: Modbus memory map: Measurement convention.
Measurement convention
Configuration variable Address Valid data margin Default value
0: Circutor
Measurement convention 2B86 1: IEC 0
2: IEEE
CVM-C10
4.10.3.8.5. Type of installation

Table 32: Modbus memory map: Type of installation
Type of installation
Default
value
0: Three-phase network with 4 wires.
1: Three-phase network with 3 wires.
2: Three-phase network with 3 wires, Aron.
Type of installation 2B5C 3: Two-phase network with 3 wires. 0
4: Single-phase network with 2 wires, phase-
to-phase.
5: Single-phase network with 2 wires, phase-
to-neutral.
4.10.3.8.6. Maximum demand

Table 33: Modbus memory map: Maximum demand
Maximum demand
Default
value
Integration period 274C 1 - 60 minutes 15
4.10.3.8.7. Operating profile

Table 34: Modbus memory map: Operating profile
Operating profile
Default
value
0: Analyzer
Operating profile 2B60 1: User 0
2: Electrical energy efficiency, e3
4.10.3.8.8. Display backlight

Table 35: Modbus memory map: Backlight
Backlight
Default
value
0: Always lit
Backlight 2B5E 0
5 - 99 seconds
4.10.3.8.9. Activating the harmonics display screen

Table 36: Modbus memory map: Display of harmonics
Display of harmonics
Default
value
0: No
Display of harmonics 2B62 1
1: Yes
CVM-C10
4.10.3.8.10. CO2 consumption and generation emissions.

Table 37: Modbus memory map: CO2 consumption and generation emissions.
CO2 emissions
Default
Configuration variable (7)(8) Address Valid data margin
value
Tariff 1 consumption emissions ratio 2724 0 - 1.9999 0
Tariff 1 generation emissions ratio 2728 0 - 1.9999 0
Tariff 2 generation emissions ratio 2729 0 - 1.9999 0
Tariff 3 generation emissions ratio 272A 0 - 1.9999 0
(7)
(8)
They have 1 decimal place.
4.10.3.8.11. Cost of energy consumption and generation.

Table 38: Modbus memory map: Cost of energy consumption and generation.
Cost per kWh
Default
Configuration variable (9)(10) Address Valid data margin
value
Cost per kWh of tariff 1 consumption 272C 0 - 1.9999 0
Cost per kWh of tariff 2 consumption 272D 0 - 1.9999 0
Cost per kWh of tariff 3 consumption 272E 0 - 1.9999 0
Cost per kWh of tariff 1 generation 2730 0 - 1.9999 0
(9)
(10)
They have 1 decimal place.
4.10.3.8.12. Programming alarms 1 and 2 (Relays 1 and 2)

Table 39: Modbus memory map: Programming alarms 1 and 2.
Programming alarms 1 and 2
Address Default
Configuration variable Valid data margin
Relay 1 Relay 2 value
Maximum value. 2AF8-2AF9 2B02-2B03 depending on the variable 0
Minimum value 2AFA-2AFB 2B04-2B05 depending on the variable 0
Variable code 2AFC 2B06 Table 15 0
Connection delay 2AFD 2B07 0 - 9999 seconds 0
Hysteresis: 2AFE 2B08 0 - 99 % 0
0 : No
latch 2AFF 2B09 0
1: Yes
Disconnection delay 2B00 2B0A 0 - 9999 seconds 0
0 : Normally open
Contacts status 2B01 2B0B 0
1: Normally closed
CVM-C10
4.10.3.8.13. Programming alarms 3 and 4 (Digital outputs T1 and T2)
Note: Configuration parameters not available for the CVM-C10-FLEX , CVM-C10-ITF-IN and
Table 40: Modbus memory map: Programming alarms 3 and 4.
Programming alarms 3 and 4
Address Default
Relay 1 Relay 2 value
Kilowatts per impulse 2B0C-2B0D 2B16-2B17 0.001 - 999.999 kWh 0
Variable code 2B10 2B1A Table 18 0
Pulse width 2B11 2B1B 10 - 500 ms 100 ms
4.10.3.8.14. Digital inputs

Table 41: Modbus memory map: Configuration of digital inputs.
Address Default
Input 1 Input 2 value
0: Tariff
Operating mode (11) 2B66 2B67 0
1: Logic state
(11)
If Input 1 is configured as a tariff and Input 2 is configured as a logic state (or vice versa) we will only have 2
tariffs.
We can also read the status of the digital inputs when they are in logic mode:
Table 42: Modbus memory map: Status of the digital inputs (Logic state mode)
Status of digital inputs
Status of digital inputs 4E20 -

Table 43: Variable format: Status of digital inputs.
Input 2 Input 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0: OFF 0: OFF
1: ON 1: ON
4.10.3.8.15. Digital outputs
Reading the status of the digital outputs.

Table 44: Modbus memory map: Status of the digital outputs

Status of the digital outputs
Status of the digital outputs 4E21 -
CVM-C10
Table 45: Variable format: Status of the digital outputs.

Output Output
Output 2 Output 1
4 3
0 0 0 0 0: OFF 0: OFF
0: OFF 0: OFF
1: ON 1: ON
1: ON 1: ON
4.10.3.8.16. Communications
Table 46: Modbus memory map: Communications
Communications
Default
value
0 : Modbus
Protocol 2742 0
1: Bacnet
Modbus and BACnet: Peripheral number 2743 0 - 255 1
Modbus : Transmission speed 2744 0: 9600 - 1:19200 0
0: No parity
Modbus : Parity 2745 1: Odd parity 0
2: Even parity
0 : 8 bits
Modbus : Data bits 2746 0
1: 7 bits
0 : 1 stop bit
Modbus : Stop bits 2747 0
1: 2 stop bits
BACnet: Device ID 2EE0- 2EE1 0- 999999 -
BAcnet: MAC 2EE2 0- 255 2
4.10.3.8.17. Password configuration
These variables allow you to lock or unlock access to the programming menu, and also allow
you to change the password code. The password code may only be changed through this com-
mand.
The device does not need you to enter the old password in order for it to record the new one; it
records the new one directly without any verification.
Table 47: Modbus memory map: Password configuration
Password
Configuration variable(12) Address Valid data margin Default value
Password value (13)
2B70 0 - 9999 1234
0: Unlock
Lock-Unlock 2B71 0
1: Lock
(12)
You must program all the variables at the same time.
(13)
The password value is read and written in hexadecimal.
CVM-C10
4.10.4. BACnet PROTOCOL
BACnet is a communications protocol for Building Automation and Control NETworks. This
protocol replaces the proprietary communications of each device, making it a set of common
communication rules that enables the complete integration of the building automation and
control devices of different manufacturers.
The device features BACNet MS/TP communications, following the specifications of ANSI/
ASHRAE 135 (ISO 16484-5).
Using a RS485 connection, the device can connect to a BACnet and include all of the objects
and services defined in the attached PICS map (Protocol Implementation Conformance
Statement). ( “4.10.5. PICS MAP”)
The default speed is 9600 bps and the MAC is 2 (node number), and can be changed on the
configuration screen or by entering the BaudRate and MAC_Address variables. The identifier
(Device_ID) can be changed on the configuration screen using the writing property over the
variable or through the Device_ID variable.
Another option is to overwrite the Object_Name in the Device object:

a) #Baud x – where x can be: 9600, 19200
b) #MAC x – where x can be: 0 ... 127
c) #ID x – where x can be: 0 ... 999999
For further information on the protocol: www.bacnet.org.
CVM-C10
4.10.5. MAPA PICS
PICS
Vendor Name: CIRCUTOR
Product Name: CVM-C10
Product Model Number: 0116
Application Software Version: 1.0
Firmware Revision: 0.7.1
BACnet Protocol Revision: 10
Product Description:
Electrical energy meter
BACnet Standardized Device Profile (Annex L)

x BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)

List all BACnet Interoperability Building supported (see Annex K in BACnet Addendum 135d):
DS-RP-B Read Property
DS-WP-B Write Propery
DS-RPM-B Read Property Multiple
DM-DDB-B Dynamic Device Binding
DM-DOB-B Dynamic Object Binding
DM-DCC-B Device Communication Control
DM-RD-B Reinitialize Device
Which of the following device binding methods does the product support? (check one or more)
x Recive Who-Is, send I-Am (BIBB DM-DDB-B)
x Recive Who-Has, send I-Have (BIBB DM-DOB-B)

Standard Object Types Supported:
Analog Input Object Type

1. Dynamically creatable using BACnet’s CreateObject service? No
2. Dynamically deleatable using BACnet’s DeleteObject service? No
3. List of optional properties supported: max_pres_value min_pres_value
4. List of all properties that are writable where not otherw is a required by this standard
5. List of proprietary properties:
6. List of any property value range restrictions:
Properly Identifier
Object_Name max 32 characters
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL ID OBJECTS OBJECT NAME UNITS

Voltage phase to
Tensión fase-neutro V1 AI0 Ph2NU1 V
neutral
Corriente Current A1 AI1 Ph1Current A
Potencia activa Active power kW 1 AI2 ActPwrPh1 kW
Potencia reactiva Reactive power kvar 1 AI3 ReactPwrPh1 kvar
Factor de potencia Power factor PF 1 AI4 PwrFactPh1 PF
Tensión fase-neutro Voltage phase to
V2 AI5 Ph2NU2 V
neutral
CVM-C10

Tensión fase-neutro Voltage phase to
V3 AI10 Ph2NU3 V
neutral
Potencia activa trifá- Three phase active
kW III AI15 ActPwOn3Ph kW
sica power
Potencia inductiva Three phase reactive
kvarL III AI16 InductPwOn3Ph kvarL
trifásica inductive power
Potencia capacitiva Three phase capacitive
kvarC III AI17 CapPwOn3Ph kvarC
trifásica inductive power
Cos φ trifásico Three phase cos φ Cos φ III AI18 Cosphi Cos φ
Factor de potencia Three phase power
PFIII AI19 PwFactOn3Ph PF
trifásico factor
Frecuencia (L2) Frequency Hz AI20 Frequency Hz
Tensión fase-fase Voltage phase to phase V12 AI21 Ph2PhU12 V
%THD V %THD V %THD V1 AI24 THDVal_U1 %THD
%THD A %THD A %THD A1 AI27 THDVal_I1 %THD
Energía activa Active energy kW•h III AI30 ActEnergy kW•h
Energía reactiva in- Reactive inductive
kvarL•h III AI31 InductEnergy kvarL•h
ductiva energy
Energía reactiva capa- Reactive capacitive
kvarC•h III AI32 CapEnergy kvarC•h
citiva energy
Energía Aparente Three phase aparent
kVA•h III AI33 AppEnergy kVA•h
trifásica energy
Energía activa gene- Three phase generated
kW•h III (-) AI34 ActEnergy_exp kW•h
rada active energy
Three phase genera-
Energía inductiva
ted reactive inductive kvarL•h III (-) AI35 IndEnergy_exp kvarL•h
generada
energy
Three phase genera-
Energía capacitiva
ted reactive capacitive kvarC•h III(-) AI36 CapEnergy_exp kvarC•h
generada
energy
Energía aparente Three phase generated
kVA•h III (-) AI37 AppEnergy_exp kVA•h
generada aparent energy
Corriente trifásica Three phase average
I_AVG AI38 AvgValCurr3Ph I_AVG
(media) current
Corriente de neutro Neutral current In AI39 NeutralCurrent In
Potencia aparente L1 Aparent power L1 kVA AI40 AppPwrPh1 kVA
CVM-C10

Potencia aparente Three phase aparent
kVAIII AI43 AppPw3Ph kVA
trifásica power
Máxima demanda I1 Maximum demand I1 Md (A1) AI44 MaxDemand_A1 A
Máxima demanda I2 Maximum demand I2 Md(A2) AI45 MaxDemand_A2 A
Máxima demanda I3 Maximum demand I3 Md(A3) AI46 MaxDemand_A3 A
Máxima demanda A Maximum demand A A III AI47 MaxDemand_A A
Máxima demanda kW Maximum demand kW kW III AI48 MaxDemand_kW kW
MaxDemand_
Máxima demanda kVA Maximum demand kVA kVA III AI49 kVA
kVA
Analog Value Object Type

3. List of optional properties supported:
4. List of all properties that are writable where not otherwise required by this standard
5. List of propietary properties:
Property Identifier Property Datatype Meaning
5. List of object identifiers and their meaning in this device
Object ID Object Name Description
AV1 MAC_Address MAC
AV2 BaudRate BAUD RATE
AV3 Device_ID DEVICE ID
Device Object Type

3. List of optional properties supported: Description, Protocolo_Conformance_Class
4. List of all properties that are writable where not otherwise required by this standard
Object_Name
Max_Master
Max_Info_Frames
Object_Identifier
5. List of propietary properties:
5. List of any property value range restrictions

Property Identifier Restrictions
Object_Name < 32 bytes
Object_Identifier Device Type only
Number_Of_APDU_Retries 0-255
APDU_Timeout 0-65535 miliseconds
Vendor_Identifier 0-65535
Data Link Layer Options (check all that supported):

X MS/TP master (Clause 9), baud rate(s): 9.6, 19.2kB/s
Character Sets Supported (check all that apply):
Indicating support for multiple character set does not imply that they can all be supported simulta-
neously.
X ANSI X3.4
CVM-C10
5.- TECHNICAL FEATURES

AC Power supply
Rated voltage 95 ... 240 V ~ ± 10%
Frequency 50 ... 60 Hz
Consumption 4 ... 6 VA
Installation category CAT III 300 V
DC Power supply
Rated voltage 105 ... 272 V ± 10% 23 ... 109 V ± 10% (14)
Consumption 2 ... 6 W 3.5 ... 3 W
(14)
Only available for references M5591100F0000, M5592100F0000, M5592100F0V00, M5594200F00000 and
M5596100F0000.
Voltage measurement circuit
Rated voltage (Un) 300 V Ph-N, 520 V Ph-Ph
Voltage measurement margin 5 ... 120% Un
Frequency measurement margin 45 ... 65Hz
Input impedance 440 kΩ
Min. voltage measurement (Vstart) 15 V
Current measurement circuit

CVM-C10-FLEX Measure through Rogowski sensors.
CVM-C10-ITF CVM-C10-MC
CVM-C10-ITF-IN CVM-C10-MC-IN
Nominal current (In) .../5A o .../1 A .../0.250 A
CVM-C10-mV CVM-C10-FLEX
.../0.333 V .../100 mV ~
CVM-C10-ITF-IN CVM-C10-FLEX
.../5A o .../1 A .../100 mV ~
Neutral current measurement
CVM-C10-MC-IN
.../0.250 A
Current measurement margin 2 ... 120% In ≥ 10 ... ≤ 100% In
2 ... 120% In 0.2 ... 200% In
Maximum current, impulse < 1s 100 A 100 A
1.2 In 2 In
Min. current measurement (Istart) 10 mA 0.2 % In
6.66 mV 0.2 mV ~
CVM-C10
(Continuation) Current measurement circuit

Consumption 0.9 VA 0.18 VA
0.033 mVA 0.004 VA
Measurement accuracy (UNE-EN 61557-12)

CVM-C10-ITF CVM-C10-MC (17)
Model CVM-C10-mV
CVM-C10-ITF-IN CVM-C10-MC-IN (17)
Voltage measurement 0.5% ± 1 digit 0.5% ± 1 digit 0.5% ± 1 digit
Current measurement 0.5% ± 1 digit 0.5% ± 1 digit 0.5% ± 1 digit
Frequency measurement 0.5% 0.5% 0.5%
Active power measurement 0.5% ± 2 digits 1% ± 2 digits 0.5% ± 2 digits
Reactive power measurement 1% ± 2 digits 2% ± 2 digits 2% ± 2 digits
Active energy measurement Class 0.5s (15)
(I ≥ 0.1In) Class 1 Class 1
Reactive energy measurement Class 1 (16)
(I ≥ 0.1In) Class 2 Class 2
(15)
According to IEC 62053-22.
(16)
According to IEC 62053-24.
(17)
Measurement range:
PF:1 PF:0.5
Measurement range ≥ 10% ... ≤ 100% ≥ 20% ... ≤ 100%
Measurement accuracy (With sensors) (UNE-EN 61557-12)

Model CVM-C10-FLEX (18)
Voltage measurement ± 0.5% + 1 decimal
Current measurement ± 3%
Frecuency measurement ± 0.5%
Active power measurement ± 4%
Reactive power measurement ± 4%
(18)
See section “3.3.- CVM-C10-FLEX: ROGOWSKI SENSORS”
Pulse outputs (CVM-C10-ITF CVM-C10-MC and CVM-C10-mV) (19)
Quantity 2
Type NPN ouputs
Maximum voltage 24 V
Maximum current 50 mA
Maximum frequency 16 impulses / sec
Pulse width 30 ms to 500 ms (Programmable)
Relay outputs (CVM-C10-ITF, CVM-C10-ITF-IN, CVM-C10-MC, CVM-C10-MC-IN, CVM-C10-mV ) (19)

Quantity 2
Max. voltage open contacts 250 V ~
Maximum current 6A
Maximum switching power 1500 W (AC1)
Electrical life (250 VAC / 5A) 60x103 cycles
Mechanical life 10x106 cycles
CVM-C10
Digital inputs (19)

Quantity 2
Type NPN Potential free contact
Insulation optoisolated
(19)
Must be connected to SELV circuit.
Communications
Modbus RTU BACnet
Bus RS-485 MS/TP
Protocol Modbus RTU BACnet
Baud rate 9600 - 19200
Stop bits 1-2 1
Parity without - even - odd without
User interface
Display LCD Custom COG
Keyboard Capacitive, 3 keys
LED 3 LED
Environmental features
Operating temperature -5ºC... +45ºC
Storage temperature -10ºC ... +50ºC
Relative humidity (non-condensing) 5 ... 95%
Maximum altitude 2000 m
IP21
Protection degree (20)
Front panel: IP51 (IP64 with accessory)
(20)
This pollution degree hasn’t been tested by UL.
Mechanical features
Dimensions ( Figure 35) 96.7x96.7x62.5 mm
Weight 330 gr
Surround Self-extinguishing V0 plastic
Attachment Panel
Standards
Safety of electronic measuring units UNE EN 61010: 2010
Electromagnetic compatibility (CEM). Part 6-3: Generic standards.
Emission standard for residential, commercial and light industry en- UNE EN 61000-6-3:2007
vironments.
Electromagnetic compatibility (CEM). Part 6-1: Generic standards. Im-
UNE EN 61000-6-1:2007
munity in residential, commercial and light industry environments
Coordination of the insulation of units installed in low voltage sys-
IEC 664:2007
tems (networks).
VDE 0110
Test for flammability of plastic materials for parts in devices and
UL 94
appliances
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Immunity
BS EN 61000-6-2
for industrial environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Emission
BS EN 61000-6-4
standard for industrial environments
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, con-
UL/CSA 61010-1 3rd edition
trol, and laboratory use - Part 1: General requirements
CVM-C10
60.9 96.7
10.9 50
2.5
91.8
96.7
Figure 35: Dimensions of the CVM-C10.
CVM-C10
8.- CE CERTIFICATE
CVM-C10
CVM-C10
CVM-C10
CIRCUTOR, SA
Vial Sant Jordi, s/n
08232 -Viladecavalls (Barcelona)
Tel.: (+34) 93 745 29 00 - Fax: (+34) 93 745 29 14
www.circutor.com central@circutor.com
8.4 GFCI Receptacle, SPEC 2.9.2

GFCI Receptacle, SPEC 2.9.2 Leviton GFNT- 2RI GFCI
APPLICATION NOTE
What to do when
your GFCI trips
GFCIs are important safety tools that help protect people from shock or
electrocution. Even though the latest models have their own self-test feature,
it’s still important to test them monthly and perform a visual inspection to be sure
they’re in good condition.
Your GFCI is designed to trip when it detects a ground fault, which occurs when current
flows along an unintended path such as through water or a person.
- Test your GFCIs monthly by pressing the ‘TEST’ and ‘RESET’ buttons on the face
of the device.
- P
erform a simple visual inspection to be sure they’re in good condition. If the plug
connection is loose or the outlet is discolored or warm, replace the GFCI immediately.
What to Do in the Event of a GFCI Trip

Tripping can happen for a number of reasons.
Perform a Visual Inspection

- Take a look at the GFCI. As with any electrical outlet, if you notice any signs of
discoloration or loose plug connection, you’ll need to replace it immediately.
- Look at appliances or cords that were plugged into the GFCI at the time of the trip,
as well as any devices plugged into outlets downstream of the GFCI. Check for
damage like frayed wires or faulty devices.
Take Note: What Was In Use?

- If your outlet appears to be in good condition, take note of what was happening
when the GFCI tripped.
Were you using a specific appliance?
Did you plug something in, or turn something on?
If there’s an obvious cause for the trip, you should unplug the device as it may be faulty
and causing the GFCI to trip. If the GFCI continues to trip, or if the reason for the trip is not
obvious, it’s time to contact an electrician.
GFCI Trips
Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc.

201 North Service Road, Melville, NY 11747 Tech Line: 1-800-824-3005 Fax: 1-800-832-9538 www.leviton.com
© 2020 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
GFCI Outlet Protection
GFCIs protect against ground faults

that can occur in the outlet face as
well as in outlets wired downstream
on the same circuit.
GFCI
Outlet
Test your GFCIs monthly by

pressing the ‘TEST’ and ‘RESET’
buttons on the face of the device.
Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

201 North Service Road, Melville, NY 11747-3138
Telephone: 1-800-323-8920 • FAX: 1-800-832-9538
Tech Line: 1-800-824-3005
Mon-Fri 8am-10pm EST, Saturday 9am-7pm EST
Visit our Website at: www.leviton.com

© 2020 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice.
TS-111020-dp
1. What is a GFCI? 2. The GFCI's features
! CAUTION
A GFCI receptacle is different from FRONT VIEW BACK VIEW Screw (terminal) colors:
conventional receptacles. In the event of a LINE
• To prevent severe shock or electrocution Receptacle Green = grounding terminal
ground fault, a GFCI will trip and quickly stop Hot terminal (Brass or Black):
always turn the power OFF at the service the flow of electricity to prevent serious injury. Silver = WHITE terminals
Connection for the LINE
panel before working with wiring. Outlet cable's black wire Brass or Black = HOT terminals
Definition of a ground fault:
• Use this GFCI with copper or copper- LINE
Instead of following its normal safe path, A yellow sticker
clad wire. Do not use it
Installing and with aluminum wire.
electricity passes through a person's body to
reach the ground. For example, a defective
RESET
button:
covers the LOAD
terminals. Do not
White terminal (Silver):
Connection for the LINE
Testing a GFCI • Do not install this GFCI receptacle on a

circuit that powers life support equipment
appliance can cause a ground fault. See step 8 remove the sticker
at this time.
LINE
cable's white wire
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
LIGNE
SUIVEZ INSTRUCTIONS
Receptacle
A GFCI receptacle does NOT protect against
TEST MENSUEL
TEST MONTHLY
RESET
because if the GFCI trips it will shut TEST LOAD
WHITE WIRE
RESET
FIL BLANC
HOT WIRE
FIL ACTIF
circuit overloads, short circuits, or shocks. For
down the equipment. example, you can still be shocked if you touch button: TEST
TEST LOAD White terminal (Silver):
bare wires while standing on a non-conducting See step 8 Hot terminal Connection for the LOAD
• For installation in damp or wet locations, cable's white wire
surface, such as a wood floor. (Brass or Black):
the GFCI receptacle must be Listed and Outlet LOAD
marked as Weather Resistant (WR) NOTE: Connection for CHARGE
GFCI's contain a lockout feature that will prevent the LOAD cable's
Please read this leaflet • For installation in wet locations, protect RESET if: Self-Ground black wire
completely before getting started. the GFCI receptacle with a cover plate or • There is no power being supplied to
Clip
outlet box hood suitable for wet locations the GFCI.
that will keep both the receptacle and Back wire holes Grounding Terminal (Green):
• The GFCI is miswired due to reversal of
plug face dry. the LINE and LOAD connections.
Mounting Connection for bare
Green/Red Status
Bracket copper or green wire
• The GFCI cannot pass its internal test, Indicator Light
• Must be installed in accordance with
indicating that it may not be able to provide
national and local electric codes.
protection in the event of a ground fault.
PK-93792-10-00-2B AR0088
3. Should you install it? 4. LINE vs. LOAD 5. Turn the power OFF 6. Identify cables/wires Procedure: box with two (2) cables (4-6 wires):
Placement in circuit:
(a) Detach one cable's white wire and hot The GFCI's place in the circuit determines if
Installing a GFCI receptacle can be more A cable consists of 2 or 3 wires. Plug an electrical device, such as a lamp or Important: it protects other receptacles in the circuit.
wires from the receptacle and cap each
complicated than installing a conventional radio, into the receptacle on which you are DO NOT install the GFCI receptacle in an one separately with a wire connector.
receptacle. Cable Wires working. Turn the lamp or radio ON. Then, go electrical box containing (a) more than four (4) Sample circuit:
Make sure that they are from the same
to the service panel. Find the breaker or fuse wires (not including the grounding wires) or cable.
Make sure that you: that protects that receptacle. Place the breaker (b) cables with more than two (2) wires (not
in the OFF position or completely remove the including the grounding wire). Contact a A B C
fuse. The lamp or radio must turn OFF. (b) Re-install the receptacle in the electrical LINE LINE LINE
•
Understand basic wiring principles and qualified electrician if either (a) or (b) are true.
box, attach faceplate, then turn the power
techniques ON at the service panel. Service
LINE cable: If you are replacing an old receptacle, pull it out Panel
• Can interpret wiring diagrams Delivers power from the service panel (breaker of the electrical box without disconnecting the
(c) Determine if power is flowing to the
panel or fuse box) to the GFCI. If there is only wires.
receptacle. If so, the capped wires are the LOAD LOAD
• Have circuit wiring experience one cable entering the electrical box, it is the LOAD wires. If not, the capped wires are
LINE cable. This cable should be connected to • If you see one cable (2-3 wires), it is the the LINE wires.
the GFCI's LINE terminals only. LINE cable. The receptacle is probably in
• re prepared to take a few minutes to test
A position C (see diagram to the right). Placing the GFCI in position A will also
your work, making sure that you have wired (d) Turn the power OFF at the service panel, provide protection to "load side"
LOAD cable: Remove the receptacle and go to step 7A.
the GFCI receptacle correctly label the LINE and LOAD wires, then receptacles B and C. On the other hand,
Delivers power from the GFCI to another remove the receptacle.
Next, plug in and turn ON the lamp or radio at • If you see two cables (4-6 wires), the placing the GFCI in position C will not
receptacle in the circuit. This cable should be
the receptacle's other outlet to make sure the receptacle is probably in position A or B provide protection to receptacles A or B.
connected to the GFCI's LOAD terminals only.
(see diagram to the right). Follow steps a-e (e) Go to step 7B. Remember that receptacles A, B, and C
The LOAD terminals are under the yellow power is OFF at both outlets. If the power is not
OFF, stop work and call an electrician to of the procedure to the right. can be in different rooms.
sticker. Do NOT remove the sticker at this time.
complete the installation.
Procedure:
7. Connect the wires (choose A or B)... only after reading other side completely (a) This GFCI is shipped from the factory in the tripped condition and cannot be reset until it is wired
A: One Cable (2 or 3 wires) entering the box OR B: Two cables (4 or 6 wires) entering the box correctly and power is supplied to the device. Plug a lamp or radio into the GFCI (and leave it plugged RESET
in). Turn the power ON at the service panel. Ensure that the GFCI is still in the tripped condition
RESET
TEST
by pressing the TEST button. If the lamp or radio is OFF, and the GFCI will not reset, go to the TEST
Grounding LINE cable brings LINE cable brings power to the GFCI Troubleshooting section as the Line and Load connections are reversed.
connection to power to the GFCI Grounding connection (b) Press the RESET button fully and release. If the Status Indicator Light turns Green and the lamp or
box (if box has a to box (if box has a White radio is ON, the GFCI has been installed correctly. If the Status Indicator Light turns or continuously
grounding terminal) White grounding terminal) blinks Red, or the GFCI cannot be reset, go to the Self-Test Operation section.
Yellow
sticker (c) If you installed your GFCI using step 7B, plug a lamp or radio into surrounding receptacles to see which
remains one(s), in addition to the GFCI, lose power when you press the GFCI TEST button. Place a "GFCI RESET
RESET
Wire in place PROTECTED OUTLET" sticker on every receptacle that lost power, then press the RESET button to T EST
Wire
TEST
Connector reset the GFCI. DO NOT plug life saving devices into any of the receptacles that lost power.
to cover Connector Black LINE
the LOAD
LIGNE (d) Press the TEST button (then RESET button) every month to assure proper operation. If the Status
Black
WHITE WIRE
Indicator Light does not turn Green when the RESET button is depressed and then released, or the
FIL BLANC
HOT WIRE
FIL ACTIF
LINE
LIGNE terminals
GFCI cannot be reset, it must be replaced.
WHITE WIRE
FIL BLANC
Electrical Black
HOT WIRE
FIL ACTIF
LOAD
CHARGE
Electrical Box TROUBLESHOOTING
White
Box LOAD
CHARGE
Turn the power OFF and check the wire connections against the appropriate wiring diagram in step 7A or 7B. Make sure that RESET
RESET
there are no loose wires or loose connections. If the Status Indicator Light is not ON and the device is unable to reset this TEST
TEST
LOAD cable feeds could be a result of no power available. Start the test from the beginning of step 8 if you rewired any connections to the GFCI.
power to other
receptacle(s) SELF-TEST OPERATION
• A Self-Test GFCI receptacle has all the features of a conventional GFCI receptacle. In addition, this receptacle tests itself periodically to confirm
About Wire Connections: the GFCI electronics are functional. The Status Indicator Light will be solid green when the GFCI is powered from Line side and working correctly.
About Wire Connections: Back Wire: • Self-Test Indications: If the Status Indicator Light is solid or flashing RED a problem may exist. Press the TEST button to trip the GFCI. If unable
Side Wire: Back Wire: Side Wire: 5/8" (1.6 cm) to Reset, replace the GFCI. NOTE: The status indicator may flash Red at power "ON" and Reset.
3/4" (1.9 cm) Wire
3/4" (1.9 cm) 5/8" (1.6 cm) Wire
Wire Wire Self Test Cat. No. Description LIMITED 2 YEAR WARRANTY AND EXCLUSIONS
Leviton warrants to the original consumer purchaser and not for the benefit of anyone else that this product
GFNT1 15A-125VAC, 60Hz Non-Tamper Resistant GFCI at the time of its sale by Leviton is free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal and proper
use for two years from the purchase date. Leviton’s only obligation is to correct such defects by repair
For Back wire -
LINE
LIGNE
For Side wire - GFNT2 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Non-Tamper Resistant GFCI or replacement, at its option. For details visit www.leviton.com or call 1-800-824-3005. This warranty
For Side wire - For Back wire - Insert bare wire fully and
WHITE WIRE
FIL BLANC
excludes and there is disclaimed liability for labor for removal of this product or reinstallation. This warranty
HOT WIRE
FIL ACTIF
LINE
Loop clockwise 2/3 of the is void if this product is installed improperly or in an improper environment, overloaded, misused, opened,
Loop clockwise 2/3 of the Insert bare wire fully LIGNE
tighten terminal clamp on GFTR1 15A-125VAC, 60Hz Tamper Resistant GFCI
way around screw abused, or altered in any manner, or is not used under normal operating conditions or not in accordance
WHITE WIRE
way around screw and tighten terminal

FIL BLANC
conductor ONLY
HOT WIRE
FIL ACTIF
LOAD GFTR2 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Tamper Resistant GFCI with any labels or instructions. There are no other or implied warranties of any kind, including
CHARGE merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, but if any implied warranty is required by the
clamp on conductor GFWR1 15A-125VAC, 60Hz Weather Resistant GFCI applicable jurisdiction, the duration of any such implied warranty, including merchantability and fitness for
ONLY LOAD
CHARGE
a particular purpose, is limited to two years. Leviton is not liable for incidental, indirect, special, or
GFWR2 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Weather Resistant GFCI consequential damages, including without limitation, damage to, or loss of use of, any equipment,
lost sales or profits or delay or failure to perform this warranty obligation. The remedies provided
GFWT1 15A-125VAC, 60Hz Weather/Tamper Resistant GFCI herein are the exclusive remedies under this warranty, whether based on contract, tort or otherwise.
GFWT2 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Weather/Tamper Resistant GFCI For Technical Assistance Call: 1-800-824-3005 (U.S.A. Only)
1 800 405-5320 (Canada Only) www.leviton.com
Connect the LINE cable wires to the LINE terminals: GFRBF 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Blankface GFCI
Connect the LINE cable wires to the LINE terminals: • The white wire connects to the WHITE terminal (Silver) SmartlockPro is a Trademark of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. registered in the United
All devices rated 20A feed-through States, Canada, Mexico and China.
• The white wire connects to the WHITE terminal (Silver) • The black wire connects to the HOT terminal (Brass or Black)
• The black wire connects to the HOT terminal (Brass or Black) Connect the LOAD cable wires to the LOAD terminals:
• Remove the YELLOW sticker to reveal the LOAD terminals FCC STATEMENT
Connect the grounding wire (only if there is a grounding wire): This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
• For a box with no grounding terminal (diagram not shown): Connect • The white wire connects to the WHITE terminal (Silver) designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
the LINE cable's bare copper (or GREEN) wire directly to the • The black wire connects to the HOT terminal (Brass or Black) frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
grounding terminal on the GFCI receptacle. Connect the grounding wires (only if there is a grounding wire): reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
• For a box with a grounding terminal (diagram shown above): Connect • Connect a 6-inch bare copper (or GREEN) 12 or 14 AWG wire to the grounding terminal on the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
a 6-inch bare copper (or GREEN) 12 or 14 AWG wire to the grounding GFCI. If the box has a grounding terminal, also connect a similar wire to the grounding terminal • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
terminal on the GFCI. Also connect a similar wire to the grounding on the box. Connect the ends of these wires to the LINE or LOAD cable's bare copper (or • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
GREEN) wire using a wire connector. If these wires are already in place, check the connections. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
terminal on the box. Connect the ends of these wires to the LINE
cable's bare copper (or GREEN) wire using a wire connector. Complete the installation: IC STATEMENT
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
If these wires are already in place, check the connections. • Fold the wires into the box, keeping the grounding wire away from the WHITE and HOT cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Complete the installation: terminals. Screw the receptacle to the box and attach the faceplate.
• Fold the wires into the box, keeping the grounding wire away from the • Go to step 8. This product is covered by U.S. Patent Nos. 6,040,967; 6,246,558**; 6,282,070; 6,381,112; 6,437,953; 6,646,838; 6,657,834; 6,788,173; 6,864,766**; 6,944,001; 7,336,458; 7,355,117*;
WHITE and HOT terminals. Screw the receptacle to the box and attach 7,400,479; 7,463,124**; 7,697,252; 7,737,809**; 7,764,151**; 7,820,909*; 7,868,719†; 7,907,371; 8,004,804; 8,054,595; 8,130,480; 8,242,362*; 8,587,914**; 8,599,522; 8,944,859; 9,053,886 and
the faceplate. 8. Test your work corresponding foreign patents (*applies only to Cat. Nos. GFTR1, GFTR2, GFWT1 & GFWT2, †applies only to Cat. Nos. GFTR2 & GFWT2, **does not apply to Cat. No. GFRBF).
• Go to step 8. Why perform this test? FOR CANADA ONLY
• If you miswired the GFCI it may not prevent personal injury or death due to a ground fault
(electrical shock). For warranty information and/or product returns, residents of Canada should contact Leviton in writing at Leviton Manufacturing of Canada Ltd to the
attention of the Quality Assurance Department, 165 Hymus Blvd, Pointe-Claire (Quebec), Canada H9R 1E9 or by telephone at 1 800 405-5320.
• If you mistakenly connect the LINE wires to the LOAD terminals, the GFCI will not reset and will
not provide power to either the GFCI receptacle face or any receptacles fed from the GFCI. © 2018 Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc. PK-93792-10-00-2B AR0088
GFNT2-RI
20 Amp, 125 Volt Receptacle/Outlet, 20 Amp Feed-Through, Self-test SmartlockPro
Slim GFCI, black test button and red reset button, Residential/Commercial applications,
back and side wired, heavy duty, wallplate/faceplate and self grounding clip included -
Ivory
- SAFE - Delivers continuous ground fault protection
- SELF TESTING - Automatically self-tests to ensure it can respond to ground fault
- SIMPLE - Status indicator light provides simple, intuitive feedback
Technical Information
Product Features Grounding Screw : Plated Steel
Amperage : 20 A Line Contacts : Brass Triple-Wipe .031
Thick
At Rated Voltage : 1 HP
Notes : Wallplate Sold Separately
Color : Ivory Brand : SmartlockPro
Product ID : Ratings are permanently
Color : Ivory marked on device
Feature : Self-Test Terminal Accom. : 14-10 AWG
UPC Code : 078477714638 Fed Spec WC-596 : Yes Terminal ID : Brass-Hot, Green-Ground,
Country Of Origin : China Grade : Residential/Commercial Silver-Neutral
Specification Grade Terminal Screws : Plated Steel
Grounding : Self-Grounding Yoke : Zinc-Plated Steel
NEMA : 5-20R NEMA : 5-20R
Mechanical Specifications
Pole : 2
Amperage : 20 A
Standards and Certifications :
UL/CSA, NEMA WD6 Body Material : Polycarbonate
Strap Material : Galvanized Steel Brand : SmartlockPro
Available Colors :
Tamper Resistant : No Color : Ivory
Termination : Back & Side Face Material : Thermoplastic
Trip Level : Class A, 5mA plus or minus Feature : Self-Test
White 1mA Fed Spec WC-596 : Yes
Type : Standard Duplex Grade : Residential/Commercial
Voltage : 125 VAC Specification Grade
Wallplate : Included Grounding : Self-Grounding
Warranty : 2-Year Limited NEMA : 5-20R
Wire : 3 Notes : Wallplate Sold Separately
Pole : 2
AC Horsepower Ratings
Product ID : Ratings are permanently
At Rated Voltage : 1 HP marked on device
Dielectric Voltage : Withstands Standards and Certifications :
1250VAC per UL 943 and CSA-C22.2 UL/CSA, NEMA WD6
No. 144.1-06
Strap Material : Galvanized Steel
Short Circuit Current Rating : 10KA
Tamper Resistant : No
Temperature Rise : Max 30C after 100
cycles OL at 150 percent rated current Terminal Accom. : 14-10 AWG
Terminal ID : Brass-Hot, Green-Ground,
Electrical Specifications Silver-Neutral
Dielectric Voltage : Withstands Termination : Back & Side
1250VAC per UL 943 and CSA-C22.2
No. 144.1-06 Torque Range : 14 – 18 in.-lbs
Operating Temperature : -35C to +66C Trip Level : Class A, 5mA plus or minus
1mA
Short Circuit Current Rating : 10KA
Type : Standard Duplex
Temperature Rise : Max 30C after 100
cycles OL at 150 percent rated current Voltage : 125 VAC
Warranty : 2-Year Limited
Environmental Specifications
Wire : 3
Body Material : Polycarbonate
Clamps : Brass Standards and Certifications
Face Material : Thermoplastic ANSI : C-73
Grounding Screw : Plated Steel CSA C22.2 No. 42 : Yes
Line Contacts : Brass Triple-Wipe .031 CSA-C22.2 No. 144.1-06 : File LR-
Thick 57811
Notes : Wallplate Sold Separately Fed Spec WC-596 : Yes
Operating Temperature : -35C to +66C MIL-SPEC : A-A-55459-SB
Terminal Screws : Plated Steel NOM : Yes
Yoke : Zinc-Plated Steel UL 943 : File E48380
UL498 : Yes
Material Specifications
Body Material : Polycarbonate
Clamps : Brass
Face Material : Thermoplastic
Features and Benefits
- Provides continuous ground fault protection – detects and trips on actual ground
fault even when self-test is being conducted
- On initial power up, tests the GFCI within 3 seconds
- Auto-monitoring exceeds the UL requirement
- Auto adapts and shifts to more frequent testing if potential problem is detected
- Status Indicator Light provides simple, intuitive feedback on power and protection
status as well as indication of line/load reversal
- Patented Lockout Action prevents reset if GFCI is damaged and cannot respond
to a ground fault
- Electronics are designed to minimize any false triggers
- Reduced depth makes it easier to install in any electrical box, even shallow ones
- Terminals allow for easy wiring options – back and side wire capable
- External back wire clamps provide visual indication of proper wire seating
- Withstands high torque and resists wire pullout
- Standard brass self-grounding clip
- Trip threshold meets or exceeds UL requirements for tripping time
- Improved immunity to high-frequency noise reduces nuisance tripping
- Advanced electronics design provides superior resistance to electrical surges
and over-voltages
- Compatible with all Decora devices and wallplates; available in select Decora
colors
- UL Fed Spec WC-596 rated

201 North Service Road, Melville, NY 11747
Telephone: +1-800-323-8920 · FAX: +1-800-832-9538 · Tech Line (8:30AM-7:30PM E.S.T. Monday-Friday):
+1-800-824-3005
Leviton Manufacturing of Canada, Ltd.

165 Hymus Boulevard, Pointe Claire, Quebec H9R 1E9 · Telephone: +1-800-469-7890 ·
FAX: +1-800-824-3005 · www.leviton.com/canada
Leviton S. de R.L. de C.V.

Lago Tana 43, Mexico DF, Mexico CP 11290 · Tel.: (+52)55-5082-1040 · FAX: (+52)5386-
1797 · www.leviton.com.mx

© 2018 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All Rights Reserved. Subject to change without notice.
Leviton has a global presence.

If you would like to know where your local Leviton office is located please go to:
www.leviton.com/international/contacts/
8.5 Receptacles, SPEC 2.9

Receptacles, SPEC 2.9 Leviton 16362-I Receptacle (20 Amp)
16362-I
Decora Plus Duplex Receptacle Outlet, Heavy-Duty Industrial Specification Grade,
Smooth Face, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, Back or Side Wire, NEMA 5-20R, 2-Pole, 3-Wire, Self-
Grounding - Ivory
Leviton's line of Heavy-Duty Industrial Grade Receptacles are available with a number
of wiring options and features. These heavy-duty receptacles are engineered for fine
appearance and top performance in demanding commercial and institutional
applications using a durable, thermoplastic face and impact-resistant construction.
AC Horsepower Ratings Strap Material : Zinc-Plated Steel
At Rated Voltage : 1 HP Terminal Screws : Brass 10-32
Electrical Specifications Mechanical Specifications

Amperage : 20 A Product ID : Ratings are permanently
marked on device
Current Limiting : Full Rated Current
Color : Ivory Terminal Accom. : 14-10 AWG
Dielectric Voltage : Withstands 2000V
per UL498 Terminal ID : Brass-Hot, Green-Ground,
Silver-Neutral
Grounding : Self-Grounding
UPC Code : 078477819456 Termination : Back or Side Wire
Pole : 2
Country Of Origin : Please Contact Customer Temperature Rise : Max 30C at 250 Product Features
Service. cycles OL at 200 pct rated current Brand : Decora Plus
Voltage : 125 VAC Color : Ivory
Wire : 3 Device Type : Duplex Receptacle Outlet
NEMA : 5-20R
Environmental Specifications Feature 4 : Smooth Face
Flammability : Rated V-2 per UL 94 Grade : Heavy-Duty Industrial
Specification Grade
Operating Temperature : -40°C to 60°C
NEMA : 5-20R
Available Colors : Material Specifications
Standards and Certifications
Body Material : Thermoplastic Nylon
ANSI : C-73
Clamp Nuts : Zinc-Plated Steel
CSA C22.2 No. 42 : File 152105
Black Brown Gray Color : Ivory
NEMA : WD-6
Face Material : Thermoplastic Nylon
NOM : 057
Ground Clips : Brass-Plated
UL498 : File E13399
Grounding Screw : Brass 8-32
Light Almond White Warranty : 10-Year Limited
Line Contacts : Brass Triple-Wipe
0.040” Thick
+1-800-824-3005




8.6 Toggle Switches, SPEC 2.8.1

Toggle Switches Leviton 1221-21
1221-2I
20 Amp, 120/277 Volt, Toggle Single-Pole AC Quiet Switch, Extra Heavy Duty Spec
Grade, Self Grounding, Back & Side Wired, UL Fed Spec WS896E: File #E7458: No
technical changes to product/compliant with WS 896/F - IVORY
Leviton’s Industrial Grade AC toggle switches for extra heavy-duty applications

represent top-of-the-line quality and peak performance. Leviton uses the finest
materials available and the highest production standards to produce industrial switches
of unmatched versatility and reliability.
AC Horsepower Ratings Toggle : Polycarbonate
HP Rating : 1HP-120V 2HP-240V Mechanical Specifications
Electrical Specifications Product ID : Ratings are permanently
marked on device
Amperage : 20 A
Terminal Accom. : 14-#10 AWG back
Dielectric Voltage : Withstands 1500V
Color : Ivory wired; #14-#12 AWG side wired
for 1 minute
Terminal ID : Brass-Hot Black-Hot
Endurance : 50,000 cycles minimum White-Neutral Green-Gnd
Grounding : Self-Grounding
UPC Code : 078477239896 Termination : Back or Side Wire
Overload UL20 Test : 100 cycles of OL Torque Range : 12-14 inch pounds
Country Of Origin : United States at 4.8 times rated current
Temperature Rise : Maximum 30 Product Features
degress C rise Color : Ivory
Available Colors : Voltage : 120/277 VAC Device Type : Toggle Switch
Environmental Specifications Function : Single-Pole
Flammability : Rated V-2 per UL 94 Grade : Extra Heavy-Duty Industrial
Specification Grade
Brown Ebony Gray Operating Temperature : -40°C to 65°C
ANSI : C-73
Base Material : Thermoplastic
CSA C22.2 No. 111 : File #152105
Color : Ivory
Light Almond Red White NEMA : WD-1 & WD-6
Contact Material : Silver Alloy
NOM : 057
Cover Material : Thermoplastic
RoHS : Compliant
Ground Clips : Brass
UL Fed Spec WS896E : File #E7458
Grounding Screw : Brass 8-32
UL Standard : UL 20
Strap Material : .048” Thick Galvanized
Steel Warranty : 10-Year Limited
Terminal Screws : Brass 8-32
+1-800-824-3005




8.7 Weatherproof Metallic Cover SPEC 2.9.1

Weatherproof Metallic Cover Red Dot CKMUV
Spec 2.9.1
CKMUV WARNING Package Includes:
English Cover Assembly, Gasket,
ELECTRICAL HAZARD!
TURN POWER OFF! 2 Adapters and 4 Screws
Receptacle Screws must
Code Keeper ® Wet Location Cover extend 3/8” from gasket face
to mount cover
Installation Instructions
For Vertical Mounting Only! DOOR GASKET
1. TURN POWER OFF.

OPTION B
2. Knock out appropriate receptacle pattern from gasket. Screws
3. Prepare receptacle for cover installation. GFCI receptacle – discard adapter

plates. Round receptacle up to 1-9/16” – remove breakaway sections from back
of cover (see illustration). Remove inner circle of Round/Switch adapter. OPTION A
Keyhole
4. Mount plate to box. Note: Position plate with door hinges at top, making certain
Receptacle/Box
that door is assembled to plate prior to installation. Assembly
(Not Included)
Option A: Attaching plate using receptacle screws
Attach receptacle to box by loosely inserting the receptacle screws into the box.
Knock out the two screw holes from the gasket and place gasket over the heads Round Hole ADAPTER
*See GFCI NOTE PLATE
of the screws and seat against face of box. Thread screws until heads extend
3/8” from face of gasket (see illustration). Push adapter pin(s) into gasket and
PLATE
receptacle. Place the plate KEYHOLES over screws and “square” to box (see
illustration). Tighten screws to secure plate.
Use needle nose
Option B: Attaching plate using mounting screws (furnished) pliers to remove Duplex
breakaway sections Push
Attach receptacle securely to box. Knock out the four screws from the gasket. Adapter Pin(s) into
Position gasket over receptacle and seat against face of box. Push adapter Gasket
pin(s) into gasket and receptacle. Secure the plate firmly to box with the four
mounting screws.
5. Use caulk or sealant around plate when installed on an irregular flat surface such
*GFCI NOTE: Alternative GFCI installation
as brick or wood siding. (not pictured). Verify GFCI is securely
fastened to box. Remove center from gasket
6. TURN ON POWER. and place over GFCI. Insert (2) screws Single Receptacle
(provided) through top and bottom ROUND or
© 2008 Thomas & Betts Memphis, TN. holes in cover into threaded holes in GFCI. Switch Adapter TA04208 A
All Rights Reserved. www.tnb.com Tighten screws. See steps 4A. Page 1 of 4
CKMUV MISE EN GARDE L'emballage comprend :

Français Couvercle, joint d'étanchéité,
RISQUE ÉLECTRIQUE!
COUPER LE COURANT! 2 adaptateurs et 4 vis
Les vis de la prise doivent
Couvercle pour endroits humides Code Keeper ® dépasser de 9,5 mm (3/8 po)
de la surface du joint pour
Directives d'installation fixer le couvercle.
Pour montage vertical uniquement! PORTE JOINT D'ÉTANCHÉITÉ
1. COUPER LE COURANT.
OPTION B
2. Défoncer le joint d'étanchéité selon le modèle approprié de prise. Vis
3. Préparer la prise pour l'installation du couvercle. Prise avec disjoncteur de fuite de terre –
jeter les plaques d'adaptateur. Prise ronde jusqu'à 40 mm (1-9/16 po)- retirer les sections
défonçables de l'arrière du couvercle. Retirer le cercle intérieur de l'adaptateur rond pour OPTION A
interrupteur. Trou de serrure
4. Monter la plaque sur la boîte. Note : Placer la plaque avec les charnières au sommet, en Ensemble
prise/boîte
veillant à ce que la porte soit fixée à la plaque avant l'installation. (non fourni)
Option A : Fixation de la plaque à l'aide des vis de la prise.
Fixer la prise à la boîte en insérant (sans les serrer) les vis de la prise dans la boîte. Trou rond PLAQUE
Défoncer deux trous de vis dans le joint et poser le joint sur les têtes des vis et contre la *Voir NOTE sur le D'ADAPTATEUR
face de boîte. Visser les vis jusqu'à ce que les têtes dépassent de la surface du joint de disjoncteur de fuite
à la terre
9,5 mm (3/8 po). Pousser les broches de l'adaptateur dans le joint et la prise. Placer les PLAQUE
TROUS DE SERRURE du couvercle sur les vis et mettre à l'équerre le couvercle sur la
boîte (voir illustration). Serrer les vis pour fixer la plaque.
Utiliser une pince à
Option B : Fixation de la plaque à l'aide des vis de montage (fournies) becs pointus pour les Adaptateur
sections défonçables Pousser les
duplex broches dans
Fixer fixer la prise à la boîte. Défoncer le joint avec les quatre vis. Placer le joint sur la
prise et contre la face de la boîte. Pousser les broches de l'adaptateur dans le joint et le joint.
la prise. Bien fixer la plaque sur la boîte à l'aide des quatre vis.
5. Poser du calfeutrant ou du scellant autour de la plaque si elle est installée sur une surface
irrégulière comme un parement en brique ou en bois.
*NOTE sur le disjoncteur de fuite à la terre :
6. REMETTRE LE COURANT! autre installation de disjoncteur de fuite à la terre
(sans image). Vérifier que le disjoncteur de fuite à Prise simple ou
la terre est bien fixé à la boîte. Retirer le centre du adaptateur d'interrupteur
© 2008 Thomas & Betts Memphis, TN. joint et le poser sur le disjoncteur de fuite à la TA04208 A
Tous droits réservés. www.tnb.com terre. Insérer les (2) vis (fournies) par les trous Page 2 of 4
RONDS du couvercle dans les trous filetés du
disjoncteur de fuite à la terre. Serrer les vis.
Voir étape 4A.
CKMUV ADVERTENCIA El paquete incluye:
Conjunto de la cubierta,
Español
¡RIESGO ELÉCTRICO! empaquetadura, 2 adaptadores
¡DESCONECTE LA ELECTRICIDAD! y 4 tornillos
Los tornillos del tomacorriente
Cubierta Code Keeper ® para lugares húmedos deben extenderse 3/8” desde
la cara de la empaquetadura
Instrucciones de instalación para montar la cubierta
¡Sólo para montaje vertical! PUERTA EMPAQUETADURA
1. DESCONECTE LA ELECTRICIDAD.
OPCIÓN B
2. Retire el modelo de tomacorriente apropiado de la empaquetadura. Tornillos
3. Prepare el tomacorriente para la instalación de la cubierta. Tomacorriente GFCI – deseche las

placas adaptadoras. Tomacorriente redondo de hasta 1-9/16” – retire las secciones de separación
de la parte posterior de la cubierta (vea la ilustración). Retire el círculo interno del adaptador OPCIÓN A
interruptor redondo. Ranura
Conjunto de
4. Monte la placa en la caja. Nota: Ubique la placa con las bisagras para puerta en la parte superior, tomacorriente/caja
asegurándose de que la puerta esté ensamblada con la placa antes de la instalación. (no incluidos)
Opción A: Instale la placa usando los tornillos del tomacorriente

Sujete el tomacorriente a la caja aflojando ligeramente los tornillos del tomacorriente en la caja.
Retire los dos tornillos de los agujeros en la empaquetadura y coloque ésta sobre la cabeza de Agujero circular PLACA DEL
los tornillos y asiéntelas contra la parte delantera de la caja. Enrosque los tornillos hasta que las *Vea NOTA sobre ADAPTADOR
GFCI
cabezas se extiendan a 3/8” de la parte delantera de la empaquetadura (vea la ilustración).
Presione los pines de adaptación en la empaquetadura y el tomacorriente. Coloque las RANURAS PLACA
de la placa sobre los tornillos y "encuadre" la caja (vea la ilustración). Ajuste los tornillos para
asegurar la placa.
Use alicates de punta fina
Opción B: Sujete la placa usando los tornillos de montaje (suministrados) para retirar las secciones Adaptador
de separación Presione los
doble pines dentro
Instale el tomacorriente firmemente en la caja. Retire los cuatro tornillos de la empaquetadura.
Ubique la empaquetadura sobre el tomacorriente y asiéntela contra la parte delantera de la caja. de la junta
Presione los pines de adaptación en la empaquetadura y el tomacorriente. Asegure la placa
firmemente a la caja con los cuatro tornillos de montaje.
5. Use masilla o sellante alrededor de la placa cuando la instale en una superficie irregular como *NOTA sobre GFCI: Instalación con interruptor de
revestimiento de ladrillo o madera. falla a tierra alternativo - GFCI (no ilustrada). Verifique
que el GFCI esté asegurado firmemente a la caja.
6. CONECTE LA ELECTRICIDAD. Retire el centro desde la junta y colóquelo sobre el Tomacorriente simple
GFCI. Inserte (2) tornillos (suministrados) a través de o
los agujeros CIRCULARES en la cubierta en los
© 2008 Thomas & Betts Memphis, TN. orificios roscados del GFCI. Apriete los tornillos. adaptador interruptor TA04208 A
Todos los derechos reservados. www.tnb.com Siga los pasos indicados en 4A. Pág. 3 de 4
English French Spanish

THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION
LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTY GARANTIE À VIE LIMITÉE GARANTÍA LIMITADA DE POR VIDA
Thomas & Betts Corporation sells this product with the understanding that Thomas & Betts Corporation vend ce produit avec l'entente que Thomas & Betts Corporation vende este producto asumiendo que el
the user will perform all necessary tests to determine the suitability of this l'utilisateur effectuera tous les tests nécessaires afin de déterminer la usuario realizará todas las pruebas necesarias para determinar la
product for the user's intended application, and warrants to the original pertinence du produit face à l'application prévue par l'utilisateur, et idoneidad de este producto para la aplicación deseada del usuario, y
purchaser that this product will be free from defects in material and garantit à l'acheteur primitif que ce produit sera exempt de défaut de garantiza al comprador original que este producto no tendrá fallas en
workmanship for the useful life of the product or for twenty-five (25) years matériel et de fabrication pour la durée de vie du produit ou pour les materiales ni mano de obra durante la vida útil del producto o durante
from the date of purchase, whichever is earlier. Subject to the limitations vingt-cinq (25) année suivant la date de l'achat, selon le premier terme veinticinco (25) años desde la fecha de compra, lo que ocurra primero. De
set forth below, Thomas & Betts Corporation will repair or replace, at its atteint. Sous réserve des limitations décrites plus bas, Thomas & Betts acuerdo con las limitaciones establecidas a continuación, Thomas &
sole option, any product that proves to be defective under normal Corporation réparera ou remplacera, à son gré, tout produit prouvé Betts Corporation reparará o reemplazará, a su exclusivo criterio,
installation, use and service. Thomas & Betts Corporation reserves the défectueux suite une installation, une utilisation et un entretien normal. cualquier producto que se compruebe defectuoso en condiciones
right to replace any warranted product with a substitute product of similar Thomas & Betts Corporation se réserve le droit de remplacer tout produit normales de instalación, utilización y servicio. Thomas & Betts
function if the warranted product is no longer available. Installation, garanti par un produit de remplacement possédant des fonctions Corporation se reserva el derecho de reemplazar cualquier producto bajo
operation or use of the product for which this warranty is issued shall similaires, si le produit garanti n'est plus disponible. L'installation, garantía con un producto sustituto de funcionamiento similar si el
constitute acceptance of the terms hereof. l'opération ou l'utilisation du produit pour lequel cette garantie est émise producto bajo garantía ya no está disponible. La instalación, operación o
devra constituer l'acceptation des termes ci-contre. uso del producto para el cual se emite esta garantía constituirá la
This warranty is void if the product has been subjected to misuse, neglect,
Esta garantía es nula si el producto ha estado sujeto a mal uso, aceptación de los términos de dicha garantía.
accident, fire, flood, physical damage, improper installation, unauthorized
negligencia, accidentes, fuego, inundaciones, daños físicos, instalación
modification, or use in violation of our instructions or any applicable laws, Esta garantía es nula si el producto ha estado sujeto a mal uso,
incorrecta, modificación no autorizada, o utilización que haya incumplido
codes or ordinances. negligencia, accidentes, fuego, inundaciones, daños físicos, instalación
nuestras instrucciones o alguna ley, código u ordenanza aplicables.
incorrecta, modificación no autorizada, o utilización que haya incumplido
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
Cette garantie est annulée si ce produit à fait l'objet d'une mauvaise nuestras instrucciones o alguna ley, código u ordenanza aplicables.
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED TO THE EXTENT
utilisation, d'une négligence, d'un accident, d'un incendie, d'une
ALLOWED BY LAW. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT CANNOT BE SE NIEGA TODA GARANTÍA IMPLÍCITA DE COMERCIABILIDAD E
inondation, d’un dommage physique, d’une mauvaise installation, d'une
DISCLAIMED ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A TERM OF ONE YEAR IDONEIDAD PARA UN PROPÓSITO PARTICULAR HASTA EL GRADO
modification non autorisée, ou d’une utilisation en violation avec nos
FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE. Some states do not allow limitations PERMITIDO POR LA LEY. CUALQUIER GARANTÍA IMPLÍCITA QUE NO
instructions ou à toute loi, code ou ordonnance applicables.
on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not PUEDA SER NEGADA ESTÁ LIMITADA EN DURACIÓN AL PLAZO DE
apply to you. TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE MARCHANDISAGE ET DE VALEUR UN AÑO A PARTIR DE LA FECHA DE COMPRA. Algunos estados no
ADAPTATIVE À TOUTE FIN QUE CE SOIT EST DÉSAVOUÉE JUSQU'À permiten limitaciones sobre el plazo de una garantía implícita, de modo
THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION’S OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS
LA LIMITE PERMISE PAR LA LOI. TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE QUI que la limitación antes mencionada puede no aplicarse a usted.
WARRANTY ARE LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE
NE PEUT ÊTRE DÉSAVOUÉE EST LIMITÉE EN DURÉE À UN TERME
PRODUCT ONLY. THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION WILL NOT BE DE ACUERDO CON ESTA GARANTÍA, LAS OBLIGACIONES DE
D'UNE ANNÉE À PARTIR DE LA DATE DE L'ACHAT. Certains états ne
LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL THOMAS & BETTS CORPORATION SOLO SE LIMITAN A LA
permettent pas les limitations sur la durée d'une garantie, les limitations
DAMAGES, OR FOR DIRECT DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE REPARACIÓN O EL REEMPLAZO DEL PRODUCTO. THOMAS &
peuvent par conséquent ne pas s'appliquer à vous.
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT. THIS DISCLAIMER OF BETTS CORPORATION NO SERÁ RESPONSABLE POR NINGÚN
LIABILITY SHALL CONTINUE TO BE ENFORCEABLE IN THE EVENT LES OBLIGATIONS DE LA SOCIÉTÉ THOMAS & BETTS EN REGARD DAÑO INCIDENTAL, ESPECIAL O EMERGENTE, NI POR DAÑOS
THAT ANY REMEDY HEREIN SHALL FAIL OF ITS ESSENTIAL DE CETTE GARANTIE SONT LIMITÉES À LA RÉPARATION OU AU DIRECTOS EN EXCESO DEL PRECIO DE COMPRA DEL PRODUCTO.
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of REMPLACEMENT DU PRODUIT UNIQUEMENT. LA SOCIÉTÉ ESTE DESCARGO DE RESPONSABILIDAD SEGUIRÁ SIENDO
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or THOMAS & BETTS NE POURRA EN AUCUN TEMPS ÊTRE TENUE APLICABLE EN EL CASO DE QUE ALGÚN RECURSO AQUÍ
exclusions may not apply to you. RESPONSABLE DE TOUT DOMMAGE INTERLOCUTOIRE, SPÉCIAL MENCIONADO NO CUMPLA CON SU PROPÓSITO ESENCIAL.
OU CORRÉLATIF NI DE TOUT DOMMAGE DIRECT POUR UN Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión ni la limitación de daños
To report a defective product, call customer service at 1-888-862-3289. In
MONTANT SUPÉRIEUR AU PRIX D'ACHAT DU PRODUIT. CET AVIS DE incidentales ni emergentes, de modo que las limitaciones o exclusiones
Canada, call 1-888-777-7947.
NON-RESPONSABILITÉ CONTINUERA D'ÊTRE EN VIGUEUR DANS mencionadas anteriormente pueden no aplicarse a usted.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other L'ÉVENTUALITÉ OÙ UN RECOURS PAR LES PRÉSENTES
Para informar sobre un producto defectuoso, llame al Servicio al cliente al
rights which vary from state to state. ÉCHOUERAIT À SON OBJECTIF PRINCIPAL. Certains états ne
1-888-862-3289. En Canadá, llame al 1-888-777-7947.
permettent pas les limitations des dommages interlocutoires ou
corrélatifs, les limitations peuvent par conséquent ne pas s'appliquer à Esta garantía le da derechos legales específicos, pero usted también
vous. puede tener otros derechos que varían de estado a estado.
Pour faire rapport d'un produit défectueux, appelez le service à la clientèle
au numéro 1-888-862-3289. Au Canada, appelez au 1-888-777-7947.
Cette garantie vous donne des droits légaux spécifiques et vous pouvez
également avoir d'autres droits qui varient d'un état à l'autre.
TA04208 A Page 4 of 4
8.8 DIVISION 26 51 00- Interior Light Ceiling Fan Fixture
Type F SPEC 2.1

Interior Ceiling Fan Hunter Dempsey Tyoe F
GUIA DE PARTES
113
PARTS GUIDE
20
123
24 28
18
114 32
106 108 110
33
129
63
98
51
55 53
136
76
80
#
# in Parts List Included Accessories / Accesorios incluidos
# en Lista de partes
Pre-installed Parts / Partes preinstaladas
Spare Parts Bag
Bolsa de partes de repuesto
26
81 140
Hardware drawn to scale
For your convenience, you may receive extra fasteners.
Materiales dibujado a escala
Para su comodidad, es posible que reciba sujetadores extra.
MODEL #
59241 59242
MODELO #
DRAWING #
K5655-01 K5655-02
Parts List Lista de piezas

ESQUEMA #
Weight ±2 lbs
19.8 lbs (9.0 kg) 19.8 lbs (9.0 kg)
Peso ±2 lb
FINISH Brushed Nickel Fresh White
FINISH Níquel cepillado Blanco fresco
# Item Name Qty. / Cant. Part# / No. de la pieza Part# / No. de la pieza Nombre del Item
18 Canopy Screw 3 K1809-05 K1809-05 Tornillo de la campana
20 Wood Screw 3” 2 K0081-01 K0081-01 Tornillo para madera de 3”
24 Flat Washer 2 K0082-01 K0082-01 Arandela plana
26 Mounting Isolator 4 74283-01 74283-01 Aislador de montaje
32 Top Housing Screw 3 K0044-09 K0044-09 Tornillo de la tapa superior
33 Grounding Screw 1 K0062-17 K0062-17 Tornillo para aterrizar
50 Hardware Kit 1 K5655-00-860 K5655-00-861 Kit de materiales
51 Blade Assembly Screw 13 Tornillo de montaje de paleta
52 Blade Washer 13 Arandela de montaje de paleta
53 Machine Screw 6-32 3 Tornillo mecánico 6-32
55 Switch Housing Assembly Screws 3 Tornillo de montaje de la caja del interruptor
76 Light Kit Assembly 1 K2393-02 K2393-02 Conjunto del kit de luz
80 Globe 1 K5451-01-045 K5451-01-045 Pantalla
81 LED Bulb 2 K4870-01 K4870-01 Lámpara LED
98 Blade Set 1 K5449-04-345 K5449-04-346 Juego de paletas
106 Remote Control Receiver 1 K2431-03 K2431-03 Receptor de control remoto
108 Remote Control Transmitter 1 K0474-02 K0474-01 Remote Control Transmitter
110 Remote Cradle 1 G2272-02 G2272-01 Soporte de control remoto
113 Ceiling Plate 1 84839-02 84839-02 Placa de techo
114 Canopy 1 G2492-03 G2492-03 Campana
123 Canopy Trim Ring 1 84512-01 84512-01 Anillo de la moldura de campana
129 Top Housing 1 K5662-01 K5662-01 Tapa superior
136 Upper Switch Housing 1 K5452-01 K5452-01 Caja superior del interruptor
140 Balancing Kit 1 K0118-01 K0118-01 Kit de equilibrado
Hunter Fan Company • 7130 Goodlett Farms Parkway #400 • Memphis, TN 38016 • www.HunterFan.com • 98000-03-414 • 04-14-16 • ©2016
Table of Contents www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Congratulations on purchasing What to Expect with

your new Hunter® ceiling fan! It will Your Installation Tools Needed Ceiling Plate Top Housing
provide comfort and performance
in your home or office for many
years. This installation and operation 30 inches
manual contains complete
instructions for installing and 7 feet
Ladder
operating your fan.
2 3 4 5
PA G E
PA G E
PA G E
PA G E
We are proud of our work and
appreciate the opportunity to Hanging the Fan Wiring Canopy Blades
supply you with the best ceiling fan
available anywhere in the world.
To register your fan, please visit:

www.HunterFan.com/register
7 8 10 12
PA G E
PA G E
PA G E
PA G E
Save your receipt for proof of purchase.
Operation,
Switch Housing Light Kit Remote Control Maintenance & Cleaning Troubleshooting
? ?
13 14 16 17 ? 19
PA G E
PA G E
PA G E
PA G E
PA G E
1
M0115-01 • 02/11/16 • © 2016 Hunter Fan Company
What to Expect with Your Installation www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Read and Save These Instructions

This product conforms to UL Standard 507.
If you are unfamiliar
with wiring, use a WARNINGS
qualified electrician. w.1 - To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or personal injury,
mount fan directly from building structure and/or an outlet box marked
30 inches acceptable for fan support of 70 lbs (31.8 kg) and use the mounting
from blade tip screws provided with the outlet box.
to nearest wall w.2 - To avoid possible electrical shock, before installing or servicing your
fan, disconnect the power by turning off the circuit breakers to the outlet
or obstruction 7 feet box and associated wall switch location. If you cannot lock the circuit
breakers in the off position, securely fasten a prominent warning device,
from bottom such as a tag, to the service panel.
edge of blade w.3 - To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or motor damage, use only
Must be able to to the floor Hunter Solid State Speed Controls.
w.4 - To reduce the risk of personal injury, do not bend the blade brackets when
secure the fan to installing the blade brackets, balancing the blades, or cleaning the fan. Do not
building structure or insert foreign objects in between rotating fan blades.
fan-rated outlet box Know your wiring Assess location
CAUTIONS
c.1 - All wiring must be in accordance with national and local electrical codes
ANSI/NFPA 70. If you are unfamiliar with wiring, use a qualified electrician.
You may need a c.2 - Use only Hunter replacement parts.
friend to help you. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
Check box to see
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
fan weight Caution: modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
2 and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Tools Needed www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Ladder Pliers Wire Strippers Screwdrivers
Power Drill 9/64” Drill Bit

(optional) (optional)
If mounting to a support structure, you will also need these tools.
3
Ceiling Plate www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Bumper
r
owe
rnP
Tu
OFF
Use wood screws (included) when securing

to support structure with approved electrical
outlet box. Drill 9/64” pilot holes in support
Make sure all four bumpers are structure to aid in securing ceiling plate with
still attached. hardware found in the hardware bag.
To avoid possible electrical shock, before installing your fan,

disconnect the power by turning off the circuit breakers to the
outlet box associated with the wall switch location. Refer to warning w.1 on pg. 2
4
Top Housing www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Top Housing
Canopy
Trim Ring
Adapter
Adapter
Thread the wires through the Place the top housing onto the Rest the trim ring on the top Place the canopy on the top
top housing. motor housing so that the holes housing. housing. Ensure all four screw
in the top housing lineup with holes line up with the screw
the holes in the motor housing holes in both the top housing
and the adapter. and the adapter.
5
Top Housing (continued) www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
CUT
STRIP
3/8”
&
(not to scale)
8”
Grounding
Top Housing Screw
Screws
Install the top housing screws. Install The wires can be cut, but leave at
the grounding screw in the smaller least 8” extending from the top of
screw hole. These screws can be found the canopy.
in the hardware bag.
8” 3/8”
6
Hanging the Fan www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Ceiling
Plate Hook
Ceiling
Plate
Hook
Raise the fan and align the slots in the Place the slots over the ceiling plate
canopy with the hooks on the ceiling plate. hooks to hang the fan.
Note: To hang the fan, you must tilt the
canopy to an almost vertical position so that
the canopy slots sit on the ceiling plate hooks.
Note: Fan style may vary.

7
Wiring Note: To connect the wires, hold
www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
the bare metal leads together and

place a wire connector over them, CEILIN
OM G
then twist clockwise until tight. FR
Receiver
(grounding)
green/yellow stripe
Using an orange
wire connector from
the hardware
bag, connect the
3 grounding wires
(green, green/
yellow stripe, or bare
copper) coming
green
from the ceiling and
ceiling plate.
Place the receiver inside the canopy
E
FR
AT
OM PL
CEILING
Turn the splices upward and push them carefully back through the hanger bracket
into the outlet box. Spread the wires apart, with the grounded wires on one side of
Refer to CAUTION c.1 on pg. 2 the outlet box and the ungrounded wires on the other side of the outlet box.
8
www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
RECEIV OM CEILING
OM ER
FR FR
Using the orange wire connectors Using the orange wire connectors
yellow
blue
(ungrounded)
black
white (grounded)
from the remote control hardware bag: from the hardware bag:
OM FAN
FR
• Connect the yellow wire from • Connect the black (ungrounded)
the receiver to the black wire wire from the ceiling to the black
from the fan. wire from the receiver.
white
• Connect the blue wire from the • Connect the white (grounded)
receiver to the blue wire (or wire from the ceiling to both the
possibly black with white stripe black white wire from the receiver and
blue
black
white
wire) from the fan. the white wire from the fan.
FR
FRO OM ER
M FA N RECEIV
Turn the splices upward and push them carefully back through the hanger bracket
into the outlet box. Spread the wires apart, with the grounded wires on one side of
Refer to CAUTION c.1 on pg. 2 the outlet box and the ungrounded wires on the other side of the outlet box.
9
Canopy www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Ceiling
Plate Hooks
Canopy
Screw
Screw Canopy
Holes Screw
Swing the fan up to align the canopy Hold the canopy up with the screw Partially install a canopy screw, found
screw holes with the mounting holes on holes aligned. Partially install two in the hardware bag, between the
the ceiling plate. canopy screws, found in the ceiling plate hooks. When all the holes
Note: The slots in the canopy must hardware bag, into the holes opposite are properly aligned, securely tighten all
remain engaged while swinging the the ceiling plate hooks. three canopy screws.
canopy for alignment.
10
Canopy (continued) www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Canopy
Trim Ring
Using both hands, push the canopy trim ring up

to the top of the canopy. The canopy trim ring will
snap and lock into place.
Note: Should you need to remove the trim ring,
press firmly on opposite sides of the trim ring. The
tabs will flex out releasing the canopy trim ring.
11
Blades www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Attach each blade to a blade iron using three

blade washers, found in the hardware
bag, and three blade assembly screws, found
in the hardware bag.
12
Switch Housing www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Screw two housing assembly screws from Feed the wire plug through the center Insert the third screw, found in the
the hardware bag halfway into the hole of the upper switch housing, then hardware bag, into place and then tighten
motor housing. It does not matter which wrap keyhole slots around the screws and all three screws.
two screw holes you choose. twist counterclockwise.
Make sure the upper switch housing is securely

attached to the mounting plate. Failure to properly
secure all 3 assembly screws could result in the switch
housing fixture falling.
13
Light Kit www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Screw two housing assembly screws from Connect the plugs from the upper Install the third switch housing screw.
the hardware bag halfway into the and lower switch housings. Make sure Tighten all three screws securely.
upper switch housing. It does not matter to line up the colored markings on
which two screw holes you choose. the connectors.Wrap light kit keyhole
slots around the screws and twist
counterclockwise.
Make sure the lower switch housing is securely attached to

the upper switch housing. Failure to properly secure all three
assembly screws could result in the light fixture falling.
14
Light Kit (continued) www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Tab
Notch
Install a bulb into each of the sockets. Lift the globe and align the notches in the
When necessary, replace with bulbs of the globe with the tabs in the light kit. Attach
same type and wattage. the glass bowl to the light kit by twisting it
clockwise until it snaps into place.
15
Remote Control www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
er
Pow
Switch Cover Plate rn
Tu
ON
Battery
Door
Phillips CONGRA
Head Removed Rocker- Style YOU’RETULATIONS!
Screw Tabs Plate DONE!
To access the battery compartment, remove To install the transmitter cradle, remove the
the small Phillips head screw that secures the two screws holding the switch cover plate. Do
battery door to the transmitter assembly. The not remove the cover plate. Orient the cradle
battery should be installed with the positive by lining up the two mounting holes with
(+) side up. Replace with a CR2032 battery those on the cover plate. Insert and tighten
when necessary. the screws. Do not over tighten. See next page for fan
Note: For rocker-style cover plates, break off operation instructions.
the tabs by pushing outward.
16
Operation, Maintenance, & Cleaning www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Medium
Speed
Fan High
Off Speed
Light
Low Reverse
Speed Switch
To turn on fan, press a fan speed button. The remote transmitter should already be paired To switch the direction of air flow, move the
Speeds range from off (0) to high (3). Quickly to the receiver and ready to use. reverse switch to the opposite position. You
press the Light button to turn the lights off Note: If your need to pair your remote, turn fan will need to remove the glass to do so.
and on. Hold the Light button to raise and power off and back on at the wall switch. Within 3
dim the light level. minutes, press and hold both the Fan Off button
and the High button for 4 seconds to pair the
remote. To prevent faulty operation, please
ensure all other ceiling fans within range are
turned off at the wall switch while pairing.
17
Operation, Maintenance, & Cleaning (continued) www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Safe-Exit
The Safe-Exit Program gives you about thirty
seconds of light when you turn the lights off
to exit the room before the lights go out. To
use Safe-Exit:
• Press the Fan Off button for at least three

seconds to initiate the Safe-Exit Mode.
• The lights will flash for visual

confirmation.
• The lights will stay on 50% brightness for

15 seconds and then begin to dim. After
a total of 30 seconds, the lights will be
completely off.
Changing the bulbs - carefully When cleaning the fan, use soft brushes
remove the globe. Unscrew bulbs or cloths to prevent scratching. Cleaning
and replace with bulbs of the same products may damage the finishes.
wattage. Reinstall the globe.
18
Troubleshooting www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326
Fan doesn’t work Excessive wobbling Noisy operation Lights dim when turned on or
• Make sure power switch is on. • Tighten all of the blade and • Tighten the blade and blade do not turn on at all.
blade iron screws until they iron screws until they are snug. • Make sure the wattage of the
• Pull the pull chain to make sure are snug. light bulbs installed matches
it is on. • Check to see if any of the the specifications on the light
• Turn the power off, support blades are cracked. If so, replace sockets.
• Push the motor reversing switch the fan carefully, and check all of the blades.
firmly left or right to ensure that that the hanger ball is
it is engaged. properly seated.
• Check the circuit breaker to • Use the provided balancing
ensure the power is turned on. kit and instructions to balance
the fan.
• Make sure the blades spin freely.
• Turn off power from the circuit

breaker, then loosen the canopy
and check all the connections Remote control of fan is erratic If you have multiple remotes or
according to the wiring diagram • Make sure the battery is multiple remote-controlled fans
on pages 9-10. installed correctly. installed on the same circuit
breaker and you are experiencing
• Check the plug connection in • Install a fresh battery. interference or faulty operation of
the switch housing. your remote controls, please go to
www.HunterFan.com/FAQs
Transmitter only works when and click “How do I properly install
held at close range multiple remote-controlled fans?”
for information on how to correct
• Change battery.
this issue.
19
Article Information Sheet
Product name: Lithium Manganese Dioxide Button Cell Printing date: 05-Aug-2019
Article Information Sheet (AIS)

This Article Information Sheet (AIS) provides relevant battery information to retailers, consumers, OEMs and other users
requesting a GHS‐compliant SDS. Articles, such as batteries, are exempt from GHS SDS classification criteria. The GHS
criteria is not designed or intended to be used to classify the physical, health and environmental hazards of an article.
Branded consumer batteries are defined as electro‐technical devices. The design, safety, manufacture, and qualification of
Energizer branded consumer batteries follow ANSI and IEC battery standards.
1. DOCUMENT INFORMATION
Product name: Lithium Manganese Dioxide Button Cell
Model: CR2032
Issue Date: 05-Aug-2019
2. COMPANY INFORMATION
Company name(China) DONGGUAN TUOBU ELECTRONIC CO., LTD
Address: No.A, Building6, BinheRoad, TianxinQuarter, HuangjiangTown, Dongguan,
Guangdong
E-mail: FREEGOBATTERY@126.COM
Telephone: +86-755-25867899
3. ARTICLE INFORMATION
Description Lithium Manganese Dioxide Button Cell
Use Lithium Primary/Metal Batteries
Brand ----
Image
4. ARTICLE CONSTRUCTION
IMPORTANT NOTE: The battery should not be opened or burned. Exposure to the ingredients contained within or
their combustion products could be harmful.
Chemical name CAS No. Concentration%
Manganese Dioxide 1313‐13‐9 32.8
Lithium 7439‐93‐2 2.04
Iron 7439‐89‐6 52.78
Propylene carbonate 108‐32‐7 4.13
1,3-Dioxolane 646-06-0 4
Lithium perchlorate 7791‐03‐9 4.25
-- Page 1 / 4 --
5. HEALTH AND SAFETY

Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting. Rinse mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Never give
anything by mouth to an unconscious person. Call a physician or poison control center
immediately.
Inhalation: Remove to fresh air. If breathing has stopped, give artificial respiration. Get medical attention
immediately. Do not use mouth-to-mouth method if victim ingested or inhaled the
substance; give artificial respiration with the aid of a pocket mask equipped with a one-way
valve or other proper respiratory medical device. If breathing is difficult, (trained personnel
should) give oxygen. Delayed pulmonary edema may occur. Get medical attention
immediately if symptoms occur.
Skin contact: Wash off immediately with soap and plenty of water while removing all contaminated
clothes and shoes. Immediate medical attention is required. May cause an allergic skin
reaction.
Eye contact: Rinse immediately with plenty of water, also under the eyelids, for at least 15 minutes. Keep
eye wide open while rinsing. Do not rub affected area. Remove contact lenses, if present and
easy to do. Continue rinsing. Seek immediate medical attention/advice.
Self-protection of the Ensure that medical personnel are aware of the material(s) involved, take precautions to
first aider: protect themselves and prevent spread of contamination. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Avoid direct contact with skin. Use barrier to give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation.
Use personal protective equipment as required. Wear personal protective clothing (see
section 8).
6. FIRE HAZARD & FIREFIGHTING

Fire Hazard Batteries may rupture or leak if involved in a fire.
Extinguishing Media Use any extinguishing media appropriate for the surrounding area.
Special hazards arising In case of fire where lithium batteries are present, flood area with water or smother with a
from the chemical Class D fire extinguishant appropriate for lithium metal, such as Lith-X. Water may not
extinguish burning batteries but will cool the adjacent batteries and control the spread of
fire. Burning batteries will burn themselves out. Virtually all fires involving lithium batteries
can be controlled by flooding with water. However, the contents of the battery will react with
water and form hydrogen gas. In a confined space, hydrogen gas can form an explosive
mixture. In this situation, smothering agents are recommended. A smothering agent will
extinguish burning lithium batteries.
Precautions for Emergency Responders should wear self-contained breathing apparatus. Burning lithium
fire-fighters manganese dioxide batteries produce toxic and corrosive
lithium hydroxide fumes.
7. HANDLING AND STORAGE

Storage Store in a cool, well ventilated area. Elevated temperatures can result in shortened battery
life. In locations that handle large quantities of
-- Page 2 / 4 --
lithium batteries, such as warehouses, lithium batteries should be isolated from unnecessary
combustibles.
Handling Avoid mechanical and electrical abuse. Do not short circuit or install incorrectly. Batteries
may rupture or vent if disassembled, crushed, recharged or exposed to high
temperatures. Install batteries in accordance with equipment instructions.
Spills of Large Quantities Notify spill personnel of large spills. Irritating and flammable vapors may be released from
Batteries (unpackaged) leaking or ruptured batteries. Spread batteries apart to stop shorting. Eliminate all
ignition sources. Evacuate area and allow vapors to dissipate. Clean-up personnel should
wear appropriate PPE to avoid eye and skin contact and inhalation of vapors or fumes.
Increase ventilation. Carefully collect batteries and place in appropriate container for
disposal. Remove any spilled liquid with absorbent material and contain for disposal.
8. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Dispose of used (or excess) batteries in compliance with federal, state/provincial and local regulations. Do not
accumulate large quantities of used batteries for disposal as accumulations could cause batteries to short-circuit. Do not
incinerate. In countries, such as Canada and the EU, where there are regulations for the collection and recycling of
batteries, consumers should dispose of their used batteries into the collection network at municipal depots and
retailers. They should not dispose of batteries with household trash.
9. Transport information
The transportation of primary lithium cells and batteries is regulated by the International Civil Aviation Organization,
International Air Transport Association, International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code and the US Department of
Transportation. The batteries must meet the following criteria for shipment: 1. Air shipments must meet the
requirements listed in Special Provision A45 of the International Air Transport Association Dangerous Goods Regulations.
2. Meet the requirements for the US Department of Transportation listed in 49 CFR 173.185. 3. The transport of
primary lithium batteries is prohibited aboard passenger aircraft. Refer to the Federal Register December 15, 2004
(Hazardous Materials; Prohibited on the Transportation of Primary Lithium Batteries and Cells Aboard Passenger
Aircraft; Final Rule)
Lithium batteries shipped as "Lithium batteries", "Lithium batteries packed with equipment", or "Lithium batteries
contained in equipment" may not be classified as "Dangerous Goods" when shipped in accordance with "special
provision A45 of IATA-DGR" or "special provision 188 of IMO-IMDG Code"
(a) UN number 3480&3481
(b) UN Proper shipping name LITHIUM ION BATTERIES (including lithium ion polymer
batteries) or;
LITHIUM ION BATTERIES CONTAINED IN EQUIPMENT or
LITHIUM ION BATTERIES PACKED WITH EQUIPMENT (including
lithium ion polymer batteries)
(c) Transport hazard class(es) 9
(d) Packing group (if applicable) IA
(e) Marine pollutant (Yes/No) No
(f) Transport in bulk (according to Annex II of No information available.
MARPOL 73/78 and the IBC Code)
-- Page 3 / 4 --
(g) Special precautions No information available.

(h) Organizations governing the transport of lithium Area Method Organization Special
batteries Provision
U.S.A Air, Rail, DOT 49 CFR
Road, Marine Section
173.185
10. REGULATORY INFORMATION

(a) Safety, health and environmental regulations specific for the product in question
USA EU Japan Korea China Canada
CAS No.
TSCA EINECS ENCS ECL IECSC DSL
1313‐13‐9 Listed Listed Not Listed Listed Listed Listed
7439‐93‐2 Listed Listed Listed Listed Listed Listed
7439‐89‐6 Listed Listed Listed Listed Listed Listed
108‐32‐7 Not Listed Listed Not Listed Not Listed Not Listed Not Listed
646-06-0 Not Listed Not Listed Listed Not Listed Listed Not Listed
7791‐03‐9 Not Listed Not Listed Not Listed Not Listed Not Listed Not Listed
11. OTHER INFORMATION

TSCA: Toxic Substances Control Act, The American chemical inventory.
DSL Domestic Substances List
EINECS: European Inventory of Existing Commercial chemical Substances
ENCS Japanese Existing and New Chemical Substances
ECL: Existing Chemicals List, the Korean chemical inventory.
IECSC: Inventory of existing chemical substances in China.
Because all of our batteries are defined as "articles", they are exempted from the requirements of the Hazard
Communication Standard. The information in this AIS is provided all the relevant data fully and truly. However, the
information is provided without any warranty on their absolute extensiveness and accuracy. This AIS was prepared to
provide safety preventive measures for the users who have got professional training. The personal user who obtained
this AIS should make independent judgment for the applicability of this AIS under special conditions. In these special
cases, we do not assume responsibility for the damage.
------------------------- End of the AIS -------------------------
-- Page 4 / 4 --
8.9 Lighting Type “A” Spec 2.2 Luminaires

LED Luminaire General Electric RX Series
LED Luminaire General Electric RLX Series
Note: RX Series LED Luminaire has been discontinued. RXL Series Luminaire is the new product
from General Electric which will replace the discontinued product line of RX Series.
Lumination™ LED Luminaires
Project name _________________
Date ________________________
RX Series Downlights Type ________________________
Product Description: Product Dimensions:

The Lumination RX Series LED downlights are the ideal retrofit solution
for traditional 1 or 2-lamp CFL downlights. They install in just minutes into
most 6-inch and 8-inch CFL rough-in frames and bring a fresh look to the
space. Unlike plug-in LED lamps, the RX downlight give you a new power
supply and 50,000 hour life rating, so that you won’t have to worry
about compatibility or maintenance issues with the original ballasts.
All downlights in the RX family have 120-277V input and a uniform lit
appearance, delivering premium performance in an economical package.
Targeted Performance Summary:

Distribution Patterns: Wide
Delivered Lumen Output: 1000, 1500, 2000, 3000
System Input Power: 14W, 19.5W, 25W, 36W
System Efficacy (LPW): 71-83 C
Input Voltage: 120-277V
Standard Dimming Controls: Non-Dimming D
CCT: 3000K, 3500K & 4000K
CRI: 82
Lifetime Rating: L70 @ 50,000 hours B
Input Frequency (Hz): 60Hz 6 Inch:
Power Factor: >0.9 A = 7.75” [196.8 mm] B = 4.5” [114.2 mm]
Mounting Options: Spring clips clamp on to existing frame or directly to ceiling C = 24.0” [609.6 mm] D = 6” [152.4 mm]
Weight: 0.6 lb 8 Inch:
A
IC Rating: Non-IC Rated A = 9.75” [247.6 mm] B = 5.1” [129.4 mm]
Limited Warranty: 5 years system C = 24.0” [609.6 mm] D = 6” [152.4 mm]
Files Available: LM79, LM80, IES
Listings: • UL and cUL Listed.

• Suitable for damp locations.
Ordering Information: Quick Ship Program Available!

DESCRIPTION RECESSED CCT CRI MAXIMUM VOLTAGE WATTS LPW
CAN SIZE LUMENS
RX610830MV 6” 3000K 82 1000 120-277V 14 71

RX610835MV 6” 3500K 82 1000 120-277V 14 71
RX610840MV 6” 4000K 82 1000 120-277V 14 71
RX810830MV 8” 3000K 82 1000 120-277V 14 71
RX810835MV 8” 3500K 82 1000 120-277V 14 71
RX810840MV 8” 4000K 82 1000 120-277V 14 71
RX815830MV 8” 3000K 82 1500 120-277V 19.5 77
RX815835MV 8” 3500K 82 1500 120-277V 19.5 77
RX815840MV 8” 4000K 82 1500 120-277V 19.5 77
RX820830MV 8” 3000K 82 2000 120-277V 25 80
RX820835MV 8” 3500K 82 2000 120-277V 25 80
RX820840MV 8” 4000K 82 2000 120-277V 25 80
RX830830MV 8” 3000K 82 3000 120-277V 36 83
RX830835MV 8” 3500K 82 3000 120-277V 36 83
RX830840MV 8” 4000K 82 3000 120-277V 36 83
SKU CATALOG# DESCRIPTION

93018829 GRRC6RPTWT RX6” Goof Ring (OD 8.9”) 5 per pack
93018831 GRRC8RPTWT RX8” Goof Ring (OD 10.6”) 5 per pack
Photometric Data: LuminationTM RX Series Downlights
RX610835MV-PUBLISH.IES
ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION
RC 80% 70% 50% 30% 10% 0%
Zone Lumens
RW 70% 50% 30% 10% 70% 50% 30% 10% 50% 30% 10% 50% 30% 10% 50% 30% 10% 0%
0-10° 45.28 0 119 119 119 119 116 116 116 116 111 111 111 106 106 106 102 102 102 100
10-20° 128.47 1 111 107 103 100 108 105 101 99 100 98 96 97 95 93 93 91 90 88
20-30° 191.06 2 102 95 90 85 100 94 88 84 90 86 82 87 83 80 84 81 78 76
30-40° 217.35 3 95 86 79 73 92 84 78 72 81 76 71 78 74 70 76 72 69 67
40-50° 194.77 4 87 77 69 63 85 76 69 63 73 67 62 71 66 61 69 64 61 59
50-60° 130.45 5 81 70 62 56 79 69 61 55 67 60 55 65 59 54 63 58 54 52
60-70° 58.96 6 75 63 55 49 74 62 55 49 61 54 49 59 53 48 58 52 48 46
70-80° 26.73 7 70 58 50 44 69 57 49 44 56 49 44 54 48 43 53 47 43 41
80-90° 6.38 8 66 53 45 40 64 52 45 40 51 44 40 50 44 39 49 43 39 37
90-100° 0.03 9 61 49 41 36 60 48 41 36 47 41 36 46 40 36 45 40 36 34
100-110° 0.03 10 58 45 38 33 56 45 38 33 44 37 33 43 37 33 42 37 33 31
110-120° 0.04
120-130° 0.06 NOTE: Floor Cavity Reflectance : 20%
130-140° 0.09 ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA (CANDELA/m2) POLAR GRAPH
140-150° 0.11
Zone Lumens % of Fixture Gamma 0° 45° 90° 480
150-160° 0.10
160-170° 0.07 0-20° 173.75 17.40 45° 182507 182586 182564 360
170-180° 0.02 0-30° 364.80 36.50 55° 129254 129299 129343
0-40° 582.16 58.20 240
65° 67939 67939 67902 2
0-60° 907.38 90.70 75° 49999 50078 50216 120
0-80° 993.07 99.30 85° 28738 28329 29848
0-90° 999.45 99.90
RX820835MV-PUBLISH.IES
ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY COEFFICIENTS OF UTILIZATION
RC 80% 70% 50% 30% 10% 0%
Zone Lumens
RW 70% 50% 30% 10% 70% 50% 30% 10% 50% 30% 10% 50% 30% 10% 50% 30% 10% 0%
0-10° 88.00 0 119 119 119 119 116 116 116 116 111 111 111 106 106 106 102 102 102 100
10-20° 250.24 1 111 107 103 100 108 105 102 99 101 98 96 97 95 93 93 92 90 88
20-30° 373.80 2 102 96 90 85 100 94 88 84 90 86 82 87 83 80 84 81 79 77
30-40° 437.77 3 95 86 79 73 92 84 78 72 81 76 71 79 74 70 76 72 69 67
40-50° 408.07 4 87 77 69 63 85 76 68 63 73 67 62 71 66 61 69 64 61 59
50-60° 273.31 5 81 70 62 56 79 68 61 55 66 60 55 65 59 54 63 58 54 52
60-70° 110.22 6 75 63 55 49 73 62 55 49 61 54 49 59 53 48 57 52 48 46
70-80° 45.22 7 70 58 50 44 68 57 49 44 55 49 44 54 48 43 53 47 43 41
80-90° 12.64 8 65 53 45 40 64 52 45 39 51 44 39 50 44 39 49 43 39 37
90-100° 0.02 9 61 49 41 36 60 48 41 36 47 40 36 46 40 35 45 39 35 34
100-110° 0.03 10 57 45 38 33 56 45 37 33 44 37 32 43 37 32 42 36 32 31
110-120° 0.06
120-130° 0.11 NOTE: Floor Cavity Reflectance : 20%
130-140° 0.16 ZONAL LUMEN SUMMARY LUMINANCE DATA (CANDELA/m2) POLAR GRAPH
140-150° 0.18
Zone Lumens % of Fixture Gamma 0° 45° 90° 932
150-160° 0.17
160-170° 0.12 0-20° 338.25 16.90 45° 266136 266196 266346 699
170-180° 0.04 0-30° 712.05 35.60 55° 188753 188759 188889
0-40° 1149.82 57.50 466
65° 86295 86220 86354 2
0-60° 1831.2 91.60 75° 58284 58366 58407 233
0-80° 1986.64 99.30 85° 43727 44376 45714
0-90° 1999.28 100.00
Product Specifications: 1
Construction: Optical System:

• 16 gauge Aluminum spinning reflector housing, powder coating • Custom engineered reflectors for wide distributions.
• Custom engineered heat sink flange for passive cooling on all lumen options • Semi-diffuse diffuser for ideal combination of optical efficiency and uniformity
Installation: Electrical System:
• Fixture mounting to an existing metal frame • High efficiency drivers, non-dimming
• Conduit connect to quick-disconnect for easy installation
For more information and access to all of our resources, including our
design tool visit: www.gelighting.com
www.gelighting.com
GE and the GE Monogram are trademarks of the General Electric Company. All other trademarks are the property
of their respective owners. Information provided is subject to change without notice. All values are design or typical
values when measured under laboratory conditions. GE Lighting is a business of the General Electric Company.
© 2016 GE.
IND191 (Rev 05/26/16)
Installation Guide
IND259 | A-1028951
Lumination® LED Luminaire

RC/LRC/RX/LRX Series - New Construction Installation
BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Read these instructions completely and carefully.
WARNING / AVERTISSEMENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK RISQUES DE DÉCHARGES ÉLECTRIQUES
• Turn power off before inspection, installation or removal. • Coupez l’alimentation avant d’inspecter, installer ou déplacer le luminaire.
• Properly ground electrical enclosure. • Assurez-vous de correctement mettre à la terre le boîtier d’alimentation électrique.
RISK OF FIRE RISQUES D’INCENDIE
• Follow all NEC and local codes. • Respectez tous les codes NEC et codes locaux.
• Use only UL approved wire for input/output connections. • N’utilisez que des fils approuvés par UL pour les entrées/sorties de connexion.
Minimum size 18 AWG (0.75mm2). Taille minimum 18 AWG (0.75mm2).
• Do not install insulation within 3 inches (76 mm) of luminaire top. • Maintenir une distance de 76 mm (3 pouces) entre le luminaire et l’isolant.
Save These Instructions Prepare Electrical Wiring

Use only in the manner intended by the manufacturer.
If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer. Electrical Requirements
• The LED luminaire must be connected to the mains
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is supply according to its ratings on the product label.
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause • Class 1 wiring should be in accordance with NEC.
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAN ICES-005(A)/NMB-005(A)
Grounding Instructions
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the • The grounding and bonding of the overall system
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
shall be done in accordance to local electric code of
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial the country where the luminire is installed.
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Lumination® RC/LRC/RXLRX Series Installation Guide
Provided Components
The components have been properly packed to avoid damage during transit. Inspect the components to confirm there is no physical
damage. Do not install damaged components.
Option A: If no holes are present on short side, use #8-1/2” self-drilling

screws
Option B: If holes are present on the short side, use the screws provided
with the frame.
Fixture Ceiling Hole Frame Installation

Diameter Diameter
LRXR4 4.9-5.2in
RC6/LRC6 6.4-7.2in
RX6/ 5.91-6.60in
LRXR6/
LRXGR6
RC8/LRC8 7.5-8.9in
RX8/LRXR8 7.68-8.27in
LRXR10 10.2-11.0in
LRXR12 12.2-13.0in
Place side L-brackets on existing frame Slide hanger bars

1
Cut the appropriate size 2 screws and tighten with screwdriver on 3 through adjustable
hole into the ceiling tile.
both sides of the frame. Then attach mounting brackets.
Ensure frame hole diameter
mounting brackets to both L-brackets with
matches fixture diameter.
provided wing nuts.
Option A: Mount fixture by attaching hanger bars to T-Grid Adjust fixture height to be flush with ceiling and tighten
4 ceiling (BH3 SKU 94890) 5 mounting bracket wing nuts.
Option B: Mount fixture with 1.2” EMT conduit (not supplied)
2
RC/LRC-Series Mounting
(RX-Series skip to step 15. LRXR and LRXG - Series, skip to step 18.
For additional information, refer to RC-series or LRC-series Installation Guides
Open RC/LRC PSU box cover, disconnect AC conduit. Remove AC conduit wire from PSU box knockout hole using
6 flat head screwdriver.
Insert AC line wires into the PSU box through

7 the knockout hole and connect wires (see
wiring diagrams to the right)
3
Place PSU box onto frame next to unused Take the provided safety tether and loop one
8 junction box and secure with U-bracket by 9 end of the tether around the L-bracket.
tightening wing nut.
Place PSU box onto frame next to unused Plug together the light fixture to the driver
10 junction box and secure with U-bracket by 11 enclosure with the supplied quick connects and
tightening wing nut. assemble the connector housing once finished.
Cut cable tie on light fixture Align the fixture so that two of the three springs are on each
12 13 side of the L-bracket. This is necessary in order to make
sure that when the springs release, the L-bracket does not
interfere and prevent the springs from making contact with
the top of the ceiling for proper support.
4
Push fixture through the hole in the ceiling. This will

14 engage the protruding arms, thus, releasing the springs.
The springs will draw the fixture up into the ceiling and
hold it tightly in place.
RX Series Mounting
Connect AC line to existing junction box. Connect conduit fitting to the existing junction box. Connect the black,
15 white, and green/yellow wires of the input leads to the black, white and green AC line wires using UL Listed twist-
on wire connectors and close the junction box (see wiring diagram).
Connect the two quick connectors and reassemble Load springs into an upright position by twisting
16 the connector box. 17 the springs upware. Carefully insert the fixture into
the frame hole. Ensure fixture is secure.
5
LRX Series Mounting
Connect conduit end with input leads to existing

18 junction box and make proper connections. Connect
the black, white and green/yellow wire of the input
leads to the black, white and green wires using twist-on
wire connectors and close junction box.
Optional dimmer: When connecting a dimming

controller, wires must be run through another separate
knockout hole. Connect the violet (dimming +) and
gray (dimming - ) wires to the violet and gray wires of
the fixture.
For dimming device compatibility for 0-10V and phase
Note: Cap unused dimming leads with wire nuts cut dimming, please refer to:
www.gecurrent.com/dimming
Adjusting Lumen Output

19 (for compatible fixtures only)
Note:
For 1000/650lm luminaires, the default lumen output is 1000lm. Push the switch up to activate the 650lm setting.
For 4000/3000lm luminaires, the default lumen output is 4000lm. Push the switch up to activate teh 3000lm setting.
6
Note: For 10inch and 12inch adjustable lumen fixtures,

the default lumen output is set to 6000lm. Push switch
left to activate 5000lm and 4000lm respectively.
20 Adjusting CCT
(for compatible fixtures only)
Note: The cover of the CCT switch can be used as a tool

Note: for switching CCT settings more easily.
For 2700K/3000K/3500K, default output CCT is 3000K. Push
switch UP to activate 2700K or DOWN to select 3500K.
For 3500K/4000K/5000K, default output CCT is 4000K.
Push switch UP to select 3500K and DOWN to select 5000K
7
22
Note: Applicable only to 10in and 12 in Fixtures Connect the two quick connectors and reas-
21 Affix the hook of the safety tether onto the bracket of semble the connector box.
the frame kit.
23
Load springs into an upright position by twisting
the springs upward a. Carefully insert the fixture
24 Once installed, LRX Gimbal downlight’s light
engine can be rotated up to 359° horizontally
into the hole of the rough-in frame. Verify that and tilted up to 35° vertically.
the reflector trim is flush to the ceiling.
Note: it is recommended to use gloves while
handling and adjusting the Gimbal light engine
to prevent dirt and oils from contaminating the
surface of the luminaire.
www.gecurrent.com
© 2020 Current Lighting Solutions, LLC. All rights reserved. GE and the GE monogram are trademarks of the
General Electric Company and are used under license. Information provided is subject to change without
notice. All values are design or typical values when measured under laboratory conditions.
IND259 (Rev 12/18/20) A-1028951
Installation Guide
IND300 | A-1098951
Lumination® LED Luminaire

LRX Series - Retrofit Installation
BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Read these instructions completely and carefully.
WARNING / AVERTISSEMENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK RISQUES DE DÉCHARGES ÉLECTRIQUES
• Turn power off before inspection, installation or removal. • Coupez l’alimentation avant d’inspecter, installer ou déplacer le luminaire.
• Properly ground electrical enclosure. • Assurez-vous de correctement mettre à la terre le boîtier d’alimentation électrique.
RISK OF FIRE RISQUES D’INCENDIE
• Follow all NEC and local codes. • Respectez tous les codes NEC et codes locaux.
• Use only UL approved wire for input/output connections. • N’utilisez que des fils approuvés par UL pour les entrées/sorties de connexion.
Minimum size 18 AWG (0.75mm2). Taille minimum 18 AWG (0.75mm2).
• Do not install insulation within 3 inches (76 mm) of luminaire top. • Maintenir une distance de 76 mm (3 pouces) entre le luminaire et l’isolant.
Save These Instructions Prepare Electrical Wiring

Use only in the manner intended by the manufacturer.
If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer. Electrical Requirements
• The LED luminaire must be connected to the mains
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is supply according to its ratings on the product label.
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause • Class 1 wiring should be in accordance with NEC.
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAN ICES-005(A)/NMB-005(A)
Grounding Instructions
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the • The grounding and bonding of the overall system
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
shall be done in accordance to local electric code of
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial the country where the luminire is installed.
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Lumination® LRX Series Installation Guide
Provided Components Component List

The components have been properly packed to avoid damage • LRX G Gimbal Downlight
during transit. Inspect the components to confirm there is no • Installation Instructions
physical damage. Do not install damaged components.
Luminaire Installation
Before installation, verify that the existing junction
box and bracket are metal construction, designed
similarly to Illustration 1A.
Fixture Fixture Existing Suitable Fixture

Size Type Hole Size
4 Round 4.20-5.50 LRXR4XXXXXXX
4 Square 4.20-5.50 LRXS4XXXXXXX
LRX Series is compatible only with Round
6 Gimbal 5.91-6.50 LRXGR6XXXXXXX rough-in plates.
1
Ensure that the power to the unit is turned off. Use Remove existing lamps, fixture and ballast. Leave
proper lockout/tagout procedures. 2 wiring in junction box. Verify that the AC supply line
is provided with a ground wire connected to the
luminaire.
2
Disassemble the quick disconnection box (con- Connect conduit end with input leads to existing
3 nector box) and unplug the two quick connec- 4 junction box and make the proper connections.
tors inside. Make all electrical connections using twist-on wire
connectors. Securely close the junction box.
Optional Dimmer: When connecting a dimming Note: Phase cut dimmers must be wired to the power feed
controller, low-voltage dimming wires must route “hot” line (L). For 0-10V and phase cut dimming compatibility,
through a separate knockout. Connect the violet please visit:
(dimming +) and gray (dimming -) wires to the
violet and gray fixture wires. www.gecurrent.com/dimming
Note: Cap all unused dimming leads with wire nuts
3
5 Adjusting Lumen Output

Note:
For 1000/650lm luminaires, the default lumen output is 1000lm. Push the switch up to activate the 650lm setting.
For 4000/3000lm luminaires, the default lumen output is 4000lm. Push the switch up to activate teh 3000lm setting.
Note: For 10inch and 12inch adjustable lumen fixtures,

the default lumen output is set to 6000lm. Push switch
left to activate 5000lm and 4000lm respectively.
6 Adjusting CCT
Note: Note: The cover of the CCT switch can be used as a tool
For 2700K/3000K/3500K, default output CCT is 3000K. for switching CCT settings more easily.
Push switch up to activate 2700K, push the switch
down to activate 3500K.
For 3500K/4000K/5000K, default output CCT is 4000K.
Push switch UP to select 3500K or DOWN to select
5000K
4
7 Firmly connect the two quick connectors and 8 Load springs into an upright position by
reassemble the connector box. twisting the springs upward a. Carefully insert
the fixture into the hole of the rough-in frame.
Verify that the reflector trim is flush to the
ceiling.
Once installed, LRX Gimbal downlight’s light engine can

be rotated up to 359° horizontally and tilted up to 35°
vertically.
Note: it is recommended to use gloves while handling

and adjusting the Gimbal light engine to prevent dirt
and oils from contaminating the surface of the luminaire.
www.gecurrent.com
© 2020 Current Lighting Solutions, LLC. All rights reserved. GE and the GE monogram are trademarks of the
General Electric Company and are used under license. Information provided is subject to change without
notice. All values are design or typical values when measured under laboratory conditions.
IND300 (Rev 12/18/20) A-1028591
8.10 Lighting Type B and C, SPEC 2.2 Luminaires

Lighting Lithonia Lighting BL WP 2’
Lithonia Lighting BL WP 4’
Catalog
Number
DIGITAL NAVIGATION Notes

Ordering Tree nLight Platform Sensor Switch JOT Photometrics Performance Data
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS Type

INTENDED USE — The BLWP LED Wrap/ Wall bracket expands the BLT family with the features and
aesthetics of the popular BLT and BLTR center basket design with a clean, versatile style and volumetric
distribution. High efficacy LED light engines deliver energy savings and low maintenance compared to
traditional sources. An extensive selection of configurations and options make the BLWP the perfect Low Profile LED Wraparound
choice for many lighting applications including schools, offices, stairwells and other commercial spaces.
BLWP
With multiple mounting options, easy installation, and controls configurations, the BLWP is an excellent
choice for renovation and new construction.
CONSTRUCTION — BLWP enclosure components are die-formed for dimensional consistency. For 2'
and 4' product, hinged door frame allows easy access to electrical components and mounting locations
without having to remove additional parts. For 8' product, suspension aircraft cables allow easy access
to electrical components and mounting locations without having to remove additional parts. Available
in three paint finishes: white (pre-paint), painted after fabrication white, and natural aluminum. 2', 4' and 8' Lengths
Diffusers are extruded from impact modified acrylic for increased durability. Optional polycarbonate
lens available for additional impact resistance, as well as Tamper Proof screws.
OPTICS — Volumetric illumination is achieved by creating an optimal mix of light to walls, partitions
and vertical and horizontal work surfaces – rendering the interior space, objects and occupants in a
more balanced, complimentary luminous environment. High performance extruded acrylic diffusers
conceal LEDs and efficiently deliver light in a volumetric distribution. Five diffuser choices available -
curved and square designs with ribbed, a smooth frosted finish, and a smooth polycarbonate finish.
ELECTRICAL — Long-life LEDs, coupled with high-efficiency drivers, provide superior quantity
and qualityof illumination for extended service life. 80% LED lumen maintenance at 60,000 hours TM
(L80/60,000). Replaces 2 lamp fluorescent.

Configurable BLWP: Available in High Efficiency (HE) versions for applications where a lower wattage
(over the standard product) is required. The High Efficiency versions deliver >130 LPW and can be
specified via the Lumen Package designations in the Ordering Information on page 2.
Specifications 5.50
eldoLED driver options deliver choice of dimming range, and choices for control, while assuring flicker-
free, low-current inrush, 89% efficiency and low EMI. 2' Dimensions
Optional integrated nLight®controls make each luminaire addressable - allowing it to digitally Length: 24 (60.96)
communicate with other nLight enabled controls such as dimmers, switches, occupancy sensors and Width: 5.50 (13.97) 3.50
photocontrols. Connection to nLight is simple. It can be accomplished with integrated nLight AIR wireless Depth: 3.50 (8.89)
or through standard Cat-5 cabling. nLight offers unique plug-and-play convenience as devices and
luminaires automatically discover each other and self-commission, while nLight AIR is commissioned
easily through an intuitive mobile app. 4' Dimensions
Lumen Management: Unique lumen management system (option N80) provides on board intelligence Length: 48 (121.92)
that actively manages the LED light source so that constant lumen output is maintained over the system Width: 5.50 (13.97)
life, preventing the energy waste created by the traditional practice of over-lighting. 3.50
Depth: 3.50 (8.89)
Driver disconnect provided where required to comply with US and Canadian codes.
CONTROLS — Integrated sensor (individual control): Sensor Switch MSD7ADCX (Passive infrared
(PIR)) or MSDPDT7ADCX (PIR/Microphonics Dual Tech (PDT)) integrated occupancy sensor/automatic 8' Dimensions
dimming photocell allows the luminaire to power off when the space is unoccupied or enough ambient Length: 96 (243.84)
light is entering the space. Width: 5.50 (13.97)
Integrated Sensor (nLight Wired Networking): This sensor is nLight-enabled, meaning it has Depth: 3.50 (8.89)
the ability to communicate over an nLight network. When wired, using CAT-5 cabling, with other
nLight-enabled sensors, power packs, or WallPods, an nLight control zone is created. Once linked to a All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise specified.
Gateway, directly or via a Bridge, the zone becomes capable of remote status monitoring and control
via SensorView software. See page 5 for the nLight sensor options.
Integrated Smart Sensor (nLight AIR Wireless Platform): The rES7 sensor is nLight AIR enabled,
meaning it has the ability to communicate over the wireless nLight control platform. It is available
with an automatic dimming photocell, and either a digital PIR or dual technology occupancy sensor.
It pairs to other luminairs and wall switches through our mobile app, CLAIRITY PRO, which allows for
simple sensor adjustment. See page 5 for more details on the Integrated Smart Sensor.
Integrated Wireless Sensor (single room control): Sensor Switch VERTEX JOT or JOTVTX15 luminaire-
embedded occupancy and ambient light sensor allows the luminaire to power off when the space is
unoccupied or when enough ambient light is entering the space. See page X for more details on the integrated
Capable Luminaire
wireless sensor. This item is an A+ capable luminaire, which has been designed and tested to provide
INSTALLATION — Intended for surface or suspend mounting. For row mounting and quick mounting to consistent color appearance and out-of-the-box control compatibility with simple
junction boxes see accessories section. Suitable for damp location. commissioning.
LISTINGS — CSA Certified to meet U.S. and Canadian standards. • All configurations of this luminaire meet the Acuity Brands’ specification for
DesignLights Consortium® (DLC) Premium qualified product. Not all versions of this product may be DLC chromatic consistency
Premium qualified. Please check the DLC Qualified Products List at www.designlights.org/QPL to confirm • This luminaire is part of an A+ Certified solution for nLight® or control networks
which versions are qualified. marked by a shaded background*
WARRANTY — 5-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at: • This luminaire is part of an A+ Certified solution for nLight control networks,
www.acuitybrands.com/support/warranty/terms-and-conditions
providing advanced control functionality at the luminaire level, when selection
Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application. includes driver and control options marked by a shaded background*
All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25 °C.
Specifications subject to change without notice. To learn more about A+, visit www.acuitybrands.com/aplus.
*See ordering tree for details
COMMERCIAL INDOOR BLWP

Page 1 of 13
BLWP Low Profile LED Wraparound
A+ Capable options indicated
by this color background.
ORDERING INFORMATION Lead times will vary depending on options selected. Consult with your sales representative. Example: BLWP4 40L ADP GZ10 LP840
Series Lumens ‡ Lens/Diffuser Driver Driver Color Temperature

Standard Efficiency High Efficiency ‡ ADP Curved, ribbed (blank) MVOLT EZ1 eldoLED dims LP830 82CRI, 3000K
BLWP2 2' LED Wraparound (>100 LPW) (>130 LPW) ADSM Curved, smooth 120 120V to 1% (0-10v LP835 82CRI, 3500K
8L 800 Lumens 8LHE 800 Lumens dimming)
SDP Square, ribbed 277 277V LP840 82CRI, 4000K
20L 2000 Lumens 20LHE 2000 Lumens GZ1 Generic dims
SDSM Square, smooth 347 347V ‡ to 1% (0-10v LP850 82CRI, 5000K
33L 3300 Lumens 33LHE 3300 Lumens dimming) ‡
PDSM Curved, smooth LP930 90CRI, 3000K
40L 4000 Lumens 40LHE 4000 Lumens polycarbonate ‡ GZ10 Generic dims LP935 90CRI, 3500K
48L 4800 Lumens 48LHE 4800 Lumens Diffusers w/ trim rings to 10% (0-10v
dimming) ‡ LP940 90CRI, 4000K
BLWP4 4' LED Wraparound 15L 1500 Lumens 15LHE 1500 Lumens ADPT Curved, ribbed
20L 2000 Lumens 20LHE 2000 Lumens SLD Step-level LP950 90CRI, 5000K
ADSMT Curved, smooth dimming ‡
30L 3000 Lumens 30LHE 3000 Lumens
SDPT Square, ribbed
SDSMT Square, smooth
PDSMT Curved, smooth
60L 6000 Lumens 60LHE 6000 Lumens polycarbonate ‡
BLWP8 8' LED Wraparound 40L 4000 Lumens 40LHE 4000 Lumens
nLight Interface ‡ Control ‡

nLight Wired nLight Wired
(blank) no nLight® interface (blank) no nLight control Individual Control
N80 nLight with 80% lumen NES7 nLight™ nES 7 PIR integral occupancy sensor ‡ MSD7ADCX PIR integral
management NESPDT7 nLight™ nES PDT 7 dual technology integral occupancy control ‡ occupancy sensor
N80EMG nLight with 80% lumen with automatic
NES7ADCX nLight™ nES 7 ADCX PIR integral occupancy sensor with automatic dimming photocell ‡ dimming control
management. For use
with generator supply EM NESPDT7ADCX nLight™ nES PDT 7 dual technology integral occupancy sensor with automatic dimming photocell ‡ photocell ‡
power ‡ MSDPDT7ADCX PDT integral
N100 nLight without lumen nLight Wireless occupancy sensor
management (blank) no nLight control with with automatic
dimming control
N100EMG nLight without lumen RES7 nLight AIR PIR integral occupancy sensor with automatic dimming photocell for Networking Capabilities photocell ‡
management. For use Individual Control ‡
with generator supply EM JOT Wireless room
RES7PDT nLight AIR PIR integral occupancy sensor with automatic dimming photocell for Zone Control ‡ control with “Just
power ‡
RIO nLight AIR radio module without sensor ‡ One Touch” pairing ‡
RES7EM nLight AIR PIR integral occupancy sensor with automatic dimming photocell and UL924 Emergency JOTVTX15 Wireless occupancy
nLight Wireless Operation, via power interrupt detection ‡ sensor with “Just One
(blank) no nLight® interface RES7PDTEM nLight AIR microphonics dual technology occupancy sensor with automatic dimming photocell & UL924 Touch” pairing ‡
NLTAIR2 nLight AIR Generation 2 Emergency Operation, via power interrupt detection ‡
enabled ‡ RIOEM nLight AIR radio module less sensor, with UL924 Emergency Operation, via power interrupt detection ‡
Standby mode ‡ Options Finish

(blank) Fixture with embedded sensor turns E10WLCP EM Self-Diagnostic battery pack, 10W QMB Quick Mount Bracket ‡ (blank) Standard pre-paint white
off when unoccupied Constant Power, Certified in CA Title TRS Tamper Resistant Screw ‡ PAF Paint After Fabrication
DIM10 Fixture with embedded sensor dims to 20 MAEDBS White
GLR Fast-blowing fuse ‡
approximately 10% light output when EL7L 700 nominal lumens battery pack ‡ DNA Paint After Fabrication
unoccupied ‡ GMF Slow-blowing fuse ‡
EL14L 1400 nominal lumens battery pack ‡ Natural Aluminum
DIM50 Fixture with embedded sensor dims to FAO Field Adjustable Output ‡
BGTD Bodine Generator Transfer Device ‡ PLR__ Plug-in wiring, see page 8 for ordering
approximately 50% light output when
unoccupied ‡ USPOM US Point of Manufacture information ‡
NOC Occupancy sensor disabled ‡ PLR1LVG Plug-in wiring,low voltage dimming ‡
NOTE: ‡ indicates option value has ordering restrictions. Please reference the Option Value Ordering Restictions chart on the next page. Options are sorted alphanumerically.
See Stock configurations, Accessories and footnotes on page 4.
BLWP
Commercial Indoor: One Lithonia Way, Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-705-SERV (7378) www.lithonia.com © 2018-2021 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 04/13/21
Page 2 of 13
‡ Option Value Ordering Restrictions
Option value Restriction
347 Not available with E10WLCP, EL7L, EL14L, BGTD or BLWP4 > 85L/ 85LHE.
BLWPCR, BLWPCRDNA, BLWP8CR, BLWP8CRDNA Cannot be used to continuous row mount 4' fixtures with 8' fixtures.
BGTD Not available with JOT sensor options or emergency battery options. Must specify voltage. Requires BSE labeling, voltage specific. Consult factory for options.
Example: BGTD BSE10.
DIM10, DIM50 Not available with NLTAIR2 or JOT sensor option. Requires occupancy control. Must be ordered with nLight Wired or Individual Control sensor option.
EL7L, EL14L Only available on BLWP8, 8ft length version of this fixture, in lumen packages 140L or less.
FAO EZ1 driver required. Not available with USPOM, FAO or lumen packages > 6000LM. FAO is not available with other integrated controls options and restricts the
use of external dimming controls. See chart on page 5 for additional details.
GLR, GMF Must specify voltage. 120 or 277, with GLR and GMF fusing.
GZ1, GZ10 Not available with any Control or Sensor options except JOT & JOTVTX15
JOT, JOTVTX15 Not available with SLD, NLIGHT, NLTAIR2, NOC, USPOM or FAO. Available only on 4' versions with ADPT and ADMST trim options; not available with > 72L or
72LHE lumen packages.
Lumens Approximate lumen output. For high Efficiency, all versions may not achieve 130+ LPW including 90CRI and versions with integral sensor trim. Refer to
photometry on www.acuitybrands.com. See QPL for latest DLC listings.
MSD7ADCX, MSDPDT7ADCX Must select Lens/Diffuser type with Trim Rings. Not available with nLight interface. 0-10V wires are not accessible via access plate.
N80EMG, N100EMG Requires a connection to existing nLight network. Power is provided from a separate NLIGHT enabled fixture or external power pack.
NES7, NESPDT7, NES7ADCX, NESPDT7ADCX Must select Lens/Diffuser type with Trim Rings. Requires N80, N80EMG, N100, or N100EMG. Only available with EZ1 driver.
NLTAIR2 Must select nLight wireless control. Not available with JOT or JOTVTX15
NOC Not available with JOT sensor options. Can only be ordered in conjunction with EZ1, NLTAIR2, RES7/RES7PDT. Occupancy sensor disabled at factory but can be
re-enabled upon commissioning.
PDSM, PDSMT Not available with HE (high efficiency) performance package on BLWP2 and BLWP4 only.
PLR__, PLR1LVG Not available with BLWP2. PLR1LVG is not available with Controls options or nLight interface.
QMB Not available with BLWP2 (2') or BLWP8 (8') fixture.
RES7, RES7PDT, RIO, RES7EM, RES7PDTEM, RIOEM Must select Lens/Diffuser type with Trim Rings. Requires EZ1 and NLTAIR2 to be specified. Only available with 60L or lower lumen packages on the BLWP4. Only
available with 100LHE/80L lumen packages or lower on the BLWP8.
SLD Not available with any nLight Interface or Control options. Cannot be used with PLR1LVG
TRS Accessory BLWP TRS T15 BIT available to be ordered with this option. See Accessories section page 3. Order as separate item.
Non-Configurable BLWP:
Stock/MTO Ci code Catalog Description UPC Lumens Wattage LPW Color Temperature Voltage Pallet QTY
*264V2M BLWP2 20L ADP LP835 191848282045 1942 17 117 3500 K 120-277 80
*264V2L BLWP2 20L ADP LP840 191848282038 1973 17 119 4000 K 120-277 80
*264CH0 BLWP2 33L ADP LP835 191848080825 3332 30 112 3500 K 120-277 80
MTO
*264CH1 BLWP2 33L ADP LP840 191848080832 3345 30 112 4000 K 120-277 80
*264CH2 BLWP2 40L ADP LP835 191848080849 3923 37 105 3500 K 120-277 80
*264CH4 BLWP2 40L ADP LP840 191848080856 4117 37 110 4000 K 120-277 80
*264V2K BLWP4 30L ADP LP835 191848282021 3065 25 123 3500 K 120-277 70
*264V2H BLWP4 30L ADP LP840 191848281994 3114 25 125 4000 K 120-277 70
*264CH5 BLWP4 40L ADP LP835 191848080863 4391 35 127 3500 K 120-277 70
STOCK
*264CH6 BLWP4 40L ADP LP840 191848080870 4263 35 123 4000 K 120-277 70
*264CH7 BLWP4 48L ADP LP835 191848080900 5137 40 129 3500 K 120-277 70
*264CH8 BLWP4 48L ADP LP840 191848080917 5205 40 131 4000 K 120-277 70
BLWP
Page 3 of 13
Accessories: Order as separate catalog number.
PART number CI CODE QTY Description Application

CONTINUOUS ROW MOUNT BRACKET FOR ROW
BLWP8/4CR *272PFG 1 FOR USE TO MOUNT BLWP8 TO BLWP4, FOR STD FINISH AND PAF
CONNECTING BLWP4 and BLWP8 WHT
BLWPCR *250A0S 1 CONTINUOUS ROW MOUNT BRACKET WHT FOR USE ON BLWP4 ONLY, FOR STD FINISH AND PAF ‡
BLWPCRDNA *250A1S 1 CONTINUOUS ROW MOUNT BRACKET DNA FOR USE ON BLWP4 ONLY, FOR DNA FINISH ‡
BLWP8CR *2543C6 1 CONTINUOUS ROW MOUNT BRACKET WHT FOR USE ON BLWP8 ONLY, FOR STD FINISH AND PAF ‡
BLWP8CRDNA *2543CA 1 CONTINUOUS ROW MOUNT BRACKET DNA FOR USE ON BLWP8 ONLY, FOR DNA FINISH ‡
BLWPCG36 F1 *264R3P 1 BLWPCG36 F1 ADJUSTABLE AIRCRAFT CABLE GRIPPER KIT, 36 INCH F1 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCG36 F2 *264R4G 1 BLWPCG36 F2 CABLE GRIPPER KIT, 36 INCH F2 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCG72 F1 *264R4H 1 BLWPCG72 F1 CABLE GRIPPER KIT, 72 INCH F1 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCG72 F2 *264R4M 1 BLWPCG72 F2 CABLE GRIPPER KIT, 72 INCH F2 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGF36 F1 *264R4R 1 BLWPCGF36 F1 KIT WITH POWER FEED 36 INCH F1 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGF36 F2 *264R4U 1 BLWPCGF36 F2 KIT WITH POWER FEED 36 INCH F2 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGF72 F1 *264R4V 1 BLWPCGF72 F1 KIT WITH POWER FEED 72 INCH F1 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGF72 F2 *264R4X 1 BLWPCGF72 F2 KIT WITH POWER FEED 72 INCH F2 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGE36 F1 *264R50 1 BLWPCGE36 F1 KIT WITH EMERGENCY POWER FEED 36 INCH F1 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGE36 F2 *264R5T 1 BLWPCGE36 F2 KIT WITH EMERGENCY POWER FEED 36 INCH F2 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGE72 F1 *264R5V 1 BLWPCGE72 F1 KIT WITH EMERGENCY POWER FEED 72 INCH F1 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGE72 F2 *264R53 1 BLWPCGE72 F2 KIT WITH EMERGENCY POWER FEED 72 INCH F2 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGFD36 F1 *269V4M 1 BLWPCGFD36 F1 KIT WITH 0-10V DIMMING POWER FEED 36 INCH F1 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGFD36 F2 *269V5C 1 BLWPCGFD36 F2 KIT WITH 0-10V DIMMING POWER FEED 36 INCH F2 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGFD72 F1 *269V5N 1 BLWPCGFD72 F1 KIT WITH 0-10V DIMMING POWER FEED 72 INCH F1 CEILING TYPE
BLWPCGFD72 F2 *269V5X 1 BLWPCGFD72 F2 KIT WITH 0-10V DIMMING POWER FEED 72 INCH F2 CEILING TYPE
BLWP TRS T15 BIT *2516KU 1 BLWP TRS T15 BIT T15 WITH PIN, TORX BIT FOR TRS OPTION
QUICK MOUNT BRACKET FOR INSTALLATION TO JUNCTION BOXES WITHOUT
BLWPQMB *250A2S 1 BLWP Quick Mount Bracket
HAVING TO REMOVE ANY PARTS IN THE FIXTURE, 4FT FIXTURE ONLY.
nLight® Wired Control Accessories:

Order as separate catalog number. Visit www.acuitybrands.com/products/controls/nlight.
WallPod stations Model number Occupancy sensors Model number

On/Off nPODM [color] Small motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech) nCM 9 RJB / nCM PDT 9 RJB
On/Off & raise/lower nPODM DX [color] Large motion 360°, ceiling (PIR / dual tech) nCM10 RJB / nCM PDT 10 RJB
Graphic touchscreen nPOD GFX [color] Wall switch with raise/lower nWSX PDT LV DX [color]
Photocell controls Model number Cat-5 cable (plenum rated) Model number
Full range dimming nCM ADCX RJB 10' cable CAT5 10FT J1
30' cable CAT5 30FT J1
nLight® AIR Control Accessories:

Order as separate catalog number. Visit www.acuitybrands.com/products/controls/nlightair.
Wall switches Model number

On/Off single pole rPODB [color] G2
On/Off two pole rPODB 2P [color] G2
On/Off & raise/lower single pole rPODB DX [color] G2
On/Off & raise/lower two pole rPODB 2P DX [color] G2
On/Off & raise/lower single pole rPODBZ DX WH G2
BLWP
Page 4 of 13
Replacement Parts: Order as separate catalog number.
2' Version Replacement Lens 4' Version Replacement Lens 8' Version Replacement Lens
*264F5E DBLWP24 ADP *264F69 DBLWP48 ADP *2543CE DBLWP96 ADP
*264F5F DBLWP24 SDP *264F6E DBLWP48 SDP *2543CG DBLWP96 SDP
*264F5H DBLWP24 ADSM *264F6F DBLWP48 ADSM *2543CJ DBLWP96 ADSM
*264F5J DBLWP24 SDSM *264F6G DBLWP48 SDSM *2543CM DBLWP96 SDSM
*264F5L DBLWP24 ADPT *264F6H DBLWP48 ADPT *2543CN DBLWP96 ADPT
*264F5P DBLWP24 SDPT *264F6K DBLWP48 SDPT *2543CP DBLWP96 SDPT
*264F5U DBLWP24 ADSMT *264F6L DBLWP48 ADSMT *2543CR DBLWP96 ADSMT
*264F5W DBLWP24 SDSMT *264F6N DBLWP48 SDSMT *2543CS DBLWP96 SDSMT
*264F66 DBLWP24 PDSM *264F6W DBLWP48 PDSM *2543CW DBLWP96 PDSM
*264F67 DBLWP24 PDSMT *264F6X DBLWP48 PDSMT *2543CX DBLWP96 PDSMT
FAO SETTINGS (Field Adjustable Output)

0-10 Voltage % Lumen Output % Wattage
Dimmer (approximate) (approximate)
Step 8 Full Output 100% 100%
Step 7 9.0 VDC 98% 100%
Step 6 8.0 VDC 88% 86%
Step 5 7.0 VDC 86% 82%
Step 4 6.0 VDC 82% 80%
Step 3 5.0 VDC 76% 75%
Step 2 4.0 VDC 71% 72%
Step 1 3.0 VDC 67% 71%
Simple adjustment of output through the use of a flat head screwdriver.
JOT Wireless
Sensor Switch JOT Enabled Wireless Solution

Designed with contractors in mind, the Sensor Switch JOT enabled wireless solution offers a straightforward
approach to the installation and pairing of lighting fixtures and controls. Absolutely no 0-10V control wires and no
mobile apps are needed with JOT enabled products, allowing for lightning speed installation right out of the box.
1. Power: Install JOT enabled fixtures and controls as instructed.

2. Pair: Insert the pairing tool into the pinhole on the wall switch; press and hold any button for 6 seconds.
3. Play: Once paired, each fixture will individually dim down to 10% brightness. All products will be fully functional.
BLWP Series BLWP series

with integrated
JOT OCC Sensors
Sensor Switch Sensor Switch

WSXA JOT SPODMRA JOT
BLWP
Page 5 of 13
nLight Platform
nLight embedded fixtures offer: Customers get:

Manual Dimming Convenience and visual comfort for occupants
Motion Sensing and/or Daylight Harvesting Energy savings and code compliance
Fixture or Group Level Control Ability to configure lighting to the space requirements
Flexibility Ease of fixture moves, adds and changes
Wireless Wall Switch (nLight AIR Only) Ease and flexibility of placement
Astronomical and Time of Day Scheduling Energy savings and building security
Scalable Solution nLight controls to grow with your business
Future-Ready nLight platform to set foundation for future upgrades and capabilities
nLight Air Wireless
H N H N H N
BLWP Series
Simple as 1,2,3
1. Install the nLight® AIR fixtures with embedded smart sensor
2. Install the wireless battery-powered wall switch
3. With CLAIRITY app, pair the fixtures with the wall switch
and if desired, customize the sensor settings for the desired
outcome nLight AIR rPODBA Mobile Device
nLight Wired Networking
H N H N H N
CAT5e
BLWP Series
Simple as 1,2,3
1. Install the nLight® Wired fixtures with embedded control
2. Install the nLight Wired wall switch
3. Connect the fixtures using standard CAT5e cables and the devices
will automatically discover each other and work (plug and play) nLight Wired nPODMA
BLWP
Page 6 of 13
Basic nLight Zone
Sensor Options
Automatic Occupancy Sensing nLight Wired nLight AIR
Option
Dimming Photocell PIR PDT Networking Networking
MSD7ADCX X X
MSDPDT7ADCX X X
NES7 X X
NES7ADCX X X X
NESPDT7 X X
NESPDT7ADCX X X X
RES7 X X X
RES7PDT X X X X
Integrated Sensor with Individual Control nLight Wired Networking

The MSD7ADCX PIR occupancy sensor/automatic dimming photocell is ideal for areas without The nES 7 is ideal for small rooms without obstructions or areas with primarily walking
obstructions and where daylight harvesting may be desired. Suggested applications include, but motion. Ideal areas include hallways, corridors, storage rooms, and breakrooms.
not limited to, hallways, corridors, storage rooms, and breakrooms or other areas where people Additionally, the NES7ADCX includes an integrated photocell, which enables daylight
are typically moving. harvesting controls.
The MSDPDT7ADCX PIR/Microphonics Dual Tech occupancy sensor/automatic dimming photocell is For areas like restrooms, private offices, open offices, conference rooms or any space
ideal for areas with obstructions and where daylight harvesting is desired. Suggested applications with obstructions, the nES PDT 7 dual technology sensor is recommended. The nES PDT 7
include, but not limited to, open offices, private offices, classrooms, public restrooms, and utilizes both PIR (passive infrared) and Microphonics technologies to detect occupancy.
conference rooms. Additionally, the NESPDT7ADCX includes an integrated photocell, which enables daylight
harvesting controls which is ideal for areas where windows are present.
Sequence of
SEQUENCE OFOperation
OPERATION Sequence of
SEQUENCE OFOperation
OPERATION
MOTION NO MOTION MOTION MOTION NO MOTION MOTION
MAX MAX
Occupants Room Sensor Occupants Room Sensor

Detected In Unoccupied Detects Detected In Unoccupied Detects
LIGHT LEVEL
LIGHT LEVEL
The Space Motion The Space Motion
MIN MIN
LIGHTS ON 17.5 MIN 2.5 MIN AT LIGHTS OFF LIGHTS ON LIGHTS ON 7.5 MIN 2.5 MIN AT LIGHTS OFF LIGHTS ON
TIME DELAY A 1% LEVEL TIME DELAY A 1% LEVEL
*The presetting on the automatic dimming photocell is 5fc. *The presetting on the automatic dimming photocell is 5fc.
Sensor Coverage Pattern

Mini 360° Lens
• Recommended for walking motion detection from mounting heights between 8 ft (2.44 m) nLight AIR Wireless
and 20 ft (6.10 m) nLight AIR is the ideal solution for retrofit or new construction spaces where adding
• Initial detection of walking motion along sensor axes at distances of 2x the mounting additional wiring can be labor intensive and costly. nLight AIR is available with or without
height up to 15 ft (4.57 m) and an integral sensor. The integrated rES 7 or rES7 PDT smart sensor is part of each luminaire
• 1.75x up to 20 ft (6.10 m). in the nLight AIR network, which can be grouped to control multiple luminaires. The
granularity of control with the digital PIR occupancy detection and daylight sensing makes
• Provides 12 ft (3.66 m) radial detection of small motion when mounted at 9 ft (2.74 m) a great solution for any application.
• Initial detection will occur earlier when walking across sensor’s field of view than when
walking directly at sensor
9 FT Mounting H N H N H N
5.5 18
4.6 15
3.7 12
2.7 9
1.8 6 BLWP Series
0.9 3
0m 0 ft Simple as 1,2,3
0.9 3
1.8 6 1. Install the nLight® AIR fixtures with embedded smart sensor
2.7 9 2. Install the wireless battery-powered wall switch
3.7 12
4.6 15 3. With CLAIRITY PRO app, pair the fixtures with the wall switch and if
5.5 18 desired, customize the sensor settings for the desired outcome
nLight AIR rPODB 2P DX Mobile Device
BLWP
Page 7 of 13
MOUNTING INFORMATION
For unit or row installation; surface or suspend mounting. Accessory Images
(QMB) Quick Mount Bracket

Suspension Methods: Quick Mount Bracket allows easy installation to junction boxes
Aircraft Cable Suspension without having to remove any parts in the fixture.
Order one BLWPCG_, BLWPCGF_, or BLWPCGE_ required for each suspension point.
F1 for use with most T-bar and screw slot grid ceiling applications. Designed for on-grid and off-grid
installations.
F2 for use with recessed or surface-mount horizontal J-box applications..
See Accessories page on page 3 for part numbers configurations.
Note: 2' and 8' configurations not available with QMB accessory.
BLWPCR - continuous row mount bracket

Order one (1) BLWPCR bracket per fixture for continuous row ap-
plications. Order one hanger(Aircraft Cable Suspension Kit or Stem
Suspension Kit) per fixture plus one per joiner required.
Stem Suspension
Individual installation — Two single-stem hangers required.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2
REVISIONS
NOTES: REV. ECR# DESCRIPTION
XX XX XXXXX
1. Note: 2' configurations with emergency option cannot be stem mounted.
DIMENSIONS
All dimensions are inches (centimeters) unless otherwise noted.
CABLE HANGER
ATTACHMENT HOLES
ENDPLATE
24.00(61) 48.00(122)
21.54(55) 45.54(116)
Quick Mount(QMB) 43.50(111)
19.50(50) 3.75(10)
q 3.75(10) (Optional) q
5.30(14)
ENDPLATE
DETAIL A SCREW
nLight CAT5 connection .875 K.O. TYPICAL nLight CAT5 connection

2' DIMENSIONS 4' DIMENSIONS
96.00(244)
93.58(238)
91.53(233)
48.00(122)
2.00(5)
29.17(74)
q
5.30(14) A
8' DIMENSIONS
nLight CAT5 connection
BLWP
Page 8 of 13
PHOTOMETRICS
BLWP2 33L ADP LP835, 3332 delivered lumens, test no. ISF 37666, tested in accordance to IESNA LM-79.
180°
Coefficients of Utilization
pf 20%
90°
CP Summary pc 80% 70% 50% Zonal Lumen Summary
80° 0° 90 pw 70%50%30% 50%30%10% 50%30%10% Zone Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
0° 1024 1024 0 117 117 117 114 114 114 107 107 107 0° - 30° 790 23.7 23.7
200
5° 1009 1027 1 106 100 96 97 93 89 92 88 85 0° - 40° 1286 38.6 38.6
15° 962 982 2 96 87 79 84 78 72 79 74 69 0° - 60° 2278 68.4 68.4
400 60°
25° 867 910 3 87 76 67 74 66 59 70 63 57 0° - 90° 3096 92.9 92.9
35° 745 809 4 79 67 58 65 57 50 62 54 49 90° - 120° 184 5.5 5.5
RCR
600 45° 604 694 5 73 60 51 58 50 43 55 48 42 90° - 130° 210 6.3 6.3
55° 456 567 6 67 54 45 52 44 38 50 42 37 90° - 150° 233 7.0 7.0
800 65° 303 436 7 62 49 40 48 39 33 45 38 32 90° - 180° 236 7.1 7.1
40° 75° 158 309 8 58 44 36 43 35 30 41 34 29 0° - 180° 3332 100.0 100.0
1000 85° 36 202 9 54 41 32 40 32 27 38 31 26
0° 20° 90 0 161 10 51 38 30 37 29 24 35 28 24
0° 90°
180°
pf 20%
90°
200 0° 1210 1210 0 117 117 117 114 114 114 107 107 107 0° - 30° 932 23.8 23.8
5° 1190 1219 1 106 100 96 97 93 89 92 88 85 0° - 40° 1519 38.7 38.7
400 15° 1130 1178 2 96 87 80 84 78 72 80 74 69 0° - 60° 2687 68.5 68.5
60°
25° 1019 1100 3 87 76 67 74 66 60 70 63 58 0° - 90° 3646 92.9 92.9
600 35° 870 990 4 80 67 58 65 57 50 62 55 49 90° - 120° 215 5.5 5.5
RCR
45° 706 856 5 73 60 51 58 50 43 55 48 42 90° - 130° 246 6.3 6.3

800 55° 527 711 6 67 54 45 52 44 38 50 42 37 90° - 150° 273 7.0 7.0
65° 352 560 7 62 49 40 48 39 33 45 38 32 90° - 180° 277 7.1 7.1
1000 40° 75° 179 8 58 44 36 43 35 30 41 34 29 0° - 180° 3923 100.0 100.0
406
85° 37 268 9 54 41 32 40 32 27 38 31 26
1200
0° 20° 90 1 214 10 51 38 30 37 29 24 35 28 24
0° 90°
180°
pf 20%
90°
80° 0° pw 70%50%30% 50%30%10% 50%30%10% Zone Lumens % Lamp % Fixture
200 0° 1324 0 117 117 117 114 114 114 107 107 107 0° - 30° 1028 23.4 23.4
5° 1321 1 106 100 95 97 93 89 92 88 85 0° - 40° 1681 38.3 38.3
400 15° 1274 2 96 87 79 84 77 72 79 74 69 0° - 60° 2991 68.1 68.1
60°
25° 1180 3 87 76 67 74 66 59 70 63 57 0° - 90° 4082 93.0 93.0
600
35° 1043 4 79 67 58 65 57 50 62 54 49 90° - 120° 249 5.7 5.7
RCR
800 45° 881 5 73 60 50 58 49 43 55 48 42 90° - 130° 282 6.4 6.4

55° 705 6 67 54 44 52 44 37 50 42 36 90° - 150° 307 7.0 7.0
1000 65° 521 7 62 48 40 47 39 33 45 38 32 90° - 180° 309 7.0 7.0
40° 75° 343 8 58 44 36 43 35 29 41 34 29 0° - 180° 4391 100.0 100.0
1200 9 54 41 32 40 32 26 38 31 26
85° 191
0° 20° 90 138 10 51 37 29 37 29 24 35 28 23
0°
180°
pf 20%
90°
0° 1528 1528 0 117 117 117 114 114 114 107 107 107 0° - 30° 1188 23.1 23.1
300
5° 1517 1528 1 105 100 95 97 93 89 91 88 84 0° - 40° 1944 37.8 37.8
15° 1447 1488 2 95 86 79 84 77 71 79 73 69 0° - 60° 3464 67.4 67.4
600 60°
25° 1311 1398 3 87 75 67 73 65 59 69 62 57 0° - 90° 4754 92.5 92.5
35° 1129 1267 4 79 67 57 65 56 50 61 54 48 90° - 120° 308 6.0 6.0
RCR
900 45° 913 1102 5 73 59 50 58 49 43 55 47 41 90° - 130° 349 6.8 6.8

55° 691 920 6 67 53 44 52 43 37 49 42 36 90° - 150° 381 7.4 7.4
1200 65° 460 731 7 62 48 39 47 39 33 45 37 32 90° - 180° 383 7.5 7.5
40° 75° 233 540 8 58 44 35 43 35 29 41 34 28 0° - 180° 5137 100.0 100.0
85° 52 370 9 54 40 32 39 32 26 38 31 26
1500
0° 20° 90 1 300 10 51 37 29 36 29 24 35 28 23
0° 90°
BLWP
Page 9 of 13
PHOTOMETRICS
BLWP8 40L ADP LP835, 4113 delivered lumens, test no. ISF 37290P226.
180°
pf 20%
90°
200 0° 1263 1263 0 117 117 117 114 114 114 107 107 107 0° - 30° 979 23.8 23.8
5° 1246 1263 1 106 100 95 97 93 89 92 88 85 0° - 40° 1593 38.7 38.7
400 15° 1197 1223 2 96 87 79 84 77 72 79 74 69 0° - 60° 2811 68.4 68.4
60°
25° 1083 1134 3 87 76 67 74 66 59 70 63 57 0° - 90° 3825 93.0 93.0
600 35° 928 1011 4 79 67 58 65 57 50 62 54 49 90° - 120° 233 5.7 5.7
RCR
45° 750 871 5 73 60 51 58 50 43 55 48 42 90° - 130° 263 6.4 6.4
800
55° 558 722 6 67 54 45 52 44 38 50 42 37 90° - 150° 286 7.0 7.0
1000 65° 378 564 7 62 49 40 48 39 33 45 38 32 90° - 180° 288 7.0 7.0
40° 75° 200 410 8 58 44 36 43 35 30 41 34 29 0° - 180° 4113 100.0 100.0
1200 85° 57 278 9 54 41 32 40 32 27 38 31 26
0° 20° 90 9 221 10 51 38 30 37 29 24 35 28 24
0° 90°
BLWP8 60L ADP LP835, 6033 delivered lumens, test no. ISF 37290P386.
180°
pf 20%
90°
300 0° 1853 1853 0 117 117 117 114 114 114 107 107 107 0° - 30° 1437 23.8 23.8
5° 1827 1853 1 106 100 95 97 93 89 92 88 85 0° - 40° 2336 38.7 38.7
600 15° 1756 1794 2 96 87 79 84 77 72 79 74 69 0° - 60° 4124 68.4 68.4
60°
25° 1588 1664 3 87 76 67 74 66 59 70 63 57 0° - 90° 5611 93.0 93.0
900 35° 1361 1483 4 79 67 58 65 57 50 62 54 49 90° - 120° 342 5.7 5.7
RCR
45° 1101 1277 5 73 60 51 58 50 43 55 48 42 90° - 130° 386 6.4 6.4

1200 6 67 54 45 52 44 38 50 42 37 90° - 150° 420 7.0 7.0
55° 819 1059
65° 555 828 7 62 49 40 48 39 33 45 38 32 90° - 180° 423 7.0 7.0
1500 40° 75° 294 601 8 58 44 36 43 35 30 41 34 29 0° - 180° 6034 100.0 100.0
1800 85° 84 408 9 54 41 32 40 32 27 38 31 26
0° 20° 90 13 323 10 51 38 30 37 29 24 35 28 24
0° 90°
PRODUCT INFORMATION Wiring

Advanced plug-in system with three-circuit capability. Available on industrial and strip products and a variety of architectural
PLR
products mounted in continuous rows. 1, 2, 3 and 4-lamp fixtures. PLR22 (2-circuit) and PLR33 (3-circuit) crossover harness switches
hot circuit serving next fixture in row. Reduces fixture types on job for alternating circuit applications (see example below.)
Easy one-step installation, saves up to 35% on labor costs. Expanded switching flexibility helps save energy.
Rows can be 50% longer with two-circuit systems. Polarized, lock-together nylon connectors prevent miswiring in the field. #12
THHN conductor, rated 600V, 90°C. White neutral wire included. Grounding accomplished by fixture in-row connectors.
CSA certified systems available with up to 2 circuits. G ground required.
Advanced 3-Circuit Plug-In
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
ORDERING INFORMATION Lead times will vary depending on options selected. Consult with your sales representative.
Series Number of hot wires Branch circuits Dimming Ground

PLR (blank) Not required for 22 or 33 Circuits to which ballast is connected Emergency circuit connected LV Low-voltage (blank) No ground
PLR22 1 Black (blank) Not required for 22 or 33 (blank) No emergency circuit dimming in PLR
PLR33 2 Black and red A Black wire ELA Emergency circuit wired to black wire G Ground.
Maximum
3 Black, red and blue B Red wire ELB Emergency circuit wired to red wire 2 circuits
C Blue wire ELC Emergency circuit wired to blue wire
Typical Applications TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

• Multiple-circuit and single-circuit for longer continuous rows PLR 3 C PLR 3 C PLR 3 C PLR 3 C PLR 2 B PLR 2 B PLR 2 B PLR 2 B PLR 1 PLR 1 PLR 1
(All PLR22)
• Multiple-circuit with alternating fixtures on separate circuits, Circuit A Circuit B Circuit A Circuit B Circuit A Circuit B Circuit A Circuit B Circuit A Circuit B Circuit A
2-circuit (PLR 22) and 3-circuit (PLR 33) (All PLR33)
• Multiple circuit with night-lights located along row as desired Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C Circuit A Circuit B
PLR 3 A PLR 3 A PLR 3 A PLR 3 C PLR 3 B PLR 3 B PLR 3 B PLR 3 C PLR 3 A PLR 3 A PLR 3 A
BLWP
Page 10 of 13
Constant Lumen Management BLWP PERFORMANCE DATA 24
Enabled by the embedded nLight control, the BLT actively
tracks its run-time and manages its light source such that Lumen Package Lumens Input Watts LPW
constant lumen output is maintained over the system life.
Referred to as lumen management, this feature eliminates BLWP2 8L ADP LP830 825 7 118
the energy waste created by the traditional practice of BLWP2 8L ADP LP835 855 7 122
over-lighting.
BLWP2 8L ADP LP840 868 7 124
BLWP2 8L ADP LP850 893 7 128
Without Lumen Management With Lumen Management
Energy is wasted and light level is inconsistent. BLWP2
Energy is saved and light 20L ADP
level remains LP830
consistent. 1876 17 110
100% 30W 100% BLWP2 20L ADP LP835 30W 1942 17 114
POWER INPUT
Saved Energy BLWP2 20L ADP LP840 1973 17 116
BLWP2 20L POWER ADP LP850 2029 17 119
LIGHT OUTPUT
LIGHT OUTPUT
POWER INPUT
POWER INPUT
INPUT
LIGHT BLWP2 33L ADP LP830 3180 30 107
OUTPUT
BLWP2 33L ADP LP835 3332 30 112
Wasted Energy
BLWP2 LIGHT33L ADP
OUTPUTLP840 3345 30 112
80% 24W 80% 24W
0 10 20
THOUSAND OPERATING HOURS
30 40 50 0 10 BLWP2
20 33L ADP
30 LP850 40 50 3440 30 115
BLWP2 40L ADP LP830 3914 37 105
ement With Lumen Management BLWP2 40L ADP LP835 3923 37 105
consistent. Energy is saved and light level remains consistent. BLWP2 40L ADP LP840 4117 37 110
30W 100% 30W
BLWP2 40L ADP LP850 4234 37 113
R INPUT
Saved Energy BLWP2 48L ADP LP830 4772 44 109
BLWP2 48L ADP LP835 4940 44 112
LIGHT OUTPUT
POWER
POWER INPUT
POWER INPUT
INPUT
HT
PUT BLWP2 48L ADP LP840 5019 44 114
BLWP2 48L ADP LP850 5162 44 118
24W 80%
LIGHT OUTPUT
24W
BLWP4 15L ADP LP830 1372 11 126
30 40 50 0 10 20
30 40 50
BLWP4 15L ADP LP835 1420 11 129
BLWP4 15L ADP LP840 1443 11 131
How to Estimate Lumens in Emergency Mode BLWP4 15L ADP LP850 1484 11 135
Use the formula below to estimate the delivered lumens BLWP4 20L ADP LP830 1985 16 124
in emergency mode
Estimated Lumens = 1.25 x P x LPW BLWP4 20L ADP LP835 2055 16 128
P = Ouput power of emergency driver. P = 10W for BLWP4 20L ADP LP840 2088 16 131
E10WLCP option. BLWP4 20L ADP LP850 2147 16 134
LPW = Lumen per watt rating of the luminaire. LPW
information available in Performance Data section. BLWP4 30L ADP LP830 2960 25 118
BLWP4 30L ADP LP835 3065 25 123
BLWP4 30L ADP LP840 3114 25 125
BLWP4 30L ADP LP850 3203 25 128
BLWP4 40L ADP LP830 4027 35 115
BLWP4 40L ADP LP835 4391 35 125
BLWP4 40L ADP LP840 4236 35 121
BLWP4 40L ADP LP850 4357 35 124
BLWP4 48L ADP LP830 4948 40 124
BLWP4 48L ADP LP835 5137 40 129
BLWP4 48L ADP LP840 5205 40 131
BLWP4 48L ADP LP850 5353 40 134
BLWP4 60L ADP LP830 6059 49 123
BLWP4 60L ADP LP835 6273 49 127
BLWP4 60L ADP LP840 6373 49 129
BLWP4 60L ADP LP850 6555 49 133
BLWP4 72L ADP LP830 7088 59 121
BLWP4 72L ADP LP835 7338 59 125
BLWP4 72L ADP LP840 7455 59 127
BLWP4 72L ADP LP850 7668 59 131
BLWP4 85L ADP LP830 7972 68 117
BLWP4 85L ADP LP835 8253 68 121
BLWP4 85L ADP LP840 8385 68 123
BLWP4 85L ADP LP850 8624 68 127
BLWP4 100L ADP LP830 9316 85 110
BLWP4 100L ADP LP835 9645 85 114
BLWP4 100L ADP LP840 9799 85 116
BLWP4 100L ADP LP850 10079 85 119
BLWP
Page 11 of 13
BLWP PERFORMANCE DATA (continued)
Lumen Package Lumens Input Watts LPW
BLWP2 8LHE ADP LP830 851 8 106
BLWP2 20LHE ADP LP830 1932 16 120
BLWP2 20LHE ADP LP835 2000 16 125
BLWP2 20LHE ADP LP840 2032 16 127
BLWP2 20LHE ADP LP850 2090 16 130
BLWP2 33LHE ADP LP830 3272 26 127
BLWP2 33LHE ADP LP835 3388 26 131
BLWP2 33LHE ADP LP840 3442 26 133
BLWP2 33LHE ADP LP850 3540 26 137
BLWP2 40LHE ADP LP830 3991 32 126
BLWP2 40LHE ADP LP835 4132 32 130
BLWP2 40LHE ADP LP840 4198 32 131
BLWP2 40LHE ADP LP850 4318 32 136
BLWP2 48LHE ADP LP830 4881 39 126
BLWP2 48LHE ADP LP835 5053 39 130
BLWP2 48LHE ADP LP840 5134 39 132
BLWP2 48LHE ADP LP850 5280 39 136
BLWP4 15LHE ADP LP830 1375 11 125
BLWP4 15LHE ADP LP835 1424 11 129
BLWP4 15LHE ADP LP840 1447 11 132
BLWP4 15LHE ADP LP850 1488 11 135
BLWP4 20LHE ADP LP830 1985 16 124
BLWP4 20LHE ADP LP835 2055 16 128
BLWP4 20LHE ADP LP840 2088 16 131
BLWP4 20LHE ADP LP850 2147 16 134
BLWP4 30LHE ADP LP830 3012 24 126
BLWP4 30LHE ADP LP835 3118 24 131
BLWP4 30LHE ADP LP840 3168 24 133
BLWP4 30LHE ADP LP850 3258 24 137
BLWP4 40LHE ADP LP830 4181 33 127
BLWP4 40LHE ADP LP835 4329 33 132
BLWP4 40LHE ADP LP840 4398 33 134
BLWP4 40LHE ADP LP850 4524 33 137
BLWP4 48LHE ADP LP830 5033 39 130
BLWP4 48LHE ADP LP835 5211 39 135
BLWP4 48LHE ADP LP840 5294 39 137
BLWP4 48LHE ADP LP850 5445 39 141
BLWP4 60LHE ADP LP830 6280 47 133
BLWP4 60LHE ADP LP835 6502 47 137
BLWP4 60LHE ADP LP840 6606 47 140
BLWP4 60LHE ADP LP850 6795 47 144
BLWP4 72LHE ADP LP830 7303 56 129
BLWP4 72LHE ADP LP835 7561 56 134
BLWP4 72LHE ADP LP840 7682 56 136
BLWP4 72LHE ADP LP850 7901 56 140
BLWP4 85LHE ADP LP830 8567 69 124
BLWP4 85LHE ADP LP835 8869 69 129
BLWP4 85LHE ADP LP840 9011 69 131
BLWP4 85LHE ADP LP850 9268 69 134
BLWP4 100LHE ADP LP830 9898 80 124
BLWP4 100LHE ADP LP835 10247 80 128
BLWP4 100LHE ADP LP840 10411 80 130
BLWP4 100LHE ADP LP850 10708 80 134
Notes
24 For ADP lens only, for additional lens options refer to photometry on www.acuitybrands.com.
BLWP
Page 12 of 13
BLWP8 PERFORMANCE DATA BLWP8 HE PERFORMANCE DATA
Lumen Package Lumens Input Watts LPW Lumen Package Lumens Input Watts LPW
BLWP8 40L ADP LP830 3953 30 131 BLWP8 40LHE ADP LP830 3953 30 133
Notes
24 For ADP lens only, for additional lens options refer to photometry on www.acuitybrands.com.
BLWP
Page 13 of 13
8.11 Lighting Type WL, SPEC 2.2 Luminaires

Lighting Type WL Architectural Wall Sconce WDGE1
WDGE1 LED Catalog
Number
Architectural Wall Sconce Notes
Type
Buy American
Hit the Tab key or mouse over the page to see all interactive elements.
Introduction
The WDGE LED family is designed to meet
specifier’s every wall-mounted lighting need in
D2 a widely accepted shape that blends with any
Specifications architecture. The clean rectilinear design comes
in four sizes with lumen packages ranging from
Depth (D1): 5.5"
1,200 to 25,000 lumens, providing true site-wide
Depth (D2): 1.5"
H solution.
Height: 8"
WDGE1 delivers up to 2,000 lumens with a soft,
Width: 9"
non-pixelated light source, creating a visually
Weight:
(without options)
9 lbs comfortable environment. The compact size of
W D1 WDGE1, with its integrated emergency battery
backup option, makes it an ideal over-the-door
wall-mounted lighting solution.
WDGE LED Family Overview

Lumens (4000K)
Luminaire Standard EM, 0°C Cold EM, -20°C Sensor
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
WDGE1 LED 4W -- -- 1,200 2,000 -- -- -- --
WDGE2 LED 10W 18W Standalone / nLight 1,200 2,000 3,000 4,500 6,000 --
WDGE3 LED 15W 18W Standalone / nLight 7,500 8,500 10,000 12,000 -- --
WDGE4 LED -- -- Standalone / nLight 12,000 16,000 18,000 20,000 22,000 25,000
Ordering Information EXAMPLE: WDGE1 LED P2 40K 80CRI VF MVOLT SRM PE DDBXD
Series Package Color Temperature CRI Distribution Voltage Mounting
WDGE1 LED P1 27K 2700K 80CRI VF Visual comfort forward throw MVOLT Shipped included
P2 30K 3000K 90CRI VW Visual comfort wide 347 2 SRM Surface mounting bracket
35K 3500K ICW Indirect Canopy/Ceiling Washer bracket (dry/damp locations only)5
40K 4000K Shipped separately
50K 1 5000K AWS 3/8inch Architectural wall spacer
PBBW Surface-mounted back box (top, left, right conduit entry) Use when
there is no junction box available.
Options Finish
E4WH 3 Emergency battery backup, Certified in CA Title 20 MAEDBS (4W, 0°C min) DDBXD Dark bronze DDBTXD Textured dark bronze
PE 4 Photocell, Button Type DBLXD Black DBLBXD Textured black
DS Dual switching ( comes with 2 drivers and 2 light engines; see page 3 for details) DNAXD Natural aluminum DNATXD Textured natural aluminum
DMG 0-10V dimming wires pulled outside fixture (for use with an external control, ordered separately) DWHXD White DWHGXD Textured white
BCE Bottom conduit entry for back box (PBBW). Total of 4 entry points. DSSXD Sandstone DSSTXD Textured sandstone
Accessories NOTES
Ordered and shipped separately. 1 50K not available in 90CRI. 4 PE not available with DS.
WDGEAWS DDBXD U WDGE 3/8inch Architectural Wall Spacer (specify finish) 2 347V not available with 5 Not qualified for DLC. Not
E4WH, DS or PE. available with E4WH.
WDGE1PBBW DDBXD U WDGE1 surface-mounted back box (specify finish) 3 E4WH not available with
PE or DS.
One Lithonia Way • Conyers, Georgia 30012 • Phone: 1-800-705-SERV (7378) • www.lithonia.com WDGE1 LED
COMMERCIAL OUTDOOR
© 2019-2021 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 03/17/21
Performance Data
Lumen Output
Lumen values are from photometric tests performed in accordance with IESNA LM-79-08. Data is considered to be representative of the configurations shown,
within the tolerances allowed by Lighting Facts. Contact factory for performance data on any configurations not shown here.
Performance System 27K (2700K, 80 CRI) 30K (3000K, 80 CRI) 35K (3500K, 80 CRI) 40K (4000K, 80 CRI) 50K (5000K, 80 CRI)
Dist. Type
Package Watts Lumens LPW B U G Lumens LPW B U G Lumens LPW B U G Lumens LPW B U G Lumens LPW B U G
VF 1,120 112 0 0 0 1,161 116 0 0 0 1,194 119 0 0 0 1,227 123 0 0 0 1,235 123 0 0 0
P1 10W
VW 1,122 112 0 0 0 1,163 116 0 0 0 1,196 120 0 0 0 1,229 123 0 0 0 1,237 124 0 0 0
VF 1,806 120 1 0 0 1,872 125 1 0 0 1,925 128 1 0 0 1,978 132 1 0 0 1,992 133 1 0 0
P2 15W
VW 1,809 120 1 0 0 1,876 125 1 0 0 1,929 128 1 0 0 1,982 132 1 0 0 1,996 133 1 0 0
Electrical Load Lumen Multiplier for 90CRI Lumen Output in Emergency

Mode (4000K, 80 CRI)
Performance Current (A) CCT Multiplier
System Watts Option Dist. Type Lumens
Package 120V 208V 240V 277V 347V 27K 0.845
VF 646
10W 0.082 0.049 0.043 0.038 -- 30K 0.867 E4WH
P1 VW 647
13W -- -- -- -- 0.046 35K 0.845
15W 0.132 0.081 0.072 0.064 -- 40K 0.885
P2
18W -- -- -- -- 0.056 50K 0.898
Lumen Ambient Temperature (LAT) Multipliers Projected LED Lumen Maintenance

Use these factors to determine relative lumen output for average ambient Data references the extrapolated performance projections for the platforms noted in a 25°C
temperatures from 0-40°C (32-104°F). ambient, based on 10,000 hours of LED testing (tested per IESNA LM-80-08 and projected per
IESNA TM-21-11).
Ambient Lumen Multiplier To calculate LLF, use the lumen maintenance factor that corresponds to the desired number of
operating hours below. For other lumen maintenance values, contact factory.
0°C 32°F 1.03
Operating Hours 0 25,000 50,000 100,000
10°C 50°F 1.02
Lumen Maintenance Factor 1.0 >0.96 >0.95 >0.91
20°C 68°F 1.01
25°C 77°F 1.00
30°C 86°F 0.99
40°C 104°F 0.98
COMMERCIAL OUTDOOR
Photometric Diagrams To see complete photometric reports or download .ies files for this product, visit the Lithonia Lighting WDGE LED homepage.
Tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79 and LM-80 standards.
LEGEND
0.25 fc
0.5 fc
1.0 fc
3.0 fc
MH = 8ft
Grid = 8ft x 8ft
WDGE1 LED P2 40K 80CRI VW WDGE1 LED P2 40K 80CRI VF
Emergency Egress Options

Emergency Battery Backup
The emergency battery backup is integral to the luminaire — no external housing required! This design provides reliable emergency operation while
maintaining the aesthetics of the product. All emergency battery backup configurations include an independent secondary driver with an integral relay to
immediately detect loss of normal power and automatically energize the luminaire. The emergency battery will power the luminaire for a minimum duration
of 90 minutes (maximum duration of three hours) from the time normal power is lost and maintain a minimum of 60% of the light output at the end of
90minutes.
Applicable codes: NFPA 70/NEC – section 700.16, NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Section 7.9
The example below shows illuminance of 1 fc average and 0.1 fc minimum in emergency mode with E4WH and VF distribution.
8' MH
8'
15'
1.0 fc avg.
0.1 fc min.
26'
Grid = 10ft x 10ft
WDGE1 LED xx 40K 80CRI VF MVOLT E4WH
Dual Switching (DS) Option

The dual switching option offers operational redundancy that certain codes require. With this option the luminaire comes integrated with two drivers and
two light engines. These work completely independent to each other so that a failure of any individual component does not cause the whole luminaire to
go dark. This option is typically used with a back generator or inverter providing emergency power.
Applicable codes: NFPA 70/NEC – section 700.16, NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Section 7.9
Driver1 Driver2
COMMERCIAL OUTDOOR
Mounting, Options & Accessories
E4WH – 4W Emergency Battery Backup PBBW – Surface-Mounted Back Box

Use when there is no junction box available.
D = 5.5"
D = 1.75"
H = 8"
H = 8"
W = 9"
W = 9"
AWS – 3/8inch Architectural Wall Spacer

D = 0.38"
H = 4.4"
W = 7.5"
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE INSTALLATION

Common architectural look, with clean rectilinear shape, of the WDGE LED was designed to A universal mounting plate with integral mounting support arms allows the fixture to
blend with any type of construction, whether it be tilt-up, frame or brick. Applications include hinge down for easy access while making wiring connections. The 3/8” Architectural Wall
commercial offices, warehouses, hospitals, schools, malls, restaurants, and other commercial Spacer (AWS) can be used to create a floating appearance or to accommodate small
buildings. imperfections in the wall surface. The ICW option can be used to mount the luminaire
CONSTRUCTION inverted for indirect lighting in dry and damp locations. Design can withstand up to a 1.5 G
The single-piece die-cast aluminum housing integrates secondary heat sinks to optimize vibration load rating per ANSI C136.31.
thermal transfer from the internal light engine heat sinks and promote long life. The driver LISTINGS
is mounted in direct contact with the casting for a low operating temperature and long life. CSA certified to U.S. and Canadian standards. Luminaire is IP66 rated. PIR options are
The die-cast door frame is fully gasketed with a one-piece solid silicone gasket to keep out rated for wet location. Rated for -40°C minimum ambient. DesignLights Consortium® (DLC)
moisture and dust, providing an IP66 rating for the luminaire. Premium qualified product and DLC qualified product. Not all versions of this product may
FINISH be DLC Premium qualified or DLC qualified. Please check the DLC Qualified Products List
Exterior painted parts are protected by a zinc-infused Super Durable TGIC thermoset at www.designlights.org/QPL to confirm which versions are qualified. International Dark-
powder coat finish that provides superior resistance to corrosion and weathering. A tightly Sky Association (IDA) Fixture Seal of Approval (FSA) is available for all products on this
controlled multi-stage process ensures a 3 mils thickness for a finish that can withstand page utilizing 2700K and 3000K color temperature only and SRM mounting only.
extreme climate changes without cracking or peeling. Standard Super Durable colors BUY AMERICAN
include dark bronze, black, natural aluminum, sandstone and white. Available in textured This product is assembled in the USA and meets the Buy America(n) government procurement
and non-textured finishes. requirements under FARS, DFARS and DOT. Please refer to www.acuitybrands.com/resources/buy-
OPTICS american for additional information.
Well crafted reflector optics allow the light engine to be recessed within the luminaire, WARRANTY
providing visual comfort, superior distribution, uniformity, and spacing in wall-mount 5-year limited warranty. Complete warranty terms located at:
applications. The WDGE LED has zero uplight and qualifies as a Nighttime Friendly™ www.acuitybrands.com/support/warranty/terms-and-conditions
product, meaning it is consistent with the LEED® and Green Globes™ criteria for
eliminating wasteful uplight. Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25 °C.
ELECTRICAL
Specifications subject to change without notice.
Light engine consists of high-efficacy LEDs mounted to metal-core circuit boards to
maximize heat dissipation and promote long life (up to L91/100,000 hours at 25°C). The
electronic driver has a power factor of >90%, THD <20%. Luminaire comes with built in
6kV surge protection, which meets a minimum Category C low exposure (per ANSI/IEEE
C62.41.2).
COMMERCIAL OUTDOOR
Nambe of Product Brand Code Item
Light Fixture for Installation Commercial Electric TM 54194201
under cabinet SKU#1003580970
24 in LED Color Changing Under Cabinet Light

Light fixture for installation under upper kitchen cabinet
54194201
sku# 1003580970
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Number 54194201
SKU 1003580970
OSMID 306297935
1.71in Power 11 W
1.14in AC Voltage, Frequency 120V, 60 Hz

Color Temp (nom.) 2700K/3000K/4000K
23.98in
Operation Temp -4°F ~ 113°F
CRI 90
Lumen Output (min.) 700 lm
Dimming Yes Stepped – Low/Off/High
Lifetime Rating L70/50000Hrs
Efficacy 63 lm/watt
ADVANTAGES
• 60 Watt Equivalent
• 50,000 Hours of Continuous Use PACKAGING
• 5 Year Warranty
Weight (±0.5 lb) 0.77 lbs
• Captive Mounting Screws for Quick and
Size (L x W x H) (±0.1 in) 23.98in x 1.71in x 1.14in
Easy Installation
• 5 ft Plug-in Power Cord Low Off High Box Dimensions 24.25in x 2.99in x 1.30in
• HI/LOW/OFF Switch Gross Weight 0.99 lbs
• Adjust Color of Light with UPC 849489009193
Integrated Switch to
Warm White, Soft White,
or Bright White 2700K 3000K 4000K
(2700K/3000K/4000K)
• Connect up to a Maximum of 20 Units. Do not Exceed
220 Total Watts for Interconnected Lights
INCLUDED IN BOX
• "U"Mounting Clips (2)
• Screws (2)
APPLICATIONS • Drywall Anchors (2)
Suitable for damp locations
SURfACE MOUNT
Contact Information 1-877-527-0313 · WWW.HOMEDEPOT.COM

8.12 Photocell Switch, SPEC 3.1.6

Photocell Switch Photo Control #K4121 C
Photocell Switch Photo Control #K4121 C
Photocontrol - K4121C
Photocontrol - Stem Mount Thermal Photocontrol, 120 V

Item K4121C
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
These photocontrols install on standard outdoor light fixtures and electrical boxes with 1/2"-14 NPSM thread or 7/8" knock-out
holes for dusk-to-dawn ON/OFF control of outdoor lighting.
FEATURES
Mechanical bimetal switch with Cadmium Sulfide photocell
Delay feature prevents unwanted OFF switching
Gray plastic housing
1/2"-14 NPSM threaded stem
Washer gasket and locking nut included
#18 AWG, 9" wire leads
APPLICATIONS
Outdoor Lighting Control
TECHNICAL DATA
General
Model Number K4121C
Description Stem Mount Thermal Photocontrol, 120 V
UPC Code 078275002012
Brand Intermatic
Country of Origin (Intermatic) MEXICO
Warranty Period 2-Year limited
Usage Environments Outdoor
Photocontrol Type Thermal
Expected Lifetime (Years) 5
Expected Lifetime (Operations) 3650
Application Compatibilities HID; Fluorescent; Incandescent
Photocontrol Style Stem Mount
Photocontrol Sensor Location Side
Control Specifications
Sensor Time Delay 30 sec to 90 sec
Photocell Type Cadmium Sulfide
Photo Control Switch Type Mechanical Bimetal
Fail Mode ON
Activation On 1 to 5 fc
Activation Off 3 to 15 fc
Dimensions
Product Height (in) 3
Product Height (mm) 76.2
Product Width (in) 1 9/16
Product Width (mm) 39.7
Technical specifications and other information are subject to change without notice. Images can vary from original. © 04/20/2021 1/3
Product Depth (in) 1 9/16
Product Depth (mm) 39.7
Wire Lead Length (in) 9
Wire Lead Length (mm) 228.6
Wire Size Max #18 AWG
Cover Color Gray
Housing Material Polycarbonate
Load Ratings
Magnetic Ballast Range(s) 8.3 A, 1000 VA
Tungsten Range(s) 15 A, 1800 W
Electrical Specifications
Wiring Option Wire leads
Input Voltage Range(s) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Packaging
Shipping Weight (lbs) 0.21
Unit Carton Dimensions (H x W x D) in 4.88 x 1.75 x 3 in
Environmental Specifications
Temperature (operation) -40°C..70°C

UL Certification UL
CSA Certification cCSAus
Other Certifications and Compatibilities CA Title 20
UL Standard UL773
California Proposition 65 DEHP
PDF Standards and Certifications UL; cCSAus; CA Title 20
ACCESSORIES
22LG116 K42-SW-A 6LV1352

Light Guard Accessory for K4100 Series, K4200 Swivel Arm Accessory for EK4136S, K4100 Series Light Shield Accessory for EK4036S, EK4436SM,
Series Thermal Photocontrols Stem Mount Photocontrols K4000 Series Button Photocontrols
Photo Controls
Stem Mounting, Thermal Type – K4100 Series
This series features single and multivolt models in both stem mount and stem mount with a swivel. All models
are equipped with a light level slide adjustment and provide a 1/2"-14 threaded stem. A washer gasket and
locking nut are packaged with each photo control. Models with “M” suffix have heavy duty die cast housings.
Model K4251 and K4253 have photo eye located on top and are designed for spot/flood type fixtures.
Size – K4100 Series - 1-9/16" (4.0 cm) Square, 3" (7.6 cm) Long;
K4200 Series - 1/2"-14 threaded swivel, 1-9/16" (4.0 cm) Square, 5-1/2" (14.0 cm) Long;
Model K4236 - 5-3/4" (14.6 cm) High, 3" (7.6 cm) Diameter.
Model # Watts Tungsten VA Ballast Amps Tungsten Amps Ballast Volts

K4121C 1800 1000 15 8.3 120
K4121C K4121M 2000 1800 16.7 15 120
K4421M 1800 1000 15 8.3 120
K4124 3100 1700 15 8.3 208
K4122 3600 2000 15 8.3 240
K4123C 3100-4150 1700-2300 15 8.3 208-277
K4423M*** 3100-4150 1700-2300 15 8.3 208-277
K4133 4150 2300 15 8.3 277
K4127**** 5205 2880 15 8.3 347
K4135* 7200 4000 15 8.3 480
K4136M 2000-4625 1800 16.7 8.6 120 or 277
**K4141C* 3000 3000 25 25 120
K4121M * Not UL listed or CSA certified.
** 1 year warranty.
*** Model K4423M replaces K4123M
**** Certified by CSA to US and Canadian Standards.
UL773A C22.2-55 5 Year

K4221C E42722 LR38068 Warranty
K4423M
Stem & Swivel Mounting, Thermal Type – K4200 Series

K4236C Model # Watts Tungsten VA Ballast Amps Tungsten Amps Ballast Volts
K4221C 1800 1000 15 8.3 120
K4224 3100 1700 15 8.3 208
K4222 3600 2000 15 8.3 240
K4223C 3100-4150 1700-2300 15 8.3 208-277
K4233 4100 2300 15 8.3 277
K4227*** 5205 2880 15 8.3 347
K4235* 7200 4000 15 8.3 480
K4236C 1800-4150 1000-2300 15 8.3 120 or 208-277
K4251*** 1800 1000 15 8.3 120
K4253*** 3100-4150 1700-2300 15 8.3 208-277
* Not UL listed or CSA certified.
***Certified by CSA to US and Canadian Standards.
UL773A C22.2-55 5 Year C22.2-177

E42722 LR38068 Warranty LR3730
K4251
22 WEATHERPROOF • ENERGY CONTROLS • PROFESSIONAL LIGHTING • POOL & SPA • SURGE PROTECTION • CONSUMER
K4200 Series
Photo Controls
Project:
Location:
K4200 Series Product Type:
Stem and Swivel Mounting Contact/Phone:
The K4200 Series Photo Controls feature stem and swivel mounting,
with thermal-type controls. Thermal-type photo controls, which are Model #:
available in single or multi-voltage models, provide dusk-to-dawn
lighting control and a delay action, which eliminates loads switching
OFF due to car headlights, and lightning. The thermal-type controls
feature a cadmium sulfide photocell and a sonic-welded polycarbonate
case and lens to seal out moisture. The design utilizes a dual
temperature compensating bi-metal and composite resistor for reliable
long life operation over ambient temperature extremes.
Features
• Cadmium sulfide photocell
• Sonic welded polycarbonate housing and lens to seal out moisture
• Delay action eliminates load switching OFF due to car
headlights, and lightning
• 6" leads
• K4251 and K4253 Models are designed for spot/flood type fixtures
• Controls come with a washer gasket and locking nut
Ratings K4221C, K4223C, K4227

Size: ⁄2" – 14" threaded swivel, 1 9⁄16" (4.0 cm)
1
square, 5 1⁄2" (14.0 cm) long;

Model K4235 and K4236 –
61⁄4" (15.9 cm) High, 3" (7.6 cm) diameter
Models K4251 and K4253 –
4" (10.2 cm) High, 1 3⁄8" (3.5 cm) Diameter
Color: Gray
Electrical Rating: See table on back
Activation: 1-5 FC ON; 3-15 FC OFF
(photo eye clear on models with shield)
Power Consumption: Averages under 2 Watts
K4251, K4253
Operating Temperature: -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)
Shipping Weight: K4200 Series – .21 lb (.09 kg)
K4235 and K4236 – .45 lb (.20 kg)
Agency Listing: See table on back
K4235, K4236
Energy Controls
K4200 Series
Tungsten Tungsten Ballast
Model Number Ballast (VA) Volts AC Agency Listing
(Watts) (Amps) (Amps)
K4221C 1800 1000 15 8.3 120 UL
K4223C** 3100-4150 1700-2300 15 8.3 208-277 CSA, C/US
K4227 5205 2880 15 8.3 347 CSA, C/US
K4235* 7200 4000 15 8.3 480
K4236C 1800-4150 1000-2300 15 8.3 120-277 UL, CSA
K4251 1800 1000 15 8.3 120 CSA, C/US
K4253** 3100-4150 1700-2300 15 8.3 208-277 CSA, C/US
*Not Agency certified
**Title 20 Listed Model
Specification
The photo control shall provide automatic switching for outdoor lighting loads. The control shall be a thermal design with
built-in delay to ensure that the controlled lighting does not switch off due to ambient light or light striking the photocell.
The photo control shall have a rating of 1800 Watts and 15 Amps tungsten and 1800 Watts and 8.3 Amps ballast based
on agency testing at 50% power factor for ballast loads. The photo control shall provide switching for nominal voltage
fixtures of 120 Volts ±10% to accommodate fluctuations in supply voltage. The photo control mounting shall be the stem
and swivel type with all necessary mounting hardware and instructions. The photo control housing shall be constructed
of high impact polycarbonate. The photo control components shall consist of a resistor, dual temperature compensating
bi-metal blades, snap action contact blades, chemically treated/polymer encapsulated cadmium sulfide photocell and
silver alloy contacts to ensure reliable operation. The photo control shall be 100% factory tested for function within
specified light levels. The photo control shall be agency certified (unless otherwise noted) and tested accordingly. The
photo control shall function over temperature range of -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C). The photo control shall be
Intermatic model K4221C(See Model Numbers Listed).
Diagrams
Photo Control
Nut and
neoprene
washer
1/2" nipple
Black Red (Load)

Line (Line)
White Load
Neutral (Neutral)
Photo Control 120 or 277 VAC
Photo Control
Black Red (Load)

Line 1 (Line)
White Load
Line 2 (Neutral)
Photo Control 208/240/480 VAC
Energy Controls
8.13 Lighting Contactor

Lighting Contactor General Electric CR360 L
ITEM #7 LIGHTING CONTACTOR , SPEC 2.5.2
GE Lighting Contactors
CR360L Electrically Held Contactors

600 Volts Maximum 50/60 Hertz
300 Amperes Maximum GE Fastrac™ Program items are printed in red type.
O Select Size, Number of Poles, and Enclosure O Select Coil

Open NEMA1 NEMA12 NEMA3R NEMA4, SS Voltage
Continuous No. of
Ampere Rating Poles
Cat. No. List Price,
Cat. No.
List Price,
Cat. No.
List Price,
Cat. No.
List Price,
Cat No
List Price, Catalog Number
Digits Digits Digits Digits Digits Voltage
GO-1 0MB GO-1 0MB GO-1 0MB GO-1 0MB GO-10MB Digits
CR360L CR360L CR360L CR360L CR360L
24 24A
2 302 $ 186.00 31? $ 198.00 322 $ 288.00 $ 288.00 34? $ 468.00
30 3 303 204.00 313 216.00 323 306.00 363 306.00 343 486.00 120 02A
4 304 252.00 311 264.00 324 354.00 36.1 354.00 3,1-1 534.00
208 ?3A
2 402 348.00 412 408.00 422 573.00 462 573.00 948.00
60 3 403 372.00 413 432.00 423 597.00 163 597.00 443 972.00 240 03A
4 404 480.00 414 540.00 424 705.00 464 705.00 144 1080.00
277 13A --
2 502 552.00 512 672.00 522 867.00 f><£ 867.00 ;>4? 1437.00
100 3 503 600.00 513 720.00 523 915.00 915.00 1485.00 480 04A
4 504 768.00 514 888.00 524 1083.00 1083.00 1653.00
2 602 1332.00 612 1584.00 622 2229.00 662 2229.00 2889.00
200 3 603 1440.00 613 1692.00 623 2337.00 2337.00 2997.00
4 i>04 2004.00 614 2256.00 624 2901.00 2901.00 3561.00
2 2886.00 3348.00 -722 4998.00 4998.00 4998.00
300 3 703 3138.00 3600.00 723 5250.00 5250.00 5250.00
4 704 5766.00 714 6690.00 7?4 8340.00 8340.00 744 8340.00
Select Control Circuit Type (Following available only with Enclosure)

Continuous Ampere Rating
Coil
30A 60A 100A 200A 300A
Options Voltage Catalog List Price Catalog List Price Catalog List Price Catalog List Price Catalog List Price
Number Adder, Number Adder, Number Adder, Number Adder, Number Adder,
Digits GO-10MB Digits GO-10MB Digits GO-1 0MB Digits GO-10MB Digits GO-1 0MB
24 24D $165.00 24D $165.00 24D $165.00 24D $165.00 24D $165.00
120 02D 165.00 02D 165.00 02D 165.00 02D 165.00 02D 165.00
2 Control Circuit Fuses
208 23D 165.00 23D 165.00 23D 165.00 23D 165.00 23D 165.00
240 030 165.00 03D 165.00 03D 165.00 03D 165.00 03D 165.00
277 13D 165.00 13D 165.00 130 165.00 130 165.00 13D 165.00
480 040 165.00 040 165.00 040 165.00 040 165.00 040 165.00
208 82S 202.00 82S 275.00 62S 420.00 48S 510.00 40S 578.00
CRT 1 Secondary
240 03S 202.00 03S 275.00 03S 420.00 03S 510.00 03S 578.00
277 61S 202.00 61 S 275.00 61S 420.00 61 S 510.00 61S 578.00
120 Volt Secondary
480 04 S 202.00 £4S 275.00 04S 420.00 04 S 510.00 04S 578.00
CPT 1 Secondary 208 82T 367.00 827 440.00 62T 585.00 48T 675.00 40T 743.00
Fuse and 2 240 03T 367.00 031 440.00 03T 585.00 03T 675.00 03T 743.00
Primary Fuses 277 61T 367.00 61 T 440.00 61T 585.00 -61T 675.00 61T 743.00
1 20 Volt Secondary 480 04T 367.00 04T 440.00 04T 585.00 04T 675.00 04T 743.00
O Select Push Buttons or Selector Switch O Select Indicating Lights

NEMA Type 1 Only Any Enclosure NEMATypel Only Any Enclosure
Standard-Duty Heavy-Duty Standard-Duty Heavy-Duty
Push Button, Selector Switch Options Light Option
Cat. No. List Price, Cat. No, List Price, Cat. No. List Price, Cat. No. List Price,
Digit GO-10MB Digit GO-1 0MB Digit GO-1 0MB Digit GO-1 0MB
None A $ 0.00 A $ 0.00 None A $ 0.00 A $ 0.00
On-Off Push Button C 142.00 K 248.00 Red Across Coil B 112.00 J 202.00
Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch D 60.00 165.00 Green Across Coil - - K 202.00
Off-On Selector Switch B 60.00 165.00
Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch With Key — — N 210.00
On-Off-Auto Selector Switch F 60.00 P 165.00
O Select Auxiliary Contacts
Catalog Number List Price,
Digit GO-1 0MB
None Z —
Holding Interlock A $ 82.00
Holding Interlock Plus 1 NO B 164.00
Holding Interlock Plus 1 NC C 164.00
Holding Interlock Plus 1 NO, 1 NC D 246.00
Holding Interlock Plus 2 NO F 246.00
Holding Interlock Plus 2 NC F 246.00
Holding Interlock Plus 2 NO, 1 NC G 328.00
6-10 1999 Issue Prices and data subject to change without notice
U-
GE Lighting Contactors
GE Fastrac™ Program items are printed in red type. CR360L Electrically Held Contactors
Application 600 Volts Maximum 50/60 Hertz
300 Amperes Maximum
These CR360L magnetic
electrically held lighting
contactors are specifically Schematic Diagram
rated for 30-, 60-, 100-, 200-,
and 300-ampere tungsten-,
fluorescent-, mercury arc-, and
sodium-lamp loads. They are FOR
available open or enclosed. I [CONNECTIONS
| REFER TO
' FIGURE A
They may be controlled by a I I FIGURE B
I j OR
remote push button, toggle, or I I FIGURE C
Open 60-Amp Electrically êlector switch or other pilot ( IF USED)
Held Lighting Contactor device.
WIRE "A1
Ratings
Open or enclosed ratings are 30-, 60-, 100-, 200-, and 300-ampere,
ac full-load current.
Maximum AC Voltage Rating ON-OFF
__L. BLACK
1
Lighting Load Line Load T f WHITE 2
Tungsten 480 480 RED
Ballast: Fluorescent Mercury, Sodium, e.g. 600 600
FIGURE A
PUSH BUTTON
DC Tungsten Rating
Contactor Size, No. Poles in Series for: M-LINE CONTACTOR
Continuous Ampere Rating 1 2 5 V Maximum 250V Maximum I - INDICATING LIGHT
D - MAINTAINING CONTACT PILOT DEVICE
30 2 3
60 2 4 Typical Schematic Diagram For
100-300 2 2
CR360L Lighting Contactor
Ordering Directions
Order by complete catalog number. Select rating and enclosure from Table O. Select coil voltage from Table O. For additionally
modified enclosed forms, use Tables ©, O, O, and 0. Note: Coils will be connected line-to-line unless otherwise specified. Complete
Catalog Number must contain 15 digits.
Catalog Number List Price, GO-10MB
O OOF© 0 o e +o $
CR360L I I +o
#NO
| |
Pilot Pilot Aux.
$
Enclosure Control Circuit Option
Poles Device Light Contacts
+© $
CR360L 312 02A D A Z +o $
+o $
Example: 30-ampere, three-pole lighting contactor in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure with a 480/120 Volt $
CPT, 2 primary, 1 secondary fuse, standard-duty on/off push button with holding interlock.
CR360L. 313 04T C Reference 5:

List Price, GO-10MB Instructions
Continuous Publication Number
NEMA Type 1 Enclosure, 3 NO Poles + O Ampere Rating
480/120 CPT 480/120 with 2 Primary/1 Secondary Fuse + O 30 GEH-5099
Standard On-Off Push Button + O 60 GEH-5100
No Indicating Light 100 GEH-5101
Normally Open Holding Interlock + 0 200 GEH-5102
300 GEH-5103
Dimensions—See page 6-14. (Continued on Page 6-10) |
Prices and data subject to change without notice 1999 Issue 6-9
9. Division 27- Communications
Content
9.1 Jack Connector, SPEC 2.5.1
-Belden, AX101326 Modular Connectors-CAT6+ Modular Jack- Key Connect
9.2 Patch Panel, SPEC 2.4.4
- NEWLINK NEW-27777XX Patch Panel
9.3 UTP Cable, SPEC 2.3.1.1
-NEWLINK NEW-980634X CAT-6 CMR 23 AWG 4-pair UTP Cable
9.4 Wall Plate, SPEC 2.5.2
- Leviton Single-Gang QuickPort Wall-plates 41080-xxP
9.5 Coaxial Module Connector, SPEC 2.1.2
-ICC Module, F-Type, Nickel Plated IC107B5FXX
9.6 Coaxial Cable, SPEC 2.1.1
- MoCSY Broadband Coaxial Drop Cable A6QS-BVV-BOX
9.7 Coaxial Type F Connector, SPEC 2.1.2
- MULTICOM Coaxial Type F Connector PPC EX6 Plus

9.1 Jack Connector, SPEC 2.5.1

Jack Connector Belden AX101326
Detailed
ITEM Specifications
#1 JACK CONNECTOR, & Technical
SPEC Data E-105
2.5.1, DRAWING
ENGLISH MEASUREMENT VERSION
AX101326 Modular Connectors - CAT6+ Modular Jack - KeyConnect

AX101318 GRAY AND
AX101326 BLUE For more Information
please call
1-800-Belden1
General Description:
CAT6+ Modular Jack, RJ45, KeyConnect style, Blue (TIA 606)
Usage (Overall)
Suitable Applications: IBDN System 2400, 3600 and 4800, TIA Category 6+, ISO Class E, 1000 BASE-T
Related Parts: Compatible with KeyConnect Faceplates, Adapters, Boxes and Patch Panels
Physical Characteristics (Connectivity)

Dimensions
Dimensions:
Height (in.) Width (in.) Depth (in.)
0.880 0.640 1.290
Materials
Materials:
Description Type Material
Front Connection Lead Frame Copper Allow with 50u inch Gold over Nickel
Rear Connection IDC Copper Allow with Nickel Plating
Connector Body Plastic - UL940V-0
Color
Color: Blue (TIA 606)
Wiring Scheme
Wiring Scheme: T568A/B
Weight
Weight: 0.014 lbs.
Included Parts
Included Parts: 1 T-Bar
Packaging
Packaging: Individually packaged in a plastic bag. Standard pack of 50 units.
Mechanical Characteristics (Connectivity)

Footprint/Type: KeyConnect
Plug / Jack Compatibility: RJ45, RJ11

Termination Interface:
Termination Connection Durabilities
Front Mated Connection 1,000 cycles
Rear Gas Tight IDC Connection 20 terminations
Connector/Hardware Retention: 20 lbs.
Plug/Connector Retention: 11.250 lbs.
Storage Temperature Range: -40°C To +70°C
Installation Temperature Range: -10°C To +60°C
Operating Temperature Range: -10°C To +60°C
Tool Compatibility: Belden 110 Connecting Tool, MediaFlex Termination Station
Applicable Specifications and Agency Compliance (Overall)

Applicable Standards & Environmental Programs
Other Standards: FCC Part 68, Subpart F, IEC 60603-7
EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS): Yes
EU RoHS Compliance Date (mm/dd/yyyy): 07/01/2006
MII Order #39 (China RoHS): EUP 50
Page 1 of 3 10-19-2017
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data
Telecommunications Standards: ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Ed.2
Third Party Performance Verification: ETL - Verified Category 6
Safety Listing: ACA, Bi-national Standard Listed
Other Specification: IEC 60512-99-001, UL 1863
Suitability
Suitability - Indoor: Yes - Indoor
Transmission Characteristics (Connectivity)

Mated Connection Table 1:
Frequency Max. Max. Min. Min. Min. Min.

Insertion Loss Insertion Loss NEXT NEXT FEXT FEXT
(MHz) TIA* (dB) Belden** (dB) TIA* (dB) Belden** (dB) TIA* (dB) Belden** (dB)
1.000 0.100 0.100 75.000 77.000 75.000 77.000
4.000 0.100 0.100 75.000 77.000 71.100 75.100
8.000 0.100 0.100 75.000 77.000 65.000 69.000
10.000 0.100 0.100 74.000 77.000 63.100 67.100
16.000 0.100 0.100 69.900 72.900 59.000 63.000
20.000 0.100 0.100 68.000 71.000 57.100 61.100
25.000 0.100 0.100 66.000 69.000 55.100 59.100
31.250 0.110 0.100 64.100 67.100 53.200 57.200
62.500 0.160 0.120 58.100 61.100 47.200 51.200
100.000 0.200 0.160 54.000 57.000 43.100 47.100
200.000 0.280 0.240 48.000 51.000 37.100 41.100
250.000 0.320 0.280 46.000 49.000 35.100 39.100
300.000 0.310 44.500 37.600
Mated Connection Table - Footnote: * TIA/EIA-568-C.2-1-2002 Category 6 Standard.

** Worst-case performance for a CAT6+ mated connection using CAT6+ modular plugs.
Mated Connection Table 2:
Frequency Min. Min. Min. Min.

Return Loss Return Loss Balanced TCL Balanced TCL
(MHz) TIA* (dB) Belden** (dB) TIA* (dB) Belden** (dB)
1.000 30.000 32.000 40.000 42.000
4.000 30.000 32.000 40.000 42.000
8.000 30.000 32.000 40.000 42.000
10.000 30.000 32.000 40.000 42.000
16.000 30.000 32.000 40.000 42.000
20.000 30.000 32.000 40.000 42.000
25.000 30.000 32.000 40.000 42.000
31.250 30.000 32.000 38.100 42.000
62.500 28.100 32.000 32.100 36.100
100.000 24.000 28.000 28.000 32.000
200.000 18.000 22.000 22.000 26.000
250.000 16.000 22.000 20.000 24.000
300.000 18.500 22.500
Dielectric Strength: 1,000 V RMS @ 60 Hz for 1 minute
Current Rating: 1.500 A
Insulation Resistance: 500 M-Ohm Minimum
Max. Contact Resistance: 20 m-Ohm
Termination Resistance: 2.5 m-Ohm
Notes (Overall)
Notes: Please see Installation Guide PX103329
Notes (Cont'd.): IDC Wire Gauge: 22~24 AWG
Product Family
Part Number List:
Item Number Color
AX101318 Gray
AX101319 Almond
AX101320 Elec. White
AX101321 Black
AX101322 Orange (TIA 606)
AX101323 Red (TIA 606)
AX101324 Yellow (TIA 606)
Page 2 of 3 10-19-2017
Detailed Specifications & Technical Data
AX101325 Green (TIA 606)

AX101326 Blue (TIA 606)
AX101327 Purple (TIA 606)
AX101328 Brown (TIA 606)
AX103076 Ivory
AX104189 Orange
AX104190 Red
AX104191 Yellow
AX104192 Green
AX104193 Blue
AX104194 Purple
Put Ups and Colors:
Item # Putup Ship Weight Color Notes Item Desc

AX101326 1 EA 0.024 LB CAT6+ JACK KCONN BLUE TIA606
Revision Number: 1 Revision Date: 09-12-2017
© 2017 Belden, Inc

All Rights Reserved.
Although Belden makes every reasonable effort to ensure their accuracy at the time of this publication, information and specifications described herein are subject to error or omission and to
change without notice, and the listing of such information and specifications does not ensure product availability.
Belden provides the information and specifications herein on an "AS IS" basis, with no representations or warranties, whether express, statutory or implied. In no event will Belden be liable for
any damages (including consequential, indirect, incidental, special, punitive, or exemplary damages) whatsoever, even if Belden has been advised of the possibility of such damages, whether
in an action under contract, negligence or any other theory, arising out of or in connection with the use, or inability to use, the information or specifications described herein.
All sales of Belden products are subject to Belden's standard terms and conditions of sale.
Belden believes this product to be in compliance with EU RoHS (Directive 2002/95/EC, 27-Jan-2003). Material manufactured prior to the compliance date may be in stock at Belden facilities
and in our Distributor’s inventory. The information provided in this Product Disclosure, and the identification of materials listed as reportable or restricted within the Product Disclosure, is
correct to the best of Belden’s knowledge, information, and belief at the date of its publication. The information provided in this Product Disclosure is designed only as a general guide for the
safe handling, storage, and any other operation of the product itself or the one that it becomes a part of. This Product Disclosure is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification.
Regulatory information is for guidance purposes only. Product users are responsible for determining the applicability of legislation and regulations based on their individual usage of the
product.
Page 3 of 3 10-19-2017
9.2 Patch Panel, SPEC 2.4.4

Patch Panel NEWLINK NEW-27777
ITEM #2 PATCH PANEL, SPEC 2.4.4, DRAWINGS E-101 & E-105
NEW-27777XX
Newlink Premium CAT-6A

Patch Panels
 Exceeds ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2 requirements

 Exceeds ISO/IEC 2nd Edition 11801 Class EA
 CENELEC EN 50173-1, CENELEC EN
50288-10-1
 IEC 3rd Edition 61935-1, IEC 2nd Edition
61156-5
Technical Specifications  IEE 802.3an to support 10GBASE-T networks
 CEA-310-E and RoHS Compliant
CAT6A product’s family has been enhanced  Loaded with 24 and 48 Newlink RJ45 Ports
to support higher bandwidth. When properly
installed and tested this product can be  Increased protection against Cross Talk
subject of the NEWMAX 25-year period
warranty against manufacturing defects.  Modular design for increased performance per
Channel and Permanent Link
All NEWLINK’s CAT6A Patch Panels and
Jacks are more resilient to common misuse  Includes tight wrap to secure individual cables
with Telephony RJ11 plugs. Found to be one
of the major factors in RJ45 jacks permanent damage.
Contacts are gold plated for minimal insertion loss and long
life.
Connector spring wire contacts use the highest quality

phosphor bronze gold plated with 50 microns.
Printed circuit-board modules with 110-style IDC connectors

can be used for T568A and T568B wiring configurations.
04/15/15 Rev. 0 Approved by: P.M.P.

NEW-27777XX
TIA-568.C.2-10 CAT6A PARAMETER
Pair @ 100 Mhz @ 250 Mhz @ 500 Mhz
Insertion Loss (IL) 0.20 0.32 0.45
Near-end Cross Talk (NEXT) 54.0 46.0 34.0
Far-end Crosstalk (FEXT) 43.1 35.1 29.1
Return Loss (RL) 28.0 20.0 14.0
Transverse Conversion Loss (TCL) 28.0 20.0 14.0
Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss (TCTL) 28.0 20.0 14.0
Power sum Alien Near-end Crosstalk (PSANEXT) 67.0 62.5 56.5
Power sum Alien Far-end Crosstalk (PSAFEXT) 67.0 59.0 53.0
Ordering Information
NEW-2777724 Newlink Premium Patch Panel Cat-6A 24-port
NEW-2777748 Newlink Premium Patch Panel Cat-6A 48-port

9.3 UTP Cable, SPEC 2.3.1.1

UTP Cable NEWLINK NEW-980634X
ITEM #3 UTP CABLE, SPEC 2.3.1.1, DRAWING E1-00
NEW-980634X
CAT-6 CMR 23AWG 4-pair

UTP Cable
Features:
Jacket
 Standards ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.2 &
ISO/IEC 11801, IEEE 802.3af, UL
Insulation 568.C.2 - Local Area Network Cable
Verified for Transmission
Performance, UL ANSI 444 -
Communication Cables
Conductor  CMR Rated
 4- Balanced Pairs, 23 AWG
 Unshielded Twisted-pair construction
Rip Cord  Applications: Voice, Fax, T1, ISDN,
10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
100BASE-T4, 100VG-AnyLan,
ATM-25, ATM-51, ATM-155,
1000BASE-T
 High density twisted pairs (up to 51.7
– 65.2 per inch)
 Construction of Balanced Pair in
differential mode
Material Bare Copper
Conductor Construction 1/0.545 ± 0.01
Size 23AWG
Material HD-PE
Thickness MIN at any point: 0.18mm MAX AVG:0.22 mm
Diameter 0.94/0.96/0.98/1.0 ± 0.02
Blue / White-Blue
Insulation Orange / White-Orange

Colors
Green / White-Green
Brown / White-Brown
Elongation Min. 300%
Tensile Strength Min. 1.682Kg/mm2
Separator Latin Cross (FR-PE) 4.8 x 0.35mm
Jacket Material PVC (CMR)

NEW-980634X
Min.: 0.53mm
Thickness
Max. Avg: 0.57mm
Diameter 6.0 ± 0.2
Colors Gray, Blue, or Red
ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-C.2 & ISO/IEC 11801, IEEE 802.3af, UL 568.C.2 - Local Area
Standards: Network Cable Verified for Transmission Performance, UL ANSI 444 - Communication
Cables
Electrical Characteristics:
1. Conductor Resistance MAX 9.38 Ω/100m at 20º

2. Resistance Unbalance MAX 5%
3. Capacitance Unbalance MAX 330pF/100m
4. Mutual Capacitance MAX 560pF/100m
5. Premise Cable Electrical Table TIA Cat-6 Perm.Link
Prop. Delay Insertion PS PS PS

Length Freq. NEXT RL ACR-N ACR-F
Delay Skew Loss NEXT ACR-N ACR-F
Max. nS nS MHz dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB
1 3 65.0 19.1 62.0 64.2 62.0 59.0 61.2
4 3.5 64.1 21.0 60.6 52.1 61.8 58.3 49.1
8 5 59.4 21.0 54.4 46.1 57.0 52.1 43.1
10 5.5 57.8 21.0 52.3 44.2 55.5 49.9 41.2
16 7 54.6 20.0 47.6 40.1 52.2 45.2 37.1
20 7.9 53.1 19.5 45.2 38.2 50.7 42.8 35.2
90m 498 44
25 8.9 51.5 19.0 42.7 36.2 49.1 40.2 33.2
31.25 10 50.0 18.5 40.0 34.3 47.5 37.6 31.3
62.5 14.4 45.1 16.0 30.8 28.3 42.7 28.3 25.3
100 18.6 41.8 14.0 23.3 24.2 39.3 20.7 21.2
200 27.4 36.9 11.0 9.6 18.2 34.3 7.0 15.2
250 31.1 35.3 10.0 4.2 16.2 32.7 1.6 13.2

NEW-980634X
Note: Your typical consumer LAN uses 10Base-T signaling over a Category 3, 4, 5, 6 twisted-pair cable. The 10BASE-T transmitter
output voltage specified in the standard (IEEE 802.3-2005 14.3.1.2.1) requires a peak differential voltage of 2.2 to 2.8 V into a
100-Ohm resistive load. There are IEEE technical discussions (March 2007) about reducing it to below 2 volts, perhaps using a
"negotiation" protocol for devices on the LAN to choose a lower voltage if they are capable.
Ordering Information:
Part Number Description
NEW-9806341 CAT-6 CMR 23AWG 4-pair UTP Cable 1000ft, Gray
NEW-9806342 CAT-6 CMR 23AWG 4-pair UTP Cable 1000ft, Blue

9.4 Wall Plate, SPEC 2.5.2

Wall Plate Leviton 41080-xxP
ITEM #4 WALL PLATE, SPEC 2.5.2, DRAWING E-105
41080-xxP
Single-Gang QuickPort® Wallplates ITEM 20
APPLICATION FEATURES
41080-xxP
Single-Gang QuickPort Wallplates accept QuickPort • Color-matched wallplate screws
connectors to support multimedia applications with 1, • Fits within minimum rectangular NEMA openings and
2, 3, 4, or 6 ports. Use where a one-piece, single-gang, accommodates low-voltage box eliminators for a flush mount
economical flush-mount housing is desired. Available in • Compatible with all individual QuickPort connectors
six colors (white, light almond, ivory, grey, brown, and • Individual port configurability allows specification flexibility
black) with color-matched screws. • Narrow module width allows high port density in a small area
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
• Fits single-gang back boxes, or four-square boxes with
appropriate user-provided reducer
• Put blanks in unused ports for future expansion
• Specify port identification method (colored modules, designation
labels, and custom silk-screening available/to identify ports,
use different colored connectors for each application or Leviton
pre-printed Port Designation Labels (41080-LEB)
STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
• cULus Listed (UL 1863 & CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4)
• ANSI/TIA-568-C.0
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATION Dimensions: See page two
The wallplate housing shall be a one-piece, single-gang Materials: High-impact, durable, fire-retardant plastic rated
flush-mount style that fits standard NEMA openings, UL 94V-0
or four-square boxes with reducer. It should provide 1, Capacity: Available in 1-, 2-, 3-, 4-, and 6-port versions
2, 3, 4, or 6 ports. Must be able to accept all Leviton Mounting: Color-matched screws
QuickPort connectors. It must be made of high-
impact, fire-retardant plastic rated UL 94V-0, and be COUNTRY OF ORIGIN
cULus Listed, and compliant with ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 USA
specifications. The wallplate shall accommodate low-
voltage box eliminators for a flush mount. WARRANTY INFORMATION
For a copy of Leviton product warranties, visit
www.leviton.com/warranty.
Page 1 of 2
Leviton Network Solutions Asia / Pacific Canada Caribbean China Colombia

2222 - 222nd St. SE T +1.631.812.6228 T +1.514.954.1840 T +1.954.593.1896 T +852.2774.9876 T +57.1.743.6045
Bothell, WA 98021-4416 E infoasean@leviton.com E pcservice@leviton.com E infocaribbean@leviton.com E infochina@leviton.com E infocolombia@leviton.com
tel 1
-800-824-3005
Europe India / SAARC Mexico Middle East & Africa South Korea
tel +1-425-486-2222
T +33.6.8869.1380 T +971.4.886.4722 T +52.55.5082.1040 T +971.4.886.4722 T +82.2.3273.9963
appeng@leviton.com
E infoeurope@leviton.com E infoindia@leviton.com E lsamarketing@leviton.com E lmeinfo@leviton.com E infokorea@leviton.com
www.leviton.com
Copyright © 2015 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. Revised July 2015
41080-xxP
ELECTRONIC FILES
For CAD files, typical specs, or technical drawings (.DXF, .DWG), visit www.leviton.com.
41080-1xP 41080-2xP 41080-3xP
41080-xxP
4.53"
4.53 4.53"
4.53 4.53"
4.53
2.77"
2.77 2.77"
2.77 2.77"
2.77
.25" .25" .25"
.45"
.45 .45"
.45 .45"
.45
41080-4xP 41080-6xP
4.53"
4.53 4.53"
4.53
2.77"
2.77 2.77"
2.77
.25" .25"
.45"
.45 .45"
.45
PART NUMBERS
Description WHITE LT. ALMOND IVORY GREY BROWN BLACK
® 41080-1WP 41080-1TP 41080-1IP 41080-1GP 41080-1BP 41080-1EP
Single-Gang QuickPort Wallplate, 1 Port
Single-Gang QuickPort Wallplate, 2 Ports 41080-2WP 41080-2TP 41080-2IP 41080-2GP 41080-2BP 41080-2EP
Page 2 of 2 G15 5475
Leviton Network Solutions Asia / Pacific Canada Caribbean China Colombia

2222 - 222nd St. SE T +1.631.812.6228 T +1.514.954.1840 T +1.954.593.1896 T +852.2774.9876 T +57.1.743.6045
Bothell, WA 98021-4416 E infoasean@leviton.com E pcservice@leviton.com E infocaribbean@leviton.com E infochina@leviton.com E infocolombia@leviton.com
tel 1
-800-824-3005 Europe India / SAARC Mexico Middle East & Africa South Korea
tel +1-425-486-2222 T +33.6.8869.1380 T +971.4.886.4722 T +52.55.5082.1040 T +971.4.886.4722 T +82.2.3273.9963
appeng@leviton.com E infoeurope@leviton.com E infoindia@leviton.com E lsamarketing@leviton.com E lmeinfo@leviton.com E infokorea@leviton.com
www.leviton.com
Copyright © 2015 Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. All rights reserved. Subject to change without notice. Revised July 2015
9.5 Coaxial Module Connector, SPEC 2.1.2

Coaxial Module Connector Leviton 16362-I Receptacle (20 Amp)
ITEM # 1 COAXIAL MODULE CONNECTOR, SPEC 2.1.2, DRAWINGS E-104 & E-101
ANSI/TIA-568-C Y UL 1863
9.6 Coaxial Cable, SPEC 2.1.1

Coaxial Cable MoCSY A6QS-BVV-BOX
MoCSY®7 Broadband Coaxial Drop Cable
Specifications ITEM #2 COAXIAL CABLE, SPEC 2.1.1, DRAWINGS E-100 & E-105
MoCSY®7 75 Ohm Coaxial Drop Cable, Series 6,

A6QS-BVV-BOX Quad-Shield, 60 / 40 % Braid, PVC Jacket,
UL CATV Rated, 1000 Ft Box
General
Braid Coverage 60 % + 40 %
Cable Type Series 6
Packaging Type Box
Construction Materials
Jacket Material PVC
Black A6QS-BVV-BOX
Jacket Color Neutral A6QS-BVVN-BOX
White A6QS-BVVW-BOX
Bonded APA foil + 60 % aluminum braid
Shield Materials + non-bonded APA foil + 40 % aluminum braid
Dielectric Material Foam PE
Inner Conductor Material Copper-clad steel wire
Dimensions
Cable Length 1000 ft 305 m
Diameter Over Jacket 0.295 in 7.49 mm
Jacket Wall Thickness 0.030 in 0.76 mm
Diameter Over Tape 0.186 in 4.72 mm
Diameter Over Dielectric 0.177 in 4.49 mm
Diameter Inner Conductor 0.0403 in 1.024 mm
Length 20.5 in 520 mm
Box Width 10.6 in 270 mm
Height 20.5 in 520 mm
Total Weight 39 lbs 17.5 kg
Electrical Specifications
Operating Frequency Band 5 to 1525 MHz
Impedance 75 Ohms
Velocity 85 %
DC Loop Resistance 36.9 Ohms / kft 121 Ohms / km
Dielectric Strength 1500 V
Jacket Spark Test Voltage (rms) 2500 V
Attenuation @ 68°F (20 °C)
Freq. (MHz) db / 100 ft db / 100 m Freq. (MHz) db / 100 ft dB / 100 m
5 0.58 1.90 500 4.66 15.29
55 1.60 5.25 550 4.90 16.08
211 3.05 10.00 600 5.10 16.73
250 3.30 10.82 750 5.65 18.54
270 3.37 11.04 870 6.11 20.04
300 3.55 11.64 1000 6.55 21.49
330 3.74 12.26 1125 6.95 22.80
350 3.85 12.63 1218 7.21 23.66
400 4.15 13.61 1525 8.09 26.54
450 4.40 14.43
Standards Conformance
RoHS
Applicable SCTE 74 2011
UL / ETL Listings CATV, CM, NEC 830 BM
Specifications subject to change without notice. Visit www.pctintl.com/patents for a list of USA and
international patents. 1PreP, Innovation for the Last Mile, MoCSY, MOGO, Copper Guard, Corrosion Guard, PCT,
PCT International, Predator, TRITON and Z-Wire are trademarks, registered and otherwise, of PCT International, Inc.
Innovation for the Last Mile ®
pctintl.com © 2004-2017 PCT International, Inc. PCTSpecSheet.Coax.A6QS-BVV-BOX.20170209a

9.7 Coaxial Type F Connector, SPEC 2.1.2

Coaxial Type F Connector MULTICOM PPC EX6 Plus
ITEM # 3 COAXIAL TYPE F CONNECTOR, SPEC 2.1.2, DRAWINGS E-101 & E-104
PPC EX6 PLUS

®
Description
PPC EX6 PLUS Universal Compression Connectors for RG6 series cable are up to SCTE standards providing a
secure watertight connection and excellent pull strength with effortless installation.
Installers are faced with the problem of identifying old unmarked 60% through Quad Shield Series 6 cable, and
having to guess which connector is the best match. This results in unnecessary service calls due to the use of
the wrong connector/cable match. The unique patented design of the EX® body achieves true universality on
60% through Quad Shield for PE, and PVC jackets for RG6 series cable.
Specifications
• Bandwidth: 0 MHz to 3 GHz
• Impedance: 75 Ohms
• Return Loss: Minimum -30 dB to 3 GHz
• Insertion Loss: Less than .10 dB to 3 GHz
• Operating Voltage: 90 V (at 60 Hz continuous AC)
• Operating Temperature: -40°F to +140°F ( -40°C to +60°C)
• Cable Retention: 45 lbs (20.41 kg) minimum
• Meets or exceeds all SCTE Specifications
PPC-EX6PLUS
Multicom, Inc.
Ph: 407-331-7779
www.multicominc.com Toll Free: 800-423-2594
Fax: 407-339-0204
Email: multicom@multicominc.com
Specifications subject to change without notice © Multicom, Inc. 2017
Multicom and the Multicom logo are registered trademarks of Multicom, Inc.
10. Division 28 31 76- Fire Alarm Control and Mass
Notification Panel
Content
10.1 Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Control Unit SPEC 2.11
- Silent Knight Fire Alarm Control and Mass Notification Panel 6820 EVS
10.2 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panel SPEC 2.18.1
- Monaco Radio Transmitter and Interface Panel BT-XF
- Federal Signal Radio Transmitter and Interface UVRIH
10.3 Batteries SPEC 2.10.1
- Batteries Power Sonic PS-12350
10.4 Smoke Sensor
- Silent Knight Smoke Detectors SK-Photo
- Silent Knight Low Frequency Sounder Base BS200- LF
10.5 Addressable Interface Device SPEC 2.6
- Silent Knight Monitor Module SK-MONITOR
10.6 Local Operating Console (LOC) SPEC 2.11
- Silent Knight Local Operator Console Panel EVS-LOC
10.7 Amplifier, Pre-Amplifier, Tone Generators SPEC 2.12
- Silent Knight Amplifier EVS-INT50W

Content
10.8 Fire Alarm/ Mass Notification Speakers SPEC 2.15.1
-System Sensor Ceiling Mounts Speaker Amber Strobe SPSCWL-CLR-ALERT
- System Sensor Wall Mount Speaker SPRK
10.9 Visual Notification Appliances SPEC 2.15.2
- Silent Knight Mount Back-box SB-I/O SURFACE
-System Sensor Ceiling Mount Clear Strobe SCRL

11. Fire Alarm Control and Mass Materials
Content
11.1 Manual Station SPEC 2.14
- Silent Knight Manual Station SK-PULL-DA
11.2 Surge Protector SPEC 2.5
- Ditek Surge Protector DTK-120HW
- Ditek Surge Protector DTK-TSS3
-Ditek Voice, Data and Signaling Circuit Modular Surge Protection DTK-
2MHLP
11.3 Wiring SPEC 2.19
-Wiring 2x14 AWG Unshielded FPLR for NAC CON 666596
-Wiring 2x16 AWG Unshielded FPLR for Speaker and SLC CON 666581
11.4 Boxes and Cover Plates SPEC 3.6
-Garvin Red Boxes and Cover Plates 52181-RED, 52171-RED, 52C1-RED

10.1 Fire Alarm Control Unit Mass Notification SPEC
2.11

Control and Mass Silent Knight 6820 EVS
Notification Panel
6820 / 6820EVS
Addressable Fire/Emergency Voice System
Installation and Operation Manual
Document LS10144-001SK-E Rev: D

3/24/2020 ECN: 150823
Fire Alarm & Emergency Communication System Limitations
While a life safety system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for life and property insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system—typically made up of smoke Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm
detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate
devices, and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) with remote notifica- or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detectors may
tion capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-
a system, however, does not assure protection against property of-rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per
damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are
An emergency communication system—typically made up of an designed to protect property, not life.
automatic fire alarm system (as described above) and a life safety IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same
communication system that may include an autonomous control room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the
unit (ACU), local operating console (LOC), voice communication, connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signal-
and other various interoperable communication methods—can ing, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a developing fire
broadcast a mass notification message. Such a system, however, may damage the alarm system, compromising its ability to report a
does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life fire.
resulting from a fire or life safety event. Audible warning devices such as bells, horns, strobes, speak-
The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors ers and displays may not alert people if these devices are located
be located throughout a protected premises following the on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on
recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert peo-
Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's ple with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs,
recommendations, State and local codes, and the alcohol, or medication. Please note that:
recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System • An emergency communication system may take priority over a
Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all fire alarm system in the event of a life safety emergency.
installing dealers. This document can be found at http:// • Voice messaging systems must be designed to meet intelligibility
www.systemsensor.com/appguides/. A study by the Federal requirements as defined by NFPA, local codes, and Authorities
Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as
many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to • Language and instructional requirements must be clearly dis-
provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or seminated on any local displays.
protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or • Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in
adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of people with conditions such as epilepsy.
reasons: • Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach fire alarm signal, do not respond to or comprehend the meaning
the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or of the signal. Audible devices, such as horns and bells, can have
on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not different tonal patterns and frequencies. It is the property
sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second-floor owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training
detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor or basement fire. exercises to make people aware of fire alarm signals and
Particles of combustion or “smoke” from a developing fire may instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm signals.
not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because: • In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause
• Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, chim- temporary or permanent hearing loss.
neys, even wet or humid areas may inhibit particle or smoke A life safety system will not operate without any electrical power. If
flow. AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only
• Smoke particles may become “cold,” stratify, and not reach the for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly
ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. maintained and replaced regularly.
• Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air out- Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible
lets, such as air conditioning vents. with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for
service with your control panel.
• Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching
the detector. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises
to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily
The amount of “smoke” present may be insufficient to alarm smoke disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure,
detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at various levels backup radio transmission systems are recommended.
of smoke density. If such density levels are not created by a devel-
oping fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into The most common cause of life safety system malfunction is inad-
alarm. equate maintenance. To keep the entire life safety system in excel-
lent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the
Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limita- manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA standards. At
tions. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing chambers tend a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be followed. Envi-
to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little ronments with large amounts of dust, dirt, or high air velocity require
visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be
tend to detect fast-flaming fires better than smoldering fires. arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Mainte-
Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable nance should be scheduled as required by National and/or local fire
in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a codes and should be performed by authorized professional life
given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire. safety system installers only. Adequate written records of all inspec-
Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warning tions should be kept.
of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially Limit-D2-2016
in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by
escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, etc.).
2 6820 / 6820EVS Installation and Operation Manual P/N LS10144-001SK-E:D 3/24/2020

Installation Precautions
Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:
WARNING - Several different sources of power can be con- Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate
nected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced
power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning
be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or inter- transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce suscepti-
connecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to bility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to
install, service, or operate this unit until manuals are read and an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with
understood. the Technical Services Department if any problems are anticipated
CAUTION - System Re-acceptance Test after Software or encountered.
Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting
tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming opera- circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
tion or change in site-specific software. Re-acceptance testing is Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing,
required after any change, addition or deletion of system compo- reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all
nents, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifications,
hardware or wiring. All components, circuits, system operations, or verify that they will not interfere with battery, transformer, or printed
software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% circuit board location.
tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadver-
tently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over-tighten-
affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also ing may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact
be tested and proper system operation verified. pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal.
This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49º C/ This system contains static-sensitive components. Always
32-120º F and at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH (non-condens- ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any cir-
ing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). However, the useful life of the sys- cuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static
tem's standby batteries and the electronic components may be suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed
adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. from the unit.
Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals Units with a touchscreen display should be cleaned with a dry,
be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of clean, lint free/microfiber cloth. If additional cleaning is required,
15-27º C/60-80º F. apply a small amount of Isopropyl alcohol to the cloth and wipe
Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating clean. Do not use detergents, solvents, or water for cleaning. Do
device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. not spray liquid directly onto the display.
drop from the specified device voltage. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro-
gramming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid
damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP
operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
Precau-D2-11-2017
FCC Warning
WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- Canadian Requirements
ate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for
accordance with the instruction manual may cause interfer- radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in
ence to radio communications. It has been tested and found the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Depart-
to comply with the limits for class A computing devices pur- ment of Communications.
suant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is
designed to provide reasonable protection against such Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radio-
interference when devices are operated in a commercial electriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils
environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur
area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des
will be required to correct the interference at his or her own Communications du Canada.
expense.
eVance®, Honeywell®, Silent Knight®, and SWIFT® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks
of the Microsoft Corporation. Chrome™ and Google™ are trademarks of Google Inc. Firefox® is a registered trademark of The Mozilla Foundation.
©2020. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.
6820 / 6820EVS Installation and Operation Manual P/N LS10144-001SK-E:D 3/24/2020 3

Software Downloads
In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent
upgrades to the embedded software in our products. To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features, we
strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system.
Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application.
Documentation Feedback
Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up-to-date and accurate. If you have any comments or suggestions about our online
Help or printed manuals, you can email us.
Please include the following information:
• Product name and version number (if applicable)
• Printed manual or online Help
• Topic Title (for online Help)
• Page number (for printed manual)
• Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected
• Your suggestion for how to correct/improve documentation
Send email messages to:
FireSystems.TechPubs@honeywell.com
Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only. If you have any technical issues, please contact Technical
Services.

Table of Contents
Section 1: Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 10
1.1: Overview of Basic System...............................................................................................................................................................................10
1.1.1: Addressable Fire Alarm Control/Communicator Hardware Features ..................................................................................................10
1.1.2: Common Communication / Annunciation Link System Hardware Features .......................................................................................10
1.1.3: Software Features .................................................................................................................................................................................10
1.1.4: 6820EVS Features ................................................................................................................................................................................10
1.2: About this Manual............................................................................................................................................................................................11
1.2.1: Terms Used in this Manual...................................................................................................................................................................11
1.3: Compatible Products........................................................................................................................................................................................11
Section 2: Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements........................................................................................ 13
2.1: Federal Communications Commission (FCC).................................................................................................................................................13
2.2: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) ......................................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.1: Requirements for All Installations........................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.2: Requirements for Central Station Fire Alarm Systems ........................................................................................................................14
2.2.3: Requirements for Local Protected Fire Alarm Systems .......................................................................................................................14
2.2.4: Requirements for Remote Station Protected Fire Alarm Systems........................................................................................................14
2.2.5: Requirements for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning Equipment, NFPA 720..................................14
2.2.6: NFPA Requirements.............................................................................................................................................................................14
Section 3: Before You Begin Installation ...................................................................................................................... 16
3.1: Inventory..........................................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.2: Environmental Specifications ..........................................................................................................................................................................16
3.3: Software Downloads........................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.4: Electrical Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.5: Wiring Specifications.......................................................................................................................................................................................18
3.6: Board Assembly Diagram................................................................................................................................................................................19
3.7: Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery ..............................................................................................................................................20
3.7.1: Current Draw Worksheet Requirements...............................................................................................................................................20
3.7.2: Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices....................................................................................................................................20
3.7.3: Current Draw Worksheet for SD SLC Devices....................................................................................................................................23
3.7.4: Maximum Battery Standby Load..........................................................................................................................................................25
Section 4: Control Panel Installation ............................................................................................................................. 26
4.1: Mounting the Control Panel Cabinet ...............................................................................................................................................................26
4.1.1: Preventing Water Damage....................................................................................................................................................................26
4.1.2: Removing the 6820 / 6820EVS Assembly from the Housing..............................................................................................................26
4.1.3: Ethernet Connection .............................................................................................................................................................................26
4.2: AC Connection.................................................................................................................................................................................................26
4.3: Battery Power ..................................................................................................................................................................................................27
4.3.1: Battery Accessory Cabinet ...................................................................................................................................................................27
4.4: SBUS Wiring ...................................................................................................................................................................................................29
4.4.1: Calculating Wiring Distance for SBUS Modules.................................................................................................................................29
4.4.2: Wiring Configurations ..........................................................................................................................................................................31
4.5: 5860 Remote Annunciator Installation ............................................................................................................................................................31
4.5.1: Mounting the 5860................................................................................................................................................................................32
4.5.2: Model 5860 Connection to the Panel....................................................................................................................................................34
4.6.1: Mounting the 6855................................................................................................................................................................................35
4.6.2: Model 6855 Connection to the Panel....................................................................................................................................................38
4.7.1: Mounting the 6860................................................................................................................................................................................38
4.7.2: 6860 Connection to the Panel ...............................................................................................................................................................41
4.8: 5815XL Installation .........................................................................................................................................................................................41
4.8.1: 5815XL Connection to the Panel..........................................................................................................................................................42
4.9: 6815 Installation ..............................................................................................................................................................................................42
4.9.1: 6815 Connection to the Panel ...............................................................................................................................................................43
4.10: 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module Installation ........................................................................................................................................43
4.10.1: Selecting 5824 Options.......................................................................................................................................................................44
4.11: 5880 LED I/O Module ...................................................................................................................................................................................45
4.11.1: 5880 Board Layout .............................................................................................................................................................................45
4.11.2: 5880 Connection to Panel...................................................................................................................................................................46

Table of Contents
4.11.3: LED Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................................................46

4.11.4: Dry Contact Wiring ............................................................................................................................................................................47
4.12: 5865-3 / 5865-4 LED Annunciator Installation .............................................................................................................................................47
4.12.1: 5865 Connection to Panel...................................................................................................................................................................48
4.12.2: 5865 Mounting....................................................................................................................................................................................48
4.13: Configuring SBUS Modules..........................................................................................................................................................................50
4.13.1: Assigning SBUS Module IDs.............................................................................................................................................................50
4.13.2: SBUS Bandwidth Considerations.......................................................................................................................................................50
4.14: Telephone Connection ...................................................................................................................................................................................51
4.15: Flexputs™ I/O Circuits ..................................................................................................................................................................................51
4.15.1: Conventional Input Switch Circuits....................................................................................................................................................51
4.15.2: Class A Inputs.....................................................................................................................................................................................52
4.15.3: Installing 2-Wire Smoke Detectors ....................................................................................................................................................53
4.15.4: Installing 4-Wire Smoke Detectors ....................................................................................................................................................54
4.16: Conventional Notification Appliance ............................................................................................................................................................55
4.16.1: Class B Notification Wiring ...............................................................................................................................................................55
4.16.2: Class A Notification Wiring ...............................................................................................................................................................56
4.16.3: Auxiliary Power Installation...............................................................................................................................................................56
4.17: On-Board Relays (Conventional) ..................................................................................................................................................................57
4.17.1: Trouble Relay .....................................................................................................................................................................................57
4.17.2: Programmable Relays .........................................................................................................................................................................57
4.18: Remote Station Applications .........................................................................................................................................................................58
4.18.1: Keltron Model 3158 Installation.........................................................................................................................................................58
4.18.2: City Box Connection Using the 5220 Module ...................................................................................................................................59
4.18.3: Using the Addressable Relay Module for City Box Connection........................................................................................................60
4.18.4: NFPA 72 Polarity Reversal ................................................................................................................................................................61
4.18.5: Transmitter Activated by Dry Contacts ..............................................................................................................................................63
Section 5: Common Communication Link .................................................................................................................... 65
5.1: Hardware Features ...........................................................................................................................................................................................65
5.1.1: Panels....................................................................................................................................................................................................65
5.1.2: Wiring Options to Connect Panels .......................................................................................................................................................65
5.2: SK-NIC Connection Options ...........................................................................................................................................................................65
5.3: SK-NIC Wiring Options ..................................................................................................................................................................................66
5.3.1: Fiber Loop Modules .............................................................................................................................................................................66
5.3.2: SK-NIC Installation ..............................................................................................................................................................................67
5.4: Setting the Panel ID for each Panel .................................................................................................................................................................71
Section 6: Network Management ................................................................................................................................... 72
6.1: Network Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................................................................................72
6.1.1: Ping Panel .............................................................................................................................................................................................72
6.1.2: Data Network Status .............................................................................................................................................................................72
6.2: Network Programming ....................................................................................................................................................................................72
6.2.1: Learn Network ......................................................................................................................................................................................72
6.2.2: Edit Network Names.............................................................................................................................................................................72
6.2.3: Edit Panel ID.........................................................................................................................................................................................72
6.2.4: Computer Access ..................................................................................................................................................................................73
6.2.5: Access Codes ........................................................................................................................................................................................73
6.2.6: Communicator Options.........................................................................................................................................................................74
6.3: Voice Options...................................................................................................................................................................................................75
6.3.1: Edit Timers ...........................................................................................................................................................................................75
6.3.2: Edit Voice Commands..........................................................................................................................................................................76
6.4: Sync Network Options.....................................................................................................................................................................................77
Section 7: SK, SD and SWIFT® Wireless SLC Device Installation.............................................................................. 81
7.1: List of SK SLC Devices ..................................................................................................................................................................................81
7.2: List of SD SLC Devices ..................................................................................................................................................................................82
7.3: SWIFT® Wireless SLC Devices .....................................................................................................................................................................82
7.4: Maximum Number of Devices ........................................................................................................................................................................82
7.5: Wiring Requirements for SLC Devices ...........................................................................................................................................................83
7.5.1: Wire Sizing on 5815XL for SD Devices ..............................................................................................................................................83
7.5.2: Wire Sizing for 6815 ............................................................................................................................................................................83
7.5.3: SK Modules ..........................................................................................................................................................................................83

Table of Contents
7.5.4: Wiring 5815XL or 6815 in Class A Configuration ..............................................................................................................................84

7.6: Wiring SK SLC Detectors ...............................................................................................................................................................................85
7.7: Addressing SK SLC Devices ...........................................................................................................................................................................85
7.8: Wiring SD SLC Detectors ...............................................................................................................................................................................86
7.9: Addressing SD SLC Devices ...........................................................................................................................................................................86
7.9.1: SLC Devices with DIP Switches ..........................................................................................................................................................87
7.10: SK-WGI Wireless Gateway ...........................................................................................................................................................................87
7.10.1: Power Connections for the Gateway ..................................................................................................................................................87
Section 8: Programming Overview ................................................................................................................................ 88
8.1: JumpStart® Auto-Programming ......................................................................................................................................................................88
8.1.1: Input Points...........................................................................................................................................................................................88
8.1.2: Output Points ........................................................................................................................................................................................88
8.1.3: Running JumpStart Auto-Programming ...............................................................................................................................................88
8.2: Mapping Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................................................89
8.2.1: Input Point Mapping .............................................................................................................................................................................90
8.2.2: Output Circuit Mapping........................................................................................................................................................................91
8.2.3: Event Mapping......................................................................................................................................................................................91
8.2.4: Mapping LED Points ............................................................................................................................................................................94
8.3: Programming Using the HFSS Software Suite................................................................................................................................................94
8.4: Programming Using an Annunciator ...............................................................................................................................................................94
8.4.1: Entering / Exiting the Program Menu...................................................................................................................................................95
8.5: Programming Menu Quick Reference .............................................................................................................................................................96
Section 9: Programming ............................................................................................................................................... 104
9.1: UL 864 / UL 2572 Programming Requirements............................................................................................................................................104
9.2: Modules .........................................................................................................................................................................................................104
9.2.1: Edit Modules.......................................................................................................................................................................................104
9.2.2: Adding a Module ................................................................................................................................................................................105
9.2.3: Deleting a Module ..............................................................................................................................................................................105
9.2.4: View Module List ...............................................................................................................................................................................105
9.3: Zone ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................105
9.3.1: Edit Zone ............................................................................................................................................................................................106
9.3.2: View Zone Points ...............................................................................................................................................................................107
9.4: Group .............................................................................................................................................................................................................108
9.4.1: Edit Group ..........................................................................................................................................................................................108
9.4.2: View Group Points .............................................................................................................................................................................109
9.4.3: Edit OPG Template.............................................................................................................................................................................109
9.5: Point ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................109
9.5.1: Point Programming For 5815XL Module...........................................................................................................................................109
9.5.2: Point Programming for 6815 Module.................................................................................................................................................112
9.5.3: Point Programming For Internal or External Power Module .............................................................................................................114
9.5.4: Point Programming for 5880, 5865, EVS-50W, EVS-INT50W, EVS-100W, EVS-125W and EVS-CE4 Modules ........................116
9.5.5: Point Programming For EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM Modules...........................................................................................................116
9.6: System Options..............................................................................................................................................................................................117
9.6.1: Communication Options.....................................................................................................................................................................117
9.6.2: Time Options ......................................................................................................................................................................................120
9.6.3: Miscellaneous Options........................................................................................................................................................................121
9.6.4: Daylight Savings Options ...................................................................................................................................................................121
9.6.5: Edit Banner .........................................................................................................................................................................................122
9.6.6: SLC Family.........................................................................................................................................................................................122
9.7: JumpStart Auto-Programming .......................................................................................................................................................................122
9.8: Restore Defaults.............................................................................................................................................................................................123
9.9: VCM Maintenance.........................................................................................................................................................................................123
9.9.1: VCM Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................123
Section 10: System Operation...................................................................................................................................... 124
10.1: User and Installer Default Codes .................................................................................................................................................................124
10.2: Annunciator Description ..............................................................................................................................................................................124
10.2.1: LCD Display.....................................................................................................................................................................................125
10.2.2: Banner...............................................................................................................................................................................................125
10.3: Menu System ...............................................................................................................................................................................................125
10.3.1: Main Menu Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................125

Table of Contents
10.3.2: Using the Menus ...............................................................................................................................................................................126

10.4: Basic Operation ...........................................................................................................................................................................................126
10.4.1: Setting Time and Date ......................................................................................................................................................................126
10.4.2: Disable / Enable a Point....................................................................................................................................................................126
10.4.3: View Event History ..........................................................................................................................................................................126
10.4.4: Conduct a Fire Drill ..........................................................................................................................................................................127
10.4.5: Conduct an Indicator Test.................................................................................................................................................................127
10.4.6: Conduct a Walk Test ........................................................................................................................................................................127
10.4.7: Manual AlarmNet Registration.........................................................................................................................................................127
10.4.8: Silence Alarms or Troubles ..............................................................................................................................................................127
10.4.9: Reset Alarms.....................................................................................................................................................................................128
10.4.10: Check Detector Sensitivity Through Point Status ..........................................................................................................................128
10.4.11: View Status of a Point ....................................................................................................................................................................130
10.4.12: View Alarms or Troubles ...............................................................................................................................................................130
10.4.13: System Information ........................................................................................................................................................................130
10.5: Event Priority...............................................................................................................................................................................................130
10.5.1: System Control .................................................................................................................................................................................130
10.5.2: System Override ...............................................................................................................................................................................130
10.5.3: Event Priority....................................................................................................................................................................................131
10.5.4: Priority Rules ....................................................................................................................................................................................131
10.5.5: Other Priority Considerations ...........................................................................................................................................................131
10.6: Operation Mode Behavior ...........................................................................................................................................................................132
10.6.1: Multi-Site Annunciator and Multi-Site User Access........................................................................................................................134
10.7: Releasing Operations ...................................................................................................................................................................................134
10.7.1: Single Interlock Zone Releasing.......................................................................................................................................................136
10.7.2: Double Interlock Zone Releasing .....................................................................................................................................................136
10.8: Smoke Alarm Verification ...........................................................................................................................................................................137
10.9: Function Keys..............................................................................................................................................................................................137
10.9.1: Recording an F-Key Macro ..............................................................................................................................................................137
10.9.2: Aborting an F-Key Macro Recording Session..................................................................................................................................137
10.9.3: Erasing an F-Key Macro...................................................................................................................................................................137
10.9.4: Using a Recorded F-Key Macro .......................................................................................................................................................137
10.9.5: F-Key Status Event ...........................................................................................................................................................................137
10.9.6: F-Key Map Inhibit ............................................................................................................................................................................137
Section 11: Emergency Voice System Operation....................................................................................................... 138
11.1: Overview......................................................................................................................................................................................................138
11.2: LOC Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................................................138
11.2.1: Keys and LEDs .................................................................................................................................................................................138
11.2.2: Gaining EVS Control........................................................................................................................................................................139
11.2.3: Manual EVS......................................................................................................................................................................................140
11.2.4: Microphone Mode ............................................................................................................................................................................140
11.2.5: Message Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................................140
11.2.6: Custom EVS Event ...........................................................................................................................................................................140
11.2.7: Passing EVS Control ........................................................................................................................................................................141
11.2.8: Exit EVS Control Menu....................................................................................................................................................................141
11.2.9: Relinquish EVS Control ...................................................................................................................................................................141
11.2.10: EVS Reset .......................................................................................................................................................................................141
11.3: EVS Super User ...........................................................................................................................................................................................141
11.4: EVS Point Functionality ..............................................................................................................................................................................141
11.4.1: EVS Point Activations......................................................................................................................................................................142
11.4.2: EVS-VCM & EVS-RVM Points ......................................................................................................................................................142
11.5: Amplifier Programming ...............................................................................................................................................................................142
11.5.1: Adding an Amplifier.........................................................................................................................................................................142
11.5.2: Editing an Amplifier .........................................................................................................................................................................142
11.6: LOC Programming.......................................................................................................................................................................................142
11.6.1: Adding an LOC.................................................................................................................................................................................142
11.6.2: Editing an LOC.................................................................................................................................................................................143
11.7: Using the Microphone..................................................................................................................................................................................143
11.7.1: Microphone Functionality ................................................................................................................................................................143
11.7.2: Custom EVS Event ...........................................................................................................................................................................143
11.7.3: Fire Page ...........................................................................................................................................................................................143

Table of Contents
11.7.4: Emergency Page ...............................................................................................................................................................................143

11.7.5: Paging ...............................................................................................................................................................................................144
11.8: Recording Custom Messages.......................................................................................................................................................................144
11.8.1: Recording Messages 1-15 Using Aux Audio Input ..........................................................................................................................145
11.8.2: Recording Messages 1-15 Using the Microphone............................................................................................................................146
11.8.3: Erasing User Message.......................................................................................................................................................................147
11.8.4: Using HFSS Voice Message Load Software ....................................................................................................................................148
Section 12: Reporting ................................................................................................................................................... 149
12.1: Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel.............................................................................................................................................149
12.2: SIA / Panels PI Modifier Reporting:............................................................................................................................................................158
12.3: SIA – Panel Communicator: ........................................................................................................................................................................159
Section 13: Testing and Troubleshooting................................................................................................................... 160
13.1: Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................................................................................................................160
13.2: Periodic Testing and Maintenance ...............................................................................................................................................................161
13.3: Event History ...............................................................................................................................................................................................161
13.4: Built-in Troubleshooting and Testing Tools ................................................................................................................................................161
13.4.1: SLC Device Locator .........................................................................................................................................................................162
13.4.2: SLC Multiple Locator.......................................................................................................................................................................162
13.4.3: I/O Point Control ..............................................................................................................................................................................162
13.4.4: Earth Fault Resistance ......................................................................................................................................................................163
Section 14: Installation Records .................................................................................................................................. 164
14.1: Detector and Module Point Record .............................................................................................................................................................164
Appendix A: Compatible Devices ................................................................................................................................ 167
A.1: Notification Appliances ................................................................................................................................................................................167
A.2: Two Wire Detectors ......................................................................................................................................................................................173
A.3: Four-Wire Smoke Detectors/Devices (UL Listed)........................................................................................................................................175
A.4: Door Holders (UL Listed).............................................................................................................................................................................176
A.5: Relays (UL Listed)........................................................................................................................................................................................176
A.6: Compatible 520Hz Signaling Speakers ........................................................................................................................................................177
A.7: Compatible 520Hz Low Frequency Bases....................................................................................................................................................177
Appendix B: Editing Text Using the Built-In Programmer......................................................................................... 178
B.1: Characters Used for Editing Text ..................................................................................................................................................................178
B.2: Example Name Edit ......................................................................................................................................................................................178
Appendix C: Expanded Receiver/Panel Relationship ................................................................................................ 179
Appendix D: Cadence Patterns .................................................................................................................................... 181

Section 1: Introduction
The 6820 Fire Alarm Control/Communicator is an addressable fire control system that meets the requirements of the UL 864 Standard.
The 6820EVS integrates an Emergency Voice System that meets the requirements of UL 864 and UL 2572.
1.1 Overview of Basic System

The 6820 and 6820EVS Basic System is an addressable system with a built-in annunciator that can also be used to program the system.
1.1.1 Addressable Fire Alarm Control/Communicator Hardware Features

• The 6820 and 6820EVS panel contains one built-in Signaling Line Circuit (SLC), which supports up to 159 SK sensors and 159 SK
modules or 127 SD SLC devices. Additional SLC loops can be added to increase the overall point capacity.
• Additional 6815 SLC expanders supports 159 SK sensors and 159 SK modules per loop for a maximum of 1110 points per 6820 or
6820EVS control panel.
• Additional 5815XL SLC expander supports only SD Protocol for a maximum of 635 points per 6820 or 6820EVS control panel.
• 6.0A of output power is available through 6 sets of terminals used for notification. Each circuit is power-limited per UL 864 and can
source up to 3.0A (total output power must not exceed 6.0A). The constant auxiliary power load must not exceed 3.0A max for
normal standby.
• Built-in dual phone-line, Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter (DACT), IP or optional cellular technologies.
• Reports events to the Central Station by point or by zone.
• UL Listed for Pre-action and Deluge Releasing Systems.
• Dedicated Form C trouble relay and two general purpose Form C programmable relays.
• Basic system operation can be performed using a key or a user code.
• Can be used with up to 16 Model 6860, 5860, or 6855 Remote Annunciators in any combination. (sold separately).
• Supports the 5865-3, 5865-4, and 5880 in any combination for a total of eight devices installed on one control panel.
• Printing of the Event Log available through the Model 5824 Serial/Parallel Printer Interface Module.
• Supports conventional 2-wire & 4-wire detectors using the 2 Flexput™ circuits.
• Add six Flexput™ circuits with each 5895XL Intelligent Power Module. See the note below.
• Add four notification/auxiliary power circuits with each 5496 Intelligent Power Module. See the note below.
NOTE: The system can support a maximum of 16 Intelligent Power modules, either the 5895XL or 5496, in any combination.
1.1.2 Common Communication / Annunciation Link System Hardware Features

The common communications and annunciation link allows up to 17 of the 6700, 6808, 6820, and 6820EVS panels to be connected via
copper or fiber-optic cable, so that a designated panel is the communicator for all panels in the link. This is not a true peer-to-peer net-
work and will not perform like one.
• The default Common communications link setup can contain up to 17- 6820 / 6820EVS panels connected.
• Common communications link support for up to 17 Sites.
• Each building is referred to as a “site”.
• Panels can be interconnected using Class B or Class A topology.
• Use the SK-NIC Network Interface Card as a common communications link. Copper wire or fiber-optic cable panel connectivity
can be used within the same linked system.
• The common communication and annunciation architecture allows a designated panel to be the communicator for all the panels in
the link.
1.1.3 Software Features

• Advanced smoke detector features:
– Automatic drift compensation
– Maintenance alert region
– Point status meets calibrated smoke test requirements for NFPA 72
• “JumpStart” feature used for easy programming
• 999 software zones, 999 output groups
• Non-volatile event history stores 1000 events
• A choice of output patterns available for notification outputs, including Temp 4 and ANSI 3.41 temporal signal.
• Built-in synchronization appliance support used for AMSECO, Gentex®, System Sensor®, and Wheelock.®
1.1.4 6820EVS Features
• The EVS-VCM has a built-in Digital Message Repeater.
• 15 EVS messages.
• SBUS addressable amplifier. The system can support a combination of up to eight EVS-50W, EVS-125W, EVS-INT50W or EVS-
100W amplifiers for a maximum of 1000 watts per system.
• On-board supervised microphone.
• 6820EVS can support up to four EVS-LOC's (Local Operator Consoles).
• Single enclosure for both Fire and Emergency Control System components.
• Support for one EVS-VCM.
About this Manual Introduction
1.2 About this Manual

This manual is intended to be a complete reference for all installation and operation tasks for the 6820* and 6820EVS**. Please let us
know if the manual does not meet your needs in any way. We value your feedback!
* All references to 6820 within this manual are applicable to the 6820EVS.
** Additional installation instructions on the 6820/EVS and accessories can be found in the EVS Series Installation Manual,
P/N LS10062-001-SK-E.
1.2.1 Terms Used in this Manual

The following terminology is used with the above mentioned control panels:
Term Description
SLC Signaling line circuit
Module The term module is used for all hardware devices except for SLC addressable devices and notification
appliances. This includes the 6820 or 6820EVS panel itself and the built-in power supply. It also refers
to any (optional) 5815XL or 6815 SLC expansion modules.
Input Point An addressable sensing device, such as a smoke or heat detector or a contact monitor device.
Input Zone A protected area made up of input points.
Output Point A notification point or circuit for notification appliances. Relay circuits and auxiliary power circuits are
(or “Output Circuit”) also considered output points.
Output Group (OPG) A group of output points. Operating characteristics are common to all output points in the group.
Output (or “Cadence”) Pattern The pattern that the output will use, for example, Constant, March Code, ANSI 3.41. Applies to zones
and special system events. See “Cadence Patterns” on page 181 for additional information.
Mapping Mapping is the process of specifying which outputs are activated when certain events occur in the
system. Section “Mapping Overview” on page 89 explains mapping in detail.
EVS Emergency Voice System.
Common Communication Link Up to 17 panels can be linked. Consist of any combination of 17 panels of these model numbers:6700,
6808, 6820, or 6820EVS. For reporting purposes only. Not a peer-to-peer networked system.
SWIFT Smart Wireless Integrated Fire Technology
1.3 Compatible Products

Table 1.1 lists the products available from Honeywell Silent Knight for use with the 6820 and 6820EVS.
Type of Device Model Description
SK Addressable See Section 7.1 for a list of compatible devices.
SLC Devices
SD Addressable See Section 7.2 for a list of compatible devices.
SLC Devices
SWIFT Wireless See Section 7.3 for a list of compatible devices
SLC Devices
5815XL (Rev H or higher) Allows an additional 127 SD devices to be added to the system for a maximum of 635
SLC Expander points. Supports SD devices only.
6815 SLC Expander Allows an additional 159 SK modules and 159 SK sensors to be added to the system
for a maximum of 1110 points. Supports System Sensor SK devices only.
5824 Serial/Parallel Printer Allows a printer to be attached for the on-site event logging. Maximum of four 5824s
Interface Module per control panel.
5895XL (Rev F or higher) Provides additional power, six Flexput™ circuits, and 5895XLs and 5496s can be
Intelligent Power Module two Form C relays. Max. 16 per system see Model used in any combination, up
Other Modules 5895XL Installation Instructions P/N 151142. to a total of 16 devices on
5496 (Rev F or higher) Provides 4 additional Notification Appliance one system.
Intelligent Power Module Circuits/Auxiliary power. (Up to 16 per system).
6860 LCD Annunciator 4x40 backlit LCD remote fire annunciator up to 16 up to a total of 16 in any
any combination of annunciators per system combination on one system.
5860 LCD Annunciator 4x20 LCD remote fire annunciator. 5860 is gray;
5860R is red.
6855 LCD Annunciator 4x20 LCD remote fire annunciator
Table 1.1 6820 or 6820EVS Compatible Products

Introduction Compatible Products
Type of Device Model Description

5860TG and 5860TR Trim Trim ring kits for surface mounting the 5860 annunciator. 5860TG is gray; 5860TR is
Ring Kit red.
5865-3 and 5865-4 LED LED annunciator can display up to 30 LEDs (15 red 5865-3, 5865-4, and 5880
Annunciator and 15 yellow). 5865-4 has key switches for silence can be used in any
and reset, and a system trouble LED. combination, up to a total of
5880 (Rev C or higher) Driver for up to 40 LEDs. Interfaces with customized eight devices on one panel.
LED I/O Module annunciator boards. In addition, the 5880 has eight
generic switch input points.
5883 General Purpose Relay Provides 10 Form C relays. Designed to be driven by the 5880. Up to four, 5883s can
Module be used with each 5880 module.
EVS-VCM Voice Control Module For use with 6820EVS only.
EVS-SW24 24 switch expander Refer to the EVS-Series
EVS-50W 50 watt audio amplifier Installation Manual P/N
LS10062-001SK-E for more
Other Modules EVS-125W 125 watt audio amplifier
information on these
EVS-100W 50/100 watt Intelligent amplifier accessories.
EVS-100WBU Backup daughter card
EVS-CE4 Provides 4 additional audio circuits for the EVS-50W
or EVS-125W.
EVS-RVM Remote Voice Microphone used with the
6820EVS. Max 4
EVS-INT50W 50 watt Internal amplifier
SK-NIC Network Interface Card Refer to
LS10172-001SK-E
SK-FML Fiber-Optic Multi Mode, Receiver Refer to
SK-FSL Fiber-Optic Single Mode, Transmitter LS10178-001SK-E
EVS-LOC Local Operating Console Refer to
LS10189-001SK-E
WSK-WGI Wireless Gateway LS10036-000SK-E
WSK-PHOTO Wireless photo with 4" base
WSK-PHOTO-T Wireless Multi criteria photoelectric smoke detector
with thermal (135°F) with 4" base
Wireless WSK-HEAT-ROR Wireless heat, ROR/ 135° fixed with 4" base
WSK-HEAT Wireless Heat, 135° fixed with 4" base
WSK-MONITOR Wireless monitor module
WSK-RELAY Wireless relay module
B210W 6" wireless base
7860 Telephone Cord RJ31X cord for connecting phone line to the 6820/EVS.
HFSS Honeywell Fire For communication and panel programming with a Windows-based computer.
Software Suite Enables remote viewing of detector status and event history.
RBB Remote Battery Box for mounting backup batteries that are too large to fit into the
Misc.
main FACP cabinet.
Dimensions are 16" W x 10" H x 6" D (40.64 cm W x 25.4 cm H x 15.24 cm D)
CELL-MOD Cellular board with Plastic Enclosure Refer to
CELL-CAB-SK Cellular board with Metal Enclosure, lock & key LS10182-001SK-E
Table 1.1 6820 or 6820EVS Compatible Products (Continued)

Section 2: Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements
2.1 Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
1. The following information must be provided to the Telephone Company before the 6820 or 6820EVS can be connected to the
phone lines:
A Manufacturer: Honeywell Silent Knight
B Model Number: 6820 and 6820EVS
C FCC registration number: US: HS9AL10A2100
Ringer equivalence: 1.0A
D Type of jack: RJ31X
E Facility Interface Codes: Loop Start: 02LS2
F Service Order Code: 9.0F
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the Requirements adopted by ACTA. On the inside cover of this equipment
is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier. If requested, this information must be provided to the Telephone
Company.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part
68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord (not provided) and modular jack must be used with this
product. It is designed to be used with a modular jack that is also compliant.
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) provided on this installation sheet is used to determine the number of devices that may be con-
nected to the public switched telephone network. This number must not exceed 5.0. Since this product has an REN of 1.0A, the number
of devices is limited. The REN number is embedded in the FCC registration number as 10A.
If the 6820 or 6820EVS causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company will notify you in advance that the temporarily
discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the Telephone Company will notify the customer as
soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the
equipment. If this happens, the Telephone Company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to
maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with the 6820 or 6820EVS, for repair or warranty information, please contact Honeywell Silent Knight at 1-
800-328-0103 or www.silentknight.com. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company may
request that you disconnect the 6820 or 6820EVS until the problem has been resolved.
This product cannot be adjusted or repaired in the field. It must be returned to the factory for service.
This equipment is not designed for use with party line service. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. You may contact
the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
Since the 6820/6820EVS is a commercial fire alarm panel, it must be connected upstream of all other equipment utsing the phone lines.
If you have questions about the installation, contact your Telephone Company or a qualified installer.
WARNING: This Device has been verified to comply with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
! (1) This device may not cause radio interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
CAUTION: To ensure proper operation, this equipment must be installed according to the enclosed installation instructions. To verify that
! the equipment is operating properly and can successfully report an alarm, this equipment must be tested immediately after installation, and
periodically thereafter, according to the enclosed test instructions.
CAUTION: IN ORDER FOR “ALARM DIALING EQUIPMENT” TO BE ABLE TO SEIZE THE PHONE LINE TO REPORT AN ALARM OR
OTHER EVENT WHEN OTHER CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT (TELEPHONE, ANSWERING SYSTEM, COMPUTER MODEM, ETC.)
CONNECTED TO THE SAME LINE IS IN USE, “ALARM DIALING EQUIPMENT” MUST BE CONNECTED TO A PROPERLY INSTALLED
RJ31X JACK. THE RJ31X JACK MUST BE CONNECTED IN SERIES WITH, AND AHEAD OF, ALL OTHER EQUIPMENT ATTACHED TO
THE SAME PHONE LINE. SERIES INSTALLATION OF AN RJ31X JACK IS DEPICTED IN THE FIGURE BELOW. IF YOU HAVE ANY
QUESTIONS CONCERNING THESE INSTRUCTIONS, YOU SHOULD CONSULT YOUR TELEPHONE COMPANY OR A QUALIFIED
INSTALLER ABOUT INSTALLING THE NECESSARY JACK AND ALARM DIALING EQUIPMENT FOR YOU.

Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
2.2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

2.2.1 Requirements for All Installations
General requirements are described in this section. When installing an individual device, refer to the specific section of the manual for
additional requirements. The following subsections list specific requirements for each type of installation (for example, Central Station
Fire Alarm systems, Local Protected Fire Alarm systems, and so on). See Section 10.7 for information on releasing operation.
1. All field wiring must be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
2. Use the addressable smoke detectors specified in Section 7.2 (SD devices) or Section 7.1 (SK devices) of this manual and/or
conventional detectors listed in the compatibility chart. (See Appendix A).
3. Use UL Listed notification appliances compatible with the 6820 or 6820EVS from those specified in Appendix A of this manual.
4. A full system checkout must be performed any time the panel is programmed.
Restricted Options:
• The loss of AC signal is defaulted to 3 hours. However, the system allows settings from 0 - 30 hours. For UL certified installations,
this number must be set from 1 to 3 hours.
• The system allows the use of non-latching spot type smoke detectors. This feature may not be used in commercial applications,
whereby a general alarm is sounded. It is intended for elevator recall, door holding applications, and hotel/motel room applications.
• The system allows the Alarm Verification time to be set from 60 to 250 seconds. For UL certified installations, the setting must be a
minimum of 60 seconds.
• The systems allows the Auto-resound time to be set to 24 or 4 hours. For UL certified installations that are using SWIFT devices,
the value must be set to 4 hours.
• Call forwarding shall not be used.
• When two count is used: detector spacing shall be cut in half, you shall not use the alarm verification feature, and no delay shall be
used.
• P.A.S. (positive alarm sequence) feature shall be used only with automatic detectors.
2.2.2 Requirements for Central Station Fire Alarm Systems
1. Use both phone lines. Enable phone line monitors for both lines.
2. You must program a phone number and a test time so that the 6820/6820EVS shall automatically initiate and complete a test signal
transmission sequence to its associated receiver at least once every 6 hours.
3. The AC Loss Hours option must be set from 1-3 hours.
4. If using wired Ethernet or cellular, you must program the corresponding account/subscriber ID and a test time, so that the FACP
shall automatically initiate a test signal transmission sequence to its associated receiver at least once every 6 hours.
2.2.3 Requirements for Local Protected Fire Alarm Systems
Use at least one UL listed supervised notification appliance.
2.2.4 Requirements for Remote Station Protected Fire Alarm Systems

1. Do not exceed the current draw load restrictions shown in Section “Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery” on page 20.
2. The AC Loss Hours option must be set from 1-3 hours.
2.2.5 Requirements for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Warning
Equipment, NFPA 720
When using the carbon monoxide detection, the system must be monitored by a Supervising Station.
2.2.6 NFPA Requirements

The following table lists the minimum configuration to meet the NFPA requirements.
Remote Central Emergency

Model/Module Description Local Releasing Auxiliary
Station Station Signaling
068200CB Enclosure Y Y Y Y Y Y
068080 Motherboard Y Y Y Y Y Y
RA-100BD 4 x20 display Y Y Y Y Y Y
5815XL SLC Expander O O O O O O
6815 SLC Expander O O O O O O
SK-NIC Network card O O O O O O
SK-FML/ -FSL Fiber module O O O O O O
7644 Pol Rev device N N Y N N N
Table 2.1 NFPA Requirements for 6820

Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Agency Listings, Approvals, and Requirements
Remote Central Emergency

Model/Module Description Local Releasing Auxiliary
Station Station Signaling
5220 City tie, Pol. Rev N N Y Y N N
Device
Keltron 3158 Rev Pol Module N N Y Y N N
Cell-Mod/Cell-Cab-SK1 Cellular transmitter N N N Y N
Y = YES, N = NO, O = OPTIONAL
1. When configured for Emergency relocation and evacuation equipment the system must meet Local configuration (Model 6820EVS) with
a minimum of one amplifier (EVS-50W/EVS-125W or EVS-INT50W) and one Voice Control Module (Model EVS-VCM).
Table 2.1 NFPA Requirements for 6820 (Continued)
Remote Mass Notification

Model/Module Description CS Local Auxiliary EVAC5
Station (In-Building)5
068200 Motherboard Y Y Y Y Y Y
RA-100BD Control unit operator Y Y Y Y Y Y
interface
00VIP-50CB Amplifier Enclosure O O O O Y O
00VIP-125CB Amplifier Enclosure O O O O Y O
122774 Control unit enclosure Y Y Y Y Y Y
VIP/EVS-50W 50W Amp1 O O O O Y YO
VIP/EVS-50WHV 50W Amp1 O O O O Y Y
EVS-125W 125W amp1 O O O O Y Y
1
EVS-125HV/VIP- 125W Amp O O O O Y Y
125HV
EVS-INT50W Internal 50W1 Amp O O O O Y Y
EVS-VCM Voice Control Module2 O O O O Y O
VIP-SW16 Switch annunciator O O O O O O
EVS-SW24 Switch annunciator O O O O O Y
EVS-CE4 Speaker expander mod3 O O O O O O
VIP-RM / EVS-RVM Remote Microphone O O O O O O
Module4
5815XL SLC Expander O O O O O O
6815 SLC Expander O O O O O O
ECS-NVCM Network Voice Card O O O O O O
SK-NIC Network Card O O O O O O
SK-FML / -FSL Fiber Module O O O O O O
Y = YES, N = NO, O = OPTIONAL
1. A maximum of eight 50/125 Watts Amplifiers for a maximum of 1000 Watts per EVS System.
2. A maximum of one Voice Control Module per EVS System.
3. A maximum of one Speaker Expander Module per Model EVS-50W/EVS-125W.
4. A maximum of two Remote Microphone modules per EVS System.
5. When configured for Emergency relocation and evacuation equipment the system must meet Local configuration (Model 6820EVS) with
a minimum of one amplifier (Model EVS-50W/EVS-125W or EVS-INT50W) and one Voice Control Module (Model EVS-VCM).
Table 2.2 NFPA Requirements for 6820EVS

Section 3: Before You Begin Installation
This section of the manual is intended to help you plan your tasks to facilitate a smooth installation. Please read this section thoroughly,
especially if you are installing a 6820 or 6820EVS panel for the first time.
3.1 Inventory
When the 6820 or 6820EVS shipment is received, check that all the parts have been included in the shipment. The shipment consist of
one of each of the following:
• main circuit board with display
• backbox with door
• plastic bag containing two keys, screws, cables, and ten 4.7K ohm end-of-line resistors
• manual
3.2 Environmental Specifications
It is important to protect the 6820/6820EVS control panel from water. To prevent water damage, the following precautions should be
FOLLOWED when installing the units:
• Intended for indoor use in dry locations only.
• Do not mount directly on exterior walls, especially masonry walls (condensation).
• Do not mount directly on exterior walls below grade (condensation).
• Protect from plumbing leaks.
• Protect from splash caused by sprinkler system inspection ports.
• Do not mount in areas with humidity-generating equipment (such as dryers, production machinery).
• When selecting a location to mount the 6820/ 6820EVS control panel, the unit should be mounted where it will NOT be exposed to:
– temperatures outside the range of 0°C-49°C (32°F-120°F) or
– humidity exceeding 93% non-condensing.
3.3 Software Downloads
In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent
upgrades to the embedded software in our products.
To ensure that you install and program the latest features, we strongly recommend that you download the most current version of soft-
ware for each product prior to commissioning any system.
Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application.
HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite software is available at www.silentknight.com.
3.4 Electrical Specifications
Rating Earth
Terminal Label Description Ground
Voltage Current Faults
L AC input (hot) 120 VAC, 60 Hz 3.3 A N/A
Earth ground N/A N/A N/A
N AC input (neutral) 120 VAC, 60 Hz 3.3 A N/A
– NAC 6 Flexput™ Circuits 24 VDC 3.0A notification and auxiliary power circuits 0Ω
+ 100 mA for initiation circuits
– NAC 5 Flexput™ Circuits 24 VDC 3.0A notification and auxiliary power circuits 0Ω
+ 100 mA for initiation circuits
– NAC 4 NAC Circuits 24 VDC 3.0A notification and auxiliary power circuits 0Ω
+
+
+
+
B SBUS OUT SBUS communication 5 VDC 100 mA 0Ω
A
+ SBUS power 24 VDC 1.0 A
-
Table 3.1 Terminal Descriptions and Electrical Specification

Electrical Specifications Before You Begin Installation
Rating Earth
Terminal Label Description Ground
Voltage Current Faults
B SBUS IN Used for Class A installations 0Ω
A
+
-
B EXT. Comm Cellular Connection input 0Ω
A
+ 55 mA, 100 mA
-
N.C. RELAY 1 General Purpose Relay 1 24 VDC 2.5 A, resistive N/A
C
N.O.
N.C. RELAY 2 General Purpose Relay 2 24 VDC 2.5 A, resistive N/A
C
N.O.
N.C. TROUBLE Trouble Relay 24 VDC 2.5 A, resistive N/A
C
N.O.
SC- L1 SLC terminals 32 VDC 150 mA 0Ω
SC+ SLC OUT
SC- SLC Programming Terminal (-) 32 VDC 150 mA 0Ω

SC+ SLC Programming Terminal (+) 32 VDC 150 mA
SC- L2 Used for Class A installations 0Ω
SC+ SLC IN
Ring Phone Line 1 Telco Ring N/A 0Ω
Tip Phone Line 1 Telco Tip
Ring Phone Line 1 Premises Ring
Tip Phone Line 1 Premises Tip
Ring Phone Line 2 Telco Ring N/A 0Ω
Tip Phone Line 2 Telco Tip
Ring Phone Line 2 Premises Ring
Tip Phone Line 2 Premises Tip
P7 Data Used for SK-NIC 24 VDC 21 mA 0Ω
Network
Table 3.1 Terminal Descriptions and Electrical Specification (Continued)

Wiring Specifications Before You Begin Installation
3.5 Wiring Specifications

Induced noise (transfer of electrical energy from one wire to another) can interfere with telephone communication or cause false alarms.
To avoid induced noise, follow these guidelines:
• Isolate input wiring from high current output and power wiring. Do not pull one multi-conductor cable for the entire panel. Instead,
separate the wiring as follows:
High voltage AC power Terminals

SLC loops In/Out Terminals
POTS reporting input/output Phone line circuits, TELCO
Notification circuits NAC 1-6
SBUS SBUS1 In/Out Terminals, Cellular
communication
Relay circuits Trouble, Relay 1, Relay 2 Terminals
• Do not pull wires from different groups through the same conduit. If you must run them together, do so for as short a distance as
possible or use shielded cable. Connect the shield to earth ground at the panel. You must route high and low voltages separately.
• Route the wiring around the inside perimeter of the cabinet. It should not cross the circuit board where it could induce noise into the
sensitive microelectronics or pick up unwanted RF noise from the high speed circuits. See Figure 3.1 for an example.
• High frequency noise, such as that produced by the inductive reactance of a speaker or bell, can also be reduced by running the wire
through ferrite shield beads or by wrapping it around a ferrite toroid.
Figure 3.1 Wire Routing Example for 6820/EVS

Board Assembly Diagram Before You Begin Installation
3.6 Board Assembly Diagram
AC Power
Input
NAC
Circuits
Flexput
Relays
Trouble
Relay
SBUS
In/Out
Battery SLC SLC Phone Lines

Connection PGM EXT. COMM
Figure 3.2 Model 6820/EVS Assembly

Figure 3.2 shows the circuit boards and annunciator. If you should need to remove the control board for repair, remove the nuts that hold
the heat sink bracket into the cabinet. Then, lift the control board out of the cabinet.

Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery Before You Begin Installation
3.7 Calculating Current Draw and Standby Battery

This section describes how you determine the current draw and standby battery needs if you are using SK addressable devices
(Table 3.2) or SD addressable devices (Table 3.3).
3.7.1 Current Draw Worksheet Requirements
1. The following steps must be taken when you determine the 6820/6820EVS current draw and standby battery requirements. You
will use the Current Draw Worksheet to determine current draw and standby battery requirements. Use Table 3.2 if
installing SK SLC Devices and uxd Table 3.3 if installing SD SLC Devices. For the 6820 / 6820EVS, the worst case current draw is
listed for the panel, addressable devices, and all SBUS expanders. Fill-in the number of addressable devices and expanders that will
be used in the system and compute the current draw requirements for alarm and standby. Record this information in the Current
Draw Worksheet on Line A.
2. Add up the current draw for all auxiliary devices and record in the table on Line B.
3. Add up the current draw for all notification appliances and record in the table on Line C.
4. For notification appliances and auxiliary devices not mentioned in the manual, refer to the device manual for the current ratings.
5. Make sure that the total alarm current you calculated, including the current for the panel itself, does not exceed 6.0 A. This is the
maximum alarm current for the 6820 / 6820EVS control panel.
If the current is above 6.0 A, you will need to use a notification power expander(s) such as the Honeywell Silent Knight Model,
5495 or the 5895XL intelligent power expander, to distribute the power loads so that the 6820 / 6820EVS or the power expanders
do not exceed their power ratings.
Refer to the Current Draw Worksheets provided with the 5495 or the 5895XL manuals so you do not exceed their power ratings.
6. Complete the remaining instructions in the appropriate Current Draw Worksheet for determining battery size requirements.
3.7.2 Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices
Use Table 3.2 to determine current requirements during alarm/battery standby operation SK SLC devices are installed. The 6820EVS
FACP supports up to a total of 1110 SLC devices, consisting of any combination of Sensors and Modules.6
Standby Alarm
Device # of Devices Current per Device
Current Current
For each device use this formula: This column X This column = Current per number of devices.
1 Standby: 190 mA 190 mA
Fire Panel (battery current draw)
Alarm: 250 mA 250 mA
Addressable SLC Detectors
SK-PHOTO Standby/Alarm: .30 mA1 mA mA
SK-PHOTO-T mA mA
SK-HEAT mA mA
SK-HEAT-HT mA mA
SK-ACCLIMATE mA mA
SK-HEAT-ROR mA mA
SK-DUCT2 (includes PhotoR) mA mA
SLC Standby: 200µA mA
SK-PHOTO-W
Alarm: 4.5mA mA
SK-PHOTO-R-W
Alarm: 4.5mA mA
SK-PHOTO-T-W
Alarm: 4.5mA mA
SK-HEAT-W
Alarm: 4.5mA mA
SK-HEAT-ROR-W
Alarm: 4.5mA mA
SK-HEAT-HT-W
Alarm: 4.5mA mA
SLC Standby/Alarm: 2 mA
SK-BEAM (without integral test) Aux. Pwr Standby: 2 mA mA
Alarm: 8.5 mA mA
SLC Standby/Alarm: 2 mA mA mA
SK-BEAM-T3(with integral test) Aux. Pwr Standby: 2 mA mA
Alarm: 8.5 mA mA
SLC Standby: .30 mA mA
SK-FIRE-CO
Alarm: 7.2 mA mA
Table 3.2 Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices

Standby Alarm
Current Current
Addressable SLC Module
SK-MONITOR Standby/Alarm: .375 mA mA mA
SK-MINIMON mA mA
SK-PULL-SA mA mA
SK-PULL-DA mA mA
SK-MONITOR-2 Standby/Alarm: .75 mA mA mA
SK-MONITOR-10 Standby/Alarm: 3.5 mA mA mA
SLC Standby: .375 mA mA
Alarm: .375 mA mA
SK-CONTROL
Aux Pwr Standby: 1.7 mA mA
Alarm: 7 mA mA
SLC Standby: 2.25 mA mA
Alarm: 2.25 mA mA
SK-CONTROL-6
Aux Pwr Standby: 8 mA mA
Alarm: 20 mA mA
SK-RELAY Standby/Alarm: .255 mA mA mA
SK-RELAY-6 Standby/Alarm: 1.45 mA mA mA
Standby: 1.3 mA mA
SK-RELAYMON-2
Alarm: 24 mA mA
Aux Pwr Standby 12mA mA
SK-ZONE Alarm 90mA mA
SLC Standby/Alarm .27mA mA mA
Aux Pwr Standby 50mA mA
SK-ZONE-6 Alarm 270mA mA
SLC Standby/Alarm 2mA mA mA
SLC Modules
Standby: .5mA mA
Aux Pwr
B200SR-WH / IV Intelligent sounder base Alarm: 35mA mA
SLC Standby .3mA mA
Standby: .5mA mA
Aux Pwr
B200S-WH / IV Intelligent sounder base Alarm: (high vol) 35mA mA
SLC Standby .3mA mA
B200SR-LF-WH / IV Low Frequency sounder Standby: 1mA mA
Aux Pwr
base Alarm: 125mA mA
Standby .55mA mA
B200S-LF-WH / IV Low Frequency sounder Aux Pwr
Alarm (high vol) 140mA mA
base
SLC Standby .30mA mA
B224RB-WH / IV Relay Base Standby/Alarm: .5mA mA mA
RTS151/151 KEY Alarm: 7.5mA mA
RA100Z Alarm: 10mA mA
SLC Isolator Devices
SK-ISO (Isolator Module) (100 max/loop) Standby/Alarm: .45 mA mA mA
B224BI / IV Isolator Base Standby/Alarm: .5 mA mA mA
Accessories Modules
6815 SLC Expander (63 max.) Standby/Alarm: 78mA mA mA
(16 max.) Standby: 25mA mA
6860 Remote LCD Annunciator
Alarm: 50mA mA
Standby: 20mA mA
Alarm: 25mA mA
Standby: 20mA mA
Alarm: 25mA mA
5824 Serial/Parallel I/O Module (4 max.) Standby/Alarm: 45mA mA mA
Table 3.2 Current Draw Worksheet for SK SLC Devices (Continued)

Standby Alarm
Current Current
5895XL Power Supply (16 max.) Standby/Alarm: 10mA mA mA
5496 NAC Expander Standby/Alarm: 10mA mA mA
5865-4 LED Annunciator (8 max.) Standby: 35mA mA
(with reset and silence switches) Alarm: 145mA mA
Standby: 35mA mA
5865-3 LED Annunciator
Alarm: 145mA mA
Standby: 35mA mA
5880 I/O Module
Alarm: 200mA mA
5883 Relay Interface Alarm: 220mA mA
(22 mA per relay)
EVS-50W or EVS-125W Audio Amplifier (8 max.) Standby: 10mA mA
with/without EVS-CE4 Alarm: 10mA mA
EVS-INT50W Internal Amplifier Alarm @ 25V: 275mA mA
Alarm @ 70V: 310mA mA
EVS-VCM Voice Control Module
Alarm: 100mA mA
EVS-SW24 Switch Expander
Alarm: 25mA mA
EVS-LOC Local Operating Console (includes (4 max.) Standby: 100mA mA
6860, RVM & SW-24) Alarm: 150mA mA
EVS-100W 100W amplifier ( max.) Standby/Alarm: 10mA mA mA
EVS-100WBU backup daughter card ( max.) Standby/Alarm: 10mA mA mA
Total System Current
Network Cards
SK-NIC Network Interface Card (1 Max.) Standby/Alarm: 21mA mA mA
SK-FML Fiber Optic Multi Mode (1 Max.) Standby/Alarm: 53mA mA mA
SK-FSL Fiber Optic Single Mode (1 Max.) Standby/Alarm: 79mA mA mA
Wireless Modules
Max current using ext supply 40mA mA mA
WSK-WGI Wireless Gateway
Max current SLC Power 24mA mA mA
Auxiliary Devices4 Refer to devices manual for current rating.
IPDACT-2 IP Communicator
Alarm: 136mA mA
IPDACT-2UD IP Communicator
Alarm: 155mA mA
Standby: 55mA mA
CELL-MOD/CELL-CAB-SK
Alarm: 100mA mA
Alarm/Standby: mA mA mA
Auxiliary Devices Current
Notification Appliance Circuits Refer to device manual for current rating.
24 VDC One input circuit: 15mA mA
5495/5499 Power Supply
Both input circuits: 30mA mA
Alarm: mA mA
Alarm: mA mA
Alarm: mA mA
Alarm: mA mA
Notification Appliances Current mA
Total current ratings of all devices in system (line A + line B + C) mA mA

Standby Alarm
Current Current
Total current ratings converted to amperes (line D x .001): A A
Number of standby hours: H
Multiply lines E and F. Total standby AH AH
Alarm sounding period in hours. (For example, 5 minutes = .0833 hours) H
Multiply lines E and H. Total alarm AH AH
Add lines G and I.5 AH
Multiply by the Derating Factor x 1.25
Total ampere hours
required
1. The FACP can only support 5 devices with LED’s on. This current draw has been added to the panels alarm current.
2. The SK-DUCT housing contains a vacant mount for a SK-RELAY (sold separately). The current draw for the SK-RELAY is
calculated by increasing the SK-RELAY row of the calculation sheet by, one, for each SK-RELAY used with an SK-DUCT.
3. SK-BEAM-T draws a maximum of 500mA from Auxiliary power only when the Test feature is used. This should be
considered when determining auxiliary power capacity but not calculated into the current requirements for day-to-day
operation.
4. If you use door holders, you do not need to consider the door holder current for alarm/battery standby, because the power is
removed during that time. However, during normal operation, the door holders draw current must be included in the 6.0A total
current that can be drawn from the panel.
5. Use the next size battery with a capacity greater than required.
6. Total does not include isolator devices or accessory bases.
3.7.3 Current Draw Worksheet for SD SLC Devices
Use Table 3.3 to determine current requirements during alarm/battery standby operation when SD SLC devices are installed. You can
install up to 127 SD devices per loop.5
Standby Alarm
Current Current
For each device use this formula: This column X This column = Current per number of devices.
Fire Panel (Current draw from battery) 1 Standby: 190 mA 190 mA
Alarm: 250 mA 250 mA
Addressable SLC Devices
SD500-AIM Standby/Alarm: .55 mA1 mA mA
SD500-MIM mA mA
SD500-PS mA mA
SD500-ARM mA mA
SD505-HEAT mA mA
SD505-PHOTO mA mA
SD500-ANM Aux. Pwr Standby: 8 mA mA
Alarm: 60 mA mA
SLC Standby/Alarm: .55 mA mA mA
SD500-SDM SLC Standby/Alarm: .55 mA mA
Aux. Pwr Standby: 20 mA mA
Alarm: 106 mA mA
SLC Accessory Bases
SD505-6RB Standby/Alram: .082 mA mA mA
SD505-6SB Aux. Pwr Standby: 1 mA mA
Alarm: 32 mA mA
SLC Standby/Alarm .082 mA mA mA
SD505-DUCTR Aux. Pwr Standby: 20 mA2 mA
Alarm: 62 mA2 mA
SLC Standby/Alarm: .5 mA mA mA
SD505-DTS-K None, included with SD505-DUCTR worst case.
SD505-DUCT None, included with detector current.
SLC Isolator Devices
SD500-LIM (100 max/loop) Standby/Alarm .092 mA mA mA
SD505-6IB
Accessories Modules
5815XL SLC Loop Expander (63 max.) Standby/Alarm: 55 mA mA mA
Table 3.3 Current Draw Worksheet for SD SLC Devices

Standby Alarm
Current Current
6860 Remote LCD Annunciator. (16 max.) Standby: 25 mA mA
Alarm: 50 mA mA
5860 Remote LCD Annunciator. Standby: 20 mA mA
Alarm: 25 mA mA
6855 Remote LCD Annunciator Standby: 20 mA mA
Alarm: 25 mA mA
5824 Serial/Parallel Printer Interface (4 max.) Standby/Alarm: 45 mA mA mA
5895XL Power Supply (16 max.) Standby/Alarm: 10 mA mA mA
5496 NAC Expander Standby/Alarm: 10 mA mA mA
5865-4 LED Annunciator Module (8 max.) Standby: 35 mA mA
(with reset and silence switches) Alarm: 145 mA mA
5865-3 LED Annunciator Module Standby: 35 mA mA
Alarm: 145 mA mA
5880 LED I/O Module Standby: 35 mA mA
Alarm: 200 mA mA
5883 Relay Interface (32 max.) Standby: 0 mA mA
Alarm: 220 mA mA
(22 mA per relay)
EVS-50W or EVS-125W Audio Amplifier (8 max.) Standby: 10 mA mA
with/without EVS-CE4 Alarm: 10 mA mA
EVS-INT50W Internal Amplifier (8 max.) Standby: 52 mA mA
Alarm @ 25V: 275 mA mA
Alarm @ 70V: 310 mA mA
EVS-VCM Voice Control Module (1max.) Standby: 70 mA mA
Alarm: 100 mA mA
EVS-SW24 Switch Expander (5 max.) Standby: 10 mA mA
Alarm: 25 mA mA
EVS-LOC Remote Command Unit (4 max.) Standby: 100 mA mA
(includes 6860, RVM & SW-24) Alarm: 150 mA mA
EVS-100W 100W Amplifier (8 max.) Standby/Alarm: 10 mA mA mA
EVS-100WBU backup daughter card (8 max.) Standby/Alarm: 10 mA mA mA
A Total System Current
Network Cards
SK-NIC Network Interface Card (1 Max.) Standby/Alarm: 21 mA mA mA
SK-FML Fiber Optic Multi Mode (1 Max.) Standby/Alarm: 53 mA mA mA
SK-FSL Fiber Optic Single Mode (1 Max.) Standby/Alarm: 79 mA mA mA
Auxiliary Devices3 Refer to devices manual for current rating.
IPDACT-2 IP Communicator (1 max.) Standby: 93 mA mA
Alarm: 136 mA mA
IPDACT-2UD IP Communicator (1 max.) Standby: 98 mA mA
Alarm: 155 mA mA
CELL-MOD/CELL-CAB-SK Standby: 55 mA mA
Alarm: 100 mA mA
B Auxiliary Devices Current
Notification Appliance Circuits Refer to device manual for current rating.
5495/5499 Power Supply 24 VDC One input circuit: 15 mA mA
Both input circuits: 30 mA mA
Alarm: mA mA
Alarm: mA mA
Alarm: mA mA
Alarm: mA mA
C Notification Appliances Current mA
D Total current ratings of all devices in system (line A + line B + C) mA mA
E Total current ratings converted to amperes (line D x .001): A A
F Number of standby hours: H
Table 3.3 Current Draw Worksheet for SD SLC Devices (Continued)

Standby Alarm
Current Current
G Multiply lines E and F. Total standby AH AH
H Alarm sounding period in hours. (For example, 5 minutes = .0833 hours) H
I Multiply lines E and H. Total alarm AH AH
J Add lines G and I.4 AH
Multiply by the Derating Factor x 1.25
Total ampere hours
required
Table 3.3 Current Draw Worksheet for SD SLC Devices (Continued)
1. The FACP can only support 5 devices w/LED’s on. This current draw has been added to the panels alarm current.
2. If you use 24 VDC aux power only, and no standby or alarm current for the battery calculation if you use 24 VAC, 120 VAC or 240
VAC.
3. If you use the door holders, you do not need to consider the door holder current for the alarm/battery standby, because the power is
removed during that time.
However, during normal operation, the door holder’s draw current must be included in the 6.0A total current that can be drawn from
the panel.
4. Use the next size battery with a capacity greater than required.
5. The total does not include the Isolator devices or accessory bases.
3.7.4 Maximum Battery Standby Load
Tables 3.4 and Table 3.5 show the standby load calculations for the 6820 / 6820EVS panels based on 24 and 90 hours of standby. The
standby load calculations of line D in the Current Draw Calculation Worksheet must be less than the number shown in Table 3.4 and
Table 3.5 for the selected battery size, standby hour and alarm time. The numbers below have a built-in 20% derating factor for the bat-
tery amp-hour capacity.
Rechargeable 24 hr Standby, 24 hr Standby, 24 hr Standby,

Battery Size 5 mins. Alarm 15 min alarm 20 min alarm
17AH 535 mA 473 mA 442 mA
18AH 569 mA 506 mA 475 mA
24AH 769 mA 706 mA 675 mA
33AH 1.07A 1.01A 975 mA
35AH 1.14A 1.07A 1.04A
40AH 1.30A 1.24A 1.21A
55AH 1.80A 1.74A 1.71A
Table 3.4 Maximum Battery Standby Loads for 24 hours Standby
Rechargeable 90 hr Standby, 90 hr Standby, 90 hr Standby,

Battery Size 5 min alarm 15 min alarm 20 min alarm
33 AH N/A N/A N/A
40 AH 347 mA 331 mA 322 mA
55 AH 480 mA 464 mA 456 mA
Table 3.5 Maximum Battery Standby Loads for 90 hour Standby*
WARNING: Honeywell Silent Knight does not support the use of batteries smaller than those listed in Table 3.4 and Table 3.5. If you use
! a battery too small for the installation, the system could overload the battery resulting in the installation having less than the required 24
hours standby power. Use Table 3.4 and Table 3.5 to calculate the correct battery amp hour rating needed for your installation. It is
recommended that you replace batteries every five years.
*For FM Installation only

Section 4: Control Panel Installation
4.1 Mounting the Control Panel Cabinet
The 6820 cabinet can be surface or flush-mounted. The cabinet base dimensions are 14.5" W x 24.75" H. There should be 1.5" to 1.75"
of cabinet extruding from the wall, this should be measured from either the top edge or the bottom edge to the exterior side of the sheet
rock. Do NOT flush mount in a wall designated as a fire break.
The 6820EVS cabinet can be surface or flush mounted. Cabinet overall dimensions are 21.592" W x 28.12" H. If you flush mount the
cabinet, the backbox dimensions are 20"W x 26.5"H x 4.1"D. There should be 1.5" to 1.75" of cabinet extruding from the wall. This
installation should be measured from either the top edge or the bottom edge to the exterior side of the sheet rock. Do NOT flush mount
in a wall designated as a fire break.
14.50" 20"
24.75"
26.5"
6820 6820EVS
Figure 4.1 FACP Cabinet Base

4.1.1 Preventing Water Damage
Water damage to the fire system can be caused by moisture entering the cabinet through the conduits. Conduits that are installed to enter
the top of the cabinet are most likely to cause water problems. Installers should take reasonable precautions to prevent water from enter-
ing the cabinet. Water damage is not covered under the warranty.
4.1.2 Removing the 6820 / 6820EVS Assembly from the Housing
If it should ever be necessary to remove the control panel assembly from the cabinet for repair, do so by unscrewing the nuts that connect
the control panel assembly to the cabinet. Do not attempt to disassemble the circuit boards. See Section Section 3.7 for location of the
nuts.
4.1.3 Ethernet Connection
Ethernet connection is used for IP communication. For port location see Figure 3.2.
4.2 AC Connection
At installation, connect the AC terminals to the power source as shown in Figure 4.2. It may be necessary for a professional electrician to
make this connection.
WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGES

! SEVERAL DIFFERENT SOURCES OF POWER CAN BE CONNECTED TO THIS PANEL. DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES
OF POWER BEFORE SERVICING. THE PANEL AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT MAY BE DAMAGED BY REMOVING
AND/OR INSERTING CARDS, MODULES OR INTERCONNECTING CABLES WHILE THIS UNIT IS ENERGIZED.
The AC terminals are rated at 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.7A.

Battery Power Control Panel Installation
Figure 4.2 120 VAC Power Connection for the 6820 or 6820EVS
4.3 Battery Power
The batteries must be sealed lead acid type. Before connecting the batteries to the FACP, make certain that the interconnect cable
between the batteries is not connected. Do not connect the battery jumper cable until the system is completely installed. Observe polarity
when connecting the batteries.
WARNING: RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY

! Battery contains sulfuric acid which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can destroy fabrics. If contact is made with sulfuric
acid, immediately flush the skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.
The control panel battery charge capacity is 7.0 to 35 AH. Use 12V batteries of the same AH rating. Determine the correct AH rating as
per your current load calculation (see Section 3.7).
Wire batteries in series to produce a 24-volt equivalent. Do not parallel batteries to increase the AH rating. It is recommended that you
replace the batteries every five years.
To Control Panel
Black
Red
Battery Jumper
(P/N 140694)
Shipped With Panel
12V Gel Cell Battery 12V Gel Cell Battery
Figure 4.3 Battery Connection

4.3.1 Battery Accessory Cabinet
The Model RBB Accessory cabinet can be used when your backup batteries requirements use backup batteries that are too large to fit
into the main control panel cabinet. The RBB cabinet holds batteries up to the 35 AH size. The RBB dimensions are 16" W x 10" H x 6"
D (40.64 cm W x 25.4 cm H x 15.24 cm D).
Installing the RBB Accessory Cabinet and Batteries
To properly install the accessory cabinet and backup batteries, follow these steps:
1. Mount the accessory cabinet. See Figure 4.4 for the four cabinet mounting holes.

Control Panel Installation Battery Power
• If mounting onto drywall the accessory cabinet must be mounted onto 3/4-inch plywood. This is necessary because the weight of
the batteries inside the accessory cabinet could cause the cabinet to pull away from the drywall.
• When mounting on concrete, especially when moisture is expected, attach a piece of ¾” plywood to the concrete surface and
then attach the RBB cabinet to the plywood.
• If you use the battery cable extenders provided (P/N 140643), mount the RBB cabinet no more than 18" away from the main
control panel cabinet. This placement will ensure that the battery cables reach the battery terminals.
Cabinet
Mounting Holes
Figure 4.4 RBB Cabinet Mounting Holes

2. Connect the main control panel battery cables to the battery cable extenders as shown in Figure 4.5.
Figure 4.5 Splicing Control panel Battery Cable to RBB Battery Cable Extenders
3. Run extended battery cable from control panel cabinet through conduit to RBB cabinet. See Figure 4.6.
RBB Cabinet
Cover Screws
Conduit
Coupler
Conduit
+ - + -
RBB Cabinet
Cover Screws
Figure 4.6 Battery Connections in the RBB Cabinet
NOTE: Figure 4.6 is an example of how the wire connections can be routed. However, any other cabinet knock-outs (on either the main
control panel or the RBB cabinet), that are not previously being used may be utilized to connect conduit between the two cabinets
4. Connect battery leads to the backup battery terminals. See Figure 4.6.
Observe the proper polarity to prevent damage to the batteries or the control panel.

SBUS Wiring Control Panel Installation
5. Insert the RBB cover screws into the cover mounting holes. See Figure 4.6.
Screw the cover screw ¾ of the way into the cover mounting hole.
6. Align the cover plate mounting keyhole over the cover mounting screws. See Figure 4.7.
Cover Plate
Mounting Keyholes
Figure 4.7 Cover Plate Mounting Keyholes and Cover Mounting Screws Alignment
7. Slide the cover into place and tighten the cover mounting screws. See Figure 4.7.
4.4 SBUS Wiring
This section contains information on calculating SBUS wire distances and the types of wiring configurations (Class A and B).
4.4.1 Calculating Wiring Distance for SBUS Modules
The following instructions will guide you in determining the type of wire and the maximum wiring distance that can be used with the
control panel SBUS accessory modules.
To calculate the wire gauge that must be used to connect SBUS modules to the control panel, it is necessary to calculate the total worst
case current draw for all modules on a single 4-conductor bus. The total worst case current draw is calculated by adding the individual
worst case currents for each module. The individual worst case values are shown in the table below. .
NOTE: The total worst case current draw on a single SBUS cannot exceed 1 amp. If a large number of accessory modules are required,
and the worst case current draw will exceed the 1 amp limit, then the current draw must be distributed using 5895XL Power Expanders.
Each 5895XL Power Expander provides an additional SBUS, with an additional 1 amp of SBUS current. Wiring distance calculations are
done separately for each 5895XL, and separately for the control panel itself.
Model Number Worst Case Current Draw

6860, 5860, 6855 Fire Annunciator .120 amps
5815XL SLC Loop Expander .150 amps
6815 SLC Loop Expander .078 amps
5824 Serial/Parallel Printer Interface Module .040 amps
5880 LED I/O Module .250 amps
5865 LED Annunciator .200 amps
5895XL Intelligent Power Supply .010 amps
5496 Intelligent Power Supply .010 amps
EVS-50W .010 amps
EVS-125W .010 amps
EVS-100W .010 amps
EVS-100W with EVS-100WBU .010 amps
EVS-VCM / EVS-VCM with EVS-SW24* ** .080 amps / .105 amps
EVS-LOC / EVS-LOC with EVS-SW24* ** .080 amps / .105 amps
SK-NIC Network Interface Card .021 amps
CELL-MOD/CELL-CAB-SK .145 amps
SK-F485C Fiber Converter .125 amps
Table 4.1 SBUS Device Current Draw
NOTE: Refer to Table 3.2 is using SK Devices and Table 3.3 if using SD SLC devices for maximum number of each type of device that can
be used per system.
* All devices must use the same SBUS and VBUS.

** When you do wire calculations, use .080 amps per device with .105 amps for the last device.

Control Panel Installation SBUS Wiring
After calculating the total worst case current draw, Table 4.2 specifies the maximum distance the modules can be located from the panel
on a single wire run. The table ensures 6.0 volts of line drop maximum. In general, the wire length is limited by resistance, but for
heavier wire gauges, capacitance is the limiting factor.
These cases are marked in the chart with an asterisk (*). Maximum length can never be more than 6,000 feet, regardless of gauge used.
The formula used to generate this chart is shown in the note below.
Wiring Distance: SBUS Modules to Panel
Total Worst Case
22 Gauge 18 Gauge 16 Gauge 14 Gauge
Current Draw (amps)
0.100 1852 ft. 4688 ft. * 6000 ft. * 6000 ft.
0.200 926 ft. 2344 ft. 3731 ft. 5906 ft.
0.300 617 ft. 1563 ft. 2488 ft. 3937 ft.
0.400 463 ft. 1172 ft. 1866 ft. 2953 ft.
0.500 370 ft. 938 ft. 1493 ft. 2362 ft.
0.600 309 ft. 781 ft. 1244 ft. 1969 ft.
0.700 265 ft. 670 ft. 1066 ft. 1687 ft.
0.800 231 ft. 586 ft. 933 ft. 1476 ft.
0.900 206 ft. 521 ft. 829 ft. 1312 ft.
1.000 (Max) 185 ft. 469 ft. 746 ft. 1181 ft.
Table 4.2 Wire Distances Per Wire Gauge Using Copper Wire
:
NOTE: The following formulas were used to generate the wire distance chart.
Maximum Resistance (Ohms) = 6.0 Volts

Total Worst Case Current Draw (amps)
Maximum Wire Length (Feet) = Maximum Resistance (Ohms) * 500

(6000 feet maximum) Rpu
where: Rpu = Ohms per 1000 feet for various wire gauges (see table below)
Wire Gauge Ohms per 1000 feet (Rpu)

22 16.2
18 6.4
16 4.02
14 2.54
Table 4.3 Typical Wire Resistance Per 1000 ft. Using Copper Wire
 Wiring Distance calculation example:
Suppose a system is configured with the following SBUS modules:
2 - Module 5860 Fire Annunciator.
1 - 5895XL Intelligent Power Expander.
1 - 5865 LED Annunciator.
1 - 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module.
The total worst case current is calculated as follows:
5860 Current Draw = 2 x .100 amps = .200 amps

5895XL Current Draw = 1 x .010 amps = .010 amps
Total Worst Case Current Draw = .450 amps
NOTE: For assistance with SBUS calculation, please refer to www.silentknight.com.
Using this value, and referring to the Wiring Distance table, it can be found that the available options are:
• 370 feet maximum using 22 Gauge wire

5860 Remote Annunciator Installation Control Panel Installation
4.4.2 Wiring Configurations

Figure 4.8 illustrates the Class A wiring configuration and Figure 4.9 illustrates the Class B configuration.
Caution
For proper system
supervision, do not use
looped wire under terminals
marked A, B, +, and - of the
SBUS device connectors.
Break wire runs to provide
supervision of connections.
Supervised
Power-Limited
Figure 4.8 SBUS Class A Wiring
Supervised
Power Limited
Figure 4.9 SBUS Class B Wiring

4.5 5860 Remote Annunciator Installation
The optional Model 5860 Remote Annunciator is shown in Figure 4.10. Up to 16 annunciators can be added to the 6820 / 6820EVS Sys-
tem in any combination.

Control Panel Installation 5860 Remote Annunciator Installation
Figure 4.10 Model 5860 Remote Annunciator, Front View

The 5860 installation involves the following steps:
1. Make sure the power is off at the panel.
2. Mount the 5860 in the desired location (see Section 4.5.1).
3. Connect the 5860 to the panel (see Section Section 4.5.2).
4. Use the DIP switches on the back of the 5860 to assign an ID# to the 5860 (see Section 4.13.1).
5. The new 5860 module must be added to the system through programming. JumpStart will add the module automatically (see
Section 8.1). You can also add the module manually (see Section 9.2.2). Select a name, if desired.
4.5.1 Mounting the 5860
This section of the manual describes mounting the remote annunciator. The annunciator can be flush- or surface-mounted.
Figure 4.11 shows the parts of the annunciator. Instructions for disassembling and mounting appear on the following pages.
Figure 4.11 Annunciator Parts
The 5860 comes from the factory fully assembled. You must disassemble it for mounting. To disassemble the annunciator, use a 5/64 hex
wrench to remove the set screws, located on the bottom of the annunciator bezel. (See Figure 4.12 for location of the set screws).

Figure 4.12 Annunciator Back Box and Bezel Details

Flush Mounting
This section of the manual describes flush mounting. You can flush-mount with or without an electrical box.
 Flush Mounting with an Electrical Box
The 5860 annunciator can be used with the following types of electrical boxes: 4S, single-gang, and double-gang. If an electrical box is
used, the box must be 1-3/8” back from the face of the wall to accommodate the annunciator. Studs used with an electrical box must be
two by fours (or larger).
Figure 4.13 Placement of Electrical Box for Flush Mounting

 Flush Mounting Steps

1. Cut a hole in the sheet rock to the following dimensions: 8-¼” W x 6-5/8” H. If an electrical box is used, the box must be 1-3/8”
back from the face of the wall to accommodate the annunciator (see Figure 4.13).
2. Remove knockout holes as needed for wires.
3. Fit the annunciator back box into the hole and stabilize with mounting wires. Angle the mounting wires into the first hole past the
sheet rock. Secure the wires behind the screws as shown in Figure 4.14. When all four wires are in place, the back box should fit
snugly into the hole in the sheet rock.
4. After you complete the annunciator wiring to the panel (described in Section 4.5.2), replace the electronic assembly in the back box.
Place the bezel over the back box and tighten the set screws on the bezel.
Figure 4.14 Flush Mounting the Back Box

Surface Mounting
The 5860 can be mounted directly to a surface or can be attached to a single, double, or four-square electrical box. The Model
5860TG/TR trim ring kit is available for use when surface mounting.
1. Drill holes in the surface to match the screw holes on the back box.
2. Fit the trim ring over the back box.
3. Attach the back box to the surface using screws provided.
4. After the annunciator wiring to the panel has been completed (described in Section 4.5.2), replace the electronic assembly in the
back box. Place the bezel over the back box and tighten the set screws on the bezel.
4.5.2 Model 5860 Connection to the Panel
Connect the 5860 to the panel as shown in Figure 4.15.
Supervised
Power Limited
Figure 4.15 Model 5860 Connection to the Panel


The optional Model 6855 Remote Annunciator, is shown in Figure 4.16. The 6855 can be surface or flush-mounted. Up to 16 annuncia-
tors can be added to the 6820 or 6820EVS system in any combination.
Figure 4.16 Model 6855 Remote Annunciator, Front View

1. Make sure power is off at the panel.
2. Mount the 6855 in the desired location (see Section Figure 4.6.1).
3. Connect the 6855 to the panel (see Section Figure 4.4.2).
4. Use the DIP switches on the back of the 6855 to assign an ID# to the 6855 (see Section Figure 4.13.1).
Section 8.1). You can also add it manually (see Section 9.2.2). Select a name, if desired.
This section of the manual describes mounting the remote annunciator. The annunciator can be flush- or surface-mounted.
Flush Mounting
This section of the manual describes flush mounting.

 Follow these steps to flush mount the 6855

1. The back box dimensions are 9-9/32” W x 8-3/8” H. The minimum depth 2". The back box can be mounted prior to the complete
installation of the 6855 using any of the mounting holes shown in Figure 4.17.
Mounting Holes
Mounting Holes
Figure 4.17 Back Box Mounting Holes
2. Remove knockout holes as needed for wires. See Figure 4.18 for backbox knockout locations
Wire Knockouts
Wire Knockouts
Wire Knockouts
Figure 4.18 Back Box Knockout Locations

3. Wire the Annunciator board to the main control panel. See Figure 4.9.
4. Attach the annunciator and door assembly to back box as shown in Figure 4.19 using the supplied screws.
Figure 4.19 Attaching Annunciator/Door Assembly to Backbox

Surface Mounting
The optional Model RA-100TG/TR trim ring kit is available for use when surface mounting.
1. Remove the desired knock-out.
2. To properly mount the back box, insert a single screw into the key shaped mounting hole. Do not tighten all the way. See
Figure 4.20.
Place a level on the top of the back box, with the back box level, insert the rest of the mounting screws.
Key Shaped
Mounting Hole
Back Box
Mounting Holes
Figure 4.20 Back Box Surface Mount Holes

3. Run wires to the control panel.

4.6.2 Model 6855 Connection to the Panel

Supervised
Power Limited

The optional Model 6860 Remote Annunciator is shown in Figure 4.22. The 6860 can be surface or flush mounted.
Figure 4.22 6860 Remote Annunciator, Front View

2. Mount the 6860 in the desired location (see Section 4.7.1).
3. Connect the 6860 to the panel (see Section 4.7.2).
4. Use the DIP switches on the back of the 6860 to assign an SBUS ID# to the 6860 (see Section 4.13.1).
5. The 6860 module must be added to the system through programming. JumpStart Auto-Programming will add the module
automatically (see Section 8.1).
This section of the manual describes mounting the remote annunciator. The annunciator can be flush or surface-mounted.

Flush Mounting
This section of the manual describes flush mounting. Follow these steps to flush mount the 6860
1. The back box dimensions are 9¼” W x 8 3/8” H. The minimum depth required is 2". The back box can be mounted prior to the
complete installation of the 6860 using any of the mounting holes shown in Figure 4.23.
Mounting Holes
Mounting Holes
Figure 4.23 Back Box Mounting Holes
2. Remove knockout holes as needed for wires. See Figure 4.24 for backbox knockout locations.
Wire Knockouts
Wire Knockouts
Wire Knockouts
Figure 4.24 Back Box Knockout Locations

3. Wire the annunciator board to the main control panel. As described in Section 4.7.2.

4. Attach the annunciator and door assembly to back box as shown in Figure 4.25 using the supplied screws.
Figure 4.25 Attaching Annunciator / Door Assembly to Backbox

Surface Mounting
The Model RA-100TR red trim ring kit is available for use when surface mounting the 6860.
1. Remove the desired knock out.
2. To properly mount the back box, insert a single screw into the key shaped mounting hole. Do not tighten all the way. See
Figure 4.26.
Place a level on top of the back box, with the back box level insert the rest of the mounting screws.
Key Shaped
Mounting Hole
Back Box
Mounting Holes
Figure 4.26 Back Box Surface Mount Holes

3. Run wires to the control panel.

5815XL Installation Control Panel Installation
4. Place the trim ring over the back box as shown in Figure 4.27.
Figure 4.27 Installing Trim Ring

5. Attach the door assembly to the back box using the screws provided.
6. After the SBUS wiring to the annunciator is complete (described in Section Figure 4.7.2), replace the electronic assembly in the
back box. Place the bezel over the back box and tighten the set screws on the bezel.
4.7.2 6860 Connection to the Panel
Supervised
power limited

4.8 5815XL Installation
The 5815XL SLC expander lets you add 127 SD addressable devices The maximum number of SLC SD devices per panel is 635. The
number of 5815XL’s is limited by the maximum number of SBUS devices.
NOTE: 5815XL will only support SD SLC devices.
To install the 5815XL:


Control Panel Installation 6815 Installation
2. Mount the 5815XL in the 6820 cabinet, the 5895XL cabinet, or the 5815RMK remote mounting kit. Use the standoffs located under
the control panel board assembly and secure with screws provided with the 5815XL. For additional information, also see Model
5895XL Installation Instructions (P/N 151142) or 5815RMK Remote Mounting Kit Installation Instructions (P/N 151391).
3. Connect the 5815XL to the control panel. (See Section 4.8.1.)
4. Use on-board DIP switches to select an SBUS ID#. (See Section 4.13.1).
5. The new 5815XL module must be added to the system through programming. JumpStart will add the module automatically (see
6. You are now ready to connect SLC devices to the 5815XL (see Section 9.5.1).
Figure 4.29 is a drawing of the 5815XL board, showing the location of terminals and DIP switches.
DIP Switch
Figure 4.29 5815XL Board

4.8.1 5815XL Connection to the Panel
Connect the 5815XL to the control panel as shown in Figure 4.30. After the 5815XL is connected to the panel, it must be added to the
system. This programming step is described in Section Figure 4.13.
Supervised
Power Limited
Figure 4.30 5815XL Connection to Main Panel Assembly

4.9 6815 Installation
The 6815 SLC expander lets you add 159 SK detectors and 159 SK modules. The maximum number of SLC devices per panel is 1110.
The number of 6815’s is limited by the maximum number of SBUS devices.
NOTE: The 6815 will only support SK or SWIFT® SLC device.
To install the 6815:


5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module Installation Control Panel Installation
2. Mount the 6815 in the 6820 cabinet, the 5895XL cabinet, or the 5815RMK remote mounting kit. Use the standoffs located under
the control panel board assembly and secure with screws provided with the 6815. For additional information, also see Model
5895XL Installation Instructions (P/N 151142) or 5815RMK Remote Mounting Kit Installation Instructions (P/N 151391).
3. Connect the 6815 to the control panel. (See Section 4.8.1.)
4. Use on-board DIP switches to select an SBUS ID#. (See Section 4.13.1).
6. You are now ready to connect SLC devices to the 6815 (see Section 9.5.1).
Figure 4.31 6815 Board

Figure 4.31 is a drawing of the 6815 board, showing the location of terminals and DIP switches.
4.9.1 6815 Connection to the Panel
Connect the 6815 to the control panel as shown in Figure 4.32. After the 6815 is connected to the panel, it must be added to the system.
This programming step is described in Section 4.13.
Supervised
Power Limited
Figure 4.32 6815 Connection to Main Panel Assembly

4.10 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module Installation
The 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module allows you to connect a printer to the panel, so you can print a real-time log of system events,
detector status and event history. Instructions for installing the 5824 appear below.
The 5824 and the printer connected to the 5824 Parallel port is ancillary, the serial port can be used for primary fire signaling. The printer
must be a UL 864 listed printer.

Control Panel Installation 5824 Serial/Parallel Interface Module Installation
2. Connect the 5824 to the panel as shown in Figure 4.33.
NOTE: Four 5824s per panel maximum.
3. Use the DIP switches on the back of the 5824 board to assign an ID# to the 5824 (see Section 4.13.1).
4. Configure the 5824 device through programming. See Section 4.10.1.
5. Connect a printer to the 5824 as shown in Figure 4.33.
Supervised
Power Limited
Figure 4.33 5824 Connection to the Panel

4.10.1 Selecting 5824 Options
Configuring the 5824 includes the following steps:
• Add the module to the system. JumpStart® will add the module automatically (see Section 8.1). You can also manually add it (see
Section 9.2.2).
• Select a name, if desired.
• Select the options for the printer and the output port. See below.
 Printer and Output Port Options
1. From the Installer Main Menu, select 7 for Program Menu.
2. Select 1 for Module.
3. Select 1 for Edit Module.
4. From the list that displays, select the 5824 module you want to configure.
5. Press the right arrow to skip over the Enter Module ID and Enter Module name options. A screen similar to the one shown in
Figure 4.34 will display.
Select type of printer

Parallel or Serial
Defaulted to no
Select “Yes” for event logging
Figure 4.34 Selecting Printer and Output Port Options
6. Select options for the printer as needed for your installation. Most printers are parallel.
7. If you are using a serial printer, use the next screen to select serial port options as required for your printer. Refer to your printer
manual if you need more information.
Option Choices
Baud Rate: 75 - 19200
Data Bits: 5-8
Stop Bits: .5, 1, 2
Parity: None, Even, Odd

5880 LED I/O Module Control Panel Installation
4.11 5880 LED I/O Module

The 5880 is an LED driver board that can be used in a wide variety of applications, including as an interface with most customized floor
plan annunciator boards. The 5880 can drive up to 40 LEDs and has one PZT controller. The 5880 also has eight inputs for monitoring
dry contacts. When used with the 6820EVS the 5880 inputs can be programmed to replicate the eight EVS buttons located on the front of
the voice control module. (See section 9.5 for programming options). Up to 8 5880s can be added to the 6820/EVS system.
The following sub-sections describe hardware installation. Refer to Section 9 for programming information.
4.11.1 5880 Board Layout
Figure 4.35 shows the locations of screw terminals for connection to the panel and contact monitor wiring; pin connectors for connecting
LEDs; and the DIP switch for selecting an SBUS ID number for the 5880.
Dry Contact Inputs
SBUS Address
DIPs
SBUS Connection
Figure 4.35 5880 Board Layout

Control Panel Installation 5880 LED I/O Module
4.11.2 5880 Connection to Panel

The 5880 connects to the panel via the SBUS. Make connections as shown in Figure 4.36. After the 5880 is connected to the panel, it
must be added to the system. This programming step is described in Section 4.13.
Supervised
Power Limited
Figure 4.36 5880 Connection to Main Control Panel Assembly

4.11.3 LED Wiring
There are four 12-pin connectors on the 5880 board for connecting LEDs. Each LED gets its power from Pin 11. Internal resistors are
sized so that there is approximately 10 mA of current for each LED, no series resistors are required. LED outputs can be mapped to out-
put circuits. See Section 6 for programming details.
Wire the LEDs as shown in Figure 4.37.
On connector P1, Pin 12 is an open collector output for controlling a PZT. If used, the 5880 PZT will match the PZT pattern of the on-
board (or 5860) annunciator.
NOTE: The circuit connected to “Open Collector Output” (last pin on P1) must be current limited so that no more than 100mA of current is
allowed to flow into the open collector transistor.
Figure 4.37 5880 Board Layout

5865-3 / 5865-4 LED Annunciator Installation Control Panel Installation
4.11.4 Dry Contact Wiring

The 8 input circuits on the 5880 board are for monitoring switch inputs-any type of switch supported by the control panel can be used
with the 5880. For example, you can use a 5880 to monitor pull stations, water flow, tamper, reset, or silence switches.
Wire dry contacts as shown in Figure 4.38. Notice grouping of terminals; power terminals are shared by two inputs.
Supervised
4.7k Ω EOL
Figure 4.38 Dry Contact Wiring

4.12 5865-3 / 5865-4 LED Annunciator Installation
The 5865-3 and 5865-4 are LED annunciators. The 5865-4 has 30 mappable LEDs, remote silence and reset key switches, and a general
system trouble LED. The 5865-3 has 30 mappable LEDs only. These LEDs are arranged as 15 pairs of red (typically used for alarm) and
yellow (typically used for trouble) LEDs.
Installation of the 5865-5 and 5865-4 is identical. The key switches and the trouble LED follow the behavior of other system annuncia-
tors and do not require any installation steps. The following sub-sections describe how to install the 5865-3 and 5865-4 hardware. Refer
to Section 9 for programming information.
NOTE: This manual uses “5865” when referring to aspects of the 5865-3 and 5865-4 that are common to both models.
Figure 4.39 5865-3 and 5865-4 Assembly (front view)

Control Panel Installation 5865-3 / 5865-4 LED Annunciator Installation
4.12.1 5865 Connection to Panel

The 5865 connects to the panel via the SBUS. Make connections as shown in Figure 4.40. After the 5865 is connected to the panel, it
must be added to the system. This programming step is described in Section 4.13.
Supervised
Power Limited
Figure 4.40 5865 Connection to the FACP

4.12.2 5865 Mounting
Mount the 5865-4 to a standard 4-gang electrical box. Mount the 5865-3 to a standard 3-gang electrical box. In Figure 4.41, the 5865-4
attached to a 4-gang box is used as an example.
4-gang electrical box. Use with 5865-4.
(Use 3-gang box with 5865-3.)
Attach 5865 to a
standard 3- or 4-gang
electrical box.
Cover Plate
5865 assembly is mounted

at the factory to a plexi-glass
plate. (5865-4 assemby shown.)
Figure 4.41 5865 Mounting Example

5865-3 / 5865-4 LED Annunciator Installation Control Panel Installation
The 5865 ships with a set of zone description labels that can be inserted into the 5865 board assembly. These labels can be used in a type-
writer or can be written by hand. Slide the labels under the plexiglass as shown in Figure 4.42. The LEDs will show through the label
when illuminated.
Figure 4.42 Inserting Zone Description Labels

Control Panel Installation Configuring SBUS Modules
4.13 Configuring SBUS Modules

This section describes how to configure any system hardware modules that have been added to the system.
4.13.1 Assigning SBUS Module IDs
When installing a hardware module (see Table 4.1 for a list of compatible devices), you must use the DIP switches on the module to
assign an ID# to the module. Address zero is an invalid address and is not allowed.
Figure 4.43 shows all possible DIP switch positions and their correlation to a numerical ID. For example, to select ID 2, place DIP
switch 2 in the up position.
Figure 4.43 Possible module addresses

Refer to Section 9.2 to edit, add, delete, and view module list.
4.13.2 SBUS Bandwidth Considerations
Each SBUS device generates a certain amount of traffic on the SBUS. Generally, the amount of traffic generated depends on the type of
SBUS device. To help you figure out the SBUS bandwidth usage of a given collection of devices, a tool is available on the Honeywell
Silent Knight website (www.silentknight.com). The tool will serve as a guide to help determine how heavily loaded an SBUS is with
respect to bandwidth. We recommend you use this tool if you plan to have more than eight SBUS devices per SBUS. Remember to
include devices that are on 5859XL SBUS repeaters in your list of devices for SBUS bandwidth calculations.

Telephone Connection Control Panel Installation
4.14 Telephone Connection

Connect the telephone lines as shown in Figure 4.44. The Model 7860 phone cord is available from Honeywell Silent Knight for this
purpose. A number of programmable options are available for customizing telephone lines. These options are described in Section 9.6.
Figure 4.44 Connection of Telephone Lines

™
4.15 Flexputs I/O Circuits
The two Flexput™ circuits are an innovative and versatile feature of the control panel. They can be used as: Class A or B notification cir-
cuits, Class A or B initiation circuits (either 2 or 4 wire detectors), or as auxiliary power (resettable, continuous, door holder, or sounder
base sync).
The polarity of the Flexput terminals differs depending on whether the circuit is programmed as an input or an output circuit. If the cir-
cuit is programmed as an input circuit (for a detector or normally open contact) the X terminal is negative and O terminal is positive. If
the circuit is programmed as an output circuit (Aux power or NAC) then the X terminal is positive and the O terminal is negative.
This section of the manual explains how to install conventional notification appliances and initiating devices to be used with the system.
NOTE: For Flexputs used as NAC circuits, refer to Section 4.16
4.15.1 Conventional Input Switch Circuits

This section of the manual explains how to install conventional initiating devices for Class A or Class B configurations.
Class B Inputs
You can connect conventional Class B switches, such as waterflow switches and pull stations, directly to the Flexput circuits of the con-
trol panel.
To install a Class B switch:
1. Wire the Class B switch as shown in Figure 4.45.

Control Panel Installation Flexputs™ I/O Circuits
2. Configure the circuit through programming (see Section 9.5).
Supervised
power limited
UL Listed
EOL 4.7 kΩ
Figure 4.45 Class B Input Switches

4.15.2 Class A Inputs
You can connect conventional Class A switches, such as waterflow switches and pull stations, directly to the Flexput circuits of the con-
trol panel.
To install a Class A switch:
1. Wire the Class A switch as shown in Figure 4.46.
Supervised
power limited
Maximum Impedance
per circuit is 50W
Figure 4.46 Class A initiating Switches

NOTE: In programming any point that uses multiple Flexput circuits, the lowest Flexput circuit number is used to refer to the circuit pair. In
this example, Figure 4.46 uses both Flexput circuit 5 and 6, so in programming it would be referred to as point 5.

Flexputs™ I/O Circuits Control Panel Installation
4.15.3 Installing 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

Any compatible UL listed two-wire smoke detector can be used with the control panel (see Appendix A for list of compatible smoke
detectors). Figure 4.47 and Figure 4.48 illustrate how to connect a UL listed 2-wire detector to the control panel.
Installing 2-Wire Class B Smoke Detectors
To install a Class B two-wire smoke detector, wire as shown in Figure 4.47.
Supervised
power-limited
Note:
Flexput circuit 5
4.7 kΩ EOL used as an example.
Either Flexput circuit
5 or 6 could be used.
Figure 4.47 Two-Wire Class B Smoke Detector
Installing 2-Wire Class A Smoke Detectors
To install a Class A two-wire smoke detector, wire as shown in Figure 4.48.
Supervised
power limited
Figure 4.48 Two-Wire Class A Smoke Detector Connections


Control Panel Installation Flexputs™ I/O Circuits
4.15.4 Installing 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Any compatible UL listed four-wire smoke detector can be used with the control panel (see Appendix A for list of compatible smoke
detectors). Figure 4.49 and Figure 4.50 illustrate how to connect a UL listed four-wire detector to the control panel.
Installing 4-Wire Class B Smoke Detectors
Figure 4.49 illustrates how to install a 4-wire Class B smoke detector.
Conventions used for wiring 4-wire Class B loops:
1. One Class B 4-wire smoke detector loops can be connected to the control panel.
2. The Class B loop input is paired with a unique power source as shown in Figure 4.49.
3. The detector gets smoke power from Flexput 6 circuit and the contact input is connected to Flexput 5 circuit.
4.7 kΩ EOL
Air Products
PAM-2
Model 160150
Supervision
Module
Supervised
power limited
Figure 4.49 Class B 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections

Installing 4-Wire Class A Smoke Detectors

Figure 4.50 illustrates how to install a 4-wire Class A detectors.
Conventions used for wiring 4-wire Class A loop:
1. One Class A 4-wire loop can be connected to the control panel.
2. Smoke power is supplied to each Class A loop as shown in Figure 4.50.
Air Products
PAM-2 Model
160150
Supervision
Module
Figure 4.50 Class A 4-Wire Smoke Detector Connections

NOTE: In programming any point that uses multiple Flexput circuits are always referred to as the lowest Flexput circuit number used. In
this example, Figure 4.50 uses Flexput circuits 5, 6 together with NAC 4. In programming (4, 5, 6) would be referred to as point 5.

Conventional Notification Appliance Control Panel Installation
4.16 Conventional Notification Appliance

This sub-section of the manual explains how to install conventional notification appliances for Class A and Class B configurations.
4.16.1 Class B Notification Wiring
You must use an appliance from the list of compatible appliances in the Appendix A at the back of this manual.
To install a Class B Notification appliance circuit:
1. Wire Class B Notification appliances as shown in Figure 4.51.
Alarm Polarity Shown.
4.7 kΩ EOL
Max. Impedance: 1.5Ω
notification wiring
supervised
power limited
Regulated 24 VDC Full Wave Rectified

27.4 VDC, 3A per Circuit, 6A max Combined
Figure 4.51 Class B Notification Appliance Circuit Wiring

Maximum voltage drop is 3V per Class B notification. See Table 4.4.
Current Maximum Impedance

1.0A 3Ω
1.5A 2Ω
2.0A 1.5Ω
2.5A 1.2Ω
3.0A 1.0Ω
Table 4.4 Maximum Impedance Class B

Control Panel Installation Conventional Notification Appliance
4.16.2 Class A Notification Wiring

You must use an appliance from the list of compatible appliances in the Appendix A in the back of this manual.
To install a Class A notification appliance circuit:
1. Wire the Class A notification appliances as shown in Figure 4.52.
CAUTION:
! FOR PROPER SYSTEM SUPERVISION DO NOT USE LOOPED WIRE UNDER TERMINALS MARKED – AND + OF THE
NAC CONNECTORS. BREAK WIRE RUNS TO PROVIDE SUPERVISION OF CONNECTIONS.
2. Configure the circuit for Class A in programming (see Section 9.4.1).
supervised
power limited
Regulated 24VDC Full Wave Rectified

27.4VDC, 3A per Circuit, 6A max Combined
Figure 4.52 Class A Notification Appliance Circuit Configuration

NOTE: In programming any point that uses multiple NAC circuits, the lowest circuit number is used to refer to the circuit pair. In this
example, Figure 4.52 uses both NAC circuit 1 and 2, so in programming it would be referred to as point 1.
Maximum voltage drop is 3V per Class A circuit. See Table 4.5.
Current Maximum Impedance
1.0A 3Ω
1.5A 2Ω
2.0A 1.5Ω
2.5A 1.2Ω
3.0A 1.0Ω
Table 4.5 Maximum Impedance Class
4.16.3 Auxiliary Power Installation
Circuits 1-6 on the control panel can be used as auxiliary power circuits. The four types of auxiliary power available are:
• Door Holder
• Constant
• Resettable Power
• Sounder Sync Power
Auxiliary power circuits are power limited. Each circuit can source up to 3A (total current for all circuits must not exceed 6A).
To install an auxiliary power circuit:
1. Wire the circuit(s) that will be used for auxiliary power.
2. Configure the auxiliary power output through programming (see section 9.5).
Door Holder Power
Door holder power is intended for fire door applications. When there are no fire system alarms in the system and the panel has AC
power, door holder circuits have 24 volt power present at their terminals. Any fire system alarm will cause power to disconnect. Power
will be re-applied when the fire system is reset. If AC power is not present, the auxiliary door holder power will be disconnected to con-
serve the battery backup. When AC power is restored, power is immediately restored to the door holder circuits.
Constant Power
Use constant power for applications that require a constant auxiliary power source. Power is always present at Constant circuits.

On-Board Relays (Conventional) Control Panel Installation
Resettable Power
Resettable power is typically used to power beam detectors, flame detectors and conventional 4-wire smoke detectors. For circuits
selected as Resettable, 24-volt power is always present at the terminals unless a system reset occurs. If a system reset occurs, power is
disconnected from the terminals for 30 seconds, then re-applied.
Sounder Sync Power
Sounder Sync Power continuously outputs the System Sensor synchronization pattern and is intended for use with B200S sounder bases.
4.17 On-Board Relays (Conventional)
The control panel has two built-in programmable relays and a built-in trouble relay. All relays are Form C rated at 2.5 A @ 24 VDC.
Figure 4.53 Location of Conventional Relay Circuits

4.17.1 Trouble Relay
The control panel has a dedicated Form C trouble relay built into terminals labeled TROUBLE. The relay provides a normally open and
a normally closed contact. The trouble relay will deactivate under any trouble condition.
NOTE: The NC contact is relay contact that is closed when the panel has power and there are no trouble conditions
4.17.2 Programmable Relays

The control panel has two Form C programmable relays built into terminals labeled RELAY and RELAY 2. Each relay provides a nor-
mally open and a normally closed contact.
To install one or two programmable relays, follow these steps.
1. Wire Relay 1 and/or Relay 2 as needed for your application. See Figure 4.53 for the location of the relay terminals.
2. Configure the relay through programming (see Section 9.5).

Control Panel Installation Remote Station Applications
4.18 Remote Station Applications

4.18.1 Keltron Model 3158 Installation
The control panel is compatible with Keltron Model 3158, used for direct connection to a Keltron receiver. The 3158 reports alarms,
supervisories, and troubles.
The steps for connecting the 3158 to the control panel. Refer to the 3158 installation instructions for complete information.
1. Wire the 3158 to the control panel as shown in the connection list.
2. Wire the 3158 within 20 feet of the control panel. Wiring must be enclosed in conduit.
3. Program control panel Relay 1 for alarm.
4. Program circuit 1 for alarm.
5. Program circuit 2 for supervisory non-latching.
Not suitable for remote station

protected premises service
where separate transmission
circuits are required for fire
supervisory (if applicable), and
trouble signals. Intended for
connection to a polarity rever-
sal circuit of a remote station
receiving unit having compati-
ble ratings.
Figure 4.54 Keltron 3158 Connection to FACP

Remote Station Applications Control Panel Installation
4.18.2 City Box Connection Using the 5220 Module

This section describes how to connect the control panel to a local energy municipal fire alarm box or “city box” as required by NFPA 72
Auxiliary Protected Fire Alarm systems for fire alarm service. The city (master) box is an enclosure that contains a manually operated
transmitter used to send an alarm to the municipal communication center which houses the central operating part of the fire alarm sys-
tem.
City Box Standby Current: 0 (Notification supervision current accounted for in control panel draw).
Alarm Current: 1 Amp for 1 second 27.2 VDC max
The maximum coil and wire resistance (combined) must not exceed 30 ohms.
To install the 5220 for city box connection:
1. Use one of the knockouts on the right side of the control panel to connect the 5220 using a short piece of conduit (must not exceed
20 feet in length).
2. Wire the 5220 to the control panel as shown in Figures 4.55. This drawing also shows how to connect the city box coil to terminals
3 and 4 on the 5220.
3. Connect earth ground wire to the 5220 chassis with mounting screw.
4. Program the NAC circuit used as a notification circuit, continuous and non-silencing. Refer to Section 9.5 for point programming,
Section 9.4 for group settings, and Section 9.3 for zone settings and mapping.
It is not possible to reset the remote indication until you clear the condition and reset the control panel.
All circuits non-power-limited

All wiring non-supervised
Figure 4.55 City Box Connection

4.18.3 Using the Addressable Relay Module for City Box Connection
Wire the SK-Relay as shown in Figure 4.56.
Figure 4.56 Relay Module for City Box Connection

4.18.4 NFPA 72 Polarity Reversal

NOTE: Intended for connection to a polarity reversal circuit of a control unit at the protected premises having compatible rating.
Using the 5220 Module

When the 5220 is wired and programmed for polarity reversal, it reports alarm and trouble events to a remote site. Alarms will override
trouble conditions and it will not be possible to reset the remote indicator until the condition is cleared and the control panel is reset.
If an alarm condition occurs, the alarm relay will close, overriding the trouble condition.
Standby Current: 100 mA, 24 VDC
Alarm: 100 mA, 24 VDC
To install the 5220 for polarity reversal, follow the steps below:
1. Locate the knockout on the right side of the control panel cabinet to connect the 5220 using a short piece of conduit (must not
exceed 20 feet in length).
2. Wire the 5220 to the control panel using the four-wire pigtail provided as shown in Figure 4.57. This diagram also shows how to
connect the 5220 to the remote indicator.
3. Connect earth ground wire to the 5220 chassis with mounting screw.
4. Program the circuit used as a notification circuit, continuous and non-silencing. Refer to Section 9.5 for point programming,
Section 9.4 for group settings, and Section 9.3 for zone settings and mapping.
5. If necessary, adjust loop current using the potentiometer (R10) on the 5220 board. Normal loop current is 2-to-8 mA with a 1k ohm
remote station receiving unit. Maximum loop resistance is 3k ohm.
All circuits power-limited.

All wiring supervised.
Jumper these terminals

when City Box is not used.
Intended for connection to a Polarity Reversal

circuit of a Remote Station receiving unit having
compatible ratings.
Figure 4.57 Polarity Reversal Connection Using the 5220 Module

Using the 7644-L8 Module

When the 7644-L8 is used for polarity reversal, it allows the alarm and trouble events to be reported to a remote site. Alarms will over-
ride the trouble conditions and it will not be possible to reset the remote indicator until the condition is cleared and the control panel is
reset.
To install the 7644-L8 for polarity reversal:

1. Wire the 7644-L8 to the control panel as shown in Figure 4.58. Do not install an EOL resistor on the terminals of the circuit used.
2. Program the circuit as a notification circuit.
3. Map the group to activate constant on from the zone event. See Section “Zone Accessory Options” on page 107.
4. Program the output group characteristics as non-silenceable and reverse polarity.
Figure 4.58 Polarity Reversal Connection Using the 7644-L8

4.18.5 Transmitter Activated by Dry Contacts

This section describes the connection of a UL 864 listed remote station transmitter to the 6820/6820EVS FACP dry contacts. The FACP
contacts must be supervised by the remote station transmitter module using end-of-line resistors (ELRs) with a value determined by the
transmitter manufacturer. Power is also provided by the Remote Station Transmitter Manufacturer. Refer to the Remote Station Trans-
mitter Manufacturer’s manual for details.
Figure 4.59 Transmitter Activated by Dry Contacts

Notes

Section 5: Common Communication Link
5.1 Hardware Features
The 6820/EVS panels can be networked to create a virtual system that is larger than 1,110 addressable points. Each additional 6820/EVS
provides another 1,110 addressable points to the network total. For example, a network of 17- 6820/EVS panels provides a maximum
addressable point capacity of 18,870 points (1,110 x 17 = 18,870 SK devices).
5.1.1 Panels
The 6820/EVS and other applicable addressable panels can be linked together for the common communications to the central station.
“Sites” are used to allow for individual or common annunciation across the link. Up to 17 sites can be activated and programmed for the
link.
5.1.2 Wiring Options to Connect Panels
1. The Fiber-Optic Single-Mode - must use the SK-NIC and SK-FSL for up to 30dB loss of signal separation. SK-FSL connects to the
link using 9/125 micron single-mode fiber.
2. The Fiber-Optic Multi-Mode - must use the SK-NIC and SK-FML for up to 8dB loss of signal separation. SK-FML connects to the
link using 62.5/125 micron multi-mode fiber.
3. Twisted Pair Copper Wire - must use the SK-NIC to provide up to 3000 feet of separation.
All methods of panel connectivity can be used within the same linked system.
5.2 SK-NIC Connection Options
When you link a group of 6820/EVS’s, you must use the SK-NIC to link the panels together. See Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2, for Internal
mounting or external mounting of SK-NIC option..
Must be in
Conduit
2’ cable
Class B wiring
Class A Wiring
Figure 5.1 EXTERNAL SK-NIC Wiring Option
Figure 5.2 Internal SK-NIC Wiring Option

SK-NIC Wiring Options Common Communication Link
5.3 SK-NIC Wiring Options

Linking a group of 6820/EVS requires the use of a SK-NIC network interface card with each panel. The SK-NIC connects to other
linked units using unshielded, twisted-pair wiring or fiber-optic cable.
Figure 5.3 SK-NIC Network Interface Card

5.3.1 Fiber Loop Modules
Two types of fiber-optic modules are available to use to transmit and receive communication with the SK-NIC. See Figure 5.4. For more
information see SK-FML / SK-FSL Installation Sheet, P/N LS10178-001SK-E.
SK-FSL Single-Mode Fiber SK-FML Multi-Mode Fiber

Figure 5.4 Types Fiber Loop Modules
The SK-FML (Fiber-Optic Multi-Mode) and SK-FSL (Fiber-Optic Single-Mode) are plug-in fiber loop modules. The two types of fiber
optic modules are used as one channel to transmit or receive communications with the SK-NIC, ARCNET communication circuit.
The following describe the two types of fiber optic modules.
• The SK-FML is a fiber module that allows the multi-mode fiber to be linked between nodes.
• The SK-FSL is a fiber module that allows the single-mode fiber to be linked between nodes.
Each fiber loop module can Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) fiber-optic cable connecting to the SK-NIC. Up to two fiber loop cards can
be added to the SK-NIC, and both cards may be combined in the same configuration. See Figure 5.5.
Figure 5.5 SK-NIC with Fiber Loop Modules

SK-NIC-KIT Mounting Kit

SK-NIC can be mounted within the 6820/EVS cabinet or in the SK-NIC-KIT accessory cabinet. The SK-NIC-KIT includes the SK-NIC,
cabinet with door, cable, & mounting hardware. The accessory kits are available if you want to install the SK-NIC outside of the
6820/EVS cabinet.
5.3.2 SK-NIC Installation
The SK-NIC is designed to mount on one of the SLC expander standoff sets inside the cabinet or remotely using the SK-NIC-KIT.
Use the following steps to properly mount the SK-NIC inside the 6820 or 6820EVS.
1. Place the SK-NIC on one of the SLC expander standoff sets.
2. Use the 6-pin cable included with SK-NIC to connect the 6820/EVS to the SK-NIC. Connect the SK-NIC to the pin connector on
the control panel labeled Data Network. See Figure 5.6.
Data
Network
Figure 5.6 Panel to SK-NIC connection

3. Each SK-NIC has the ability to monitor for earth ground faults on the twisted pairs connected to Port 1 of its terminal block TB2.
Earth fault detection for any wiring at Port 2 of TB2 is done at the next/previous SK-NIC due to these wiring connections being
connected to Port 1 of TB2 at the next/previous SK-NIC.
4. Unused optic ports on fiber loop modules must have their dust caps placed on the port.
5. Based on the type of data medium chosen, run the twisted pair wiring/fiber optic cable to the next SK-NIC using a class B or class
A wiring method. A combination of both medium types can be used. See Figure 5.7, Figure 5.8, Figure 5.9, and Figure 5.10 for SK-
NIC wiring examples.
 To mount the SK-NIC remotely:
Follow the steps above except, The 6-pin cable that runs from the SK-NIC to the 6820EVS must be run in conduit. See Figure 5.1.
NOTE: The SK-NIC provides a common communications link for 6820/6820EVS. These panels cannot be linked together for peer-to-peer
networking.

Unshielded Twisted Pair Wiring between Multiple Panels

Unshielded twisted pair wiring between multiple panels is shown in Figure 5.7. Class A wiring is shown with a dotted line.
Class A wiring
Figure 5.7 Twisted Pair Wiring Configuration

Fiber Optic Multi-Mode Wiring between Multiple Panels

Fiber optic cable between multiple panels is shown in Figure 5.8. Class A is shown with a dotted line.
Class A wiring
Figure 5.8 Fiber-Optic Wiring Example
Class A wiring
Figure 5.9 Fiber-Optic Wiring Single-Mode Example

Fiber Optic and Twisted-Pair Wiring between Multiple Panels

A mixture of fiber optic cable and twisted pair wiring between multiple panels is shown in Figure 5.10. Class A cabling is shown with
dotted line.
Class A wiring
Figure 5.10 Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Combination Wiring Example

Setting the Panel ID for each Panel Common Communication Link
5.4 Setting the Panel ID for each Panel

NOTE: It is important that much thought is given when choosing the panel IDs for each panel. It is difficult to change the IDs once panel
programming has begun.
The panel ID for each panel is set using DIP switch positions 1 through 5. See Figure 5.11 below for possible DIP switch settings.
Figure 5.11 ID Settings

Section 6: Network Management
NOTE: Although the word “Network” is used in this section, it applies to system menus that relate to the physical wire and/or fiber optic
connections between multiple panels. The 6820/EVS does not support peer-to-peer networking.
6.1 Network Diagnostics

6.1.1 Ping Panel
The Ping Panel menu allows you to continually ping any panel programmed into the network. As the selected panel is being pinged, the
Ping Panel screen will display the reply time, minimum and maximum reply times, and sent and received counters.
1. Enter the Installer Code. The panel will automatically go to the Main Menu.
2. Select 5 for Network Diagnostics.
3. Press 1 to enter the Ping Panel Menu.
4. Press the Up or Down arrow key to select Network Panel ID. Press ENTER to Ping panel.
6.1.2 Data Network Status
The Data Network Status screen will display statistics that are indicators of Network performance.
2. Select 5 for Network Diagnostics.
3. Press 2 to enter the Data Network Status menu.
6.2 Network Programming

This section of the manual describes how to program network options using the built-in annunciator. All options described in this section
can be programmed using the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. To edit site assignments, HFSS must be utilized.
6.2.1 Learn Network
The Learn Network menu shows you all of the panels connected to the network. Any panel that has been programmed into the network
will appear as a “member.” Any panel that is connected to the network but not programmed into the network will appear as a “guest.”
You can add guest panels to the network by changing their status to member in this menu. Panels showing OK are currently responding
on the network. Panels not showing OK have either been removed or are not responding due to networking problems. See Section 6.1 for
Network Diagnostics.
2. Select 6 for Network Programming.
3. Press 1 to enter the Learn Network menu.
4. Press ENTER to add or remove panels connected to the network as member or guest.
NOTE: If adding panels to network, the system will automatically run the Sync Network Options. You will be required to select which panel
to distribute network options from. See Section 6.4.
6.2.2 Edit Network Names

The Edit Network menu allows you to edit the panel name and edit the panels site name.
 To Edit Panel Names:
3. Press 2 to enter the Edit Network Names menu.
4. Press 1 to Edit Panel Name. Choose Panel to edit.
See Appendix for a list of available characters and their numeric designators.
6.2.3 Edit Panel ID
This menu option allows you to change the current Network Panel ID. It is best to carefully consider the network ID setting for each
panel. Take into account any future panels that will be added to the network (future wiring of two buildings together). The Network
Panel ID setting has to be unique for each panel on the network.
This menu will allow you to change the currently assigned Network Panel ID to the current Network ID dip switch setting. The system
will be down as the panel needs to reboot in order to complete the transition.
When using the PC configuration software to program the panels, the Network Panel ID will be locked from future editing. The only
way to change it will be to restore defaults and use this menu again.
 To Edit the Network Panel ID:
3. Press 3 to enter the Edit Panel ID menu.
4. If the Network Panel ID is changed and valid, the system will ask you to confirm the change. If it is not correct, you can change the
DIP switches at this time.
5. Press Up to select YES and press ENTER to confirm.

Network Management Network Programming
6.2.4 Computer Access

An installer at the panel site can initiate communications between the panel and a computer running the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software
Suite. In order for this communication to function properly, both the computer (running the software) and the control panel must have
matching computer access numbers and computer codes.
To program computer access information:
3. Press 4 to enter the Computer Access menu.
4. Enter the computer access number (up to 6-digits, default 123456), then press ENTER.
5. Enter the computer code, then press ENTER.
6.2.5 Access Codes
Access codes provide the user access to the control panel functions. Each access code can be customized for each user. This allows some
users the ability to access programming and other higher level panel functions, while other users may only need access to lower level
functions such as preforming fire drills, or acknowledging trouble conditions.
Profile 1 is the profile that dictates what functions the Fire Fighter Key has access to. Because this is the profile for a key, the user name
and the access code can not be edited for this profile.
Profile 2 is the profile for the installer and is referred to as the “Installer Code”. This profile’s user name and panel functions can not be
edited. Table 7-9 lists the panel functions that can be selected for each user profile.
Type of Function Selectable Functions

System Reset
System Silence
System Ack
Fire Drill Key
*F1 Function Key
Panel Operations
*F2 Function Key
*F3 Function Key
*F4 Function Key
EVS Control Request Function
EVS Super User Function
System Tests
Fire Drill Menu
Indicator Test
Walk Test-No Report
Walk Test -With Report
Communicator Test
Clear History Buffer
Point Functions
Disable/Enable Point
Point Status
Panel Menus Set SLC Device Address
SLC Single Device Locator
SLC Multiple Device Locator
I/O Point Control
Event History
Set Time & Date
System Information
Network Diagnostics
Network Programming
Panel Programming
Send/Receive Firmware Update
Table 6.1 : User Profile Selectable Panel Functions
*Function Keys are only available on the LCD annunciator

Network Programming Network Management
To change an access code:

2. Select 6 for Network Programming Menu.
3. Select 5 for Access Codes.
Display reads: Select Profile 01
Fire Fighter’s Key
4. Select the access code you wish to edit by pressing the Up or Down arrow key.
5. Then press ENTER.
 Profile Edit Menu
From the Profile Edit Menu you can change the users name, access code, and the panel functions that the user will have access to with
their code.
NOTE: Profile 1 (Fire Fighter’s Key) the user name and access code can not be edited. Profile 2 (Installer) the user name and panel
functions can not be edited. Profile 3 (Multi-Site Installer) is defaulted with the Multi-Site access option, but the entire profile can be edited.
Edit Name
6. See Appendix for a list of available characters and their numeric designators.
7. Then press ENTER to finish.
Edit Access Code
8. Enter the new access code (minimum of 4 digits, maximum of 7 digit).
9. Press ENTER.
10. Enter code again. Press ENTER.
Panel Functions
11. Press the Up or Down arrow key to move through the list of available functions.
12. Then press right arrow to move to Y (yes) or N (no) selection column.
13. Press the Up or Down arrow key to select Y or N.
14. Press ENTER.
15. Repeat steps 12 through 15 until user profile is complete.
6.2.6 Communicator Options
Communicator options provides the configuration for reporting events to a central station.
1. From the Main Menu. select 6 for Network Programming.
2. Press 6 to enter Communicator Options Menu.
Communicator Assignments
Each panel on the 6820/EVS communication link system specifies which communicator is used for reporting. The communication link
capability of the linked system allows all panels to use the same communicator providing an economical solution for reducing the num-
ber of paths required for reporting purposes. A communicator is specified by panel number. The communication link will be used to
report events according to the communicator report table.
Communicator Miscellaneous
When using the SIA reporting format, the communicator sends information according to the SIA Reporting Type. The selections for this
option are:
1. PI Modifier (default)
2. Panel ID*
NOTE: *Only SIA sends the panel ID when reporting.

Network Management Voice Options
Receiver Configuration
The 6820/EVS system can report events to as many as 68 receivers. See Appendix for panel/receiver relationship numbers. Each
receiver is assigned a phone number and reporting format. Phone numbers can be up to forty digits long.
1. From the Main Menu.
4. Select 3 for Receiver Configuration.
5. Select Panel to Program and press ENTER.
6. Enter the receiver number that you want to report to. The receiver numbers available will correspond with what panel number you
entered. Receiver numbers are populated based on panel number and audited to allow only the 4 appropriate receivers. See
Appendix Appendix D: for receiver number
Available Format choices are listed in the Reporting Format table:
Reporting Format
Contact ID
SIA500
Ethernet
Cellular
eVance
UNUSED
SIA8
SIA20
Communicator Reporting Table

The Communicator Report Table specifies event reporting for each panel on the communication link. Each row in the table specifies a
panel, event types to report, primary and backup receiver numbers, and report by point or zone. Associated with the receivers are account
number and daily test option. The table can have up to 99 rows.
1. From the Main Menu, select 6 for Network Programming.
3. Select 4 for Communicator Reporting Table.
4. Press * to add rows, Press ENTER to edit data.
Figure 6.1 Communicator Reporting (4x20 screen)

6.3 Voice Options
6.3.1 Edit Timers
3. Select 7 for Voice Options.
4. Choose Site.
5. Select 1 for Edit Timers
Control Lockout
The Control Lockout countdown timer is set to the programmed value when an LOC gains EVS Control. The timer starts over upon any
key press at the EVS Control LOC. While the Control Lockout timer is active, an LOC of equal priority must request EVS control. The
Control Lockout timer is cleared when EVS Control is relinquished. The Control Lockout timer does not apply to EVS Super User con-
trol.
Select Immediate/Timer/Never
Range 0-720 min/0-59 sec

Voice Options Network Management
Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event

If you select the Timer, the event will automatically reset after being active for the programmed time. If Event Disabled is selected, the
event will not be allowed to be activated from an LOC Station. Selecting Never will require an Emergency System Reset to be performed
to reset the event.
Select Never/Timer/Event Disabled, Range from 1-240 min.
EVS Timer Option

Control Lockout Immediate/Timer/Never
Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event Never/Timer/Event Disabled
Auto Reset EVS Event 1 Never/Timer/Event Disabled
Auto Reset EVS Event 3
.
Never/Timer/Event Disabled
Table 6.2 Auto Reset EVS MIC Triggered Event Timer Menu
6.3.2 Edit Voice Commands
When a voice output group is selected to be activated by a zone, the cadence pattern choice does not apply. For voice output groups, one
of six system wide voice commands will activate instead of the cadence pattern.
4. Choose Site.
5. Select 2 for Edit Voice Commands.
6. Select the command you wish to edit:
System Event
Fire Alarm
Fire System Aux 1
Fire System Aux 2
Fire Zone Aux 1
Fire Zone Aux 2
Fire Pre Alarm
Emergency Communication 1
Fire Supervisory
System Alert 1-5
Trouble
Fire Interlock Release
Fire Interlock Alert
Custom Emergency Comm
Emergency Supervisory
CO Alarm
CO Supervisory
Table 6.3 Voice Command Mapping
7. Select whether a Message or Tone Only should be played. If Message is selected, choose the desired message for the command.

Network Management Sync Network Options
8. Select the tone to be played between messages. (High-Lo, ANSI Whoop, Cont. Whoop, ANSI, March Code, California, Steady,
Alert Tone, or No Tones).
NOTE: 520Hz tones are available when using EVS-VCM, EVS-INT50W or EVS-100W AMP’s. These include ANSI 520, Temp 4 520,
Steady 520. See Table A.6 for a list of compatible speakers.
9. Select how many times you want the message to repeat. (None, 1 - 14, or Continuous).
10. Select the initial delay time (0, 3, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28).
11. Select the inter-message delay time (4 to 32 seconds, in 4 second increments).
12. Select Y or N to allow message to continue to play after the MIC release.
13. Select Y or N to allow message to restart on a new activation.
6.4 Sync Network Options
If after making changes to network programming, the distribution of network options fail, the system will report a trouble of network
options out of sync. Use this menu to redistribute changed options to the rest of the network. The user will be required to choose a panel
to source the options from. Scroll down through the informational message and press ENTER to view the Select Source screen.
3. Select 8 for Sync Network Options.
4. Select which panel to source the options from.
With the line selected
Line 1 scrolls to show the date
Scroll down to show checksum
Figure 6.2 Sync Network Options on a 6820 - 4 x 20 Screen
Last time the date & time were

updated on the panel. If (2) panels have the
same Chk sum, network
options are in sync.
Figure 6.3 Sync Network Options on a 6820EVS - 4 x 40 Screen

Sync Network Options Network Management
Network Management Quick Reference

Menu Options/Defaults Comments
Add or remove
Learn Network Guest or member panels into the See Section 6.2.1
network
Edit Network Panel Names Network Panel ID Edit Panel Names
See Section 6.2.2
Names Site Names Edit Site Member Edit Site Names
Change current
Edit Panel ID See Section 6.2.3
panel ID
Computer Access
*123456
Computer Access Number See Section 6.2.4
Computer Code *0
Edit Name
Edit Access Code
System Reset
System Silence
System ACK
Fire Drill Key
System Tests
Network Fire Drill Menu Profile 1 is the profile that

Programing Indicator Test dictates what functions the
Firefighter Key has access to.
Walk Test-No Report
Because this is the profile for a
Walk Test-With Report keys, the user name and the
Communicator Test access code can not be edited
Select Profile
Access Codes Clear History Buffer for this profile.
(01 - 20)
Panel Functions Point Functions
Profile 2 is the profile for the
Disable/Enable Buffer installer and is referred to as the
Point Status “Installer Code”. This profile’s
user name and panel functions
Set SLC Device
can not be edited.
Address
See Section 6.2.5.
SLC Single Device
Locator
SLC Multi-Device
Locator
I/O Point Control
Event History
Set Time & Date
Network Diagnostics
6.4 Network Management Quick Reference

Network Management Sync Network Options

Network
Programming
Panel Programming Profile 1 is the profile that
System Information dictates what functions the
Multi-Site Firefighter Key has access to.
Because this is the profile for a
Upload/Download
keys, the user name and the
F1 Function Key access code can not be edited
Select Profile
Access Codes Panel Functions F2 Function Key for this profile.
(01 - 20)
F3 Function Key
Profile 2 is the profile for the
F4 Function Key installer and is referred to as the
EVS Control Request “Installer Code”. This profile’s
Function user name and panel functions
EVS Super User can not be edited.
Function See Section 6.2.5.
Send/Receive
Firmware Update
Communicator See Section 6.2.6
Select Panel Primary 0= unused
Assignments
Enable pi SIA Modifier See ,
Communicator
SIA Options "Communicator
Miscellaneous Include Panel ID in SIA Reporting Miscellaneous"
Receiver See , "Receiver
Network Select Panel Select Receiver Number Configuration"
Programming
(cont.) Contact ID
SIA500
SIA8
Receiver
Configuration SIA20
Receiver Format
eVance
Ethernet
Cellular
Communicator
Options UNUSED
Receiver Credentials
Panel
Report Alarms
Report Supervisory
Report Troubles
Report Events by
Point
See , "Communicator Reporting
Communicator Report Table Primary Receiver
Table"
Primary Account
Test Primary Account
Secondary Receiver
Secondary Account
Test Secondary
Account
6.4 Network Management Quick Reference (Continued)

Sync Network Options Network Management

Immediate/ See Section 6.3.1
Control Lockout Timer/Neve
r
Edit Timers Auto Reset EVS
Event 1-8 Never/Time
r/Event
Auto Reset EVS MIC Disabled
Triggered Event
Fire Alarm
Fire System Aux 1
Fire System Aux 2
Fire Zone Aux 1
Fire Zone Aux 2
Fire Interlock Release
Network Voice Options Choose Site
Fire Supervisory
Programming
(cont.) Fire Interlock Alert
Edit Voice Fire Pre Alarm

See Section 6.3.2
Commands Custom Emergency
Comm
Emergency
Communication 1-8
Emergency
Supervisory
System Alert 1-5
CO Alarm
CO Supervisory
Trouble
Sync Network
See Section 6.4
Options
6.4 Network Management Quick Reference (Continued)

Section 7: SK, SD and SWIFT® Wireless SLC Device Installation
CAUTION:
! To avoid the risk of electrical shock and damage to the unit, power should be OFF at the control panel while installing or servicing
7.1 List of SK SLC Devices

The following SK and wireless SLC devices can be used with the control panel. SK detectors include a 6" base. See the appropriate sec-
tion number in this manual or the device installation instructions (packaged with the device) for more information..
NOTE: The control panel supports the use of either SK SLC devices or SD SLC devices. You cannot install both SLC device types on the
control panel.
SK Installation
Model Name/Description
Part Number Instruction PN
SK-PHOTO Photoelectric smoke detector
SK-PHOTO-T Photoelectric smoke detector with thermal (135°F)
I56-3426-00
SK-PHOTOR Photoelectric detector with remote test capability
SK-ACCLIMATE Multi criteria photoelectric smoke detector with thermal (135°F)
SK-BEAM Reflected beam smoke detector without test feature
I56-3433-00
SK-BEAM-T Reflected beam smoke detector with test feature
SK-DUCT Photoelectric duct smoke detector with extended air speed range I56-3432-00
SK-HEAT Fixed temperature thermal detector (135°F)
SK-HEAT-ROR Rate-of-rise thermal detector with 135° fixed temperature I56-3429-00
SK-HEAT-HT Fixed high temperature thermal detector (190°F)
SK-PULL-SA Addressable single action pull station I56-3446-00
SK-PULL-DA Addressable dual action pull station I56-3447-00
SK-ISO Fault isolator module I56-3445-00
SK-MONITOR Monitor module I56-3442-00
SK-MINIMON Mini monitor module I56-3444-00
SK-MONITOR-2 Dual input monitor module I56-3435-00
SK-MON-10 10 input monitor module I56-3443-00
SK-RELAY Addressable relay module I56-3438-00
SK-RELAY-6 Six relay control module I56-3439-00
SK-RELAYMON-2 Dual relay/monitor module I56-3735-00
SK-ZONE Addressable zone interface module I56-3440-00
SK-ZONE-6 Six zone interface module I56-3441-00
SK-CONTROL Supervised control module I56-3436-00
SK-CONTROL-6 Six circuit supervised control module I56-3437-00
SK-FIRE-CO CO Smoke Detector I56-3945-00
B210LP 6" mounting base I56-0595-00
B224BI-WH / IV 6" isolator base. White or Ivory I56-0725-00
B224RB-WH / IV 6" relay base. White or Ivory I56-3737-00
B200SR-WH / IV 6" temporal sounder base. White or Ivory I56-3392-00
B200S-WH / IV Intelligent Sounder Base. White or Ivory I56-3387-00
B501 4" mounting base I56-0357-00
B501-WHITE / IV / BL 4" mounting base. White, Ivory, or black I56-6527-00
B200SR-LF-WH/ IV Low Frequency Sounder Base. White or Ivory I56-4152-00
B200S-LF-WH / IV Low Frequency Sounder Base. White or Ivory I56-4151-00
SK-PHOTO-W Photoelectric smoke detector. White I56-6527-00
SK-PHOTO-R-W Photoelectric replacement smoke detector with remote test capability in DNR. White I56-6528-00
SK-PHOTO-T-W Photoelectric smoke detector with thermal (135°F) White I56-6530-00
Table 7.1 SK SLC Devices

List of SD SLC Devices SK, SD and SWIFT® Wireless SLC Device Installation
SK Installation
Part Number Instruction PN
SK-HEAT-W Fixed temperature thermal detector (135°F). White I56-6529-00
SK-HEAT-ROR-W Rate-of-rise thermal detector with 135° fixed temperature. White I56-6529-00
SK-HEAT-HT-W Fixed high temperature thermal detector (190°F). White I56-6529-00
Color Guide: -IV = Ivory color, -BL = Black, -WH = White, -WHITE-White
Table 7.1 SK SLC Devices (Continued)

7.2 List of SD SLC Devices
The following SD SLC devices can be used with the control panel. SD detector bases are sold separately. See the appropriate section
number in this manual or the device installation instructions (packaged with the device) for more information.
NOTE: The control panel supports the use of either SD SLC devices or SK SLC devices. You cannot install both SLC device types on this
control panel.
SD Installation
Model Number Instruction PN
SD505-PHOTO Photoelectric smoke detector.
150955
SD505-HEAT Absolute temperature heat detector. Trip point range from 135°F–150°F (0°C–37°C).
SD505-6AB 6" base
SD505-6IB 6" short circuit isolator base I56-3541-00
SD505-6RB 6" relay base I56-3542-00
SD505-6SB 6" sounder base I56-3540-00
SD505-DUCT Duct Smoke Detector. Duct Housing including the SD505- Analog Photoelectric Smoke Sensor. 1700-09882
Intake tubing for duct available in three lengths: SD505-T2 (2.5 foot); SD505-T5 (5 foot); SD505-
T10 (10 foot)
SD505-DUCTR Duct Detector housing with relay base. Duct housing with relay base including SD505- Analog 1700-09882
Photoelectric Smoke detector pre-installed
SD500-PS/-PSDA Single or dual action addressable pull station I56-3632-00
SD500-AIM Addressable input module (switch input), standard size, DIP switch configurable I56-3547-00
SD500-MIM Mini input monitor module (switch input), small size, DIP switch configurable.
SD500-ANM Addressable notification module I56-3544-00
SD500-ARM Addressable relay module DIP switch configurable. I56-3545-00
SD500-SDM Addressable smoke detector module. I56-3546-00
SD500-LIM Line isolator module. Fits in a double gang box. I56-3543-00
SD505-DTS-K Remote test switch & LED indicator for the SD505-DUCTR 1700-09882
Table 7.2 : SD SLC Devices

®
7.3 SWIFT Wireless SLC Devices
The WSK-WGI Wireless Gateway acts as a bridge between a group of wireless fire devices and a SLC loop on the 6820 /
6820EVS. It is powered by the SLC loop or by a regulated, external 24VDC UL-listed power supply. For updated information about
wireless devices, system setup and operation see the SWIFT Smart Wireless Integrated Fire Technology Manual # LS10036-001SK-E
for more information.
7.4 Maximum Number of Devices
The 6820/6820EVS supports SK, SD or SWIFT SLC devices. The maximum number of SLC devices per system varies depending on
device protocol. The number of SLC expanders is limited only by the SBUS bandwidth, point count, and 1A SBUS current limit. Device
support is as follows:
• SK Devices–The 6820/EVS supports a total of 1,110 SK points. The SLC points can be all sensors or all modules or any
combination of modules and sensors. SK devices are supported on the 6815 or the internal SLC.
OR
• SD Devices–The 6820/6820EVS system can support a total of 635 SD devices, in any combination. SD devices are supported on
the 5815XL or the internal SLC.
OR
• SK SWIFT Wireless Devices–A SWIFT Gateway system supports up to 50 devices: 1 SWIFT Gateway and up to 49 (in any
combination) wireless detectors and monitor modules. Multiple Gateways can be used. See the SWIFT manual P/N LS10036-
001SK-E for more information.

SK, SD and SWIFT® Wireless SLC Device Installation Wiring Requirements for SLC Devices
7.5 Wiring Requirements for SLC Devices

The following information applies to all SLC devices. Refer to the section that describes the type of device you are installing for details.
7.5.1 Wire Sizing on 5815XL for SD Devices
The wire can be untwisted, unshielded, solid or stranded as long as it meets the National Electric Code 760-51 requirements for power
limited fire protective signaling cables. Wire distances are computed using copper wire.
Maximum wiring resistance is 50 ohms for SD devices.
Maximum loop length depends on the wire gauge. See Table 7.3 for SD devices.
Wire Gauge Max. Distance for SD
22 AWG 1500 feet
18 AWG 3900 feet
16 AWG 6200 feet
14 AWG 10,000 feet
Table 7.3 Maximum wiring distance for SD devices
7.5.2 Wire Sizing for 6815
The SLC requires use of a specific wire type, depending on mode of operation, to ensure proper circuit functioning. Wire size should be
no smaller than 18 AWG and no larger that 12 AWG wire. The wire size depends on the length of the SLC circuit. It is recommended that
all wiring be twisted-pair to minimize the effects of electrical interference
7.5.3 SK Modules
The 6820 or 6820EVS SLC can be programmed to operate in SK mode. While shielded wire is not required, it is recommended that all
SLC wiring be twisted-pair to minimize the effects of electrical interference. Use Table 7.4 to determine the specific wiring requirements
for the SLC.
Wire Requirements Distance in Feet (meters) Wire Type
RECOMMENDED: Twisted-unshielded pair, 12 to 18 AWG 12,500 ft. (3,810 m) 12 AWG (3.31 mm)
(3.31mm to 0.82 MM). 50 ohms, maximum per length of Style 9,500 ft. (2895.6 m) 14 AWG (2.08 mm)
6 & 7. 50 ohms per branch maximum for Style 4 loop. 6,000 ft. (1,828.8 m) 16 AWG (1.31 mm)
3,700 ft. (1,127.76 m) 18 AWG (0.82 mm)
Untwisted, unshielded wire, in conduit or outside of conduit. 5,000 ft. (1,528 m) 12 to 16 AWG (3.31 mm to 1.31 mm)
3,700 ft. (,127.76 m) 18 AWG (0.82 mm)
Twisted, shielded pair 5,000 ft. (1524 m) 12 to 16 AWG (3.31 mm to 1.31 mm)
Note: 3,700 ft. (1,127.76 m) 18 AWG (0.82 mm)
• Shields must be isolated from ground
• Shields should be broken at each device
Note: Maximum total capacitance of all SLC wiring (both between conductors and from any conductor to ground) should not exceed 0.5
micro farads.
Table 7.4 SLC Wiring Requirements for SK modules
Figure 7.1 and Figure 7.2 show how wire length is determined for out & back tap and T-Tap.
Figure 7.1 Calculating wire run length for a simple out and back

Wiring Requirements for SLC Devices SK, SD and SWIFT® Wireless SLC Device Installation
When you use T-taps, the total length of all taps and the main bus must not exceed 40,000 feet. This requirement must be met in addition
to the maximum distance requirements for the various wire gauges.
.
Figure 7.2 Calculating Wire Run Length for a T-Tap

7.5.4 Wiring 5815XL or 6815 in Class A Configuration
Figure 7.3 illustrates how to wire the SLC loop for Class A installations.
NOTE 1: Class A wiring also requires an isolator module as the first device on the in and the out loops.
NOTE 2: No t-taps allowed on class A SLC loops.
Figure 7.3 Class A SLC Configuration

SK, SD and SWIFT® Wireless SLC Device Installation Wiring SK SLC Detectors
7.6 Wiring SK SLC Detectors

This section describes how to install SK heat and smoke detectors. See Table 7.1 for a list of detectors. Refer to the detectors’ installation
instructions for more detailed information.
To wire SK detectors, do the following:
1. Wire device bases as shown in Figure 7.4.
2. Set the address for each device as described in Section Figure 7.7.
Figure 7.4 Heat and Smoke Detector Connection to the Panel.
7.7 Addressing SK SLC Devices

All SK devices are addressed using the two rotary dials that appear on the device board. Use the ONES rotary dial to set the ones place in
a one or two digit number, and use the TENS rotary dial to set the tens place in a two or three digit number.
The control panel recognizes when an SK detector or SK module is installed. For this reason, SK detectors can be assigned any unique
address from 1 to 159, and SK modules can be assigned any unique address from 1 to 159. There can be an SK detector using address 1
and an SK module using address 1.
0 is an invalid address. In order to set the sensor above address 99, carefully remove the stop on the upper rotary switch with thumb as
shown in Example 2.
Example 1: To select device address 35, turn the ONES rotary dial to 5 and the TENS rotary dial to 3 as shown in Figure 7.5.
Example 2: To select device address 105, turn the ONES rotary dial to 5 and the TENS rotary dial to 10 as show in Figure 7.5.
Example 2: Device Set to 105.
All dials labeled for ONES

or TENS position.
Figure 7.5 SK SLC Device Addressing Using Rotary Dials

Wiring SD SLC Detectors SK, SD and SWIFT® Wireless SLC Device Installation
7.8 Wiring SD SLC Detectors

The information in this section applies to the following SD models, see Table 7.2 for list of devices.
To Wire SD Detectors:
1. Wire device bases as shown in Figure 7.6.
2. Set the address for each device as described in Section Figure 7.9.
Figure 7.6 Heat or mSmoke Detector Connection to the FACP

7.9 Addressing SD SLC Devices
This section tells how to address detectors and modules. See Table 7.2 for a list of detectors that are easily addressed at the FACP. The
Installer Code is required to perform this task.
To address:
1. Connect a detector base temporarily to the programming terminals as shown in Figure 7.7.
(You can use the same base for each detector).
Figure 7.7 Temporary Connection of Detector Base to Panel for Addressing

2. Enter the Installer code. The panel automatically displays the Main Menu.
3. Select 2 for Point Functions.
4. Select 3 for Set SLC Device Address.
5. Select “Yes” by pressing the Up arrow, then press ENTER. (The panel will go into trouble at this point. You can use the SILENCE
key to stop the PZT. The trouble will clear automatically when the panel re-boots when you finish programming.)
6. When the wait message clears, the following options display:
1- for Read Address. Use to read (or check) a single detector’s address.
2- for Write Address. Use to program a single detector’s address.
3- for Seq. Programming. Use to program more than one detector in sequential order.
7. If you change addresses, write the programmed address on the back of the device.
8. To exit, press the left arrow to exit the screen.

SK, SD and SWIFT® Wireless SLC Device Installation SK-WGI Wireless Gateway
7.9.1 SLC Devices with DIP Switches

Input and relay module addresses are set using the DIP switches on the module board. The chart below shows the available addresses.
For example, to select address 3, place DIP switches 1 and 2 in the Up position. The range of valid addresses is 1-127. 0 is an invalid
address.
Figure 7.8 SD SLC Device Addressing Using DIP Switches

7.10 SK-WGI Wireless Gateway
NOTE 1: The SK-WGI, as part of the wireless network, has been tested for compliance with the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) requirements of the United States Government. It has not been evaluated for use outside the USA. Use of this system outside the
USA is subject to local laws and rules to which this product may not conform. It is the sole responsibility of the user to determine if this
product may be legally used outside the USA.
NOTE 2: It is recommended to use the same wire gauge if there are multiple connections to the same terminal.
For more information regarding Gateway wiring instructions, see SWIFT manual LS10036-000SK-E.
7.10.1 Power Connections for the Gateway
The SK-WGI Wireless Gateway acts as a bridge between a group of wireless fire devices and a SLC loop on the 6820/EVS. It is powered
by the SLC loops or by a regulated, external 24 VDC UL listed power supply. See the SWIFT® Smart Wireless Integrated Fire Technol-
ogy Instruction Manual P/N LS10036-000SK-E for a list of available wireless devices, system setup, and operation

Section 8: Programming Overview
This section of the manual is intended to give you an overview of the programming process. Please read this section of the manual care-
fully, especially if you are programming the control panel for the first time.
The JumpStart® Auto-Programming feature automates many programming tasks and selects default options for the system. You should
run JumpStart at least once when you are installing the system. See Section 8.1 for details. After you run JumpStart, you may need to do
some additional programming depending on your installation. Section 9 of this manual covers manual programmable options in detail.
Programming the panel can be thought of as a three part process. You must program:
• System options. These are options that affect general operation of the panel (see Section 9.6 for details).
• Options for input points and zones. These are primarily options that control the detection behavior of devices (see Section 9.5 for
details).
• Options for output points and groups. This includes selecting characteristics for output groups and mapping output circuits to output
groups (see Section 9.4 for details).
8.1 JumpStart® Auto-Programming

The JumpStart Auto-Programming feature allows for faster system setup. When you run JumpStart Auto-Programming, the panel
searches for expanders and SLC devices not currently in the system. The new devices are added in their default configuration. At the end
of the JumpStart you can choose to not accept the new devices and go back to the configuration you had before. JumpStart saves the
installer from having to program options for each device. Depending on the application, the installer may need to make some changes
after JumpStart completes.
See Section 8.1.3 for complete details about running JumpStart Auto-Programming.
8.1.1 Input Points
The first JumpStart on the panel in default configuration will determine the number and type of input points (detectors or contact monitor
modules) on each SLC loop. JumpStart Auto-Programming assigns the correct detector type (heat, ionization or photoelectric), so the
installer does not need to edit the device type for detectors. Any contact monitor modules on the system will be assigned type “Manual
Pull.” The installer will need to manually change the switch type if manual pull is not correct.
The first JumpStart® Auto-Programming creates one zone (Zone 1) and assigns all input points to Zone 1. Zone 1 is mapped to Output
Group 1.
8.1.2 Output Points
The 6820 JumpStart® creates three output groups. The 6820/EVS with amplifiers will create four output groups. The output circuits are
assigned as follows:
Circuits 1-6:
Configured as Notification and assigned to Group 1. JumpStart Auto-Programming automatically programs Zone 1 to activate Group 1
using constant on output when an alarm condition occurs.
Circuit 7 (Relay 1):
Assigned to Group 998. JumpStart automatically programs Zone 1 to activate Group 998 using constant on output when a supervisory
condition occurs.
Circuit 8 (Relay 2):
Assigned to Group 999. JumpStart automatically programs Zone 1 to activate Group 999 using constant on output when an alarm occurs.
Amplifier Circuits:
Assigned to Group 2.JumpStart automatically programs Zone 1 to activate Group 2.
Addressable output points (Relay modules):
All addressable relay devices will be configured as “Output Pt” (general purpose output point) and assigned to Group 1.
NOTE: Relay output is constant even if the zone activating the relay is programmed with an output pattern.
8.1.3 Running JumpStart Auto-Programming

Run JumpStart Auto-Programming immediately after you have addressed and connected all input devices (detectors, pull stations, and so
on) and output devices (notification appliances, relays, and so on).
NOTE: If you need to install a few devices after you have run JumpStart, you can install them manually or run JumpStart again at a later
time. JumpStart will keep user options, such as names, for devices already installed. Follow instructions in Section 9 for configuration
To run JumpStart, follow these steps:

1. Select 7 for Program Menu. Enter the Access Code.
2. Select 6 for JumpStart Auto-Programming.
3. The message “The system will be shut down during JumpStart.” Press ENTER to accept.
4. When the message, “SLC FAMILY” message appears, select SK or SD; depending on the type of SLC devices the panel is using,
and press ENTER to accept.
5. A series of messages displays for the next several seconds. JumpStart scans the SLC loops for devices. This action can take several
minutes, depending on the number of the devices attached.
6. When the message “Configuring System Done” displays, press any key to continue.
7. Select one of the options in Table 8 from the Menu that displays.

Programming Overview Mapping Overview
Menu Option Action

1 - Review System Press 1 if you need to review the JumpStart configuration.
2 - Repeat JumpStart Press 2 if you need to rerun JumpStart for any reason.
1. If you are ready to make the JumpStart configuration permanent, select 3.
2. The system will ask you if the installation contains any addressable duct detectors. If there are none,
select 2 for No and skip to Step 8. If the system contains duct detectors, select 1 for Yes and continue with
Step 3.
3. From the list that displays, select the SLC that contains the duct detectors.
4. The first photoelectric or ionization detector on the system will display. Select 1 for DUCT and 2 for Non-
DUCT.
3 - Accept Configuration 5. Press the Up arrow to select the next detector. Select 1 for DUCT and 2 for Non-DUCT. Continue until all
duct detectors have been selected. (Note: You can move backwards through the list with Down arrow).
6. When you reach the last detector on this device, press the left arrow.
7. The system will ask you if there are any duct detectors used. If there are, select 1 for Yes and the
message will ask, Have All Addressable Duct Detectors Been Identified? Press the Left arrow for “No”,
Press the right arrow for “Yes”. If there are no more duct detectors, continue with Step 8.
8. The system will restart with the saved JumpStart configuration.
9. After the system resets, it will use the new JumpStart configuration.
If you want to discard the changes, and keep the configuration you had before running this JumpStart,
4 - Discard Changes
press 4.
Table 8.1 Menu Options
8.2 Mapping Overview

This section of the manual describes a high level overview of mapping.
Mapping is an important concept with the control panel. In general terms, mapping is assigning or linking events to outputs that will acti-
vate when events occur. You do this by assigning input points to input zones, output points to output groups and then linking or mapping
zones and output groups.
Figure 8.1 is a brief overview of the concept of mapping. The next several pages of the manual show these subjects in detail.
Figure 8.1 Mapping Overview
NOTE: Mapping cannot be programmed through annunciators and can only be programmed through HFSS Honeywell Fire Software
Suite.

Mapping Overview Programming Overview
8.2.1 Input Point Mapping

Input points are assigned to input zones, as the example in Figure 8.2 shows. Any input point can be assigned to any input zone. (Input
points can be assigned to one zone only. An input point can be designated as “Unused,” which means it has not been assigned to a zone).
Figure 8.2 Input Point Assignment Example

8.2.2 Output Circuit Mapping

Figure 8.3 is a simple example showing how to assign notification and relay output circuits to groups. For an example of a simple floor
above/floor below application, see Figure 8.5.
Figure 8.3 Example of Assigning Output Circuits to Groups
8.2.3 Event Mapping

There are 11 types of Zone events 14 types of Panel events, and 6 types of Site events that can be mapped (see Table 8.2). For each event
type, you can activate output groups and patterns. Mapping examples are shown in Figure 8.4, Figure 8.5 & Figure 8.6.
System Zone Panel Site
Manual Pull Alarm System Aux 1 Alarm Fire Drill
Water Flow Alarm System Aux 2 Alarm General Fire Alarm
Detector Alarm General Fire Supervisory
(heat or smoke detectors)
Zone Aux 1 Alarm General Fire Pre-Alarm
Zone Aux 2 Alarm
Interlock Release
Pre-Alarm
Fire Supervisory
Status Point
CO Alarm
CO Supervisory
LOC EVS 1-8 Alarm
General EVS Alarm
Emergency
General EVS Supervisory
Point EVS 1-8 Alarm
Table 8.2 : Event Types

Mapping Overview Programming Overview
System Zone Panel Site

Trouble SBUS Expander Trouble General Trouble
Status Point Active SBUS Class A Trouble Site Silenced
SLC Loop Trouble Voice Aux In 1-8 Alarm
AC Loss Trouble F1 Key Active
Battery Trouble F2 Key Active
Ground Fault Trouble F3 Key Active
Advisory
Phone Line Trouble F4 Key Active
Reporting Account Trouble Voice Aux in 1-2
Printer Trouble System Mic Active
Aux Power Trouble Background Music
System Switch Trouble
Output Group Trouble
Table 8.2 : Event Types (Continued)
Figure 8.4 Example of Zone Events Mapped to Output Groups and Patterns

Figure 8.5 Example of Zone Events Mapped to Output Groups and Patterns

Programming Using the HFSS Software Suite Programming Overview
8.2.4 Mapping LED Points

Figure 8.6 is a simple example showing how LED points are mapped to zones and output groups. Typically you would create two output
groups for each zone, one for alarms and one for troubles. (LED points are available when Models 5865-3/4 and/or 5880 are used with
the system).
Figure 8.6 Example of LED Points Mapped to Output Groups

(Applies to Models 5865-3/4 and 5880)
8.3 Programming Using the HFSS Software Suite

You can use the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite to program the control panel onsite (personnel will need to be onsite during the
upload or download process). HFSS is a software package that lets you easily program the control panel using a Windows-based com-
puter. HFSS is needed for Mapping. When using HFSS, you can set up the programming options for the panel, save the options in a file,
then download the file to the panel. You can connect to the control panel directly using the onboard USB or Ethernet. Updates are avail-
able at www.silentknight.com.
8.4 Programming Using an Annunciator

You can program the control panel from a system annunciator, using either the control panel’s on-board annunciator or a 5860, 6860 &
6855 remote annunciator.
NOTE: Mapping cannot be programmed through the on-board and remote annunciators. Mapping is only available through HFSS
Honeywell Fire Software Suite up/downloading software.
The following subsections describe programming basics, including a description of editing keys available for programming and how to
move through programming menus. Section 9 contains specific information about individual programming options.

Programming Overview Programming Using an Annunciator
8.4.1 Entering / Exiting the Program Menu
To Enter the Programming Menu:

1. Enter the Installer Code (factory programmed default code is 123456).
2. Then press 7. The menu option displays. See Section 9 for detailed menu information and Section 8.5 for a quick reference listing
on all programmable options and JumpStart defaults.
To Exit the Programming Menu:

When you have completed working with the menus, press the left arrow several times until you exit from programming mode. Two
prompts will display. The first prompt is a message that confirms you intended to leave the Program Menu (select Yes or No as appropri-
ate). The second prompt is a message that confirms you accept all changes. If you select No, any changes you made since you entered the
Program Menu will have no effect.
Moving through the Menus
Figure 8.7 shows how to move through Program Menu screens, using the System Tests screen as an example.
Figure 8.7 Moving through Program Menu
Selecting Options and Entering Data

There are several ways to make programming selections using the control panel depending on which screen you are currently viewing.
The chart below is a generic explanation.
To Press
Enter the number The corresponding number on the annunciator.
Enter numeric data The appropriate number on the annunciator.
Enter text (alphanumeric data) See Appendix for complete list of characters.
Select from a scrolling list Use the Up or Down arrow to move through the list of available options. When the option you want
to select is displayed, press ENTER.

Programming Menu Quick Reference Programming Overview
8.5 Programming Menu Quick Reference

This section of the manual lists all Program Menu options in the order they appear on the sub-menus. Default settings are indicated in
text or marked with an asterisk (*). The comments column provide quick information and a reference to a section (if applicable) which
has more detailed information.
Edit Module ID
Edit Module Select Module Enter Module Name Section 9.2.1
Edit Module specific options
5824-Serial/Parallel / IO
6860 LCD Annunciator
6815-SLC Loop Expander
5815XL-SLC Loop
Expander
5895XL Power Supply
5496 NAC Expander
5880-LED /IO Module
Module
Add Module 5865-LED Annunciator Section 9.2.2
EVS-50W Voice Amplifier
EVS-INT50W Voice
Amplifier
EVS-VCM Voice Control
Module
EVS-RVM- Remote Voice
Module
SK-NIC Network Interface
Card
Delete Module Select Module Section 9.2.3
Module View Module List Select Module Section 9.2.4
Edit Zone Name Section 9.3.1
*1-Count
2-Count
Alarm Ver.
Verification Type Section 9.3.1
PAS
Zone SNGL ILOCK
Properties DBL ILOCK
SD devices
Edit Zone Select Zone 135° to 150°F
Zone Section 9.3.1
Heat Temp Set
SK Devices
135° to 190°F
Section 9.3.1
Single/
00-23
Multi-station Cadence
Zone CO Single/Multi station
00-23 Section 9.3.1
Accessory Opt Cadence
Yes
Local Zone
No
View Zone Points Select Zone to View Section 9.3.2
Group Name
Voice Group Y or N
Switch 1-64 Section 9.4.1
Edit Group Select Group Group Template Override Y or N
Group Properties Allow Sys Override Y or N
Dynamic Act/Template 00-23
Override Cadence (See Appendix Appendix D:)
View Group Points Select Group Section 9.4.2
Edit OPG Template Select template Modify name and which OPG’s are in template Section 9.4.3
Table 8.3 Programming Quick Reference List

Programming Overview Programming Menu Quick Reference

UNUSED
MANUAL PULL
*LATCH
WATERFLOW
NON-LATCH
*LATCH
FIRE SUPERVSY
NON-LATCH
FIRE DRILL
SILENCE
RESET
P.A.S. ACK
*LATCH
ZONE AUX1
NON-LATCH
SD and SK *LATCH
ZONE AUX2
Devices on Internal NON-LATCH
Point and External 6815 Enter Pt Select Module4 SWITCH1,2,3,4 *LATCH Section 9.5
,5 SYSTEM AUX1
and SD on External NON-LATCH
5815XL *LATCH
SYSTEM AUX2
NON-LATCH
DETECTOR
*LATCH
FIRE TAMPER
NON-LATCH
MANUAL RELEASE
INTERLOCK
STATUS POINT
CO DETECTOR SWITCH
CO SUPER-VISORY *LATCH
DET. SWITCH NONLATCH
*LATCH
EVS INPUT
NON-LATCH
Table 8.3 Programming Quick Reference List (Continued)


*LATCH
EVS TAMPER
SWITCH1,2,3,4 NON-LATCH
,5
*LATCH
EVS SUPER-VISORY
NON-LATCH
Select Module4
OUTPUT PT Select Group
1,2,3,4,5 AUX CONST
NOTIF
AUX RESET
AUX DOOR
OUTPUT PT
Select Group
1,2,3,4,5,6
RELAY1,2,3,4,5
AUX RESET
AUX DOOR
LED Number 1,5 1-80
SLC LED 1,5 LED Function Notif
1,5 Unused
DETECTOR
2-WIRE SMOKE Select Zone
2,3,4
W-Gateway
SD and SK 2,3,4
Devices on W-SWITCH
Point Same as SWITCH
Internal/ External Enter Pt 2,3,4,7 Section 9.5
(cont.)
6815 and SD on
W-RELAY
External 5815XL Same as Relay
2,3,4,7
UNUSED
Select Sensor 4 No Accessory
SDR BAS
RLY BAS
1,2,3,4,5
PHOTO1,2,3,4,5
I-SdrBa
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
2,3,4
DETECTOR
No Accessory
1,2,3,4,5
SDR BAS
1,2,3,4,5
RLY BAS
ION1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
I-SdrBa
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
2,3,4


No Accessory
SDR BAS
1,2,3,4,5
RLY BAS
HEAT1,2,3,4,5 1,2,3,4,5
I-SdrBa
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
2,3,4
No Accessory
PHOTO DUCT1,2,3,4,5
DCT RLY
No Accessory
SDR BAS
RLY BAS
SD and SK ACCLIMATE2,3,4
DETECTOR I-SdrBa
Devices on Internal
Point 1,2,3,4,5 (Intelligent
and External 6815 Enter Pt Select Sensor Sounder Base) Section 9.5
(cont.)
and External
No Accessory
5815XL (cont.)
SDR base
RLY base
HEAT-HT2,3,4
I-SdrBa
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
No Accessory
SDR BAS
RLY BAS
PHOT-HEAT2,3,4
I-SdrBa
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
BEAM2,3,4
SUP DET Same function as LATCH
1,2,3,4,5 DETECTOR NON-LATCH


No Accessory
SDR BAS
CO ALARM/FIRE RLY BAS
ALARM I-SdrBA
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
No Accessory
SDR BAS
RLY BAS
CO ALARM/FIRE
SUPR
I-SdrBA
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
CO FIRE2,3,4 No Accessory
SD and SK
SDR BAS
Devices on Internal
Point RLY BAS
and External 6815 Enter Pt Select Sensor4 CO SUPR/ Section 9.5
(cont.)
and External FIRE ALARM
5815XL (cont) I-SdrBA
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
No Accessory
SDR BAS
RLY BAS
CO SUPR/
FIRE SUPR
I-SdrBA
(Intelligent
Sounder Base)
Photo
W-Detector
Photo-Heat
2,3,4,7
Heat
W-SUP DET
Same as W-Detector
2,3,4,7

SLC LED
LED Output LED Function
(SD only)
UNUSED
NOTIF OUTPUT Select Group
B NOTIF Super-vised
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Yes or No
NOTIF OUTPUT Select Group Section 9.5
A NOTIF Super-vised
CONTROL CIRCUIT
Yes or No
CON-STANT
AUX RESET
AUX PWR
AUX DOOR
AUX SYNC8
MANUAL PULL Latch and Non-Latch feature
WATER-FLOW only appear for
FIRE SUPER-VISORY WATERFLOW,FIRE
Point Internal Power and Enter Pt /Select Function
Select Sensor FIRE TAMPER SUPERVISORY, FIRE
(cont.) External Power (cont.)
B SWITCH FIRE DRILL TAMPER, ZONE AUX1, ZONE
SILENCE AUX2, SYSTEM AUX1,
RESET SYSTEM AUX2., EVS INPUT,
P.A.S. ACK EVS TAMPER, and EVS
ZONE AUX 1 SUPERVISORY.
ZONE AUX2 Latch and Non-Latch feature
SYSTEM AUX1 only appear for
SYSTEM AUX2 WATERFLOW,FIRE
MANUAL RELEASE SUPERVISORY, FIRE
TAMPER, ZONE AUX1, ZONE
B SWITCH AUX2, SYSTEM AUX1,
INTER-LOCK SYSTEM AUX2., EVS INPUT,
EVS TAMPER, and EVS
SUPERVISORY.
If EVS INPUT is selected
EVS INPUT
choose associated EVENT
EVS TAMPER Latch and Non-Latch feature
EVS SUPER-VISORY only appear for
WATERFLOW,FIRE
SUPERVISORY, FIRE
TAMPER, ZONE AUX1, ZONE
STATUS POINT AUX2, SYSTEM AUX1,
SYSTEM AUX2., EVS INPUT,
Enter Pt /Select Function EVS TAMPER, and EVS
Select Sensor SUPERVISORY
(cont.)
Internal Power and A SWITCH Same as B SWITCH
External Power 2-WIRE SMOKE
Point B
4-WIRE SMOKE
(cont.) DETECT
CO 4 WIRE DET
2-WIRE SMOKE
A
4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECT
CO 4 WIRE DET
Select Group or Zone Group or Zone selection will
Number appear depending on the
Edit Name Enter Name function selected
UNUSED
Enter Point #
5880/5865/EVS- NOTIF
Section 9.5.4
Series Amplifiers Select Group
Edit Name Enter Name

Set the Hour
Set the Minutes *02:00AM
Auto Time Test Select AM/PM Section Auto Test Time
24 hrs,12 hrs, *6 hrs, 4
Enter Interval
hrs
For each phone line (1 & 2) select:
Dialing Prefix Up to 9 digits *none
# of Answer Rings Range: 00-15 *06
TT *TT
Select Dialing Option TT/PL
System Communication
PULSE
Options Options
U = 60/40 *U
Rotary Pulse Format
E = 66/34 Section Phone
Phone Lines
Y or N *N Lines
Dial Tone Disabled
Y or N *N
Monitor Line
*N
Answering Machine Bypass Y or N
Y or N *N
Phone Line Unused
IP Address
Subn Mask
Section Edit
Edit Ethernet SubNet
Ethernet
Default Gateway
DHCP Enable
75 sec, 90 Sec, 3 min, 5
Ethernet Supervise min, 1 hr, 24 hrs, 30 *5 Minutes
days, None
Section
Cellular Supervise 24Hrs, 30 days, none *24 Hours
Communication AlarmNet Timers AlarmNet
10 min, 15 min, 30
Options Timers
Minutes, 1 hr, 2 hrs, 4
Old Alarm Time *30 Minutes
hrs, 8 hrs, 12 hrs, 24hrs,
none
High
Dialing Low *High
Normal Section Phone
Phone Line Gains
Low Line Gains
System
Reporting Normal *Low
Options
cont High
Water Flow delay is the number
of seconds before a water flow
Water Flow Delay 0 - 90 Seconds *1 sec
alarm is generated. Section
Water Flow Delay
Alarm Verification time section
Alarm Verify 60 to 250 seconds *60 sec
Alarm Verify
Low AC Report Delay. Section
Low AC Report Time 0 - 30 hours *3 hrs
AC Report Delay
Time Options 50 Hz
Section Change AC Line
AC Freq: 60 Hz *60Hz
Frequency
Internal
AM/PM System Clock Format (AM/PM
or military). Section Clock
Clock Display Format *AM/PM
MIL Display Format (AM/PM or
Military)
4 hours Section Auto-Resound (4 or 24
Auto-resound *24 hours
24 hours hours)

SYNC Strobes when Y Section Synchronize Strobes
*N
Miscellaneous Silenced N Active During Silence
Options Y
Auto Display Events *N Section Auto Display Event
N
System Y Section Automatic Daylight
Auto Daylight Saving Time *Y
Options Daylight Saving N Savings Adjustment
cont Options DST Start Select week: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th Section Daylight Saving Time
Select month
DST End or Last Start and End
Edit Banner Refer to Appendix Section 9.6.5
SD
SLC Family Section 9.6.6
SK
Jump
Y (Yes)
Start Section 9.7
N (No)
AutoPrg
Restore Y (Yes)
See Section 9.8
Defaults N (No)
Voice PC Connection
VCM Maintenance Section 9.9
Options Local Recording
*=Default
1. 1. Available on 5815XL External.
2. 2. Available on 6815 External.
3. 3. Available on 6815 Internal.
4. 4. Available with SLC Family as SK.
5. 5. Available with SLC Family as SD.
6. 6. Requires EVS module programmed into the panel.
7. 7. Requires wireless Gateway.
8. 8. Aux Sync setting is only applicable for the B200S Sounder Base.
Section 9: Programming
This section of the manual describes how to manually program the control panel from the built-in annunciator. Each subsection discusses
these menu options in detail. All options described in this section can be performed using HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite.
NOTE: Programming Requirement:

Before any customized programming is done, JumpStart should be run first. After JumpStart is run, thoroughly test the system. The reason
the system should be tested after JumpStart is because JumpStart automatically programs the system, searching for and configuring all
SLC and SBUS devices it finds. JumpStart allows you to confirm the integrity of the installation prior to performing any custom
programming. After determining that the hardware is properly installed, custom programming can be performed.
9.1 UL 864 / UL 2572 Programming Requirements

NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES: This product
incorporates field programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and
Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864 and UL 2572, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not
used at all as indicated below.
Permitted in Permitted in Settings
Possible Settings Permitted in
Programming Option Menu Item UL 864 UL 2572 Permitted in
Settings UL 2572
(Y/N) (Y/N) UL 864
Time Options Auto-resound Yes Yes 4 hrs, 24hrs 4 hours if using 4 hours if using SWIFT
SWIFT devices devices
Time Options Low AC Report Delay Yes Yes 0–30 hours 1–3 1–3
Display Oldest Event Y (Enabled) Yes Yes Yes & No Yes Yes
N (Disabled) No No Yes & No No No
Initial Delay 0-28 Yes Yes 0-28 3 3
Inter Message Delay 4-32 No No 4-32 4-32 4-28
Alarm Verification Alarm Verification Yes Yes 60-250 60 60
(confirmation
period)
Auto Reset EVS MIC Auto Reset EVS MIC Yes Yes Never Timer Never Timer Never Timer Event
Triggered Event Triggered Event Event Disabled Event Disabled Disabled
EVS Input EVS Input Yes Yes Latching Latching Latching
Non-Latching
Event Priority CO Alarm No No Yes & No No No
9.1: Programming Requirements

9.2 Modules
This section lists the options available under the module option in the Program Menu. The following modules are available for the con-
trol panel:
• 6815 & 5815XL SLC expander • 5880 LED I/O module • 6860 & 6855 remote fire alarm annunciators
• 5860 • 5496 intelligent power module • 5895XL intelligent power module
• 5824 serial/parallel printer interface module • 5865 LED annunciator
• EVS-50W • EVS-100W • EVS-VCM voice control module
• EVS-INT50W or EVS-125W audio/voice amplifiers
• SK-NIC network interface card • EVS-RVM remote voice module
9.2.1 Edit Modules
The features that can be edited when this option is selected are module ID, module name, class of wiring (Class A or Class B), or features
that are specific to the module to be edited.
To edit an existing module:
1. Enter the Installer Code. The panel will automatically go the Main Menu.
2. Select 7 for Program Menu.
3. Press 1 to enter module menu.
4. Press 1 to edit a module.
5. Use the Up or Down arrow to select the module you wish to edit, then press ENTER.
Editing Module ID
6. Press the Up or Down arrow key to modify the module ID.
NOTE: Internal devices and SK-NIC are not able to have their module ID edited.
Programming Zone
Naming Modules
You can assign an English name to a system hardware module to make it easier to recognize on a display.
7. If you wish to edit the module’s name, press the ENTER on the modules name. Then press the number keys corresponding to the
character to select each character for the module’s name (or press the right arrow to bypass editing the name).
Press the right arrow to move to the next character.
NOTE: See Appendix for editing name.
Default name for the Internal

SLC module
(no customization)
Use Up or Down arrow key to select

Mode. Press the number until
the character wanted is
shown. Press left/rt arrow
Figure 9.1 Edit module Name Programming Screen Example

Changing Module Options
Each module has a unique set of options that specifically applies to the functionality of the module being edited.
8. Use the left and right arrow keys to move between available options.
9. Option settings are edited by pressing the Up or Down arrow.
9.2.2 Adding a Module
To add a new hardware module to the system, follow these steps:
You must be in the Main Menu to perform this task. If necessary, enter the Installer Code.
3. Press 1 to enter Module Menu.
4. Press 2 to add a module.
5. From the next screen, select the number that corresponds to choose a module type to add from the <New Module Type> screen.
The screen will display “Adding module [#]...” for a few moments. You will be returned to the <New Module Type> screen where
you can add additional modules if desired.
You must save changes when you exit the Program Menu or the new module will not be added.
NOTE: If you Add a Module that has not been physically connected, the panel will go into trouble after it reinitializes (when you exit the
Program Menu). When the new module is attached, the trouble will correct itself automatically.
9.2.3 Deleting a Module

To delete a module, follow these steps:
You must be in the Main Menu to perform this task. If necessary, enter the Installer Code.
1. Enter the Installer Code. The panel will automatically access the Main Menu.
2. Select 7 for the Program Menu.
3. Press 1 to enter the Module Menu.
4. Select the module to be deleted.
5. Press 3 to delete a module.
6. A warning screen will display. If you want delete the module, select Yes. To cancel, select No.
9.2.4 View Module List
To view a list of all modules, follow these steps:
3. Press 1 to enter the Module Menu.
4. Press 4 to view the Module List.
9.3 Zone
Through the Zone option in the Program Menu, you can edit and view zone points. Selections made here affect all detectors and switches
in the zone. Up to 999 zones can be used in the system.
Zone Programming
9.3.1 Edit Zone

Features that can be edited through the Edit Zone option are zone name, zone properties (which includes zone type and detector sensitiv-
ity), and zone accessory options.
To edit a zone, follow these steps:
3. Press 2 to enter the Zone Menu.
4. Press 1 to edit a zone.
5. Enter the zone number, then press ENTER.
Edit Zone Name
6. Press 1 to edit the selected the zone name.
You can use words to display a descriptive name for a zone.
NOTE: See Appendix for editing names.
Edit Zone Properties

Zone properties consist of the alarm delay characteristics and the heat detector sensitivity.
1. Do steps 1 through 5 of Section 9.3.1.
2. Press 2 to edit the properties of the selected zone.
Figure 9.2 Editing Zone Properties

 Alarm Delay Characteristics
The programmed zone type is provided for user reference only. To modify the zone type, use the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite.
Table 9.1 list the detector characteristics and a description of each.
Type of Delay Description
1-Count One Count (No Delay). When this option is enabled, an alarm occurs immediately when a single device of any of
the following types goes into alarm: detector, manual pull, water flow, Zone Aux1 or Zone Aux2. This is considered
the most typical operation and is the default for all zones.
2-Count When this type of alarm delay is used, two or more detectors within the zone must go into alarm in order for the
zone to report an alarm. Switches of type manual pull, Detector Switch, water flow, Zone Aux1 and Zone Aux2 are
an exception; they will cause an alarm when only one switch is in alarm.
When a single detector is in alarm in a 2-Count zone, the system enters a pre-alarm condition. In a pre-alarm
condition, the touchpad PZT beeps and the annunciator display indicates that a pre-alarm has occurred. If the zone
has been mapped to an output group for the pre-alarm event, the output group will activate. The pre-alarm will not
be reported to the Central Station.
When two count is used, the detector spacing shall be cut in half. You should, not use the alarm verification feature,
and no delay shall be used.
Alarm Verification Alarm verification is an optional false alarm prevention feature that verifies an alarm condition by resetting the
smoke detector. If the alarm condition still exists by the time the reset cycle has completed, the detector will go into
alarm. If the detector is no longer in alarm, no report will go to the central station.
The alarm verification sequence is ignored if the zone is already in alarm.
P.A.S.- Positive Alarm This option is intended to be used with an acknowledge switch. An alarm is delayed for 15 seconds, giving on-site
Sequence personnel a chance to investigate the alarm. If the acknowledge switch is not activated within 15 seconds, an alarm
occurs automatically.
If this option is enabled for a zone, the zone will respond to an alarm condition as follows:
• The zone will not go into alarm for 15 seconds to allow an on-site operator to activate the acknowledge switch.
• If the operator does not press the acknowledge switch within 15 seconds, the zone will go into alarm.
• If the operator presses the acknowledge switch within 15 seconds, a 180-second time-frame will begin count-
ing down. This time-frame allows the operator to investigate the cause of the alarm.
• If the operator performs a reset within 180 seconds, the alarm will not occur. If the operator does not perform a
reset within 180 seconds, an alarm will occur automatically. The P.A.S. feature will be overridden if another
alarm occurs.
Table 9.1 Alarm Detector Characteristics
Programming Zone
Type of Delay Description

Single Interlock See Section 10.7.1 for single interlock releasing operation.
Double Interlock See Section 10.7.2 for double interlock releasing operation.
Note: SK-Fire-CO and other CO detectors can only be installed in a 1 count zone.
Table 9.1 Alarm Detector Characteristics (Continued)
 Heat Temperature Setting
Use this feature to set the temperature at which high temperature detectors will respond.All detectors in the zone will respond in the same
way. The range for SK-Heat-HT heat detector is from 135°F to 190°F and the range for SD505-HEAT is 135°to 150°F.
The high temperature SK heat detectors are absolute temperature devices. This means that they respond to an alarm immediately if the
temperature in the zone goes above the programmed temperature.
3. Enter the temperature at which the heat detector will respond, or use the Up or Down arrow key to scroll through the range, or enter
directly from the number keys on the annunciator, then press ENTER.
4. Use the Up or Down arrow key to scroll through the range or enter directly from the number keys on the annunciator, then press
ENTER.
Zone Accessory Options
1. Do steps 1 through 5 of Section 9.3.1.
2. Press 3 to edit the Zone’s Accessory options.
Single or Multi-Station cadence pattern (choose from Patterns 00 to 02, 23 if using SK. Choose from 00-16, 23 if using SD devices). See
Appendix Appendix D:.
CO Single and Multi-station Cadence (choose from Cadence Patterns 00 to 02, 23 for SK devices).
NOTE 1: The B200S Sounder base provides the recommended CO cadence pattern.
Local Zone (choose Y or N, for Yes or No).
NOTE 2: If the SLC protocol is changed from SD to SK series and the cadence is no longer valid for SK, the zone cadence will be set to
constant on.
9.3.2 View Zone Points

To view the points in a zone, follow these steps:
2. Select 7 for the Panel Programming.
3. Press 2 to enter the Zone Menu.
4. Press 2 to view the Zone Points.
5. Enter the number of the zone you wish to view, then press ENTER.
Zone Number
Zone Name
Figure 9.3 View Zone Points Screen
Group Programming
9.4 Group
An output group is made up of output points that have been programmed to respond in the same way. Output groups simplify program-
ming because you only need to program the output characteristics that are common to all of the group points once, instead of program-
ming each individual point. Once you have defined the characteristics of output groups, you can assign each point to the appropriate
group. All valid output points are assigned to only one output group. Unused points are not assigned to any output group. Up to 999 out-
put groups can be defined.
9.4.1 Edit Group
In the Edit Group option, you can program the name of an output group (Section Edit Group Name) and change the properties of that
group. To edit a group, follow these steps:
3. Press 3 to enter the Group Menu.
4. Press 1 to edit the group.
5. Enter the number of the group you wish to edit, then press ENTER.
Edit Group Name
6. To edit the group name, press 1.
You can use words to display a descriptive name for a group.
NOTE: See Appendix for editing names.
Edit Group Properties

7. To edit the group properties, Press 2 from the Edit Group Menu.
NOTE: These settings only apply to the non-voice groups.
• Select Y for Voice Group and N for Non-Voice Group.
• Select / Dynamic Activation switch number: use this when the group is defined as a Voice Group; or as a Non-Voice Group where
Dynamic Activation is used. This option links the output group with a voice select switch on a VCM, RVM, or switch expander for
dynamic activation/deactivation. See the Section Activating Output Groups Dynamically for more information.
• Template Override is shown when set to Yes.
• Dynamic Activation -Is shown if a non-voice group is assigned to a Select/Dynamic Activation switch number
• Dynamic Activation / Template Override Cadence. (This is shown when the Template override is set to Yes or if a non-voice group
is assigned a Select/Dynamic Activation switch number): this setting sets the cadence of the non-voice group mapped to voice
select switch when activated using dynamic activation or by a template. See Sections Activating Output Groups Dynamically and
Section 9.5 for more information.
 Defining Output Group Type
Each output group is defined as either a voice output group or a non-voice output group. Output points that are
audio circuits (all circuits on the EVS-50W, EVS-125W, EVS-100W, EVS-INT50W and EVS-CE4) can only be assigned to voice output
groups. Output points that are non-voice circuits (all other points and circuits that are on all modules except the EVS-50W, EVS-125W,
EVS-100W, EVS-INT50W and EVS-CE4) are assigned to non-voice output groups.
Each of the output groups defined as voice can be mapped to a particular switch and LED on the EVS-VCM/ EVS-RVM and EVS-
SW24. This action allows the user to see the state of the voice groups assigned to the switches. This also lets the user individually select
which areas they want to do a live page into. Output groups not defined as voice groups can also be assigned to these switches as long as
there is a voice group already assigned to the group. This allows for dynamically activating/deactivating both voice and strobes/other
outputs in an area with a single button press.
Corresponding Corresponding
Key and LED Numbers Key and LED Numbers
EVS User Interface EVS-SW24

Figure 9.4 Corresponding Key and LED for Mapping Output Groups
Programming Point
 Silencing Options
The following silencing options are available for each output group.
Optional Timers Description
Silence Inhibit Timed Silence after Inhibit. If this option is selected, the output group must be audible for a programmed
number of minutes before it can be silenced. If the condition that caused the output to activate has not
cleared during the time-frame, the output can be silenced. If you select this option, select the timeframe in
the delay field. Range is 0-60 minutes.
Auto Silence Silenceable. The output group will automatically silence after the timer expires. Range is 0-60 minutes.
Auto Unsilence If this option is selected, the output group can be silenced for a programmed time-frame. If the condition that
caused the output to activate has not cleared during the time-frame, the output reactivates. If you select this
option, select the time-frame in the delay field. Range is 0-60 minutes.
Startup Delay When a alarm is generated, the Output group will not activate until the timer expires assuming the event is
still active. Range is 0-120 Seconds
Table 9.2 Silencing Options
9.4.2 View Group Points
2. Select 7 for Panel Programming.
4. Press 2 to view the Group Points.
5. Enter the Group Number, then press ENTER.
9.4.3 Edit OPG Template

4. Press 3 to edit the OPG Template.
5. Enter the Template number, then press ENTER.
6. Press ENTER on the template name to edit the name.
You can use words to display a descriptive name for a group.
NOTE: To edit names, see Appendix B.
7. Press the right arrow to the OPG and select YES or NO to select which output groups to include in the template.
9.5 Point
You may need to change characteristics of the individual input points (detectors and switches) even after using JumpStart. This section
explains how to change options for: type of point, latching/non-latching, silenceable/non-silenceable, zone assignment (input points),
detector accessory base options, group assignment (output points), and point name.
9.5.1 Point Programming For 5815XL Module
To program points on 5815XL Module, follow these steps:
3. Press 4 to enter the Point Menu.
4. Press the Up or Down arrows to select the desired module. Refer to Section 8.5 Quick Reference Table for available choices. Press
ENTER.
5. Enter the number of the point you wish to edit, then press ENTER.
6. Select the type of device by pressing the Up or Down arrow key. Refer to Table 9.3 under the column heading “Type Selection” for
a list of choices.
Point Programming
Type Selection Function Latching Option Comments

UNUSED Select for SLC points that are unused.
PHOTO Spot photoelectric detectors.
ION Spot ionization detector.
DETECTOR HEAT Spot heat detector.
PHOTO DUCT Duct photoelectric detector.
2-WIRE SMOKE 2-wire smoke detector.
PHOTO
ION Latching
SUP DET Use this option when you want a detector to indicate a supervisory alarm.
HEAT Non Latching
PHOTO DUCT
Use this switch type for manual pull stations. This input is always latched. The
MANUAL PULL switch can clear only when an alarm is reset. This switch type has the highest
fire priority; it overrides any other type of fire alarm.
Latching Use this switch type for monitoring water flow in a sprinkler system. Switch
closure will cause a sprinkler alarm. Water flow switches can be programmed
as latching or non-latching.
You can program a delay of up to 90 seconds to be used with a water flow
switch. The delay allows for normal, brief changes in sprinkler system water
WATERFLOW pressure. The water flow alarm will not activate unless the switch is active for
Non Latching the programmed delay time.
If a delay is used, the system begins counting down when the switch closes. If
the switch opens (restores) before the timer expires, a water flow alarm is not
SWITCH generated. If the water flow switch remains closed after the timer expires, a
water flow alarm will be generated.
Latching Use this switch type for tamper monitoring of sprinklers and other fire protection
FIRE SUPER-
devices. If a contact closes, a sprinkler supervisory event will be generated.
VISORY Non Latching
Supervisory switches can be latching or non-latching.
System-level, non latching switch. This switch is an alternative way of causing
a fire drill. It has the same operation as the fire drill option available from the
FIRE DRILL
annunciator. When the switch is activated, a fire drill begins; when the switch is
de-activated, the fire drill ends.
This system-level switch is an alternative way to silence the fire system. It has
SILENCE
the same effect as pressing the Silence key.
This system-level switch is an alternative way to reset the fire system. It has the
RESET
same effect as pressing the Reset key.
Table 9.3 Programming Options for 5815XL Modules
Programming Point

Positive acknowledge switch. This switch must be used in zones programmed
as Positive Alarm Sequence (see , "Edit Zone Properties").
If an acknowledge switch closes when an alarm or trouble condition is not
P.A.S. ACK already in progress, a trouble will occur.
You must use a UL listed normally open, momentary switch type. The switch
must be rated at 5V, 100 mA (minimum) and be used with an EOL resistor for
supervision.
Latching
ZONE AUX1
Non Latching Use these switch types if you want to monitor special zone-level conditions
Latching (such as dry contact from a remote power supply).
ZONE AUX2
Non Latching
Latching
SYSTEM AUX1
Non Latching Use these switch types if you want to monitor special system-wide conditions
Latching (such as dry contact from a remote power supply).
SYSTEM AUX2
Non Latching
SWITCH Used to monitor conventional 4-wire detectors, a contact closure will generate a
DETECTOR
(cont.) detector alarm event.
Latching Performs identically to a supervisory switch, but will be indicated as a tamper
FIRE TAMPER
Non Latching switch on the LCD annunciator.
MANUAL RELEASE Manual release switch
INTERLOCK Interlock release switch input.
STATUS POINT
Latching
EVS INPUT
Non Latching
User also has EVS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS INPUT.
Latching
EVS TAMPER
Non Latching
Only available when an EVS-VCM is installed in the system.
EVS SUPER- Latching
VISORY Non Latching
CO DETECT SW CO Detector Switch
CO SUPERVISORY
CO Supervisory Detector Switch
DETECT SW
Output point, a general use notification type. Use for driving standard
notification appliances.
Use constant power for applications that require a constant auxiliary power
AUX CONST
source. Power is always present at constant circuits.
NOTIF Use for auxiliary power, resettable applications. See Section 4.16.3 for a
AUX RESET
description of how this option operates.
Use for auxiliary power, door holder applications. For example, if you were
AUX DOOR using an auxiliary power supply for door holders, you would use this option.
See Section 4.16.3 for a description of how this option operates.
Output point, a general use relay type. Use for applications requiring a relay,
such as fan shutdown, elevator recall, and so on.
Use for auxiliary power, resettable applications. See Section 4.16.3 for a
AUX RESET
RELAY description of how this option operates.
Use for auxiliary power, door holder applications. For example, if you were
AUX DOOR using an auxiliary power supply for door holders, you would use this option.
See Section 4.16.3 for a description of how this option operates.
LED NUMBER 01-80 For use with SD devices only. 80 sub addresses on LED.
SLC LED Unused
LED FUNCTION
NOTIF Notification can have group number.
Table 9.3 Programming Options for 5815XL Modules (Continued)
Point Programming
9.5.2 Point Programming for 6815 Module

To program for points on an 6815 module, follow these steps:
4. Press the Up or Down arrow key to select the desired module. Refer to Section 8.5 Quick Reference Table for available choices.
Then press ENTER.
5. Select S for sensor or M for module. (SK Only)
6. Enter the number of the point you wish to edit, then press ENTER.
7. Select the type of device by pressing the Up or Down arrow key. Refer to Table 9.4 under the column heading “Type Selection” for
a list of choices.

UNUSED Select for SLC points that are unused.
PHOTO Spot photoelectric detectors.
ION Spot ionization detector.
HEAT Spot heat detector.
PHOTO DUCT Duct photoelectric detector.
DETECTOR
ACCLIMATE Acclimate photoelectric detector.
HEAT HT High temperature heat detector.
PHOTO-HEAT Photoelectric detector with heat sensor.
BEAM Beam smoke detector.
PHOTO Latching Use this option when you want a detector to indicate a supervisory
ION Non Latching alarm.
HEAT
PHOTO DUCT
SUP DET
ACCLIMATE
HEAT HT
PHOTO-HEAT
BEAM
CO ALRM / FIRE ALRM
CO ALRM / FIRE SUPR
CO SMOKE DETECTOR CO SUPR / FIRE ALRM
CO SUPR / FIRE SUPR Latching Detectors programmed as Supervisory can be latching or
Non Latching non-latching.
Photo Wireless photoelectric detector
W-DETECTOR Photo-Heat Wireless heat detector
Heat
Same as W-Detector Latching
W-SUP-DET
Non Latching
Table 9.4 Point Programming for 6815
Programming Point

MANUAL PULL Use this switch type for manual pull stations. This input is always
latched. The switch can clear only when an alarm is reset. This
switch type has the highest fire priority; it overrides any other type
of fire alarm.
WATERFLOW Latching Use this switch type for monitoring water flow in a sprinkler system.
Non Latching Switch closure will cause a sprinkler alarm. Water flow switches
can be programmed as latching or non-latching.
You can program a delay of up to 90 seconds to be used with a
water flow switch. The delay allows for normal, brief changes in
sprinkler system water pressure. The water flow alarm will not
activate unless the switch is active for the programmed delay time.
If a delay is used, the system begins counting down when the
switch closes. If the switch opens (restores) before the timer
expires, a water flow alarm is not generated. If the water flow
switch remains closed after the timer expires, a water flow alarm
will be generated.
FIRE SUPER-VISORY Latching Use this switch type for tamper monitoring of sprinklers and other
Non Latching fire protection devices. If a contact closes, a sprinkler supervisory
event will be generated. Supervisory switches can be latching or
non-latching.
FIRE DRILL System-level, non latching switch. This switch is an alternative way
of causing a fire drill. It has the same operation as the fire drill
option available from the annunciator. When the switch is
activated, a fire drill begins; when the switch is de-activated, the
fire drill ends.
SILENCE This system-level switch is an alternative way to silence the fire
system. It has the same effect as pressing the Silence key.
SWITCH
RESET This system-level switch is an alternative way to reset the fire
(cont.)
system. It has the same effect as pressing the Reset key.
P.A.S. ACK Positive acknowledge switch. This switch must be used in zones
programmed as Positive Alarm Sequence (see “Edit Zone
Properties” on page 106 “Table 9.1 list the detector characteristics
and a description of each.”).
If an acknowledge switch closes when an alarm or trouble
condition is not already in progress, a trouble will occur.
You must use a UL listed normally open, momentary switch type.
The switch must be rated at 5V, 100 mA (minimum) and be used
with an EOL resistor for supervision.
ZONE AUX1 Latching Use these switch types if you want to monitor special zone-level
Non Latching conditions (such as dry contact from a remote power supply).
ZONE AUX2 Latching
Non Latching
SYSTEM AUX1 Latching Use these switch types if you want to monitor special system-wide
Non Latching conditions (such as dry contact from a remote power supply).
SYSTEM AUX2 Latching
Non Latching
DETECTOR Used to monitor conventional 4-wire detectors, a contact closure
will generate a detector alarm event.
FIRE TAMPER Latching Performs identically to a supervisory switch, but will be indicated as
Non Latching a tamper switch on the LCD annunciator.
MANUAL RELEASE Manual release switch
INTERLOCK Interlock release switch input.
STATUS POINT
Table 9.4 Point Programming for 6815 (Continued)
Point Programming

EVS INPUT Latching User also has EVS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS INPUT.
Non Latching
Only available when an EVS-VCM is installed in the system.
EVS TAMPER Latching
Non Latching
SWITCH
EVS SUPER-VISORY Latching
(cont.)
Non Latching
CO DETECT SWITCH CO Detector Switch
CO SUPERVISORY Latching CO Supervisory Detector Switch
DETECT SWITCH Non Latching
OUTPUT PT Select Group Output point, a general use notification type. Use for driving
standard notification appliances.
AUX CONST Use constant power for applications that require a constant
auxiliary power source. Power is always present at constant
circuits.
NOTIF AUX RESET Use for auxiliary power, resettable applications. See Section 4.16.3
for a description of how this option operates.
AUX DOOR Use for auxiliary power, door holder applications. For example, if
you were using an auxiliary power supply for door holders, you
would use this option. See Section 4.16.3 for a description of how
this option operates.
OUTPUT PT Select Group Output point, a general use relay type. Use for applications
requiring a relay, such as fan shutdown, elevator recall, and so on.
AUX RESET Use for auxiliary power, resettable applications. See Section 4.16.3
for a description of how this option operates.
RELAY
AUX DOOR Use for auxiliary power, door holder applications. For example, if
you were using an auxiliary power supply for door holders, you
would use this option. See Section 4.16.3 for a description of how
this option operates.
W-GATEWAY
W-SWITCH Same as SWITCH
Same as RELAY When a wireless relay is in use, module device count must be
limited to 109 modules per loop. This includes wired and wireless
W-RELAY
modules that are on the same loop. The module address must be
within 1-109.
Table 9.4 Point Programming for 6815 (Continued)
9.5.3 Point Programming For Internal or External Power Module
To program for an internal or external power module points:
4. Press the Up or Down arrows to select the desired module. Refer to Section 9.5.3 for available choices, then press ENTER.
5. Enter the number of the circuit or point you wish to edit. Refer to Table 9.5 for available selections, then press ENTER.
6. Select the type by pressing the Up or Down arrows, then press ENTER.
7. Select the function by pressing the Up or Down arrows, then press ENTER.
8. Select the group by pressing the Up or Down arrows, then press ENTER.
9. Edit point name. See Section Appendix . Or, press the right arrow to skip point name edit.
Programming Point
10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 for all circuits.

Function Selections
Choices Type Selections Comments
for each Type
Enter Point
Select Type UNUSED
B NOTIF NOTIF Output
A NOTIF Control Circuit
AUX_PWR CONSTANT Constant auxiliary power.
AUX RESET Resettable auxiliary power.
AUX DOOR Door holder auxiliary power.
Aux SYNC Aux Power for System Sensor
B SWITCH MANUAL PULL Refer to comments column of
WATERFLOW Table 9.3 for description of these options.
Latch or Non-latching feature only appears for WATERFLOW,
FIRE SUPERVISORY
FIRE SUPERVISORY, FIRE TAMPER, ZONE AUX1, ZONE
FIRE TAMPER
AUX2, SYSTEM AUX1, SYSTEM AUX2, EVS INPUT, EVS
FIRE DRILL TAMPER, and EVS SUPERVISORY.
SILENCE
RESET
P.A.S. ACK
ZONE AUX1
ZONE AUX2
SYSTEM AUX1
SYSTEM AUX2
MANUAL RELEASE
INTERLOCK
STATUS POINT
EVS INPUT User also has EVS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS INPUT.
EVS TAMPER Only available when an EVS-VCM is installed in the system.
EVS SUPERVISORY
A SWITCH Same as B SWITCH
B DETECT 2-WIRE SMOKE Used for Class B, 2-wire detectors.
4-WIRE SMOKE Used for Class B, 4-wire detectors.
CO 4-WIRE DET Used for Class B, 4-wire CO detectors.
CO 4-WIRE SUP DET Latching or Non-latching used for Class B, 4-wire CO
Supervisory detectors
A DETECT 2-WIRE SMOKE Used for Class A, 2-wire detectors.
4-WIRE SMOKE Used for Class A, 4-wire detectors.
CO 4-WIRE DET Used for Class A, 4-wire CO detectors.
CO 4-WIRE SUP DET Latching or Non-latching used for Class A, 4-wire CO
Supervisory detectors
Table 9.5 : Menu choices for Internal/External Power Module
Point Programming
9.5.4 Point Programming for 5880, 5865, EVS-50W, EVS-INT50W, EVS-100W, EVS-125W and
EVS-CE4 Modules
To program 5880, 5865, EVS-50W, EVS-INT50W, EVS-100W, EVS-125W, or EVS-CE4 module points:
1. Enter the Installer Code. The panel will automatically display the Main Menu.
4. Press the Up or Down arrows to select the desired module. Refer to Section 8.5 for available choices. Then press ENTER.
Select NOTIF or UNSED

Select an output
group for this
Zone/Group
Select a name
for the Point
Figure 9.5 Programming Points as Outputs for the 5880 Module

Select Switch or Unused Select Function
Figure 9.6 Programming Points as Inputs for the 5880 Module

5. Enter the point number, then press ENTER.
6. Press the Up or Down arrows to select the type (notification or unused). Press ENTER.
7. Press the Up or Down arrows to select the desired group.
8. Press ENTER.
9. Edit the point name. See Section 9.6. Or, press the right arrow to skip module name edit.
10. Repeat Steps 1 through 9 for all points.
9.5.5 Point Programming For EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM Modules
To program EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM module points:
1. Enter the Installer Code.
4. Press the Up or Down arrows to select the desired module. Refer to Section 8.5 for available choices. Press ENTER.
5. Enter the point number. Press ENTER.
6. Press the Up or Down arrows to select the type (Switch or unused). Press ENTER.
7. Press the Up or Down arrows to select the function. Press ENTER.
8. Use the Up or Down arrows to modify and remaining options and use ENTER to move to the next field.
9. Edit the module name. See the Section Naming Modules. or, Press the right arrow to skip module name edit.
10. Repeat Steps 1 through 9 for all points.
Programming System Options
Function Selections for

Choices Type Selections Comments
each Type
UNUSED
MANUAL PULL
WATERFLOW
FIRE SUPERVISORY
TAMPER
FIRE DRILL
SILENCE
RESET
PAS_ACK Refer to comments column of
ZONE AUX1 Table 9.5 for description of these options. Latch or
Non-latching feature only appears for waterflow,
ZONE AUX2
supervisory, tamper, zone aux1, zone aux2, system
EVS-VCM/EVS-RVM SYSTEM AUX1
SWITCH aux1, and system aux2.
SYSTEM AUX2
MANUAL RELEASE
INTERLOCK
STATUS POINT
VOICE AUX STATUS 1-2
VOICE AUX EVS 1-4
Background Music
EVS INPUT User also has EVS Event Number 1-8 option for EVS
EVS TAMPER INPUT.
Only available when an EVS-VCM is installed in the
EVS SUPERVISORY system to the EVS-VCM / EVS-RVM choice part.
Table 9.6 : Point Programming Options for EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM
9.6 System Options

This section of the manual explains how to customize software options that affect the general operation of the system. This includes such
items as: Communication Options, Time Options, Miscellaneous Options, Daylight Saving Options, Edit Banner, and SLC Family. Refer
to each individual subsection for complete instructions.
9.6.1 Communication Options
Auto Test Time
To access the Auto Test Time screen:
3. Select 5 for the System Options.
4. From the next menu, select 1 for Communication Options.
5. Select 1 for the Auto Test Time.
6. Enter the hour you desire the control panel to send an Automatic Test Report (or press the Up or Down arrow key), then press
ENTER.
7. Enter the minutes (or press the Up or Down arrow key), then press ENTER.
8. Select AM or PM by pressing the Up or Down arrow key, then press ENTER.
9. Select Report Time Interval by pressing the Up or Down arrow key, then press ENTER. Time Interval selections are 24hr, 12hr, 6hr
and 4 hr.
NOTE: AM and PM are only available if the panel “Clock Options” are set for AMPM mode. Otherwise the clock is in military time and
AMPM is not selectable.
Phone Lines
To access the phone lines screen:
4. From the next menu, select 1 for Communication Options.
5. Select 2 for the Phone Lines.
6. Select Phone Line to be edited (1 or 2) by pressing the Up or Down arrow key, then press ENTER.
System Options Programming
Figure 9.7 Phone Lines Editing Screen

 Dialing Prefix
Enter up to 9 characters to be used for such things as PBX dial-out codes, a pause, and so on. The following special characters are avail-
able:
# Pound (or number) key on the telephone
* Star key on the telephone
, Comma (character for 2-second pause)
Use the number buttons on the annunciator or the Up- and Down-arrow keys to select special characters. Special characters begin dis-
playing after “9”.
7. Enter a dialing prefix (if needed), then press ENTER. Or Press the right arrow to bypass the dialing prefix option.
 Number of Answer Rings
This option is used in conjunction with the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. Use this option to determine the number of rings
before the panel answers a call from the computer. Range is 00-15 rings. This option is factory-programmed as 06 rings, which should be
compatible for most installations where the answering machine bypass feature is used. You may need to adjust it depending on the instal-
lation’s Telephone System.
The selection made here must match the programming for this option in the Communication Configuration dialog box of HFSS Honey-
well Fire Software Suite.
8. Enter the desired number of answer rings, then press ENTER.
 Dial Option (TouchTone or Pulse, or TT/PL)
9. Press the Up or Down arrow key to select the dial option, then press ENTER.
Dial Option Description
PULSE If this option is selected, only pulse dialing will be used for this phone line.
TT TouchTone dialing. If this option is selected, only TouchTone dialing will be used for this phone line.
TT/PL TouchTone alternating with pulse. If this option is selected, the communicator will first attempt to use
TouchTone. It will switch to pulse if TouchTone is not successful on the first attempt. It will continue to
alternate between TT and pulse for additional attempts.
Table 9-1
 Dial Format
10. Press the Up or Down arrow key to select the pulse ratio for rotary dialing option, then press ENTER.
Options are:
U U.S. standard format. Uses the 60 msec / 40 msec make/break ratio.
E European format. Uses the 66 msec / 34 msec make/break ratio.
 Dial Tone Detection Disabled
11. Select Y (do disable) or N (don’t disable) by pressing the Up or Down arrow key, then press ENTER.
 Monitor Line
Enable the line monitor for each phone line that will be used. When the phone line monitor has been enabled for a phone line, a trouble
condition will occur if the line is not connected. If a phone line will not be used, it must be disabled.
12. Select Y (monitor line) or N (don’t monitor line) by pressing the Up or Down arrow key, then press ENTER.
 Answering Machine Bypass

This option is used in conjunction with HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. This feature ensures that an answering machine will not
interfere with communication between the panel and the computer. If an answering machine is used at the panel site, enable this feature;
if an answering machine is not used, disable the feature.
This option is factory-programmed as No (disabled).
The selection made here must match the programming for this option in the Communication Configuration dialog box of HFSS Honey-
well Fire Software Suite.
13. Select Y (answering machine bypass enabled) or N (answering machine bypass disabled) by pressing the Up or Down arrow key,
then press ENTER.
 Phone Line Unused
This option is used so that you can set the unused phones lines to “Yes”, so no auto-test will be sent through that line.
This option is factory programmed as No.
14. Select Y or N by pressing the Up or Down arrow key, then press ENTER.
Edit Ethernet
4. From the next menu, select 1 for the Communication Options.
5. Select 3 for the Edit Ethernet option.
Figure 9.8 Edit Ethernet Message screen

AlarmNet Timers
5. Select 4 for the AlarmNet Timers.
6. The available options for the AlarmNet Timers are as follows: *default
• Ethernet: None, 75 seconds, 90 seconds, 3 minutes, *5 minutes, 1 hour, 24 hours,30 days.
• Cellular: None, *24 hours, 30 days
• Old Alarm: None, 10 minutes, 15 Minutes,*30 Minutes, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 6 Hours, 12 Hours, 24 Hours
Figure 9.9 AlarmNet Timers
System Options Programming
Phone Line Gains

5. Select 5 for Phone Line Gains.
6. The available options: *default
• Dialing Gain:
• Low = 9 DB Attenuation
• Normal = 6 DB Attenuation
• *High = 3 DB Attenuation
• Reporting Gain:
• *Low = 9 DB Attenuation
• Normal = 6 DB Attenuation
• High = 3 DB Attenuation
9.6.2 Time Options
Through this programming option, you can set the water flow delay time, alarm verification time, AC report delay, AC-Frequency, Auto-
Resound, and Clock Format.
Water Flow Delay
You can program a delay of 0-90 seconds (zero means no delay) to be used in conjunction with a water flow switch. The delay is system-
wide. All water flow switches on the system will use the same delay period.
To access the screen for programming water flow delay, follow these steps:
4. Select 4 for the Time Options.
A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 9.10 will display.
Delay in seconds
before waterflow
alarm occurs.
(00 - 90)
Figure 9.10 Water Flow Delay Programming Screen

5. Enter the number of seconds (0 to 90) to delay a water flow switch alarm, then press ENTER.
Alarm Verify
You can set the alarm verification time from 60 to 250 seconds (default is 60 seconds).
To set the alarm verification:
6. Enter the desired number of seconds for the alarm verification time.
7. Press the right arrow or ENTER to make your selection and move to the next programming option.
AC Report Delay
NOTE: You must select 1-3 hours in UL central station installations and UL remote signaling installations.
You can adjust the number of hours before a low AC report will be sent to the central station.
To program the low AC report delay, follow these steps:
8. Enter the number of hours (0-30) before a low AC report will be sent to the central station, then press ENTER.
Change AC Line Frequency
The panel’s AC line frequency is selectable for 50, 60 Hz, or Internal. AC Frequency feature dictates how the control panel will calculate
the time based on the AC line frequency used in the installation site. The “Neither” option can be used in areas where the AC line fre-
quency is not dependable and you want the panel to calculate the time from the internal crystal. The internal crystal is not as accurate as
the AC power source and internal 60 Hz or 50 Hz should normally be selected. The panel defaults to the 60 Hz. selection.
To change the AC line frequency, continue programming from step 9 above:
9. Select 50, 60 or Intl by pressing the Up or Down arrow, then press ENTER.
Clock Display Format (AM/PM or Military)

To change the system clock display format:
10. Select AMPM (for AM/Pm display format) or MIL (for military or 24 hr display format) by pressing the Up or Down arrow, then
press ENTER.
Auto-Resound (4 or 24 hours)
The system resound time period can be modified from the default value 24 hours to 4 hours. This setting adjusts when the FACP will
automatically resound events after being silenced. Set this option to 4 hours when using SWIFT devices.
9.6.3 Miscellaneous Options
Through this programming option you can turn on or off strobe synchronization during silence and display status at idle (auto display
event).
To edit miscellaneous options:
3. Select 5 for System Options.
4. Select 5 for Miscellaneous Options.
Synchronize Strobes Active During Silence
When “SYNC Strbs w/ Sil:” is Selected as Y (Yes) then strobes will continue to flash when the system is silenced and will stop flashing
when the system is reset.
NOTE: The “SYNC Strbs w/ Sil:” only functions with outputs that use a synchronized output pattern.
5. Press the Up or Down arrow to toggle this selection between Y (Yes) or N (No).
Auto Display Event
When this feature is programmed Y (Yes), then the oldest un-acknowledge event will automatically display on the control panel and
remote annunciators, after there has been no activity on any system touchpad for two minutes.
7. Press the Up or Down arrow to toggle this selection between Y (Yes) or N (No).
9.6.4 Daylight Savings Options
To edit Daylight Savings:
4. Select 6 for the Daylight Savings.
Automatic Daylight Savings Adjustment
The control panel has an automatic DST (Daylight Saving Time) adjustment feature. If this feature is not enabled (set to No), the Day-
light Saving Time change is not made to the system clock.
To enable or disable DST adjustment continue programming:
5. Select Y (enabled) or N (disabled) by pressing the Up or Down arrow, then press ENTER.
Daylight Saving Time Start and End
This option lets you adjust the week and month Daylight Saving Time (DST) starts and ends. For this feature to work, you must enable
(set to Yes) the Automatic Daylight Savings Adjustment option under Daylight Savings Options. The default values for the DST Start
and End are:
DST Start: The second Sunday in March
DST End: The first Sunday in November
To set the start and end for the Daylight Saving Time:
6. Press the Up or Down arrow to select the week (1st, 2nd, etc.) Daylight Saving Time starts, then press ENTER to make your
selection and move to the month setting.
7. Press the Up or Down arrow to select the month (January – December) Daylight Saving Time starts, then press ENTER to make
your selection and move to the DST End option.
8. Press the Up or Down arrow to select the week (1st, 2nd, etc.) Daylight Saving Time ends, then press ENTER to make your
selection and move to the month setting.
9. Press the Up or Down arrow to select the month (January – December) Daylight Saving Time ends, then press ENTER two times to
make your selection and exit.
JumpStart Auto-Programming Programming
9.6.5 Edit Banner

The banner is the message that displays on the panel LCD when the system is normal, that is, when no alarms or troubles exist and the
system menus are not in use. A custom message of up to 40 characters can be created.
If a customize message is not created, the system will use the internal banner. You cannot change the internal banner.
To customize the banner display message:
4. Select 7 for the Edit Banner.
NOTE: See Appendix for instructions on how to edit the banner.
5. Select each letter by pressing the Up or Down arrow, then press the right arrow to move to the next character.
6. When done, press ENTER to move to line two of the custom banner.
9.6.6 SLC Family
The 6820/6820EVS supports SD protocol SLC devices or SK protocol SLC devices. You must configure the 6820/6820EVS to accept
the protocol of the devices you are installing.
NOTE: You cannot mix SK and SD protocol SLC devices on the same panel
4. Press 8 for the SLC Family.
5. Press Up arrow to select the desired SLC device type.
6. Press ENTER to accept the displayed SLC device type.
NOTE: When changing SLC type from one protocol to another, the following message will appear.
Figure 9.11 SLC family change

NOTE 1: Message when changing SLC family from SK to SD: “Changing to this SLC family will remove all external 6815’s”
NOTE 2: Message when changing from SD to SK: “SLC family will remove all 5815XL’s on the system”
9.7 JumpStart Auto-Programming

Panels support an incremental JumpStart. For Example: After initial JumpStart & customization, if you add more devices, when you
JumpStart again the additional devices are added but you do not lose any of your previous custom programming
To run JumpStart:
3. Select 6 for JumpStart.
4. Press ENTER to accept the Warning screen.
5. Follow the remaining on-screen instructions.
6. Press ENTER to confirm. See Section 8.1.3.
Programming Restore Defaults
9.8 Restore Defaults

This option allows you to restore the panel back to factory defaults. All programming will be lost.
3. Select 7 for Restore Defaults.
4. Press the Up or Down arrow key to select YES or NO from the Warning screen. Then press ENTER.
9.9 VCM Maintenance

Through this Programming Menu, you can modify the messages programmed into an VCM. You can also modify other voice settings.
9.9.1 VCM Maintenance
The VCM Maintenance menu is used to program custom messages into the VCM. Messages can be recorded locally using the micro-
phone.
3. Select 1 for VCM Maintenance.
Section 10: System Operation
Operation of the control panel is simple. Use the Menus to guide you step-by-step through the operations. This section of the manual is
an overview of the Operation Menus. Please read this entire section carefully before operating the control panel.
10.1 User and Installer Default Codes
Installer Code (factory-programmed as 123456).
Multi-site Installer Code (factory-programmed as 654321).
10.2 Annunciator Description
Figure 10.1 shows the annunciator that is part of the control panel board assembly for 6820.
Figure 10.1 Control Panel Annunciator for 6820

Figure 10.2 shows the annunciator that is part of the control panel board assembly for the 6820EVS.
Figure 10.2 Control Panel Annunciator for 6820EVS
System Operation Menu System
10.2.1 LCD Display

The control panel LCD displays system messages, annunciates alarms, supervisories and troubles, provides status information, and
prompts for input. Annunciator keys beep when they are pressed.
10.2.2 Banner
The banner is the message that displays on the control panel when the system is in normal mode (no alarm or trouble condition exists and
menus are not in use). A custom message can be created that will display instead of the internal (default) message. See Section 9.6.5 for
information on customizing the banner.
Figure 10.3 Banner Display Examples for 6820

information on editing the banner.
Text of
Internal Banner
Custom Banner
Example
Figure 10.4 Banner Display Examples for 6820EVS

10.3 Menu System
The control panel is easy to operate from the Main Menu. To view the Main Menu, press the ENTER or the right arrow key on the con-
trol panel or remote annunciator. The Main Menu will appear as shown in Section 10.3.1. Select the desired option. You will be
prompted for an access code if required.
The control panel supports up to 20 access codes. The profile for each access code (or user) can be modified through the Network Pro-
gramming option (see Section 6.2.5 for Access Code programming).
10.3.1 Main Menu Overview
Table 10.1The chart below is a brief overview of the Main Menu. These options are described in greater detail throughout this section of
the manual.
Main Menu Options Description

1- System Tests Access to Fire Drill, Indicator Test, Walk Tests, Communicator Test, Clear History Buffer, Manual AlarmNet
Registration and Manual Communicator Reset.
2- Point Functions Enable/disable points, Point Status, Set SLC Address, Device Locator, and I/O Point Control.
3- Event History Display event history on the LCD. See Section 10.4.4 for more information.
4- Set Time & Date Set time and date for the system.
5- Network Diagnostics Ping Panel and Data Network Status
6- Network Programming Access Learn Network, Edit Network Names, Edit Panel ID, Computer Access, Access Codes,
Communicator Options, Voice Options, Sync Network Options.
7- Panel Programming Brings up a set of menus for programming the panel. These options are described in detail in Section 9.
8- System Information Menus to view information about the panel such as model, ID, serial number, revision, send or receive
firmware updates and feature registration activation.
Basic Operation System Operation
10.3.2 Using the Menus

To move through the menus: Use the Up or Down arrows to move through the options in a Menu. Use the left arrow to move to
a previous menu.
To select an option: Enter the number of the option, OR press ENTER if the option has the = symbol next to it.
Exit Menu Press the Left arrow.
Table 10.1 Menu Options

10.4 Basic Operation
10.4.1 Setting Time and Date
1. Select 4 for Set Date & Time.
2. Make changes in the fields on the screen. Use the right arrow to move through the fields. Use the Up or Down arrow key to select
options in the fields.
3. When the date and time are correct, press ENTER.
10.4.2 Disable / Enable a Point
1. Select 2 for Point Functions.
2. Select 1 for Disable/Enable Point.
Disable / Enable NACs by Template
1. Press 1 for Disable NACs by Template, press 2 to Enable NACs by Template.
2. Use the Up or Down arrow key to move through the list of templates. Press ENTER to select the current template.
Disable / Enable NACs by Group
1. Press 3 to Disable NACs by Group, or press 4 to Enable NACs by Group.
2. Use the Up or Down arrow key to move through the list of groups. Press ENTER to select the group highlighted.
Disable / Enable Zone Points
1. Press 5 to Disable Zone Points, or press 6 to Enable Zone Points.
2. Use the Up or Down arrow key to move through the list of zones. Press ENTER to select the zone highlighted.
Disable / Enable Point
1. Press 7 to Disable /Enable Point.
2. Choose Module.
3. Use the Up or Down arrow key to choose point and press ENTER.
4. Press right arrow to disable or enable point.
Inhibit Output Group
Inhibiting an output group prevents the group from being utilized by system mapping. While inhibited no event in the system can acti-
vate the output group.
1. Press 8 to inhibit output group.
2. Use the Up or Down arrow key to select the group to be inhibited.
3. Press right arrow to inhibit the group.
4. Press right arrow again to enable the group.
10.4.3 View Event History
Use the View Event History feature to display events on LCD. From the Main Menu, press 3 to select Event History. Events will begin
displaying with most recent events first.
The panel can store up to 1000 events. When it reaches its 1000-event capacity, it will delete the oldest events to make room for the new
events as they occur. In networked setups, each panel stores up to 1000 of its own events. When using HFSS Honeywell Fire Software
Suite, all 1000 events from every panel in the network will be uploaded.
On multi-site displays, pressing ENTER or right arrow brings you directly into View Event History and allows you to view the Event
History from every panel in each of the sites that the multi-site display is assigned to.
To clear the event history
From the Installer menu select 1 for System Tests. From the test menu select 6 Clear History Buffer.
Single Key Acknowledge
This feature allows the user to press the ACK and display the oldest un-acknowledged event in the system. Pressing ACK again will
acknowledge the event, then display the next oldest un-acknowledged event without pressing the arrow keys.
System Operation Basic Operation
10.4.4 Conduct a Fire Drill

This system test initiates a Fire Drill alarm and activates Fire Drill mapping for 10 minutes or until a user manually exits the fire drill.
1. From the Main Menu, press 1 for System Tests.
2. Press 1 for Fire Drill. You will be prompted to press ENTER.
3. The drill will begin immediately after you press ENTER.
4. Press any key to end the drill. (If you do not press any key to end the fire drill manually, it will time out automatically after ten
minutes.)
If a fire drill switch has been installed, activating the switch will begin the drill; deactivating the switch will end the drill.
10.4.5 Conduct an Indicator Test
The indicator test checks the annunciator LEDs, PZT, and LCD display.
2. Press 2 for Indicator Test. The system turns on each LED several times, beeping the PZT as it does so. At the same time it scrolls
each available character across the LCD. A problem is indicated if any of the following occurs:
• An LED does not turn on.
• You do not hear a beep.
• All four lines of the LCD are not full.
This test will run for approximately 15 minutes or until the user manually exits. You can press any key to end manually while the test is
still in progress. When the test ends, you will be returned to the <Test Menu>.
10.4.6 Conduct a Walk Test
Walk Test is a feature which allows one person to test the fire alarm system. The Walk Test will run for 4 hours or until the user manually
exits. If an alarm or pre-alarm condition is occurring in the system, you will not be able to enter the Walk Test. A Walk Test may only be
initiated if the test is enabled in the user profile.
NOTE: If any Alarm Verification Zones are used, the user will be asked if they want to disable the Alarm Verification during the Walk Test.
This occurs for either Walk Test option.
2. Select 3 for Walk Test-No Rpt.
Enter the time period you want the NAC circuit to be active for each alarm (06 to 180 seconds).
The LCD will display “WALK TEST STOPPED” on Line 1 and “ENTER = start test” on Line 3.
When you select this option, the Central Station Reporting is disabled while the test is in progress.
3. Select 4 for Walk Test-with Rpt.
Enter the time period you want the NAC circuit to be active for each alarm (06 to 180 seconds).
The LCD will display “WALK TEST STOPPED” on Line 1 and “ENTER = start test” on Line 3.
When you select this option, the Central Station Reporting will occur as normal during the Walk Test.
4. The panel generates a TEST report to the Central Station when the Walk Test begins. During a Walk Test, the panel’s normal fire
alarm function is completely disabled, placing the panel in a local trouble condition. All zones respond as 1-Count zones (respond
when a single detector is in alarm) during a Walk Test. Each alarm initiated during the Walk Test will be reported and stored in the
event history buffer.
5. To End the Walk Test, go to the Main Menu. Select 1 for the System Test. Then press 3 or 4. Press ENTER to end the Walk Test.
The system will reset. The panel will send a “TEST RESTORE” report to the Central Station.
If you do not end the Walk Test manually within four hours, it will end automatically. If an alarm or pre-alarm condition is occurring in
the system, you will not be able to enter the Walk Test.
NOTE: The panel does not do a full 30 second reset on resettable power outputs. As soon as the device is back to normal, the panel is
ready to go to the next device.

2. Select 5 for Communicator Test. The screen will display “Manual Communicator Test started”. When the test is completed, you
will be returned to the <Test Menu>. A Manual Communicator Test requires that at least one daily test in the network be enabled in
the Communicator programming.
3. The Manual Communicator Test will be communicated out both Phone Lines and Ethernet/Cellular paths if they are all
programmed. Each Manual Communicator Test will alternate between one of the Phone Line paths and one of the AlarmNet paths.
10.4.7 Manual AlarmNet Registration
2. Select 8 for Register AlarmNet. The screen will display and ask for confirmation. Feedback will be given if the command was sent
or not.
10.4.8 Silence Alarms or Troubles
Press SILENCE to turn off silenceable outputs and annunciator PZTs. If you installed an external silence switch, activating the switch
will silence alarms or troubles. If you are already using System Menus when you press SILENCE, you do not need to enter your code.
Basic Operation System Operation
NOTE 1: Alarm and trouble signals that have been silenced, but the detector remains un-restored, will un-silence every 4 or 24 hours
depending on user selection until the detector is restored.
NOTE 2: Multi-Site displays do not allow for silencing multiple sites. Pressing SILENCE will only locally silence the PZT built into the
annunciator.
NOTE 3: For EVS systems, pressing silence at an LOC will only prompt for which system they desire to reset. See Section 10.5.1.
10.4.9 Reset Alarms

Press RESET to perform a control panel reset. If an external reset switch has been installed, activating the switch will reset fire alarms.
NOTE 1: Multi-Site displays do not allow for resetting multiple sites.
NOTE 2: For EVS Systems, pressing reset at an LOC will prompt the user for which system they desire to reset. See Section 10.5.1.
Reset Communicator
This options allows the user to Reset the Communicator. The LCD will display:
“Resetting Communicator… Please Wait“
You will be returned to the Main Menu when the reset is complete.
The Communicator is not allowed to be reset when alarms or supervisories are active. Communicator reset is not allowed if any of the
following are active:
• Fire Alarm
• Fire Supervisory
• Fire Pre-Alarm
• CO Alarm
• CO Supervisory
• EVS Alarm
• EVS Supervisory
10.4.10 Check Detector Sensitivity Through Point Status
The control panel constantly monitors smoke detectors to ensure that sensitivity levels are in compliance with NFPA 72. Detectors are
sampled every three hours.
If sensitivity for a detector is not in compliance, the panel goes into trouble, generating a Calibration Trouble condition. A detector enters
a Calibration Maintenance state to indicate that it is approaching an out of compliance condition (but is currently still in compliance).
When a Calibration Trouble condition occurs, the central station receives a detector trouble report (“373” + Zone # for Contact ID for-
mat; “FT” + Zone # in SIA format).
To check sensitivity for an individual detector, follow the steps below.
1. From the Main Menu, press 2 for Point Functions.
2. Press 2 for Point Status.
3. Select the module where the point you want to check is located.
4. Enter the number of the point you want to check and press ENTER.
System Operation Basic Operation
A screen similar to those shown in Figure 10.5 will display for 6820 and Figure 10.6 for 6820EVS.
Figure 10.5 Checking Detector Sensitivity Compliance 6820 4x20 display
Figure 10.6 Checking Detector Sensitivity Compliance 6820EVS 4x 40 display

You can print detector status by uploading the detector status to and printing from HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite.
Event Priority System Operation
10.4.11 View Status of a Point

1. From the Main Menu, select 2 for Point Status.
2. From the list that displays, press ENTER to select the module where this point is located. Next, enter the point to display. The
screen that displays will show you if the point has a trouble and will provide sensitivity compliance information. (See Section
Section 10.4.10 for complete information about detector sensitivity compliance.)
10.4.12 View Alarms or Troubles
When the system is in alarm or trouble, you can press Down arrow to view the location of an alarm or trouble.
10.4.13 System Information
Press 8 from the Main Menu to view the panel model, serial number, system version number and date. Press the left arrow to return to the
Main Menu.
 About Panel
Press 1 to access About Panel to view the panel model, serial number and system version number and date.
 Send/Receive Firmware Updates
The 6820 or 6820EVS has the ability to be updated in the field. The latest 6820 or 6820EVS Firmware Update Utility can be down-
loaded from www.silentknight.com. Once a panel has been updated using the Firmware Update Utility, you can use Send/Receive firm-
ware updates to propagate the firmware to the other panels in the network.
1. Press 2 to send a firmware update or press 3 to receive a firmware update from the System Information menu. Available panels are
listed in the menu.
2. Use the Up or Down arrow key to select a panel to send/receive an update to/from. Press ENTER to start the update process.
 Ethernet Information
1. Press 5 from the System Information menu for Ethernet Information.
 AlarmNet Info
1. Press 6 from the System Information Menu for AlarmNet Info.
2. Cell Strength: 0 to 100%
3. Status: Registered/Not Registered
 AlarmNet Temporary PIN
Press 7 from the System Information menu for the AlarmNet Temporary PIN. This is used in case the FACP is replaced on the CCP.
10.5 Event Priority
This section goes over how event activations are handled by the control panel with regards to priority.
10.5.1 System Control
The 6820 or 6820EVS control panel integrates both a fire and emergency system into one. When the events are active from both sys-
tems, the control panel makes intelligent decisions to determine which system should be controlling outputs. This is called System Con-
trol. This manual will refer to the fire or emergency systems having System Control, this means that the system has an active alarm or
supervisory event that has a higher event priority than an active alarm or supervisory event from the other system. For this consideration,
the control panel looks at the highest priority event active on each system. When both systems are active, the system with control will
activate System Override. System Override is activated on the lower priority, non-System Control panel system (fire or emergency sys-
tem.)
10.5.2 System Override
System Override temporarily disengages output group activations from the system being overridden. This is done to not provide conflict-
ing messages and signaling and help with reducing confusion of the building occupants.
When output groups are supposed to be active but are not because System Control has activated System Override, they are re-activated
every 30 seconds for 2-3 seconds to indicate to the building occupants that there is still an event active. This will only occur when the
system with System Control is not using the output group. The System Override option is programmable for non-voice output groups on
a per output group basis through the panel output group programming menus and in HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. In these
places the option is called Allow System Override and defaults to YES. It is also possible to not reactivate the output groups every 30
seconds when System Override is active on a per system basis. This option is programmable in HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite.
There are times when you would not want to allow System Override for an output group. For example: fire is programmed to an elevator
relay to bring the elevator to the bottom floor for fire only. If fire and EVS are active with EVS being the higher priority event, you still
need the elevator to move to the bottom floor and only audible and visual notification appliances must be overridden. In this case, the
output group assigned to the relay would be set to NO on the Allow System Override setting. See Section edit group properties.
System Operation Event Priority
10.5.3 Event Priority

Each event type (see Table 10.2) has a priority level assigned to it. When more than one event type is active, the panel uses the Event Pri-
ority Table to determine which event mapping to use to control output groups. The Event Priority Table can be modified using HFSS
Honeywell Fire Software Suite. It is strongly recommended that before each installation a risk analysis is done by the stake holders
(property owners, AHJ, occupants, etc.) to determine which events take precedence over others.
The Emergency LOC Alarm entry in the Event Priority Table encompasses all EVS Alarm Events that can be activated from an LOC
(LOC Mic Triggered EVS Alarm and LOC EVS 1 Alarm through LOC EVS 8 Alarm). By default, these events do not have a priority -
they can be activated in any order. A programming option in HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite exists to force a priority scheme for
the LOC EVS Alarm Events. When this option is enabled, the lower numbered the EVS event is, the higher priority it has (e.g. LOC
EVS 1 Alarm is higher priority than LOC EVS 8 Alarm). With this priority scheme, once a higher priority EVS Event has been activated,
an EVS reset must be performed before a lower priority EVS Event can be activated.
The Event Priority Table contains the following events for modification:
Fire System Emergency System

Fire Manual Pull Alarm Emergency LOC Alarm
Fire Detector Alarm Emergency 1 Point Alarm
Fire Water Flow Alarm Emergency 2 Point Alarm
Fire Interlock Release Alarm Emergency 3 Point Alarm
Fire Zone Aux 1 Alarm Emergency 4 Point Alarm
Fire Zone Aux 2 Alarm Emergency 5 Point Alarm
Fire System Aux 1 Alarm Emergency 6 Point Alarm
Fire System Aux 2 Alarm Emergency 7 Point Alarm
Emergency 8 Point Alarm
Emergency Voice Aux 1 Alarm
CO Alarm
Fire Pre-Alarm
Emergency Supervisory
Fire Supervisory
CO Supervisory
Trouble
Site F Key Status
System Status
Table 10.2 Event Priority Table
NOTE 1: Status Points, Status Voice Aux 1, Status Voice Aux 2, and Background Music are contained within the System Status event
priority.
NOTE 2: All fire, emergency and system troubles are prioritized into the Trouble event priority
10.5.4 Priority Rules

1. Event priorities can be changed only within, not between, priority levels (defined by bold lines in Table 10.2).
2. Emergency LOC Alarm must always higher than Emergency 1-8 Point Alarm and Emergency Voice Aux 1-4 Alarm.
3. EVS events do not need to be in order by EVS number.
10.5.5 Other Priority Considerations
There are other considerations to take into account when the same event is acting on the same output group (an event being mapped to an
output group.) These are prioritized in order of appearance:
• Event priority is considered here based on the Event Priority Table.
• If an output group is mapped both directly and through an output group template to an event, the direct map gets priority. Example:
Template 1 Contains Group 1. Zone 1 Manual Pull is mapped to Template 1 and Group 1 using constant and ANSI patterns
respectively. If Zone 1 Manual Pull is active, Group 1 will output ANSI.
• When an event is mapped to an output group from multiple zones, the lower numbered zone gets priority. Example: Zone 1 Manual
Pull and Zone 2 Manual Pull are mapped to Group 1 using constant and ANSI patterns respectively. If Zone 1 and Zone 2 Manual
Pull events are active, Group 1 will output constant.
Operation Mode Behavior System Operation
10.6 Operation Mode Behavior

The control panel can be in one or more of seven conditions at any given moment: Normal, Alarm, Prealarm, Supervisory, Trouble,
Silenced, and Reset. Table 10.3 describes the behavior of the panel in each of these modes.
When looking at the LCD, the screen will display FIRE for the “Fire System”, CO for the “CO System” and EMGY for “Emergency
Communication System”. The highest priority event will display first and include the event count.
Press the Down arrow to view the location and type of alarm, supervisory, or trouble. If the panel is programmed to Auto Display Event,
information describing the highest priority active event will display on the first two lines. The 3 and 4th line will show the status of
which event types are active for each system (fire, CO and emergency systems). Auto Display Event activates after two minutes of
annunciator inactivity.
Figure 10.7 Highest Priority Event Display
site panel# module#
Figure 10.8 Event Display after Two Minutes Sitting idle
Operation In This Mode You Can

Occurs When System Behavior
Mode
SYSTEM POWER LED is on. Enter the appropriate code to activate the User or
No alarm or trouble The All Systems Normal display indicates that Installer Menu, or rotate the key to activate the User
Normal condition exists and menus the system is in normal mode. Menu.
are not in use. The current date and time display on the last
line of the LCD.
The communicator seizes control of the phone Press the Down arrow to view the alarm. A screen
line and calls the central station. similar to this one displays.
The on-board annunciator sounds a loud,
steady beep (any notification devices attached
to the system will also sound).
GENERAL ALARM LED flashes.
The LCD displays a screen similar to this one.
A smoke detector goes into

alarm or a pull station is Press SILENCE and enter an access code (or
activated. EVS LOC or point activate the key) to silence the annunciator (and any
alarm notification devices attached to the system).
When the alarm condition clears, press RESET and
Alarm enter a code (or activate the key) to restore the panel
to normal.
CO Detector goes into
Alarm.
If more than 3 categories

are active at a single time.
Table 10.3 :Operation Mode Behavior
System Operation Operation Mode Behavior

Mode
The communicator seizes control of the phone Press Down arrow to view the supervisory condition.
line and calls the central station. A screen similar to this one displays.
pulsing beep in the sequence one second on,
one second off.
SUPERVISORY LED flashes.
Press SILENCE and enter an access code (or

activate the key) to silence the annunciator.
Supervisory The system detects a Once the supervisory condition has been corrected,
supervisory condition. the system will restore itself automatically.
The system detects a

supervisory condition with a
CO detector.
The communicator seizes control of the phone Press Down arrow to view the trouble. A screen
line and calls the central station. similar to this one displays.
pulsing beep in the sequence one second on,
nine seconds off.
SYSTEM TROUBLE LED flashes.
Press SILENCE and enter an access code (or
activate the key) to silence the annunciator.
Once the trouble condition has been fixed, the system
A system trouble condition
will restore itself automatically.
occurs.
Trouble
A trouble condition with a

CO detector.
Touchpad PZT beeps. Press Down arrow to view the Prealarm. A screen
The LCD displays a screen similar to this one. similar to this one displays.
A single detector trips in a 2-
Count zone. (2-Count
Prealarm means two detectors must
trip before an alarm is
reported.)
All system operations are available in this mode.
All LEDs are on briefly then the LCD displays Menus are not available during the reset process.
The RESET button is
“RESET IN PROGRESS”. If the reset process
Reset pressed followed by a valid
completes normally, the date and time normal
code or rotation of the key.
mode screen displays.
Releasing Operations System Operation

Mode
An alarm or trouble Press Down arrow to view the location of the alarm or
condition has been silenced SYSTEM SILENCE LED is on. SYSTEM trouble. When the condition no longer exists, the
but still exists. To silence TROUBLE, SUPERVISORY or GENERAL SYSTEM SILENCED and SYSTEM TROUBLE LED,
Silenced alarms and troubles, press ALARM LED (depending on condition) is on. SUPERVISORY or GENERAL ALARM LEDs turn off.
SILENCE followed by the The annunciator (and any notification devices
Installer or User Code or attached to the system) will be silenced.
rotate the key.
10.6.1 Multi-Site Annunciator and Multi-Site User Access
Multi-site Annunciators are unique as they can display the status and event history of all sites they are assigned to. These displays can be
especially useful in guard shacks or security centers. A multi-site display is indicated by the words “Multi-Site Display” at the top of the
idle screen.
1. The F-Macro key is disabled until a multi-site user access code has been entered and a specific site has been selected.
2. Multi-site Annunciator silencing rules:
• If any new troubles, supervisory, pre-alarms, or alarms are triggered in any assigned sites, Locally Silenced
annunciator will resound.
• If a multi-site annunciator is locally silenced for 4 or 24 hours depending on user selection, the locally
silenced annunciator will resound.
3. The 6820 or 6820EVS menu system is disabled on a multi-site annunciator. Pressing the Right or Enter keys will bring you straight
into event history for assigned sites. To get into the menu system, a multi-site user password must be entered and then a site must be
selected from the site selection menu. Once this is done you will have access to the idle screen of that site and the annunciator will
temporarily act like a single site annunciator.
4. A multi-site annunciator will sound the highest priority tone from the sites it is assigned to.
NOTE 1: A multi-site display is created in Module programming in the edit properties menu for an 6860, 5860 or 6855 See section 9.2.1.
NOTE 2: An annunciator cannot be programmed as a multi-site display when it is associated with an VCM or RVM in a EVS system.
NOTE 3: Status Points, Status Voice Aux 1, Status Voice Aux 2, and Background Music are contained within the System Status event
priority.
NOTE 4: All fire, emergency and system troubles are prioritized into the Trouble event priority.
10.7 Releasing Operations

The control panel supports two types of releasing: Double Interlock Zone, and Single Interlock Zone. The Double Interlock Zone opera-
tion requires an interlock switch input in the system, and the Single Interlock Zone does not. An interlock switch is typically a dry-con-
tact pressure switch.
When Single or Double Interlock Zone releasing is selected using HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite software, the software suite will
automatically default the following system parameters:
NOTE: The defaults created can be modified through programming if desired.
• Output Group 2 is created. Output Group 2 will be defaulted as a “Detector Alarm” output group for all releasing zones. NAC
[98:001] is assigned to Output Group 2.
• Output Group 3 is created. Output Group 3 will be defaulted as a “Interlock Release Alert” output group for all releasing zones.
NAC [98:002] is assigned to Output Group 3.
• Output Group 4 is created. Output Group 4 will be defaulted as “Interlock Release Alarm” output group for all releasing zones.
NAC circuit [98:003] is assigned to Output Group 4..
NOTE 1: The installer must define which input points will be used for detectors, manual release switches, or interlock/pressure switches.
NOTE 2: For manual release operation, Installer must use an FM approved/ UL listed releasing manual station
Manufacturer Part Number Rated Voltage, DC Rated Current, Milliamp

T8210A107 24 VDC 700
8210G207 24 VDC 442
Asco HV2740607 24 VDC 375
HV2838521 24 VDC 375
HV2740608 24 VDC 375
Table 10.4: Approved Releasing Solenoids
System Operation Releasing Operations
Manufacturer Part Number Rated Voltage, DC Rated Current, Milliamp

Honeywell/Skinner 701X7028 24 VDC 917
Barnbrook System EA45 24 VDC 200
890181 24 VDC 2000
486500 24 VDC 290
Kidde Fenwal
895630 24 VDC 2000
897494 24 VDC 1500
88 7363 24 VDC 1040
Minimax 88 5738 24 VDC 1040
88 9323 24 VDC 500
Nohmi Bosai R85M10 24 VDC 1200
70610006 24 VDC 417
Parker Hannifin
10610707 24 VDC 417
2823A-2NB-A4F6 24 VDC 458
Snap-tite
2823A-2NB-A4F5 12 VDC 917
TLX PA0036-A 24 VDC 600
Versa Valves CGS-4232-NB3-S2 24 VDC 438
753E 24 VDC 364
Victaulic
767 24 VDC 364
11591 24 VDC 417
11595 24 VDC 417
Viking
11592NC 24 VDC 416
16360 24 VDC 500
Table 10.4: Approved Releasing Solenoids (Continued)
Model 7641-L8
Must Mounted
at the Solenoid
Figure 10.9 Wiring Configuration for Solenoid
Releasing Operations System Operation
10.7.1 Single Interlock Zone Releasing

A single interlock zone utilizes a minimum of two addressable detectors and a designated manual release switch.
NOTE: Only addressable detectors can be used. No conventional detectors can be used.
Each Single Interlock Zone input requires at least one manual release switch.
 Conditions Required for an Pre-Alarm Output Activation

If any single addressable detector is activated, the “Pre-Alarm” output will activate. This alerts the user that the initial stages required for
a release condition are present. (Also refer to Table 10.6.)
 Conditions required for an General Alarm and Release Output Activation
If two or more addressable detectors, or a manual release switch activate, the “Alarm” and the “Release” outputs will activate and the
“Pre-Alarm” output will deactivate. (Also refer to Table 10.6.).
Inputs Output Results
1st Addressable Detector X X X X
2nd Addressable Detector X X X X
Manual Release Station X X X X
Normal Pre-Alarm Pre-Alarm Release and Release and Release and Release and Release and
General Alarm General Alarm General Alarm General Alarm General Alarm
Table 10.5 Single Interlock Zone Operation

10.7.2 Double Interlock Zone Releasing
A Double Interlock Zone uses a minimum of two addressable detectors, a designated manual release switch, and an interlock switch
input. An interlock switch is typically a dry-contact pressure switch and will be referred to as an interlock/pressure switch in this docu-
ment.
Important!
Only addressable detectors can be used. No conventional detectors can be used.
Each Double Interlock Zone input requires at least one Interlock/pressure switch and at least one manual release switch.
 Conditions Required for a Pre-Alarm Output Activation

If any single addressable detector is activated, the “Pre-Alarm” output will activate. This alerts the user that the initial stages required for
a release condition are present. (Also refer to Table 10.6.)
 Conditions Required for a General Alarm Output Activation
If two addressable detectors, a manual release switch is activated, or an interlock switch is active, the “Pre-Alarm”, and “General Alarm”
outputs will activate.
 Conditions Required for a Release Output Activation
Any release requires the activation of an interlock switch, and either a manual release switch or 2 activated addressable detectors. When
these conditions are met, the “Release” and “General Alarm” outputs will activate, and the “Pre-Alarm” output will deactivate.
Inputs Output Results

First X X X X X X X X
Addressable
Detector
2nd X X X X X X X X
Addressable
Detector
Manual X X X X X X X X
Release
Station
Interlock/ X X X X X X X X
Pressure
Switch
Normal Pre-Alarm Pre-Alarm Pre-Alarm Pre- Pre- Pre- Pre- Pre- Pre- Pre- Release Release Release Release Release
and Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm and and and and and
General and and and and and and and General General General General General
Alarm General General General General General General General Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
Table 10.6 Double Interlock Zone Operation
System Operation Smoke Alarm Verification
10.8 Smoke Alarm Verification

Figure 10.10 illustrates how the Smoke Alarm Verification cycle operates.
Figure 10.10 Smoke Verification Cycle

During the Confirmation Period if there is no alarm indication then the system will return to normal operation.
10.9 Function Keys
The function keys (on the 6860 only) have multiple features. Their macro key functionality can simplify the disabling, activating, or
inhibiting points or groups respectively. They can also be used as a status type activation event and for activating Map Inhibit. Each F-
Key macro can hold 50 events.
 To access the F-Key Recording menu:
1. From the idle screen, press and hold the F-Key for 5 seconds.
2. Enter a PIN with F-Key macro recording privileges, if prompted.
10.9.1 Recording an F-Key Macro
1. Access the F-Key Recording menu and select the ‘Start F-KEY Recording’ option.
2. The panel will return to the idle screen. Notice the 4th line on the display now alternates with <F# Key Recording>, where # is the
number of the F-Key being recorded.
3. Any Disabling or Activating of points, output groups, or templates from the site at this point will be programmed into the macro.
Do this by going to any annunciator within the site and entering Main Menu -> Point Functions and use Disable/Enable Point or use
I/O Point Control to: disable output groups or individual points, or activate individual points.
4. Once you are finished with disabling or activating points/output groups, enter the F-Key Recording Menu again and select the ‘End
F-KEY Recording’ option.
5. The panel will return to the idle screen.
10.9.2 Aborting an F-Key Macro Recording Session
1. After an F-Key macro recording session has been started, the session can be canceled at any time by accessing the F-Key Recording
menu and selecting ‘Abort F-KEY Recording’ option.
10.9.3 Erasing an F-Key Macro
1. If an F-Key macro has already been recorded, you can erase it by accessing the F-Key Recording menu and selecting the ‘Erase F-
KEY Macro’ option.
10.9.4 Using a Recorded F-Key Macro
1. From the idle screen on any annunciator in the site, press the F-Key you want to activate.
2. Once finished, to de-activate the macro press the F-Key again.
10.9.5 F-Key Status Event
When an F-Key is enabled, it activates its corresponding F-Key Active event. This is a status type event that can activate outputs without
showing any status on annunciator displays. This should be used for ancillary purposes only.
10.9.6 F-Key Map Inhibit
The F-Keys have the ability to disable event - output group mapping for the purpose of simulating that the map doesn’t exist. This can be
setup to allow for testing purposes where notification of an entire building is not desired during the test. This option is programmable for
each output group map through HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite.
When an F-Key is active and a map in the system is set to be disable by Map Inhibit, the system will show a trouble event indicating it as
such.
Section 11: Emergency Voice System Operation
11.1 Overview
The EVS series control panels and accessories provide features to meet the requirements for Mass Notification Systems as described in
NFPA 72 and is compliant with the UL 2572 standard. EVS (Emergency Voice System) is integrated with the fire alarm and voice evac-
uation functions of the control panel. n a networked panel system, only one panel can be chosen to be the voice evacuation/EVS panel
for the site
There are two ways for activating EVS in the 6820EVS panel:
 EVS Point Activations
EVS Point Activation involves using pre-determined EVS Alarm input points to activate EVS Alarm events. These events cause output
areas to activate based on mapping that is programmed into the system at installation. This is very similar to the traditional mapping that
the fire system has utilized to date.
 Manual LOC Activations
Manual LOC Activation involves using the LOC EVS interface to activate EVS Events, choose output areas, and speak through a micro-
phone. These selections are not pre-determined and allow the user to make system functionality decisions when the event is actually hap-
pening. This requires the activation of Manual EVS State which bypasses EVS Point Activations. See section 11.2.3.
11.2 LOC Functionality

An LOC consists of either the EVS Series panel (EVS-VCM Voice Control Module and the Fire Alarm Control Panel), or the EVS-LOC
Remote Command Unit (EVS-RVM Remote Voice Module and its associated 6860 keypad). An LOC is created by adding a VCM or
RVM to the system and associating a keypad to it. The LOC provides eight buttons for activating the EVS messages, a button to gain and
relinquish EVS Control, and a microphone for live EVS paging. There can be up to five LOC devices in the system. In a networked panel
system, all of the LOCs must be connected through SBUS to the panel that includes the VCM.
11.2.1 Keys and LEDs
This section outlines the functionality of the keys and LEDs on the EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM expander modules.
EVS Control Key
Pressing the EVS Control Key will do one of two things:
1. Enter Message Mode of the LOC EVS interface (including trying to gain EVS Control if the user doesn't have it already).
2. Relinquish EVS Control if pressed while in Message Mode.
EVS Control LED
The EVS Control LED is used to indicate the status of EVS Control in the system. When the LED is on solid, the LOC has EVS Control
within the system. When the LED is blinking, another LOC has gained EVS Control in the system.
EVS Message Keys
EVS Message Keys are used in Message Mode to select which EVS Message is to be played. If pressed when the LOC does not have
EVS Control, the system will automatically try to gain EVS Control before allowing the EVS Event to be activated. See section 11.2.2.
EVS Message LEDs
The red EVS Message LEDs indicate the active EVS Message and any previously active EVS messages. The green LEDs indicate the
EVS Message was selected in message mode and that the LOC has EVS control.
1. For EVS Point Activation, the red EVS Message LEDs will illuminate on each LOC to indicate which EVS messages have been
activated in automatic EVS state.
2. In Manual EVS State, the red EVS Message LEDs will indicate which EVS message has been activated at an LOC. See section
11.2.3.
3. The green EVS Message LEDs will activate for the LOC that activated the EVS Message.
Select Keys
The Select Keys are used to toggle which output areas are active.
1. If Message Mode is active (see Section 11.2.3), the Select Keys will toggle which areas the active message is distributed to (also
toggles the red Select Key LED).
NOTE: For LOC activated emergency alarm events, if an area is programmed through mapping to be active that area is automatically
selected and can not be deactivated using the Select Keys.
2. If Microphone Mode is active (see Section 11.2.3), the Select Keys will toggle which areas the microphone audio is distributed to
(also toggles the green Select Key LED).
Emergency Voice System Operation LOC Functionality
Select Key LEDs

The Select Key LEDs are used to indicate which output areas are active for a microphone page (see Section 11.7.5) or system events.
1. Green LEDs: active areas for microphone paging.
NOTE: These are only active when the microphone PTT (Push To Talk) is engaged.
ALL CALL NON-ACTIVE CALL EVS Control EVS Control LED

KEY Key Key
READY
EVS CONTROL
TO TALK
Select
LEDs
Message
Keys
Message
Select LEDs
Keys
Figure 11.1 EVS-VCM / EVS-RVM Front View

11.2.2 Gaining EVS Control
When attempting to gain EVS Control, there are three things that govern whether or not EVS Control can be obtained:
1. LOC Priority.
2. LOC Lockout.
3. User profile access control.
LOC Priority
LOCs are assigned (through panel or HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite programming of the EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM) an LOC pri-
ority of low, normal, or high. LOCs with a higher priority are always able to gain control from a lower priority LOC.
LOC Lockout
When LOCs are programmed to the same priority, the setting LOC lockout applies. LOC lockout will not allow an LOC to gain EVS
Control from the LOC with EVS Control until one of three things happen:
1. The LOC lockout timer expires. Once the LOC lockout timer expires, an attempt to gain EVS Control can be made again.
NOTE: The lockout timer must be programmed to expire sometime, other than Never.
2. The user at the second LOC requests EVS Control from the LOC with EVS Control and that LOC grants the request. (See Section
11.2.7). If the EVS lockout timer expires while an EVS Control request is in progress, the system will automatically pass EVS
Control to the requesting LOC.
3. The user at the second LOC enters an access code with the EVS Super User profile option.
The LOC lockout timer can be set between immediate and 12 hours in increments of 1 second or it can be set to never expire. The default
setting is 30 seconds. The LOC lockout timer is restarted upon any key press at the LOC with EVS control. The LOC lockout timer is
cleared when EVS Control is relinquished.
LOC Functionality Emergency Voice System Operation
User Profile Access Control

The user will need to enter an access code containing the EVS Control Request or EVS Super User profile option to gain EVS Control.
EVS Control Request and EVS Super User profile options will be mutually exclusive to the system. If the access code has EVS Super
User, the EVS Control Request is ignored and activations by that user are always as EVS Super User.
11.2.3 Manual EVS
After gaining EVS Control the system enters the LOC EVS interface which allows you to activate the Emergency System and allows for
Emergency Paging. Once an emergency event has been activated the panel enters a Manual EVS State. In this state, all EVS Alarm pro-
grammed points that are currently in alarm in the system are changed to an active state. The display status screen reflects this when view-
ing the system for status. Any outputs that were activated by the EVS Alarm programmed points are deactivated until Manual EVS state
is exited. Only an EVS Reset can exit the Manual EVS State. If a user gains EVS Control at an LOC and does not activate an EVS mes-
sage, the system will automatically generate an EVS Supervisory indicating such. This prevents an LOC from being in an undesired state
of EVS Control when an actual event emerges.
There are two modes for interacting with the LOC EVS interface when in Manual EVS State:
1. Message Mode
2. Microphone Mode
These two modes allow you to quickly toggle areas of output for a desired message or to speak to a microphone for EVS Paging.
After gaining EVS Control, the system is in Message Mode of the Manual EVS State.
Switching between Microphone Mode and Message Mode
At any time while in EVS Control, you can switch between Microphone Mode and Message Mode. Microphone Mode is entered by sim-
ply engaging the microphone.
1. Message Mode: Use the EVS Message keys to toggle which message/event to output to the system. Use the Select Keys to toggle
output areas to play the current EVS Message in. The Select Key's red LED will toggle on/off with the activation/deactivation of the
area is now receiving the message. Any non-voice groups assigned to this Select Key will also toggle with their Activation
Cadence. See the SectionActivating Output Groups Dynamically.
2. Microphone Mode: Use the Select Keys while the microphone is active to toggle which areas to do an EVS Microphone Page to.
The Select Key's green LED will toggle on/off with the activation/deactivation of the EVS Microphone Page to the area.
Activating Output Groups Dynamically
This method allows the system to be setup with minimal or no system mapping. When in Manual EVS State and operating in Message
Mode the user can dynamically activate/deactivate output areas for system notification to take place in. The Select Key red LED will
become lit and the circuits in the output group(s) will become active and play the currently active EVS event message when activated.
When deactivated, the Select Key red LED will become unlit and the circuits in the output group(s) will become inactive. Non-voice out-
put groups can also be assigned to Select Keys and will toggle on/off using the activation cadence assigned to it in output group pro-
gramming. This is available in the panel and in HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite. See Section .
11.2.4 Microphone Mode
Microphone Mode allows the user to press the Select Keys to toggle which output areas to speak to over the microphone. The green
LEDs next to the Select Keys will activate or deactivate.
11.2.5 Message Mode

In Message Mode, the user is able to press the EVS Message Keys to choose a message and press the Select Keys to activate or deacti-
vate which output areas the message will be played. This will activate or deactivate the green and red LEDs next to the EVS Message
Keys and the red LEDs next to the Select Keys.
11.2.6 Custom EVS Event
Custom EVS events allows the user to generate an EVS event and speak a custom message using the microphone. Once the user is done
speaking the message, the tone and any associated strobes will continue to be active in the output areas.
To generate a Custom EVS Event:
1. Gain EVS Control using the EVS Control Key when there is not an active Manual EVS State Event.
2. Activate the microphone.
3. Choose desired output areas using the Select Keys.
4. Speak custom message into microphone.
Emergency Voice System Operation EVS Super User
11.2.7 Passing EVS Control

Passing of EVS Control is allowed when two LOCs have the same priority. When it is possible to pass control, a prompt (similar to
Figure 11.2) will display in which the user can: request control from the LOC with EVS Control, enter an access code with the EVS
Super User profile option to override the other LOC, or wait for the lockout timer to expire (if applicable).
Figure 11.2 Request EVS Control with Lockout Timer Active

When passing EVS Control between two EVS Super Users, the user is not shown the prompt screen. Instead, a request for EVS Control
is automatically made. Additionally, the lockout timer does not apply for EVS Super User.
When a request for EVS Control is made, the LOC with EVS Control will be shown a screen (similar to Figure 11.3), even when in
another menu, except programming menus, indicating that another LOC is requesting EVS Control. The piezo buzzer on the LOC with
EVS Control sound when an EVS Control request is active to alert a nearby operator of the request.
Figure 11.3 EVS Control Request on LOC with EVS Control

Once EVS Control is passed to another LOC, the new user will assume the system AS IS. This means that the event that was set to be
playing at the previous LOC and all output areas it was playing in do not change.
11.2.8 Exit EVS Control Menu
The user can exit the LOC EVS interface by pressing the left arrow. The user will be returned to the idle screen which indicates that the
LOC still has EVS control.
11.2.9 Relinquish EVS Control
Relinquishing EVS Control is accomplished by pressing the EVS Control Key from within Message Mode. A screen will be displayed to
ensure the user wants to relinquish EVS Control. EVS Control will be automatically relinquished after a time-out on this screen. When
EVS Control is relinquished, the system stays in the Manual EVS State. EVS Control can then be gained by another LOC or again at the
same LOC.
Figure 11.4 Relinquish EVS Control Screen

11.2.10 EVS Reset
An EVS reset is accomplished by pressing the RESET button from an LOC. The user will be prompted to reset either the fire system or
emergency system. After an EVS reset, the LOC will automatically exit the LOC EVS interface.
NOTE: In order to perform an EVS reset, the display must be associated with the EVS-VCM / EVS-RVM.
11.3 EVS Super User

The EVS Super User access code profile function provides the ability to override all EVS Control rules and gain EVS Control. The EVS
Super User is the highest priority user in the system. The EVS Super User has several features that differ from the normal user:
1. Any alarm activated while under EVS Super User Control needs to be reset using an EVS Super User function enabled access code.
2. LOC priority and LOC lockout timer are ignored when passing EVS Control between EVS Super Users at LOCs. If another EVS
Super User attempts to gain EVS Control from an LOC, an EVS Control request is presented to the EVS Super User at the LOC that
currently has EVS Control.
11.4 EVS Point Functionality

Any input point in the system can be configured as an EVS input. The Point EVS 1-8 Alarm input types can be used to trigger predeter-
mined EVS events for output areas. EVS-VCM, or EVS-RVM points can be programmed to trigger Voice Aux events that can allow
external audio to be played through the emergency system.
Amplifier Programming Emergency Voice System Operation
11.4.1 EVS Point Activations

EVS points can only activate outputs and be placed into an alarm state if the system is not in Manual EVS State. EVS points have no pri-
ority and all are allowed to be activated. If the EVS point is a higher priority than the Fire System, then the system will play the highest
event message through all EVS mapped outputs.
For example: Emergency 1 Point Alarm is higher priority than Emergency 2 Point Alarm. Emergency 1 Point Alarm has message 1
mapped to through groups 1 and 2. Emergency 2 Point Alarm has message 2 playing through groups 2 and 3. If a point for Emergency 1
Point Alarm and a point for Emergency 2 Point Alarm are both active, the system will play message 1 through groups 1, 2, and 3.
Once Manual EVS State is active, points in Alarm state switch to an Active state. When the points are changed to the Active state, they
do not activate any system mapping or turn any outputs on. Any points that are activated while in Manual EVS are also placed into the
Active state and are not allowed to activate any mapping. The system idle screen will show an EVS Alarm for any points in the Active
state, and the detailed description of the point will show the point as Active.
After an EVS Reset, any EVS points that are still active will again be put into Alarm.
11.4.2 EVS-VCM & EVS-RVM Points
The EVS-VCM and EVS-RVM modules contain two programmable input points. These also have the ability to be programmed as a trig-
ger for bringing external audio into the system. These special point types are: Voice Aux EVS and Voice Aux Status. When activated, if
the event has the highest Event Priority of all activated events, these points will activate the Aux In input to all outputs defined by the
respective event program mapping.
NOTE: Background Music is only allowed to be mapped to circuit 8 of the EVS-100W amplifiers to ensure correct active supervision.
11.5 Amplifier Programming

11.5.1 Adding an Amplifier
To add a new amplifier to the system, follow these steps:
3. Press 1 to enter Module menu.
5. From the next screen, select desired amplifier.
The screen will display “Adding module [#]...” for a few moments. You will be
returned to the <New Module Type> screen where you can select another module if desired.
You must save changes when you exit the Program Menu or the new module will not be added. For more information see section
9.2.2.
If you Add a Module that has not been physically connected, the panel will go into trouble after it re-initializes (when you exit the
Program Menu with changes accepted). When the new module is attached, the trouble will restore automatically the next time you
power up the FACP.
11.5.2 Editing an Amplifier
When editing amplifiers, the features that may be edited are (dependent upon amplifier model): module ID, module name, EVS-CE4
Exp installed (Yes or No), output voltage, and amp mode. To edit an existing module:
5. Use the Up or Down arrow to select the module you wish to edit.
6. Press the right arrow or ENTER to move to the next selection.
11.6 LOC Programming

Device Priority is a programmable option for each of the EVS devices:
• EVS-VCM
• EVS-RVM
Each device is assigned a Priority level: Low, Normal, or High.
11.6.1 Adding an LOC
To add new LOCs to the system, follow these steps:
2. Select 7 for Panel Program Menu.
Emergency Voice System Operation Using the Microphone
5. From the next screen, add either an *EVS-VCM or **EVS-RVM.

NOTE 1: * Only 1 EVS-VCM may be installed per site.
NOTE 2: ** Up to 4 EVS-RVMs may be installed per site.
The screen will display “Adding module [#]...” for a few moments. You will be returned to the <New Module Type> screen where
you can select a name for the module if desired.
6. Add a compatible LCD Annunciator, if desired, to associate with each EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM
You must save changes when you exit the Program Menu or the new module(s) will not be added. For more information see section
9.2.2.
NOTE: If you Add a Module that has not been physically connected, the panel will go into trouble after it re-initializes (when you exit the
Program Menu). When the new module is attached, the trouble will restore automatically the next time you power up the system.
11.6.2 Editing an LOC

When editing EVS LOCs, the features that may be edited are: module ID, module name, number of switch expanders installed, extended
features, microphone type, microphone gain, auxiliary gain, tone gain, message gain, keypad priority, and associated keypad
To edit an existing module:
1. Enter the Installer Code.
3. Press 1 to enter module menu.
5. Use the Up or Down arrow to select the module you wish to edit.
6. Press the right arrow or ENTER to move to next selection.
LOC Priority
Each device is assigned a Priority level: Low, Normal, or High. This is modified by editing the LOC’s EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM module.
By default, the EVS-VCM has a high LOC priority. The EVS-RVM is defaulted to normal LOC priority.
LOC Association
In order to created an LOC, an annunciator must be associated to an EVS-VCM or EVS-RVM. This done by editing the EVS-VCM or
EVS-RVM module and selecting the correct annunciator for the associated device. During JumpStart, the EVS-VCM is automatically
associated with the internal annunciator. The association for other LOCs in the system must be performed in programming.
11.7 Using the Microphone

11.7.1 Microphone Functionality
Each microphone in the system is capable of providing live fire system or EVS paging.
The microphones are housed within the EVS-Series panel enclosure and the EVS-LOC cabinets. A maximum of five microphones can
be installed in the system.
11.7.2 Custom EVS Event
This event is activated by gaining EVS control at an LOC and using the microphone without any EVS event already active. In this case,
the custom EVS mapping and general EVS mapping will be activated and stay activated until a different EVS event is activated at the
LOC or the user resets the Emergency Voice System.
11.7.3 Fire Page
A fire page can only occur when:
1. Only the fire system is active.
2. Both fire and EVS are active and the fire alarm is programmed to be of higher priority than the active EVS alarm.
• If the fire alarm has the highest active priority and EVS is also active, any LOC can do a fire page given LOC device priority
rules are followed. If the user is at the LOC with EVS Control, and the fire page is of higher priority that the EVS event, the LOC
will automatically relinquish EVS Control to do the fire page when the user engages the microphone.
3. Only the fire system is active, the user has gained EVS Control and custom EVS event is a lower priority than the fire alarm.
• In this case, if any LOC has EVS Control, the LOC will automatically relinquish control to allow for the fire page.
4. If both the fire alarm and EVS are active and the active EVS event is programmed for higher priority than fire alarm; the user must
also have gained EVS control.
• In this case a fire page is NOT allowed at all and the LOC must gain EVS control in order to do any live voice.
11.7.4 Emergency Page
An emergency page can occur when:
1. Only the emergency system is active and the user has gained EVS Control.
2. Only fire alarm is active, custom EVS is higher priority than fire alarm and the user has gained EVS Control.
• This will trigger the EVS system and enable mapping for 'Custom EVS' and 'General EVS'.
Recording Custom Messages Emergency Voice System Operation
11.7.5 Paging
If there are no active emergency or fire system events, the microphone at an LOC can be used for paging by following these steps:
1. Remove the microphone from its cradle.
2. Press the push-to-talk button on the microphone.
3. Use the Select Keys on the LOC to toggle the output areas to page to with the microphone (illuminates the green LEDs).
NOTE: The Ready to Talk LED will illuminate after an output area has been activated.
4. Speak into the microphone.
5. Release PTT button when finished.
Ready to Talk LED
11.8 Recording Custom Messages

The EVS-Series controls come with 15 recordable message slots. Message 1-15 can be recorded from the microphone, Aux Input or by
using the HFSS Honeywell Fire Software Suite message management utility. All messages can be a maximum of one minute.
When in the record mode the EVS-VCM switches will function as follows:
Message
Key 1
Message
Select Keys Key 3
1-15
Message
Key 8
Key Function
EVS Message Key 1 Select message slot to record to
EVS Message Key 3 Start and stop recording from Aux Audio Input
EVS Message Key 8 Erase user message 1-15
Select Keys 1-15 Message slot 1-15
Emergency Voice System Operation Recording Custom Messages
While in the Local Record mode, select keys 1-15. Use these keys to reference message slots 1-15. The associated green Select Key will
indicate that a message is currently programmed in the corresponding slot. When there is no message recorded (or the message is
erased), the associated green Select Key LED will be off. While recording a particular message, the Red Select Key will turn on until
recording is completed. The Select Key 1-15 will be used to playback a recorded message or to select a message slot to record to or
erase.
When in the Local Record mode, the EVS-VCM LEDs will function as follows:
Switch LED Active LED Status Meaning
Select Key 1-15 Green LED On Message is currently programmed in this slot
Select Key 1-15 Red LED On Message recording is in progress
Select Key 1-15 Green/Red LED Off/Off Message slot is empty
Select Key 1-15 Red LED Flashing Message is being played back or message is selected for
recording
Table 11.1 LED Functions During Programming
11.8.1 Recording Messages 1-15 Using Aux Audio Input
Recording messages from the Aux Audio Input enables you to load customized, pre-recorded messages into an EVS message location.
Follow these steps to record user message using Aux Audio Input:
NOTE: Refer to the Section 9 for detailed programming information.
1. Wire a speaker cable with 1/8” mini plug (Radio Shack Cat. No. 42-2454) to the Aux AUDIO GND and IN terminals. Refer to
Figure 11.5.
Plug in here
Figure 11.5 AUX Audio Connection for Recording

2. Plug the mini plug into the Line Out/Headphone jack on a PC or laptop. See Figure 11.5.
3. Enter programming mode at main control panel.
4. Select option 8 VCM Maintenance.
5. Select option 2 Local Recording.
NOTE: The VCM will light the green Select Key LED for message slots that are occupied. If a message is already stored in the desired
slot, then you must erase the message first. (see Section 11.8.3)
6. Select the amplifier and circuit for the audio to play through during programming. A user would generally pick the audio circuit that
is in closest proximity to them.
7. Press EVS Message Key 1 to enter the message slot selection mode. Then, press the Select Key 1-15 that corresponds to the
message slot that you wish to record to. The associated Select Key red LED will begin flashing, indicating that the message slot is
ready for recording.
8. Simultaneously press EVS Message Key 3 and start playing the audio source on the PC or laptop.
9. When the audio file from the PC is finished playing, press EVS Message Key 3 again to stop the recording. The Select Key green
LED will come on.
10. To playback the recorded message, press the Select Key 1-15 that was just recorded to.
 Recording with Aux Audio Input Example:

The user wants to record into memory slot 2 via the Aux Audio Input channel.
Upon entering the Local Recording mode via the keypad menu, the VCM will light the Select Key green LEDs 1-15 for each occupied
message slot.
If a message already exists in message slot 2, it must first be erased. Press EVS Message Key 8, then press Select Key 2, (see Section
11.8.3). When the message has been erased Select Key 2’s green LED will turn off.
To record a message, press EVS Message Key 1, then press Select Key 2 (this will use message slot 2 for the recording). Select Key 2's
red LED will begin flashing.
Press EVS Message Key 3 while simultaneously pressing play on the PC to start recording the Aux Audio Input. When the PC message
is done, press EVS Message Key 3 to stop recording. Select Key 2's red LED will stay on until processing is completed. Select Key 2's
green LED comes on after the recording is completed.
Pressing Select Key 2 will start a playback of the recorded message.
Press EVS
Message Key
1 to enter message
slot selection mode
Press EVS
Press Message Key 3
Select Key 2 to start and stop
to record recording from
Message to the Aux Audio
this slot Input
Figure 11.6 Aux Audio Input Example

11.8.2 Recording Messages 1-15 Using the Microphone
Messages can be recorded into the EVS system by using the on board microphone.
Follow these steps to use the microphone to record your message:
2. Select option 8 Voice Options.
3. Select 1 for VCM Maintenance.
4. Select option 2 Local Recording.
NOTE: The VCM will light the green Select Key LED for message slots that are occupied. If a message is already stored in the desired
slot, then you must erase the message first. (see Section 11.8.3)
is in closest proximity to them.
6. Press EVS Message Key 1 to enter the message slot selection mode. Then, press the Select Key 1-15 that corresponds to the
message slot that you wish to record to. The associated Select Key red LED will begin flashing, indicating that the message slot is
ready for recording.
7. Press the push-to-talk (PTT) button on the microphone and speak your message.
8. Release the PTT button on the microphone to save your message. The Select Key green LED for this location will turn on.
9. To playback the recorded message, press the Select Key 1-15 that was just recorded to.
10. If you are not satisfied with the recorded message, erase it (see Section 11.8.3) and then repeat steps 1 through 7.
Emergency Voice System Operation Recording Custom Messages
 Recording with Microphone Example:

User wants to record a message to message slot 5 via the microphone.
Upon entering the Local Recording mode via the keypad menu, the VCM will light the Select Key green LEDs for 1-15 for each occu-
pied message slot.
If a message already exists in message slot 5, it must first be erased. Press EVS Message key 8, then press Select Key 5, (see Section
11.8.3). When the message has been erased Select Key 5's green LED will turn off.
To record a message, press EVS Message Key 1, press Select Key 5 (this will use message slot 5 for the recording). Select Key 5's red
LED will begin flashing.
Press the push-to-talk button on the microphone and speak your message. Release the PTT button to save your message. Select Key 5's
red LED stays on until processing is completed. Select Key 5's green LED comes on after the recording is completed.
Pressing Select Key 5 will start a playback of the recorded message.
Press
EVS Message
Key to enter
message slot
Press selection mode
Select Key 5
to record to
this message
slot
Figure 11.7 Recording with Microphone Example

11.8.3 Erasing User Message
To erase the message stored in switch 1-15 memory location follow these steps:
2. Select option 9 Voice Options.
3. Select option 1 VCM Maintenance.
4. Select option 2 Local Recording. Once in this mode, the VCM/RVM will light all the green LEDs for switches 1-15 indicating
which message slots are occupied.
is in closest proximity to them
6. Press EVS Message Key 8 on the EVS-VCM, press the Select Key 1-15 that you wish to erase. The Select Key red LED will stay
on until the erase is done. When erased, the Select Key green LED by corresponding to the message slot you erased will go off.
11.8.4 Using HFSS Voice Message Load Software

The HFSS Voice Message Load Software is a software support utility that is used to download recorded messages (in .SKE1 format
stored on your PC hard drive) to the various message locations of the EVS-Series controls. Messages can be uploaded from the EVS-
Series control, stored, and used again in similar installations.
To read/write .SKE1 formatted messages to and from the main panel, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that panel is in Normal mode.
2. Connect the PC to the VCM using a standard USB cable. See Figure 11.8.
VCM
Figure 11.8 USB Cable Connections

3. Run the Voice Message Load software.
4. Select “Read from Panel” to read a message and store onto your hard drive, or “Write to Panel” to transfer a .SKE1 formatted
message to the panel.
5. Select the appropriate message location you wish to read/write.
6. Enter the file name you wish to transfer (Press “Browse” to display a list of files).
7. Press “Start” to start the transfer.
Section 12: Reporting
This section lists receivers that are compatible with this control panel, and the reporting codes sent by the control panel for SIA and Con-
tact ID formats.
12.1 Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel

Table 12.1 shows receivers compatible with the control panel.
Manufacturer Model Format

Silent Knight by Model 9800 SIA and Contact ID
Honeywell Model 9000 (SIA formats) SIA
Honeywell Security AlarmNet 7810-ir IP and Cellular Receiver,
Contact ID only
Ademco MX8000 SIA and Contact ID
Ademco Model 685 (Contact ID ) Contact ID
Sur-Gard SG-MLR2-DG (V. 1.64 or higher) SIA and Contact ID
Osborne Hoffman Quickalert SIA and Contact ID
Table 12.1 Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel
SIA Reporting Format Contact ID Reporting Format

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Event Description Module SIA Parameter Fixed Length Qualifier Event Group # Contact #
ID # (If Event Format NN - Code
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
System Events System Events are reported when either “Report by Point” or Report by Zone is selected
AC power low trouble AT 0 ATNN000000 1 301 00 000
AC power low trouble restore AR 0 ARNN000000 3 301 00 000
Auto dialer test communications trou- YC 1 YCNN000001 1 350 Receiver # 001
ble line 1
Auto dialer test communications YK 1 YKNN000001 3 350 Receiver # 001
trouble line 1 restore
Auto dialer test communications YC 2 YCNN000002 1 350 Receiver # 002
trouble line 2
Auto dialer test communications YK 2 YKNN000002 3 350 Receiver # 002
trouble line 2 restore
Automatic test normal RP 0 RPNN000000 1 602 00 000
Automatic test off normal RY 0 RYNN000000 1 608 00 000
Battery voltage trouble YT Exp. ID YTNNXX0000 1 302 Exp. ID 000
Battery voltage trouble restore YR Exp. ID YRNNXX0000 3 302 Exp. ID 000
Date changed event JD 0 JDNN000000 1 625 00 000
EVS Reset OR 1 ORNN000001 1 401 00 001
Emergency System Overridden QS 0 QSNN000000 1 244 00 000
Emergency System Overridden QR 0 QRNN000000 3 244 00 000
Restore
Fire drill has begun FI 0 FINN000000 1 604 00 000
Fire drill has ended FK 0 FKNN000000 3 604 00 000
F1 Mapping Inhibited FT 2001 FTNN002001 1 570 00 001
F1 Mapping Inhibited Restoral FJ 2001 FJNN002001 3 570 00 001
Table 12.2 Reporting Formats Table
Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel Reporting

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
Fire Reset OR 0 ORNN000000 1 401 00 000
Fire System Overridden FS 0 FSNN000000 1 245 00 000
Fire System Override Restore FR 0 FRNN000000 3 245 00 000
Ground fault condition trouble YP Exp. ID YPNNXX0000 1 310 Exp. ID 000
Ground fault condition trouble restore YQ Exp. ID YQNNXX0000 3 310 Exp. ID 000
Initial power up RR 0 RRNN000000 1 305 00 000
Local programming aborted or ended LU 0 LUNN000000 1 628 00 000
with errors
Local programming begin LB 0 LBNN000000 1 627 00 000
Local programming ended normally LS 0 LSNN000000 1 628 00 000
Network node trouble (panel missing) EM Panel ID EMNNNN0000 1 334 Panel ID 000
Network node trouble restore EN Panel ID ENNNNN0000 3 334 Panel ID 000
(panel no longer missing)
OPG Inhibit Trouble FT Group # + FTNN001GGG 1 320 00 Group #
1000
OPG Inhibit Trouble Restore FJ Group # + FJNN001GGG 3 320 00 Group #
1000
OPG Inhibit of Releasing Group SS Group # + SSNN001GGG 1 203 00 Group #
1000
OPG Inhibit of Releasing Group SR Group # + SRNN001GGG 3 203 00 Group #
Restore 1000
Phone line 1 trouble detected LT 1 LTNN000001 1 351 00 000
Phone line 1 trouble restore LR 1 LRNN000001 3 351 00 000
Phone line 2 trouble detected LT 2 LTNN000002 1 352 00 000
Phone line 2 trouble restore LR 2 LRNN000002 3 352 00 000
Printer is off-line trouble VZ Exp. ID VZNNXX0000 1 336 Exp. ID 000
Printer is off-line trouble restore VY Exp. ID VYNNXX0000 3 336 Exp. ID 000
Printer is out of paper trouble VO Exp. ID VONNXX0000 1 335 Exp. ID 000
Printer is out of paper trouble restore VI Exp. ID VINNXX0000 3 335 Exp. ID 000
Releasing Notif/Control Circuit pi Exp. ID SS Point # SSNNXXPPPP 1 203 Exp. ID Point #
Disabled
Releasing Notif/Control Circuit enabled pi Exp. ID SR Point # SRNNXXPPPP 3 203 Exp. ID Point #
Remote programming aborted or RU 0 RUNN000000 1 413 00 000
ended with errors
Remote programming ended normally RS 0 RSNN000000 1 412 00 000
Repeater ground fault trouble EM 0103 EMNN000103 1 334 Panel ID 103
Repeater ground fault trouble restore EN 0103 ENNN000103 3 334 Panel ID 103
Repeater missing trouble EM 0100 EMNN000100 1 334 Panel ID 100
Repeater missing trouble restore EN 0100 ENNN000100 3 334 Panel ID 100
Repeater Rx1 communication trouble EM 0101 EMNN000101 1 334 Panel ID 101
Repeater Rx1 communication trouble EN 0101 ENNN000101 3 334 Panel ID 101
restore
Repeater Rx2 communication trouble EM 0102 EMNN000102 1 334 Panel ID 102
Repeater Rx2 communication trouble EN 0102 ENNN000102 3 334 Panel ID 102
restore
SBUS Class A supervision lost ET Exp. ID ETNNXX0000 1 333 Exp. ID 000
Table 12.2 Reporting Formats Table (Continued)
Reporting Receivers Compatible with the Control Panel

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
SBUS Class A supervision restore ER Exp. ID ERNNXX0000 3 333 Exp. ID 000
SBUS expander trouble ET Exp. ID ETNNXX0000 1 333 Exp. ID 000
SBUS expander trouble restore ER Exp. ID ERNNXX0000 3 333 Exp. ID 000
SLC class A supervision trouble ET Exp. ID ETNNXX0000 1 331 Exp. ID 000
SLC class A supervision trouble ER Exp. ID ERNNXX0000 3 331 Exp. ID 000
restore
SLC programming ended, system TE 0 TENN000000 3 607 00 000
active
SLC programming started, system shut TS 0 TSNN000000 1 607 00 000
down
SLC short circuit trouble ET Exp. ID ETNNXX0000 1 332 Exp. ID 000
SLC short circuit trouble restore ER Exp. ID ERNNXX0000 3 332 Exp. ID 000
Time changed event JT 0 JTNN000000 1 625 00 000
Unable to report to account trouble RT Receiver # RTNN00RRRR 1 354 00 Receiver
#
Unable to report to account trouble YK Receiver # YKNN00RRRR 3 354 00 Receiver
restore #
User access code changed JV 0 JVNN000000 1 602 00 000
User initiated manual dialer test RX 0 RXNN000000 1 601 00 000
Walk test begin TS 0 TSNN000000 1 607 00 000
Walk test end TE 0 TENN000000 3 607 00 000
Zone Events Zone events are reported only when “Report by Zone” is selected
Auxiliary power trouble FT 0000 FTNN000000 1 320 00 000
Auxiliary power trouble restore FJ 0000 FJNN000000 3 320 00 000
CO Detector Alarm GA Zone # GANN000ZZZ 1 162 00 Zone #
CO Detector Alarm Restore GH Zone # GHNN000ZZZ 3 162 00 Zone #
CO Detector Supervisory Alarm GS Zone # GSNN000ZZZ 1 200 00 Zone #
CO Detector Supervisory Alarm GR Zone # GRNN000ZZZ 3 200 00 Zone #
Restore
CO Detector Trouble GT Zone # GTNN000ZZZ 1 373 00 Zone #
CO Detector Trouble Restore GJ Zone # GJNN000ZZZ 3 373 00 Zone #
Detector Alarm FA Zone # FANN000ZZZ 1 110 00 Zone #
Detector Alarm Restore FH Zone # FHNN000ZZZ 3 110 00 Zone #
Detector trouble FT Zone # FTNN000ZZZ 1 373 00 Zone #
Detector trouble restore FJ Zone # FJNN000ZZZ 3 373 00 Zone #
EVS Switch Trouble QT 0 QTNN000000 1 242 00 000
EVS Switch Trouble Restore QJ 0 QJNN000000 3 242 00 000
EVS Supervisory/Tamper Alarm QS 0 QSNN000000 1 241 00 000
EVS Supervisory/Tamper Alarm Re- QR 0 QRNN000000 3 241 00 000
store
EVS Output Group Trouble QT Group # QTNN001GGG 1 320 00 Group #
+1000
EVS Output Group Trouble QJ Group # QJNN001GGG 3 320 00 Group #
Restore +1000
External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch UT 0000 UTNN000000 1 373 00 000
trouble

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch UJ 0000 UJNN000000 3 373 00 000
trouble restore
LOC Mic Activated EVS Alarm QA 0 QANN000000 1 220 00 000
LOC Mic Activated EVS Alarm Restore QH 0 QHNN000000 3 220 00 000
LOC/Point EVS # Alarm QA Emergen- QANN0E0000 1 220 + 00 000
cy # Emer-
gency #
LOC/Point EVS # Alarm Restore QH Emergen- QHNN0E0000 3 220 + 00 000
cy # Emer-
gency #
Manual pull switch alarm FA Zone # FANN000ZZZ 1 115 00 Zone #
Manual pull switch alarm restore FH Zone # FHNN000ZZZ 3 115 00 Zone #
Manual pull switch trouble FT Zone # FTNN000ZZZ 1 373 00 Zone #
Manual pull switch trouble restore FJ Zone # FJNN000ZZZ 3 373 00 Zone #
Notification output trouble FT Group # + FTNN001GGG 1 320 00 Group #
1000
Notification output trouble restore FJ Group # + FJNN001GGG 3 320 00 Group #
1000
Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge FT Zone # FTNN000ZZZ 1 373 00 Zone #
switch trouble
Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge FJ Zone # FJNN000ZZZ 3 373 00 Zone #
switch trouble restore
SLC LED Module trouble ET 0000 ETNN000000 1 333 00 000
SLC LED Module trouble restore ER 0000 ERNN000000 3 333 00 000
Status Point Types Trouble UT 0 UTNN000000 1 379 00 000
Status Point Types Trouble Restore UJ 0 UJNN000000 3 379 00 000
Supervisory Detector Alarm FS Zone # FSNN000ZZZ 1 200 00 Zone #
Supervisory Detector Alarm Restore FR Zone # FRNN000ZZZ 3 200 00 Zone #
Supervisory/Tamper Alarm FS Zone # FSNN000ZZZ 1 200 00 Zone #
Supervisory/Tamper alarm condition FR Zone # FRNN000ZZZ 3 200 00 Zone #
restore
Supervisory/Tamper switch trouble FT Zone # FTNN000ZZZ 1 373 00 Zone #
Supervisory/Tamper switch FJ Zone # FJNN000ZZZ 3 373 00 Zone #
trouble restore
System-based AUX1 switch alarm UA 1000 UANN001000 1 140 01 000
System-based AUX1 switch alarm re- UH 1000 UHNN001000 3 140 01 000
store
System-based AUX1 switch trouble UT 1000 UTNN001000 1 373 01 000
System-based AUX1 switch trouble re- UJ 1000 UJNN001000 3 373 01 000
store
System-based AUX2 switch alarm UA 2000 UANN002000 1 140 02 000
System-based AUX2 switch alarm re- UH 2000 UHNN002000 3 140 02 000
store
System-based AUX2 switch trouble UT 2000 UTNN002000 1 373 02 000
System-based AUX2 switch trouble re- UJ 2000 UJNN002000 3 373 02 000
store
Voice Aux EVS 1 Alarm UA 3 UANN003000 1 171 00 000
Voice Aux EVS 1 Alarm Restore UH 3 UHNN003000 3 171 00 000

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
Water flow switch alarm SA Zone # SANN000ZZZ 1 113 00 Zone #
Water flow switch alarm Restore SH Zone # SHNN000ZZZ 3 113 00 Zone #
Water flow switch trouble ST Zone # STNN000ZZZ 1 373 00 Zone #
Water flow switch trouble Restore SJ Zone # SJNN000ZZZ 3 373 00 Zone #
Zone-based AUX1 switch alarm UA Zone # + UANN001ZZZ 1 140 01 Zone #
1000
Zone-based AUX1 switch alarm re- UH Zone # + UHNN001ZZZ 3 140 01 Zone #
store 1000
Zone-based AUX1 switch trouble UT Zone # + UTNN001ZZZ 1 373 01 Zone #
1000
Zone-based AUX1 switch trouble re- UJ Zone # + UJNN001ZZZ 3 373 01 Zone #
store 1000
Zone-based AUX2 switch alarm UA Zone # + UANN002ZZZ 1 140 02 Zone #
2000
Zone-based AUX2 switch alarm re- UH Zone # + UHNN002ZZZ 3 140 02 Zone #
store 2000
Zone-based AUX2 switch trouble UT Zone # + UTNN002ZZZ 1 373 02 Zone #
2000
Zone-based AUX2 switch trouble UJ Zone # + UJNN002ZZZ 3 373 02 Zone #
restore 2000
For SK devices, sensors 1–159 are reported as Points 1–159, modules 1–159 are reported
Point Events
as Points 201–359.
An unexpected SLC device has been pi Exp. ID XE Point # XENNXXPPPP 1 380 Exp. ID Point #
detected
An unexpected SLC device has been pi Exp. ID XI Point # XINNXXPPPP 3 380 Exp. ID Point #
removed
Auxiliary power disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point # FBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Auxiliary power enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point # FUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Auxiliary power Trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point # FTNNXXPPPP 1 320 Exp. ID Point #
Auxiliary power trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point # FJNNXXPPPP 3 320 Exp. ID Point #
Background Music Switch is Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 379 Exp. ID Point #
Background Music Switch is Trouble pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 379 Exp. ID Point #
Restored
Background Music Switch is pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 580 Exp. ID Point #
Disabled
Background Music Switch is pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 580 Exp. ID Point #
Enabled
CO Detector Trouble pi Exp. ID GT Point # GTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
CO Detector Trouble Restore pi Exp. ID GJ Point # GJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
CO Detector Disabled pi Exp. ID GB Point # GBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
CO Detector Enabled pi Exp. ID GU Point # GUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
Detector Alarm pi Exp. ID FA Point # FANNXXPPPP 1 110 Exp. ID Point #
Detector Alarm restore pi Exp. ID FH Point # FHNNXXPPPP 3 110 Exp. ID Point #
Detector Disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point # FBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Detector Enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point # FUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Detector Trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point # FTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Detector Trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point # FJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
Detector CO Alarm pi Exp. ID GA Point # GANNXXPPPP 1 162 Exp. ID Point #
Detector CO Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID GH Point # GHNNXXPPPP 3 162 Exp. ID Point #
Detector CO Supervisory Alarm pi Exp. ID GS Point # GSNNXXPPPP 1 200 Exp. ID Point #
Detector CO Supervisory Alarm Re- pi Exp. ID GR Point # GRNNXXPPPP 3 200 Exp. ID Point #
store
EVS Alarm # Point Alarm pi Exp. ID QA (EPPP) E - QANNXXEPPP 1 220 + Exp. ID Point #
Emergen- Emer-
cy # gency #
PPP -
Point #
EVS Alarm # Point Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID QH (EPPP) E - QHNNXXEPPP 3 220 + Exp. ID Point #
Emergen- Emer-
cy # gency #
PPP -
Point #
EVS Alarm # Point Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point # QTNNXXPPPP 1 242 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Alarm # Point Trouble Restore pi Exp. ID QJ Point # QJNNXXPPPP 3 242 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Alarm # Point Disabled pi Exp. ID QB Point # QBNNXXPPPP 1 243 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Alarm # Point Enabled pi Exp. ID QU Point # QUNNXXPPPP 3 243 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Supervisory/Tamper Alarm pi Exp. ID QS Point # QSNNXXPPPP 1 241 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Supervisory/Tamper Alarm Re- pi Exp. ID QR Point # QRNNXXPPPP 3 241 Exp. ID Point #
store
EVS Supervisory/Tamper Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point # QTNNXXPPPP 1 242 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Supervisory/Tamper Trouble pi Exp. ID QJ Point # QJNNXXPPPP 3 242 Exp. ID Point #
Restore
EVS Supervisory/Tamper Disabled pi Exp. ID QB Point # QBNNXXPPPP 1 243 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Supervisory/Tamper Enabled pi Exp. ID QU Point # QUNNXXPPPP 3 243 Exp. ID Point #
EVS NAC Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point # QTNNXXPPPP 1 320 Exp. ID Point #
EVS NAC Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID QJ Point # QJNNXXPPPP 3 320 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Control Circuit Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point # QTNNXXPPPP 1 320 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Control Circuit Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID QJ Point # QJNNXXPPPP 3 320 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Relay Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point # QTNNXXPPPP 1 320 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Relay Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID QJ Point # QJNNXXPPPP 3 320 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Notification Trouble pi Exp. ID QT Point # QTNNXXPPPP 1 320 Exp. ID Point #
EVS Notification Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID QJ Point # QJNNXXPPPP 3 320 Exp. ID Point #
External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
disabled
External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
enabled
External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
trouble

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
External Reset/Silence/Fire Drill switch pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
trouble restore
Interlock switch alarm (Water Release pi Exp. ID FA Point # FANNXXPPPP 1 110 Exp. ID Point #
Zone)
Interlock switch alarm restore (Water pi Exp. ID FH Point # FHNNXXPPPP 3 110 Exp. ID Point #
Release Zone)
Interlock switch disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point # FBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Interlock switch enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point # FUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Interlock switch trouble (Water Release pi Exp. ID FT Point # FTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Zone)
Interlock switch trouble restore (Water pi Exp. ID FJ Point # FJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
Release Zone)
LOC Mic Activated EVS Alarm pi Exp. ID QA 0 QANNXX0000 1 220 Exp. ID 000
LOC Mic Activated EVS Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID QH 0 QHNNXX0000 3 220 Exp. ID 000
LOC EVS # Alarm pi Exp. ID QA Emergen- QANNXXE000 1 220 + Exp. ID 000
cy # Emer-
gency #
LOC EVS # Alarm Restore pi Exp. ID QH Emergen- QHNNXXE000 3 220 + Exp. ID 000
cy # Emer-
gency #
Manual pull switch alarm pi Exp. ID FA Point # FANNXXPPPP 1 115 Exp. ID Point #
Manual pull switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID FH Point # FHNNXXPPPP 3 115 Exp. ID Point #
Manual pull switch disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point # FBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Manual pull switch enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point # FUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Manual pull switch trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point # FTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Manual pull switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point # FJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
Manual release switch alarm pi Exp. ID FA Point # FANNXXPPPP 1 110 Exp. ID Point #
(Water Release Zone)
Manual release switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID FH Point # FHNNXXPPPP 3 110 Exp. ID Point #
Manual release switch disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point # FBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Manual release switch enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point # FUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Manual release switch trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point # FTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Manual release switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID FJ Point # FJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
Notification output point disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point # FBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Notification output point enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point # FUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Notification output point trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point # FTNNXXPPPP 1 320 Exp. ID Point #
Notification output point trouble pi Exp. ID FJ Point # FJNNXXPPPP 3 320 Exp. ID Point #
restore
Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge pi Exp. ID FB Point # FBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
switch disabled
Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge pi Exp. ID FU Point # FUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
switch enabled
Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge pi Exp. ID FT Point # FTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
switch trouble

SIA pi Modifier SIA
ID # (If
Event Format NN - Code
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
Positive Alarm Sequence acknowledge pi Exp. ID FJ Point # FJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
switch trouble restore
Status Point Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 379 Exp. ID Point #
Status Point Trouble Restored pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 379 Exp. ID Point #
Status Point is Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 580 Exp. ID Point #
Status Point is Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 580 Exp. ID Point #
Supervisory/Tamper Alarm pi Exp. ID FS Point # FSNNXXPPPP 1 200 Exp. ID Point #
Supervisory/Tamper Alarm pi Exp. ID FR Point # FRNNXXPPPP 3 200 Exp. ID Point #
Restore
Supervisory/Tamper point disabled pi Exp. ID FB Point # FBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Supervisory/Tamper point enabled pi Exp. ID FU Point # FUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Supervisory/Tamper point trouble pi Exp. ID FT Point # FTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Supervisory/Tamper point trouble re- pi Exp. ID FJ Point # FJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
store
System-based AUX1 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UA Point # UANNXXPPPP 1 140 Exp. ID Point #
System-based AUX1 switch alarm re- pi Exp. ID UH Point # UHNNXXPPPP 3 140 Exp. ID Point #
store
System-based AUX1 switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
System-based AUX1 switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
System-based AUX1 switch trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
System-based AUX1 switch trouble re- pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
store
System-based AUX2 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UA Point # UANNXXPPPP 1 140 Exp. ID Point #
System-based AUX2 switch alarm re- pi Exp. ID UH Point # UHNNXXPPPP 3 140 Exp. ID Point #
store
System-based AUX2 switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
System-based AUX2 switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
System-based AUX2 switch pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
trouble
System-based AUX2 switch pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
trouble restore
Voice Aux EVS 1 Point Alarm pi Exp. ID UA (3PPP) UANNXX3PPP 1 171 Exp. ID Point #
PPP -
Point #
Voice Aux EVS 1 Point Alarm pi Exp. ID UH (3PPP) UHNNXX3PPP 3 171 Exp. ID Point #
Restore PPP -
Point #
PPP -
Point #
Restore PPP -
Point #
PPP -
Point #
Restore PPP -
Point #

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
PPP -
Point #
Restore PPP -
Point #
Voice Aux EVS Point Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 379 Exp. ID Point #
Voice Aux EVS Point Trouble pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 379 Exp. ID Point #
Restore
Voice Aux EVS Point Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 580 Exp. ID Point #
Voice Aux EVS Point Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 580 Exp. ID Point #
Voice Aux Status 1 Switch is Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 379 Exp. ID Point #
Voice Aux Status 1 Switch is Trouble pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 379 Exp. ID Point #
Restored
Voice Aux Status 1 Switch is Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNXXPPPP 1 580 Exp. ID Point #
Voice Aux Status 1 Switch is Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNXXPPPP 3 580 Exp. ID Point #
Voice Aux Status 2 Switch is pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 379 Exp. ID Point #
Trouble
Voice Aux Status 2 Switch is Trouble pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 379 Exp. ID Point #
Restored
Voice Aux Status 2 Switch is Disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 580 Exp. ID Point #
Voice Aux Status 2 Switch is Enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 580 Exp. ID Point #
Water flow switch alarm pi Exp. ID SA Point # SANNXXPPPP 1 113 Exp. ID Point #
Water flow switch alarm restore pi Exp. ID SH Point # SHNNXXPPPP 3 113 Exp. ID Point #
Water flow switch disabled pi Exp. ID SB Point # SBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Water flow switch enabled pi Exp. ID SU Point # SUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Water flow switch trouble pi Exp. ID ST Point # STNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Water flow switch trouble restore pi Exp. ID SJ Point # SJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX1 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UA Point # UANNXXPPPP 1 140 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX1 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UH Point # UHNNXXPPPP 3 140 Exp. ID Point #
restore
Zone-based AUX1 switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX1 switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX1 switch trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX1 switch trouble pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
restore
Zone-based AUX2 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UA Point # UANNXXPPPP 1 140 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX2 switch alarm pi Exp. ID UH Point # UHNNXXPPPP 3 140 Exp. ID Point #
restore
Zone-based AUX2 switch disabled pi Exp. ID UB Point # UBNNXXPPPP 1 571 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX2 switch enabled pi Exp. ID UU Point # UUNNXXPPPP 3 571 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX2 switch trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Zone-based AUX2 switch trouble re- pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
store
System-based Wireless Gateway pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
Trouble
System-based Wireless Gateway pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
Trouble - restore
Wireless Gateway Trouble pi Exp. ID UT Point # UTNNXXPPPP 1 373 Exp. ID Point #
SIA / Panels PI Modifier Reporting: Reporting

SIA pi Modifier SIA
Any) Codes panel ID
XX- SBUS ID
ZZZ- Zone #
PPPP- Point #
GGG- Group #
E- Emergency #
RRRR-Receiver #
Wireless Gateway Trouble restore pi Exp. ID UJ Point # UJNNXXPPPP 3 373 Exp. ID Point #
12.2 SIA / Panels PI Modifier Reporting:

Events are sent to the central station as a variable length string:
The event format is:
EEZZZZ
Where:
EE Event code (2 characters)
ZZZZ Event parameter (up to four digits – not zero filled)
1. The account number is sent using an account block that is separate from the event block
2. Multiple events can be sent within a single event block. Events are separated by a “/” character.
3. Event parameter can be either a zone, point or module number.
4. When reporting by point is enabled, the communicator uses a “pi” event to supersedes the actual point event to report the module
the point is linked to.
5. Panel ID is not sent in the SIA event parameters.
For Example see Table 12.3:
Event Report Zone Point Field Sent SIA Event
Zone/Point Panel ID Module ZZZZ ZZZZ Data
Fire Alarm-Zone Zone n/a n/a97 15 n/a EE-ZZ FA15
Fire Alarm-Zone Zone n/a n/a 05 n/a EE-Z FA5
Fire Alarm-Point Point n/a 01 n/a 123 EE-ZZ /EE-ZZZ pi01/FA123
Fire Alarm-Point Point n/a 33 n/a 203 EE-ZZ /EE-ZZZ pi11/FA203
Expander Trouble n/a n/a 11 n/a n/a EE-ZZ ET11
Auto Test n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a EE-Z RP0
Battery Trouble-Panel 32 n/a n/a 98 n/a n/a EE-ZZ YT98
Battery Trouble-Expander 18 n/a n/a 18 n/a n/a EE-ZZ YT18
SLC Loop Shorted n/a n/a 44 n/a n/a EE-ZZ ET44
Program Begin Panel ID=32 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a EE-Z LB0
Program Begin Panel ID= 22 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a EE-Z LB0
AC Power Loss - Panel 22 n/a n/a 98 n/a n/a EE-Z AT0
Fire Trouble Point n/a 97 n/a 200 EE-ZZ /EE-ZZZ pi97/FT200
Fire Trouble Zone n/a 97 01 n/a EE-Z FT1
Fire Trouble-Nac Point n/a 98 n/a Nac Circuit 7 EE-ZZ /EE-Z pi98/FT7 Z=Pt. #
Fire Trouble-Nac Zone n/a 98 n/a Nac Circuit 7 EE-ZZZ FT400 ZZZ=OPG#
Table 12.3 : SIA- Panels - PI Modifier Reporting Examples
Reporting SIA – Panel Communicator:
12.3 SIA – Panel Communicator:

(Differences/additional features are underlined)
Events are sent to the Central Station Receiver as a fixed length string:
The event format is:
EEPPMMZZZZ
Where
EE Event code (2 characters)
PP Panel number (2 digits – Zero Filled) (valid range from 1 to 64)
MM Module number (2 digits – Zero Filled) (valid range from 1 to 98, typically
Module information)
ZZZZ Event parameter (4 digits – Zero Filled) (typically Point, Zone or Circuit
information)
1. The Event field will contain 10 digits including the 2 digit event code (EE), 2 digit panel ID (PP), 2 digit Module Number (MM)
and a 4 digit Event Parameter (ZZZZ).
2. Based on the actual Event Code, the Module Number or Event Parameter fields might not contain pertinent information. In that case
the field will contain zeros.
3. The account number is sent using an account block that is separate from the event block.
4. Multiple events can be sent within a single event block. Events are separated by a “/” character.
5. Event parameter can be a Zone, Point or Circuit Number.
6. “pi” modifier event is not used.
7. Panel can be set to report by either Point or Zone.
For examples see Table 12.4.
Event Report Panel ID Module Zone Point Fields Sent SIA Event Data
Zone Point PP MM ZZZZ ZZZZ
Fire Alarm-Zone Zone 32 n/a 15 n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ FA32000015
Fire Alarm-Zone Zone 32 n/a 05 n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ FA32000005
Fire Alarm-Point Point 32 01 n/a 123 EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ FA32010123
Fire Alarm-Point Point 21 33 n/a 203 EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ FA21330203
Expander Trouble n/a 15 11 n/a n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ ET15110000
Auto Test n/a 32 n/a n/a n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ RP32000000
Battery Trouble-Panel 32 n/a 32 98 n/a n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ YT32980000
Battery Trouble-Expander 18 n/a 32 18 n/a n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ YT32180000
SLC Loop Shorted n/a 01 44 n/a n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ ET01440000
Program Begin n/a 32 n/a n/a n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ LB32000000
Program Begin n/a 22 n/a n/a n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ LB22000000
AC Power Loss- Panel 22 n/a 22 98 n/a n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ AT22980000
MM = 00
Fire Trouble Point 22 97 n/a 200 EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ FT22970200
Fire Trouble Zone 22 97 1 n/a EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ FT22970001
MM = 00
Fire Trouble-Nac Point 22 98 n/a Nac Circuit 7 EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ FT22980007
ZZZZ=Pt. #
Fire Trouble-Nac Zone 22 98 n/a Nac Circuit 7 EE-PP-MM-ZZZZ FT22980007
ZZZZ=OPG #
Table 12.4 : SIA REPORTING EXAMPLES
Section 13: Testing and Troubleshooting
This section of the manual offers suggestions for troubleshooting hardware problems. Please read this section if you encounter a problem
when installing the control panel. If these suggestions do not solve your problem or if you encounter a problem that is not listed here,
contact Honeywell Silent Knight Technical Support at 800-446-6444 for assistance.
Common Problems
Problem Possible Cause / Suggested Actions
Trouble message "DBL ADDR" (Double An address has been assigned to more than one detector. Correct the address following the
Address) displays on LCD. procedure described in Section 7.9 if using SD devices or Section 7.7 if using SK devices.
Auxiliary power or notification circuits have Correct polarity. For notification and auxiliary power circuits: When in alarm or powered,
incorrect polarity. terminals labeled “X” are positive, terminals labeled “O” are negative.
Check hardware connections.
If devices are physically connected, make sure wiring is correct (see Section 7.8 if using SD
devices or Section 7.6 if using SK devices). For the main panel, the positive side of device
must be connected to terminal 34; the negative side must be connected to Terminal 33. For
5815XL devices, make sure the device connects to the 5815XL via the SLC OUT terminals.
There can be only one SLC loop on the main panel and on each 5815XL module. Do not
SLC devices are not being recognized connect devices to terminals labeled SLC IN.
(trouble message "Missing" displays). Make sure SLC devices have been addressed properly following the procedure described in
Section 7.9 if using SD devices or Section 7.7 if using SK devices.
For contact monitor modules, which are addressed using DIP switches, the DIP switch must
be set to the correct address before power is applied to the SLC loop. If this procedure is not
followed, the device will have an incorrect address.
Make sure correct polarity has been observed for SLC device wiring. See Section 7.8 if using
SD devices or 7.6 if using SK devices.
Check that SLC loop impedance is within the required range.
To measure impedance, use the following procedure:
1. Disconnect both wires from the terminal block at the panel (SLC devices can remain
connected).
SLC devices are not being recognized 2. Measure the impedance from positive to negative and from negative to positive. Both
(trouble message “Missing” displays on measurements should be greater than 500 K ohms. If the installation uses T-taps, test
the annunciator). each T-tap individually.
3. Temporarily connect the positive wire to the negative wire of the SLC loop at the point
farthest from the panel (SLC devices can remain connected).
4. Measure the impedance from positive to negative and from negative to positive wires that
were disconnected from the panel in step 1. Both measurements must be less than 50
ohms.
An earth ground fault occurs when the panel senses an unexpected flow of current from one or
more of its terminals to the earth connection (Terminal 2).
Isolate the wiring that is causing the fault by removing wiring connections one at a time until
The panel indicates a ground fault trouble the earth fault is no longer present. Pause at least five seconds after removing a wire before
condition (trouble message “GROUND removing the next one.
FAULT” displays). The panel will also go into ground fault if a computer is connected to the panel via a serial
cable attached to the panel’s 9-pin connector. This is a correct method for on-site
communication between a panel and a computer. Ignore the ground fault message in this
case. The trouble will clear automatically when you disconnect the computer from the cable
Check the status of the 5815XL green LED. If it flashes in the pattern .5 sec. on / .5 sec. off, it
is likely that the 5815XL has not been added to the system through programming. JumpStart
will add any 5815XLs connected to the panel. If you have already run JumpStart, 5815XLs can
be added manually (see Section 9.2.2).
Check that the correct ID for the 5815XL module has been set through the DIP switches.
5815XL module that has been physically
Assign ID#1 to the first 5815XL and ID#2 to the second 5815XL. See Section 4.13.1 for
connected to the panel but is not being
complete details.
recognized.
If the wiring between the 5815XL and the panel is correct, measure the voltage from 5815XL
Terminal (+) to Terminal (-). Voltage should be in the range 27.2-27.4V when AC power is
present.
If the green LED is not flashing, the likely cause is incorrect wiring from between the 5815XL
and the panel. See Section 4.8.1 for wiring details.
Table 13-1 Troubleshooting Conditions
Testing and Troubleshooting Periodic Testing and Maintenance
Problem Possible Cause / Suggested Actions

Check the status of the 6815 green LED. If it flashes in the pattern .5 sec. on / .5 sec. off, it is
likely that the 6815 has not been added to the system through programming. JumpStart will
add any 6815s connected to the panel. 6815s can be added manually (see Section 9.2.2).
Check that the correct ID for the 6815 module has been set through the DIP switches. Assign
6815 module that has been physically
ID#1 to the first 6815and ID#2 to the second 6815. See Section 4.13.1 for complete details.
connected to the panel but is not being
If the wiring between the 6815 and the panel is correct, measure the voltage from 6815
recognized.
Terminal (+) to Terminal (-). Voltage should be in the range 27.2-27.4V when AC power is
present.
If the green LED is not flashing, the likely cause is incorrect wiring from between the 6815 and
the panel. See Section 4.9.1 for wiring details.
Table 13-1 Troubleshooting Conditions (Continued)
13.2 Periodic Testing and Maintenance
To ensure proper and reliable operation, it is recommended that the system inspection and testing be scheduled monthly or as required by
national and/or local fire codes. Testing should be done by a qualified service representative if a malfunction is encountered.
 Before testing:
1. Notify the fire department and/or central alarm receiving station.
2. Notify facility personnel of a test so that alarm sounding devices are ignored during the test period.
3. When necessary, activation of Notification Appliances can be prevented by the DISABLE function.
 Testing:
1. Activate an input via an alarm initiating device and check that the correct outputs activate (Notification Appliances sound/flash,
relays activate, alarm indicator lights). Reset the System. Repeat for each alarm initiating device.
2. Momentarily open the following circuits one at a time and check for a trouble sign:
- Notification Appliance Circuits
- Initiating devices
3. If new batteries were installed, wait 48 hours before completing this step. Remove the AC power, activate initiating device and
check that:
- The alarm indicator lights.
- All active Notification Appliances sound.
Measure the battery voltage while the Notification Appliances are sounding. Replace any battery with terminal voltage less than 85% of
rating. Reapply the AC power and reset the system.
13.3 Event History
The event history can be useful for tracking or recalling a trouble condition.
To view the Event History, do the following:
1. Press 3 to select the Event History.
2. Press the Up or Down arrow key to view the events in the history buffer.
13.4 Built-in Troubleshooting and Testing Tools
The fire control panel has several built-in testing and troubleshooting tools that can be utilized to save time while testing and trouble-
shooting the points and the SLC devices.
Built-in Troubleshooting and Testing Tools Testing and Troubleshooting
13.4.1 SLC Device Locator

The SLC Device Locator can be used to locate a device on a SLC loop.
Follow these steps to locate a particular SLC device:
1. Select 2 for Point Functions from the Main Menu.
2. Select 4 for SLC Single Device Locator.
A message similar to the one shown in Figure 13.1 will display.
Figure 13.1 Shut Down Warning

3. Press the Up or Down arrow to toggle NO to YES, then press, ENTER.
If NO is chosen, you will exit back to the Point Function Menu.
If Yes is chosen, the system will cease normal operation leaving the premise unprotected.
4. Select the SLC loop.
5. Enter the SLC address of the device you want to locate.
The LED on the selected device will start flashing.
6. Press the left arrow to exit the SLC Device Locator.
NOTE: Once you exit, the system will resume normal operation.
13.4.2 SLC Multiple Locator

This feature is the same as SLC Device Locator, except you can locate up to 8 devices on a single search.
Follow these instructions to locate multiple SLC devices:
1. Select 2 (Point Functions) from the Main Menu.
2. Select 5 (SLC Multiple Device Locator).
A message similar to the one shown in Figure 13.2 will display.
Figure 13.2 Shut Down Warning

3. Press the Up or Down arrow to toggle NO to YES then press ENTER.
If NO is chosen you will exit back to the Point Function menu.
If Yes is chosen the system will cease normal operation leaving the premise unprotected.
4. Select the SLC loop.
5. Enter up to 8 SLC addresses for the devices you wish to locate.
The LEDs on the selected devices will start flashing.
6. Press the left arrow to exit SLC Multiple Device Locator.
NOTE: Once you exit, the system will resume normal operation.
13.4.3 I/O Point Control

This feature allows you to toggle any output on or off and trip any input device. This can be useful to test a point’s output mapping.
Follow these steps to control a I/O point:
1. Select 2 for Point Functions from the Main Menu.
2. Select 6 for I/O Point Control.
3. Select the module the point is on.
4. Use the Up or Down arrow to select the point you wish to test.
5. Press ENTER to generate an alarm for an input point or activate an output point.
6. To exit, press the left arrow.
Testing and Troubleshooting Built-in Troubleshooting and Testing Tools
13.4.4 Earth Fault Resistance

Table 13.1 lists the earth fault resistance detection for each applicable terminal on the FACP.
Terminal Label Low Biased High Biased

Terminal
Function
Number (Values in Ohms) High High Low Low
Trip Restore Trip Restore
Flexput™ Notification 4 + I/O 6 - - 0 0

Circuits
5 – 0 0 - -
6 + I/O 5 - - 0 0
7 – 0 0 - -
Notification Circuits 8 + NAC 4 - - 0 0
9 – 0 0 - -
10 + NAC 3 - - 0 0
11 – 0 0 - -
12 + NAC 2 - - 0 0
13 – 0 0 - -
14 + NAC 1 - - 0 0
15 – 0 0 - -
SBUS Communication 16 B SBUS OUT - - 0 0
17 A - - 0 0
SBUS Power 18 + 0 0 - -
19 - - - 0 0
SBUS Communication 20 B SBUS IN - - 0 0
21 A - - 0 0
SBUS Power 22 + 0 0 - -
23 - - - 0 0
SLC Terminals 33 SC- SLC OUT - - 0 0
34 S+ 0 0 - -
35 SC- SLC IN - - 0 0
36 S+ 0 0 - -
EXT. COMM B - - 0 0
A - - 0 0
+ 0 0 - -
– - - 0 0
Table 13.1 : Earth Fault Resistance Values by Terminal
Section 14: Installation Records
This section of the manual is for you to use if you wish to track of how points, zones, and groups have been programmed.
14.1 Detector and Module Point Record

If installing SK SLC devices, use Table 14.1 to record detector points (up to 99 per SLC loop) installed on the on-board SLC loop and
make a copy of Table 14.2 to record installed modules (up to 99 per SLC loop).
Module Addr Zone / Group Description Module Addr Zone/ Group Description
On-board 1 On-board 25
Table 14.1 : Installation Record of Onboard Devices
Installation Records Detector and Module Point Record
On-board 88
Table 14.1 : Installation Record of Onboard Devices
Additional SLC Devices
Use the table below to record devices installed on additional 5815XLs. Make a copy of this page if additional pages are needed.
Zone /
Module Addr Description Module Addr Zone/ Group Description
Group
Table 14.2 : Installation Record of Devices Installed on 5815XLs
Detector and Module Point Record Installation Records
Zone /
Module Addr Description Module Addr Zone/ Group Description
Group
Table 14.2 : Installation Record of Devices Installed on 5815XLs (Continued)

 Additional SLC Devices
Use the table below to record devices installed on additional SLC expanders. Make a copy of this page if additional pages are needed.
Table 14.3 : Installation Record of Devices
Appendix A: Compatible Devices
A.1 Notification Appliances
For proper operation, you must use polarized devices with a 4.7k ohm EOL resistor on each loop. All supervised notification appliances
used with the control panel must be polarized.
NOTE: Not all devices can use the Sync feature, be sure to check table below to ensure the device you have chosen will work with this
feature. This control is UL listed for panel wide Synchronization.
Table below lists notification appliances compatible with the fire alarm control panel. Appliances which can be synchronized indicate
the type of SYNC available in the columns marked Audio and Visual.
Manufacturer Model Audio Visual Type

SH24W-153075 X X Horn/Strobe
SAD24-153075 X Strobe
SAD24-75110 X Strobe
SL24W-75110 X Strobe
SL24C-3075110 X Strobe
SLB24-75 X Strobe
RSD24-153075 X Strobe
RSD24-75110 X Strobe
SHB24-75 X X Horn/Strobe
SCM24W-153075 X Chimes/Strobe
SCM24W-75110 X Chimes/Strobe
SCM24C-3075110 X Chimes/Strobe
SCM24C-177 X Chimes/Strobe
H24W X Horn
H24R X Horn
S2415-FC X Strobe
S241575-FC X Strobe
S2430-FC X Strobe
130-3117C X Mini Horn
130-3147C X Mini Horn
BLV-6 X Vibrating Bell
BLV-10 X Vibrating Bell
BLVCH X Vibrating Chime
H12/24-FC X Horn
H12/24W-FC X Horn
H12/24K-FC X Horn
HC12/24-FC X Horn
HC12/24W-FC X Horn
HC12/24K-FC X Horn
P2415-FC X X Horn/Strobe
P2415W-FC X X Horn/Strobe
P2415K-FC X X Horn/Strobe
P241575F-FC X X Horn/Strobe
Table A.1: Compatible Notification Appliances
Notification Appliances Compatible Devices

P24110K-FC * X X Horn/Strobe
S2430W-FC X Strobe
S2430K-FC X Strobe
S2475-FC X Strobe
S2475W-FC X Strobe
S2475K-FC X Strobe
S24110-FC X Strobe
S24110W-FC X Strobe
S24110K-FC X Horn
450 X Horn/Strobe
VALS X X Horn/Strobe
GEC-24-15 X X Horn/Strobe
GEC-24-15/75 - X X Horn/Strobe
GX91 X Mini/Horn Steady Tone
GX93 X Mini/Horn Temporal Tone
HG124 X Horn
HS24-15 X Horn/Strobe
GCC24 X Multi Candela Horn/Strobe Ceiling Mount
GCCR24 X Multi Candela Horn/Strobe Ceiling Mount
GCS24 X Multi Candela Strobe Ceiling Mount
GCSR24 X Multi Candela Strobe Ceiling Mount
GECR-24 X X Multi Candela Horn/Strobe
GES24-15 X Strobe
GES24-30 X Strobe
GES24-60 X Strobe
GES24-75 X Strobe
GES24-110 X Strobe
GES24-15/75 Strobe
Table A.1: Compatible Notification Appliances (Continued)
Compatible Devices Notification Appliances

GES24-177 Strobe
GES3-24 Multi Candella Strobe
GESR-24 Multi Candella Strobe
GEH-24 Horn
ST24-30 Strobe
ST24-60 Strobe
ST24-75 Strobe
ST24-110 Strobe
ST24-1575 Strobe
WGEC24-75W Weatherproof Horn/Strobe
WGES24-75W Weatherproof Strobe
WGMS-24-X Horn/Strobe
CHR Chime
CHW Chime
CHSR 2-Wire Chime/Strobe
CHSW 2-Wire Chime/Strobe
HR Horn
HW Horn
HRK Horn
HWL Horn WHT Wall 4x4
HRL Horn Red Wall 4x4
HGRL Horn Red Wall 2x4
HGWL Horn WHT Wall 2x4
CHWL Chime WHT Wall 4x4
CHRL Chime Red Wall 4x4
CHSRL Chime/Strobe Red Wall 4x4
CHSWL Chime/Strobe WHT Wall 4x4
CHSCRL Chime/Strobe Red Ceil 4x4
CHSCWL Chime/Strobe WHT Ceil 4x4
P2R 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
P2R-P 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
PC2R 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
PC2R-P 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
P2RH 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
P2RH-P 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
PC2RH 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
PC2RH-P 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
P2W 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
P2W-P 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
PC2W 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
PC2W-P 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
P2WH 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
P2WH-P 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
PC2WH 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
PC2WH-P 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
P2RK 2-Wire Horn/Strobe

PC2RK 2-Wire Horn/Strobe
P2RHK 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
PC2RHK 2-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
P4R 4-Wire Horn/Strobe
PC4R 4-Wire Horn/Strobe
P4RH 4-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
P4W 4-Wire Horn/Strobe
PC4W 4-Wire Horn/Strobe
P4WH 4-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
PC4WH 4-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
P4RK 4-Wire Horn/Strobe
PC4RK 4-Wire Horn/Strobe
P4RHK 4-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
PC4RHK 4-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
PC4RH 4-Wire Horn/Strobe High Candela
P2RL, P2RL-P, P2RL-SP* Horn/Strobe 2W Red Wall 4x4
P2WL, P2WL-P, P2WL-SP* Horn/Strobe 2W Red Wall 4x4
PC2RL Horn/Strobe 2W Red Ceil 4x4
PC2WL Horn/Strobe 2W Red Ceil 4x4
P2GRL Horn/Strobe 2W Red Wall 2x4
P2GWL
P4RL
P4WL
PC4RL
PC4WL
SR
SR-P
SCR
SCR-P
SRH
SRH-P
SCRH
SCRH-P
SW
SW-P
SCW
SCW-P
SWH
SWH-P
SCWH
SCWH-P
SRK
SCRK
SRHK
SCRHK
SRL, SRL-P, SRL-SP*
Compatible Devices Notification Appliances

SWL, SWL-P, SWL-ALERT
SWL-CLR-ALERT*
SCRL
SCWL
SCWL-CLR-ALERT
SGRL
SGWL
P2RH-LF
P2WH-LF
HR-LF
HW-LF Low Frequency Sounder
SEP-SPSWL** Universal Expander Plate, Amber Lens,
White, ALERT
SEP-SPSWL-P** Universal Expander Plate, White, Plain
SEP-BBSWL** Universal Expander Plate Back Box Skirt,
White
* P=Plain, ALERT=Pad Printing ALERT, SP=Fuego
** Expander plates are for vertical wall mounting only. Indoor applications. Must be mounted in the correct orientation.
“UP” is indicated on the part to designate the top of the plate
AH-12
AH-24
AH-12WP
AH-24WP
AMT-241575W
AMT-24MCW
AMT-241575W-NYC
AMT-12/24
AMT-12/24 NYC
AS-121575W
NH-12/24
AS-241575W
AS-24MCC
AS-24MCCH
AS-24MCW
AS-24MCWH
ASWP-2475W
ASWP-2475C
ASWP-24MCWH
ASWP-24MCCH
CH-70
CH-90
CH70-241575W
CH70-24MCW
CH70-24MCWH
CH90-24MCC
CH90-24MCCH

HS-24
HS4-241575W
HS4-24MCW
HS4-24MCWH
HS4-24MCC
MIZ-24S
MT-121575W
MT-241575W
MT-24MCW
MTWP-2475W
MTWP-2475C
MTG-121575W
MTR-121575W
MTWPA-2475W
MTWPB-2475W
MTWPG-2475W
MTWPR-2475W
MTWPA-24MCCH
ZNH
NS-121575W
NS-241575W
NS-24MCW
NS-24MCC
NS-24MCCH
ZNS-MCW
ZNS-MCWH
ZNS-24MCC
ZNS-24MCCH
RSS-121575W
RSS-241575W
RSS-24MCC
RSS-24MCCR
RSS-24MCCH
RSS-24MCCHR
RSS-24MCW
RSS-24MCWH
RSSP-121575W
RSSP-241575W
RSSR-2415W
RSSR-2415C
RSSR-2475W
RSSR-2475C
RSSR-24110C
RSSA-24110W
RSSB-24110W
RSSG-24110W
Compatible Devices Two Wire Detectors

RSSR-24110W
RSSA-24MCC
RSSB-24MCC
RSSG-24MCC
RSSR-24MCC
RSSWPA-2475W
RSSWPA-24MCCH
RSSWPG-24MCCH
RSSWPR-24MCCH
RSSWP-2475W
RSSWP-2475C
RSSWP-24MCWH
ZRS-MCWH
ZRS-24MCC
ZRS-24MCCH
MB-G6-24
MB-G10-24
MB-G6-12
MB-G10-12
MIZ-24-R
MT-12/24-R
MT4-12/2z
ZRS-MCW
MTWPR-24MCCH
NH-12/24R
HSR
HSW
STR
STW
HNR
HNW
A.2 Two Wire Detectors

Table A.2 lists two-wire smoke detectors that are compatible with the fire control panel. The table is organized by manufacturer. The
columns show the number of detectors per loop that can be used.
6820/EVS
Identifier 24H
17.1 - 27.3
Operating voltage Range
VDC
NOTE 1: The maximum number of smoke detectors per zone is determined by both the current draw and the impedance of the smoke
detector. If too many smoke detectors are used on any zone, false alarms could occur.
NOTE 2: Do not mix different models of detectors on any zone; false alarms could occur
NOTE 3: Control unit Smoke Reset Time must be programmed for a number greater than or equal to the maximum reset time of the smoke
detector
Two Wire Detectors Compatible Devices
Model Name or Number Compatibility ID

Manufacturer (Base model name or number in # per Loop
parenthesis.) Head Base
Apollo 55000-350 (45681-200) 55000-350 45681-200 15 / loop

55000-250 (45681-200) 55000-250 45681-200 24 / loop
55000-225 55000-225 45681-255, 256 15 / loop for
55000-226 55000-226 Ion Detectors
55000-227 55000-227
45681-200, 220, 232, 15 / loop for
55000-325 55000-325 251, 252 Photo Electric
55000-326 55000-326 Detectors
55000-327 55000-327
55000-328 55000-328
Hochiki SLR-24 HD-3 15 / loop
SLR-24H
HSC-220R(HB-72)
SLR-24V
NS6-220 OR NS4-
SLR-835 HD-3 220 (HB-3) 14 / loop
SLR-835H HD-5
System Sensor 1400 A N/A 16 / loop
1451 (B401B) A N/A 16 / loop
2100 A N/A 20 / loop
2100T A N/A 20 / loop
2151 (B401) A N/A 16 / loop
2151T (B401) A N/A 16 / loop
2400 A N/A 16 / loop
2400TH A N/A 16 / loop
2451 (B401B) A N/A 16 / loop
2451TH (B401B) A N/A 16 / loop
2W-B A N/A 20 / loop
2WT-B A N/A 20 / loop
2WTA-B A N/A 20 / loop
2WTR-B A N/A 20 / loop
Table A.2: Compatible Two-Wire Smoke Detectors
Compatible Devices Four-Wire Smoke Detectors/Devices (UL Listed)
A.3 Four-Wire Smoke Detectors/Devices (UL Listed)

Max Standby Alarm Current
Smoke Detector/Base Detector Type
Current (mA) (mA)
Fenwal CPD-7021 (w/70-201000-005 Base) Ionization 0.10 *
Fenwal PSD-7125 Photoelectric 0.10 *
Fenwal PSD-7126 (w/70-201000-005 Base) Photoelectric 0.10 *
Fire-Lite BLP-12-4W Base * *
Gentex 824 Photoelectric 0.50 *
Gentex 824T Photoelectric 0.50 *
Gentex 824CP Photoelectric 0.50 *
Gentex 824CPT Photoelectric 0.50 *
Hochiki HSC-4R Base * *
Hochiki SPB-24 Projected Beam 0.25 *
System Sensor B112LP Base 0.12 36
System Sensor B114LP Base * *
System Sensor B404B Base * *
System Sensor DH100ACDC Photoelectric 0.15 0.70
System Sensor DH100ACDCLP Photoelectric 0.15 0.70
System Sensor DH100ACDCLWP Photoelectric 0.15 0.70
System Sensor DH400ACDCI Ionization Duct 25 95
System Sensor DH400ACDCP Photoelectric Duct 25 95
System Sensor 1112/24/D Ionization 0.05 50
System Sensor 1424 Ionization 0.10 41
System Sensor 1451 (w/B402B Base) Ionization 0.10 39
System Sensor 2112/24ATR Photoelectric 0.50 60/70
System Sensor 2112/24AITR Photoelectric 0.50 60/70
System Sensor 2112/24/D Photoelectric 0.05 50
System Sensor 2112/24R Photoelectric 0.50 60/70
System Sensor 2112/24TR Photoelectric 0.50 60/70
System Sensor 2112/24T/D Photoelectric w/135° Thermal 0.05 50
System Sensor 2112/24TSRB Photoelectric w/135° Thermal 15 45
Supervisory Relay
System Sensor 2312/24TB Photoelectric 0.12 50
System Sensor 2412 (12 volt) Photoelectric 0.12 77
System Sensor 2412AT (12 volt) Photoelectric 0.12 58
System Sensor 2412TH (12 volt) Photoelectric 0.12 77
System Sensor 2424 Photoelectric 0.10 41
System Sensor 2424TH Photoelectric 0.10 41
System Sensor 2451 Photoelectric 0.10 39
System Sensor 2451TH (with/B402B Base) Photoelectric 0.10 39
System Sensor 2W-MOD Loop Test/Maintenance Mod. 30 50
System Sensor 4W-B (12/24 Volt) Photoelectric I3 .05 23
System Sensor4WT-B (12/24 Volt) Photoelectric I3 w/Therm .05 23
System Sensor 4WTA-B (12/24 Volt) I3 Photo w/ Therm Sounder .05 35
3
System Sensor 4WTR-B (12/24 Volt) I Photo w/ Therm/Relay .05 35
System Sensor 4WTAR-B (12/24 Volt) I3 Photo w/ .05 50
Therm/Sounder/Relay
Table A.3: Compatible Four-Wire Smoke Detectors
Door Holders (UL Listed) Compatible Devices
Max Standby Alarm Current

Smoke Detector/Base Detector Type
Current (mA) (mA)
System Sensor 4WITAR-B (12/24 Volt) I3 Photo w/ Isolated .05 50
Therm/Sounder/Relay
System Sensor 2W-MOD2 I3 Loop Test/Maintenance Mod. .05 *
3
System Sensor RRS-MOD I Reversing Relay/Sync Module .05 *
System Sensor 6424 Projected Beam 10 28.4
System Sensor Beam 1224(S) Projected Beam 17 38.5
* Contact manufacturer for current draws
Table A.3: Compatible Four-Wire Smoke Detectors (Continued)
A.4 Door Holders (UL Listed)

The below table lists door holders that are compatible with the fire control panel.
Current
Manufacturer Model Type
(mA)
Edwards DH150A Floor Mount 96

Edwards DH154A Flush Mount 96
Edwards DH158A Surface Mount 96
Rixon Firemark FM-980 Floor Mount, single 68
Rixon Firemark FM-996 Surface Wiring 68
Rixon Firemark FM-998 Concealed Wiring 68
Table A.4: UL Listed Door Holders
A.5 Relays (UL Listed)

The below table lists relays compatible with the fire control panel.
Manufacturer Model Current (mA)
Air Products & Controls, LTD MR-101/C 15

MR-201/C 35
PAM-1 15
PAM-2 15
PAM-SD 15
System Sensor A77-716B 20
PR-1 15
PR-2 30
PR-3 30
EOLR-1 30
R-10T 23
R-14T 23
R-20T 40
R-24T 40
R-10E 23
R-14E 23
R-20E 40
R-24E 40
Table A.5: UL Listed Relays
Compatible Devices Compatible 520Hz Signaling Speakers
A.6 Compatible 520Hz Signaling Speakers

Model Number Description
System Sensor Model Number Description
SPR Wall High-Fidelity Speaker, Red
SPW Wall High-Fidelity Speaker, White
SPCR Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker, Red
SPCW Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker, White
SPSR Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Red
SPSRH Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High Candela, Red
SPSW Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, White
SPSCR Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Red
SPSCW Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, White
SPSCWH Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High Candela, White
SPSCRH Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High Candela, Red
SPSCW-CLR-ALERT Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Clear Lens, ALERT, White
SPSCW-P Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Plain, White
SPSCWH-P Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High Candela, Plain, White
SPSR-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Plain, Red
SPSRH-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High Candela, Plain, Red
SPSCWH-P Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High Candela, Plain, White
SPSW-ALERT Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Amber Lens, ALERT, White
SPSW-CLR-ALERT Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Clear Lens, ALERT, White
SPSW-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Plain, Red
SPSWH Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High Candela, White
SPSWH-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High Candela, Plain, Red
SPCRL Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker, Red
SPCWL Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker, White
SPRL Wall High-Fidelity Speaker, Red
SPWL Wall High-Fidelity Speaker, White
SPSCRL Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Red
SPSCWL Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, White
SPSRL Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Red
SPSRL-SP Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, FUEGO
SPSWL Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, White
SPSCWL-P Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Standard, White, Plain
SPSRL-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Standard, Red, Plain
SPSWL-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Standard, White, Plain
SPSCWL-CLR-ALERT Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Clear Lens, Standard, White, ALERT
SPSWL-ALERT Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Amber Lens, ALERT, White
SPSWL-CLR-ALERT Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Clear Lens, Standard, White, ALERT
Note: *F=FIRE, P=PLAIN, AL=ALERT, AG=AGENT, EV=EVAC, SP=FUEGO, PG=FOGO
Table A.6: Compatible 520 Hz Signaling Speakers
A.7 Compatible 520Hz Low Frequency Bases

Model Number Description
B200S-LF-WH / IV Low Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base
B200SR-LF-WH / IV Low Frequency Intelligent Sounder Base
Color Guide: -IV = Ivory color, -WH = White
Appendix B: Editing Text Using the Built-In Programmer
This section contains tables of programmable characters that may be used for device, module, site, template, group, and zone names or
phone numbers. T9 style editing is used.
B.1 Characters Used for Editing Text

“Character Table” on page 178 lists the available characters and their associated numeric designator. When programming:
1. Use the Up or Down arrow key to scroll to the selected mode.
2. Press the number shown in “Character Table” on page 178 until the selected character is shown.
3. Press Arrow left and right for position, and press ENTER, to accept.
Lower Case Letters
abc1 def2 ghi3 jkl4
mno5 pqr6 stu7 vwx8
yz9 Spc0
Upper Case Letters
ABC1 DEF2 GHI3 JKL4
MNO5 PQR6 STU7 VWX8
YZ9 Spc0
Numbers and Special Characters
1 [ ]1 2 ( )2 3 . ,3 4 : ;4
5 ’ "5 6 ? !6 7 ‘ /7 8 – +8
9 = -9 0 0 *&@ * #$ #
Table B-1 Character Table
B.2 Example Name Edit

1. Press Up or Down to select upper case letters mode, Press 2 until “F” appears.
2. Press Up or Down to change the mode to lower case letters, Press 3 until “i” appears.
3. Press 6 until “r” appears.
4. Press 2 until “e” appears.
5. Press 0 to space, then continue to the next word using the same process.
6. Press ENTER to accept.
NOTE: After three seconds of no change, letter will automatically be accepted. Also pressing next number will automatically accept
previous choice.
Figure 16.1 Edit Name Example
Appendix C: Expanded Receiver/Panel Relationship
The available receiver number will correspond with what panel number you entered. Receiver numbers are populated based on panel
number and audited to allow only the 4 appropriate receivers. See Section 6.2.6.
Panel Available receiver numbers

1 1 2 3 4
2 5 6 7 8
3 9 10 11 12
4 13 14 15 16
5 17 18 19 20
6 21 22 23 24
7 25 26 27 28
8 29 30 31 32
9 33 34 35 36
10 37 38 39 40
11 41 42 43 44
12 45 46 47 48
13 49 50 51 52
14 53 54 55 56
15 57 58 59 60
16 61 62 63 64
17 65 66 67 68
Table 17.7 Receiver/Panel Relationship
6820 / 6820EVS Installation and Operation Manual P/N LS10144-001SK-E:D 3/24/2020

179 179
Notes
Appendix D: Cadence Patterns
The cadence patterns shown in Appendix Appendix D: are available for use with the control panel.
Figure D: Cadence Patterns Available with the Control Panel
Notes
Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability
Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein, Manufacturer
warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility
and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free, under normal use and
service, from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months
(36) months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The Products
manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production.
Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its
Northford, Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible,
any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be
void if a Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer
or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to
maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working
conditions.
MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMS ANY
AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS, TRADEMARKS, PROGRAMS AND SERVICES
RENDERED BY MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS
A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS
PRODUCTS.
This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to
its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by
Manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this
warranty is authorized. Manufacturer does not represent that its products will
prevent any loss by fire or otherwise.
Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at Manufacturer's discretion,
each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer
to be defective, provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer
with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer's
Return Material Authorization form. The replacement part shall come from
Manufacturer's stock and may be new or refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS
DISTRIBUTOR'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A
WARRANTY CLAIM.
Warn-HL-08-2009.fm
Honeywell Silent Knight
12 Clintonville Road
Northford, CT 06472-1610
203.484.7161
LS10144-001SK-E | D | 03/20
www.silentknight.com ©2020 Honeywell International Inc.
10.2 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panel SPEC 2.18.1

Interface Panel Monaco BT-XF
Radio Transmitter and Federal Signal UVRIH

Interface
Monaco Enterprises, Inc.
Fire Management Systems Transceiver: BT-XF and BT-XHR

14820 East Sprague Avenue, P.O. Box 14129, Spokane, Washington 99214-0129
Telephone: (509) 926-6277 Facsimile: (509) 924-4980 E-mail:service@monaco.com Web: www.monaco.com
®
Fire Management Systems Transceiver

BT-XF and BT-XHR
Features
Q Supports Fire and Mass Notification applications
Q Hardwire line or narrowband radio communication
with any D-21 system
– Narrowband radio is FCC certified for
narrowband operation and meets the requirements
of the NTIA (National Telecommunications and
Information Administration) Manual of
Regulations and Procedures for Federal
Frequency Management
Q Radio communication with the D-700
Q Provides eight onboard relay driver outputs and four
FM
supervised fire zone inputs that can be connected to a
APPROVED
fire alarm control panel
Q Optional Relay Board adds eight Form C relays
Q Relays provide automatic or manual control of local
or remote devices such as turning on pumps based on Ordering Information
timed events, input from a fire alarm control panel, or Part Number Description
manually activated from the D-21
227-600-xx BT-XF, 4–28 zones, narrowband radio; 20 inch
Q
Single-wide enclosure supports up to three expansion high x 12 inch wide x 4 inch deep single-wide
backplanes or two expansion backplanes and one enclosure; one 12 Ah battery; specify frequency
BT-X relay board; double-wide enclosure supports 227-601-xx BT-XF, 4–28 zones, narrowband radio; 20 inch
up to seven zone expansion backplanes or six high x 12 inch wide x 4 inch deep single-wide
NEMA 3R enclosure; one 12 Ah battery;
expansion backplanes and one BT-X relay board specify frequency
Q Each expansion backplane supports two fire
227-603-xx BT-XF, 4–60 zones, narrowband radio; 20 inch
expansion cards high x 25 inch wide x 4 inch deep double-wide
Q Each BT-X fire expansion card provides four zone enclosure; two 12 Ah batteries; specify
inputs that can be connected to a fire alarm control frequency
panel and eight relay driver outputs 227-605-00 BT-XHF, 4–28 zones, hardwire communication
via installed audio board; 20 inch high x 12 inch
Q
Onboard and expansion card status LEDs wide x 4 inch deep single-wide enclosure; one
Q
One selectable RS-422/RS-485 port 12 Ah battery
Q
RS-232 port 227-607-00 BT-XHF, 4–28 zones, hardwire communication
Q
115 or 230 Vac power monitored with automatic via installed audio board; 20 inch high x 12 inch
wide x 4 inch deep single-wide NEMA 3R
switch-over to backup battery power enclosure; one 12 Ah battery
Q Battery backup is provided with each BT-X unit. One
227-606-00 BT-XHF, 4–60 zones, hardwire communication
or two 12 volt batteries can be installed in each BT-X, via installed audio board; 20 inch high x 25 inch
depending on the power requirements of the wide x 4 inch deep double-wide enclosure; two
transceiver. 12 Ah batteries
Q
Self test, stuck transmitter disconnect, reset, 176-212-00 BT-X expansion backplane
acknowledge, and battery reconnect switches 176-206-00 BT-X fire expansion card provides 4 zone inputs
Q Local audible alert (2 per backplane) and 8 relay outputs
Q Real-time clock and calendar 176-208-00 Audio Board Kit for hardwire communication
Q
1/2 Mb of program memory 176-214-00 BT-X relay board with 8 onboard Form C relays
Q 1/2 Mb of non-volatile data storage 513-412-00 BT-X enclosure tamper switch kit
Q Factory Mutual approved
Fire Managment Systems Catalog Rev H 07/07 15

Fire Management Systems Transceiver: BT-XF and BT-XHR
®
Part Number Description primarily used as a communication port for controlling

equipment for mass notification such as in-building and
227-574-00 Programming cable and adaptor
area-wide voice evacuation systems. This port can also
207-607-00 BT-X Planer be used as a hardwire connection for multiple BT-XFs
connected together, communicating with the D-21.
Description The BT-Xs primary source of power is 115 or 230 Vac;
The BT-XF communicates with D-21 systems. its secondary power is sealed lead-calcium type batteries
Communications may be by hardwire line or narrowband that require no maintenance or water addition. If loss of
radio. A versatile product, the BT-XF can be used for primary ac power occurs, the BT-XF automatically
Fire Management and Mass Notification applications. switches to battery operation. The switch-over is
accomplished with no interruption of protection service.
The BT-XF provides communication to the D-21 of Loss of ac power exceeding 60 seconds causes the
alarm and trouble conditions on its zones. Local control transmission of a special ac fail message including the
panels or supervisory devices that have isolated dry BT-XF identify code to the D-21. Transfer to normal ac
contacts and provide a short for an alarm condition or an power is automatic and activates the internal battery
open for a trouble condition may be connected to the charger causing automatic battery recharging. The
BT-XF onboard zone inputs. BT-XF power supply contains surge protection meeting
Through connection to the optional BT-X relay board, the requirements of IEEE C62.41.
the BT-XF provides automatic and manual control of The BT-XF battery supply provides sufficient power to
devices from the D-21. For example, gates can be opened operate a base unit in normal standby status up to 72
or closed, lights turned on or off, and motors and pumps hours and is capable of providing power for continuous
started or stopped. The on-board open-collector relay polling and transmitting alarm and status changes
driver outputs can also be connected to relay coils to throughout the standby period. Please note the battery
remotely control equipment or to drive remote calculations are based on a BT-XF that has no additional
annunciator LEDs. This remote device control can be current draw. If additional devices are attached the
automatically prompted by the D-21 from timed events, BT-XF will be drawing current, and a battery calculation
from alarm signals from a fire alarm control panel, or will be required to determine the correct size of battery
from manual initiation by the D-21 operator. to be installed. Restoration of ac power initiates a battery
Each BT-XF provides four supervised zone inputs that recharge operation with no loss of service. Each BT-XF
can be connected to a fire alarm control panel. The zone constantly monitors and supervises its own battery
inputs are supervised for open, short, and ground fault charger and battery. A battery fault message is
conditions. The BT-XF in a single-wide enclosure transmitted by the BT-XF when the battery voltage falls
supports up to three zone expansion backplanes; the below 85% of the rated capacity. Other battery fault
double-wide enclosure supports up to seven expansion messages are transmitted to the D-21 indicating the
backplanes. Two fire expansion cards can be plugged battery is disconnected or battery charger failure.
into each zone expansion backplane. Each fire expansion
card provides an additional four zone inputs that can also
be connected to a fire alarm control panel.
Each BT-XF provides status LEDs and zone LEDs. The
status LEDs reflect the BT-XF status: general alarm,
general trouble, system fault, in-communication, carrier
detect, transmit, primary power, battery boost charge,
and battery float charge. The zone LEDs indicate the
zone status: trouble, alarm, or normal. Each expansion
card’s LEDs indicate power is being supplied to the cards
and the status of each zone input: alarm or trouble.
Two RS-232 and one RS-422/RS-485 ports are included
on each BT-X. One of the RS-232 ports is used to
program the BT-XF via connection to a laptop computer
running a Windows provided terminal emulation
program such as HyperTerminal; the other port connects
to application-specific equipment. The RS-422 port is
16 Fire Managment Systems Catalog Rev H 07/07

Fire Alarm Control Panel Accessories: Batteries
®
Batteries
Features Enclosure with Batteries, P/N 081-156-00

■
Gel-type (immobilized electrolyte)
■ Sealed, leak-proof, maintenance free, usable in any
position
■ Compact, rugged, and rechargeable
■
Pressure-relief valves allow venting of gases in the
event of overcharging
■ Cycle or float service applications (no memory
effect)
■ Extended shelf life
Battery, P/N 400-704-00
Enclosure with Batteries
081-155-00 Two 12V / 18 Ah batteries in an 18-inch × 12-inch × 6-inch NEMA 1 battery enclosure for use with Monaco M-1 and
M-2 Panels, Vulcan 1, C-99A, and C-100A
081-156-00 Two 12V / 26 Ah batteries in an 18-inch × 12-inch × 6-inch (45.7 × 30.5 × 15.2 cm) red enclosure for use with Monaco
M-1 and M-2 Panels, Vulcan 1, C-99A, and C-100A
081-177-00 Two 12V / 40 Ah batteries in a 20-inch × 16-inch × 8-inch (50.8 × 40.6 × 20.3 cm) red enclosure for use with M-1 and
M-2 panels and Vulcan 1
081-182-00 Two 12V / 75 Ah batteries in a 10-inch x 22-inch x 8.5 inch (25.4 x 55.9 x 21.6 cm)
Enclosure With Batteries
081-172-00 20-inch × 16-inch × 6-inch deep NEMA 3R enclosure with four 12V / 18Ah batteries
Batteries Without Enclosures
400-603-00 6V / 1 Ah, 2-inch × 1.65-inch × 2.3-inch (5.1 × 4.2 × 5.6 cm), 0.6 lbs (0.3 kg), 0.187-inch × 0.032-inch tab
400-701-00 12V / 26 Ah, 6.89-inch × 6.54-inch × 4.92-inch (17.5 × 16.6 × 12.5 cm), 18.7 lbs (8.5 kg), 0.250-inch × 0.032-inch tab
400-703-00 12V / 1.2 Ah, 3.82-inch × 1.65-inch × 2.95-inch (19.5 × 4.7 × 7.5 cm), 1.3 lbs (1.4 kg), 0.187-inch × 0.032-inch tab
400-704-00 12V / 7.7 Ah, 5.95-inch × 2.58-inch × 3.95-inch (15.1 × 6.6 × 10 cm), 5.6 lbs (2.5 kg), 0.187-inch × 0.032-inch tab
400-716-00 12V / 75 Ah, 10.25-inch × 6.6-inch × 9.45-inch (26 × 16.8 × 24 cm), 39.7 lbs, nut & bolt terminals
400-717-00 12V / 100 Ah, 12-inch × 6.6-inch × 9.45-inch (30.5 × 16.8 × 24 cm), 50 lbs (22.7 kg), nut & bolt terminals
400-719-00 12V / 14 Ah, 8.5-inch × 2.75-inch × 5.5-inch (21.6 × 7 × 14 cm), 10.2 lbs (4.6 kg)
400-712-00 12V / 18 Ah, 7.22-inch × 3.34-inch × 6.7-inch (18.3 × 8.5 × 17 cm), 13.6 lbs (6.2 kg), 0.32-inch × 0.25-inch tab
400-713-00 12V / 12 Ah, 5.94-inch × 3.86-inch × 3.7-inch (15.1 × 9.8 × 9.4 cm), 9.0 lbs (4.1 kg), 0.250-inch × 0.032-inch tab
400-714-00 12V / 40 Ah, 7.72-inch × 6.42-inch × 6.85-inch (19.6 × 16.3 × 17.4 cm), 30.5 lbs (13.8 kg), nut & bolt terminals
98 Reporting and Receiving Systems Catalog Rev L 09/08

Antenna Network Accessories: Standard VHF Antennas

®
Antenna Network Accessories

Standard VHF Antennas
VHF antennas provide transmission and reception of the VHF RF signals between the transceiver and the Radio
Frequency Modem that is connected to the Radio Central Receiving System. Monaco offers omnidirectional and
directional antennas:
■ Omnidirectional antennas transmit and receive RF signal in any horizontal direction and are the primary antenna
used with BTs, M-Panels, M Addressable Panels, and RFMs that operate in the VHF frequency range.
■ Directional antennas transmit and receive RF signal in one direction and are used to transmit VHF signals longer
distances or in areas where significant interference exists.
BSA-1, Omnidirectional 5/8" Ground BSA-2, 6-Element Directional Yagi, P/N 190-401-xx*
Plane, P/N 190-400-00
*xx: This portion of the part number varies depending on frequency.
Specifications Ordering Information

Material P/N 190-400-00 and 190-407-00 Part Number Description
Stainless Steel
P/N 190-401-10 through 190-401-14
190-400-00 BSA-1 VHF 136-174 Mhz omnidirectional
Aluminum antenna with mounting hardware, ground
clamp, and coaxial cable sealant. Needs to be
Connector Type 190-400-00 SO-259 UHF female cut to system frequency by customer.
190-407-00 BNC male
199-001-00 Spare 54-inch antenna whip for use with
Polarization Vertical P/N 190-400-00. Needs to be cut to system
frequency by customer.
Gain P/N 190-400-00 and 190-407-00
3 dBd, 5/8 wave ground plane 199-002-00 Spare VHF coil for use with P/N 190-400-00
P/N 190-401-10 through 190-401-14
190-407-00 BSA-6 VHF 136-174 MHz magnetic-mount,
7.1 dBd
portable, omnidirectional antenna. Needs to be
RF Impedance 50 Ω nominal cut to system frequency by customer.
VSWR at Resonance P/N 190-400-00 and 190-407-00 190-401-10 BSA-2, VHF 6-element yagi directional
1.5 to 1 maximum antenna 136-142 MHz
P/N 190-401-10 through 190-401-14
190-401-11 BSA-2, VHF 6-element yagi directional
1.2:1 typical
antenna 142-150 MHz
Wind Load Resistance P/N 190-400-00
190-401-12 BSA-2, VHF 6-element yagi directional
100 mph
antenna 150-158 MHz
P/N 190-401-10 through 190-401-14
125 mph 190-401-13 BSA-2, VHF 6-element yagi directional
antenna 158-166 MHz
Horizontal Beam P/N 190-401-10 through 190-401-14
Width 74° 190-401-14 BSA-2, VHF 6-element yagi directional
antenna 166-174 MHz
Vertical Beam Width P/N 190-401-10 through 190-401-14
53°
Reporting and Receiving Systems Catalog Rev L 09/08 119

Antenna Network Accessories: Antenna Mounting Hardware
®
Antenna Mounting Hardware

Several methods for mounting antennas are available, depending on antenna location and desired height.
Eaves Mount Pair, Wall Mount Pair, Tripod Mount, P/N 199-008-00
P/N 199-012-00 P/N 199-011-00
Tower Mount, P/N 199-014-01
199-012-00 Adjustable 45–60 inches, heavy-duty, pair of
The antenna is engineered for eaves mounts. Use with up to 1.5-inch mast.
strength with Pre-Zinc tubing. Lag bolts included.
199-010-00 4-inch, pair of wall mounts. Lag bolts included.
It is pre-galvanized for long life, Use with up to 1.5-inch mast.
with baked aluminum paint.
199-011-00 7-inch, heavy-duty, pair of wall mounts. Lag
bolts included. Use with up to 1.75-inch mast.
Hardware is heat treated and
cadmium plated. Single bolt 199-008-00 3-foot, heavy duty, tripod mount. Use with up
holes make erection quick and to 1.75-inch mast.
easy. 199-013-00 Accessory pad kit for tripod mount. Includes
three pitch pads and six 2-inch by 1/4-inch lag
bolts.
199-014-01 Forty-two-foot antenna tower kit. Includes
three tower sections, a top section with
1.25-inch × 5-foot mast, one 12-inch
adjustable house bracket, one motor mount,
and all assembly hardware.
199-020-00 Tower section, 10-foot optional addition for
P/N 199-014-01
199-031-00 Spare tower top section
199-021-00 Tower 12-inch adjustable house bracket for
P/N 199-020-00
199-022-00 Tower hinged base for flat roof or ground
foundation. Towers must be bracketed or
guyed. For use with P/N 199-014-01.
199-023-00 Tower non-hinged base. For use with
P/N 199-014-01.
199-024-00 20–24 inch adjustable bracket for connecting
tower to building. Use with P/N 199-014-01.
199-025-00 24–33 inch adjustable bracket for connecting
tower to building. Use with P/N 199-014-01.

Antenna Network Accessories: Lightning Arrestor (Static Discharge Unit)

®
Lightning Arrestor (Static Discharge Unit)
Monaco’s Lightning Arrestor (static discharge unit) is

used with Radio Alarm Central Receiving Systems to
drain static charges from the antenna system, protecting
the electronic equipment. A Lightning Arrestor is
provided with the D-700 and D-500 Plus Radio Alarm
Central Receiving Systems.
The Lightning Arrestor uses a unique isolated ground
system that permits direct earth connection while
preventing arc energy from being coupled to the
equipment through the coaxial shields. It must be U
® L
grounded in accordance with NFPA 70 (NEC) Section

810-21.
A cartridge, which consists of two metal electrodes
sealed in a gas-filled ceramic cylinder, is the basis of
static discharge. A sufficient voltage across the cartridge
element causes an arc to form between the electrodes. Ordering Information
The electrodes act as voltage dependent switches,
capable of carrying large currents for brief periods of Part Number Description
time. Lightning pulses are discharged through the 198-007-01 Lightning arrestor kit. Includes lightning arrestor
arrestor cartridge to the grounding system. 198-006-00 in enclosure 081-076-01 and two
10-inch strips of Coax-Seal.
When regular VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio)
198-006-00 Lightning arrestor with PL-259 ends, and coax
measurements indicate a gradual lowering of the cable seal
breakdown voltage and insulation resistance, the
198-008-00 Lightning arrestor with N female end
lightning arrestor cartridge needs to be replaced. The
lightning arrestor design allows easy replacement of the 198-005-00 Replacement cartridge for lightning arrestor
cartridge in the field. The cartridge is installed in a 081-076-01 NEMA 3R rain-tight 8-inch × 8-inch × 6-inch
threaded hole and makes a solderless, pressure-fit enclosure for lightning arrestor
connection. No disassembly or disconnection from the 661-000-00 0.75-inch × 10-foot ground rod, copperweld
coaxial cable is necessary. 661-001-00 0.75-inch ground rod clamp, copperweld
The Lightning Arrestor is designed to protect against 164-004-00 Coax-Seal, 48’ long, package of four 12’ rolls
electromagnetic pulse (EMP) as well as lightning surge 164-004-03 Coax-Seal, 10" long
voltages. The design is based on the National
Communications Systems Technical Information
Bulletin 85-10 covering EMP protection for radio Specifications
communications equipment.
Insertion Loss < 0.1 dB
The Lightning Arrestor is connected to the coaxial cable
Frequency Range 0–3000 MHz
between the antenna and the BT, M-2/M-1, or
RFM 7000/5000. It may be located outside or inside the Mounting Bulkhead
building depending on the grounding system of the Protected Side Connector 50Ω Connector style depends
building. It must be installed as near as possible to the on arrestor
point where the coaxial cable enters the building. It may Surge Side Connector 50Ω Connector style depends
on arrestor
not be near combustible material nor in a hazardous
(classified) location as defined in NFPA 70 (NEC) Surge Pulse 5 kA @ 8/20µs waveform
Article 500. Throughput Voltage 150 Vpk
Turn-on Voltage +/– 600 V
Unit Impedance 50 Ω
VSWR 1.10:1
Reporting and Receiving Systems Catalog Rev L 09/08 127

Antenna Network Accessories: Lightning Arrestor (Static Discharge Unit)
®
Installation Diagrams
Typical lightning arrestor installation where building grounding system is accessible and adequate
Notes
1. Lightning arrestor to be connected to
main building ground per NFPA 70 (NEC)
Article 810-21.
2. Bond all conduit together and to ground

system with grounding bushings.
Minimum ground wire size is 10 AWG.
Lightning arrestor enclosure 3. For complete installation details, refer

to the installation manuals and applicable
codes and standards.
See note 2
Control
MDP BT
Panel
See Note 1
Building Grounding System
Typical lightning arrestor installation where lightning risk is high or the building grounding system is questionable
Notes
1. If risk of lightning is high (refer to
Mast: 1 EMT or rigid conduit NFPA 78, Appendix I), or the building
grounding system is questionable, an
Lightning arrestor
auxiliary lightning grounding electrode
with enclosure is recommended. Refer to NFPA 70,
Article 250.
7 inch wall Coaxial cable
mounts 2. For complete installation details, refer
1 inch
to the installation manuals and applicable
ground codes and standards.
clamp Detail
3. This diagram is for illustration purposes

COAX CABLE COAX CABLE
only. It does not reflect the way antenna
GROUND WIRE network equipment should be installed.
Not smaller than #10 copper
to building lightning/grounding
electrode system
(reference NFPA 70, Article 810)
#6 bond wire to building

grounding system
Lightning Grounding Electrode

See Note 1

®
TrueAlarm Analog Sensing
UL, ULC Listed; FM, CSFM, TrueAlarm Analog Sensors – Photoelectric,
and MEA (NYC) Approved* Ionization, and Heat; Compatible Bases and Accessories
Features
TrueAlarm® analog sensing provides digital
transmission of analog sensor values via
MAPNET II® or IDNet™, two-wire communications**
Fire alarm control panel provides:
x Individual sensitivity selection for each sensor
x Sensitivity monitoring that satisfies NFPA 72®
sensitivity testing requirements
x Peak value logging allowing accurate analysis for
sensitivity selection 4098-9714 TrueAlarm Photoelectric
Sensor Mounted in Base
x Automatic, once per minute individual sensor
calibration check that verifies sensor integrity
Description
x Automatic environmental compensation
x Display of sensitivity directly in percent per foot Digital Communication of Analog Sensing.
TrueAlarm analog sensors provide an analog
x Multi-stage alarm operation measurement that is digitally communicated to the host
x Ability to display and print detailed sensor control panel using Simplex addressable communications.
information in plain English language At the control panel, the data is analyzed and an average
Photoelectric smoke sensors: value is determined and stored. An alarm or other
abnormal condition is determined by comparing the
x Seven levels of sensitivity from 0.2% to 3.7% sensor’s present value against its average value and time.
Heat sensors:
Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each sensor’s
x Fixed temperature sensing average value provides a continuously shifting reference
x Rate-of-rise temperature sensing point. This software filtering process compensates for
environmental factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component
x Utility temperature sensing aging, providing an accurate reference for evaluating new
Ionization smoke sensors: activity. With this filtering, there is a significant reduction
x Three levels of sensitivity; 0.5%, 0.9% and 1.3% in the probability of false or nuisance alarms caused by
shifts in sensitivity, either up or down.
For use with Simplex®:
x 4010, 4020, 4100, 4100U, and 4120 Series control Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is
stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm
panels set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the
x Universal Transponders and 2120 TrueAlarm CDTs host control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as
equipped for MAPNET II operation the individual application requires.
Magnetic test feature Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Sensor alarm set points
Functional and architecturally styled chamber can be programmed for timed automatic sensitivity
enclosure: selection (such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive
during day). Control panel programming can also provide
x Louvered design enhances smoke capture by directing multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2%
flow to chamber level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a
x Entrance areas are minimally visible when ceiling 2.5% level may initiate an alarm.
mounted Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each
Optional accessories include remote LED alarm sensor base’s LED pulses to indicate communications
indicator and output relays with the panel. If the control panel determines that a
UL listed to Standard 268 sensor is in alarm, or that it is dirty or has some other type
of trouble, the details are annunciated at the control panel
* Refer to page 4 for ULC listing status. These products have been approved by the and that sensor base’s LED will be turned on steadily.
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California During a system alarm, the control panel will control the
Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings 7272-0026:218, 7271-0026:231, 7270-
0026:216, and 7300-0026:217 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning LEDs such that an LED indicating a trouble will return to
material presented in this document. It is subject to re-examination, revision, and pulsing to help identify the alarmed sensors.
possible cancellation. Accepted for use – City of New York Department of Buildings –
MEA35-93E. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex product ** TrueAlarm analog sensors are protected by one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. 5,155,468; 5,173,683; 5,400,014; 5,543,777; 5,710,541; D383,407; D388,352; D392,573.
are the property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. MAPNET II and IDNet addressable communications designs are protected by U.S. Patent
No. 4,796,025.
S4098-0019-9 9/2003
TrueAlarm Sensor Bases and Accessories Description
Sensor Base Features TrueAlarm sensor bases contain integral addressable
electronics that constantly monitor the status of the
Base mounted address selection:
detachable photoelectric, ionization, or heat sensors. Each
x Address remains with its programmed location sensor’s output is digitized and transmitted to the system
x Accessible from front (dipswitch under sensor) fire alarm control panel every four seconds.
Automatic identification provides default sensitivity Since TrueAlarm sensors use the same base, different
when substituting sensor types sensor types can be easily interchanged to meet specific
Integral red LED for power-on (pulsing), or alarm or location requirements. This feature also allows intentional
trouble (steady on) sensor substitution during building construction. When
Locking anti-tamper design conditions are temporarily dusty, instead of covering the
Magnetically operated functional test smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors
Mounts on standard outlet box may be installed without reprogramming the control
panel. Although the control panel will indicate an
Sensor Bases incorrect sensor type, the heat sensor will operate at a
4098-9792, Standard sensor base default sensitivity providing heat detection for building
4098-9789, Sensor base with wired connections for:
protection at that location.
x 2098-9808 Remote LED alarm indicator or Mounting Reference
4098-9822 relay (unsupervised)
4098-9791, Sensor base with supervised relay driver
output (not compatible with 2120 CDT): Electrical Box Requirements: (boxes are by others)
Without relay: 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep;
x Relay operation is programmable and can be manually single gang, 2" deep
operated from control panel With relay : 4" octagonal or 4" square, 1-1/2" deep,
x Use with remote mount 2098-9737 relay with 1-1/2" extension ring
x Also includes wired connections for remote LED 4" (102 mm) Square Box 4" (102 mm) Octagonal Box
alarm indicator or 4098-9822 relay Surface mount reference
Sensor Base Options

2098-9737, Remote or local mount supervised relay:
x DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power
limited rating of 3 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited 1-1/2" (38 mm)
rating of 3 A @ 120 VAC (requires external 24 VDC minimum box depth
Flush mount reference, mount even with final
coil power) surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess
4098-9822, LED Annunciation Relay:
2098-9737 Relay (mounts in 4098-9822 Relay (mounts
x Activates when base LED is on steady, indicating base electrical box or remotely) in base electrical box)
local alarm or trouble
x DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads, power
limited rating of 2 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited
rating of 1/2 A @ 120 VAC, (requires external
24 VDC coil power)
4098-9832, Adapter plate:
Relay Size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (3.75 cubic inches)
x Required for surface or semi-flush mounting to (64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm)
4” square electrical box and for surface mounting to
NOTE: Review total wire count, wire size, and accessories
4” octagonal box being wired to determine required box volume.
x Can be used for cosmetic retrofitting to existing 6-3/8”
diameter base product 6-3/8" (162 mm)
2098-9808, Remote red LED Alarm
Indicator: 4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required for
1/4" mounting to surface mounted boxes
x Mounts on single gang box ALARM (6.4 mm) and 4" square flush box
(shown in illustration to right)
4-7/8" (124 mm)
15/16"
(24 mm)
TrueAlarm Bases
4098-9789, -9791, & -9792
2 S4098-0019-9 9/2003
TrueAlarm Sensors 4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor
Features TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, pulsed
Sealed against rear air flow entry infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode
receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power
Interchangeable mounting
smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available
EMI/RFI shielded electronics for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per
Heat sensors: foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivity is selected and
x Selectable rate compensated, fixed temperature monitored at the fire alarm control panel.
sensing with or without rate-of-rise operation The sensor head design provides 360° smoke entry for
x Spacing distance between heat sensors: optimum response to smoke from any direction. A built-in
screen keeps insects from entering the smoke chamber.
Fixed Temp. FM Spacing, Either Fixed
Setting
UL Spacing
Temperature Setting
Due to its photoelectric operation, air velocity is not
normally a factor, except for impact on area smoke flow.
15 ft x 15 ft (4.6 m) fixed
135° F (57.2° C) 60 ft (18.3 m)
temperature only;
4-7/8" (124 mm)
30 ft x 30 ft (9.2 m) fixed
155° F (68° C) 40 ft (12.2 m)
temperature with rate-of-rise
Smoke Sensors: LED status indicator

2-1/8"
x Photoelectric or ionization technology sensing (54 mm)
x 360° smoke entry for optimum response
4098-9733 Heat Sensor

TrueAlarm heat sensors are self-restoring and provide rate 4098-9714 Photoelectric Sensor with Base
compensated, fixed temperature sensing, selectable with
or without rate-of-rise temperature sensing. Due to its 4098-9717 Ionization Sensor
small thermal mass, the sensor accurately and quickly TrueAlarm Ionization sensors use a single radioactive
measures the local temperature for analysis at the fire source with an outer sampling ionization chamber and an
alarm control panel. inner reference ionization chamber to provide stable
Rate-of-rise temperature detection is selectable at the operation under fluctuations in environmental conditions
control panel for either 15° F (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C) such as temperature and humidity. Smoke and invisible
per minute. Fixed temperature sensing is independent of combustion gases can freely penetrate the outer chamber.
rate-of-rise sensing and programmable to operate at With both chambers ionized by a small radioactive source
135° F (57.2° C) or 155° F (68° C). In a slow developing [Am 241 (Americium)], a very small current flows in the
fire, the temperature may not increase rapidly enough to circuit. The presence of particles of combustion will cause
operate the rate-of-rise feature. However, an alarm will be a change in the voltage ratio between chambers. This
initiated when the temperature reaches its rated fixed difference is measured by the electronics in the sensor
temperature setting. base and digitally transmitted back to the control panel for
processing.
TrueAlarm heat sensors can be programmed as a utility
device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range Three levels of sensitivity are available for each
from 32° F to 155° F (0° C to 68° C). This feature can ionization sensor: 0.5, 0.9, and 1.3% per foot of smoke
provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system obscuration.
problems. (Refer to specific panels for availability.)
4-7/8" (124 mm)
4-7/8" (124 mm)

LED status indicator
2-1/8"
LED status indicator (54 mm)
2-3/8"
(60 mm)
4098-9717 Ionization Sensor with Base
Application Reference
4098-9733 Heat Sensor with Base
Sensor locations should be determined only after careful
consideration of the physical layout and contents of the
WARNING: In most fires, hazardous levels of smoke area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire
and toxic gas can build up before a heat detection Alarm Code®. On smooth ceilings, smoke sensor spacing
device would initiate an alarm. In cases where Life of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide. For detailed
Safety is a factor, the use of smoke detection is highly application information, refer to 4098 Detectors, Sensors,
recommended. and Bases Application Manual (574-709).
3 S4098-0019-9 9/2003
!
UltraVoice® Remote Interface

Model: UVRI
Installation, Operation, and

Service Manual
255385
Rev. C3 0718
Printed in U.S.A.
© Copyright 2018 Federal Signal Corporation
!
!
!
1! TABLE!OF!CONTENTS!
!
Section! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Page!
!
1! TABLE!OF!CONTENTS!....................................................................................................!3!
2! SAFETY!MESSAGE!.........................................................................................................!6!
3! GENERAL!DESCRIPTION!................................................................................................!9!
3.1! Model!Number!Descriptions!.....................................................................................!10!
3.2! Recommended!Cables.............................................................................................!10!
3.3! UVRI!Part!Locations:................................................................................................!11!
3.4! Initial!Configuration!..................................................................................................!13!
3.5! Programming!Methods!.............................................................................................!18!
3.6! Status!Monitoring!.....................................................................................................!18!
4! SPECIFICATIONS!..........................................................................................................!19!
4.1! Electrical!..................................................................................................................!19!
4.2! Power!Supply!...........................................................................................................!19!
4.3! Battery!......................................................................................................................!20!
4.4! Relay!Output!............................................................................................................!20!
4.5! Control!Board!(2005698901)!....................................................................................!20!
4.6! Controller!Front!Panel!Controls,!Jacks,!Switches!and!Indicators!.............................!21!
4.7! Motherboard!(2005320)!...........................................................................................!26!
4.8! Environmental!..........................................................................................................!28!
4.9! Physical!....................................................................................................................!28!
5! UVRI!OPERATION!.........................................................................................................!29!
5.1! Hardware!General!Description!.................................................................................!29!
5.2! Manual!Activation!.....................................................................................................!29!
5.3! Local!Public!Address................................................................................................!30!
5.4! Relay!Output!............................................................................................................!30!
5.5! Sensor!Inputs!...........................................................................................................!30!
5.6! Two9Way!Status!Monitoring!.....................................................................................!31!
5.7! Quiet!Test!................................................................................................................!32!
5.8! DC!Power!Supply!.....................................................................................................!32!
6! SYSTEM!PLANNING!......................................................................................................!33!
6.1! Control!Unit!..............................................................................................................!33!
7! INSTALLATION!...............................................................................................................!34!
7.1! UVRI!Controller!Installation!Reference!Drawings!....................................................!34!
7.2! General!Mounting!Guidelines!...................................................................................!37!
7.3! UVRI!Installation!Material!List!and!Installation!Guidelines!.......................................!37!
7.4! Installer!Supplied!UVRI!Electrical!Installation!Material!List!......................................!41!
7.5! Electrical!Connections..............................................................................................!42!
7.6! Remote!System!Sense!Input!...................................................................................!44!
7.7! Landline!Control!Connection!....................................................................................!45!
7.8! Ethernet!Connection!................................................................................................!45!
7.9! Antenna!Types!.........................................................................................................!45!
3!
!
7.10! Remote!Mounted!Magnetic!Base!Antenna!Installation.............................................!45!
8! PRE9OPERATION!CHECKOUT!AND!TEST!...................................................................!46!
8.1! Visual!Inspection!......................................................................................................!46!
8.2! Pre9Operation!Checkout!..........................................................................................!46!
8.3! Radio!Transceiver!Adjustment!Procedure!................................................................!47!
8.4! Control!and!Status!Monitoring!..................................................................................!48!
9! MAINTENANCE!..............................................................................................................!50!
9.2! Troubleshooting!.......................................................................................................!53!
10! OPTIONS!....................................................................................................................!54!
10.1! Radio!Control!...........................................................................................................!54!
10.2! Digital!Voice!Recording!............................................................................................!54!
10.3! Installation!of!User!Supplied!Radio!Receivers!.........................................................!54!
10.4! Model!UVRI9IP!.........................................................................................................!55!
11! Final!Assembly!Drawing!and!Parts!List!.......................................................................!60!
!
!
4!
!
TABLE!OF!FIGURES!
!
Figure!3.1!9!UVRI!Inside!View!................................................................................................!11!
Figure!3.2!9!UVRI!Parts!Layout!..............................................................................................!12!
Figure!4.1!9!Motherboard!Outline!Drawing!.............................................................................!27!
Figure!7.1!9!Typical!UVRI!Installation!Drawing!.......................................................................!34!
Figure!7.2!9!UVRI!Cabinet!Dimensional!Outline!Drawing!.......................................................!35!
Figure!7.3!9!UVRI!Wiring!Diagram!..........................................................................................!36!
Figure!7.4!9!UVRI!Remote!System!Sense,!Audio!Output!and!DC!Power!Connections!..........!44!
Figure!7.5!9!Relay!Output!.......................................................................................................!44!
Figure!8.1!9!Field!Test!Data!Sheet!.........................................................................................!49!
Figure!9.1!9!UVRI!Motherboard!Connections!.........................................................................!52!
Figure!9.2!9!UVRI!Battery!Location!and!Cover!Plate!Mounting!Screws!..................................!52!
Figure!11.1!9!UVRI!Final!Assembly!and!Parts!List!.................................................................!60!
5!
Federal!Signal!UltraVoice!Remote!Interface!(UVRI)!
Installation,!Operation,!and!Service!Manual!
!
2! SAFETY!MESSAGE!
It!is!important!to!follow!all!instructions!shipped!with!this!product.!This!device!is!to!be!
installed!by!trained!personnel!who!are!thoroughly!familiar!with!the!country!electric!codes!
and!will!follow!these!guidelines!as!well!as!local!codes.!
!
Listed!below!are!important!safety!instructions!and!precautions!you!should!follow.!
!
Important!Notice!
!
Federal!Signal!reserves!the!right!to!make!changes!to!devices!and!specifications!
detailed!in!the!manual!at!any!time!in!order!to!improve!reliability,!function!or!design.!The!
information!in!this!manual!has!been!carefully!checked!and!is!believed!to!be!accurateb!
however,!no!responsibility!is!assumed!for!any!inaccuracies!
!
PUBLICATIONS!
!
Federal!Signal!recommends!the!following!publications!from!the!Federal!Emergency!
Management!Agency!for!assistance!with!planning!an!outdoor!warning!system:!
!
•! The!“Outdoor!Warning!Guide”!(CPG!1917)!
•! “Civil!Preparedness,!Principles!of!Warning”!(CPG!1914)!
•! FEMA9REP91,!Appendix!3!(Nuclear!Plant!Guideline)!
•! FEMA9REP910!(Nuclear!Plant!Guideline)!
!
PLANNING!
!
•! If!suitable!warning!equipment!is!not!selected,!the!installation!site!for!the!siren!is!not!
selected!properly!or!the!siren!is!not!installed!properly,!it!may!not!produce!the!
intended!optimum!audible!warning.!Follow!Federal!Emergency!Management!Agency!
(FEMA)!recommendations.!
!
•! If!sirens!are!not!activated!in!a!timely!manner!when!an!emergency!condition!exists,!
they!cannot!provide!the!intended!audible!warning.!It!is!imperative!that!
knowledgeable!people,!who!are!provided!with!the!necessary!information,!are!
available!at!all!times!to!authorize!the!activation!of!the!sirens.!
!
•! When!sirens!are!used!out!of!doors,!people!indoors!may!not!be!able!to!hear!the!
warning!signals.!Separate!warning!devices!or!procedures!may!be!needed!to!
effectively!warn!people!indoors.!
!
•! The!sound!output!of!sirens!is!capable!of!causing!permanent!hearing!damage.!To!
prevent!excessive!exposure,!carefully!plan!siren!placement,!post!warnings,!and!
restrict!access!to!areas!near!sirens.!
!
6!
!
•! Activating!the!sirens!may!not!result!in!people!taking!the!desired!actions!if!those!to!be!
warned!are!not!properly!trained!about!the!meaning!of!siren!sounds.!Siren!users!
should!follow!FEMA!recommendations!and!instruct!those!to!be!warned!of!correct!
actions!to!be!taken.!
!
•! After!installation,!service,!or!maintenance,!test!the!siren!system!to!confirm!that!it!is!
operating!properly.!Test!the!system!regularly!to!confirm!that!it!will!be!operational!in!
an!emergency.!
!
•! If!future!service!and!operating!personnel!do!not!have!these!instructions!to!refer!to,!
the!siren!system!may!not!provide!the!intended!audible!warning!and!service!
personnel!may!be!exposed!to!death,!permanent!hearing!loss,!or!other!bodily!injury.!
File!these!instructions!in!a!safe!place!and!refer!to!them!periodically.!Give!a!copy!of!
these!instructions!to!new!recruits!and!trainees.!Also!give!a!copy!to!anyone!who!is!
going!to!service!or!repair!the!siren.!
!
!
INSTALLATION!&!SERVICE!
!
•! Electrocution!or!severe!personal!injury!can!occur!when!performing!various!
installation!and!service!functions!such!as!making!electrical!connections,!drilling!
holes,!or!lifting!equipment.!Therefore!only!experienced!electricians!should!install!this!
product!in!accordance!with!national,!state!and!any!other!electrical!codes!having!
jurisdiction.!Perform!all!work!under!the!direction!of!the!installation!or!service!crew!
safety!foreman.!
!
•! The!sound!output!of!sirens!is!capable!of!causing!permanent!hearing!damage.!To!
prevent!excessive!exposure,!carefully!plan!siren!placement,!post!warnings!and!
restrict!access!to!areas!near!the!sirens.!Sirens!may!be!operated!from!remote!control!
points.!Whenever!possible,!disconnect!all!siren!power!including!batteries!before!
working!near!the!siren.!
!
•! After!installation!or!service,!test!the!siren!system!to!confirm!that!it!is!operating!
properly.!Test!the!system!regularly!to!confirm!that!it!will!be!operational!in!an!
emergency.!
!
•! If!future!service!personnel!do!not!have!these!warnings!and!all!other!instructions!
shipped!with!the!equipment!to!refer!to,!the!siren!system!may!not!provide!the!
intended!audible!warning!and!service!personnel!may!be!exposed!to!death,!
permanent!hearing!loss,!or!other!bodily!injury.!File!these!instructions!in!a!safe!place!
and!refer!to!them!periodically.!Give!a!copy!of!these!instructions!to!new!recruits!and!
trainees.!Also,!give!a!copy!to!anyone!who!is!going!to!service!or!repair!the!sirens.!
!
!
!
!
7!
!
!
OPERATION!
!
Failure!to!understand!the!capabilities!and!limitations!of!your!siren!system!could!result!in!
permanent!hearing!loss,!other!serious!injuries!or!death!to!persons!too!close!to!the!
sirens!when!you!activate!them!or!to!those!you!need!to!warn.!Carefully!read!and!
thoroughly!understand!all!safety!notices!in!this!manual!and!all!operations9related9items!
in!all!instruction!manuals!shipped!with!equipment.!Thoroughly!discuss!all!contingency!
plans!with!those!responsible!for!warning!people!in!your!community,!company,!or!
jurisdiction.!
WARNING!
!
Read!and!understand!the!information!contained!
in!this!manual,!before!attempting!to!install!or!!
service!this!product.!
!
Pay!careful!attention!to!the!following!notices!located!on!the!equipment.!
!
A.!NOTICES!M!EXTERNALLY!PLACED!
!
!
!
!
!
B.!NOTICESMINTERNALLY!PLACED!
!
! ! !
8!
!
!
3! GENERAL!DESCRIPTION!
!
The!UltraVoice!Remote!Interface!(UVRI)!provides!remote!control!and!status!monitoring!
of! Fire! Alarm! and! PA! systems! to! create! a! fully! integrated! indoor! and! outdoor! Mass!
Notification!System!when!used!with!the!Federal!Commander!Digital!Control!System.!The!
UVRI! has! a! built9in! radio! transceiver! interface,! an! RS232! port,! and! optional! ethernet,!
satellite,! and! telephone! line! interfaces! for! tying! into! communication! networks.! Built9in!
warning!tone!generation,!live!voice!and!up!to!8!minutes!of!local!digital!voice!storage!is!
included!in!all!models.!!
!
The! UVRI! is! housed! in! a! non9metalic! indoor/outdoor! NEMA4X! /! UL50! rated! enclosure!
suitable!for!wall!mounting.!
!
Features:!
•! 12VDC!Operation!
•! Seven!standard!warning!signals!
•! Single!tone,!Two9tone,!DTMF,!EAS!and!MSK!decoders!for!remote!siren!control!
•! Integrated!MSK!radio!modem!with!1289bit!encryption!over!radio!or!wire!!
•! Local!pushbutton!control!for!7!control!functions!
•! Local!microphone!input!
•! Up!to!8!minutes!of!digital!voice!storage!
•! Integrated!radio!modem!
•! RS232!port!
•! 29Tone!and!DTMF!decoders!
•! Radio!Transceiver!option!
•! Ethernet!interface!option!
•! 29Way!Satellite!option!
•! Scrolling!Message!Display!option!
•! Dedicated!telephone!line!option!
•! Programmable!radio!receiver!for!Low!Band,!VHF,!or!UHF!(optional)!
•! Windows®!based!siren!programming!software!(optional)!
•! Diagnostic!LEDs!
•! Quiet!Test!Diagnostics!–!Checks!tone!generator!with!20KHz!tone!
•! Remotely!adjustable!line!level!audio!output!
•! DPDT!10!amp!relay!output!
•! Battery!backup!with!built9in!power!supply/battery!charger!and!low!voltage!cutoff!
•! Activation!Test!–!Monitors!tone!generator!and!remote!contact!closure!input!
•! Stackable!siren!functions!enable!user!pre9defined!warning!scenarios!
•! Programmable!over!wireless!radio!channel!using!SFCDWARE!
•! NEMA4X!/!UL50!rated!enclosure!with!padlock!hasp!
9!
3.1! Model!Number!Descriptions!
!
All!UVRI!models!are!set!up!for!29way!control!and!status!monitoring!using!the!Federal!
Commander!Digital!Control!system.!All!models!include!8!minutes!of!digital!voice!
storage.!Custom!digital!voice!recording!requires!a!model!DVR.!!
!
!
!CONTROLLER!OPTIONS!! !!!!!!!UVRI!MODEL!#!
NO!RADIO!(RF)! UVRI!
!UHF!BAND!Transceiver! UVRIU!
!HIGH!BAND!Transceiver! UVRIH!
Landline!Control! UVRI9LL!
Ethernet!Control! UVRI9IP!
Satellite!Control! UVRI9ISAT!
!
Option!Exclusions:!
!
The!UVRI9IP!and!UVRI9SAT!options!cannot!be!used!with!any!other!options!listed!above!
at!the!same!time.!
3.2! Recommended!Cables!
When!equipped!with!a!Vertex!Radio!(Model!VX92100)!in!your!two9way!RTUs,!Federal!
Signal!recommends!purchasing!the!following!cables!for!computer!programming:!
!
•! RIB!FIF912A!USB!interface!cable!
•! CT9104A!interface!cable!
Use!the!RIB!FIF912A!USB!cable!to!connect!to!your!computer.!Use!the!CT9104A!cable!
to!connect!from!the!RIB!FIF912A!USB!cable!to!the!radio.!
!
GENERAL!DESCRIPTION!
10!
3.3! UVRI!Part!Locations:!
!
!
!
Figure!3.1!M!UVRI!Inside!View!
! !
11!
!
! Power!Supply!
Transceiver!
Out!
120VAC!Sensor!Relay!
Fuses (240VAC!w/9240!option)!
!
AC!Input!
Local!Activation!Buttons!
Audio!Out!
OuytOut! Antenna!Bulkhead!
BiulBulkhead!
Relay!Output! Ground!
OupOutput! Lug!
!!!!! !
Figure!3.2!M!UVRI!Parts!Layout!
!
12!
3.4! Initial!Configuration!
!
Each!modular!UVRI!controller!contains!the!following!configuration!parameters!that!must!
be! initially! configured.! Additional! programming! configuration! is! required! before! placing!
the! UVRI! into! service.! Refer! to! the! programming! software! reference! manual! for!
programming!information.!
!
1.! Unit!Type!
2.! RF!Frequency!
3.! Security!Key!
4.! 1289bit!Encryption!Key!
5.! Unit!Address!(see!below)!
6.! Configuration!Jumper!Settings!
!
3.4.1! Unit!Type!
!
The!UVRI!unit!type!is!used!to!tell!the!front9end!control!system!how!to!communicate!with!
the! UVRI.! This! is! configured! within! the! Federal! Commander! software! and! sent! to! the!
UVRI.!
!
3.4.2! RF!Frequency!
!
The!radio!transceiver!must!be!programmed!with!the!RF!frequency(s),!channel!spacing!
and!power!output!before!placing!into!service.!These!settings!will!be!pre9set!at!the!factory!
if!the!requirements!are!provided!with!the!order.`!
!
If! a! 19way! radio! receiver! is! used! with! the! UVRI,! the! RF!frequency! must! be! configured!
using!Federal!Signal!configuration!software!and!sent!to!the!UVRI!to!put!the!receiver!on!
the! correct! RF! frequency.! The! frequency! must! stay! within! the! correct! RF! band! for! the!
model!purchased.!The!receiver!will!need!re9alignment!if!the!frequency!is!changed!from!
the!factory!provided!setting.!!
!
3.4.3! Security!Key!!
!
The!Security!Key!is!a!unique!number!assigned!to!the!system!that!prevents!nearby!
systems!operating!on!the!same!RF!frequency!from!interfering.!Like!the!1289bit!
encryption!key,!the!Security!Key!is!programmed!during!the!flashing!of!the!
microprocessor!and!must!match!the!key!used!at!the!control!point.!All!sites!in!the!system!
must!use!the!same!security!key.!The!exception!is!a!key!value!of!65535!(the!default),!
defined!as!an!“open”!system!and!will!communicate!with!all!encoders!regardless!of!the!
encoder’s!key!setting.!
13!
3.4.4! 128Mbit!Encryption!Key!
!
1289bit!data!encryption!provides!security!against!malicious!operation!or!monitoring.!The!
1289bit!key!is!programmed!during!the!flashing!of!the!microprocessor!and!must!match!
the!encoder!(SS2000+!or!SFCDWARE)!being!used!to!activate!the!unit.!A!key!value!of!
zero!disables!1289bit!encryption!and!must!be!used!if!the!encoder!does!not!support!1289
bit!encryption.!All!sites!in!the!system!must!use!the!same!encryption!key.!
!
3.4.5! Unit!Address!!
!
Site!Address!Switch:!
!
The!unit!address!sets!the!UVRI!site!number!and!is!used!to!numerically!identify!the!site!
within!the!system!network.!The!Unit!Address!is!a!three9digit!number!with!a!range!of!0019
1023.!The!unit!address!is!set!via!dip!switch!S1.!S1!Off!position!indicates!active!position.!
Add!binary!active!switch!positions!to!get!ID!address.!!
!
! !
Switch!! ! !
No.! 1! 2! 3! 4! 5! 6! 7! 8! 9! 10!
! !
Binary!! ! !
No.! 1! 2! 4! 8! 16! 32! 64! 128! 256! 512!
!!
Example:!The!illustration!above!shows!Switch!numbers!1,!2!&!3!in!the!active!position.!
The!switch!in!the!example!above!represents!the!binary!numbers!1,!2!&!4,!which!when!
added,!would!equal!unit!address!7.!
!
Note:!The!address!must!be!set!to!address!(one)!to!program!a!controller!board!to!program!
a! DTMF,! non9digital! unit.! When! the! programming! is! completed,! change! the! dip! switch!
setting!to!the!actual!site!address.!Programming!details!are!in!the!Commander!software!
manual.! The! site! address! is! stored! when! power! is! applied! to! the! controller.! If! the! site!
14!
address!is!changed,!cycle!power!to!the!control!board!by!removing!the!connector!at!JP3!
on!the!motherboard!for!five!seconds.!
3.4.6! Control!Board!Configuration!Jumper!Settings!
!
JP12!9!Short!to!force!radio!Carrier!Detect!of!External!transceiver!1!
•! Jumper!out!=!Default!Setting!
!
!
JP9!9!External!Transceiver!#1!VOX!(Audio!level!dependent!Carrier!Detect)!
•! Jumper!OFF!=!VOX!Disabled!(Default!setting)!
•! Jumper!ON!=!Carrier!detect!in!<!20mS!when!received!audio!exceeds!15%!
deviation.!
!
!
JP10!9!Dual!receiver!priority!jumper:!
•! Jumper!"EXT"!side!to!give!external!receiver!#1!priority!
•! Jumper!"INT/EXT2"!side!to!give!on9board!receiver!or!external!receiver!#2!priority!!
•! Jumper!neither!side,!first!carrier!detect!has!priority!
! ! ! ! ! !
!
JP7!–!600!Ohm!Audio!Output!
•! Jumper!pins!2!and!3,!Output!radio!transmit!audio!(Default!Setting)!
•! Jumper!pins!1!and!2,!Output!siren!audio!
!
!
JP6!–!600!Ohm!Audio!Input!
•! Jumper!pins!2!and!3,!Input!audio!to!decoders!as!from!a!receiver!(Default!Setting)!
•! Jumper!pins!1!and!2,!Input!audio!to!Amps!when!600!Ohm!PTT!is!asserted.!
!
!
!
!
!
15!
3.4.7! User!Programs!
!
The!UVRI!has!the!capacity!to!store!up!to!fifty!(50)!user!programs.!Each!user!program!
contains!the!following!elements:!
!
1)! Optional!DTMF!Activation!Code!!
2)! Optional!Two9Tone!Activation!Code!
3)! Optional!EAS!Event!Code!
4)! POCSAG!code!
5)! Digital!activation!Code!
6)! List!of!up!to!20!functions!
!
The!ability!to!assign!more!than!one!function!to!each!activation!code!or!user!program!is!a!
new! feature! not! previously! found! in! electronic! sirens.! This! allows! the! user! to! run! a!
sequence! of! functions! without! sending! additional! activation! commands,! greatly!
enhancing! flexibility! while! reducing! operator! involvement! and! communication! channel!
traffic.!!
!
3.4.8! Available!Functions:!!
!
Arm!
Disarm!
Report!
Master!Reset!
Cancel!
PA!Output!
Quiet!Test!
Low!Power!Mode!
Hi!Power!Mode!
Zone!A!(Not!used!with!UVRI)!
Zone!B!(Not!used!with!UVRI)!
Zone!C!(Not!used!with!UVRI)!
Zone!D!(Not!used!with!UVRI)!
Wail!
Pulsed!Wail!
Alt!Wail!
Steady!
Pulsed!Steady!
Alt!Steady!
Auxiliary!(Chime)!
Delay!
Digital!Voice!(19250)!
Amp/Audio!Zone!Control!(Not!used!with!UVRI)!
16!
Power!
Report!
Record!PA!Message!
Play!Recorded!PA!Message!
RelayN!On!(Not!used!with!UVRI)!
RelayN!Off!(Not!used!with!UVRI)!
!
3.4.9! Low!Power!Mode,!Hi!Power!Mode!
!
This!causes!the!siren!to!operate!at!a!greatly!reduced!volume!level.!Upon!activation!of!a!
user!program,!the!siren!defaults!to!Hi!(normal)!volume!level.!This!command!must!follow!
an! ARM! command.! Reduced! volume! mode! will! remain! in! effect! for! all! subsequent!
functions!in!a!user!program!that!follow!the!Low9Power!function!or!until!a!Hi9Power!function!
occurs!or!an!ARM!command!is!sent.!
!
3.4.10!Delay!!
!
The!delay!function!causes!the!siren!to!pause!(wait)!for!2!9!512!seconds!before!starting!
the!next!function!of!the!user!program!currently!running.!When!selecting!the!delay!function,!
the!user!will!be!prompted!to!enter!the!desired!delay!time!in!seconds.!A!default!delay!of!4!
seconds!is!present!between!functions,!without!adding!a!delay.!
!
3.4.11!Power!Level!
!
The!Power!function!allows!the!user!to!control!the!volume!level.!The!volume!can!be!
adjusted!from!0!to!920!dB!in!1!dB!steps.!Reduced!volume!mode!will!remain!in!effect!for!
all!subsequent!functions!in!a!user!program!that!follow!the!Power!function,!or!until!
another!Power!function!occurs,!or!an!ARM!command!is!sent.
17!
3.5! Programming!Methods!
!
There!are!two!methods!of!entering!and!reviewing!the!user!programming!information!in!an!
UltraVoice!electronic!siren!controller:!
!
1.! FSPWARE! Windows®! based! programming! software! for! 29tone! and! DTMF!
controlled!systems.!This!software!requires!a!direct!connection!between!the!siren!
and!the!computer’s!RS232!port.!
!
2.! SFCDWARE!Windows®!based!digital!control!and!status!monitoring!software.!This!
software!may!be!used!over!a!landline!or!wireless!radio!channel!as!well!as!over!an!
RS232!port.!!
!
Detailed!information!on!the!operation!of!the!Windows®!program!is!beyond!the!scope!of!
this!document!and!can!be!found!in!the!software’s!Help!file.!!
!
3.6! Status!Monitoring!
!
The!UVRI!monitors!various!diagnostic!conditions!for!reporting!back!to!a!central!monitoring!
station!using!optional!control!and!status!monitoring!hardware!and!software.!
!
3.6.1! Items!monitored!
Siren!Type!
Function!State!(code!running)!
Unit!ID!
Audio!A*!
Audio!B*!
Master!Current!/!Remote!System!Operation*!
Battery!Voltage!
Charger!
AC!Power!
Control!Box!Intrusion!
False!Alarm/Local!Activation*!
*Latched! Items! 99! remain! set! until! reception! of! a! Reset! command! or! another!
function!is!run.!
!
Status! information! is! transmitted! either! as! a! DTMF! or! FSK! data! string! over! the!
communications! channel! and! as! an! ASCII! string! over! the! RS232! port.! Report! back!
transmission!will!occur!when!one!of!two!conditions!exist:!
!
1.! Reception!of!a!REPORT!command!!!!!!or!
!
2.! One!of!the!asynchronous!status!conditions!changes!state.!
!
18!
4! SPECIFICATIONS!
!
4.1! Electrical!!
!
Battery!Voltage! On!at!11.5!VDC!/!off!at!10!VDC,!
13.7!volts!(nom.)!
!
! Battery!Current! ! ! ! ! <!80!mA.!standby!current,!
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! <!120!mA!during!a!function!
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! <7A!during!radio!transmit!
! Stand!By!Time!(with!minimum!
59minute!full!signal!reserve)! ! ! Greater!than!24!hours!!
(With!radio!transceiver,!10!W,!
8!Tx!/!day)!
4.2! Power!Supply!
! !
! AC!Input! ! ! ! ! ! 889264!VAC,!50960!Hz,!!
! !
! Input!Current!(115/230!VAC)! ! ! 2.2/1.2!A!
! !
! DC!Output! ! ! ! ! ! 13.5916.5VDC!(14VDC!Nom.),!7A!
! !
! Immunity! ! ! ! ! ! IEC610009492,93,94,95,96,98,911!
! !
! Conducted/Radiated!EMI! ! ! ! EN55011/EN550229B,!FCC9B!
! !
! Terminal!Block!Wiring! ! ! ! 14922!AWG!
! !
! Terminal!Block!Torque! ! ! ! 191.4!Nm!torque!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
19!
4.3! Battery!
!
! Rating:! ! ! ! ! ! 12!V,!12!A/H!
! !
Type:! PowerSonic!PS129120l!Absorbed!
Glass!Matt!Valve!Regulated!Lead!
Acid!(AGM!9!VRLA)!
!
CAUTION:!!Substituting!batteries!may!be!hazardous!and!will!void!warranty.!!
Use!specified!batteries!only.!
!
4.4! Relay!Output!
!
Contacts!! ! ! ! ! ! DPDT,!28!VDC,!277!VAC,!10!A!!
4.5! Control!Board!(2005698M01)!
4.5.1! Serial!&!I2C!Ports!
!
! Serial!Port!Protocol! ! ! ! ! RS232C!1200,N,8,1!
! I2C!Port!Protocol! ! ! ! ! Philips!Standard!I2C!
4.5.2! Signaling!Formats!
!
! Number!of!codes! ! ! ! ! Up!to!50!activation!codes!maximum!
!
Number!of!Functions!allowed!stacked! ! Up!to!20!
! under!each!code! !
!
!
! Two9Tone!Sequential!or!Single!Tone! ! 282!Hz!9!3000!Hz!
0.5!sec!(A)!9!.25!sec!(B)!minimum!
to!8!sec!maximum!
!
! DTMF!! ! ! ! ! ! 3!to!12!digits!standard!
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 50!ms/50!ms!timing!or!greater!
FSK!
Baud!rate! ! ! ! ! 1200!bps!
Modem!type! ! ! ! ! MSK!(minimal!shift!key)!
Mark!frequency! ! ! ! 1200!Hz!
Space!frequency! ! ! ! 1800!Hz!
Error!checking! ! ! ! 16!bit!CRC!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
20!
EAS! ! ! ! ! ! ! AFSK,!520.83!baud
! Modem!Tones! ! ! ! 2083.3!Hz!and!1562.5!Hz!
!
POCSAG!
Supports!Binary!frequency!shift!keyed,!512!Baud!numeric!messages.!
!
4.6! Controller!Front!Panel!Controls,!Jacks,!Switches!and!Indicators!
!
4.6.1! Controls:!
!
DV!GAIN! Internal!Digital!Voice!Level!sufficient!to!drive!
TP3!or!TP4!into!clipping!
!
TX!GAINs! Transmitted!Audio!outputs!adjustable!from!!
50!mV!to!1!Vpp!
!
! EXTERNAL!REC!GAINs! Received!Audio!Level!inputs!300!mV!to!3!Vpp! !
! !
! MIC!GAIN! Local! PA! Level! range! sufficient! to! drive! amplifiers!
into!clipping!w/50!mV!nominal!input!level!
4.6.2! Jacks:!
! ! !
! MIC! ! ! ! ! 10!k!ohms!input!impedance,!! ! !
! ! ! ! ! ! 50!mV!nominal!input!level!
! ! !
! External!Transceivers! ! External!Transceiver!Connectors!Pins!!
Upper!and!Lower:!!!!
1!! RX!Audio!in,!300!mVpp!to!3!Vpp!!
2!! TX!Audio!out,!50!mVpp to!3!Vpp
3!! Carrier!Detect,!<!1!VDC!for!active!!
4!! PTT,!Active!low,!will!sink!500!mA!max.
5,7!! 8!VDC!for!Radio,!1.0!Amps!max.!!
6,8!! Ground,!1.5!Amps!max.!Current
!
! !
Serial!Port!9!Lower! ! ! 8!Pin!Serial!Port:!
2!! Digital!Receive!/!Serial!Port!Not!!!!
3!! TX!Data!!!!
4!! RX!Data!!!!
5!! Ground!!!
6!! SCK!Microcontroller!Programming!Line!!!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
21!
7!! Microcontroller!Reset
!
Serial!Port!9!Upper! ! ! 8!Pin!Auxiliary!Serial!Port:!
3! TX!Data!!!!
4!! RX!Data!!!!
5!! Ground!!!
!
! I2C! ! ! ! 5!volts!peak9to9peak!+/9!1!volt!input!! ! !
! ! ! ! ! 5!volts!DC!+/9!.2!volts!250!mA!!! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! Ground!250!mA!maximum!sink! !
! !
4.6.3! Manual!Activation!Switches:! !
! ! ! ! ! QTY!8,!activate!with!a!hold!time!>0.50!seconds!
!
4.6.4! Indicators:!
!
! RXD! ! ! ! Receive!Serial!Data!&!receipt!of!! ! ! !
! ! ! ! ! radio!channel!modulation!
!
! TXD! ! ! ! Transmit!Serial!Data!&!DTMF!&!Digital!
!
! AUDIO!A! ! ! Audio!present!on!Channel!A!
!
! AUDIO!B! ! ! Audio!present!on!Channel!B!!
!
! ARM! ! ! ! Unit!Armed!indicator!
!
! PA! ! ! ! Public!Address!mode!indicator!
!
! CPU! ! ! ! Microprocessor!Heartbeat!
!
! CARRIER! ! ! RF!Carrier!indicator!on!w/carrier!present!
!
RECEIVE!LEVEL! ! 3!stage!LED!bar!graph!
!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
22!
4.6.5! Control!Unit!Connector!Configuration!
!
! Connectors!for!2005698M01!PCB!
! CONNECTOR!!!
DESIGNATION!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! PURPOSE!!!!!!!! ! !
J2! ! ! ! Microphone!jack!
1! k!!input!impedance,!
50!mVP9P nominal!input!level.
!
! JP1! ! ! ! microSD!FLASH!card!holder!
1! NC!
2! Slave!Select!Not!
3! Master!Out!/!Slave!In!
4! Switched!3.3V!power!
5! Serial!Clock!
6! Ground!
7! Master!In!/!Slave!Out!
8! NC!
!
JP4! ! ! ! Options!Connector:!
! ! ! ! ! ! 1! microcontroller!Input!
! ! ! ! ! ! 2! Ground! !!
!
JP3! ! ! ! On9Board!Receiver!Module!Connector!Pins:!!!!
1!! Ground!
2!! +8!VDC!
3!! Clock!
4! Data!!!!
5!! Latch!Enable!
6!! Carrier!Detect!Not!
7!! De9Emphasized!Receive!Audio!
8!! Flat!Receive!Audio!
!
JP4! ! ! ! SINAD!Sensor!Input!Pins:!
! ! ! ! ! ! 1! Ground!
! ! ! ! ! ! 2! Sensor!Input!
!
JP5! ! ! ! Backplane!
48!pin!EPT!male!card!edge!connector!
!
JP6! ! ! ! 600!Ohm!Input!Configuration!Jumper!Pins:!!
293!!!!! 600!Ohm!audio!in!to!receiver!decoders!!!
192!!!!! Audio!from!600!Ohm!sent!to!Amps!
when!600!Ohm!PTT!is!closed!
!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
23!
JP7!! ! ! ! 600!Ohm!Output!Configuration!Jumper!Pins:!
! ! ! ! ! 192!! Output!siren!audio!
! ! ! ! ! ! 293! Output!radio!transmit!audio!
!
! JP8!! ! ! ! CTCSS!Connector!Pins:!!!!
1!! RX!Audio!in!!
2!! Ground!!!!
3!! 8!VDC!for!CTCSS!board!!!
4!! Audio!Switch!!!!
5!! TX!CTCSS!tone!
!
! JP9! ! ! ! Transceiver!#1!VOX!Jumper!
! ! ! ! ! ! Jumpered!to!use!VOX!for!Carrier!Detect!
!
JP10! ! ! ! Dual!receiver!priority!jumper!
Jumper!"EXT"!side!to!give!external!receiver!#1!priority!
! Jumper!"INT/EXT2"!side!to!give!on9board!receiver!or!
!external!receiver!#2!priority.!
! ! ! ! ! Jumper!neither!side,!first!carrier!detect!has!priority!
!
JP11! ! ! ! Jumpered!when!SINAD!option!is!used!
!
JP12! ! ! ! Short!to!force!Carrier!Detect!of!External!transceiver!1!
!
JP13! ! ! ! External!Transceiver!Connector!Pins!!
Upper!and!Lower:!!
1!! RX!Audio!in!
Receive!audio!level!for!300!m!VP9P!to!3!!
VP9P!to!make!1!VP9P!at!TP16!
2!! TX!Audio!out!
50!mVP9P!to!3!VP9P!
3!! Carrier!Detect!!
<!1!VDC!for!active!!
4!! PTT!!
Active!low,!will!sink!500!mA!max.
5,7!! 12!VDC!for!Radio!!
+/9!0.2!Volts,!1.0!Amps!max.!
6,8!! Ground!
1.5!Amps!max.!Current!capacity
!
!
!
!
!
!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
24!
P19Lower! ! ! 8!Pin!Serial!Port:!
2! Digital!Receive!/!Serial!Port!Not!
3!! TX!Data!!!!
4!! RX!Data!!!!
5!! Ground!!!
6!! SCK!Microcontroller!Programming!Line!!!
7!! Microcontroller!Reset
!
P19Upper! ! ! 8!Pin!Auxiliary!Serial!Port:!
3!! TX!Data!
4!! RX!Data!
5!! GND!!!! !
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
25!
4.7! Motherboard!(2005320)!
!
JP1!–!Relay!Output!Control! ! ! 1!A,!30!VDC!
1!9!ground!
2!9!switched!10!9!15!Volts!! ! ! (Switches!on!when!a!function!is!active)!
!
JP2!9!Switched!Radio!Power!Output! ! 10!A,!30!VDC!
1!9!ground!
2!9!switched!10!9!15!Volts! (Switches!on!when!control!board!is!
operating!above!low!voltage!cutoff!point)!
JP3!–!12VDC!Power!Input!
1!9!ground!
2!9!11!9!15!Volts!
!
JP4!–!Audio!Signal!Output!
1!9!ground!
2!9!signal!
Output!voltage!Swing!! ! ! >4.5!V!Peak!to!Peak!
Maximum!Load! ! ! ! 2K!Ohms!
Total!Harmonic!Distortion! ! ! <!10%!w/!1KHz!Sine9wave!
!
JP5!–!Control!Board!Connection!
!
JP6!–!Sensor!Inputs!
1.! GND!
2.! Activation!Detect!(SPR#1)!
3.! GND!
4.! Intrusion!
5.! GND!
6.! Solar!
7.! GND!
8.! AC!
9.! GND!
10.!PTT!
11.!GND!
12.!Spare!(SPR#2)!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
26!
JP7!9!Audio!Channel!Select!Jumper!
•! Jumper!pins!1!&!2!to!select!channel!A!
•! Jumper!pins!2!&!3!to!select!channel!B!
!
JP8!9!Charger!Sense!Input!
! 1!9!ground!
! 2!9!charger!input!
!
Fuses!
! (F1)!Relay!Coil!at!JP1! ATO,!1!A,!32!VDC!
! (F2)!12!VDC!Radio!at!JP2! ATO,!10!A,!32!VDC!
!
!
!
!
Figure!4.1!M!Motherboard!Outline!Drawing!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
27!
4.8! Environmental!
!
! Operating!Temperature! ! ! 913°F!to!140°F!/!925°C!to!+60°C!
! Humidity! ! ! ! ! 0998%!non9condensing!
!
Notes:!
1.! The!UVRI!can!operate!throughout!this!temperature!range!provided!the!
battery!temperature!is!maintained!at!918°C!or!higher.!
2.! The!UVRI!housing!carries!a!NEMA!4X!/!UL50!rating!
!
4.9! Physical!
!
! Enclosure! ! ! ! ! 16"!x!15"!x!893/8"!(H!x!W!x!D)!
! 40.64!cm!x!38.1!cm!x!21.27!cm!
!
! Weight! ! ! ! ! 29.6!lb!/!13.43!kg!(including!battery)!
!
SPECIFICATIONS!
!
28!
!
!
5! UVRI!OPERATION!
!
5.1! Hardware!General!Description
!
All!relay!control,!audio!generation!and!remote!communication!functions!are!handled!by!a!
single! microcontroller! board.! The! back9plane! (motherboard)! contains! connectors! and!
terminal!blocks!for!interconnection!to!other!system!components.!!
!
The! UVRI! receives! remote! control! signals! and! responds! to! the! Federal! Commander!
remote! monitoring! system! to! provide! live! and! recorded! voice,! warning! tones,! and! a!
remote!control!relay!contact!output.!The!UVRI!provides!a!contact!closure!to!activate!the!
remote!system!and!provide!an!audio!output!at!JP4!on!the!motherboard.!
!
Operation!is!supervised!and!status!information!is!transferred!back!to!the!control!station(s)!
via!one!or!more!available!communications!networks.!The!UVRI!monitors!the!audio!output!
level! and! the! Remote! Activation! input! on! the! motherboard! at! JP692! to! verify! proper!
operation.!Remote!Fire!Alarm!and!PA!systems!provide!a!contact!closure!across!JP691!
and!JP692!to!indicate!proper!operation.!
!
The!controller!can!be!powered!from!12VDC!and/or!120!or!240!VAC.!!
!
5.2! Manual!Activation!
!
The!manual!activation!switches!located!on!the!face!of!the!controller!are!used!to!manually!
activate!siren!functions.!
Function!Switch! Function!
FUNC1! Activates!Functions!under!code!1!
FUNC8! Reset!
FUNC5!&!FUNC7! Digital!Transmit!Deviation!tone!
!
NOTE:!At!any!time!during!a!sounding!function!the!"RESET"!button!may!be!pushed!to!
cause!the!unit!to!halt!all!output!immediately.!
UVRI!OPERATION!
!
29!
!
!
5.3! Local!Public!Address!
!
The!operator!has!the!ability!to!give!local!Public!Address!(PA)!messages!using!the!model!
MNC9MC!microphone!provided.!PA!mode!can!be!entered!simply!by!pressing!the!push9
to9talk!(PTT)!button!on!the!MIC!while!the!MIC!is!plugged!into!the!¼"!receptacle!on!the!
front!panel.!The!PA!LED!will!be!lit!anytime!the!PTT!button!on!the!microphone!is!pressed.!
The!local!PA!volume!level!is!set!by!adjusting!the!MIC!GAIN!knob!located!directly!above!
the!MIC!jack.!
!
NOTE:!Local!PA!overrides!ALL!siren!functions!activated!either!remotely!or!locally.!
!
5.4! Relay!Output!
!
A!DPDT!relay!output!is!located!in!a!socket!at!the!bottom!of!the!control!cabinet.!This!relay!
closes!whenever!a!alert!tone,!digital!or!live!voice!message!is!active!and!can!be!used!to!
trigger!remote!devices.!!
!
5.5! Sensor!Inputs!
!
Terminal!block!JP6!on!the!motherboard!accepts!contact!closure!inputs.!These!inputs!are!
activated!by!a!short!to!“Common”.!
!
Sensor!Connections!
!
JP15! Function!
Terminal!
1! “Common”!
2! Remote!Activation!
“Spare!#1”!
3! “Common”!
4! “Intrusion”!
5! “Common”!
6! “Solar”!
7! “Common”!
8! “AC!Power”!
9! “Common”!
10! “600!PTT”!
11! “Common”!
12! “Spare!#2”!
!
!
UVRI!OPERATION!
30!
!
!
!
5.5.1! Intrusion! !
! Alerts!the!controller!when!one!of!the!unit’s!doors!has!been!opened.!!
!
5.5.2! Solar:!Used!to!sense!operation!of!solar!power!system.!
! Jumper!JP15:!pins!5!to!6!and!to!enable!solar!sensing.!Solar!mode!latches!power!
sense!to!prevent!low!light!conditions!from!causing!failures.!For!solar!panel!test,!
initiate!a!reset,!and!then!a!poll.!Immediate!good!power!input!required!after!a!reset!
to!pass.!!
! Jumper!JP15!pins!7!to!8!AC!sense!is!required!if!solar!only!unit.!
!
5.5.3! Spare#1! !
Remote!system!operation!detect.!Shorting!this!input!verifies!that!the!remote!
system!is!active.!
!
5.5.4! Spare!#2!
Unused!inputs!for!special!functions.!
!!
5.5.5! AC!Power!!! !
Alerts!the!controller!when!the!AC!Power!has!failed.!Open!is!fail.!Closed!is!pass.!
!
5.5.6! 600!Ohm!PTT!!! !
Puts!the!unit!in!Local!PA!mode!for!input!of!external!audio.!Closed!is!active!
!
5.6! TwoMWay!Status!Monitoring!!
!
The!UVRI!uses!a!variety!of!sensors!in!the!UVRI!Series!Controller,!which!when!equipped!
with!a!two9way!radio,!allows!the!remote!unit!to!communicate!its!status!back!to!the!base!
station.!This!reduces!station!downtime!by!quickly!alerting!operating!personnel!to!potential!
problems!at!remote!units.!!
The!following!status!points!are!monitored:!
1.! AC!Power!(AC!sense!relay)!
2.! Battery!Voltage!(built!in)!
3.! Charger!Operation!(built!in)!
5.! Signal!A!!(built!in)!
6.! Signal!B!!(built!in)!
7.! Remote!System!Operation!(Motherboard!JP691&2)!!
8.! Intrusion!!
UVRI!OPERATION!
31!
!
!
!
5.7! Quiet!Test!
!
This!option!enables!acoustically!quiet!tests!to!be!performed!on!the!UVRI!control!and!the!
remotely! controlled! devices.! Quiet! Test! uses! a! 20! kHz! tone! to! quietly! test! the! tone!
generators!and!the!remote!amplifiers!(if!applicable).!To!perform!this!test!the!Quiet!Test!
must!be!programmed!under!one!of!the!activation!codes.!If!it!is!one!of!the!first!7!codes!
then! it! can! be! activated! manually! through! the! switches! on! the! front! panel! or! with! the!
remote!activation!inputs.!Normally!once!the!Quiet!Test!is!programmed!under!one!of!the!
activation!codes,!the!code!is!activated!over!the!radio!channel,!the!panel!switches,!or!with!
a!local!laptop!computer!running!SFCDWARE.!!
!
A.! Operation!
!
The!results!of!a!Quiet!Test!can!be!obtained!remotely!using!the!SS2000+!printout!or!the!
SFCDWARE! control! and! status! monitoring! software.! The! status! can! also! be! obtained!
locally! at! the! siren! site! with! a! portable! computer! running! SFCDWARE.! The! actual!
amplifier!voltage!and!current!are!monitored!with!Quiet!Test!providing!a!true!indication!of!
each!amplifier!and!load!performance.!
!
B.! Finding!Faults!
!
When!using!SFCDWARE,!the!controller!will!automatically!update!the!Quiet!Test!status!
each! time! a! new! Quiet! Test! is! run.! The! status! can! be! obtained! from! the! status! detail!
screen!and!from!the!Reports!menu.!
!
5.8! DC!Power!Supply!
!
A!13.5916.5VDC!(13.8VDC!Nom.),!7A!supply!provides!a!constant!voltage!current!limited!
charging!system!for!the!integrated!12V!battery!and!power!for!peripheral!equipment.!
!
UVRI!OPERATION!
32!
!
!
!
6! SYSTEM!PLANNING!
!
6.1! Control!Unit!
!
Select!a!suitable!mounting!location!that!is!secure,!and!away!from!high!voltage!wiring!and!
high!power!RF!systems.!The!Control!Unit!can!be!mounted!indoors!or!outdoors!depending!
on!what!equipment!it!will!be!connected!to!as!long!as!the!unit!is!kept!within!the!operating!
temperature!limits.!
!
Refer! to! the! specification! section! to! obtain! the! weight! of! the! UVRI.! Insure! that! the!
mounting!surface!and!fasteners!can!safely!sustain!the!weight!of!the!assembly.!
!
In! order! to! reduce! the! possibility! of! introducing! noise! in! the! audio! path,! the! controller!
should!be!placed!as!close!as!possible!to!the!Fire!Alarm!or!remote!PA!system.!
!!
The!controller!should!be!located!out!of!the!reach!of!vandals.!The!controller!is!supplied!
with!padlock!hasps!that!will!accept!user!provided!padlocks!for!security.!
!
The!UVRI!requires!a!120!VAC!or!240!VAC!50960!Hz!power!source!to!power!the!UVRI!
and!charge!the!internal!12V!battery.!
!
Several! methods! can! be! used! to! activate! the! Control! Unit.! Plan! how! the! UVRI! will! be!
connected!to!the!antenna!system!or!wired!communications!network.!
!
If!radio!control!is!going!to!be!used,!consider!RF!coverage!and!antenna!placement!when!
selecting!a!suitable!location.!
!
SYSTEM!PLANNING!
33!
!
!
!
7! INSTALLATION
!
WARNING!
!
Read!all!Safety!Notices!at!the!beginning!of!this!manual!before!installation.!
!
This!section!contains!reference!drawings!to!assist!with!installation.!A!list!of!typical!
installation!materials!required!may!be!obtained!by!reviewing!the!cabinet!mounting!
details!and!the!electrical!installation!material!list!below.!
!
7.1! UVRI!Controller!Installation!Reference!Drawings!
!
!
!
Figure!7.1!M!Typical!UVRI!Installation!Drawing!
INSTALLATION!
34!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Figure!7.2!M!UVRI!Cabinet!Dimensional!Outline!Drawing!
INSTALLATION!
35!
!
!
!
Figure!7.3!M!UVRI!Wiring!Diagram!
INSTALLATION!
36!
!
!
7.2! General!Mounting!Guidelines!
!
These! general! installation! instructions! are! pertinent! to! all! installations.! Specific!
mounting! methods! and! required! installation! materials! are! described! in! the! next!
section.!
!
1.! There!are!four!cabinet!mounting!flanges!available!for!bolting!the!UVRI!to!a!flat!surface,!
(see!Figure'7.2).'!
!
2.! The!total!weight!of!the!UVRI!is!listed!in!the!specifications!section.!It!is!imperative!that!
the!mounting!surface!and!mounting!method!selected!can!safely!sustain!the!weight!of!
the!assembly.!!
!
3.! Prepare!the!mounting!surface!for!hanging!the!cabinet!by!predetermining!the!location!
of!the!mounting!holes.!The!cabinet!should!be!attached!to!a!wall!or!other!substantial!
vertical!surface!using!the!four!mounting!flanges.!Lag!bolt!the!cabinet!to!the!wall!using!
the!prepared!holes!and!anchors.!
!
4.! If!the!UVRI!model!being!installed!has!a!29way!radio,!ensure!the!radio!antenna!cable!
is!installed!before!applying!power!to!the!UVRI!to!avoid!damaging!the!radio.!
!
7.3! UVRI!Installation!Material!List!and!Installation!Guidelines!
!
The!following!material!lists!and!guidelines!describe!basic!installation!details!required!
to!install!the!UVRI!cabinet.!This!list!will!vary!depending!on!mounting!methods,!other!
options,!local!and!national!electrical!codes,!etc.!Therefore,!this!list!should!be!used!
as!a!reference!guideline!only.!!
!
Concrete!or!Filled!Cement!Block!
Wall!Mounting!Materials!
! ! !
Material! Purpose! Qty!
Description!
¼"!x!2"!Pin/Sleeve/! Anchor! !
Lock!Washer/Nut! Bolts! 4!
Style!Anchors!
INSTALLATION!
37!
!
!
7.3.1! Concrete!or!Filled!Cement!Block!Wall!Mounting!Guidelines:!
!
1.! Mark!the!mounting!hole!locations!on!the!wall!for!the!cabinet.!
2.! Install!the!anchor!bolts!for!the!four!cabinet!corners!according!to!the!manufacturer’s!
instructions.!
3.! Mount!the!cabinet!to!the!wall.!
4.! Proceed!to!following!section.!
Note:'If'wall'is'not'straight,'use'shims'to'insure'enclosure'maintains'square'and'structural'
integrity.'
!
Hollow!Block!Wall!Mounting!Materials!
Material! ! !
Description! Purpose! Qty!
¼"!x!2"!Heavy!Duty! Anchor! !!4!
Toggle!Bolts! Bolts!
7.3.2! Hollow!Block!Wall!Mounting!Guidelines:!
!
1.! Mark!the!mounting!hole!locations!on!the!wall!for!the!cabinet.!
!
2.! Install! the! anchor! bolts! for! the! four! cabinet! corners! according! to! the! manufacturer’s!
instructions.!
!
3.! Mount!the!cabinet!to!the!wall.!
!
4.! Proceed!to!following!section.!
! !
INSTALLATION!
38!
!
!
Wood!Stud!Wall!Mounting!
Materials!
Material! ! !
¼"!x!1"!Lag! Backboard!&! 8!
bolts! cabinet!
mounting!bolts!!
2'!x!2'!x!¾"! Mounting! 1!
B/C!or!better! backboard!
plywood!
Construction! Mounting! 1!
adhesive!! backboard!
attachment!
7.3.3! Wood!Stud!Wall!Mounting!Guidelines:!
!
1.! Locate!the!wall!studs!for!attaching!the!mounting!backboard!to!the!wall.!The!backboard!
should!attach!to!at!least!two!studs.!
!
2.! Mark!the!wall!stud!location!on!the!mounting!backboard!and!drill!four!pilot!holes!for!the!
lag!bolts.!
!
3.! Apply!construction!adhesive!to!the!back!of!the!mounting!backboard.!
!
4.! Attach!the!mounting!backboard!to!the!wall!with!four!lag!bolts.!!
!
5.! Locate!the!mounting!position!of!the!cabinet!on!the!mounting!backboard.!
!
6.! Drill!pilot!holes!for!the!lag!bolts.!
!
7.! Mount!the!cabinet!to!the!mounting!backboard.!
!
8.! Proceed!to!the!following!section.!
! !
INSTALLATION!
39!
!
!
Metal!Stud!Wall!Mounting!Materials!
Material! ! !
¼"!x!2"!lag!bolts! Cabinet! 4!
mounting!
bolts!!
2'!x!¾"!x!2'!B/C!or! Mounting! 1!
better!plywood backboard!
#14!x!2"!metal! Backboard! 6!
stud!screws! mounting!
Construction! Backboard! 1!
adhesive!! mounting!
!
7.3.4! Metal!Stud!Wall!Mounting!Guidelines:!
!
1.! Locate!the!wall!studs!for!attaching!the!Mounting!Backboard!to!the!wall.!!
!
2.! Mark!the!wall!stud!location!on!the!mounting!backboard!and!drill!pilot!holes!for!the!#14!
metal!stud!screws.!Three!screws!should!be!placed!in!each!stud!evenly!spaced!apart.!
!
3.! Apply!construction!adhesive!to!the!back!of!the!mounting!backboard.!
!
4.! Attach!the!mounting!backboard!to!the!wall!with!#14!metal!stud!screws.!!
!
5.! Locate!the!mounting!position!of!the!cabinet!on!the!mounting!backboard.!
!
6.! Drill!pilot!holes!for!the!¼"!lag!bolts.!
!
7.! Mount!the!cabinet!to!the!mounting!backboard.!
!
8.! Proceed!to!the!following!section.!
!!
INSTALLATION!
40!
!
!
7.4! Installer!Supplied!UVRI!Electrical!Installation!Material!List
!
Material!Description! ! ! Purpose! Qty!
30!amp/250V/!2!Pole!Solid! Optional!Electrical!Disconnect! 1!
Neutral/Fused!Disconnect!w/!
Ground!Kit/!NEMA!1!Rating/!
Lockable!Cover!Tang/!Lockable!
Operator!
10A!FRNR!Fuse! Fuses!For!120!V!Service! 1!
5A!FRNR!Fuse! Fuses!For!240!V!Service! 2!
12!9!14!AWG!White!Wire! AC!Neutral!from!disconnect! !8'!
12!9!14!AWG!Black!Wire! AC!Load!from!disconnect! !8'!
12!9!14!AWG!Green!Wire! Equipment!ground!from! !8'!
disconnect!
1/2”!Seal!Tight!Conduit!&!Fittings! Electrical!conduit!from!disconnect! Varies!
and!to!Fire!Panel/PA!System!
Metal!Ground!Bushings! Equipment!ground!connections! 2!
Screws,!appropriate!to!mounting! Disconnect!mounting! 4!
surface!
15!A!Breaker! Service!panel!breaker!serving!unit! 1!
White!Wire!appropriately!sized! AC!neutral!from!breaker!panel!to! Varies!

disconnect!
Black!Wire!appropriately!sized! AC!load!from!breaker!panel!to! Varies!

disconnect!
Green!Wire!appropriately!sized! Equipment!ground!from!breaker! Varies!

panel!to!disconnect!
Conduit!&!fittings,!appropriately! Electrical!conduit!from!breaker! Varies!

type!and!size!for!particular! panel!to!disconnect!
installation!requirements!
6!AWG!Stranded! Cabinet!ground!to!earth!ground! Varies!
for!external!antenna!applications!
18926!AWG!stranded!wire!pairs! Audio,!Relay!Output,!and!Remote! Varies!

System!Operation!Sense!
INSTALLATION!
41!
!
!
7.5! Electrical!Connections!
!
Make! all! electrical! connections! in! compliance! with! local! electrical! codes! and! NEC!
recommendations.! Disconnect! all!power! and!read! all! warnings! at! the!beginning! of! this!
manual!and!on!the!batteries!before!making!connections.!
7.5.1! Grounding!Requirements!
!
1.! The! UVRI! cabinet! must! be! properly! connected! to! an! earth! ground.! The! cabinet!
contains!an!external!¼"!ground!stud!for!making!this!connection.!!
2.! Externally! installed! antennas! require! a! dedicated! ground! to! either! a! ground! rod! or!
building!steel!below!grade!in!addition!to!the!UVRI!cabinet!ground.!
7.5.2! DIN!Rail!Terminal!Blocks!!
!
These!points!provide!a!convenient!location!for!making!the!AC!power!connections.!A!small!
screwdriver! must! be! pushed! into! the! square!opening! in! the! terminal! block! to! open! the!
contact!of!the!block.!With!the!wire!inserted,!the!block!will!clamp!the!wire!with!a!spring9
loaded!connection!when!the!screwdriver!is!removed!from!the!terminal!block.!
!
Each!terminal!block!accepts!bare!12914!AWG!wire.!The!terminal!blocks!are!labeled!L1!
and!L2.!!
!
7.5.3! 120!VAC!Electrical!Service!Wiring!
!
1.! Install!a!dedicated!15!A!circuit!breaker!in!an!existing!breaker!panel!or!install!a!new!
breaker!panel!if!necessary!for!the!UVRI.!
!
2.! Install!conduit!from!the!breaker!panel!to!the!½"!conduit!entrance!in!the!bottom!of!the!
UVRI.!
!
3.! Route!user9supplied!12914!AWG!wires!(1!black,!1!white,!1!green)!through!the!conduit!
from!the!UVRI!Cabinet!and!the!fused!breaker!panel.!
!
4.! Connect!the!white!neutral!wire!from!the!breaker!panel!neutral!to!the!DIN!rail!mounted!
terminal!block!labeled!L1!in!the!UVRI!control!cabinet.!
!!!
5.! Connect! the! black! line! wire! from! the! 15A! breaker! to! the! DIN! rail! mounted! terminal!
block!labeled!L2!in!the!UVRI!control!cabinet.!!
!
6.! Optionally,!connect!a!green!ground!wire!from!the!breaker!panel!earth!ground!to!the!
green!ground!block!in!the!UVRI!cabinet!or!run!a!ground!lead!from!the!external!1/4”!
ground!stud!on!the!UVRI!cabinet!to!earth!ground.!
INSTALLATION!
42!
!
!
7.5.4! 240!VAC!Electrical!Service!Wiring!
!
1.! Install!a!dedicated!29pole!15A!breaker!in!an!existing!breaker!panel!or!install!a!new!
breaker!panel!if!necessary!for!the!UVRI.!
!
2.! Install!conduit!from!the!breaker!panel!to!a!conduit!entrance!in!the!bottom!of!the!UVRI.!
Ensure!the!conduit!is!adequately!grounded.!
!
3.! Route!user9supplied!12914!AWG!wires!(2!black,!1!green!9!optional)!through!the!conduit!
from! the! UVRI! Cabinet! and! the! fused! breaker! panel! (or! as! otherwise! specified! by!
code).!
!
4.! Connect!one!line!wire!from!the!15A!breaker!panel!to!the!DIN!rail!mounted!terminal!
block!labeled!L1!in!the!UVRI!control!cabinet.!
!!!
5.! Connect! the! other! line! wire! from! the! 15A! breaker! to! the! DIN! rail! mounted! terminal!
block!labeled!L2!in!the!UVRI!control!cabinet.!!
!
6.! Connect!a!green!ground!wire!from!the!breaker!panel!earth!ground!to!the!green!ground!
block!in!the!UVRI!cabinet!or!run!a!ground!lead!from!the!external!1/4”!ground!stud!on!
the!UVRI!cabinet!to!earth!ground.!
!
7.5.5! DC!Power!Connection!
!
The! battery! is! located! under! the! control! board! mounting! plate! and! is! pre9wired! to! the!
UVRI.!Connect!DC!power!to!the!UVRI!by!plugging!in!the!two!position!power!connector!at!
JP3!on!the!motherboard!as!shown!in!figure!7.5.!
!
7.5.6! Audio!Output!Connection!
!
Connect! the!audio! output! of! the! UVRI! to! the! audio! input! of! the! Remote!Fire! Alarm/PA!
System!at!JP4!on!the!motherboard!as!shown!in!figure!7.5!below.!Adjust!the!Audio!Output!
Level!potentiometer!to!the!desired!output!level.!The!pot!is!located!next!to!the!Audio!Signal!
Output!connector!(JP4).!
! !
INSTALLATION!
43!
!
!
7.6! Remote!System!Sense!Input!
!
Connect!the!remote!system!sense!contact!closure!to!the!UVRI!to!JP6!on!the!motherboard!
as!shown!in!figure!7.5!below.!This!contact!is!used!by!the!UVRI!to!report!the!operational!
status!of!the!remote!system!
!
! ! Remote!System!Sense!!!Audio!Output!!!!!!!DC!Power!
!!!
!
Figure!7.4!M!UVRI!Remote!System!Sense,!Audio!Output!and!DC!Power!Connections!
!
7.6.1! Relay!Output!
!
The!relay!output!is!used!to!activate!the!remote!Fire!Alarm/PA!System!if!a!remote!
contact!closure!input!is!available!in!the!remote!system.!The!relay!can!also!be!used!to!
control!other!remote!devises!such!as!strobe!lights.!Two!sets!of!normally!open!and!
normally!closed!contacts!are!available!as!shown!in!the!figure!below.!
!
!
Figure!7.5!M!Relay!Output!
INSTALLATION!
44!
!
!
7.7! Landline!Control!Connection!
!
If!the!UVRI9LL!wireline!control!option!is!used,!connect!the!telephone!wire!pair!from!the!
TB9LL!base!line!driver!to!the!Landline!Interface!module!located!in!the!control!cabinet!on!
manual!255377!for!further!installation!details.
!
!
top!of!the!control!board’s!protective!metal!cover.!Refer!to!the!Telco!Interconnect!System!
7.8! Ethernet!Connection!
!
If!the!UVRI9IP!Ethernet!control!option!is!used,!the!UVRI!Ethernet!module!will!be!located!
in!the!control!cabinet!on!top!of!the!control!board’s!protective!metal!cover.!Make!the!
Ethernet!connection!to!J1!on!the!UVRI!Ethernet!module.!Refer!to!the!Serial!to!Ethernet!
User’s!Guide!part!number!2005457!for!further!connection!details.!
!
The!UVRI!requires!an!IEEE!802.3,!10!Base9T,!half!duplex!connection!and!uses!ports!
16,887!(for!Codespear!TCP/IP)!and!port!80!(HTTP)!for!its!configuration!web!page.!
Ethernet!wire!runs!must!be!less!than!328!feet!from!the!nearest!network!switch.!
7.9! Antenna!Types!!
!
Determine!type!of!antenna!to!be!installed!if!a!wireless!RF!system!is!used:!
1.! Cabinet!Mounted!Magnetic!Base!
2.! Remote!Mounted!Magnetic!Base!
3.! Yagi!External!Antenna!Type!!!
4.! Omni!external!antenna!Type!
!
For!installation!instructions!on!the!Yagi!and!Omni!Antennas!go!to!the!Federal!Signal’s!
website.!
!
7.10! Remote!Mounted!Magnetic!Base!Antenna!Installation!
!
A! remote! magnetic!base! antenna!may! be! installed! in! buildings! that! a! known! good! RF!
signal!strength!inside!and!a!suitable!location!to!mount!the!antenna.!!
!
1.! Locate! a! suitable! location! for!the! antenna! that! is! away! from! any! electrical! devices,!
high! voltage! and! computer! wiring.! The! location! should! be! as! high! as! possible! and!
should!enable!the!antenna!mast!to!be!at!least!2!feet!away!from!any!grounded!metal!
objects.!
!
2.! Mount!the!antenna!to!a!flat,!secure!metal!structure!with!at!least!225!inches!square!
area!for!the!magnetic!mount!to!stick!to.!!
!
INSTALLATION!
45!
!
!
8! PREMOPERATION!CHECKOUT!AND!TEST!
!
Warning!
!
The!following!procedures!should!be!performed!by!a!properly!trained!technician!to!
ensure!the!equipment!is!operating!properly.!
!
8.1! Visual!Inspection!
!
1.! Fill!out!the!Field!Test!Data!Sheet!at!the!end!of!this!section!to!document!the!following!
inspections! and! tests.! The! completed! document! should! be! kept! on! file! for! future!
reference.!
2.! Verify!all!connections!and!fasteners!are!tight.!
3.! Ensure!that!all!installation!debris!is!removed!from!the!cabinet.!
4.! Secure!all!wiring!with!wire9ties!to!provide!strain!relief!and!to!neatly!manage!the!wiring.!
5.! Verify!the!control!board!clock!LED!is!blinking.!
6.! Verify!the!power!supply!LED!is!on.!
!
8.2! PreMOperation!Checkout!
!
1.! Refer!to!Figure'7.4.!Measure!the!DC!voltage!across!the!DC!input!connector!on!the!
control!board.!The!voltage!must!be!at!least!11.5!VDC!to!turn!on!the!control!board.!
The!voltage!should!be!13.7VDC!when!AC!power!is!applied!to!the!UVRI.!!
!
2.! All!alert!signals!and!voice!messages!should!be!tested!at!this!time.!Verify!that!the!
correct!audio!is!heard!at!the!proper!volume!for!each!function.!The!Audio!A,!Audio!
B,!and!ARM!LEDs!should!light!during!each!function.!
PRE9OPERATION!CHECK9OUT!AND!TEST!
46!
!
!
8.3! Radio!Transceiver!Adjustment!Procedure!!
!
Note:'This'procedure'previously'completed'at'factory.'Only'readjust'if'radio'reDalignment'
is'required'or'if'the'radio'is'being'installed'in'the'field.'
!
A.!Qualifications:!
!
Requires!a!properly!trained!Radio!Technician.!
!
B.!Equipment!Required:!
!
1.! Service!Monitor!
2.! Oscilloscope!
!
C.!Setup:!!
!
Connect!the!radio!to!the!service!monitor.!
!
D.!Receive!Audio!Adjustment!
!
1.!Using!service!monitor,!modulate!the!correct!RF!signal!into!the!receiver!with!a!1!kHz!
tone!at!3!kHz!deviation.!If!bandwidth!is!12.5,!then!modulate!at!1.5!kHz!deviation.!(If!using!
private!line,!add!0.75!kHz!private!line!deviation!to!the!signal.)!
!
2.! Adjust! the! level! at! TP16! (2005698! controller! card)! for! 1Vp9p! using! the! REC! gain!
adjustment!R105!(2005698!controller!card!front!panel).! !
!
E.!Transmit!Deviation!Adjustment!
!
1.! Simultaneously!press!buttons!5!&!7!on!the!2005698!controller!card.!This!will!cause!
the!controller!to!transmit!for!approximately!8!seconds.!
!
2.! Measure!the!deviation!level!using!service!monitor.!!
!
3.! Adjust! the! TX! level! (2005698! controller! card!front! panel)!for!3! kHz! deviation.! If! the!
bandwidth!is!12.5!kHz,!then!adjust!for!1.5!kHz!deviation!(If!using!private!line,!add!0.75!
kHz!private!line!deviation!to!the!signal.)!!!
!
Note,'slightly'higher'S/N'levels'can'be'obtained'by'increasing'the'RF'modulation'levels'
to'4'and'2'kHz'depending'on'the'channel'spacing'and'the'ability'of'the'radio'to'produce'
a'clean'sinewave'at'these'levels'without'limiting.'Do'not'exceed'these'deviation'levels.'
All'sites'in'the'system'should'be'set'to'the'same'modulation'level.'
!
47!
!
!
8.4! Control!and!Status!Monitoring!
!
1.! Use! The! Commander! Digital! System! (SFCDWARE)! to! verify! the! UVRI! has! been!
properly! configured! for! the! application.!Make! any!required! changes! prior! to! placing!
the!UVRI!into!service.!
!
2.! The!control!and!status!monitoring!features!should!be!tested!from!each!control!point.!
Test!each!control!function!and!all!status!indications!using!SFCDWARE.!Verify!each!
status!point!provides!the!proper!indication!of!both!pass!and!fail!conditions.!
! !
48!
!
!
!
UVRI!Field!Test!Data!!
Customer:!! ! ! ! ! !! Project!Number:!! ! ! ! ! ! Date:!! ! ! ! ! !
Contact!Person:!! ! ! ! ! ! Phone:!! ! ! ! ! ! Second!Phone:!! ! ! ! ! !
Radio!Shop:!! ! ! ! ! ! Contact:!! ! ! ! ! ! Phone:!! ! ! ! ! !
!
Siren!Type:!! ! ! ! ! ! S/N:!! ! ! ! ! ! Voltage:!! ! ! ! ! !
Controller!Type:!! ! ! ! ! ! Antenna:!Omni!! !!!!!Yagi! ! A/C!Service:!!!O.H. !
Cabinet!Mounted!! !! !! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!U.G. !
! !!External!Mounted! !
CPU!Software:!! ! ! ! ! ! Program!file:!! ! ! ! ! ! SMV:!! ! ! ! ! !
!
Radio!Information:!Low!Band! !!!VHF! !!UHF! !!800! !!Trunk! !!!!!!!!!!!!12.5!KHz! !!!!!25!KHz!

!
Radio!Frequency:!TX!! ! ! ! ! !!!!!RX!! ! ! ! ! !!!!!PL!! ! ! ! ! !
!
Site:!! ! ! ! ! ! S/N:!! ! ! ! ! ! Address:!! ! ! ! ! ! Zone:!! ! ! ! ! !
A/C!voltage:!! ! ! ! ! Vac! Battery!voltage:!! ! ! ! ! ! Charger!voltage:!! ! ! ! ! ! !
!
Battery!Type:!! ! ! ! ! ! Model:!! ! ! ! ! ! Manufacturer:!! ! ! ! ! !
!
Sensor! State! Sensor!/!Output! State!
Intrusion!Sensor! Pass! !!!!!Fail! ! Audio!A/B!Sense! Pass! !!!!!Fail! !
Low!Battery! Pass! !!!!!Fail! ! Remote!System!Operation! Pass! !!!!!Fail! !
AC!Power!On! Pass! !!!!!Fail! ! Relay!Output! Pass! !!!!!Fail! !
AC!Power!Off! Pass! !!!!!Fail! ! Audio!Output! Pass! !!!!!Fail! !
Charger!Sense!! Pass! !!!!!Fail! ! ! !
!
! !
Wiring!Neatly!Dressed!in!Cabinet:!!Yes! ! Debris!removed!from!Control!Cabinet:!Yes! !
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!No! ! !No! !
!
Antenna!connectors!sealed:!!Yes! ! !
! ! ! ! No! !
(Required!for!outdoor!antenna!installations)!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
! !
Tested!by:!! ! ! ! ! ! Date:!! ! ! ! ! !
Notes:!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!!!!!!
Figure!8.1!M!Field!Test!Data!Sheet
49!
!
!
9! MAINTENANCE!!
!
WARNING!
!
Service! and! maintenance! should! be! performed! by!qualified! personnel!familiar! with! the!
UVRI,! associated! controls,!and! power! sources! being! used! and! in! conjunction! with! the!
authorities!having!jurisdiction.!
!
The! sound! output!of! speakers! is! capable! of!causing! permanent! hearing! damage.! Use!
adequate!hearing!protection!and!avoid!excessive!exposure.!
!
!
!
If!you!are!experiencing!any!difficulties,!contact!Federal!Signal!Customer!Care!at:!!
800954897229!or!708953493400!extension!5822!or!Technical!Support!at:!800952493021!
or!708953493400!extension!7329!or!through!e9mail!at:!techsupport@fedsig.com.!For!
instruction!manuals!and!information!on!related!products,!visit:!http://www.fedsig.com/
!
Test!the!UVRI!for!proper!operation!at!least!once!a!month.!A!daily!test!at!noon,!curfew,!or!
other!selected!time!is!preferred.!This!not!only!enhances!the!usefulness!of!the!UVRI!and!
verifies! that! it! remains! ready! for! use! when! neededb! it! also! instills! confidence! in! the!
reliability!of!the!system.!
!
In! order! to! minimize! the! potential! for! a! failure,! annual! inspection! and! maintenance! is!
recommended.
MAINTENANCE!
50!
!
!
GENERAL!MAINENANCE!
!
9.1.1! Signal!Operational!Check!
!
1.! Activate!each!of!the!signals!from!the!control!point!and!observe!the!signal!indicators!
on! the! control! module! and! the!remote! PA! system.! Verify! each! function! sounds! the!
correct!signal!at!the!proper!volume!level!for!the!application.!!
!
2.! Verify! that! the! system! status! is! reported! correctly! at! the! control! point.! Check! each!
status!point!to!verify!both!pass!and!fail!conditions!are!correctly!reported.!Verify!that!
the!relay!output!closes!with!each!function!activated.!
!
9.1.2! Battery!Inspection!!
1.! Remove!AC!power!and!measure!the!DC!voltage!across!the!DC!input!connector!on!
the!control!board.!This!voltage!should!be!above!12.75!VDC!if!the!battery!has!been!
charging!for!at!least!24!hours.!
!
2.! The! battery! will! typically! need! to! be! replaced! every! 395! years! depending! on! the!
application!environment.!The!battery!life!will!be!diminished!if!it!is!left!in!a!discharged!
state!for!prolonged!periods.!
!
3.! Maintain!or!replace!the!battery!as!recommended!by!its!manufacturerb!obey!local!or!
state!laws!governing!the!disposal!of!lead9acid!batteries.!
!
4.! Check!the!battery!terminals!for!corrosion.!Clean!and!grease!connectors!and!terminals,!
or!replace!if!necessary.!!
!
9.1.3! Battery!Replacement!
!
Remove!all!electrical!connections!from!the!motherboard!before!removing!the!battery.!
Remove!the!connectors!at!JP1,!JP2,!JP3,!JP4,!JP6,!and!JP8!on!the!motherboard.!!
!
The!battery!is!located!under!the!control!board!mounting!plate.!The!control!board!
mounting!plate!can!be!removed!by!loosening!the!four!screws!as!shown!below.
MAINTENANCE!
51!
!
!
!
!
Figure!9.1!M!UVRI!Motherboard!Connections!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Figure!9.2!M!UVRI!Battery!Location!and!Cover!Plate!Mounting!Screws
MAINTENANCE!
52!
!
!
9.2! Troubleshooting!
!
! PROBLEM! ACTION!
1.! NO!RADIO!DECODE! A.!Unit!is!not!programmed!to!recognize!that!
particular!code!sequence!(or)!Signal!is!not!
being!received!properly.!
!
B.!Verify!programming!is!correct.!Check!the!
received!audio!signal!quality!at!the!RX!test!
pin!on!the!front!of!the!control!board.!
2.! LOW!OUTPUT!FROM! Check!battery!voltage.!Also,!check!signal!
SPEAKERS! indicators!on!amplifiers!during!a!function.!If!
indicators!are!off,!remove!amplifier!for!
service.!
!
3.! FUNCTION!STOPS!BEFORE! Batteries!may!require!further!charging.!
NORMAL!TIME9OUT! Check!battery!voltage!under!load.!Check!
charger!output.!
!
4.! LOCAL!P.A.!FEEDS!BACK! Lower!P.A.!volume!using!knob!above!MIC!
connector.!
!
5.! LOCAL!P.A.!HAS!LITTLE!OR!NO! Hold!MIC!close!to!mouth.!Increase!PA!
OUTPUT! volume!using!knob!above!MIC!connector.!
!
6.! BATTERIES!NOT!HOLDING! Check!that!charger!fuses!are!intact!and!!!
CHARGE! check!charger!output.!
Load!!!Test!batteries.!
!
7.! RELAY!OUTPUT!ON! Check!that!the!relay!on!the!system!
MOTHERBOARD!DOESN’T! motherboard!is!operating!(indicated!by!LED!
OPERATE! D2).!Also!check!fuse!F1!on!motherboard!(20!
amp!slo9blow)!
8.! RADIO!P.A.!TAKES!TOO!LONG! Check!radio!for!proper!operation!of!squelch.!
TO!TIME!OUT! CD!LED!should!light!while!carrier!is!present.!
9.! LANDLINE!ACTIVATION!INPUTS! Verify!minimum!19!second!contact!closure!is!
DO!NOT!FUNCTION! applied!to!JP14!on!the!motherboard.!
!
! ! !
! ! ! ! ! !
NOTE:!For!additional!help!contact!the!FWS!Service!Dept.!at!(800)!52493021.!
!
MAINTENANCE!
53!
!
!
10! OPTIONS!!
!
10.1! Radio!Control!
!
The!UVRI!can!be!activated!by!a!radio!signal!when!the!optional!radio!transceiver!is!
incorporated!into!the!Control!Unit.!Activation!by!radio!control!has!the!advantage!that!
control!lines!are!not!required!between!the!control!site!and!the!UVRI.!Federal!Signal!
offers!the!controller!with!a!full!line!of!transceivers!built!in!which!cover!the!VHF!and!
UHF!bands.!
! ! ! ! !
10.2! Digital!Voice!Recording!
!
Four!minutes! of! digital! voice! storage! is! provided! as! a! standard! feature! with! the! UVRI.!
When! the! Digital! Voice! Recording! option! (model! DVR)! is! purchased,! the! UVRI! will! be!
factory! programmed! with! high! quality! voice! or! music! recordings! as! specified! by! the!
customer.!
!
Up! to! 250! individual! messages! may! be! programmed! into! the! UVRI.! Digital! Voice!
Messages! may! be! activated! remotely! or! via! the! control! panel! switches.! To! program!
activation!codes!with!Digital!Voice!Messages!under!them,!follow!the!instructions!in!the!
Commander!Digital!System!manual.!It!is!possible!to!assign!codes!to!the!functions!DIG!
VOICE!1!through!DIG!VOICE!250.!As!in!all!sounding!functions,!the!unit!must!first!be!sent!
the! ARM! command! followed! by! one! of! the! six! DIG! VOICE! commands! to! activate! the!
stored! message.! The! only! adjustment! available! on! the! Digital! Voice! PCB! is! a!
potentiometer,!which!adjusts!the!audio!output!level.!
!
10.3! Installation!of!User!Supplied!Radio!Receivers!!
CAUTION!
Improper! installation! of! radio! control! equipment! may! cause! the! Alert! and! Notification!
system! to!malfunction! or!operate! intermittently.! Installation!must! only! be! performed!by!
experienced!radio!technicians!who!have!thoroughly!read!this!manual.!
!
1.!TUNING!9!Tune!the!radio!receiver!to!the!manufacturer's!specifications.!
!
2.!POWER!9!Determine!the!radio!power!requirements.!The!ULTRAVOICE!control!panel!
provides!+12!VDC!on!the!RADIO!connector!on!the!front!panel,!as!shown!below.!
!
!
OPTIONS!
! ! 54! !
!
!
RADIO!Connector,!8!pin!MOD!jackb!
1.!Receive!Audio,!300mV!9!10Vp9p!
2.!Transmit!Audio,!50mV!9!3Vp9p!
3.!Carrier!Detect!9!active!low!
4.!PTT!
5.!+8!VDC!
6.!GND!
7.!+8!VDC!
8.!GND!
!
This! voltage! source! must! not! be! used! for! radios,! which! draw! more! than! 1.5! Amps! of!
current!in!transmit.!Use!both!grounds!and!both!+8!VDC!connections!for!current!handling.!
If! a! higher! current! output! is! required,! a! 24! VDC! –! 12! VDC! voltage! converter! must! be!
purchased.!This!converter!is!provided!with!the!UVRI!series!models.!Do!not!use!one!of!
the!12!VDC!batteries!to!run!the!radio!equipment.!
!
1.! AUDIO!–!The!ULTRAVOICE!controller!Receive!Audio!Input!should!be!connected!to!
the! de9emphasized! Audio! Output! of! the! radio.! Use! shielded! audio! grade! cable! and!
keep!wire!runs!as!short!as!possible.!The!Receive!Audio!level!can!vary!from!300!mV!
–!3Vp9p!unclipped.!
!
2.! The!Transmit!Audio!Output!is!adjustable!from!50!mV!9!3Vp9p.!
!
3.! C.D.!9!The!carrier!detect!signal!from!the!radio!must!pull!to!ground!when!active.!The!
radio! carrier! detect! signal! is! useful! for! controlling! live! PA.! When! the! C.D.! signal! is!
removed!from!the!controller!for!over!5!seconds,!the!controller!will!automatically!cancel!
the! P.A.! function! eliminating! the! need! to! broadcast! the! cancel! tones! over! the!
speakers.!
!
4.! PTT!–!The!PTT!output!pulls!to!ground!when!active!to!key!the!radio.!
!
5.! RX!and!TX!Audio!–!Adjust!the!RX!and!TX!Audio!levels!as!described!in!Section!6.!
!
10.4! Model!UVRIMIP!
!
The!UVRI9IP!combines!the!characteristics!of!a!UVRI!with!Serial!to!Ethernet!conversion!
capabilities.! This! allows! serial! devices! to! communicate! over! an! Ethernet! network! and!
provides!audio!decoding!of!digitized!audio!sent!over!the!network.!
!
The!converter!is!configured!with!its!own!fixed!IP!address!and!port!number.!When!packets!
of!data!are!received!over!the!Ethernet!port!that!are!addressed!to!the!board’s!IP!and!port!
number,!they!are!converted!to!serial!data!and!sent!out!over!the!serial!port.!Likewise,!any!
data!coming!into!the!serial!port!is!converted!to!TCP/IP!data!packets!and!sent!out!over!the!
!
OPTIONS!
! ! 55! !
!
!
Ethernet! port! to! the! server’s! IP! address.! The! unit! also! contains! a! digital! to! analog!
converter.! This! allows! specially! configured! incoming! data! packets! to! be! converted! to!
audio,!which!is!then!filtered!and!sent!out!over!a!600!ohm!audio!port.!
!
A.!Ethernet!Board!Specifications!
!
Electrical!
10.4.1!!
Input!Voltage!! 10.5!–!95!VDC!
Current!Draw! <150!mA!
!
Serial!Port!
!
Serial!Port!Protocol! !!RS232C,!N,!8,!1!
!!!!! !!baud!rate!!
! !!configurable!
!
Ethernet!Port!
!
Protocol! IEEE!802.3,!10!!
! Base9T!connection!
!
600!Ohm!Audio!Output!Port!
!
Protection! MOV!and!Transorb!!
! surge!protection!
Impedance!! 600!ohms!!
Audio!Output!Level! Adjustable!from!0.30!to!3.00!Vp9p,!
(917!dB!to!+2.7!dB)!into!600!Ohms!
!
*NOTE:!To!use!the!600!ohm!input!for!activation!receive!audio,!a!jumper!must!be!across!
pins!293!at!JP8.!JP8!is!located!on!the!main!controller!card.!Refer!to!section!‘600!Ohm!
Adjustment!Procedure!for!Communications’.!
!
Connectors!
!
JP1! 600!Ohm!Audio!Output!Port!
! Balanced!line!output!
!
JP2! JTAG!Emulation!port!
!
JP3! Audio!Output!Expanded!or!
! Flat!Selection!Jumper!
Jumper!pins!1!&!2!for!flat!audio!output!
! Jumper!pins!2!&!3!for!expanded!dynamic!range!audio!output!
!
!
OPTIONS!
! ! 56! !
!
!
JP4! RS232!Serial!Port!
!1!9!
!2!9!
! 3!9!Ground,!0.5!amps!maximum!current!capacity!
! 4!9!Radio!transmit!data!from!! PC,!standard!RS232!levels!
! 5!9!Radio!receive!data!to!PC!standard!RS232!levels!
! 6!9!Ground,!0.5!amps!maximum!current!capacity!
!
JP5! FLASH!Programming!and!Converter!Configuration!Port!
!1!9!
! 2!9!TX!Data,!standard!RS232!levels!
! 3!9!RX!Data,!standard!RS232!levels!
! 4!9!Ground!
! 5!9!Serial!Clock!input!for!FLASH!programming,!standard!RS232!levels!
! 6!9!Processor!Reset!Not!line,!used!in!programming!FLASH,!10K!pull9up!
!
JP6! 10.5M95!VDC!Power!Input!
!1!9!(9)!
!2!9!(+)!
!
JP7! Resets!board!back!to!factory!default!settings.!
!
J1! Ethernet!Network!Port!
! 1!&!2!9!Transmit!data!pair,!balanced!line!3!&!6!9!Receive!data!pair,!!
! balanced!line!
! 4,!5,!7,!8!9!AC!coupled!ground!
!
Indicators!
!
D1!9!CPU!Heartbeat!indicator,!green!
D2!9!Transmit!data!indicator,!red!
D3!9!Receive!data!indicator,!yellow!
D4!9!Power!indicator,!green!
!
Controls!
!
R1!–!600!ohm!audio!output!level!set!
!
Environmental!
!
Operating!Temp.! 930!°C!9!+65!°C!
Humidity! ! 09!95%!non9condensing!
!
!
OPTIONS!
! ! 57! !
!
!
Physical!
!
Dimensions! about!(H!x!W!x!L)!2"!x!4”!x!6.5"!
!
Weight! ! <!2!lb!!
!
!
Serial'to'Ethernet'Board'
!
B.!Network!Information!
!
Protocols!Supported!
!
•! TCP/IP!
•! UDP!(optional)!
•! XML!(optional)!
•! XMPP!(optional)!
!
IP!Ports!Used!
!
16,887!(Codespear!TCP/IP)!
80!(HTTP)!
3100!(optional!UDP!Serial!Over!IP)!
3101!(optional!UDP!Voice!Over!IP)!
!
IP!Address!
!
User!selectable!
!
!
OPTIONS!
! ! 58! !
!
!
TOS/DSCP!(Type!of!Service)!
!
User!selectable!priority!level!
!
Bandwidth!Requirements!
!
Voice!Over!IP:!!150K!baud!per!Connection!
!
Siren!Activation:!!!50!bytes!per!connection!
!
Siren!Poll!Response:!!74!bytes!per!connection!
!
!
!
OPTIONS!
! ! 59! !
!
11" Final"Assembly"Drawing"and"Parts"List"
ITEM NO. PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY.
4.00 22
1 103441 RES, WIREWND, 10 Ohm, 50W, 1% 1
2 115812 DIODE, SCHOTTKY, 80A, 30V 1 46
48
3 120896 TRANSFORMER, POWER SUPPLY, 15VDC, 7A 1
4.75
4 122378A SWITCH, INTRUSION, SPDT 1
5 131290-01 RELAY, 120VAC, 15A 1
6 131292 RELAY,12V,10A 1 C1 4.00
7 138182A SOCKET,RELAY,8 PIN 1 23
8 138212 IC SOCKET, TYCO, 8 PIN 1
9 139491-03 CONN,3 POS,BLZ 5.08 1 6.00
10 150A109 MISC ELEC, CABLE TIE, SELF LOCKING 1 B2 44
11 150A130 MISC ELEC, CABLE TIE MOUNT 1 B2
12 155193A BATTERY
13 1611511 LABEL, FEDERAL SIGNAL 1
14 1611639B-01 LABEL,WARNING, HIGH VOLTAGE 1
15 1612403A LABEL, GRND. SYMBOL 1 14
43
16 1612546A LABEL, WARNING, BATTERY 1
17 1613057 LABEL,RELAY COIL 1
18 1613058 LABEL,RELAY,OUTPUT 1
19 1613059 LABEL, CONTROL, UVRI 1 B3
20 1613060 LABEL, CONTROL, LED, UVRI 1 B3
21 1613062A LABEL,WARNING,AC VOLTAGE 1 62
22 1613066 LABEL,MODEL UVRI 1
23 161693A LABEL,FS LOGO 1
24 170347A ENCLOSURE, FIBERGLASS, UVRI 1
26 2005240 (1-way radio) PCB,1-WAY RADIO (SEE TABLE) 1 55
27 2005320-05 PCBA, UVRIU ADAPTER, STAND ALONE 1 4
28 2005457 PCBA, SERIAL TO ETHERNET CONVERTER 1 INSERT RIVETS
B5 FROM DIRECTION SHOWN
29 2005698-01 PCBA,UV+ CONTROLLER 1 B2 NOTE: OMIT RADIO AND MTG. BRACKETS ON
30 229218A BRKT.T,BLOCK END 2 16 UVRI-IP & UVRI-LL MODELS
31 229282A TERM BLOCK,1-POLE,35MM DIN 4 RADIO 61
60
32 229283A CAP,END,TERM BLK,1 P. 2
33 230286A STUD/STANDOFF, HEX, 6-32, NYLON, 2 37
28
34 255385 MANUAL, UVRI 1 53 42 60 B2 SECTION A-A
35 259338 WIRING DIA., UVRI 0 DETAIL K
36 288691A-03 ANTENNA,LIGHTNING PROT,POLYPHASER 1 58
37 288810A-03 DIN RAIL ALUM UNCOATED 3" LENGTH 1 B2 44
38 7000A345-16 SCREW,MACH,HEX HD,1/4-20 X 1" 1 A A
39 7000A404-08 SCREW, MACH, PAN HD., PHILLIPS, 6-32 5 B4 C2 8
*
40 7000A404-16 SCREW, MACH, 6-32, PAN HD, PHIL, STEEL, ZINC CHR 2 B3 C2
41 7000427-04 SCREW, MACH., PAN HEAD, PHILLIPS, 6-32 2 B3 C2 3
42 7000427-06 SCREW, MACH., PAN HEAD, PHILLIPS, 6-32 4 C2
44
43 7000A428-10 SCREW, MACH, 8-32, PAN HD, PHIL, SS, 7 C2 31
44 7000444A-05 SCREW,MACH,PHIL,4-40 X 5/16 9
45 7000A455-06 SCREW, MACH, 10-32, TRS HD, SLOT, SS, 4 47 43 30 COVER HOLE WITH TAPE
46 7011A152-06 #8 SHT.MTL.SCREW,S.S. 2 C C D
47 7058A045 NUT, KEPS, SS, 8-32 1
13 32
48 7058A047 NUT,MACH SCR,KEPS,10-32 2
49 7058050A NUT,MACH SCR,KEPS,1/4-20 2
50 7058053A NUT, KEPS, 4-40, , SS, 6 5
51 7072024 WASHER, FLT, 1/4, 11/16 OD, 0.078"/0.049" THK, SS, 2
B2 K
52 7072148 WASHER, FLT, .250 ID, .625 OD, 0.093" THK, NEOPRENE, 1 C1 39
53 7074077A WASHER, SPLT, M4, 7.55mm OD, 0.8mm THK, 4 21
54 7075A002 WASHER,EXT TTH, #6,.31 OD,0.02" THK,STL,TRIV CHROM 2 C2
55 7099219A RIVET, BLND, , 5/32 DIA HD, ALUM, 2 C4 NUT FROM 142122A
27
56 8009021A BRACKET, POLYPHASER 1 43 15
E E 44
57 8009030A CATCH,SNAP-ACTION 1
58 8609101 BACKPLATE ASSY, UVRI 1 C1
59 8609104-01 CHASSIS ASSY, PCB 1 C1
44 51
60 8609108 BRKT, RADIO MT, LEFT 1
43
61 8609108-01 BRKT, RADIO MT, RIGHT 1
62 8609115 BRKT, INTRUSION SWITCH 1 B3
63 8609117-01 DOOR ASSY., PCB COVER 1 1
64 8609118 COVER ASSY., PCB 1
65 85001560 TEST PROC.,UVRI 0 19
66 r42-02-13 NEOPRENE SPONGE,1/8" X 1/2" X 8" LG. 1
67 r42-02-13 NEOPRENE SPONGE,1/8" X 1/2" X 2" LG. 2 B2
68 T300210-10-023 TWIRE (SEE WIRING DIAGRAM) 1 11
69 139285-03 CONN, RECPT, .100 CENTERS (JP6, UVRI-IP ONLY) 1 C3
70 C300422-09-143 C-WIRE, BLK (JP6, POS. 1 & POS. 3, UVRI-IP ONLY) 1 C3 50 10
50 D
43
39
33
12
39
2
20
52
67 41 49
9 38 DETAIL B
44
17 63 56 B
55 50 51
45
SECTION E-E
54 18
7 40 64 43 36
47 6
24
NOTE: REPLACE POLYPHASER
50 WITH 231208 HOLE PLUG ON
MODEL NO. RADIO/PCB PART NO. DESCRIPTION UVRI-IP & UVRI-LL MODELS Tolerances Unless
Otherwise Specified SI NA
I ISION
UVRIH 19901665-02 VHF,VX-2100 C0 C5
Angles ------- 0.5
UVRIU 19901665-06 UHF,VX-2100 C0 C5 X.XX ---------- 0.015 Federal Signal Corporation
UVRI N/A NO RADIO MODEL X.XXX ---------- 0.005 2645 FEDERAL SIGNAL DRIVE - UNIVERSITY PARK,IL 60466
FINISH: MATERIAL DESCRIBED AND INFORMATION CONVEYED IS
UVRI-LL 2005548 PCB,LAND LINE PROPRIETARY TO FEDERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION, IS OR
N/A MAY BE THE SUBJECT OF PATENT APPLICATIONS, AND
SECTION UVRI-IP 2005457 PCB,SERIAL ETHERNET C5 SEE ECR #9210 2/23/18 MAF MAYNOT BE COPIED, DIVULGED TO OTHERS, OR USED
FOR MANUFACTURING WITHOUT CONSENT.
D-D C4 SEE ECR #6903 1/17/17 MAF
REMOVE BURRS, SHARP CORNERS AND EDGES
UNIT OF DRAWN BY:
MATERIAL: MJF CHKD. BY: SC SCALE AT D SIZE:
MEASURE
C3 SEE ECR #6702 12/14/16 MAF DATE: DATE:
N/A NONE
NOTE: REFER TO WIRING DIAGRAM NO. 259338 FOR WIRING PART NO'S. C2 SEE ECR #6103 9/7/16 MAF RF 1/20/10 1/21/10
C1 SEE ECR #6104 8/18/16 MAF NAME: DRAWING NUMBER:
SECTION C-C
66 C0
REV
SEE ECR #4142
CHANGE
9/1/15
DATE
MAF
BY
FINAL ASSY.,UVRI 8609105
!
!
Figure"11.1"8"UVRI"Final"Assembly"and"Parts"List"
60!
10.3 Batteries SPEC 2.10.1

Battery Power Sonic PS-12350
PS SERIES
General Emergency Medical Fire &
Purpose Lighting Security
PS-12350
FEATURES
12V 35.0 AH @ 20-hr. • Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) technology for
12V 33.0 AH @ 10-hr. superior performance
Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery • Valve regulated, maintenance free spill proof construction
PS – General Purpose Series
• Power/volume ratio yielding excellent energy density
TERMINALS: (mm) • Rugged vibration and impact resistant ABS case
NB3: Heavy duty terminal posts with T6: Threaded insert with
and cover
nut and bolt fasteners 6mm stud fastener
16mm
• Gas recombination technology
16.5mm 6mm M6 • 5 year design life
APPROVALS
7mm
6mm
6mm
16mm
• Approved for transport by air. D.O.T., I.A.T.A., F.A.A.

and C.A.B. certified
• U.L. recognized
Torque: 3.9~5.4 Nxm Torque: 3.9~5.4 Nxm

• ISO9001:2015 – Quality management systems
DIMENSIONS: inch (mm) PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
L: 7.68 (195) Nominal Voltage 12 volts (6 cells)

W: 5.12 (130)
H: 6.46 (164) Nominal Capacity
HT: 7.01 (178) 20-hr. (1.65A to 10.80 volts) 35.0 AH
W Tolerances are +/- 0.04 in. 10-hr. (3.07A to 10.80 volts) 33.0 AH
(+/- 1mm) and +/- 0.08 in.
(+/- 2mm) for height
5-hr. (5.61A to 10.50 volts) 28.1 AH
dimensions. All data subject 1-hr. (20.7A to 9.60 volts) 20.7 AH
to change without notice.
Approximate Weight 23.15 lbs. (10.5 kg)
Internal Resistance (approx.) 12.0 milliohms
Sealed R echargeable Max Short-Duration Discharge Current (5 Sec.) 495.0 amperes

8
13340 01059
Battery
HT Shelf Life (% of nominal capacity at 68°F (20°C)

H
8
MO DE L PS-12350 NB
12 Volt 35.0 Amp. Hr. 1 Month 97%
R echarge able Sealed Lead-Acid Battery
D C power, constant voltage charge
3 Month 91%
6 Month 83%
C ycle use: 14.4 - 15.0V(20 C)
S tandby use: 13.5 - 13.8V(20 C )
Initial current: 10.5A MAX
Warn in g:
R isk of fire, explosion, or burns. 120350400211
Do not disassemble, heat above 60 C, or incinerate.
Operating Temperature Range

L Charge 32°F (0°C) to 104°F (40°C)
Discharge 5°F (-15°C) to 122°F (50°C)
L: 7.72HEADQUARTERS
GLOBAL (196) W: 5.14 (131) H: 6.22 (158)EMEA
POWER-SONIC HT: 7.00 (176) Case ABS Plastic
(USA AND INTERNATIONAL EXCLUDING EMEA) (EMEA – EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA)
Tolerances
Power-Sonic are +/- 0.04 in. (+/- 1mm)
Corporation and +/-
Smitspol 0.08
4, 3861 RSin. (+/- 2mm) for Power Sonic Chargers
Nijkerk, PSC-124000-PC
height
365 Cabela dimensions.
Dr Suite 300, All data subject to change without notice.
The Netherlands PSC-124000A-C
Reno, Nevada 89523 T NL: + 31 33 7410 700
USA T UK: + 44 1268 560 686
T: +1 619 661 2020 T FR: + 33 344 32 18 17
E: customer-service@power-sonic.com E: salesEMEA@power-sonic.com
Rev2: 08/20
To ensure safe and efficient operation always refer to the latest edition of our Technical Manual, as published on our website.
© 2018. Power-Sonic Corporation. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All data subject to change without notice. E&O.E www.power-sonic.com
PS SERIES
PS-12350 12V 33.0 AH @ 20-hr.
12V 30.7 AH @ 10-hr.
Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery

PS – General Purpose Series
SHELF LIFE & STORAGE
100 SHELF LIFE & STORAGE
SHELF LIFE & STORAGE LIFE CHARACTERISTICS IN STAND-BY IN
LIFE CHARACTERISTICS USESTAND-BY USE
Charging is not
LIFEAmbient
CHARACTERISTICS IN STAND-BY USE
necessary unless
Capacity Retention Ratio (%)
100 100% of capacity

is required. Charging is not Temperature 20˚C (68˚F)
Percentage of capacity
necessary unless 100
Capacity Retention Ratio (%)
80
5oC Charging before 100% of capacity
Ambient Temperature 20˚C (68˚F)
available (Ah%)
use is necessary is required.
Percentage of capacity
80 (41oF) to help recover 80 100
5fulloCcapacity. Charging before
available (Ah%)
60 use is necessary 60
(41oF) to help recover 80
full capacity. Float Charging Voltage
60 o 40 60
30 C 2.25 - 2.30 V/Cell
o
40 C 20 C o
o
40 (104oF) (86 F) (68oF) Float Charging Voltage
o 20 40
40oC 30 C
o
20oC 2.25 - 2.30 V/Cell
0 40 (104oF) (86 F) (68oF) 0 20
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 1 2 3 4 5
0 0 Years
Standing
0 2 4Period
6 (Months)
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 1 2 3 4 5
Standing Period (Months) Years
CHARGING CHARGERS
Cycle Applications: Apply constant voltage charge at Power Sonic offers a wide range of chargers suitable
2.35v/c – 2.45v/c (14.1 – 14.7v for 12v Monobloc) at 20°C. for batteries with a variety of capacities.
Initial charging current should be set at less than 0.25C
Please refer to our website for more information on
Amps. Switch to float charge to avoid overcharging.
our switch mode and transformer type chargers.
“Float” or “Stand-By” Service: Apply constant voltage
Please contact our technical department for advice if
charge of 2.25v/c – 2.30v/c (13.5 to 13.8 volts for 12v
you have difficulty in locating a suitable charger.
Monobloc at 20°C. When held at this voltage, the battery
will seek its own current level and maintain itself in a fully
charged condition. FURTHER INFORMATION
Temperature Compensation: Charging Voltage for both Please refer to our website www.power-sonic.com
Cyclic and Standby applications should be regulated in for a complete range of useful downloads, such as
relation to ambient temperature. As temperature rises product catalogs, material safety data sheets (MSDS),
charging voltage should be reduced to prevent overcharge ISO certification, etc.
and increased as temperature falls to avoid undercharge.
For further charging information including temperature
compensation factors, see Power Sonic Technical Manual/
Power Sonic Charger specifications.
APPLICATIONS
• General purpose • Medical
• Emergency lighting • Fire and security
GLOBAL HEADQUARTERS POWER-SONIC EMEA

(USA AND INTERNATIONAL EXCLUDING EMEA) (EMEA – EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA)
Power-Sonic Corporation Smitspol 4, 3861 RS Nijkerk,
365 Cabela Dr Suite 300, The Netherlands
Reno, Nevada 89523 T NL: + 31 33 7410 700
USA T UK: + 44 1268 560 686
T: +1 619 661 2020 T FR: + 33 344 32 18 17
E: customer-service@power-sonic.com E: salesEMEA@power-sonic.com
Rev2: 08/20
To ensure safe and efficient operation always refer to the latest edition of our Technical Manual, as published on our website.
© 2018. Power-Sonic Corporation. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All data subject to change without notice. E&O.E www.power-sonic.com
10.4 Smoke Sensor

Smoke Detector Silent Knight SK-PHOTO
Low Frequency Sounder Base Silent Knight BS200-LF
SK-PHOTO, SK-PHOTO-T, and
SK-PHOTOR
Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors
The SK-PHOTO is a photoelectric smoke detector, the SK PHOTO-T is a
photoelectric smoke detector with thermal and SK-PHOTOR is a
photoelectric detector with remote test capability. These plug in smoke
detectors, with integral communication, provide features that surpass
conventional detectors and are for use with the Honeywell Silent Knight
series fire alarm control panels (FACPs).
SK-PHOTO and SK-PHOTO-T are plug-in type smoke sensors that combine
a photoelectric sensing chamber with addressable analog
communications. Point ID capability allows each detector’s address to be
set with rotary address switches, providing exact detector locations for
selective maintenance when chamber contamination reaches
unacceptable levels. SK-PHOTO (BASE INCLUDED)
SK-PHOTO and SK-PHOTO-T have a unique optical sensing chamber that

is engineered to sense smoke produced by a wide range of combustion
sources. In the SK-PHOTO-T, dual electronic thermistors add 135ºF (57ºC)
thermal technology to maximize detection.
The SK-PHOTOR is a remote test capable detector for use with the DNR/
DNRW duct smoke detector (not included).
COMPATIBILITY
SK-Photo, and SK-Photo-T are compatible with the following detector bases:
B210LP: 6” base (included)
B501: 2 wire base
B224RB: Relay base
B224BI: Isolator base
F E AT U R E S & B E N E F I T S
• Sleek, low-profile • Superior EMI • Detector transmits • Plug-in mounting • Listed for use in duct
design resistance for signal to indicate provides ease of applications
reliability maintenance is installation
• Base included • Rotary address
required
• Simple field cleaning • Tamper-proof feature switches for fast
• Reliable analog
for code compliance • Optional remote LED available on mounting installation
communications for
annunciator (System bases
trouble-free operation • Variety of mounting • UL Listed
Sensor ® PN RA100Z)
options to meet any
• Age resistant polymer • FM Approved
application
housing
• Dual LED indicators
• Dual electronic
for 360º visibility
thermistor design on
the SK-Photo-T
SK-PHOTO, SK-PHOTO-T and SK-PHOTOR Technical Specifications
For a complete listing of all
compliance approvals and
certifications, please visit
www.silentknight.com.
Microsoft, Windows, and

the Windows Logo are
registered trademarks
or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Silent Knight®, System

Sensor® and Honeywell®
are registered
trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc.
This document is not

intended to be used for
installation purposes. We
try to keep our product
information up-to
date and accurate. We
cannot cover all specific
PHYSICAL ACCESSORIES applications or anticipate
Height: 2.0” (5.0 cm) RA100Z: Remote LED annunciator all requirements. All
specifications are subject
Diameter: 4.1” (10.4 cm) installed in B501 base XR2B: Detector removal tool. A removal and
to change without notice.
replacement tool for SK series plug-in detectors.
ELECTRICAL Includes the T55-127-000 For Technical Support,
Operating Voltage: 15–32VDC M02-04-01: Detector test magnet. call 800-446-6444.
Standby Current: 300 μA @ 24VDC Maximum M02-09-00: Test magnet with telescoping handle
Alarm Current: 6.5mA @ 24VDC max (with LED on) XP-4: Extension Pole for XR2B. Extends from 5 –
15 ft.
ENVIRONMENTAL T55-127-000: Detector Removal Head
Operating Temperature BCK-200B: Black Detector Kit. For SK series
SK-Photo: 32º – 120ºF (0ºC – 49ºC) detectors
SK-Photo-T: 32º – 100ºF (0ºC – 38ºC)
Humidity: 10% – 93% non-condensing COMPATIBILITY
The SK-PHOTO, SK-PHOTO-T and SK-PHOTOR
OTHER RATINGS are compatible with the following Honeywell
SK-Photo-T Thermal: Fixed temperature set point Silent Knight fire alarm control panels:
135ºF (57ºC) 6820: Addressable fire alarm control panel
Velocity: 0 – 4000 fpm (0 – 20 m/sec) 6820EVS: Addressable fire alarm control panel
with an emergency mass notification system.
INSTALLATION 6808: Addressable fire alarm control panel
The SK-PHOTO and SK-PHOTO-T plug into a 6700: Addressable fire alarm control panel
compatible Silent Knight series detector bases. The 5700: Addressable fire alarm control panel
SK-PHOTOR is a remote test capable detector head 5808: Addressable fire alarm control panel
included within the DNR (W) duct smoke detector.
5820XL: Addressable fire alarm control panel
ORDERING INFORMATION
5820XL-EVS: Addressable fire alarm control panel
with an emergency mass notification system.
SK-PHOTO: Photoelectric smoke detector
SK-PHOTO-T: Photoelectric smoke detector with
thermal (135°F fixed temperture)
SK-PHOTOR: Photoelectric detector with remote
test capability
For more information

Learn more about Honeywell Silent Knight and other
products by visiting www.silentknight.com
Honeywell Silent Knight

Northford, CT 06472 Doc 350118 | Rev G | 11/17
800-328-0103 © 2017 Honeywell International Inc.
INTELLIKNIGHT ACCESSORY
B200S/B200S-LF
Intelligent Sounder Base
The B200S sounder base series is designed for new and existing commercial dwelling unit applications. It offers
maximum flexibility in installation, configuration, and operation to meet or exceed UL 268 and UL 464
requirements.
For more information about the IntelliKnight system, or to locate your nearest source, please call
1-800-328-0103.
B200S/B200S-LF
The sounder base “listens in” to the communication
between the attached sensor head and the fire alarm
control panel (FACP) to adopt the same address as the
detector, but as a unique device type on the loop. The
FACP can then use that address to command an individual
sounder — or a group of sounders — to activate. In
addition, the FACP’s will enable custom tone patterns.
The B200S series sounder bases recognize the System
Sensor synchronization protocol. This enables it to be used
as a component of the general evacuation signal — along
with other System Sensor horns, horn strobes, and chimes
— when connected to a FACP output programmed as B200S-LF B200S
sounder base power.
The B200S-LF low frequency sounder base is designed to
meet the NFPA 72 sleeping space requirement to produce a
Compatibility
fundamental frequency of 520 Hz +/- 10% with a square The B200S series is compatible with the
wave or its equivalent. Studies show that a lower frequency, following SK-series detectors programmed for
centered around 520 Hz, is the most ideal to awaken System Sensor protocol (Firmware version of
sleeping occupants, even those with mild to severe hearing 13.0 or higher):
loss. • SK-Fire-CO Addressable Combination Fire and
Features CO Detector
• SK-Photo Photoelectric Smoke Detector and
• Addressability for maximum configuration flexibility
SK-Photo-T Photoelectric Smoke Detector with
• Supports Continuous, ANSI Temporal 3, ANSI Temporal 4,
and March Time tones Thermal
• Custom tone capability with some FACP models • SK-Acclimate Multicriteria Photoelectric Smoke
• Ability to synchronize with other System Sensor Detector
notification devices • SK-Ion Ionization Smoke Detector
• UL 268 and UL 464 compliant • SK-Heat Fixed Temperature Thermal Detector,
• Pre-wire mounting plate fits various junction box sizes SK -Heat-ROR Rate-of-Rise Detector with
• Uses a mechanical locking feature that prevents the Thermal, and SK-Heat-HT Fixed High
removal of the attached sensor head Temperature Thermal Detector
• No external relays and input modules needed to The B200S/B200S-LF are compatible with the
supervise the Aux power
following IntelliKnight FACP’s:
• 520 Hz +/– 10% square wave tone (B200S-LF )
5700
Installation 5808
The B200S series sounder bases can be mounted directly 5820XL
to 4” (10.16 cm) square, 4” (10.16 cm) octagon, 3 1/2” (8.9 5820XL-EVS
cm) octagon, single-gang or double-gang junction boxes.
P/N 351565 Rev A
© 2014 Honeywell International Inc.
INTELLIKNIGHT ACCESSORY
Model B200S/B200S-LF
Sounder Base
Wiring B200S/B200S-LF
Specifications Sound Output

Physical Volume Greater than 85 dBA minimum
Height: 2.0” (5.08 cm) less sensor measured in a UL reverberant room
at 10 feet, 24 Volts (in continuous
Width: 6.875” (17.46 cm) tone).
Shipping Weight: B200S - .50 lb. (227gm)
B200S-LF - .60 lb. (272gm) Ordering Information
B200S Intelligent Sounder Base
Electrical B200S-LF Intelligent Low Frequency Sounder
Aux Power Voltage 16 to 33 VDC (VFWR) Base
Aux Power Standby M02-04-01 Detector Test Magnet
Current .55 mA maximum
M02-09-01 Telescoping Test Magnet
Aux Power Alarm
Current B200S 35 mA maximum
Aux Power Alarm
Current B200S-LF 140 mA maximum
SLC Operating Voltage 15 to 32 VDC
SLC Standby/Alarm Current 300 µA max (base only)
Environmental
Operating Temperature: 32ºF – 120ºF (0ºC – 49ºC)
Humidity: 10% – 93% non-
condensing
This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to

keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all
specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject
to change without notice. For more information, contact Silent Knight 12
Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 Phone: (800) 328-0103, Fax: (203)
484-7118. For Technical Support, Please call 800-446-6444.
www.silentknight.com
Assembled In America
10.5 Addressable Interface Device, SPEC 2.6

Addressable Interface Device Silent Knight SK-Monitor
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
I56-3442-000
7550 Meridian Circle, Maple Grove, MN 55369-4927
763-493-6455; 800-328-0103 Fax: 763-493-6475
SK-Monitor Module http://www.silentknight.com
Specifications
Normal Operating Voltage: 15 to 32 VDC
Maximum Current Draw: 5.0 mA (LED on)
Average Operating Current: 375µA (group poll), 350 μA (direct poll), 600 μAmps (communication, IDC shorted)
EOL Resistance: 47K Ohms
Max. IDC wiring resistance: 1,500 Ohms
Maximum IDC Voltage: 11 Volts
Maximum IDC Current: 450µA
Temperature Range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Humidity: 10% to 93% Non-condensing
Dimensions: 41⁄2˝ H x 4˝ W x 11⁄4˝ D (Mounts to a 4˝ square by 21⁄8˝ deep box.)
Accessories: SMB500 Electrical Box
Before Installing Figure 2. Module mounting:

This information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to NOTE: For UL Listed security installations, the SK-Monitor must be mounted
the control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the within the control panel enclosure.
modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the opera-
tor and local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Dis-
connect power to the control panel before installing the modules.
NOTICE: This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment.
General Description
The SK-Monitor Module is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire systems,
where the individual address of each module is selected using the built-in
rotary switches. It provides either a Class A or Class B fault tolerant initiating
device circuit (IDC) for normally open contact fire alarm and supervisory de-
vices, or either normally open or normally closed security devices. The mod-
ule has a panel controlled LED indicator.
ISOLATED
Compatibility Requirements QUADRANT
To ensure proper operation, this module shall be connected to a compatible
Silent Knight system control panel (list available from Silent Knight).
Figure 1. Controls and Indicators:
C1066-00
Wiring
NOTE: All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and
regulations. This module is intended for power limited wiring only.
1.
Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropri-
ate wiring diagrams.
2. Set the address on the module per job drawings.
3. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in Figure 2.
C1067-00
Mounting
The SK-Monitor mounts directly to 4-inch square electrical boxes (see Figure
2). The box must have a minimum depth of 21⁄8 inches. Surface mounted elec-
trical boxes (SMB500) are available from Silent Knight.
SK-460-013 1 I56-3442-000
Figure 3. Typical 2-wire initiating circuit configuration, NFPA Style B OR SECURITY SYSTEMS:
NOTE: For UL Listed security installations, the SK-Monitor must be mounted within the control panel enclosure.
)–( )–(
TO NEXT FROM PANEL OR
DEVICE )+( )+( PREVIOUS DEVICE
MONITOR
ANY NUMBER OF UL LISTED CONTACT MODULE
CLOSURE DEVICES MAY BE USED. DO NOT MIX CONNECT MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE
FIRE ALARM INTIATING, SUPERVISORY, OR CONTROL PANELS ONLY
SECURITY DEVICES ON THE SAME MODULE.
)–(
)+(
47K EOL SIGNAL LINE CIRCUIT (SLC)

RESISTOR 32 VDC MAX.
ELR-47K TWISTED PAIR
IS RECOMENDED
INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) - NFPA STYLE B

POWER LIMITED: 450µA MAX. @ 11 VDC MAX
ALL WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED
INSTALL CONTACT CLOSURE DEVICES PER
MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
C0918-00
Figure 4. Typical 4-wire fault tolerant initiating circuit configuration, NFPA Style D:
)–( )-(
TO NEXT FROM PANEL OR
DEVICE )+( )+( PREVIOUS DEVICE
MONITOR
MODULE
ANY NUMBER OF UL LISTED CONTACT
CLOSURE DEVICES MAY BE USED. DO NOT MIX CONNECT MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE
FIRE ALARM INTIATING, SUPERVISORY, OR CONTROL PANELS ONLY
SECURITY DEVICES ON THE SAME MODULE.
)–(
)+(
SIGNAL LINE CIRCUIT (SLC)

32 VDC MAX.
EOL RESISTOR IS TWISTED PAIR
INTERNAL AT IS RECOMENDED
TERMINALS 8 & 9
ALL WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED

INSTALL CONTACT CLOSURE DEVICES PER
MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
C0919-00
SK-460-013 2 I56-3442-000
©2009 Silent Knight
10.6 Local Operating Console (LOC), SPEC 2.11

Operator Console Panel Silent Knight EVS-LOC
EVS-LOC Local Operator Console
Product Installation Document
12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472-1610 USA PN LS10189-001SK-E:A 07/01/2017 ECN 16-0218

203-484-7161 • FAX 203-484-7118 • www.silentknight.com
EVS-LOC Local Operator Console outer hinge pins are for the door, the inner
hinge pins are for the dead front. See
The EVS-LOC Local Operator Console is a Figure 3.
combination EVS-RVM Remote Voice Module 2. Remove AC power and disconnect the
and its associated 6860 annunciator which is backup batteries from the main control
compatible with the Emergency Voice System. panel.
Note: Installation and wiring of this device must be done When mounting on interior walls, use
in accordance with NFPA 72 and local ordinances. appropriate screws such as #10 sheet rock or
concrete screw to anchor into plaster. When
mounting on concrete, especially when moisture
is expected, attach a piece of ¾” plywood to the
concrete surface and then attach the EVS-LOC
to the plywood.
Surface Mounting
The cabinet can be mounted on the wall surface
by using the mounting holes in the back of the
cabinet.
1. Mark and predrill holes in the wall for the
center top keyhole mounting bolts using the
dimensions in Figure 2.
2. Place backbox over the top screws, level
and secure.
3. Install remaining fasteners and tighten.
16”
Figure 1: EVS-LOC cabinet
Key Shaped Holes
Compatibility
26.5”
The EVS-LOC is compatible with the Honeywell
Silent Knight 5820XL-EVS or 6820EVS.
For more information refer to the FACP
Installation manual.
Bottom Mounting Holes
Electrical Ratings
Standby Current: 100 mA

Alarm Current: 150 mA 20”
Figure 2: Cabinet Mounting Holes
Mounting the Cabinet Recessed Mounting
Follow these steps to recess mount the cabinet:
1. Remove doors by sliding them over the two
pins in the hinge bracket of the base. The 1. Cut a recess hole. There should be 1.5" to
bottom edge to the exterior side of the
1.75" of cabinet extruding from the wall, this Wiring to a FACP
should be measured from either the top
edge or bottom edge to the exterior side of See Figure 5 to properly wire the EVS-LOC to
the sheet rock. the FACP SBUS.
2. Mount the cabinet to wall studs by inserting a
screw through the cabinets side mounting
holes into the wall stud.
3. To reinstall the doors, the top hinge should
be aligned first, followed by the lower.
Door Pin
Supervised
Power
Limited
FACP
Dead
Front
Figure 5: Wiring the to the FACP
Installing the Microphone

To install the microphone:
1. Clip the microphone into the microphone
clip. See Figure 6.
Figure 3: EVS-LOC Cabinet
Board Layout
SBUS Address
DIPs
SBUS
VBUS2
Dead Front Panel

Mounting Holes
VBUS1 Figure 6: Hang Microphone into Microphone Clip
Aux 2. Insert microphone cord through hole at the
Audio
Input bottom of the dead front panel. See Figure 7.
Aux
Audio
Trigger
Figure 4: Back view of ECS-LOC board
2 EVS-LOC Installation Document — P/N LS10189-001SK-E:A 07/01/2017

.
Figure 7: Microphone Cord Inserted Through Dead

Front Panel Hole
3. Attach strain relief clip to microphone cord.
The strain relief clip should have about 2¾”
of microphone cord through it. See Figure 8.
2¾”
Figure 8: Installing Strain Relief Clip

4. Push the strain into the hole in the dead front
panel.
5. Restore AC power and reconnect the
backup batteries.
Optional Accessory
THUMBLTCH - Turn latch lock (not intended for

UL installations)
Silent Knight® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.
3 EVS-LOC Installation Document — P/N LS10189-001SK-E:A 07/01/2017

10.7 Amplifier, Pre-Amplifier, Tone Generator, SPEC
2.12

Amplifier Silent Knight EVS-INT50W
EVS-INT50W Internal Amplifier 3. Align the board with the mounting holes.
Installation Instructions Mount the EVS-INT50W inside the FACP
cabinet with the screws provided. See
Figure 2.
The EVS-INT50W Internal Amplifier can fit
inside the 5820XL-EVS cabinet. It is used to
amplify the audio message for distribution
throughout the facility for the Emergency
Communication System.
Compatibility
The EVS-INT50W is compatible with the Silent

Knight 5820XL-EVS FACP. For programming
and DIP switch settings, refer to Installation
manual for 5820XL-EVS (PN LS10061-001SK-
E).
Figure 2: EVS-INT50W in FACP Cabinet
Board Layout & Mounting
4. Secure the board to the enclosure.
VBUS
SBUS Specifications
Standby Current: 52 mA
EVS-INT50W only Alarm Current: @ 25V 275 mA; @
70V 310 mA
Full Alarm load current: @ 25V 2840 mA; @ 70V
2900 mA
IN1 / OUT1 DIP Switch Power
Figure 1: Front View of EVS-INT50W
Mounting the EVS-INT50W

1. Open the cabinet door.
2. Remove AC power and disconnect the
backup batteries from the main control
panel.
PN LS10120-001SK-E Rev B
ECN 15-0176
1
EVS-INT50W Internal Amplifier Installation Instructions
Wiring to a FACP VBUS Wiring

See Figure 3 to properly wire the EVS-INT50W The VBUS is an analog voice bus that carries
to the FACP. the recorded voice messages from the ECS-
The Internal Amplifier must be powered by a VCM to the EVS-INT50Ws, or the voice
NAC programmed as Constant Auxiliary Power. messages generated from a system microphone
Refer to the FACP installation manual. to the EVS-INT50W.
The maximum resistance on the VBUS is 20.
EVS-INT50W
Connect the VBUS from the ECS-VCM to the
EVS-INT50Ws as shown in Figure 4.
EVS-VCM
FACP
EVS-INT50W
EVS-INT50W
Figure 3: Wiring the EVS-INT50W to the FACP Figure 4: VBUS Wiring
LS10120-001SK-E Rev B
ECN 15-0176
2
Setting the Device Address Wiring Lengths

Use the on-board DIP switches to select an ID
Table 1: Wire Lengths
number for the EVS-INT50W. Refer to Figure 5
to see how to set the DIP switches for the Number
desired ID number. Of Total Load Wire Distance in Feet
Speakers
@½ @1 18 16 14 12
Vrms Watts
W W AWG AWG AWG AWG
10 5 25Vrms 5W 3900 6200 9860 15680
70Vrms 25000 39700 63200 100520
20 10 25Vrms 10W 2125 3380 5375 8540
70Vrms 15200 24150 38400 61100
30 15 25Vrms 15W 1460 2320 3690 5870
70Vrms 11000 17500 27800 44200
40 20 25Vrms 20W 1100 1750 2780 4420
70Vrms 8500 13510 21500 34175
52 26 25Vrms 26W 760 1200 1920 3050
70Vrms 6100 9700 15400 24520
80 40 25Vrms 40W 550 875 1390 2200
Figure 5: DIP Switch 70Vrms 4100 6500 10360 16480
Once the ID number is set, you must add the 100 50 25Vrms 50W 450 715 1130 1800
EVS-INT50W to the system through 70Vrms 3500 5560 8850 14070
programming.
Note: EVS-INT50W is powered by a NAC. It will not be Note: The above table assumes a uniform distribution of
found using JumpStart AutoProgramming. the speakers, and that a max of 20% voltage drop
on the last speaker is allowed.
Speaker Wiring Figure 6 illustrates how to wire speakers to the
control panel using Class B (Style Y) supervision.
Each EVS-INT50W supplies one circuit for speaker
connection. The speaker circuit can be supervised
and wired Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z). The
speaker circuit is capable of 50 watts of power at 25
Vrms or 70.7 Vrms.
ECN 15-0176
3
Table 2: 520 Hz Speakers
Model
Description
Number
SPSCW Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, White
SPSCWH Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High
Candela, White
SPSCRH Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High
Candela, Red
SPSCW- Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Clear
CLR-ALERT Lens, ALERT, White
SPSCW-P Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Plain,
White
SPSCWH-P Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High
Candela, Plain, White
SPSR-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Plain,
Figure 6:Class B (Style Y) Speaker Configuration Red
Figure 7 illustrates how to wire speakers to the SPSRH-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High
control panel using Class A (Style Z) wiring. Candela, Plain, Red
SPSCWH-P Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High
Candela, Plain, White
SPSW- Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Amber
ALERT Lens, ALERT, White
SPSW- Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Clear
CLR-ALERT Lens, ALERT, White
SPSW-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Plain,
Red
SPSWH Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High
Candela, White
SPSWH-P Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High
Candela, Plain White
Figure 7: Class A (Style Z) Speaker Configuration
Compatible 520Hz Signaling

Speakers
Table 2: 520 Hz Speakers
Model
Description
Number
SPR Wall High-Fidelity Speaker, Red
SPW Wall High-Fidelity Speaker, White
SPCR Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker, Red
SPCW Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker, White
SPSR Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Red
SPSRH Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, High
Candela, Red
SPSW Wall High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, White
SPSCR Ceiling High-Fidelity Speaker Strobe, Red
ECN: 15-0176
4
10.8 Fire Alarm Mass Notification Speakers, SPEC
2.15.1

Back-Box System Sensor Amber Strobe SPSCWL-CLR-
ALERT
Ceiling Mount Clear Strobe System Sensor SCRL
I56-5846-002
Selectable Output
Horn Strobes, Chime Strobes 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174
800/736-7672, FAX: 630/377-6495
and Strobes – Ceiling Mount www.systemsensor.com
For use with the following models:

Ceiling Mount Horn Strobes: PC2RL, PC2WL
Ceiling Mount Chime Strobes: CHSCRL, CHSCWL
Ceiling Mount Strobes: SCRL, SCWL, SCWL-CLR-ALERT
Standard Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Humidity Range: 10 to 93% Non-condensing
Strobe Flash Rate 1 flash per second
Nominal Voltage: Regulated 12VDC or regulated 24DC/FWR
Operating Voltage Range: 8 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 16 to 33V (24V nominal)
Operating Voltage with MDL3 Sync Module: 8.5 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 16.5 to 33V (24V nominal)
Input terminal wire gauge: 12 to 18 AWG
DIMENSIONS FOR PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES MOUNTING BOX OPTIONS

CEILING PRODUCTS Diameter Depth 2-Wire Indoor Products
6.83" 2.47"
Strobe, Chime Strobe and Horn Strobe
(173.5mm) (62.7mm) 4" x 4" x 1½", Single Gang, Double Gang,
Strobe, Chime Strobe, and Horn Strobe with 6.92" 2.50" 4" Octagon, SBBCRL/WL (ceiling)
SBBCRL/WL Surface Mount Back Box (175.8mm) (63.5mm)
NOTICE: This manual shall be left with the owner/user of this equipment.
BEFORE INSTALLING produce temporal coded signals. Signals other than those used for evacuation
Please read the System Sensor Audible Visible Application Reference Guide, purposes do not have to produce the temporal coded signal. System Sensor
which provides detailed information on notification devices, wiring and recommends spacing notification appliances in compliance with NFPA 72.
special applications. Copies of this manual are available from System Sensor. SYSTEM DESIGN
NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. The system designer must make sure that the total current draw by the devices
Important: The notification appliance used must be tested and maintained on the loop does not exceed the current capability of the panel supply, and
following NFPA 72 requirements. that the last device on the circuit is operated within its rated voltage. The
GENERAL DESCRIPTION current draw information for making these calculations can be found in the
System Sensor series of notification appliances offer a wide range of audible tables within the manual. For convenience and accuracy, use the voltage drop
and visible devices for life safety notification. Our 2-wire horn strobes, chime calculator on the System Sensor website (www.systemsensor.com).
strobes and strobes come with 8 field selectable tone and volume combina- When calculating the voltage available to the last device, it is necessary to
tions and 7 field selectable candela settings. Intended for indoor applications consider the voltage due to the resistance of the wire. The thicker the wire, the
and approved for ceiling mount installations. smaller the voltage drop. Wire resistance tables can be obtained from electri-
2-wire horn strobes and strobes are public mode notification appliances in- cal handbooks. Note that if Class A wiring is installed, the wire length may
tended to alert occupants of a life safety event. The 2-wire chime strobe is be up to twice as long as it would be for circuits that are not fault tolerant.
a private mode notification appliance. The horn is listed to ANSI/UL 464 re- The total number of strobes on a single NAC must not exceed 69 for 24 volt
quirements (public mode) and the strobe is listed to ANSI/UL 1638 (public applications.
mode). 2-wire chime strobe is a private mode notification appliances intended AVAILABLE TONES
to alert trained personnel to investigate a life safety event and take appropriate System Sensor offers a wide variety of tones for your life safety needs, includ-
actions. The chime portion of the chime strobe is listed to ANSI/UL 464 (pri- ing temporal 3 pattern (½ second on, ½ second off, ½ second on, ½ second
vate mode) and the strobe portion is listed to ANSI/UL 1638 (private mode). off, ½ second on, 1½ off and repeat) which is specified by ANSI and NFPA 72
System Sensor strobes are designed to be used in 12 VDC, 24VDC, or 24V FWR for standard emergency evacuation signaling.
(full wave rectified) systems. System Sensor AV devices can be activated by a To select the tone, turn the rotary switch on the back of the product to the
compatible fire alarm control panel or power supply. Refer to the appropriate desired setting. (See Figure 1.) Available horn settings can be found in Table 1.
fire alarm control panel manufacturer or power supply for more information. Available chime settings can be found in Table 2.
System Sensor ceiling 2-wire horn strobes, 2-wire chime strobes, and strobes AVAILABLE CANDELA SETTINGS
are electrically backward compatible with the previous generation, since 1996, System Sensor offers a wide range of candela settings for your life safety
of notification appliances. They come enabled with System Sensor synchro- needs. In order to select your candela output, adjust the slide switch on the
nization protocol which requires connections to a power supply capable of rear of the product to the desired candela setting on the selector switch. (See
generating the System Sensor synchronization pulses, a FACP NAC output Figure 2.)
configured to System Sensor synchronization protocol, or the use of MDL3
module to generate the synchronization protocol. The candela setting can also be verified by looking into the small window on
the front of the unit. See Table 3 for candela settings for ceiling products. All
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS products meet the light output profiles specified in the appropriate UL Stan-
The National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, NFPA 72, requires that all noti- dards. (See Figures 3 to 5.)
fication appliances, used for building evacuation installed after July 1, 1996,
1 I56-5846-002
10/02/2018
FIGURE 1. AUDIO SELECTOR FIGURE 2. CANDELA SELECTOR FIGURE 3. LIGHT OUTPUT - VERTICAL DISPERSION, CEILING TO WALLS
TO FLOOR
Percent of
Degrees*
Rating
0 100
5-25 90
A0486-00 30-45 75
50 55
A0518.00
60 45
TABLE 1. HORN TONES TABLE 2. CHIME TONES 65 35
Volume Volume 70 35
Pos Tone Pos Tone
Setting Setting 75 30
1 Temporal High 1 1 Second Chime High 80 30
2 Temporal Low 2 1 Second Chime Low 85 25
3 Non-Temporal High 3 ¼ Second Chime High 90 25
4 Non-Temporal Low 4 ¼ Second Chime Low A0468-00
3.1 KHz
5 High 5 Temporal Chime High
Temporal
FIGURE 4. LIGHT OUTPUT – FIGURE 5. VERTICAL
3.1 KHz
6 Low 6 Temporal Chime Low HORIZONTAL DISPERSION DISPERSION, WALL TO FLOOR
Temporal
3.1 KHz Degrees* Percent of Rating Degrees* Percent of Rating
7 High 7 5 Second Whoop High
Non-Temporal 0 100 0 100
3.1 KHz 5-25 90 5-30 90
8 Low 8 5 Second Whoop Low
Non-Temporal
30-45 75 35 65
50 55 40 46
TABLE 3. CEILING-MOUNT STROBE CURRENT DRAW (mA) 55 45 45 34
8-17.5 60 40 50 27
16-33 Volts
Candela Volts 65 35 55 22
DC DC FWR 70 35 60 18
15 87 41 60 75 30 65 16
30 153 63 86 NOTE: Products set at 15 and 30 80 30 70 15
75 - 111 142 candela automatically work on 85 25 75 13
95 - 134 164 either 12V or 24V power supplies. 90 25 80 12
115 - 158 191 The products are not listed for Compound 45
150 - 189 228 24 85 12
12V DC operation when set to any to the left
177 - 226 264 other candela settings. Compound 45
24 90 12
to the right
CURRENT DRAW AND AUDIBILITY RATINGS This is generated text for figtxt.
For the horn strobe, the current draw and audibility ratings for each setting is
listed in Table 4. For the chime strobe, the current draw and audibility ratings
for each setting is listed in Table 5. For the strobe, the current draw for each
setting is listed in Table 3.
A0467-00
A0469-00
*Tolerance of ±1 degree is permitted.
TABLE 4. CEILING--MOUNT HORN STROBE CURRENT DRAW (mA) AND SOUND OUTPUT (dBA)
Current draw (mA) Sound Output (dBA)

Volume 8-17.5 VDC 16-33 VDC 16-33 FWR 8-17.5 V 16-33 V
Pos Tone
Setting 15 30 15 30 75 95 115 150 177 15 30 75 95 115 150 177 DC DC FWR
1 Temporal High 103 167 71 90 143 165 187 217 254 107 135 179 198 223 254 286 84 89 89
2 Temporal Low 96 165 54 71 137 161 185 211 249 78 101 151 172 199 229 262 75 83 83
3 Non-Temporal High 106 173 71 90 141 165 187 230 273 107 135 179 198 223 254 286 85 90 90
4 Non-Temporal Low 95 166 54 71 124 161 170 216 258 78 101 151 172 199 229 262 76 84 84
3.1 KHz
5 High 111 164 69 94 147 163 184 229 257 108 135 179 200 225 255 289 83 88 88
Temporal
3.1 KHz
6 Low 103 163 54 88 143 155 185 212 252 79 101 150 171 196 229 260 76 82 82
Temporal
3.1 KHz
7 High 111 172 69 94 144 164 202 229 271 108 135 179 200 225 255 289 84 89 89
Non‑Temporal
3.1 KHz Non-
8 Low 103 169 54 88 131 155 187 217 259 79 101 150 171 196 229 260 77 83 83
Temporal
NOTE: Products set at 15 and 30 candela automatically work on either 12V or 24V power supplies. The products are not listed for 12VDC operation when set to
any other candela settings.
2 I56-5846-002
10/02/2018
WIRING AND MOUNTING SHORTING SPRING FEATURE
All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electric Code System Sensor notification appliances come with a shorting spring that is pro-
and the local codes as well as the authority having jurisdiction. Wiring must vided between terminals 2 and 3 of the mounting plate to enable system con-
not be of such length or wire size which would cause the notification appli- tinuity checks after the system has been wired, but prior to installation of the
ance to operate outside of its published specifications. Improper connections final product. (See Figure 6.) This spring will automatically disengage when
can prevent the system from alerting occupants in the event of an emergency. the product is installed, to enable supervision of the final system.
Wire sizes up to 12 AWG (2.5 mm²) may be used with the mounting plate. The MOUNTING AND REMOVING APPLIANCE
mounting plate ships with the terminals set for 12 AWG wiring. 1. Attach mounting plate to junction box using two of the provided Philips
Make wire connections by stripping about 3/8"of insulation from the end of head screws. (See Figure 8.)
the wire. Then slide the bare end of the wire under the appropriate clamping 2. Connect field wiring according to terminal designations. (See Figures 6
plate and tighten the clamping plate screw. We provide a wire strip guide. See and 7.)
Figure 6 for wiring terminals and strip guide reference. 3. If the product is not to be installed at this point, use the protective dust
CAUTION cover to prevent contamination of the wiring terminals on the mounting plate.
Factory finish should not be altered: Do not paint! 4. To attach product to mounting plate:
a. Remove the protective dust cover.
CAUTION b. Hook the tabs on the top of the product housing into the grooves on mount-
Do not over tighten mounting plate screws; this may cause mounting plate ing plate.
to flex. c. Pivot the product into position to engage the terminals on the mounting
plate. Make sure that the tabs on the back of the product housing fully en-
FIGURE 6. WIRING TERMINALS, SHORTING SPRING, AND STRIP GUIDE gage with the mounting plate.
Shorting Spring
d. Hold product in place with one hand, and secure product by tightening the
single mounting screw in the front of the product housing.
Ceiling Models only: To remove product from the mounting plate, loosen the
captive mounting screw and press the locking button.
FIGURE 8. MOUNTING
WIRING TERMINALS
1. Negative (-). Line in and out
2. Positive (+). Line in and out
Strip Guide
A0475-01
SYSTEM WIRING
The 2-wire horn strobe, chime strobe and strobe only require two wires for
power and supervision. (See Figure 7.) Please consult your FACP manufac-
turer or power supply manufacturer for specific wiring configurations and
special cases.
FIGURE 7. 2-WIRE CIRCUIT
INPUT
FROM OUTPUT A0492-01
FACP TO
OR NEXT
PRIOR DEVICE
DEVICE OR EOL
+ +
– – Locking
A0367-02 button A0574-00
TABLE 5. CEILING-MOUNT CHIME STROBE CURRENT DRAW (mA) AND SOUND OUTPUT (dBA)
Current draw (mA) Sound Output (dBA)

Volume 8-17.5 VDC 16-33 VDC 16-33 FWR 8-17.5 V 16-33 V
Pos Chime Tone
Setting 15 30 15 30 75 95 115 150 177 15 30 75 95 115 150 177 DC DC FWR
1 1 Second High 96 165 47 69 117 137 165 202 238 63 90 147 169 184 212 245 61 62 62
2 1 Second Low 93 162 47 68 116 137 165 200 238 63 88 147 169 183 212 244 56 55 55
3 ¼ Second High 94 161 48 70 117 138 166 202 237 65 90 149 170 184 213 246 67 70 70
4 ¼ Second Low 93 157 48 69 116 137 164 199 236 64 89 148 168 184 216 244 61 61 61
5 Temporal High 93 163 48 70 116 138 165 199 238 64 89 148 169 184 212 245 64 66 66
6 Temporal Low 92 160 47 69 116 136 164 198 237 63 88 147 169 183 212 245 59 60 60
5 Second
7 High 98 169 54 77 124 146 173 206 245 75 100 155 178 193 221 255 76 78 78
Whoop
5 Second
8 Low 95 166 49 71 117 144 168 202 239 68 91 148 170 186 217 248 62 64 64
Whoop
NOTE: Products set at 15 and 30 candela automatically work on either 12V or 24V power supplies. The products are not listed for 12VDC operation when set to
any other candela settings.
3 I56-5846-002
10/02/2018
TAMPER SCREW FIGURE 10. SURFACE MOUNTING ON CEILING
For tamper resistance, the standard captive screw may be replaced with a Torx SBBCRL/SBBCWL
screw (sold separately).
1. To remove the captive screw, back out the screw and apply pressure to the
back of the screw until it disengages from the housing. Replace with Torx
screw. (See Figure 9.)
FIGURE 9. TAMPER SCREW
T15 Torx
#6-32, 5/8"
SCREW-TMPR-50
A0494-02
A0493-01 FIGURE 11. CUT-OUTS FOR SPEAKER (SPK) AND STROBE (STR)
INSTALLING A SURFACE MOUNT BACK BOX
1. The ceiling surface mount back box may be secured directly to the wall
or ceiling. Use of grounding bracket with ground screw is optional. (See
Figure 10.)
2. The ceiling mount box can be used on ceiling horn strobe, chime strobe,
strobe as well as ceiling speaker and speaker strobe models. Use the STR cut-
outs for ceiling horn strobe, chime strobe and strobe installation needs. (See A0495-00
Figure 11.)
3. Threaded knockout holes are provided for the sides of the box for ¾ inch
and ½ inch conduit adapter. Knockout holes in the back of the box can be FIGURE 12. KNOCKOUT AND V500/V700 REMOVAL FOR SURFACE
used for ¾ inch and ½ inch rear entry. MOUNT BACK BOX
4. To remove the ¾ inch knockout, place the blade of a flat-head screwdriver Wire Mold Removal
along the outer edge and work your way around the knockout as you strike
the screwdriver. (See Figure 12.)
½ inch
NOTE: Use caution not to strike the knockout near the top edge of the or ¾ inch
surface mount back box.
5. V500 and V700 raceway knockouts are also provided. Use V500 for low
profile applications and V700 for high profile applications. A0465-01 A0466-01
6. To remove the knockout, turn pliers up. (See Figure 12.)
WARNING
THE LIMITATIONS OF HORN/STROBES
The horn and/or strobe will not work without power. The horn/strobe gets its power The signal strobe may not be seen. The electronic visual warning signal uses an extremely
from the fire/security panel monitoring the alarm system. If power is cut off for any rea- reliable xenon flash tube. It flashes at least once every second. The strobe must not be
son, the horn/strobe will not provide the desired audio or visual warning. installed in direct sunlight or areas of high light intensity (over 60 foot candles) where the
The horn may not be heard. The loudness of the horn meets (or exceeds) current visual flash might be disregarded or not seen. The strobe may not be seen by the visually
Underwriters Laboratories’ standards. However, the horn may not alert a sound sleeper or impaired.
one who has recently used drugs or has been drinking alcoholic beverages. The horn may The signal strobe may cause seizures. Individuals who have positive photoic response to
not be heard if it is placed on a different floor from the person in hazard or if placed too visual stimuli with seizures, such as persons with epilepsy, should avoid prolonged exposure
far away to be heard over the ambient noise such as traffic, air conditioners, machinery to environments in which strobe signals, including this strobe, are activated.
or music appliances that may prevent alert persons from hearing the alarm. The horn The signal strobe cannot operate from coded power supplies. Coded power supplies
may not be heard by persons who are hearing impaired. produce interrupted power. The strobe must have an uninterrupted source of power in or-
NOTE: Strobes must be powered continuously for horn operation. der to operate correctly. System Sensor recommends that the horn and signal strobe always
be used in combination so that the risks from any of the above limitations are minimized.
FCC STATEMENT
System Sensor Strobes and Horn/Strobes have been tested and found to comply with the can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equip- of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
ment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION
For the latest Warranty information, please go to:

http://www.systemsensor.com/en-us/Documents/E56-4000.pdf
For Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems, please go to:
http://www.systemsensor.com/en-us/Documents/I56-1558.pdf
Speakers only: For the latest Important Assembly Information, please go to:
Warranty Limitations of Speakers Only:
Fire Alarm Systems Assembly Information
System Sensor® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International, Inc.
4 I56-5846-002
©2018 System Sensor. 10/02/2018
I56-0002-002
Selectable Output Speaker Strobes 3825 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174
– Wall and Ceiling Mount 800/736-7672, FAX: 630/377-6495

www.systemsensor.com
For use with the following models:
Wall Speakers: SPSRL, SPSWL, SPSRL-P, SPSWL-P, SPSRL-SP, SPSWL-CLR-ALERT
Ceiling Speakers: SPSCRL, SPSCWL, SPSCWL-P, SPSCWL-SP, SPSCWL-CLR-ALERT
Standard Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Humidity Range: 10 to 93% Non-condensing
Nominal Voltage (speakers): 25 Volts or 70.7 Volts
Maximum Supervisory Voltage: 50 VDC
Speaker Frequency Range: 400 – 4000 Hz
Power Settings: ¼, ½, 1, 2 Watts
Input terminal wire gauge: 12 to 18 AWG
Strobe Flash Rate: 1 flash per second
Nominal Voltage (strobes): Regulated 12VDC, regulated 24VDC or FWR
Operating Voltage Range (includes fire alarm
8 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 16 to 33V (24V nominal)
panels with built in sync):
Operating Voltage with MDL3 Sync Module: 8.5 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 16.5 to 33V (24V nominal)
DIMENSIONS FOR PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES MOUNTING BOX OPTIONS

WALL PRODUCTS Length Width Depth SPEAKER STROBES
Wall Speaker Strobe 6.5" (165 mm) 5.00" (127 mm) 2.30" (58.4 mm) SBBSPRL/WL (wall), SBBCRL/WL (ceil-
ing), 4" x 4" x 21/8"or deeper (When
CEILING PRODUCTS Length Width Depth
using 12AWG, 14 AWG, or adding extra
Ceiling Speaker Strobe 6.8" (173 mm) N/A 2.87" (73mm) wires in the box, a deeper box or exten-
WALL SURFACE MOUNT BACK BOX Length Width Depth sion ring is recommended.)
Speaker Strobe with SBBSPRL/WL Surface

6.62" (168mm) 5.12" (130 mm) 2.30" (58.4 mm)
Mount Back Box
CEILING SURFACE MOUNT BACK BOX Diameter Depth
Speaker Strobe with SBBCRL/WL Surface
6.92" (176 mm) 5.37" (116mm)
Mount Back Box
NOTICE: This manual shall be left with the owner/user of this equipment.
BEFORE INSTALLING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS
Please read the System Sensor Voice Evacuation Application Guide, which System Sensor also recommends installing fire alarm speakers in compliance
provides detailed information on speaker notification devices, wiring and with NFPA 72, ANSI/UL 1480 and NEC 760.
special applications. Copies of this manual are available from System Sensor.
SYSTEM DESIGN
NFPA 72 and NEMA guidelines should be observed. System Sensor also rec-
The system designer must make sure that the total current drawn by the de-
ommends installing fire alarm speakers in compliance with NFPA 72, ANSI/
vices on the loop does not exceed the current capability of the panel supply,
UL 1480 and NEC 760
and that the last device on the circuit is operated within its rated voltage. The
Important: The notification appliance used must be tested and maintained current draw information for making these calculations can be found in the
following NFPA 72 requirements. tables within this manual. For convenience and accuracy, use the voltage drop
GENERAL DESCRIPTION calculator on the System Sensor website (www.systemsensor.com).
System Sensor series of notification appliances offer a wide range of audible When calculating the voltage for the last device, it is necessary to consider
and visible devices for life safety notification. Our indoor speaker strobes the voltage drop due to the resistance of the wire. The thicker the wire, the
come with 7 field selectable candela setting. The strobe portion is designed smaller the voltage drop. Note that if Class A wiring is installed, the wire
to be used in 12 VDC, 24VDC, or 24V FWR (full wave rectified) systems. The length may be up to twice as long as it would be circuits that are not fault
speaker is designed to be used at either 25 or 70.7 volts, and operate at any tolerant. The total number of strobes on a single NAC must not exceed 69 for
one of four input power levels. Our speaker strobes are suitable for dry and 24 volt applications.
damp environments. These products are electrically backwards compatible
AVAILABLE CANDELA SETTINGS
with previous generation of System Sensor speaker strobes. With its low total
harmonic distortion, the System Sensor SPL series offers high fidelity sound System Sensor offers a wide range of candela settings for your life safety
output. needs. In order to select your candela output, adjust the slide switch on the
rear of the product to the desired candela setting on the selector switch. (See
Speakers Strobes are public mode notification appliances intended to alert oc- Figure 1.)
cupants of a life safety event. The speaker is listed to ANSI/UL 1480 (public
mode) and the strobe is listed to ANSI UL 1638 (public mode). The candela setting can also be verified by looking into the small window
on the front of the unit. See Tables 1 and 2 for candela settings for wall and
ceiling products. All products meet the light output profiles specified in the
appropriate UL Standards. (See Figures 2–4.)
1 I56-0002-002
12/10/2018
FIGURE 1. CANDELA SELECTOR FIGURE 4. LIGHT OUTPUT - VERTICAL DISPERSION, CEILING TO WALLS
TO FLOOR
Percent of
Degrees*
Rating
0 100
A0486-00 5-25 90
30-45 75
CURRENT DRAW AND AUDIBILITY RATINGS 50 55
For the strobe, the current draw for each setting is listed in Tables 1 and 2. 60 45
TABLE 1. WALL-MOUNT STROBE CURRENT DRAW (mA) 65 35
70 35
8-17.5
16-33 Volts 75 30
Candela Volts
80 30
DC DC FWR
85 25
15 88 43 60
90 25
30 143 63 83 NOTE: Products set at 15 and 30 A0468-00
75 - 107 136 candela automatically work on ei-
95 - 121 155 WIRING AND MOUNTING
ther 12V or 24V power supplies.
110 - 148 179 All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electric Code
The products are not listed for
and the local codes as well as the authority having jurisdiction. Wiring must
135 - 172 209 12V DC operation when set to any
not be of such length or wire size which would cause the notification appli-
185 - 222 257 other candela settings.
ance to operate outside of its published specifications. Improper connections
TABLE 2. CEILING-MOUNT STROBE CURRENT DRAW (mA) can prevent the system from alerting occupants in the event of an emergency.
8-17.5 Wire sizes up to 12 AWG (2.5 mm²) may be used with the mounting plate. The
16-33 Volts mounting plate ships with the terminals set for 12 AWG wiring.
Candela Volts
DC DC FWR Make wire connections by stripping about 3/8" of insulation from the end of
15 87 41 60 the wire. Then slide the bare end of the wire under the appropriate clamping
30 153 63 86 NOTE: Products set at 15 and 30 plate and tighten the clamping plate screw.
75 - 111 142 candela automatically work on See Figure 5 for wiring terminals and strip guide reference.
95 - 134 164 either 12V or 24V power supplies.
115 - 158 191 1. Connect the speaker. (See Figure 5.)
The products are not listed for 12V
150 - 189 228 DC operation when set to any other 2. There are two rotary switches on the back of the product. The first switch
177 - 226 264 candela settings. is used to select either 25 or 70.7 volts input and the second switch is used to
select the input power of ¼, ½, 1 or 2 watts. (See Figure 6.)
FIGURE 2. WALL LIGHT OUTPUT – FIGURE 3. VERTICAL FIGURE 5. WIRING DIAGRAM AND WIRING TERMINALS
HORIZONTAL DISPERSION DISPERSION, WALL TO FLOOR
Percent of Percent of
Degrees* Degrees*
Rating Rating
0 100 0 100
INPUT OUTPUT
5-25 90 5-30 90
(-) (-)
(+) To Next Device or EOL
30-45 75 35 65
From Amplifier (+)
50 55 40 46
55 45 45 34 (-) (-) To Next Device or EOL
From FACP (+) (+)
60 40 50 27
A0519-01
65 35 55 22
70 35 60 18
75 30 65 16 Wiring Terminals NOTE: Do not loop electrical wiring un-
80 30 70 15 1. Negative (-). Line in and out der terminal screws. Wires connecting
2. Positive (+). Line in and out the device to the control panel must be
85 25 75 13
3. Positive (+). Line in and out broken at the device terminal connec-
90 25 80 12
tion in order to maintain electrical su-
Compound 45
24 85 12 pervision.
to the left
Compound 45 FIGURE 6. SPEAKER WATTAGE AND VOLTAGE SETTINGS
24 90 12
to the right This is generated text for figtxt.
A0467-00
A0469-00
*Tolerance of ±1 degree is permitted.
A0419-01
2 I56-0002-002
12/10/2018
SHORTING SPRING FEATURE
System Sensor notification appliances come with a shorting spring that is pro- CAUTION
vided between terminals 2 and 3 of the mounting plate to enable system con- Do not over tighten mounting plate screws; this may cause mounting plate
tinuity checks after the system has been wired, but prior to installation of the to flex.
final product. (See Figure 7.) This spring will automatically disengage when
the product is installed, to enable supervision of the final system. FIGURE 8. WALL SPEAKER/STROBE
FIGURE 7. SHORTING SPRING
Strip Guide
WIRING TERMINALS
1. Negative (-). Line in and out
Shorting
Spring
A0499-02
AVAILABLE POWER SETTINGS

System Sensor offers a wide range of power settings for your life safety needs,
including ¼, ½, 1, and 2W. A0522-01
Sound levels data per UL 1480 can be found in Table 3.
FIGURE 9. CEILING SPEAKER/STROBE
TABLE 3. SOUND LEVELS FOR EACH TRANSFORMER POWER SETTING
Setting UL Reverberant UL Anechoic

(dBA @10 ft) (dBA @10 ft)
¼W 77 77
½W 80 80
1W 83 83
2W 86 86
CAUTION
A0521-02
Signal levels exceeding 130% rated signal voltage can damage the speaker.
Consequently, an incorrect tap connection may cause speaker damage. This
means that if a 25V tap is selected when a 70.7V amplifier is being used,
speaker damage may result. Therefore, be sure to select the proper taps for the
amplifier voltage/input power level combination being used.
MOUNTING AND REMOVNG APPLIANCE Locking

1. Attach mounting plate to junction box using two of the provided Philips Button
A0575-00
head screws. (See Figures 8 and 9.)
2. Connect field wiring according to terminal designations. (See Figure 5.) TAMPER SCREW
3. If the product is not to be installed at this point, use the protective dust For tamper resistance, the standard captive screw may be replaced with a Torx
cover to prevent contamination of the wiring terminals on the mounting screw (sold separately).
plate. 1. To remove the captive screw, back out the screw and apply pressure to the
4. To attach product to mounting plate: back of the screw until it disengages from the housing. Replace with Torx
a. Remove the protective dust cover. screw. (See Figure 10.)
b. Hook the tabs on the top of the product housing into the grooves on mount- FIGURE 10. TAMPER SCREW
ing plate.
T15 Torx
c. Pivot the product into position to engage the terminals on the mounting #6-32, 5/8"
SCREW-TMPR-50
plate. Make sure that the tabs on the back of the product housing fully en-
gage with the mounting plate.
d. H old product in place with one hand, and secure product by tightening the
single mounting screw in the front of the product housing.
Ceiling Models only: To remove product from the mounting plate, press the
A0502-01
locking button after loosening the captive mounting screw.
INSTALLING A SURFACE MOUNT BACK BOX
1. The surface mount back box may be secured directly to the wall or
CAUTION
ceiling. Use of grounding bracket with ground screw is optional. (See
The “hold in place” snaps are not intended to secure the product to the back
Figures 11 and 12.)
box. The product must be secured to the back box using the screws provided.
2. The wall mount box must be mounted with the up arrow pointing up. (See
Figure 13.)
CAUTION
NOTE: Ceiling Surface Mount Back Box SBBCR/CWL is a common back box
Factory finish should not be altered: Do not paint! for ceiling horn strobes, strobes and ceiling speakers and speaker strobes. Use
3 I56-0002-002
12/10/2018
the top mounting holes for ceiling speaker and speaker strobe products. (See FIGURE 13. SURFACE MOUNT BACK BOX UP ARROW
Figure 14.)
3. Threaded knockout holes are provided for the sides of the box for conduit
adapter. Knockout holes in the back of the box can be used for rear entry.
4. To remove the conduit knockout, place the blade of a flat-head screwdriver
along the outer edge and work your way around the knockout as you strike
the screwdriver. (See Figure 15A.)
A0481-00
NOTE: Use caution not to strike the knockout near the top edge of the
surface mount back box. FIGURE 14. CEILING INSTALLATION WITH A SURFACE MOUNT BACK
5. V500 and V700 raceway knockouts are also provided. Use V500 for low BOX : KEY HOLE PATTERN
profile applications and V700 for high profile applications.
6. To remove the knockout, turn pliers up. (See Figure 15B.)
FIGURE 11. SURFACE MOUNTING ON WALL
A0505-00
FIGURE 15A AND 15B. KNOCKOUT AND WIRE MOLD REMOVAL FOR
SURFACE MOUNT BACK BOX
Wire Mold Removal

A0523-01
FIGURE 12. SURFACE MOUNTING ON CEILING ½ inch

or ¾ inch
A0465-01 A0466-01
NOTE: Use caution not to strike the knockout near the top edge of the wall
version of the surface mount back box.
A0520-02
WARNING
THE LIMITATIONS OF SPEAKERS
Always make sure that the individual speakers are tested after installation per NFPA regu- ages. The speaker may not be heard if it is placed on a different floor from the person in
lations. The speakers may not be heard. The loudness of the speaker meets (or exceeds) hazard or if placed too far away to be heard over the ambient noise such as traffic, air
current Underwriters Laboratories’ standards. However, the speaker may not alert a conditioners, machinery or music appliances that may prevent alert persons from hearing
sound sleeper or one who has recently used drugs or has been drinking alcoholic bever- the alarm. The speaker may not be heard by persons who are hearing impaired.
FCC STATEMENT
System Sensor speakers have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION
For the latest Warranty information, please go to:

http://www.systemsensor.com/en-us/Documents/E56-4000.pdf
For Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems, please go to:
Speakers only: For the latest Important Assembly Information, please go to:
Warranty Limitations of Speakers Only:
Fire Alarm Systems Assembly Information
System Sensor® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International, Inc.
4 I56-0002-002
©2018 System Sensor. 12/10/2018
10.9 Visual Notification Appliance, SPEC 2.15.2

Mount Back Box Silent Knight SB-I/O
SB-I/O Surface
Mount Backbox
Easy to Install, U.L. listed for Indoor

and Outdoor Applications.
SB-I/O Surface Mount

Back Box
The SB-I/O Surface Mount Back
Box is for use with the PS-SA and
PS-DA models of pull stations. In
addition to being molded out of
increased UV stabilized polycar-
bonate material (94V-O), the SB-
I/O‘s mounting holes and bottom
conduit entry are molded with a
thin wall of material to provide
improved outdoor weatherability.
Features:
• UL Listed for indoor and outdoor
applications
• Molded Self-Sealing Mounting
Bosses
• CSFM Listed
• Snap Latches for Easy
Installation of the Pull Station
SB-I/O
• Two Reinforced 1/2” NPT
Connector Outlets (One Plug
Included)
• Single-gang Electrical Box
Mounting Holes (Knockout)
Compatibility
The SB-I/O is compatible with the following pull sta-
• Four #10 x 1.00” Mounting
tions:
Screws Included
PS-DA
PS-SA
Pull Station BackBox
SB-I/O shown assembled to Pull Station

(Pull Station Sold Separately)
This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We MADE IN AMERICA
try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot P/N 350052
cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifica- © 2008 Honeywell International Inc.
tions are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact
Silent Knight 7550 Meridian Circle Suite 100, Maple Grove, Mn 55369-
4927.
Phone: (800) 328-0103, Fax: (763) 493-6475.
10.10 Manual Station, SPEC. 2.14

Manual Station Silent Knight SK-PULL-DA
Wiring SK-PULL-DA
To Addressable Pull Station
Next
Document 52149 I56-3447-005
Addressable
From Device
FACP
SLC
SLC
SK-PULL-DA Addressable Pull Station

1 2 3 4
Document 52149 I56-3447-005 STRIP GAUGE
Description
The SK-Pull-DA Addressable pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station
with a key-lock reset feature. It provides Silent Knight intelligent fire alarm control panels
(FACP) with one addressable alarm initiating input. The addressable module is housed inside
the pull station. The SK-Pull-DA is compatible with all Silent Knight intelligent panels that
use the Intelligent Device Protocol (IDP). Refer to the FACP Installation Manual to determine
P0252-03
if Intelligent Device Protocol is supported. The SK-Pull-DA meets the ADAAG controls
P0267-00
and operating mechanisms guidelines (section 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a
5 lb. maximum pull force to activate the pull station. Operating instructions are molded into
the pull station handle along with Braille text. Molded Terminal numbers are also present. WARNING! Do not loop wiring under any
Conforms to ANSI/UL Standard 38. terminals. Break wire run to
maintain IDC supervision.
Ratings
Normal Operating Voltage: 24VDC.
Average Operating Current (LED Flash): 375 µA. CAUTION!
Maximum Operating Current (LED On): 5 mA. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of the pull station
Temperature Range: 32°F – 120°F (0°C – 49°C). cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been installed onto an
Relative Humidity Range: 10% - 93% non-condensing. electrical box.
Installation CAUTION!
The SK-PULL-DA Addressable pull station can be surface mounted to a SB-I/O surface Install the Silent Knight SK-PULL-DA addressable pull station in accordance with these
backbox or semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4˝ (10.16 cm) instructions, applicable NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and
square electrical box. The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the SK-PULL-DA is to the requirements of the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices
be semi-flush mounted. should be conducted in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow
these directions may result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Silent Knight
Operation
is not responsible for devices that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained.
To activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word
‘ACTIVATED’ appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull station ADA Compliance
is reset. The pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open For ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the
(N/O) switch which closes upon activation of the pull station. maximum forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space
Resetting the Pull Station allows parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is
1. Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. 54 inches (137.16 cm).
2. Open the door until the handle returns to normal.
3. Close and lock the door.
NOTE: Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the ‘Normal’ position.
Opening the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch.
1 I56-3447-005
07-24
Setting the SK-PULL-DA Address
The SK-PULL-DA Addressable pull station is factory preset with address ‘00.’ Set the ad-
dress for the pull station by turning the rotary address switches on the addressable module
mounted inside the pull station. Only one device per address is allowed. Multiple modules
may not be set to the same address on the Signaling Line Circuit. Once the address is set,
record it in the space provided on the product ID label located inside the pull station.
15 0 0
14 1 1
13 2 2
12 3
3
11 4 4
3 2 1 4
10 5 5
9 8
9 8
7 6 7 6
TENS ONES
AL
RM
NO
ACT
IVAT
ED
P/N50997 REV-A LOOP ADDRESS
M
UL NOTIFIER
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
NBG-12
UL Approved
LISTED
Series
NON-CODEDLabel HereLABEL
AHDHDH
23424
FIRE ALARM BOX
14 15
0 REFER TO DOCUMENT
13
1
12
2
11 3
10 4
9 5
8 6
7
ADDRESS 0
15 0 1
14 1
13 2 2
12 3
Note – Opening the pull 3
station door will not activate 11 LOOP 4
or deactivate the alarm switch.
4
10 5 5
9 8
9 8
7 6 7 6
LED OPERATION
Alarm:
Steady RED
Normal:
Flash GREEN
Note: LED is
visible through
LED
translucent handle.
P0130-00
ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES Northford, CT 06472
203-484-7161
Fax: 203-484-7118
www.silentknight.com
Silent Knight® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc. 2 I56-3447-005
©2017 Honeywell. 07-24
11.11 Surge Protector, SPEC 2.5

Surge Protector Ditek DTK-120HW
Surge Protector Ditek DTK-TSS3
Surge Protector Ditek DTK-2MHLP
INSTALL INSTRUCTIONS
DTK-2MHLPxxFWB Series, DTK-2MHLPxxBWB Series,
DTK-2MHTPWB, MB10, 2MB-5MB, and DTK-2MHLP Module
DITEK Corporation This Surge Protective Device (SPD) is a high performance device, designed to provide protection
for sensitive electronic loads connected to communication loop circuits that have been isolated
ONE DITEK CENTER
1720 Starkey Road
Largo, FL 33771
from the public switched telephone network or where the SPD is directly connected to the
INSTALLATION electronic device. Maximum protection will only be achieved if the SPD is properly installed.
Please read and follow the installation instructions carefully.
NOTICE: This SPD should be installed and grounded, by a licensed contractor, per the applicable
requirements of the NEC and the following instructions. These devices are only to be employed on
communication loop circuits which have been isolated from the Public Switched Telephone Network.
APPLICATION
DTK-MB10 base can be installed inside a 4”x4” electrical boxes and other locations where there is a space
constraint. This base is available as a 1 up array (standard) or 2 through 5 up array for multiple pair
terminations at one point of use. Specify DTK-2MB, 3MB, 4MB or 5MB for 2 through 5 up arrays.
DTK-2MHLPxxFWB surge module is for hardwired series installations for voltages ranging from 5-75 Volts
on circuits that operate at less than 1 Amp.
DTK-2MHLPxxBWB surge module is for hardwired series installations for voltages ranging from 5-75 Volts
on circuits that operate at less than 5 Amps.
DTK-2MHTP surge module is for hardwired series installations for dialer circuits and POTS lines for
communication circuits.
INSTRUCTIONS:
Caution: Measure all voltages to insure applied voltage does not exceed the voltage rating of the unit.
Improper installation voids the warranty.
MB BASE INSTALLATION
1. Turn off the power at the circuit to be protected before beginning installation.
2. Securely mount the snap track between the field wiring and your equipment to be protected. Use the two #8 screws
provided to fasten the snap track.
3. Connect ground to the ground terminal using a minimum of 14 AWG wire, make this conductor as short as possible.
Ground Resistance Rule: Max ground resistance is 25 Ohms, 5 Ohms or less is optimum.
This cannot be an assumed value and must be measured to assure proper grounding.
4. Connect the supply/field wiring to the UNPROTECTED side of the MB base. Connect the 1st pair to
position 1+ and 1- , than the 2nd pair to position 2+ and 2-.
5. Connect the equipment wiring to the PROTECTED side of the MB base. Connect the 1st pair to
6. Make sure the UNPROTECTED supply/field wiring and PROTECTED equipment wiring conductors do not occupy
the same space or conduits.
7. Make sure the wire distance from the base to protected equipment is about 3’ of conductor length. This can be a
coiled service loop if necessary.
MODULE INSTALLATION
Insert the module into the base making sure the polarizing keys in the block are aligned with the notches cut into
the edge card printed circuit board.
8. After all connections have been made and no hazards exist, restore power.
GROUNDING
EQUIPMENT
SUPPLY WIRING EQUIPMENT WIRING

or FIELD WIRING #14AWG MIN.
3’ SERVICE LOOP
GND Pair 1
Pair 1
Pair 2 Pair 2
DTK-2MHLP BASE
ALLOW FOR 3’ OF CONDUCTOR LENGTH

BETWEEN BASE AND PROTECTED EQUIPMENT
Drawn By: RMitchell 3-3-11 DITEK Technical Support Available 24/7

Doc # INT-100132-001
Revised By: RMitchell 6-14-16 1-888-472-6100 www.ditekcorp.com Part No. 191556 Rev. 4
DTK-2MHLPxxFWB Series, DTK-2MHLPxxBWB Series,
DTK-2MHTPWB, MB10, 2MB-5MB, and DTK-2MHLP Module
Illustrations Page
DITEK Corporation
ONE DITEK CENTER
1720 Starkey Road
Largo, FL 33771
INSTALLATION 1.15
1.03
ED
CT
TE
O
PR
GND
E D
Snap Track
3.25 1+ CT
1- 2
+ 2 TE
- O
PR
UN
1.50
DTK-MB10
DTK-2MHLPxxFWB
DTK-2MHLPxxBWB
DTK-2MHTPWB
DTK-2MB DTK-4MB
DTK-3MB DTK-5MB
Drawn By: RMitchell 3-3-11 DITEK Technical Support Available 24/7 Doc # INT-100132-001
Revised By: RMitchell 6-14-16 1-888-472-6100 www.ditekcorp.com Part No. 191556 Rev. 4
DTK-120HW
This Surge Protective Device (SPD) is a high performance device, designed to provide protection
DITEK Corporation
ONE DITEK CENTER
1720 Starkey Road
for sensitive electronic loads connected to service panels, fire panels, or where the SPD is
Largo, FL 33771
directly connected to the electronic device. Maximum protection will only be achieved if the SPD
is properly installed.
INSTALLATION
NOTICE: This SPD should be installed and grounded, by a licensed contractor, per the applicable
requirements of the NEC and the following instructions.
APPLICATION
Type 1 and Type 2 SPD for hardwired parallel installations on 120 VAC single phase branch circuits.
INSTRUCTIONS:
Caution: Measure all voltages to insure applied voltage does not exceed the voltage rating of
the unit. Improper installation voids the warranty.
Warning: No Serviceable Parts-Attention:Aucune pièce remplaçable ou réparable
For Use Only With A Flexible Conduit System Or Direct Connection To Panel
NOTE: Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms symmetrical
Amperes, when protected by a 20 Ampere circuit breaker rated 120 Volts minimum.
1. Turn off the power at the circuit breaker or main before beginning installation.
2. Remove front cover from the panel.
3. Remove 3/4" knockout on side of panel box.
4. Unscrew nut from unit.
5. Feed all wires and the DTK-120HW nipple through knockout hole then through nut,
tighten nut securing the unit.
6. For ALARM/CONTROL PANEL INSTALLATION, refer to diagram #1. In this application,

the DTK-120HW’s leads must be as short as possible to the connection point.
Use a 3-position barrier strip, or twist-on wire connectors for Line and Neutral conductors
and a multi-position grounding bus bar for Ground conductors. Barrier strip and connectors are not
provided. Allow the unit reaction time by maintaining no less than 3’ of conductor length between the
connection point and the equipment it is protecting.
7. For ELECTRICAL PANEL/DISCONNECT INSTALLATION, refer to diagram #2. In this

application, connect the DTK-120HW to the load side of the fuse or circuit breaker. Ensure the leads
are as short as possible with the ground wire being the shortest of all.
8. For JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION, refer to diagram #3. In this application, ensure the
DTK-120HW’s leads are as short as possible to the connection point. Use a 3-position barrier strip, or
ION
twist-on wire connectors for Line and Neutral conductors and a multi-position grounding bus bar for
Ground conductors. Barrier strip and connectors are not provided. Allow the unit reaction time by
maintaining no less than 3’ of conductor length between the connection point and the equipment it is
protecting.
NOTE: The LED must be on, if the LED is off then surge protection is compromised and the unit
must be replaced.
Ground Resistance Rule: Max ground resistance is 25 ohms, 5 ohms or less is optimum.
DITEK Technical Support Available 24/7

Updated By: M. Molinari 4-9-21 1-888-472-6100 Doc # INT-100008-001
Checked By: M. Molinari 4-9-21 www.ditekcorp.com Part No. 191509 Rev. 9
DTK-120HW
DITEK Corporation
ONE DITEK CENTER
Illustrations Page
1720 Starkey Road
Largo, FL 33771
ALARM PANEL/CONTROL PANEL INSTALLATION DIAGRAM #1

INSTALLATION 120 VAC Power In
Circuit Board
DTK-120HW
Connection Point
3’ Conductor Length
#12 AWG Minimum
Battery Battery
ELECTRICAL PANEL/DISCONNECT INSTALLATION DIAGRAM #2
White Wire
Neutral Bus DTK-120HW
Black wire
Green Wire
Ground Bus
JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION DIAGRAM #3

Black wire
Black wires 120 VAC Power In
White Wires
3’ Conduit Length
To Alarm Panel
White Wire
Green Wire
Green Wires
DITEK Technical Support Available 24/7

Updated By: M. Molinari 4-9-21 1-888-472-6100 Doc # INT-100008-001
Checked By: M. Molinari 4-9-21 www.ditekcorp.com Part No. 191509 Rev. 9
DTK-TSS3
This Surge Protection Device (SPD) is a high performance device, designed to provide protectionfor
sensitive electronic loads connected to communication loop circuits that have been isolatedfrom the public
DITEK Corporation switched telephone network or where the SPD is directly connected to the electronic device. Maximum
ONE DITEK CENTER
1720 Starkey Road
Largo, FL 33771 protection will only be achieved if the SPD is properly installed.
INSTALLATION
NOTICE: This SPD should be installed by a licensed contractor in accordance with the National
and Local Electrical Codes and the following instructions.
APPLICATION
Surge suppression for hardwired series installations on loop circuits or communication circuits in a
NEMA 4X enclosure.
INSTRUCTIONS:
Caution: Measure all voltages to insure applied voltage does not exceed the voltage rating of the unit.
Improper installation voids the warranty.
NEMA ENCLOSURE MOUNTING
Enclosure can be mounted directly on to a panel, frame, or other mounting surface through corner
mounting holes. Corner hole mounting is required to maintain the NEMA 4X rating.
Punch holes in the enclosure as necessary for conduit placement. Use liquidtight connectors
to maintain NEMA 4X rating.
DTK-2MHLP WIRING INSTRUCTIONS
1. Turn off the power at the circuit to be protected before beginning installation.
2. Connect ground to the ground terminal using a minimum of 14 AWG wire, make this conductor as short
as possible.
Ground Resistance Rule: Max ground resistance is 25 Ohms, 5 Ohms or less is optimum.
3. Connect the supply/field wiring to the UNPROTECTED side of the MB base. Connect the 1st pair to
4. Connect the equipment wiring to the PROTECTED side of the MB base. Connect the 1st pair to
5. Make sure the UNPROTECTED supply/field wiring and PROTECTED equipment wiring conductors do
not occupy the same space or conduits.
6. Make sure the wire distance from the base to protected equipment is a minimum of 3’ of conductor
length. This can be a coiled service loop if necessary.
MODULE INSTALLATION
Insert the module into the base making sure the polarizing keys in the block are aligned with the
notches cut into the edge card printed circuit board.
GROUND WIRE
14AWG MINIMUM
SUPPLY/FIELD WIRE
OUTPUT
INPUT
TO EQUIPMENT
UNPROTECTED
3' MINIMUM
SUPPLY/FIELD WIRE
INPUT OUTPUT
UNPROTECTED UNPROTECTED PROTECTED TO EQUIPMENT
3' MINIMUM
UNPROTECTED PROTECTED
Drawn By: B. Aycock 5-19-16 DITEK Technical Support Available 24/7 Doc # INT-100093-001
Approved By: R. Mitchell 7-5-16 1-888-472-6100 www.ditekcorp.com Part No. 191522 Rev. 2
11.3 Wiring, SPEC. 2.19

Wiring 2x14 AWG - 666596
Wiring 2x16 AWG - 666581
RoHS
M.R.
UNSHIELDED FIRE ALARM CABLE
ECOLGICAL
Telecom Cables
DESCRIPTION:
• Solid bare copper conductor 22, 18, 16 or 14 AWG APPLICATION:
• Semirigid PVC insulation Smoke detectors, burglar
• Insulated conductors are cabled in all constructions alarm, critical control circuits, power
• PVC jacket limited circuits.
• Rip-Cord
• FPLR Standard lengths of 1000 ft or 500 ft reels
or boxes.
SPECIFICATIONS
NEC 760 UL-1424 ETL Listed RoHS
Product Gauge Number of Insulation Jacket Overall Net Weight

Code Conductors Thickness Thickness Diameter Lb/kft
666551 22 4 0.075” 0.020” 0.137” 15
666556 18 2 0.010” 0.020” 0.146” 17
666558 18 4 0.010” 0.020” 0.183” 31
666559 18 6 0.010” 0.020” — 51
666560 18 8 0.010” 0.020” 0.265” 58
666591 16 2 0.010” 0.020” 0.165” 24
666593 16 4 0.010” 0.020” 0.208” 44
666596 14 2 0.013” 0.020” 0.205” 36
666597 14 4 0.013” 0.020” 0.260” 68
*All values are nominal,
and subject to Conductor Conductor Resistance Temperature Voltage
manufacturing tolerances. Gauge D.C. Maximum Rating Rating
Ù/kft @ 200C 0
AWG C
0 0 Non-Stocked item, subject to minimum
22 16.30 -20 C to 60 C 300 V quantity.
0 0
18 6.40 -20 C to 60 C 300 V
0 0
16 4.00 -20 C to 60 C 300 V
0 0
14 2.52 -20 C to 60 C 300 V
Available In:
#COND666558-61 - FIRE ALARM CABLE 4 WIRE 18 AWG (500 FT. ROLL)
#COND666558-61 - FIRE ALARM CABLE 4 WIRE 18 AWG (1,000 FT. ROLL)
Condumex Wire and Cable 2590 114th Street, Suite 200 - Grand Prairie, TX 75050 - (800) 925-9473
8-04
8
RoHS
M.R.
UNSHIELDED FIRE ALARM CABLE
ECOLGICAL
Telecom Cables
DESCRIPTION:
• Solid bare copper conductor 22, 18, 16 or 14 AWG APPLICATION:
• Semirigid PVC insulation Smoke detectors, burglar
• Insulated conductors are cabled in all constructions alarm, critical control circuits, power
• PVC jacket limited circuits.
• Rip-Cord
• FPLR Standard lengths of 1000 ft or 500 ft reels
or boxes.
SPECIFICATIONS
NEC 760 UL-1424 ETL Listed RoHS
Product Gauge Number of Insulation Jacket Overall Net Weight

Code Conductors Thickness Thickness Diameter Lb/kft
666551 22 4 0.075” 0.020” 0.137” 15
666556 18 2 0.010” 0.020” 0.146” 17
666558 18 4 0.010” 0.020” 0.183” 31
666559 18 6 0.010” 0.020” — 51
666560 18 8 0.010” 0.020” 0.265” 58
666591 16 2 0.010” 0.020” 0.165” 24
666593 16 4 0.010” 0.020” 0.208” 44
666596 14 2 0.013” 0.020” 0.205” 36
666597 14 4 0.013” 0.020” 0.260” 68
*All values are nominal,
and subject to Conductor Conductor Resistance Temperature Voltage
manufacturing tolerances. Gauge D.C. Maximum Rating Rating
Ù/kft @ 200C 0
AWG C
0 0 Non-Stocked item, subject to minimum
22 16.30 -20 C to 60 C 300 V quantity.
0 0
18 6.40 -20 C to 60 C 300 V
0 0
16 4.00 -20 C to 60 C 300 V
0 0
14 2.52 -20 C to 60 C 300 V
Available In:
#COND666558-61 - FIRE ALARM CABLE 4 WIRE 18 AWG (500 FT. ROLL)
#COND666558-61 - FIRE ALARM CABLE 4 WIRE 18 AWG (1,000 FT. ROLL)
Condumex Wire and Cable 2590 114th Street, Suite 200 - Grand Prairie, TX 75050 - (800) 925-9473
8-04
8
11.4 Boxes and Cover Plates, SPEC. 3.6

Red Boxes and Cover Plates Garvin 52181-RED
52171-RED
52C1-RED
SOLUTIONS
E L E C T R I C A L • L O W V O LTA G E • L I G H T I N G
Our Commitment to Your Success!
In ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER
GARVIN
On
Unique
Stock! Since
1892
Time!
WHO WE ARE...
• Family-owned manufacturer of UL Listed
electrical, low voltage and lighting
products with 120 years of industry
experience.
• We ARE a true MANUFACTURER!

We have complete control over design
and quality of our products. We stand
behind our products and guarantee
100% satisfaction. Painting Services Custom Length Cutting
• Our reach is International! We have plants

in the United States, China, India and
Mexico. We are widely recognized for
continually designing innovative, labor-
saving products that provide economical
solutions to common installation
problems! We also custom design and
manufacture products to your
specifications.
Custom Manufacturing Services Customized Solutions
• We manufacture and private label for

numerous industries. You may not know
our name, but you definitely know our
products! Our friendly, knowledgeable and
technically skilled staff understands your
needs and is ready to serve you.
Prefab Assemblies for Prefab Boxes, Covers,

Hanging and Support Devices and Connectors
Phone: 847-455-0188
Fax: 847-455-0334
sales@garvinindustries.com
73
847-455-0188 4” Square
FAX 847-455-0334
garvinindustries.com Junction Boxes
Boxes & Covers
Application: These electrical junction boxes are installed in

3-1/2” Deep with walls and ceilings where extra depth is needed for dimmers,
Conduit Knockouts cameras, speakers, strobes, signals and other electrical and
electronic devices.
Advantages: Garvin Industries’ labor-saving design elimi-

nates the need to awkwardly install boxes and extension
rings to accommodate deep devices.
Field Names: Extra deep 4S box, extra deep 1900 box,

extra deep 1900 electrical box, extra deep 1900 junction
box, conduit box, J-box, concentric box, conduit junction box,
outlet box, drywall mud box, speaker box, deep 1900 box,
52181-S 52181-SPKR
extra deep junction box, deep conduit box, deep outlet box,
52181-1/2SPKR 52181-3/4SPKR
extra deep fire alarm box, 1900 extra deep fire alarm box.
Material: Steel
52181-RED 52181-BLNK 52181-SVT

52181-OW Patent Pending
52181-SPKR IN USE 52181-3/4SPKR ON FORM

On Concrete Form
52181-OW INSTALLATION STEPS
Cut hole, insert box Snap in clips. Tighten screws for

tight fit on walls.
Part Side Knockouts Special Std.

Number Bottom Knockouts Features Special Features Pkg.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
52181-S (6) 1/2”, (6) 1/2”-3/4” Standard 1/2” and 3/4” concentric knockouts with 10-32 raised ground hump. 25
(2) 1/2” (2) 3/4” Box Style
52181-SPKR (4) 1/2”, (4) 3/4” Mounting tabs for Sealed, concrete tight. External tabs allow installer to nail/screw box 25
Raised Ground concrete forms to forms for stability during pour. Raised ground hump with screw.
52181-1/2-SPKR (8) 1/2” Mounting tabs for Sealed, concrete tight. External tabs allow installer to nail/screw box 10
52181-3/4-SPKR (8) 3/4” Mounting tabs for Sealed, concrete tight. External tabs allow installer to nail/screw box 10
52181-RED (6) 1/2”, (6) 1/2”-3/4” Fire alarm Painted red for dedicated fire alarm and life safety circuits 10
(2) 1/2”, (2) 3/4” red
52181-OW (8) 1/2”, (4) 1/2”-3/4” Old work clips Old work “cut in” box can be added to existing walls when deep 25
(3) 1/2”, (2) 1/2”-3/4” and plaster ears devices (speakers, strobes, etc.) are required to update a structure.
52181-BLNK Blank Side Blank Less all holes and knockouts. We will customize to your job 10
Blank Bottom Box requirements or blueprint.
52181-SVT (8) 1/2” & (4) 3/4” “Air-tight” Chicago plenum “air tight” knockouts 1/2” & 3/4” combination 10
(3) 1/2” & (2) 3/4” knockouts
40 Visit www.garvinindustries.com for blueprints and specification sheets.

74
847-455-0188 4” Square
FAX 847-455-0334
garvinindustries.com Junction Boxes
Boxes & Covers
Application: These 4” square boxes with conduit knockouts

2-1/8” Deep with are installed in walls or ceilings for lighting fixtures, switches,
Conduit Knockouts receptacles or other outlet devices. Square boxes are used
to bring power to a number of electrical devices where mul-
tiple conductor runs are split in two or more directions.
Advantages: Garvin Industries’ 4S Boxes can be surface

or flush mounted when multidirectional conduit runs are
necessary. Red painted boxes are also available to easily
distinguish fire alarm boxes.
Field Names: 4S box, 1900 box, 1900 electrical box, 1900

junction box, conduit box, J-box, concentric box, conduit
52171-RED 52171-SDA 52171-SDR 52171-1 junction box, outlet box, drywall mud box, plenum box, deep
Patent Pending
plenum box, 1900 plenum box, Chicago plenum box, 1900
deep box, deep 1900 box, 1900 deep plenum, 1900 plenum
deep.
Material: Steel
52171-1DR 52171-1-VT 52171-BLNK

Patent Pending
52171-SDA IN USE
Part Side Knockouts Box Std.

Number Bottom Knockouts Construction Similar Products or Special Features Pkg.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
52171-RED (6) 1/2”, (6) 1/2”-3/4” Welded Painted red for dedicated fire alarm and life safety circuits 25
(2) 1/2”, (2) 3/4”
52171-SDA Open with Mounting Tabs Welded Dual “backdoor” access allows for access to devices, wires and 25
& 8-32 Screws On Both Sides of Box wire nuts after they have been installed on plaster ring. Blank cover
encloses wires in box and attaches to back-side, tapped 8-32 ears.
52171-SDR (6) 1/2”, (6) 1/2”-3/4” Drawn Thomas & Betts Crouse Hinds TP438 25
(2) 1/2”, (2) 3/4” Hubbell Raco EGS Appleton
52171-1 (8) 1” Welded Thomas & Betts 52171-1 Crouse Hinds TP436 25
(2) 1/2”, (2) 3/4” Hubbell Raco 233 EGS Appleton 4SD1
52171-1DR (8) 1” Drawn For 1” conduit runs 25
(2) 1/2”, (2) 3/4”
52171-1-VT (8) 1” Drawn Chicago plenum “air tight” knockouts for 1” conduit runs 25
(3) 1/2”, (2) 3/4”
52171-BLNK Blank Side Drawn Tamper and vandal proof box less all holes & knockouts. 25
Blank Bottom Add only the knockouts you need, we customize solutions!
34 Visit www.garvinindustries.com for blueprints and specification sheets.

75
4” Square 847-455-0188
FAX 847-455-0334
Box Covers garvinindustries.com
Boxes & Covers

Application: These flat covers are used to cover box wiring
Flat Covers and provide a means for access when future conduit runs
are required.
Advantages: Garvin Industries’ flat covers have unique

mounting slots or captivated screws that allow quick access
to circuits so additional wiring can be pulled.
Field Names: 1900 cover, 4S cover, 4S blank cover, box

cover, box blank, blank plenum cover, 4S box cover, 4S ple-
num cover, Chicago plenum J box cover, junction box cover,
52C1 52C1-RED 52C1-GS 52C1-TOG vapor tight cover, 1900 blank, 1900 plenum blank.
Material: Steel
52C1-VT 52C1-VTRED 53C1-VT 52C6
52C1 IN USE
52C6-VTSS 629NG 52C1-OCT
Part Std.
Number Description Similar Products or Special Features Pkg.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
52C1 4” Square Blank Cover Thomas & Betts 52C1 Crouse Hinds TP472 50
Hubbell Raco 752 EGS Appleton 8465
52C1-RED 4” Square Blank Cover, Red Painted red for alarm and life safety circuits. 50
Hubbell Raco 911-8
52C1-GS 4” Square Blank Cover with Great for prefab boxes used with Garvin Industries’ dual access box! 50
10-32 Green Ground Screw Allows proper grounding of pre-installed devices on rings.
52C1-TOG 4” Square Blank Cover with Economical On/Off switch on 4” square flat cover. Great for HVAC and other 25
15 AMP Toggle Switch Installed appliances that require On/Off switching
52C1-VT 4” Square Blank, Gasketed Cover Thomas & Betts 52C1-VT Crouse Hinds TP850 25
with Captivated, 8-32 Box Screws Hubbell Raco 762 EGS Appleton
52C1-VTRED 4” Square Blank, Gasketed Cover with Painted red for alarm and life safety circuits. 25
Captivated, 8-32 Box Screws. Red Hubbell Raco 911-8
53C1-VT Double-Gasketed Flat Ring Creates “air tight” seal between existing Chicago plenum box and 25
extension ring being added.
52C6 4” Square Cover with Thomas & Betts 52C6 Crouse Hinds TP478 50
1/2” Knockout Hubbell Raco 753 EGS Appleton 8474
52C6-VTSS Stainless Steel Cover with Water resistant stainless steel gasketed cover with sealed 1/2” 50
1/2” Sealed Knockout conduit knockout. Great for damp locations or wash down areas.
629NG 4” Square Blank Cover with Flat blank steel cover, no gasket, steel plate only with captive 8-32 box screws. 50
Captivated 8-32 Box Screws
52C1-OCT 4” Square Cover with four Threaded 8-32 This conversion plate mounts on Octagon boxes and provides 4” square 25
Mounting Holes & Two Through Holes to mounting tabs for life safety and other low voltage devices.
Fit on 4” Octagon Boxes.
Visit www.garvinindustries.com for blueprints and specification sheets. 43

76
12. Material Processing and Handling Equipment
Content
11.1 CF Hand Chain Hoist SPEC 2.3.1
-Harrington CF Hand Chain Hoist (5 Ton)

11. Material Processing and Handling Equipment SPEC
2.3.1

CF Hand Chain Hoist Harrington -
CF Hand Chain Hoist
1⁄2 Through 5 Ton Capacity
Harrington CF hand chain hoists give you a practical alternative thanks to an economical design using
fewer parts for trouble-free service. Outstanding durability is due to a die-cast aluminum body and
high-strength, heat-treated main pinion shaft and load gear. Pre-lubricated ball bearings, precision
machined gears, and Weston-style load brake make lifting smooth and easy while allowing long service
and low maintenance.
Many Benefits from More Features:

• Experience exceptional strength with a thick die-cast
aluminum body.
• Handle tough demands with high-strength, heat-treated main
pinion shaft and load gear.
• Get positive braking action with Weston-style load brake
incorporating two moisture-resistant brake pads with four braking
surfaces.
• Minimize manual effort thanks to smooth running, pre-lubricated
ball bearings, and precision machined drive train components.
• Simplify maintenance with fewer parts and an
easy-to-work-on design.
Capabilities to Count On:

10 • 10-foot lift is standard, 15- and 20-foot lifts are also stocked;
nonstandard lifts and hand chain drops available as well.
• Grade 100 heat-treated manganese alloy load chain resists
abrasion and wear while minimizing chain weight.
• Forged and heat-treated alloy steel hooks are designed to open
slowly and not fracture under excessive loads.
• Test certificate verifies that every hoist has been factory load
tested to 125% of rated capacity, in accordance with ASME
B30.16 requirements.
Options: (See Pages 30–31)

• Chain container
• Corrosion-resistant chain
• Inspection hook
HARRINGTON MANUAL HOIST PRODUCTS
CF HAND CHAIN HOIST — DIMENSIONS

Cap. Product a b d e f g
(Tons) Code (in) (in) (ft) (in) (in) (in)
1⁄2 CF005 5.4 5.9 2.0 2.4

1.1
1 CF010 5.8 6.9 2.3 2.9
1 1⁄2 CF015 6.0
8.0 10
2.4 3.4 1.3 This distance will
2 CF020 5.8 2.3 2.3 1.4 be for 20ft (6.5 m)
3 CF030 9.4 2.7 1.7
6.0 2.4
5 CF050 13.5 4.5 1.8
11
1⁄2 – 1 1⁄2 Ton 2 – 3 Ton 5 Ton
CF HAND CHAIN HOIST — SPECIFICATIONS
Load Weight
Chain for
Pull to Diameter Shipping Additional
Headroom Std. Lift (mm) x Net Weight One Foot
Cap. Product C Lift Load Overhaul Chain Weight Approx. of Lift
(Tons) Code (in) (ft) (lbs) Ratio Fall Lines (lbs) (lbs) (lbs)
1⁄2 CF005 12.8 60 19 5.0 x 1 24 26 1.0

1 CF010 14.6 72 31 6.3 x 1 29 31 1.2 This distance will
1 1⁄2 CF015 17.3 84 41 7.1 x 1 40 42 1.4 be for 20ft (6.5 m)
10
2 CF020 20.1 80 63 6.3 x 2 47 49 1.8
3 CF030 23.2 81 7.1 x 2 62 66 2.1
92
5 CF050 24.4 134 7.1 x 3 82 86 2.9
Please Note: Special lengths of load and hand chain available upon request.
Weights are approximate.
APENDIX A
ROOF WARRANTY
APENDIX B
CATALOG NUMBER OF INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
Catalog Number of Installed Equipmen
Lighting System
Name of Product Catalog
Ceiling Fan Type F Hunter Dempsey 59242
Lumination LED RX General Electric RX610830MV
Lighting BLWP Lithonia Light GA 30012
Power System
GFCI Receptacle Leviton TS-111020-dp
20 Amp Receptacle Leviton GFNT2-I
Fire Alarm System

Fire Alarm Control & Mass
Silent Knight
Notification Panel
Radio Transmitter Monaco REV H07/07
Radio Transmitter and Interface Federal Signal C3 0718
Batteries Power Sonic Rev2: 08/20
Smoke Detector Silent Knight 350118
Low Frequency Sounder Base Silent Knight 351565
Operator Console Panel Silent Knight 156-3442-000
Mini Split System

LI018CI-180P432,
Mini Split Cooling System Lennox
LI018CO-180P432
Ceiling Exhaust Fan System

Ceiling Exhaust Fan GreenHeck 474680
Communication System
UTP Cable NEWLINK NEW-980634X
Single Gang QuickPort Leviton 41080-xxP
Module F type Nicle Plaed ICC 125268
Coaxial Cable MoCSY A6QS-BVV-BOX
Coaxial Type F Connector Multicom PPCEX6PLUS
APENDIX C
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE LOG
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE LOG
12 PLEX PHASE I
DATE DATE DATE DATE

EQUIPMENT MAINTENACE REQUIRED FREQUENCY
DONE 1 DONE 2 DONE 3 DONE 4
Every 3
Mini Split System Clean Filter
Months
Test UVRI Remote Once a
Interface month
Fire Alarm System:
Remote Interface Once a
Signal Opertaion Check
UVRI month
Once a
Baterry Inspection
month
DATE DATE DATE DATE

Every 3
Months
Interface month
Fire Alarm System:
Once a
Remote Interface Signal Opertaion Check
month
UVRI
Once a
Baterry Inspection
month
DATE DATE DATE DATE

Every 3
Months
Interface month
Fire Alarm System:
Once a
Remote Interface Signal Opertaion Check
month
UVRI
Once a
Baterry Inspection
month
APENDIX D
WARRANTIES
Terms and Conditions for Sale of Products and Services
Form ES 104 (Rev. 4) Section 5
5. Warranty
5.1 Seller warrants that Products shall be delivered free from defects in material, workmanship and title and that Services shall
be performed in a competent, diligent manner in accordance with any mutually agreed specifications.
5.2 The warranty for Products shall expire one (1) year from first use or eighteen (18) months from delivery, whichever occurs
first, except that software is warranted for ninety (90) days from delivery. The warranty for Services shall expire one (1) year
after performance of the Service, except that software-related Services are warranted for ninety (90) days.
5.3 If Products or Services do not meet the above warranties, Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing prior to expiration of
the warranty period. Seller shall (i) at its option, repair or replace defective Products and (ii) re-perform defective Services. If
despite Seller’s reasonable efforts, a non-conforming Product cannot be repaired or replaced, or non-conforming Services
cannot be re-performed, Seller shall refund or credit monies paid by Buyer for such non-conforming Products and
Services. Warranty repair, replacement or re-performance by Seller shall not extend or renew the applicable warranty
period. Buyer shall obtain Seller’s agreement on the specifications of any tests it plans to conduct to determine whether a non-
conformance exists.
5.4 Buyer shall bear the costs of access for Seller’s remedial warranty efforts (including removal and replacement of systems,
structures or other parts of Buyer’s facility), de-installation, decontamination, re-installation and transportation of defective
Products to Seller and back to Buyer.
5.5 The warranties and remedies are conditioned upon (a) proper storage, installation, use, operation, and maintenance of
Products, (b) Buyer keeping accurate and complete records of operation and maintenance during the warranty period and
providing Seller access to those records, and (c) modification or repair of Products or Services only as authorized by Seller in
writing. Failure to meet any such conditions renders the warranty null and void. Seller is not responsible for normal wear and
tear.
5.6 This Article 5 provides the exclusive remedies for all claims based on failure of or defect in Products or Services, regardless
of when the failure or defect arises, and whether a claim, however described, is based on contract, warranty, indemnity,
tort/extra-contractual liability (including negligence), strict liability or otherwise. The warranties provided in this Article 5 are
exclusive and are in lieu of all other warranties, conditions and guarantees whether written, oral, implied or statutory. NO
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY, OR WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES.
Limited Lifetime Warranty
Hunter Fan Company grants this limited warranty to the original purchaser of this • ENERGY STAR® Rated Light Kits – Three-Year Limited Warranty
Hunter ceiling fan. This document can be found online at www.HunterFan.com. If your ENERGY STAR rated light kit (not including glass components)
Thank you for choosing Hunter! fails at any time within three years of the date of purchase due to a defect
in material or workmanship, as determined solely by Hunter, Hunter will
How Can Warranty Service Be Obtained? provide a replacement light kit free of charge.*
Proof of purchase is required when requesting warranty service. The original * If no replacement product/part can be provided for your fan, we will provide a comparable
purchaser must present a sales receipt or other document that establishes proof of or superior replacement product/part at the sole discretion of Hunter.
purchase. Hunter, at its sole discretion, may accept a gift receipt. To obtain service,
contact Hunter Fan Company online or by phone. What Does This Warranty NOT Cover?
www.HunterFan.com/Support/Contact-Us/ Labor Excluded. This warranty does not cover any costs or fees associated with the
1-888-830-1326 labor (including electrician’s fees) required to install, remove, or replace a fan or any
Please do not ship your fan or any fan parts to Hunter. Delivery will be refused. fan parts.
What Does This Warranty Cover? There is no warranty for light bulbs (except where otherwise noted); remote control
batteries; fans purchased or installed outside the United States; fans owned by
someone other than the original purchaser; fans for which proof of purchase has not
Motor – Limited Lifetime Warranty been established; fans purchased from an unauthorized dealer; ordinary wear and
If any part of your ceiling fan motor fails during your ownership of the fan due to tear; minor cosmetic blemishes; refurbished fans; and fans that are damaged due to
a defect in material or workmanship, as determined solely by Hunter, Hunter will any of the following: improper installation, misuse, abuse, improper care, failure to
provide you with a replacement fan free of charge.* The foregoing limited warranty follow Hunter instructions, accidental damage caused by the fan owner or related
applies only to the motor itself and does not apply to electronic controls – such parties, modifications to the fan, improper or incorrectly performed maintenance or
as remote control transmitters, remote control receivers, or capacitors – used in repair, improper voltage supply or power surge, use of improper parts or accessories,
conjunction with the motor. Such electronic control items are included in the one- failure to provide maintenance to the fan, or acts of God (e.g. flood).
year limited warranty below.
ORIGINAL PURCHASER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR A CLAIM OF ANY
Other – One-Year Limited Warranty KIND WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT SHALL BE THE REMEDIES SET FORTH
HEREIN. HUNTER FAN COMPANY IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
Except as otherwise indicated throughout this warranty, if any part of your Hunter INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, DUE TO PRODUCT FAILURE, WHETHER ARISING OUT OF
ceiling fan fails at any time within one year of the date of purchase due to a defect BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE. Some States do
in material or workmanship, as determined solely by Hunter, Hunter will provide a not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the
replacement part free of charge.* above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
Light Kits – Warranty May Vary ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
Light kits are included in the one-year limited warranty. However, you may qualify for PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT ARE LIMITED IN
additional warranty coverage if your fan includes one of the following: DURATION TO THE PERIOD OF COVERAGE OF THE APPLICABLE LIMITED
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. Some States do not allow limitations on how long
• LED Light Kits – Three-Year Limited Warranty an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
If your LED light kit module (not including glass components) or LED bulb
fails at any time within three years of the date of purchase due to a defect in How Does State Law Affect Warranty Coverage?
material or workmanship, as determined solely by Hunter, Hunter will
provide a replacement part free of charge.* This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary
from state to state.
MA500-01 • 07/15/15 • Hunter Fan Company

Nela Park
1975 Noble Road
East Cleveland, OH 44112
USA
Lumination® LED Luminaires Warranty

IND599
Five-Year Limited Warranty effective 08/01/20
Supersedes IND270 (03/01/16)
Applies to Lumination® LED Luminaires purchased from Current between August 1, 2020, and the date on which this Limited Warranty
document is later superseded.
WARRANTY: Subject to the terms and conditions specified in this Limited Warranty, Current Lighting Solutions, LLC (‘Current’), warrants
that Lumination® LED luminaires (“Product”) purchased directly from Current will be free from defects in material and workmanship
until the earlier of (i) five (5) years from the date of manufacture, and (ii) 22,000 hours of operation. Current does not warrant the
photoelectric controls, which are covered by the applicable warranty (if any) of the company that manufactured the photoelectric
controls.
REMEDY: If a Product fails to meet the warranty set forth above, then Current will, at its option, either (i) repair the defective Product, (ii)
provide a free replacement Product or replacement parts, F.O.B. Current’s warehouse, or (iii) refund the purchase price paid to Current
for the Product or replacement parts. Any replacement Product or part will be comparable in function, but may not be identical to the
original. The replacement or repaired Product is warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period. Current is not responsible
for labor and other costs associated with removal or reinstallation.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS: This Limited Warranty is VOID if Purchaser or the user fails to comply with any applicable instructions and
recommendations of Current; if any components are replaced with components of other manufacturers; or if the Product is operated
outside the specified electrical values or is subject to abnormal use or stress, including under/over voltage conditions, excessive
switching cycles, and operation in environmental conditions (e.g., ambient temperature) outside normal specified operating range.
Current shall not be responsible for any failure of Products that result from external causes, including, but not limited to, acts of God;
power surges that exceed product specification; improper power supply; fault or negligence of the Purchaser or user; improper or
unauthorized use, installation, handling, storage, maintenance, alteration or service; any abuse, misuse, abnormal use or use in violation
of any applicable standard, code or instructions for use in installations including those contained in the latest National Electrical Code
(NEC), the Standards for Safety of Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL), Standards for the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), in
Canada, the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Europe (CE), Australia (C-Tick); or any cause other than a defect in the material or
workmanship of the Product itself. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Limited Warranty, the LED module of the Product
shall not be deemed to fail to meet the warranties above unless ten percent (10%) or more of the LEDs in the module do not light. This
limited warranty extends only to Purchaser, but Current will honor, under the terms of this Limited Warranty, valid warranty claims by
Purchaser arising from a failure to meet the above warranty when the Product has been resold in new condition and used only by the
original end user.
HOW TO MAKE A WARRANTY CLAIM: Current must issue a Return Material Authorization (RMA#) for all requests for warranty review.
To make a warranty claim, retain the failed Products and notify your Current sales or customer service representative in writing within
thirty (30) days of the failure. After contacting Current and receiving an RMA number, Purchaser shall promptly return the Product after
receiving instructions regarding if, when, and where to ship the Product. The Product must be returned within 10 days of receiving the
RMA number, and the shipping box must be clearly marked with RMA number. Failure to follow this procedure shall void this Limited
Warranty. Current reserves the right to examine all failed Product to determine the cause of failure and patterns of usage and shall be
the sole judge as to whether any Product is defective and covered under this Limited Warranty.
LIMITS OF LIABILITY: THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY CONSTITUTES THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REMEDY
OF THE PURCHASER AND THE SOLE LIABILITY OF CURRENT FOR THE SPECIFIED LED LUMINAIRES AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN, ORAL, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS MADE OR IS TO BE IMPLIED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CURRENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY OTHER COSTS OR DAMAGES
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
© 2021 Current Lighting Solutions, LLC. All rights reserved. GE is a trademark of the General Electric Company and is used under license.
© 2020 Current Lighting Solutions, LLC | 1975 Noble Road | East Cleveland, OH 44112 | USA
P.O. Box 410
Schofield, WI 54476
Phone: 715.359.6171
www.greenheck.com
Warranty Statement for

Centrifugal Ceiling and Cabinet Exhaust – SP and CSP
Greenheck Fan Corporation warrants its SP/CSP products to be free of any defect in material or
workmanship for a period of three years from the date of shipment. In the event of such a defect
during the warranty period, Greenheck Fan Corporation agrees, at its option, to either repair or
replace the defective product free of charge.
This warranty runs to the original purchaser of such SP/CSP products for a period of three years
from the date of shipment. Any product repaired or replaced under this warranty will, itself, be
warranted only for the remainder of the warranty period of the original product being repaired or
replaced.
All light bulbs are excluded under this limited warranty. Greenheck Fan Corporation is not
responsible for any removal, installation, or transportation cost.
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to

change specifications without notice.
Centrifugal Ceiling and Cabinet Exhaust SP and CSP (12/12) Page 1 of 1

Copyright © 2012 Greenheck Fan Corporation
CVM-C10
6.- MAINTENANCE AND TECHNICAL SERVICE
In the case of any query in relation to unit operation or malfunction, please contact the
CIRCUTOR, SA Technical Support Service.
Technical Assistance Service

Vial Sant Jordi, s/n, 08232 - Viladecavalls (Barcelona)
Tel: 902 449 459 ( España) / +34 937 452 919 (outside of Spain)
email: sat@circutor.es
7.- GUARANTEE
CIRCUTOR guarantees its products against any manufacturing defect for two years after the
delivery of the units.
CIRCUTOR will repair or replace any defective factory product returned during the guarantee
period.
• No returns will be accepted and no unit will be repaired or replaced if it is not ac-
companied by a report indicating the defect detected or the reason for the return.
•The guarantee will be void if the units has been improperly used or the stora-
ge, installation and maintenance instructions listed in this manual have not been
followed. “Improper usage” is defined as any operating or storage condition con-
trary to the national electrical code or that surpasses the limits indicated in the
technical and environmental features of this manual.
• CIRCUTOR accepts no liability due to the possible damage to the unit or other
parts of the installation, nor will it cover any possible sanctions derived from a pos-
sible failure, improper installation or “improper usage” of the unit. Consequently,
this guarantee does not apply to failures occurring in the following cases:
- Overvoltages and/or electrical disturbances in the supply;
- Water, if the product does not have the appropriate IP classification;
- Poor ventilation and/or excessive temperatures;
- Improper installation and/or lack of maintenance;
- Buyer repairs or modifications without the manufacturer’s authorisation.
from state to state.
Garantía limitada de por vida This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary
provide a replacement part free of charge.*
Hunter Fan Company otorga la siguiente garantía limitada al comprador original de este ventilador vidrio) falla en cualquier momento durante los siguientes tres años a partir la fecha How Does State Law Affect Warranty Coverage? in material or workmanship, as determined solely by Hunter, Hunter will
para techo marca Hunter: Este documento puede ser encontrado en Internet en de compra, debido a un defecto en los materiales o la mano de obra, conforme Hunter fails at any time within three years of the date of purchase due to a defect
www.HunterFan.com. ¡Gracias por elegir Hunter! lo determine a su arbitrio, Hunter le proporcionará un reemplazo de la pieza sin cargo the above limitation may not apply to you.
If your LED light kit module (not including glass components) or LED bulb
para usted.* ABOVE. Some States do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so
• LED Light Kits — Three-Year Limited Warranty
¿Cómo puede obtenerse un servicio cubierto en la garantía? * Si no le podemos brindar un producto o pieza de reemplazo igual para su ventilador, le proporcionaremos PERIOD OF COVERAGE OF THE APPLICABLE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH additional warranty coverage if your fan includes one of the following:
un producto o pieza de reemplazo comparable o superior, conforme el arbitrio de Hunter. PURPOSE APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE Light kits are included in the one-year limited warranty. However, you may qualify for
Se requiere un comprobante de compra cuando solicite el servicio cubierto en la garantía. El ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR Light Kits — Warranty May Vary
comprador original debe presentar un recibo de compra u otro documento que compruebe su
compra. Hunter, a su arbitrio, puede aceptar un recibo de regalo. Para obtener servicio, póngase ¿Qué es lo que NO cubre esta garantía? above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. free of charge.*
en contacto con Hunter Fan Company por internet o por teléfono. not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the or workmanship, as determined solely by Hunter, Hunter will provide a replacement part
La mano de obra está excluida. Esta garantía no cubre ningún costo u honorarios asociados con BREACH OF WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE. Some States do
www.HunterFan.com/Support/Contact-Us/ la mano de obra (incluyendo los honorarios del electricista) requeridos para instalar, retirar o INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, DUE TO PRODUCT FAILURE, WHETHER ARISING OUT OF
fan fails at any time within one year of the date of purchase due to a defect in material
1-888-830-1326 reemplazar un ventilador o cualquier pieza del mismo. HEREIN. HUNTER FAN COMPANY IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
Except as otherwise indicated throughout this warranty, if any part of your Hunter ceiling
Por favor no envíe a Hunter su ventilador ni ninguna de sus partes. Le entrega será rechazada.
Other — One-Year Limited Warranty
No hay garantía para lámparas/bombillas (excepto si se especifica lo contrario); las baterías KIND WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT SHALL BE THE REMEDIES SET FORTH
del control remoto; los ventiladores comprados o instalados fuera de los Estados Unidos; ORIGINAL PURCHASER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR A CLAIM OF ANY motor. Such electronic control items are included in the one-year limited warranty below.
¿Qué es lo que cubre esta garantía? los ventiladores propiedad de otra persona distinta al comprador original; los ventiladores maintenance to the fan, or acts of God (e.g. flood). transmitters, remote control receivers, or capacitors – used in conjunction with the
cuyo comprobante de compra no haya sido presentado; los ventiladores comprados en un voltage supply or power surge, use of improper parts or accessories, failure to provide to the motor itself and does not apply to electronic controls – such as remote control
Motor — Garantía limitada de por vida distribuidor no autorizado; el desgaste por uso normal; imperfecciones cosméticas menores; to the fan, improper or incorrectly performed maintenance or repair, improper you with a replacement fan free of charge.* The foregoing limited warranty applies only
Si cualquier pieza de su ventilador para techo Hunter falla durante el tiempo que el ventilador ventiladores remanufacturados; y aquellos ventiladores que hayan sido dañados debido a instructions, accidental damage caused by the fan owner or related parties, modifications defect in material or workmanship, as determined solely by Hunter, Hunter will provide
sea de su propiedad, debido a un defecto en el material o en la mano de obra, conforme Hunter cualquiera de las siguientes causas: instalación inapropiada, mal uso, abuso, falta de cuidado, no following: improper installation, misuse, abuse, improper care, failure to follow Hunter If any part of your ceiling fan motor fails during your ownership of the fan due to a
lo determine a su arbitrio, le proporcionaremos un ventilador de remplazo sin costo para usted.* seguir las instrucciones de Hunter, daño accidental ocasionado por el propietario o personas cosmetic blemishes; refurbished fans; and fans that are damaged due to any of the Motor — Limited Lifetime Warranty
La garantía limitada anterior sólo aplica al motor y no aplica a controles electrónicos como relacionadas, modificaciones al ventilador, mantenimiento o reparación realizados inadecuada established; fans purchased from an unauthorized dealer; ordinary wear and tear; minor
trasmisores y receptores de control remoto, o los capacitores utilizados junto con el motor. Tales o incorrectamente, suministro de voltaje incorrecto o sobrecargas de energía, uso de partes o other than the original purchaser; fans for which proof of purchase has not been What Does This Warranty Cover?
controles electrónicos están incluidos en la garantía limitada de un año señalada abajo. accesorios inapropiados, no dar mantenimiento al ventilador, o desastres naturales (ej. inundación). batteries; fans purchased or installed outside the United States; fans owned by someone
Otros — Garantía limitada por un año LOS REMEDIOS ÚNICOS Y EXCLUSIVOS DEL COMPRADOR ORIGINAL PARA RECLAMOS There is no warranty for light bulbs (except where otherwise noted); remote control Please do not ship your fan or any fan parts to Hunter. Delivery will be refused.
A menos que se indique de otra manera a lo largo de esta garantía, si cualquier pieza de su DE CUALQUIER CLASE CON RESPECTO A ESTE PRODUCTO DEBEN SER LOS ESTABLECIDOS (including electrician’s fees) required to install, remove, or replace a fan or any fan parts.
ventilador de techo Hunter falla en cualquier momento durante el primer año desde la fecha de EN ESTE DOCUMENTO. HUNTER FAN COMPANY NO ES RESPONSABLE POR DAÑOS Labor Excluded. This warranty does not cover any costs or fees associated with the labor
1-888-830-1326
compra, debido a un defecto en los materiales o la mano de obra, conforme Hunter lo determine a EMERGENTES O INCIDENTALES, DEBIDO A LA FALLA DEL PRODUCTO, YA SEA QUE SURJA DE www.HunterFan.com/Support/Contact-Us/
su arbitrio, Hunter le proporcionará un reemplazo de la pieza sin cargo para usted.* UNA INFRACCIÓN A LA GARANTÍA, UNA INFRACCIÓN DEL CONTRATO O POR CUALQUIER Fan Company online or by phone.
OTRA CAUSA. Algunos estados no permiten la exclusión ni limitación de daños incidentales ni
What Does This Warranty NOT Cover?
Conjuntos de lámparas — La garantía puede variar emergentes, así que las limitaciones o exclusiones anteriores pueden no aplicarse a usted.
Hunter, at its sole discretion, may accept a gift receipt. To obtain service, contact Hunter
Los conjuntos de lámparas están incluidos en la garantía limitada de un año. Sin embargo, quizá must present a sales receipt or other document that establishes proof of purchase.
califique para una cobertura de garantía adicional si su ventilador incluye alguno de los siguientes CUALQUIER GARANTÍA IMPLÍCITA DE COMERCIABILIDAD O IDONEIDAD PARA UN comparable or superior replacement product/part at the sole discretion of Hunter. Proof of purchase is required when requesting warranty service. The original purchaser
elementos: PROPÓSITO EN PARTICULAR APLICABLE A ESTE PRODUCTO ESTÁ LIMITADA POR LA * If no replacement product/part can be provided for your fan, we will provide a
DURACIÓN DEL PERIODO DE COBERTURA DE LAS GARANTÍAS LIMITADAS APLICABLES How Can Warranty Service Be Obtained?
• Conjunto de lámparas LED — Garantía limitada de tres años ESTABLECIDAS ANTERIORMENTE. Algunos estados no permiten limitaciones sobre la duración
provide a replacement light kit free of charge.*
Si su módulo de conjunto de lámparas LED (no incluye componentes de vidrio) o de una garantía implícita, de modo que la limitación antes mencionada puede no aplicarse a usted.
in material or workmanship, as determined solely by Hunter, Hunter will
si la lámpara LED falla en cualquier momento durante los siguientes tres años a fails at any time within three years of the date of purchase due to a defect Thank you for choosing Hunter!
partir la fecha de compra, debido a un defecto en los materiales o la mano de obra, If your ENERGY STAR rated light kit (not including glass components) Hunter ceiling fan. This document can be found at www.HunterFan.com.
conforme Hunter lo determine a su arbitrio, Hunter le proporcionará un reemplazo ¿Cómo afecta la ley estatal a la cobertura de la garantía? • ENERGY STAR® Rated Light Kits — Three-Year Limited Warranty Hunter Fan Company grants this limited warranty to the original purchaser of this
de la pieza sin cargo para usted.*
Esta garantía le da dos derechos legales específicos. También usted puede tener otros derechos
• Conjunto de lámparas certificadas ENERGY STAR® — Garantía limitada de tres años que varían de un estado a otro.
Si su conjunto de lámparas certificadas ENERGY STAR® (no incluye componentes de
Limited Lifetime Warranty
©2016 Hunter Fan Co.
59242 www.HunterFan.com 1.888.830.1326

59241
Dempsey Collection
Modelos Para asistencia, llame al 1-888-830-1326. Owner’s Guide and Installation Manual
A LA DISTRIBUIDORA
NO REGRESE ESTE PRODUCTO
Si faltan partes,
IMPORTANT!
Lugar de compra
Read and Save These Instructions
______________________________
Fecha de compra The information below will make

______________________________ communication MUCH easier
should you ever need to contact
English
Número de modelo customer service.

______________________________
servicio al cliente. ______________________________

de que necesite contactar con el Model Number
medida la comunicación en caso
continuación facilitará en gran ______________________________
Date Purchased
Español
La información que se entreta a
Lea y guarde estas instrucciones ______________________________
Where Purchased
If parts are missing,

¡IMPORTANTE!
DO NOT RETURN THIS ITEM
TO THE STORE! Models
Manual del propietario y Manual de instalación For assistance call 1-888-830-1326. 59241
59242
1.888.830.1326 www.HunterFan.com
©2016 Hunter Fan Co.

Dempsey Collection
!
Limited Warranty
This product is subject to and covered by a limited warranty, a!copy!of!which!
can!be!found!at!www.fedsig.com/SSG9Warranty. A copy of this limited warranty
can also be obtained by written request to Federal Signal Corporation, 2645
Federal Signal Drive, University Park, IL 60484, email to info@fedsig.com or
call +1 708-534-3400.
This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied,

contractual or statutory, including, but not limited to the warranty of
merchantability, warranty of fitness for a particular purpose and any warranty
against failure of its essential purpose.
2645 Federal Signal Drive

University Park, Illinois 60484-3617
www.fedsig.com
Customer Support 800-548-7229 • +1 708 534-3400

Technical Support 800-524-3021 • +1 708 534-3400
All products indicated are trademarks of Federal Signal Corporation.

All other product names or trademarks are properties of their respective owners.
!
2!
APENDIX E
POINTS OF CONTACT FOR WARRANTY CALLS
 Yeymi Donaire_______________
ETERNA S.A de C.V
Celphone Number: (+504) 9903 2327
Email: eternascab@eterna.hn
 Osvaldo Munguía
ETERNA S.A de C.V
Celphone Number: (+504) 3394 3217
Email: omunguía@eterna.hn
APENDIX F
Door Access Code
 Electric & Communication Room 1st Floor
C3789X
 Electric & Communication Room 2nd Floor
C2567X
 Mechanical Room 1st Floor
C4790X
 Mechanical Room 2nd Floor
C2790X
 For Unaccompanied Rooms
Request the unique code of room doors to FLUOR Staff on charge to room’s
assignment.
12 Plex Housing
Phase I
Operation &
Maintenance
Manuals
Eterna S.A de C.V
Soto Cano Air Base
Honduras, Central America
May 2021

12 Plex O&m (Definitive Edition)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

12 Plex O&m (Definitive Edition)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

12 Plex Housing

Eterna S.A de C.V

Soto Cano Air Base

Honduras, Central America

Cover Page ...................................................................................................................................... 1

2. Division 08- Section 08 71 00- Door Hardware ..................................................................... 9

3. Division 09- Finishes ................................................................................................................ 41

Gypsum Board and Cementitious Board Maintenance.............................................. 42

4. Division 10 28 13 – Toilet Accessories .................................................................................. 73

4.1 Paper Towel Dispenser, SPEC 2.2.10 .................................................................... 74

5. Division 21 – Fire Suppression System ................................................................................ 90

Operation and Maintenance Manual: Fire Suppression System .............................91

6. Division 22 – Plumbing.......................................................................................................... 100

7. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning ................................................. 158

7.1 Service Labeling....................................................................................................... 159

8. Division 26 – Electrical ........................................................................................................... 219

8. A Schedule of Operation and Maintenance Data Package for

8. B Division 26 12 19.10- Three Phase Pad Mounted Transformer ................................... 226

9. Division 27 – Communications .............................................................................................. 436

9.1 Jack Connector, SPEC 2.5.1 ................................................................................. 437

10.1 Fire Alarm Control Unit and Mass Notification Control

12. Appendixes ……………………………………………………………………………..769

Name of Product Brand Code Item

1st PLAN- DOOR LOCATION

2nd PLAN- DOOR LOCATION

Name of Product Brand Code Item

Hinges 36 4.5" x 4.5" FBB199 NRP Satin SS STANLEY US32D

Hinges 6 4.5" x 4.5" FBB199 NRP Satin SS STANLEY US32D

Hinges 12 4.5" x 4.5" FBB199 NRP Satin SS STANLEY US32D

Hinges 18 4.5" x 4.5" FBB179 Satin chrome plated STANLEY US26D

Hinges 18 4.5" x 4.5" FBB179 Satin chrome plated STANLEY US26D

Name of Product Brand Code Item

5 KNUCKLE FULL MORTISE HINGES

STANLEY ARCHITECTURAL HIARDWARE

Standard Weight Ball Bearing

• For medium weight doors of average frequency

Name of Product Brand Code Item

8100 For doors of rooms

Certification and Testing

3⅛" 313⁄16" 3¼"

Exterior Exterior Side Interior Mortise Mortise Side

Kaba Access & Data Systems Americas

Easy to Suitable for Limited lifetime Total code

9K Series Cylindrical Lock

The premium lock for quality, performance, and security.

BEST: Setting the Standard for Security

9K Series Cylindrical Lock Specifications Features

626: Satin Chrome 690: Dark Bronze

Name of Product Brand Code Item

Item #4, Spec 2.2.6

QDC100 Door Closers

Versatility and durability for a wide variety of

Trusted experts. Proven reliability. Simply STANLEY Commercial Hardware.

Reliable strength and performance in an

QDC100 Extra Heavy Duty Exit Device Specifications Features

689: Painted 690: Painted 696: Painted Satin

Name of Product Brand Code Item

Rockwood K1050 - Metal Kick Plate - .050" Thick

8" x 34" for Kick Plate WEIGHT:

NOTE: Finishes US26/625 and US26D/626 are only available up to 24"H.

ASSA ABLOY Opening Solutions

Name of Product Brand Code Item

ADA Compliant Bumper Seal Threshold Notes:

• Excellent flexibility and memory